september 7, 2021 gsp official update package & 2022

September 7, 2021 GSP Official Update Package & 2022 Standard Specifications Publication The following contains the GSPs that consist of the September 7, 2021 Update Package. Only the changed documents are included in this package and any unchanged sections from the last update are not included. To view all GSPs, please visit our website: www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/SpecificationsAmendmentsGSPs.htm. The package is set up with three parts. The first part is a memo containing a listing of the revisions to the Standard Specifications that are included in the 2022 publication, available for download at: https://wsdot.wa.gov/Publications/Manuals/M41-10.htm. The second part is an itemized list of the GSP file names, file types, and a brief description of the change. The third part is a memo detailing the changes in the GSPs, followed by track changes versions of the indexes and GSPs that are being updated. Please use the PDF bookmarks to navigate around this update package electronically. If you choose to print this package, we suggest printing double sided to save paper and it is formatted to start new sub-sections on the right hand page.

http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/SpecificationsAmendmentsGSPs.htm

https://wsdot.wa.gov/Publications/Manuals/M41-10.htm

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

2022 Standard Specifications Updates

September 7, 2021 Page 1 of 18 MLB:rah

Please note: The following is a brief description of the latest updates that are being published in the 2022 Standard Specifications. The updated Sections should be reviewed in depth to become completely knowledgeable of the full extent of the revisions. Any Sections not listed below are unchanged from the 2021 Standard Specifications. The 2022 Standard Specifications Book is effective for all WSDOT projects advertised on or after Tuesday, September 7, 2021. GENERAL Throughout the Standard Specification the term Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) has been changed to the new Department of Ecology term Safety Data Sheet (SDS). Where possible, terms such as workmanship, deadman, man-made, craftman, etc. have been modified to an appropriate alternative. Requirements for submittal of paper copies is changed to electronic submittals wherever possible. DIVISION 1 – General Requirements 1-01.2(1) Associations and Miscellaneous Acronym added for Post Tensioning Institute. 1-01.3 Definitions Definitions added for Certified Claim and Written Determination. 1-01.4 Interpretations Titles & Headings moved from definitions into this new Section 1-01.4 Interpretations, which further defines how to generally interpret language in the Contract Documents. 1-02.4(2) Subsurface Information Subsurface Information is revised for clarity. 1-02.5 Proposal Forms Proposal Forms is revised to make electronic bidding the default, at the request of the bidder a physical form will be made available. 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal This revision incorporates GSP 1-02.9.OPT2.GR1 into the 2022 book, removing Trns Port Expedite software (no longer used). This GSP is also deleted as part of this update package. 1-03.3 Execution of Contract Updates to this section require all Contract Documents to be provided electronically. 1-04.4 Changes The second to last paragraph is moved from Section 1-04.5 paragraph 1 and revised. 1-04.5 Procedure and Protest by the Contractor Paragraph 1 is deleted (moved to 1-04.4 and revised). Oral Orders language is moved to a new Section. A Written Determination will be issued by the Engineer. The Contractor has 14 days to protest anything in a change order or Written Determination. (prior language was “immediately”). Adds language for Engineer to extend 14 days with



Engineer’s approval. Deletes item #2b. Give Contractor one opportunity to correct their supplemental information when the Engineer deems in insufficient to evaluate the protest. 1-04.5(1) Disputes This is a new Section, the content of which was moved from 1-09.11(1). This covers the full DRB process. Sections are reorganized and revised. 1-04.7 Differing Site Conditions (Changed Conditions) Section 1-04.7 has added language to require Section 1-04.5 process be followed for differing site conditions and has other minor editorial comments. 1-05.1 Authority of the Engineer The first paragraph is revised. 1-05.1(1) Oral Orders This new section is added, moving language from 1-04 and further clarifying expectations for oral orders. 1-05.1(2) Requests for Information (RFI) This new section is added and formalizes the common practice of Contractor’s requesting additional or clarifications for Contract information from the Engineer. The new section also distinguishes what information is requested and how it may be related to a request for a change to the Contract. 1-05.2 Authority of Assistant Inspectors Revised for clarity. 1-05.3 Working Drawings This section is revised to remove the requirement to submit paper copies of Working Drawings. 1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work Revised for clarity. 1-05.7(1) Request for Change for Defective or Unauthorized Work This new Section is added to clarify how the RFI/RFC process fits with the rejection of unauthorized work. 1-05.13(1) Emergency Contact List This revision designates the Emergency Contact List submittal as a Type 1 Working Drawing. 1-05.15 Methods of Serving Notices This section is revised to allow electronic delivery. 1-06.1(3) Aggregate Source Approval (ASA) Database This section is revised to clarify information in relation to ASA database and toxicity. 1-06.1(4) Fabrication Inspection Expense These revisions increase Fabrication Expense reimbursement and adds anchor cable and components to the allowable items eligible for reimbursement of expenses to the State.



1-07.1 Laws to be Observed This revision incorporates GSP 1-07.1.OPT5.GR1 into the 2022 book. This GSP is also deleted as part of this update package. 1-07.5(2) State Department of Fish and Wildlife The last paragraph is deleted. 1-07.5(3) State Department of Ecology This revision incorporates GSP 1-07.5(3).OPT3.GR1 into the 2022 book. This GSP is also deleted as part of this update package. 1-07.5(7) U.S. Environmental Protection Agency This new section is added to address submittal of waste manifests and specifies the use of the e-Manifest system which furthers the use of electronic documents and replaces paper documents. 1-07.14 Responsibility for Damage This section is revised to allow for transmittal and management of claims to the Contractor electronically. 1-07.16(5) Wells This revision incorporates GSP 1-07.16.OPT1.GR1 into a new section for Wells. This GSP is also deleted as part of this update package. 1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance This section is reorganized. Changes to content include requiring all insurance policies to be marked with identifying information, allowance of electronic delivery processes and other minor changes. 1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic This revision incorporates GSP 1-07.23(1).OPT7.GR1 into the 2022 book and clarifies barrier offsets. The changes help clarify requirements for when barrier needs to be anchored for the various applications (HMA, PCCP or Bridge Deck), noting applicable standard plans. This GSP is also deleted as part of this update package. 1-07.23(3) Work Zone Clear Zone This new Section is added and incorporates GSP 1-07.23(1).OPT2.GR1 into the 2022 book. This GSP is also deleted as part of this update package. 1-08.3(2)A Type A Progress Schedule, 1-08.3(2)B Type B Progress Schedule, & 1-08.3(3) Schedule Updates The revisions to these sections remove the requirement to submit 5 copies of the progress schedule. 1-08.5 Time for Completion The revisions to this section add June 19th as a holiday and clarifies the procedure the Engineer will follow to submit working day statements (and the procedure the Contractor must follow to protest them). These revisions also remove the designation that certified payrolls are only required for Federal Projects, as all projects now require certified payrolls.



1-08.6 Suspension of Work The revisions to this section define the maximum number of days the Contractor has to submit a protest when they believe the project is suspended, delayed, or interrupted for an unreasonable period of time. Other revisions to this Section add clarification. 1-08.8 Extensions of Time The time allowed for a request for an extension of time is changed from 10 days to 14 days and clarifies language, so it complements Section 1-04. The response in the form of an Engineer’s Written Determination is changed from 15 to 21 days. 1-09.2(1) General Requirements for Weighing Equipment This revision incorporates GSP 1-09.2(1).OPT2.GR1 into the 2022 book for E-ticketing, except that the bid item, “Electronic Ticketing System”, Lump Sum will be discontinued for projects advertised on or after September 7, 2021. This GSP is also deleted as part of this update package. 1-09.9 Payments These revisions incorporate GSP 1-09.9.OPT2.GR1, clarifying the process of electronic acceptance of Final Contractor Vouchers. This GSP is also deleted as part of this update package. 1-09.11(1) Disputes Review Board This section is vacated, as it has been moved into Section 1-04.5(1). 1-09.11(2) Claims This section is revised to clarify the next step in the process when the provisions of 1-04.5 are exhausted. 1-09.11(3) Time Limitation and Jurisdiction This section is revised with minor edits. 1-09.13 Claims Resolution This section (including subsections) is revised to clarify arbitration and litigation process after the Contractor has filed a Certified Claim. The arbitration/limits have changed and language is updated to match the language in the American Arbitration Association Rules. 1-10 Temporary Traffic Control Throughout this section, the term “approved” Traffic Control is revised to “accepted”. 1-10.1(2) Temporary Traffic Control This revision to description provides for adding detectible warning surfaces for pedestrian pathways. 1-10.2(1)A Traffic Control Management Item number 2 is revised to delete information on the PROWAG which is included elsewhere in Section 1-10. Item number 9 is added. 1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control Supervisor Item number 8 is added.



1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans The revisions to this section are minor edits. The last sentence of the first paragraph is deleted. 1-10.2(3) Conformance to Established Standards The first paragraph is revised, including updating the web address for the PROWAG. 1-10.3(1)A Flaggers This revision corrects a typo (insure is changed to ensure). 1-10.3(2)B Rolling Slowdown The last paragraph is revised to read that a traffic control vehicle will used to block ramps and entrances. (This formerly read flagger.) 1-10.3(3)C Portable Changeable Message Sign This revision updates clear zone to work zone clear zone. 1-10.4(2) Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals The third paragraph is revised to remove the provisions for patrolling work zones. (This work is being moved to the new item, “Patrol and Maintain Traffic Control Measures”.) The bullets have been replaced by a numbered list. Item number 6 is new. Payment for “Transportable Attenuator” will now be full payment for both providing and operating the Attenuator. Payment unit of measure is revised to an hourly payment. “Operation of Transportable Attenuator” is deleted. A new bid item is added, ““Patrol and Maintain Traffic Control Measures”, per hour. This work was previously paid for under “Other Traffic Control Labor”, per hour. 1-10.5(2) Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals Payment for “Transportable Attenuator” will now be full payment for both providing and operating the Attenuator. Payment unit of measure is revised to an hourly payment. “Operation of Transportable Attenuator” is deleted. A new bid item is added: “Patrol and Maintain Traffic Control Measures”, per hour. This work was previously paid for under “Other Traffic Control Labor”, per hour. DIVISION 2 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment 2-09.3(1)E Backfilling This revision adds clarification to ensure that walls over 15 are not backfilled against until after 14 days. (There is concern over the green concrete wall creeping/being pushing inward if fill is placed prior to 14 days.) DIVISION 3 – Acceptance of Aggregate N/A DIVISION 4 – Ballast and Crushed Surfacing N/A



DIVISION 5 – Surface Treatments and Pavements 5-01.3(2)B Cement Concrete for Panel Replacement This revision updates AASHTO T 23 to AASHTO R 100. 5-01.3(4)B Sawing and Dimensional Requirements For concrete slabs, this revision changes the location of the relief cutting to 6” to 18” from a required joint and clarifies when overcutting is allowed. 5-04.2(1) How to Get an HMA Mix Design on the QPL When a mix design is approved by the Contracting Agency and listed on the QPL it will automatically be active for 24 months. 5-04.2(1)A2 High RAP/Any RAS - Mix Design Submittals for Placement on QPL Revisions to this section clarify testing and other requirements when RAP or RAS is added to the original sequestered stockpiles. 5-04.3(8) Aggregate Acceptance Prior to Incorporation in HMA A change to the number of times the Contractor may request a retest of aggregate specific gravity (Gsb) is included. 5-04.3(9)B2 Mixture Statistical Evaluation - Sampling This revision updates AASHTO 168 to AASHTO R 97. 5-05.3(1) Concrete Mix Design for Paving This revision updates AASHTO T 23 to AASHTO R 100. 5-05.3(4)A Acceptance of Portland Cement or Blended Hydraulic Cement Concrete Pavement This revision updates AASHTO T 23 to AASHTO R 100. 5-05.3(9) Joint Matching Pre-existing Pavement Joints This vacant Section is revised to provide guidance for constructing new PCCP adjacent to existing pavement. Section covers allowable grinding and matching of joints. 5-05.3(22) Repair of Defective Pavement Revisions to this section will help clarify the requirements of repair of defective pavement slabs. The language “or panels that otherwise do not meet contract requirements” was added to what is required to be repaired. 5-05.4 Measurement & 5-05.5 Payment The new Bid Item for PCCP Joint Matching is added to Measurement and Payment. DIVISION 6 – Structures 6-02.3(2)A1 Contractor Mix Design for Concrete Class 4000D Last paragraph is revised to clarify that full amount of water specified in the mix-design is required in test sample. 6-02.3(3) Admixtures Conflicting text regarding use of accelerators is deleted.



6-02.3(5)A General This revision updates AASHTO T 23 to AASHTO R 100. 6-02.3(5)B Certification of Compliance This revision deletes the requirement for printed forms. 6-02.3(5)D Test Methods This revision updates AASHTO T 23 to AASHTO R 100. 6-02.3(5)H Sampling and Testing for Compressive Strength and Initial Curing This revision updates AASHTO T 23 to AASHTO R 100 in two locations. 6-02.3(7) Tolerances Adds a tolerance for plumbness/vertical deviation at points of support (after erection of precast concrete girders and beams). 6-02.3(9)D Control Strength This revision updates AASHTO T 23 to AASHTO R 100 in two locations. 6-02.3(10)D5 Bridge Deck Concrete Finishing and Texturing This revision clarifies that repairs are required prior to texturing. 6-02.3(14)D Concrete Surface Finishes Produced by Form Liners Revisions incorporated to eliminate conflicts in table and text as it relates to allowable joints for various types of forms. 6-02.3(17)N Removal of Falsework and Forms Minimum time until removal of forms for Bridge Deck supported stringers, beam, or girders is revised from 10 to 14 days. AASHTO T 23 is also revised to AASHTO R 100. 6-02.3(17)O Early Concrete Test Cylinder Breaks AASHTO T 23 is revised to AASHTO R 100 in two locations. 6-02.3(24)C Placing and Fastening This revision allows a Contractor’s Certificate of Compliance in lieu of a Manufacturers’ Certificate of Compliance for Pre-Concrete Supports (also known as dobies). 6-02.3(25)C Casting This section is revised with additional language for when Air-entrainment is required for prestressed concrete girders, cast in place concrete closures for prestressed concrete girders and prestressed concrete partial depth stay in place panels. 6-02.3(25)E Contractors Control Strength AASHTO T 23 is revised to AASHTO R 100. 6-02.3(25)J Horizontal Alignment This revision adds a new paragraph to the end of this section to clarify requirements of the girder erection plan.



6-02.3(25)L Handling and Storage Language is updated so that an analysis of girder lateral stability and concrete stresses are triggered when a Contractor intends to handle a girder with temporary works or appurtenances attached to the girder. 6-02.3(25)L1 Lifting and Handling Devices The last sentence is revised to clarify girder lifting requirements. 6-02.3(25)L2 Girder Lateral Stability and Stress Analysis Contract design assumptions are added for the Contractor’s use. 6-02.3(25)L5 Girder Erection Item #9 is added to address plumbness. 6-02.3(26) Post-Tensioned Concrete This section is rewritten to adopt best practices from three Post-Tensioning Institute specification documents into WSDOT work for post-tensioned concrete structures. Key changes include new certification requirements for contractor personnel, expanded field testing of grout for post-tensioned tendons, additional submittals, and improvements to construction quality management practices and documentation. 6-03.3 Construction Requirements For smaller projects with relatively simple fabrication, the Bridge Office is considering allowing AISC Simple or Intermediate certification options on a case-by-case basis (if included as a Special Provision). 6-03.3(14) Edge Finishing In the fifth paragraph, the option for control burning as recommended by the manufacturer is deleted. 6-03.3(15) Planing of Bearing Surfaces The second paragraph is revised to provide clarification for contact areas on sole plates. In last paragraph, replacing the term “mill” with “finish.” 6-03.3(25)A2 Radiographic Inspection Welding code reference updated. 6-03.3(25)A4 Magnetic Particle Inspection The last sentence of item number 3 is being moved to item number 4, and clarifies that MT is required on all CJP welds and not just ones less than 5/16”. Existing item number 4 is renumbered to item number 5. 6-03.3(29) Welded Shear Connectors Updated the welding code chapter. 6-03.3(33) Bolted Connections The fourth paragraph is modified. Historically on painted bridges, field connections are made with black bolts, which then need to be blasted to bare metal SSPC-SP10 and primed. The remaining coats are then applied to the entire bridge. Using galvanized bolts will eliminate the need for field blasting, which not only prepares the bolts but also damages surrounding areas. Our current intermediate paint coats have been found to



have proper adhesion over the galvanized bolts with minimal surface preparation. In accordance with Section 6-07, the Contractor will be required to demonstrate their surface prep techniques and perform adhesion testing to ensure proper bond of the first coat to be applied to the galvanized surfaces. 6-03.3(33)A Pre-Erection Testing Item number 2 in the first paragraph is revised to clarify the required amount of turns for the test. 6-07.3(1)B Work Force Qualifications for Field Application of Paint This revision removes the option for Contractor to substitute documentation in lieu of SSPC or NIICAP certification. 6-07.3(2) Submittals The change to this section adds language to require submittals to be assembled in order and help streamline the review process. 6-07.3(2)B Contractor’s Quality Control Program Submittal Component This section is reorganized for clarity.

6-07.3(2)F Paint Application Equipment and Operations Submittal Component Item number 3 is revised to require a Type 2E Working Drawing. 6-07.3(9)A Paint System Coating reference publication is updated. 6-07.3(9)D Coating Thickness Changing minimum dry film thickness of primer coat from 2.5 mils to 3.0 mils. 6-07.3(9)G Application of Shop Primer Coat Clarifying that bolts cannot be painted prior to installation. 6-07.3(9)H Containment for Field Coating For new steel bridges, we are moving towards requiring galvanized bolts. This will eliminate the need for field sand blasting and damaging previously applied primer in connection areas, therefore removing the specific language referencing the hardware. 6-07.3(9)I Application of Field Coatings Revising to require galvanized bolts on new steel structures. 6-07.3(10) Painting Existing Steel Structures Section is modified to be consistent with Section on treatment of pack rust. 6-07.3(10)A Containment In the second paragraph, clarifying that holes drilled in the structure must comply with an accepted painting plan. 6-07.3(10)C Dry Cleaning Adding language referencing Section 1-07.5 for disposal documentation.



6-07.3(10)F Collecting, Testing, and Disposal of Containment Waste Adding language referencing Section 1-07.5 for disposal documentation. 6-07.3(10)K Coating Thickness Removing the exception since the prime coat for new bridges has been increased to 3.0 mils. Leaving this statement to clarify total coating thickness is a combination of the prime and primer stripe coat. 6-07.3(10)O Applying Field Coatings Adding a requirement to seal expansion joints prior to top coat application to ensure deck joints, mainly on old truss bridges are not stained with rust penetrating from water penetrating through the deck joint. The eighth paragraph is modified to include information, and the eleventh paragraph is deleted. 6-07.3(11)A Painting of Galvanized Surfaces Adding clarification of surface prep procedures when galvanized bolts are used in new painted steel structures or small galvanized surfaces. 6-07.3(11)A2 Paint Coat Materials Clarifying paint coat requirements when applied over galvanized bolts or other galvanized surfaces. Opening it up to other first coat paint systems as long as adhesion testing is performed. 6-10.3(2) Cast-In-Place Concrete Barrier The revisions to this section provide for a method for Contractors to request alternate spacing and size of rebar for barrier. 6-10.3(5) Temporary Barrier While allowing the use of Type 2 and 4 barrier that is in a stockpile, this revision prevents fabrication of new type 2 and type 4 barrier which are being phased out. 6-12.3(9) Access Doors and Concrete Landing Pads The second paragraph is revised to add language for painting of doors to be painted by the supplier according to manufacturer’s recommendations. 6-19.3(3)I Required Use of Slurry in Shaft Excavation This section is revised and split into two new subsections for different scenarios – 6-19.3(3)I1, Uncased Shafts or Excavation Below Partial Depth Casing and 6-19.3(3)I2 Excavation Within Temporary Casing. The revisions to these sections address slurry requirements for each condition. 6-20.3(1)A Design Delivery Method Revised to clarify that a Contracting Agency design will include a Structural Engineering Stamp. 6-20.3(1)D Geotechnical Considerations These revisions require that additional geotechnical investigations are to comply with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual.



6-20.3(1)E Hydraulic Considerations These revisions require that additional hydraulic investigations are to comply with the WSDOT Hydraulics Manual. 6-20.3(1)F Fall Protection Updated WAC reference to new location. 6-20.3(1)I Structural Plate Structures Deleted restriction to placing galvanizing or zinc coatings below the 100 year mean. This will be added in Section 1-07 as a condition when required by permits. 6-20.3(2)F Installation Plan Added additional requirements for what must be shown on an installation plan. 6-20.3(4) Preconstruction Conference Changed the requirement for submittals to be accepted and/or approved 5 days prior to the conference. This previously only required submittal 5 days in advance. 6-20.3(5) Excavation Added allowance for quarry spall to be used in an over excavation when capped with CSBC. 6-20.3(7)A Precast Concrete Structures Added additional information and requirements for the inspection of the shop fit-up. 6-20.3(9) Backfilling Added language for option for the Engineer to allow differential backfill on opposing sides of a structure. DIVISION 7 – Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers, Water Mains and Conduits 7-12.3 Construction Requirements The fourth paragraph is revised to require an additional test be performed at no cost to the Contracting Agency when valve tests are unsatisfactory. DIVISION 8 – Miscellaneous Construction 8-01.1(1) Definitions Clarifications are included for the definition of PH Affected Stormwater and PH Affected Non-Stormwater. Language has been modified to be more in line with the Construction Stormwater General Permit. 8-01.3(1)C1 Disposal of Dewatering Water Language has been modified to be more in line with the Construction Stormwater General Permit. 8-01.5(4) Items not included with Lump Sum Erosion Control and Water Pollution Prevention In the 2020 Spec book, the Bid Item “High Visibility Fence” had a description of payment that included fence removal. That paragraph is being reimplemented.



8-02.3(2) Work Plans Language is being modified to make it clear that weed and pest control plans are required regardless of whether the proposal contains the item "Project Area Weed and Pest Control". 8-02.3(2)C Plant Establishment Plan Revised item number 4 to include watering plan. 8-02.3(3)C Project Area Weed and Pest Control Revisions intended to better convey that noxious weeds have to be controlled both in planting and seeding areas and other areas outside the planting areas but within the project limits. 8-02.3(5)A Seeding Area Preparation Minor formatting revision, changing 2 to two. 8-02.3(5)C Planting Area Preparation Changes to this section clarify the requirements of planting area preparation. 8-02.3(8)A Dates and Conditions for Planting This section is revised to require the Contractor to provide written evidence of plant material order/procurement within 30 calendar days of Execution. 8-02.3(9) Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching This section is revised to require the Contractor to provide written evidence of seed mix material order/procurement within 30 calendar days of Execution. 8-02.3(9)E Protection and Care of Seeded Areas Minor formatting revision, changing % to percent. 8-02.3(13) Plant Establishment First year plant establishment is revised from one calendar year to 12-month period. 8-02.4 Measurement Measurement by square yard is added to Topsoil, bark, woodchip, and soil amendments. 8-02.5 Payment The Bid Item “Topsoil Type ___” is revised to apply to both per acre or square yard. The Bid Item “Soil Amendment” is revised to apply to both per acre or square yard. The Bid Item “Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching” is revised to apply to both per acre or square yard. The description for payment of “Bark or Wood Chip Mulch” was moved from measurement section to payment. The description for payment of “Bark or Wood Chip Mulch Rings” is revised to include full item name. 8-07 Precast Traffic Curb The section is updated. Provisions pertaining to Construction Requirements were moved from Section 9-18.



8-11.3(1)A Erection of Posts This section is being revised to better describe the backfill process around leave-outs and to include a polymer modified asphalt mastic to cap around posts. 8-14 Cement Concrete Sidewalks This section is being modified to define the types of detectable warning surfaces and clarify their measurement and payment. 8-18 Mailbox Support Type 3 mailbox supports, options for wood posts for mailbox supports, and snow guards are no longer allowed and removed from this section. 8-20.1(3) Permitting and Inspections Various revisions are included to clarify requirements for inspectors prior to energizing a new or modified electrical circuit/system. 8-20.2(1) Equipment List and Drawings The third paragraph (and associated items no. 1 and no. 2) are obsolete and deleted. Construction Lock out tag out procedures are added to the list of submittals. 8-20.3(1) General Language is revised in the first and second paragraphs for emphasis on normal safety practices in relation to energization of circuits. 8-20.3(4) Foundations Clarification added to verify anchor bolt positions before placing concrete. Clarification added that anchor bolt straps or templates are not to be cut. 8-20.3(5)A General Clarification added to address conduits entering boxes and vaults for new installations. 8-20.3(5)E4 Directional Boring The second paragraph is split into multiple paragraphs for easier reading. 8-20.3(6) Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull boxes Item number 3 in the first paragraph is revised to state that conduits may not enter boxes except through knockouts. The last paragraph is revised to delete reference to concrete junction boxes so as to not exclude polymer boxes. 8-20.3(8) Wiring The list of wire marking tags is updated with a new item to include fiber optic cables and patch cords. 8-20.3(11)A, Traffic Signal System Testing & 8-20.3(11)B, Traffic Signal System Turn-On Both of these Sections are revised to better clarify signal system testing and activation requirements. Clarification has been added for system functional testing to occur at least one working day in advance of scheduled turn-on date to simplify scheduling and resolve difficulties in attempting to make corrections for same-day turn-on.



8-20.3(11)C Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Testing This new section for Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Testing is being moved from the GSPs. The associated GSPs are deleted as part of this update package. 8-20.3(12) Painting Updated to clarify that painting is not normally allowed (this is separate from powder-coating). 8-20.3(13)A Light Standards Item number 2 of the fourth paragraph is revised. Clarification that new anchor bolts installations may not be cut is added. Clarification on requirements for existing anchor bolts are included. 8-20.3(13)D Sign Lighting This section is deleted as WSDOT no longer uses sign lighting. 8-20.3(14)D Test for Induction Loops and Lead-In Cable The last paragraph is revised to add splices, as this is a frequent point of failure and replacement will often resolve the issue. Avoids need to re-cut/re-install loops or lead-in cables. 8-20.3(16) Reinstalling Salvaged Material Per the Bridge Office, nuts, bolts, and related hardware cannot be reused due to deformation and are removed from the list of allowable salvage materials. 8-20.5 Payment The payment statement for directional boring is revised. This revision is necessary to accommodate increased requests by designers to include the Work as part of the system lump sum bid item. This change provides the same flexibility as the “conduit pipe” bid item. 8-21.3(7) Sign Message Revision & 8-21.3(11) Multiple Panel Signs The revisions to these sections allows for rivet heads to remain uncoated for white signs. 8-22.3(2) Preparation of Roadway Surfaces The term “bond test” is changed to “adhesion test” to be consistent with Section 9-34.3(4) and corresponding ASTM D7234. 8-22.3(4) Tolerances for Lines and Grooves The section and title are revised to include a groove tolerance both horizontal and vertically. This will give guidance to Contractors and Inspectors to avoid overgrinding for pavement marking installations. 8-22.4 Measurement & 8-22.5 Payment Revisions to bid items are being made to accommodate new line types added to Standard Plans for roundabouts. The current specifications use the bid items paint, plastic, embossed plastic, profiled plastic, profiled embossed plastic and grooved plastic for all line types that are 4” wide. Using this method corresponding line types that are 8” will be included in the items Painted Wide Line, Plastic Wide Line, Profiled Plastic Wide Line, Profiled Embossed Wide Line, and Grooved Plastic Wide Line.



The Bid Items “Painted Wide Dotted Entry Line and Plastic Dotted Entry Line” are removed. These should be paid for with the new wide line items. 8-23 Temporary Pavement Markings Minor changes are incorporated throughout this section for clarity. 8-23.3(4)A Temporary Pavement Markings – Short Duration Definitions for temporary miscellaneous pavement markings, temporary stop line, and temporary crosswalk line are added. 8-23.3(4)B Temporary Pavement Markings – Long Duration Definitions for temporary center line, temporary edge line, temporary lane line, temporary miscellaneous pavement markings, temporary stop line, and temporary crosswalk line are added. 8-23.4 Measurement & 8-23.5 Payment The current specifications only include bid items for temporary pavement markings -short duration and temporary pavement markings – long durations by the linear feet. Since symbols, stop bars, and crosswalks can vary in width and size, additional bid items are being added to help consistently pay for temporary pavement markings. The new Bid Items are:

• “Temporary Miscellaneous Pavement Markings – short duration” per each

• “Temporary Miscellaneous Pavement Markings – long duration” per each

• “Temporary Stop Line - Short Duration” per linear foot

• “Temporary Stop Line - Long Duration” per linear foot

• “Temporary Crosswalk Line - Short Duration” per square foot

• “Temporary Crosswalk Line - Long Duration” per square foot. DIVISION 9 – Materials 9-05.50(9) Synthetic Micro Fibers for Precast Units & 9-05.50(10) Synthetic Macro Fibers for Precast Units Section titles are changed to Micro/Macro and minor changes are incorporated related to ASTM references. 9-06.2 Structural Low Alloy Steel & 9-06.3 Structural High-Strength Steel Minor revisions are incorporated to current standards. 9-06.5(3) High-Strength Bolts The second paragraph is deleted since galvanized tension control bolts are not allowed. These are removed because installation of tension control bolts will shear off spline and leave an uncoated surface to repair. Other revisions to this section add tension control bolts as option for unpainted structures, add equivalent ASTM testing methods for nuts, and clarifies the language regarding direct tension indicators so that the correct DTI is used with the type and strength of bolt. 9-06.5(4) Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods A new ASTM reference is added to the second paragraph.



9-09.2(2) Guardrail Posts and Blocks. The revision to this section adds a requirement for timber and lumber to be inspected and marked to confirm preservative and retention levels. 9-09.3 Preservative Treatment & 9-09.3(1) General Requirements The revisions to these sections modify the Use Category allowed for posts. 9-10.5 Steel Piling A new paragraph is added after the first paragraph, clarifying requirements for base metals used for fabrication of steel piping. The last paragraph of this Section is deleted. The Standard Specifications were not consistent with guidance in the Construction Manual. Refer to Construction Manual (9-4.38) for guidance. 9-13.1(2) Heavy Loose Riprap Grading requirements are revised. 9-13.1(3) Light Loose Riprap Grading requirements are revised. 9-16.3(2) Posts and Blocks The list of retention values for treatment of wood is moved to a table, penetration values are updated and split into two categories (UC4A and UC4B). 9-18 Traffic Curb Section title is changed from Traffic Curb to Vacant. Construction Requirements for Traffic Curb were moved to 8-07. Water repellent Compound and Sodium Metasilicate were moved to Section 9-23. 9-20.3 Grouting AASHTO T 23 is revised to AASHTO R 100. 9-23 Concrete Curing Materials, Bonding Agents and Admixtures The title was revised to include bonding agents. 9-23.3 Water Repellent Compound This language was moved into this section from Section 9-18. 9-23.4 Sodium Metasilicate This language was moved into this section from Section 9-18. 9-28.4 Extruded Windbeams and “Z” Bar Revision to this section allow for uncoated rivet heads on white signs. 9-29.3(2)A4 Location Wire Expanded wire types to include USE/USE-2. 9-29.3(2)J Ethernet Cable This is a new section to address range of ethernet cable applications.



9-29.10 Luminaires Correlated color temperature standards are moved from Section 9-29.10(1)B. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Conventional Roadway Luminaires to cover all luminaire types. Removed requirement for “LED” text on wattage labels. 9-29.13(3) Traffic Signal Controller Removed references to Type 170 series controllers. Updated requirements for Type 2070 series controllers. 9-29.13(7) Drawings and Wiring Diagrams Revised electronic format requirements to flash drive in place of CD. 9-29.13(8) Generator Transfer Switch Updated to address required and optional installations, cable access through closed door, and transfer switch construction options. 9-29.13(10)B Auxiliary Equipment for Type 2070 Assemblies Title and section are revised to remove “Type 170E”. Clarification added for output files and detector test panel. Added new Standard Plan references. 9-29.13(10)C NEMA Controller Cabinets Item number 2 is divided into separate paragraphs for general rack mounted equipment (remaining as item 2), and detector rack specific information is moved into a new item 3. The remaining items in the list are renumbered accordingly. Lock core information updated. 9-29.13(10)D Cabinets for Type 2070 Controllers Title and section are revised to remove “Type 170E”. Section updated to current standards, to address changes to CalTrans TEES (primary reference), and to incorporate new/updated Standard Plans. Clarification added for double-width cabinets. 9-29.13(11) Traffic Data Accumulator and Ramp Meters Section updated to current standards, to address changes to CalTrans TEES (primary reference), and to incorporate new/updated Standard Plans. Clarification added for double-width cabinets. 9-29.13(12) Type 331L ITS Cabinet Section updated to current standards, to address changes to CalTrans TEES (primary reference), and to incorporate new/updated Standard Plans. Clarification added for double-width cabinets. 9-29.17 Signal Head Mounting Brackets and Fittings Material types updated for signal mount parts. 9-32 Mailbox Support & 9-32.1 Steel Posts Added clarification that these sections only pertain to Type 1 Mailbox supports. 9-32.2 Bracket, Platform, and Anti-Twist Plate Clarification added that twist plate only applies to Type 1 Mailbox supports.



9.32.4 Vacant The content is deleted from this section, and the title is changed from Wood Posts to Vacant. Wood Posts are not MASH compliant and no longer allowed for mailbox supports. 9-32.5 Fasteners Added the requirement for fasters to be Grade 5. 9.32.6 Vacant The content is deleted from this section, and the title is changed from Snow Guard to Vacant. Snow Guards have not been verified to be MASH compliant. 9.32.10 Vacant The content is deleted from this section, and the title is changed from U Channel Post to Vacant. U Channel Posts were used with the Type 3 Mailbox which was removed from Standard Plans in September 2021. (Mailbox Type 3 is not MASH complaint.) 9-34.2(5) Low VOC Waterborne Paint The test Method for the paint property Directional Reflectance %, @ 15 mils wet is updated. Footnote #8 is added to the table. 9-34.3(4) Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate The test method for table property Adhesion to PCC or HMA, Psi is updated. 9-34.5(1) Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Short Duration The section title and language are updated to be consistent with Section 8-23. Corrected ASTM reference. 9-34.5(2) Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Long Duration The section title and language are updated to be consistent with Section 8-23. Corrected ASTM reference.

General Special Provision (GSP) revisions that occurred for the annual update package (September 7, 2021)

Posted: September 7, 2021

Update Corresponding Indexes

File Date of Change File Type Revision/Deletion/Rename/New

INTRO.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised

1-02.5.INST1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Deleted

1-02.5.OPT1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Deleted

1-02.6.OPT4.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised

1-02.6.OPT6.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Deleted


1-02.9.OPT1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised







1-06.OPT1(C).FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised





1-07.4(2).INST2.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Deleted

1-07.4(2).OPT2.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Deleted


1-07.5(5).OPT1(F).GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised

1-07.5(6).OPT1(Q).GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option New

1-07.5(6).OPT1(R).FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option New












1-07.18.INST1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Revised (formerly 1-07.INST4.GR1)

1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Renamed/Replaced (formerly 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1)



1-07.18(5).GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Heading New

1-07.18(5).INST1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction New

1-07.18(5).OPT1.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised/Renamed (formerly 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1)

1-07.18(5).OPT2.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised/Renamed (formerly 1-07.18.OPT2.GR1)


1-07.18(5).OPT3.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised/Renamed (formerly 1-07.18.OPT6.GR1)

1-07.18(5).OPT4.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised/Renamed (formerly 1-07.18.OPT7.FR1)


1-07.18(5).OPT5.GR1 No Date Change GSP Option Renamed (formerly 1-07.18.OPT11.GR1)

1-07.18(5).OPT6.FR1 No Date Change GSP Option Renamed (formerly 1-07.18.OPT14.FR1)








1-08.3(2).OPT2.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised/Renamed (formerly .GR1)

1-08.3(4).INST1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Revised

1-08.3(5).INST1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised

1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised/Renamed (formerly .FR1)

1-08.3(5).OPT2.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised/Renamed (formerly .FR1)






1-09.2(1).OPT7.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Deleted


1-09.2(2).OPT1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Inst./Option Deleted










1-10.2(1).OPT1.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised

1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised

1-10.3(3).OPT4.FR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option New


1-10.4(2).OPT7.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option New


1-10.4(3).OPT3.GR1 9/7/2021 GSP Option New






2-09.3(3)B.OPT1.FB2 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised

5-01.1.INST1.GR5 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction New

5-01.1.OPT1.GR5 9/7/2021 GSP Option New


5-01.3(5).INST1.GR5 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Revised






6-07.3(10)A.OPT2.FB6 9/7/2021 GSP Option Revised







8-01.3(1)B.INST1.GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Deleted

8-01.3(1)B.OPT1.GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Option Deleted





8-01.3(1)C1.INST1.GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Deleted

8-01.3(1)C1.OPT1.GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Option Deleted









8-23.3(4)(9-34.5).GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Heading Deleted

8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(1)).GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Deleted

8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(1)).OPT1.GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Option Deleted

8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(2)).GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Instruction Deleted

8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(2)).OPT1.GR8 9/7/2021 GSP Option Deleted

Revisions to General Special Provisions Effective September 7, 2021

September 7, 2021 MLB:rah

1 of 6

Please note: New revisions to WSDOT General Special Provisions are described below. Previous GSPs that are not revised in this package are still in effect. Special Provisions take precedence over the Standard Specifications in accordance with Section 1-04.2. The following list is a brief description of the latest revisions, with an explanation of why each change was made. The actual provisions should be reviewed in depth to become completely knowledgeable of the full extent of the revisions. These provisions are available at the following location: http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/SpecificationsAmendmentsGSPs.htm GENERAL GSPs with the term Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) have been changed to the new Department of Ecology term Safety Data Sheet (SDS). Where possible, terms such as workmanship, deadman, man-made, craftsman, etc. have been modified to an appropriate alternative. Requirements for submittal of paper copies is changed to electronic submittals wherever possible. INTRODUCTION INTRO.GR1 The revision to this GSP updates the Standard Specifications reference from 2021 to 2022. DIVISION 1 – General Requirements 1-02.5.INST1.GR1 & 1-02.5.OPT1.GR1 - Deleted This GSP (and its associated instruction file) is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-02.6.OPT4.FR1 This GSP is updated with the current bidding software. 1-02.6.OPT6.FR1 - Deleted This GSP is deleted. There is no longer a requirement to use a minimum bid for progress schedule. (Standard Item 7003, Type B Progress Schedule, lump sum and Standard Item 7004, Type C Progress Schedule, lump sum will be used.) 1-02.6.OPT7.FR1 - Deleted This GSP is deleted. There is no longer a requirement to use a minimum bid for Schedule Update. (Standard Item 7000 Schedule Update, per each will be used.)



2 of 6

1-02.9.OPT2.GR1 - Deleted This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-02.OPT1.GR1 This GSP is updated to reflect electronic submittal of documents during protest. 1-03.3.OPT1.GR1 This GSP for Escrow Bid Documentation is updated to reflect the option for including electronic storage media of bid documents. 1-04.4.OPT1.GR1 - Deleted This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-07.1.OPT1.GR1- Deleted This GSP, created for the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA), is removed. ARRA funding has been expended and this GSP is now obsolete. 1-07.1.OPT4.GR1 & 1-07.4(2).OPT2.GR1 - Deleted The COVID-19 Health and Safety Plan GSPs are deleted as part of this update package. The Contractor’s Safety Plan, as required by Section 1-07.1(2), will now cover any additional safety requirements related to COVID when necessary. 1-07.1.INST2.GR1 & 1-07.1.OPT5.GR1 - Deleted This GSP (and its associated instruction file) is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-07.5(3).OPT3.GR1 This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-07.5(6).OPT1(Q).GR1 This new GSP in the Environmental commitment section is being added to cover restrictions to the use of galvanization or zinc below the 100 year OHWM. 1-07.5(6).OPT1(R).FR1 This is a new GSP for bird protection and monitoring. 1-07.7.OPT1.GR1 & 1-07.7.OPT2.FR1 - Deleted These GSPs for Load Limits are deleted. Information in these GSPs were previously incorporated into the Standard Specifications and they are no longer necessary. 1-07.9(1).OPT4.GR1 - Deleted This GSP is deleted. 1-07.11.OPT2.GR1, 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1, & 1-07.11.OPT7.GR1 These GPSs are updated to remove references to UDBE (underutilized DBEs). The title of a form that contains the term UDBE is unchanged. 1-07.13(4).OPT1.GR1 - Deleted This GSP is deleted, as Reimbursement for Third Party Damage is standard practice for use on Contracts.



3 of 6

1-07.18 - Insurance GSPs Revisions to these GSPs were required as a result of the reorganization of Section 1-07.18. Minor changes to text are included to be consistent with the current language in the Standard Specifications.

Replaced (content not new, just moved from existing file): 1-07.18.INST1.GR1 (formerly 1-07.18.INST4.GR1) 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 (formerly 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1) Deleted: 1-07.18.INST2.GR1, 1-07.18.INST3.GR1, 1-07.18.INST4.GR1 Revised (date change/revisions to content)/Renamed: Prior Number New Number 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 1-07.18(5).OPT1.FR1 1-07.18.OPT2.GR1 1-07.18(5).OPT2.GR1 1-07.18.OPT6.GR1 1-07.18(5).OPT3.GR1 1-07.18.OPT7.FR1 1-07.18(5).OPT4.FR1 Not Revised (no date change/revisions to content)/Renamed Prior Number New Number 1-07.18.OPT11.GR1 1-07.18(5).OPT5.GR1 1-07.18.OPT14.FR1 1-07.18(5).OPT6.FR1 1-07.18.OPT17.GR1 1-07.18(5).OPT7.GR1 1-07.18.OPT18.GR1 1-07.18(5).OPT8.GR1 New Instruction Files: 1-07.18(5).INST1.GR1, 1-07.18(5).INST2.GR1, 1-07.18(5).INST3.GR1

1-07.16.OPT1.GR1 – Deleted This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-07.23(1).OPT2.GR1 - Deleted This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-07.23(1).OPT7.GR1 - Deleted This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-08.3(2).INST2.GR1 & 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1 This GSP (and its associated instruction file) is deleted, as this content has previously been incorporated into the Standard Specifications. 1-08.3(2).OPT2.FR1 This GSP for Type C Progress Schedules is updated and adds a fill-in, and the file is renamed to reflect this change (now using an .FR1 extension). The new fill-in will be the scheduling software version.



4 of 6

1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1 GSP 1-08.3(5).OPT1.FR1 is updated to remove the fill-in, and the file is renamed to reflect this change (now using the .GR1 extension). There is no longer a requirement to use a minimum bid for Schedule Update (Standard Item 7000 Schedule Update, per each will be used). 1-08.3(5).OPT2.GR1 GSP 1-08.3(5).OPT2.FR1 is updated to remove the fill-in, and the file is renamed to reflect this change (now using the .GR1 extension). There is no longer a requirement to use a minimum bid for progress schedule (Standard Item 7004, Type C Progress Schedule, lump sum will be used). 1-09.2(1).INST1.GR1, 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(1).OPT2.GR1, 1-09.2(1).INST2.GR1, 1-09.2(1).OPT7.FR1, 1-09.2(1).OPT8.GR1, 1-09.2(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(3).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(4).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(5).INST1.GR1, 1-09.2(5).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(6).INST1.GR1, 1-09.2(6).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(6).INST2.GR1, 1-09.2(6).OPT7.GR1 - Deleted These GSPs are deleted, as most of the information contained in these GSPs were previously incorporated into the Standard Specifications. The GSP for incorporating a second platform scale is not used and is deleted. GSP 1-09.2(1).OPT2.GR1 is being incorporated into the Standard Specifications as part of this update (additionally, the bid item for E-Ticketing is being deleted as it is now incidental to the Work) and deleted as part of this update package as well. 1-09.9.OPT2.GR1 This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 1-10.2(1).OPT1.GR1 The first line of this GSP is deleted and additional vendors are added. 1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT5.GR1, 1-10.4(3).OPT2.GR1, & 1-10.5(2).OPT3.GR1 These GSPs for Smart Work Zone Systems are modified for clarity. 1-10.3(3).OPT4.FR1 (New), 1-10.4(2).OPT7.GR1 (New), 1-10.4(3).OPT3.GR1 (New), 1-10.5(2).OPT4.GR1 (Revised) These new and revised GSPs are added for projects that will include a Queue Warning System. DIVISION 2 – Roadway Excavation and Embankment 2-02.3.OPT1.FR2 The revision to this GSP adds clarifying language prior to the fill-in. 2-02.3.OPT3.FR2 This GSP is updated to cross reference the new Standard Specifications section on Manifests (Section 1-07.5(7)).



5 of 6

2-03.3(2).OPT1.GR1 This GSP is revised to include the Type of Working Drawing required. 2-09.3(3)B.OPT1.FB2 This GSP revises the Working Drawing for shoring plans to a Type 2E for consistency. DIVISION 3 – Acceptance of Aggregate N/A DIVISION 4 – Ballast and Crushed Surfacing N/A DIVISION 5 - Surface Treatments And Pavements 5-01.1.INST1.GR5 (New), 5-01.1.OPT1.GR5 (New), 5-01.2.OPT1.GR1 (Revised), 5-01.3(5).INST1.GR5 (Revised) and 5-01.3(5).OPT1.GR5 (Revised) These GSPs for Partial Spall Depth Repair are updated to eliminate epoxy concrete as an option for partial depth spall repair of cement concrete pavements and separate materials and construction requirements into their respective files without duplication. 5-04.3(8).INST1.GR5 & 5-04.3(8).OPT1.GR5 This GSP (and its associated instruction file) is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. DIVISION 6 – Structures 6-02.3.OPT1.GR6 This GSP for Epoxy Crack Sealing is revised to reference Section 6-01.16 for repair of core holes. 6-07.3(10)A.OPT2.FB6 The revision to this GSP provides for wireless access to the weather station. 6-10.3(5).INST2.GR6 & 6-10.3(5).OPT2.GR6 This GSP (and its associated instruction file) is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. DIVISION 7 – Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers, Water Mains and Conduits N/A DIVISION 8 - Miscellaneous Construction



6 of 6

8-01.1(1).INST1.GR8, 8-01.1(1).OPT1.GR8, 8-01.1(1).INST2.GR8, 8-01.1(1).OPT2.GR8, 8-01.3(1)B.INST1.GR8, 8-01.3(1)B.OPT1.GR8, 8-01.3(1)B.INST2.GR8, 8-01.3(1)B.OPT2.GR8, 8-01.3(1)B.INST3.GR8, 8-01.3(1)B.OPT3.GR8, 8-01.3(1)C1.INST1.GR8 & 8-01.3(1)C1.OPT1.GR8 - Deleted These GSPs are deleted as they have been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 8-02.3(13).INST1.GR8 & 8-02.3(13).OPT1.GR8 - Deleted This GSP (and its associated instruction file) is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 8-02.4.OPT1.GR8 - Deleted This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 8-02.5.OPT1.GR8 - Deleted This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 8-02.5.OPT2.GR8 The bid item name “Removal of Buried Man-Made Debris” is revised to “Removal of Buried Previously Fabricated Debris”. 8-02.5.OPT3.GR8 - Deleted This GSP is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 8-02.5.INST2.GR8 & 8-02.5.OPT5.GR8 - Deleted This GSP (and its associated instruction file) is deleted as it has been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5).GR8, 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(1)).GR8, 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(1)).OPT1.GR8, 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(2)).GR8 & 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(2)).OPT1.GR8 - Deleted These GSPs are deleted as they have been incorporated into the 2022 Standard Specifications. DIVISION 9 – Materials N/A

Index – General Special Provisions Division 1 EGSP1.docx July 6September 7, 2021 Page 1

INTRO.GR1 Special Provisions 1 (September 87, 20202021) 2 All Projects 3

4 DIVISION1.GR1 General Requirements 5 6 DESWORK.GR1 Description of Work 7 8

DESWORK1.FR1 (Description of Work) 9 (March 13, 1995) 10 Use in all projects except those involving only painting of metal 11 bridges. 12 (1 fill-in) 13

14 DESWORK2.FB1 (Description of Work - Bridge Painting) 15

(August 3, 2015) 16 Use in projects involving only the painting of metal bridges. 17 (3 fill-ins) 18

19 1-02.GR1 Bid Procedures and Conditions 20 21

1-02.1.GR1 Prequalification of Bidders 22 23

1-02.1.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-02.1, including title, is deleted and replaced 24 with the following) 25 Must use one preceding any of the following: 26 27

1-02.1.OPT1.GR1 (Vacant) 28 (April 2, 2018) 29 Use in projects where all of the work will occur outside the 30 highway right of way. 31 Requires approval of HQ Contract Ad and Award Manager. 32

33 1-02.4.GR1 Examination of Plans, Specifications and Site of Work 34

35 1-02.4(1).GR1 General 36 37

1-02.4(1).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-02.4(1) is supplemented with the following) 38 Must use once preceding any of the following: 39

40 1-02.4(1).OPT1.FR1 (September 3, 2019) 41

Use in projects for which soils investigations have been 42 made, modifications to existing structures are part of the 43 Project scope, and for all bridges located within the 44 project limits. The first fill-in identifies the site (web 45 address or physical address) where the Reference 46 Information is located. The second fill-in lists the items 47 available for the prospective bidder’s review. Soils 48 Reference Information should include the Test Boring 49 Legend and the Logs of Test Boring that are included in 50 the project, listed by hole number. Other geotechnical 51 resources such as reports and memoranda (including 52 title, author, and date), test pit data and other subsurface 53 investigation data can also be listed here. Structural 54


Reference Information should include bridge inspection 1 reports for all bridges within the project limits and as-built 2 plans for all bridges which are being modified as part of 3 the Project scope including but not limited to widening, 4 repair, retrofit (rail, seismic, etc.), painting, overlay and 5 paving. Structural Reference Information should be 6 listed by bridge number. 7 (2 fill-ins) 8

9 1-02.5.GR1 Proposal Forms 10

11 1-02.5.INST1.GR1 (The first paragraph of Section 1-02.5 is revised to read) 12

Must use one preceding any of the following: 13 14

1-02.5.OPT1.GR1 (February 25, 2021) 15 Use in all projects. 16 17

1-02.6.GR1 Preparation of Proposal 18 19

1-02.6.INST2.GR1 (The fourth paragraph is replaced with the following) 20 Must use one preceding any of the following: 21 22

1-02.6.OPT2.GR1 (Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Documentation) 23 (November 9, 2020) 24 Use in projects that require the use of the Disadvantaged 25 Business Enterprise (DBE) Condition of Award (COA) 26 Participation Goal Requirement. 27 Must use with 1-02.9.OPT1.GR1 and 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1. 28 29

1-02.6.OPT3.GR1 (Subcontractor list not required with bid) 30 (The fifth and sixth paragraphs of Section 1-02.6 are deleted) 31 (August 2, 2004) 32 Use in all projects with estimated cost of $1,000,000 or less. 33 34

1-02.6.INST3.GR1 (Section 1-02.6 is supplemented with the following) 35 Must use once preceding any of the following: 36

37 1-02.6.OPT4.FR1 (Alternative Bids) 38

(April 2, 2018September 7, 2021) 39 Use in projects when the proposal is to contain alternate 40 items for bidding. Fill-ins consist of a brief description of the 41 portion of the project or of the work that would be subject to 42 alternative bidding. Repeat the "Alternative" paragraphs if 43 the project consists of more than two alternatives. 44 (4 or more fill-ins) 45

46 1-02.6.OPT5.FR1 (Cumulative Alternate Bidding) 47

(August 3, 2015) 48 Use in contracts when the award process is modified to 49 include cumulative Alternates. The region shall determine 50 and notify the Ad and Award office of the Funds Available. 51 The bid items shall be segregated into a Base Bid and 52 Alternates as appropriate. Fill-ins consist of a brief 53 description of the portion of the project or of the work that is 54


included in the noted Alternates. The specification language 1 may be adjusted to suit the number of Alternates. 2

3 Use of this GSP requires the approval of the HQ Ad and 4 Award Manager and HQ Assistant State Design Engineer. 5 When requesting approval, provide documentation of funds 6 available, and that Approvals consistent with Design Manual 7 Chapter 300 exist for the Base project and each potential 8 combination of Base plus Alternates. 9 (1 or more fill-ins) 10

11 1-02.6.OPT6.FR1 (Progress Schedule) 12

(January 7, 2019) 13 Use in all projects unless a Type A Schedule (simple bar 14 chart) is requested. This request should come to the Design 15 Project Engineer from the Construction Project Engineer 16 and be the result of discussion between the Design Project 17 Engineer and the Construction Project Engineer concerning 18 the level of schedule complexity required to administer the 19 contract. 20 21 Must use with 1-08.3(5).OPT2.FR1. 22 23 Must also use 1-02.6.OPT7.FR1 and 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 24 when a Type C Progress Schedule is specified. 25 26 Fill-in #1 and fill-in #3 is the minimum bid amount. Any 27 amount over $100,000 requires HQ Construction Office 28 approval. For the following engineers estimates, use the 29 corresponding minimum bid amount: 30 31

Engineers Estimate Minimum Bid 32 Type B Type C 33

$1 to $5 mil $5,000 $10,000 34 $5 mil to $15 mil $10,000 $20,000 35 $15 mil to $20 mil $15,000 $30,000 36 $20 mil to $30 mil $25,000 $50,000 37 $30 mil to $50 mil $35,000 $75,000 38 Over $50 million $50,000 $100,000 39 40 Fill-in #2 is the schedule Type, either “B” or “C.” Use of a 41 Type C schedule requires prior approval from HQ 42 Construction Administration and the Region Construction 43 Manager. 44

45 1-02.6.OPT7.FR1 (Schedule Updates) 46

(January 7, 2019) 47 Use in projects that specify a Type C Progress Schedule. 48 Must also use 1-02.6.OPT6.FR1 and 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1. 49 (2 fill-ins) 50 Fill-in #1 and fill-in #2 is the minimum bid amount. 51

52 1-02.6.INST4.GR1 (Item number 3 in the second paragraph of Section 1-02.6 is 53

supplemented with the following) 54


Must use once preceding any of the following: 1 2

1-02.6.OPT8.FR1 (Maximum Funds Available) 3 (September 3, 2019) 4 Use in Connecting Washington projects. Contact your 5 Region Program Management Office and CPDM to 6 determine whether to use this GSP and establish a 7 maximum funds available amount. 8 The list of Connecting Washington projects is available at 9 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/ProjectDev/C10 onnectingWashington.pdf. 11 Use of this GSP requires approval from the HQ Construction 12 Office. 13 (1 fill-in) 14 Fill-in #1 is the maximum funds available for this Contract. 15 16

1-02.9.GR1 Delivery of Proposal 17 18

1-02.9.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-02.9 is supplemented with the following) 19 Must use once preceding any of the following: 20 21

1-02.9.OPT1.GR1 (February 25September 7, 2021) 22 Use in projects that require the use of the Disadvantaged 23 Business Enterprise (DBE) Condition of Award (COA) 24 Participation Goal Requirement. 25 Must use with 1-02.6.OPT2.GR1 and 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1. 26

27 1-02.9.INST2.GR1 (The first sentence of the first paragraph of Section 1-02.9 is 28

revised to read) 29 Must use once preceding any of the following: 30 31

1-02.9.OPT2.GR1 (February 25, 2021) 32 Use in all projects. 33 34

1-02.12.GR1 Public Opening of Proposal 35 36


39 1-02.12.OPT1.FR1 (Date of Opening Bids) 40

(August 3, 2015) 41 Do not use in projects scheduled for Region bid openings. 42 Use in all projects scheduled for bid openings in Olympia. 43 (1 fill-in) 44 Bid opening is held on Wednesday, except in the event of 45 holidays. Should a holiday be observed on the Monday prior 46 to bid opening, bid opening will be held on Thursday of that 47 same week. Contact the HQ Contract Ad & Award Office if 48 additional guidance is necessary. 49

50 1-02.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-02 is supplemented with the following) 51


1-02.OPT1.GR1 (Protest Procedures) 54


(April 5, 2004September 7, 2021) 1 Include in all contracts with Federal Transit Administration 2 (FTA) funding. Typically only applies to Ferry System and 3 Sound Transit projects. 4

5 1-03.GR1 Award and Execution Of Contract 6

7 1-03.2.GR1 Award of Contract 8

9 1-03.2.INST1.GR1 (The first sentence of Section 1-03.2 is revised to read) 10


1-03.2.OPT1.GR1 (Rapid Award of Contract) 13 (April 7, 2008) 14 Use only in projects when the Regional Administrator has 15 declared an emergency, and the nature of the emergency 16 requires a rapid award and execution of the contract. 17 Requires approval of HQ Contract Ad and Award Manager. 18 19

1-03.3.GR1 Execution of Contract 20 21


24 1-03.3.OPT1.GR1 (Execution of Contract) 25

(August 5, 2013September 7, 2021) 26 Use in projects selected by the Region when it is desired to 27 have Escrow Bid Documentation established for the project. 28 The project must be of significant size and duration to extend 29 over multiple construction seasons. 30 31 Requires Region to set up banking facility for document 32 storage prior to advertisements. 33

34 1-03.3.OPT2.GR1 (Execution of Contract) 35

(July 5, 2021) 36 Use in all projects. 37 38

1-03.3.INST2.GR1 (The first paragraph of Section 1-03.3 is supplemented with the 39 following) 40 Must use once preceding any of the following: 41

42 1-03.3.OPT3.GR1 (Connecting Washington) 43

Use in the Connecting Washington projects listed at 44 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/ProjectDev/C45 onnectingWashington.pdf. 46 47

1-04.GR1 Scope of the Work 48 49

1-04.4.GR1 Changes 50 51


54


1-04.4.OPT1.GR1 (Electronically Submitted Change Orders) 1 (April 30, 2020) 2 Use in all projects. 3

4 1-04.5.GR1 Procedure and Protest by the Contractor 5

6 1-04.5.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-04.5 is supplemented with the following) 7


1-04.5.OPT1.GR1 (Partnering) 10 (January 13, 2021) 11 Use in all projects with an Engineer’s estimate of $5 million 12 or greater, and/or Contracts exceeding 200 working days. At 13 the discretion of the Region, may be used in projects with 14 lesser cost and duration where the project complexity, scope 15 of work, or project conditions support the need to host a 16 Project Specific Partnering workshop. Deletion of this item 17 requires Region Construction Engineer approval. 18 19

1-05.GR1 Control of Work 20 21

1-05.3.GR1 Working Drawings 22 23


26 1-05.3.OPT1.FR1 (September 3, 2019) 27

Use in projects that require submittal review by a Railroad. 28 Projects with work occurring below the bridge deck, work 29 adjacent to the tracks, or work requiring containment 30 systems, falsework, or formwork typically require Railroad 31 review. The design office may need additional special 32 provisions detailing the submittals requiring Railroad review. 33 Deck planing, deck repair, and overlays would typically not 34 require Railroad review as the work is confined between the 35 bridge rails and the deck surface. 36 (2 fill-ins) 37 Contact the Development Division Design Office, Railroad 38 Liaison Engineer at (360) 705-7459 to determine if this GSP 39 is necessary, and to obtain the dates for the fill-ins. 40

41 1-05.4.GR1 Conformity With and Deviations from Plans and Stakes 42



1-05.4.OPT1.GR1 (Contractor Surveying - Structure) 47 (January 13, 2021) 48 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to do all surveying 49 needed for bridges and walls. May be edited to retain 50 portions of surveying for WSDOT crews but editing to assign 51 additional work to the Contractor requires HQ Construction 52 Office approval. Do not use for bridge deck paving existing 53 surfacing profile work (already covered by Section 6-54


08.3(2)). Do not use for concrete overlay existing surfacing 1 profile work (already covered by Section 6-09.3(10)A). 2

3 1-05.4.OPT2.GR1 (Contractor Surveying - Roadway) 4

(January 13, 2021) 5 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to do all surveying 6 needed for roadway items. May be edited to retain portions 7 of surveying for WSDOT crews but editing to assign 8 additional work to the Contractor requires HQ Construction 9 Office approval. Must also use 2-03.4.OPT2.GR2 if roadway 10 excavation or embankment is included in the project. 11

12 1-05.4.OPT3.GR1 (Licensed Surveyors) 13

(April 4, 2011) 14 Include in projects requiring the Contractor to supply 15 professional land surveyors to establish right-of-way lines 16 and other monuments. 17

18 1-05.4.OPT4.GR1 (Contractor Surveying – ADA Features) 19

(April 2, 2018) 20 Use in all projects that require any ADA work. 21 Must use with 8-14.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-14.3.OPT2.GR8, and 8-22 14.3.OPT3.GR8. 23

24 1-05.9.GR1 Equipment 25



1-05.9.OPT1.FR1 (April 7, 2008) 30 Use in eligible projects that require extensive grading if 31 adequate design files have already been created during the 32 design process. Eligible projects are those that require large 33 areas of linear grading or mass quantities of roadway 34 excavation, and are in locations where satellite signals are 35 not obstructed by natural or manmade feature (such as 36 highly mountainous areas or urban canyons). Requires 37 approval of Region Construction Manager. 38 39 Must also use 1-05.4.OPT2.GR1 (Contractor Surveying – 40 Roadway). 41 (2 fill-ins) The first fill-in describes the type of data to be 42 provided (cross sections Sta. A to B, digital terrain model, 43 etc.) and the file format of the electronic data. The second 44 fill-in is the name and address of the Project Engineer 45 administering the contract. 46

47 1-05.9.OPT2.FR1 (Class A Noxious Weeds) 48

(April 2, 2018) 49 RCW 17.10.145 requires state agencies to control Class A 50 noxious weeds. Apply this GSP if the project’s SEPA 51 checklist and/or the Region Landscape Architect determine 52 a Class A noxious weed is present in the upland. 53 Fill-in #1 will contain the name of the Class A noxious weed. 54


Fill-in #2 will contain the specific instructions how to clean 1 the equipment prior to leaving the project site. 2 (2 fill-ins) 3

4 1-05.9.OPT3.FR1 (Aquatic Invasive Species) 5

(April 2, 2018) 6 The Hydraulic Project Approval requires that permit holders 7 prevent the spread of aquatic invasive species. Apply this 8 GSP if the project’s Environmental Review 9 Summary/Environmental Classification Survey determines 10 that an aquatic invasive species is present. 11 Fill-in #1 will contain the name of the Aquatic Invasive 12 Species. 13 Fill-in #2 will contain the specific instructions how to clean 14 the equipment prior to leaving the project site. 15 (2 fill-ins) 16 17

1-05.14.GR1 Cooperation With Other Contractors 18 19


22 1-05.14.OPT1.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 23

Use when it is anticipated that other projects are, or will be, 24 under construction during the life of this project within the 25 limits of this project or when access to, or through adjacent 26 projects may be necessary. 27 (1 fill-in) 28

29 1-05.14.OPT2.FR1 (Provide Access) 30

(March 13, 1995) 31 Use on structure contracts which are separate contracts 32 when other contractors are required to haul past the 33 structure being constructed. 34 (1 fill-in) 35

36 1-06.GR1 Control of Material 37

38 1-06.INST1.GR1 (Section 1-06 is supplemented with the following) 39


1-06.OPT1.GR1 Buy America 42 Must use once preceding any of the following: 43

44 1-06.OPT1(A).GR1 (Buy America) 45

(August 6, 2012) 46 May be used in any Contract at each Regions discretion. 47 Must use if any of the following apply to this Contract: 48 49

• has federal aid for construction 50 • has or is from a Project or one of several Contracts 51

from a Project that has a NEPA decision and federal 52 aid was used or anticipated to be used in any of the 53


design, right of way, utilities, or construction phases 1 of this Contract or in any other Contracts 2

3 Do not use if using 1-06.OPT1(C).FR1 4 5

6 1-06.OPT1(B).FR1 (Buy America) 7

(August 6, 2012) 8 Use if using steel or iron in both permanent and temporary 9 installations AND any of the following apply to this Contract: 10 11


from a Project that has a NEPA decision and federal 14 aid was used or anticipated to be used in any of the 15 design, right of way, utilities, or construction phases 16 of this Contract or in any other Contracts 17

18 Must also use 1-06.OPT1(A).GR1 19 (1 fill-in) 20

21 1-06.OPT1(C).FR1 (Buy America) 22

(August 6, 2007September 7, 2021) 23 May be used in any Contract at each Regions discretion. 24 Must use in all projects that require the use of structural steel 25 when the use of foreign structural steel would result in a cost 26 benefit approaching 25 percent of the cost of the total project 27 AND any of the following apply to this Contract: 28 29


from a Project that has a NEPA decision and federal 32 aid was used or anticipated to be used in any of the 33 design, right of way, utilities, or construction phases 34 of this Contract or in any other Contracts 35

36 If the structural steel items constitute at least 60 percent of 37 the estimated total project cost, alternate bids for domestic 38 and foreign structural steel will be required. Format for 39 alternate bid item is Item Name - Domestic Steel and Item 40 Name - Foreign Steel. 41 (6 fill-ins) ($$1$$ and $$6$$ will be the same and $$2$$ 42 and $$5$$ will be the same) 43

44 1-06.1.GR1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use 45


Must use once preceding any of the following: 48 49 1-06.1.OPT1.GR1 (April 3, 2017) 50

May be used on any project with Construction Project 51 Engineer, Region Construction Engineering Manager, or 52 Assistant Regional Administrator approval. Should be 53


considered on projects that contain large or numerous 1 electrical or ITS components. 2

3 1-07.GR1 Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public 4

5 1-07.1.GR1 Laws to be Observed 6

7 1-07.1.INST2.GR1 (Section 1-07.1 is revised to read) 8

Must use once preceding any of the following: 9 10 1-07.1.OPT5.GR1 (February 25, 2021) 11

Use in all projects. 12 13


16 1-07.1.OPT1.GR1 American Recovery and Reinvestment 17

Act of 2009 (ARRA) Employment Report 18 (March 25, 2009) 19 Use in all projects that contain any amount of ARRA funding. 20

21 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 Lead Health Protection Program 22

(September 3, 2019) 23 Use in projects when lead based paint on existing structures 24 and non-structural items will be disturbed 25 (1 fill-in) 26

27 1-07.1.OPT3.FR1 Confined Space 28

(April 3, 2006) 29 Must use when Contractor workers are required to enter a 30 confined space and all other projects where confined spaces 31 are known to exist. Use requires approval of the Region 32 Safety Manager. 33 34 A confined space is a space that is ALL of the following: 35 36 • Large enough and arranged so an employee could fully 37

enter the space and work. 38 • Has limited or restricted entry or exit. Examples of spaces 39

with limited or restricted entry are tanks, vessels, silos, 40 storage bins, hoppers, vaults, excavations, and pits. 41

• Not primarily designed for human occupancy. 42 43 Examples of confined spaces include but are not limited to 44 concrete or steel box girder structures, pontoons on floating 45 bridges, existing stormwater/sewer conveyances and vaults, 46 electrical or signal hubs. 47 48 Fill-in #1: Include each known confined space that the 49 Contractor may enter to perform the work. Describe 50 identified hazards and experience with each known confined 51 space, if any. Must contact Region Safety office for fill-in 52 information. 53

54


1-07.1.OPT4.GR1 COVID-19 Health and Safety Plan (CHSP) 1 (May 13, 2020) 2 Use in all projects. 3 Must use with 1-07.4(2).OPT2.GR1. 4

5 1-07.3.GR1 Forest Protection and Merchantable Timber Requirements 6



1-07.3.OPT1.GR1 (August 2, 2004) 11 Use in projects that require work in or adjacent to National 12 Forest Reservations. 13 14 Must also use Forest Service Provisions Appendix located 15 at: 16 http://wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/ProjectDev/GSPsP17 DF/1-07.3.Appendix.pdf. Do not include this Appendix in the 18 run-list. On the Final Check sheet (Form 221-019EF) under 19 Contract Make-Up check the box Forest Service Provisions. 20

21 1-07.3(2).GR1 Merchantable Timber Requirements 22

23 1-07.3(2).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-07.3(2) is supplemented 24

with the following) 25 Must use once preceding any of the following: 26

27 1-07.3(2).OPT1.GR1 (Timber Export Restrictions) 28

(April 7, 2008) 29 Use in projects that have one log truck load 30 (approximately 5,000 board feet) or more of 31 merchantable timber that is to be cut. 32

33 1-07.4.GR1 Sanitation 34

35 1-07.4(2).GR1 Health Hazards 36

37 1-07.4(2).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-07.4(2) is revised to read) 38


1-07.4(2).OPT1.FR1 (August 7, 2017) 41 Use in all projects known to be inhabited by transients, 42 and all projects known to contain biological or physical 43 hazards such as drug paraphernalia, human excrement, 44 etc. 45 (1 fill-in) 46

47 1-07.4(2).INST2.GR1 (Section 1-07.4(2) is supplemented with the following) 48


1-07.4(2).OPT2.GR1 COVID-19 Health and Safety Plan (CHSP) 51 (May 13, 2020) 52 Use in all projects. 53 Must use with 1-07.1.OPT4.GR1. 54


1 1-07.5.GR1 Environmental Regulations 2


Must use once preceding any of the following: 5 6 1-07.5.OPT1.GR1 Environmental Commitments 7

(September 20, 2010) 8 An Environmental Commitment Meeting is expected as 9 outlined in Division 4 of the Plans Preparation Manual 10 11 Must use with 1-07.5.OPT2.GR1. Must use once preceding 12 any of the following Environmental Commitment GSPs: 13 14

1-07.5.OPT1(A).FR1 (August 4, 2014) 15 Use if the project includes a requirement for Cultural 16 Resource Monitoring. 17 (1 fill-in) 18 The fill-in can either be a station reference(s), plan 19 sheet(s), or a certain depth below an elevation control 20 point, etc. 21 22

1-07.5.OPT1(B).FR1 (April 1, 2019) 23 Use if work is authorized in environmentally sensitive 24 areas. Use the Environmental Commitment Meeting to 25 determine applicability of this provision for the project. 26 (1 fill-in - choose the largest number of days noted in 27 your permits/environmental documentation or 15 days, 28 whichever is greater.) 29 30

1-07.5.OPT1(C).FR1 (April 1, 2019) 31 Use in projects applying either Programmatic Biological 32 Assessment (or Individual BA), Hydraulic Project 33 Approval, or local shoreline conditions where setbacks 34 of certain work are required from sensitive areas like 35 waters of the state, wetlands, or unique upland features. 36 (3 Fill-ins) 37 Fill-in #1 defines the contractor activity that is not allowed 38 (e.g. staging, storing material, maintaining equipment, 39 etc.) 40 Fill-in #2 defines the minimum distance between the 41 contractor activity and the sensitive area. 42 Fill-in #3 defines the sensitive area(s). 43

44 1-07.5.OPT2.GR1 Payment 45

(August 3, 2009) 46 Must use with 1-07.5.OPT1.GR1. 47

48 1-07.5(2).GR1 State Department of Fish And Wildlife 49



1-07.5(2).OPT1.GR1 Hydraulic Project Approval 54


(April 2, 2018) 1 An Environmental Commitment Meeting (see Division 4 2 of the Plans Preparation Manual) is mandatory for all 3 projects to determine the applicability of these 4 requirements. 5 6 Must use with 1-07.5(2).OPT2.GR1. Must use once 7 preceding any of the following Hydraulic Project 8 Approval GSPs: 9

10 1-07.5(2).OPT1(A).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 11

Use in projects with an HPA and a “fish window.” 12 Fill-in #1 is the start date of the fish window. 13 Fill-in #2 is the end date. 14 Consider setting the work completion date one day 15 less than permitted end date. This ensures 16 WSDOT has time to remove the nets, which is 17 technically in-water work. 18 (2 fill-ins) 19

20 1-07.5(2).OPT2.GR1 Payment 21

(April 2, 2018) 22 Must use with 1-07.5(2).OPT1.GR1. 23

24 1-07.5(3).GR1 State Department of Ecology 25



1-07.5(3).OPT1.GR1 Water Quality and Resource Protection 30 (April 2, 2018) 31 An Environmental Commitment Meeting (see Division 4 32 of the Plans Preparation Manual) is mandatory for all 33 projects to determine the applicability of these 34 requirements. 35 36 Must use with 1-07.5(3).OPT2.GR1. Must use once 37 preceding any of the following Hydraulic Project 38 Approval GSPs: 39

40 1-07.5(3).OPT1(A).FR1 (August 3, 2009) 41

Use in projects having permitted work within 42 waters of the United States and a mixing zone is 43 allowed by the Washington State Department of 44 Ecology. 45 (1 fill-in) 46 Fill in No. $$1$$ choose a distance in feet based 47 on either 173-201A of the Washington 48 Administrative Code or the project specific 401 49 Water Quality Certification from the Washington 50 State Department of Ecology. 51

52 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).GR1 (April 1, 2019) 53


Use with Contracting Agency owned NPDES 1 Construction Stormwater General Permits 2 (CSWGP). This GSP shall not be used on projects 3 where CSWGP administration will be transferred to 4 the Contractor prior to the start of construction. 5 Additional planning, monitoring, sampling, and 6 reporting requirements, beyond the scope of this 7 GSP, may be required if the project is issued a 8 CSWGP that covers discharges to impaired 9 surface waters, such as those listed on the 303(d) 10 list or in a Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) 11 coverage area. Use the Environmental 12 Commitment Meeting to determine applicability of 13 this provision for the project. 14

15 1-07.5(3).OPT2.GR1 Payment 16


19 1-07.5(3).OPT3.GR1 (February 25, 2021) 20

Use in all projects. 21 22 1-07.5(5).GR1 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers 23



1-07.5(5).OPT1.GR1 U.S. Army Corps Nationwide Permit 28 (April 2, 2018) 29 An Environmental Commitment Meeting (see Division 4 30 of the Plans Preparation Manual) is mandatory for all 31 projects to determine the applicability of these 32 requirements. 33 34 Must use with 1-07.5(5).OPT2.GR1. Must use once 35 preceding any of the following Hydraulic Project 36 Approval GSPs: 37

38 1-07.5(5).OPT1(B).FR1 (February 25, 2013) 39

Must use when the project requires a U.S. Army 40 Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit No. 33. The 41 permit provides for temporary fills for up to six 42 months (180 days). The designer must evaluate 43 the length of time needed for temporary fills. Any 44 duration in excess of six months must have 45 received a waiver by the U.S. Army Corps of 46 Engineers. Use the Environmental Commitment 47 Meeting to determine applicability of this provision 48 for the project. 49 (2-fill-ins) 50 Fill-in No. $$1$$ defines the location of temporary 51 fill(s). 52 Fill-in No. $$2$$ is number of calendar days of the 53 temporary fill(s) are permitted to be placed. 54


1 1-07.5(5).OPT1(C).GR1 (February 25, 2013) 2

Must use when the project requires a U.S. Army 3 Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit No. 3, 13, 4 14, or 33. 5

6 1-07.5(5).OPT1(D).GR1 (August 3, 2009) 7

Use if permits authorize heavy equipment 8 operation in wetlands or mudflats. 9

10 1-07.5(5).OPT1(F).GR1 (August 3, 2009) 11

Use if the project involves disposing of creosoted 12 materials. 13

14 1-07.5(5).OPT2.GR1 Payment 15


18 1-07.5(6).GR1 U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and National Marine 19

Fisheries Service 20 21


24 1-07.5(6).OPT1.GR1 (April 2, 2018) 25

An Environmental Commitment Meeting (see Division 4 26 of the Plans Preparation Manual) is mandatory for all 27 projects to determine the applicability of these 28 requirements. 29 30 Must use with 1-07.5(6).OPT2.GR1. Must use once 31 preceding any of the following GSPs: 32

33 1-07.5(6).OPT1(B).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 34

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 35 Assessment Minimization Measure #8, where work 36 will be performed between October 1 and June 1. 37 If this GSP is used, please ensure that the Plans 38 indicate where the 100 year floodplain is. 39 Do not use for Emergency Projects. 40

41 1-07.5(6).OPT1(C).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 42

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 43 Assessment Minimization Measure #15. 44 Fill-in #1 is the maximum number of days. Work 45 with the Region Environmental Coordinator. 46 (1 fill-in) 47

48 1-07.5(6).OPT1(D).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 49

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 50 Assessment Minimization Measure #27. 51

52 1-07.5(6).OPT1(E).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 53



3 1-07.5(6).OPT1(F).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 4


7 1-07.5(6).OPT1(G).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 8

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 9 Assessment Minimization Measure #73. 10 11 This GSP should pertain only to non-bridge 12 projects (i.e., culverts) because treated wood 13 containment for bridges is covered by Section 2-14 02.3(2)A1 of the Standard Specifications. 15

16 1-07.5(6).OPT1(H).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 17

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 18 Assessment Minimization Measure #74. 19 Fill-in #1 is the maximum decibel level. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22 1-07.5(6).OPT1(I).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 23

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 24 Assessment Minimization Measure #76. 25 Fill-in #1 is the waterbody name that has ESA listed 26 species. 27 (1 fill-in) 28

29 1-07.5(6).OPT1(J).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 30

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 31 Assessment Minimization Measure #82. 32 Fill-in #1 is the Washington city nearest to the 33 project location. 34 (1 fill-in) 35

36 1-07.5(6).OPT1(K).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 37


43 1-07.5(6).OPT1(L).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 44


50 1-07.5(6).OPT1(M).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 51



Fill-in #1 is the Washington city nearest to the 1 project location. 2

3 1-07.5(6).OPT1(N).FR1 (April 2, 2018) 4

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 5 Assessment Minimization Measure #86. 6 Fill-in #1 is the Washington city nearest to the 7 project location. 8

9 1-07.5(6).OPT1(O).GR1 (April 2, 2018) 10


13 1-07.5(6).OPT1(P).FR1 (September 3, 2019) 14

Use in projects applying Programmatic Biological 15 Assessment Minimization Measure #93. 16 Fill-in #1 is the type of visual or noisy work that is 17 not allowed. 18 Fill-in #2 is the Washington city nearest to the 19 project location. 20 (2 fill-ins) 21

22 1-07.5(6).OPT1(Q).GR1 (September 7, 2021) 23

Restricts the use of Galvanized or Zinc Coatings 24 below the 100-year water level. Contact Region 25 Biologist for direction on use. 26

27 1-07.5(6).OPT1(R).FR1 (September 7, 2021) 28

Use in projects that require a Project-specific Bird 29 Protection Plan. Consult Region biologist for 30 assistance. 31 (2 fill-ins) 32 Fill-in #1 defines the birds identified for protection. 33 Fill-in #2 identifies the Appendix in which the MTBA 34 Assessment Report will be located 35

36 1-07.5(6).OPT2.GR1 Payment 37


40 1-07.6.GR1 Permits and Licenses 41



1-07.6.OPT1.FR1 Permits and Licenses 46 (January 2, 2018) 47 An Environmental Commitment Meeting is expected as 48 outlined in Division 4 of the Plans Preparation Manual. 49 50 *This GSP requires editing the data located in the permit 51 table located at: 52 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/projectdev/En53 vironmentalDocumentation/1-07.6.OPT2.FR1_Table.doc, 54


copying and pasting the revised table inside this fill-in area. 1 This needs to be edited prior to insertion and final printing to 2 delete all permits that are not required for the project and 3 insert additional permits not part of the original table. All 4 permits will be attached as an Appendix. Include the 5 Department of Ecology permit coverage letter with the 6 CSWGP. If using a Nationwide Permit, attach the most 7 recent U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Nationwide Permit 8 Verification Letter, conditions, and permit drawings. 9 10 (1 fill-in) 11 12

1-07.6.OPT3.GB1 United States Coast Guard 13 Must use once preceding any of the following: 14

15 1-07.6.OPT3(A).FB1 (January 2, 2018) 16

Use in projects over navigable waters when the Coast 17 Guard is involved. 18 (2 fill-ins) 19 20

1-07.6.OPT3(B).GB1 United States Coast Guard 21 (September 3, 2019) 22 Use in all projects involving bridge work, including 23 painting, in or near the navigable portion of a waterway 24 when 1-07.6.OPT3(A).FB1 is not used. 25

26 1-07.7.GR1 Load Limits 27



1-07.7.OPT1.GR1 (March 13, 1995) 32 Use in projects where all existing roadways are subject to 33 major reconstruction or are to be abandoned or replaced 34 under this project. 35

36 1-07.7.OPT2.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 37

Use in projects where some, but not all, of the existing 38 roadways are subject to major reconstruction, or are to be 39 abandoned or replaced under this project. 40 (1 fill-in) 41

42 1-07.7.OPT3.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 43

Use when WSDOT provides a materials source and roads 44 other than State highways are designated as the haul route. 45 (4 fill-ins) 46

47 1-07.7.OPT4.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 48

Use with 1-07.7.OPT3.FR1 when the agreement 49 stipulates additional requirements. 50 (1 fill-in) 51

52 1-07.7.OPT5.GR1 (March 13, 1995) 53


Use in all projects where WSDOT provides a source of 1 materials for part or all required materials. 2 3

1-07.7.OPT6.GR1 (March 13, 1995) 4 Use in projects when no source of materials is provided. 5 6

1-07.9.GR1 Wages 7 8

1-07.9(1).GR1 General 9 10


13 1-07.9(1).OPT1.GR1 (January 13, 2021) 14

Use in all Federal Aid projects consisting of highway 15 construction and/or landscaping. 16 17 For the selection and application of multiple wage 18 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 19 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 at: 20 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-21 131.pdf. 22 23

1-07.9(1).OPT2.FR1 (January 13, 2021) 24 Use in Federal Aid projects consisting of both highway 25 and building construction. 26 (1 fill-in) 27 28 For the selection and application of multiple wage 29 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 30 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 at: 31 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-32 131.pdf. 33

34 1-07.9(1).OPT3.FR1 (May 11, 2010) 35

Use in Federal Aid projects consisting of only building 36 construction. 37 (1 fill-in) 38 39 For the selection and application of multiple wage 40 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 41 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 at: 42 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-43 131.pdf. 44

45 1-07.9(1).OPT4.GR1 Application of Wage Rates For The 46

Occupation Of Landscape Construction 47 (April 2, 2007) 48 Use in Federal Aid projects that include wage rates for 49 the occupation Landscape Construction. This would be 50 projects with seeding and fertilizing, or landscape work. 51 52

1-07.9(1).OPT5.FR1 (January 13, 2021) 53


Use in all Federal Aid project consisting of both highway 1 and heavy construction. 2 (1 fill-in) 3 4 For the selection and application of multiple wage 5 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 6 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 at: 7 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-8 131.pdf. 9 10

1-07.9(1).OPT6.FR1 (January 13, 2021) 11 Use in all Federal Aid projects consisting of highway, 12 heavy, and building construction. 13 (2 fill-ins) 14

15 For the selection and application of multiple wage 16 schedules see the U.S. Department of Labor ‘ALL 17 AGENCY MEMORANDUM NO. 130’ dated 3/17/1978 at: 18 https://www.dol.gov/whd/programs/dbra/docs/memo-19 131.pdf. 20 21

1-07.9(3).GR1 Apprentices 22 23


26 1-07.9(3).OPT1.GR1 Apprentice Utilization 27

(January 6, 2020) 28 Use only on projects advertised by the Washington State 29 Department of Transportation. Use in projects with an 30 Engineer’s estimate of $2 million and greater. 31 32

1-07.11.GR1 Requirements for Nondiscrimination 33 34


37 1-07.11.OPT1.GR1 Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure 38

Equal Employment Opportunity 39 (September 3, 2019) 40 Use in Federal Aid projects exceeding $10,000 in contract 41 cost. 42

43 1-07.11.OPT2.GR1 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) 44

Participation 45 (April 3, 2018September 7, 2021) 46 REQUIREMENTS PERTAINING TO "No DBE Goals" 47 DO NOT USE UNTIL FURTHER NOTICE. 48 49

1-07.11.OPT3.FR1 Disadvantaged Business 50 Enterprise (DBE) Participation. 51 (November 9, 2020September 7, 2021) 52 Requires a CONDITION-OF-AWARD GOAL 53


Use in selected Federal Aid projects with DBE Condition of 1 Award (COA) goals. The final COA DBE Goal is to be 2 furnished or verified by the Office of Equal Opportunity. 3 Use of Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 4 Certification (DOT Form 272 056) and use of 5 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written 6 Confirmation Document (DOT Form 422-031) is required 7 in the proposal. 8 Must use with 1-02.6.OPT2.GR1 and 1-02.9.OPT1.GR1 9 (1 fill-in) The fill-in shall be one of the following formats: 10 11 ___ percent (___%) of the contract total; or 12 ___ dollars for COA DBE goals 13 Do not use in projects with Federal Transit Administration 14 (FTA) funding, or where FTA is the lead funding agency (use 15 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1 instead). 16 Do not use with 1-07.11.OPT7.GR1 or 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1. 17 s 18

1-07.11.OPT4.FR1 Special Training Provisions 19 (April 3, 2017) 20 Use in all Federal Aid projects with more than 50 working 21 days that contain Training (Obtain Training Decision & Fill-in 22 from OEO office). 23 (1 fill-in) 24 25 Note: Fill-in is Total Hours. 26 27

1-07.11.OPT5.GR1 Voluntary Minority, Small, Veteran and Women's Business 28 Enterprise (MSVWBE) Participation 29 (January 7, 2019) 30 Use in all State funded (100%) projects with an estimated 31 cost of $250,000 or more. 32 33

1-07.11.OPT7.FR1 Federal Small Business Enterprise (FSBE) 34 Participation 35 (November 4, 2019September 7, 2021) 36 Use in selected Federal Aid projects with Federal Small 37 Business Enterprise (FSBE) goals. The FSBE Goal is to be 38 furnished or verified by the Office of Equal Opportunity. 39 (1 fill-in) The fill-in shall be in the following format: 40 41 ___ percent (___%) of the contract total for FSBE goals; or 42 ___ dollars for FSBE goals 43 Do not use with 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1. 44

45 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1 Disadvantaged Business 46

Enterprise (DBE) Condition of Award Participation. 47 (June 1, 2017) 48 Requires a CONDITION-OF-AWARD GOAL 49 Use in projects with Federal Transit Administration (FTA) 50 funding, or where FTA is the lead funding agency, and the 51 project contains DBE Condition of Award (COA) goals. The 52 final COA DBE Goal is to be furnished or verified by the 53 Office of Equal Opportunity. 54


Use of Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 1 Certification (DOT Form 272 056) and use of 2 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written 3 Confirmation Document (DOT Form 422-031) is required 4 in the proposal. 5 (1 fill-in) The fill-in shall be one of the following formats: 6 7 ___ percent (___%) of the contract total for COA DBE goals; 8 or 9 ___ dollars for COA DBE goals 10 Do not use with 1-07.11.OPT3.FR1. 11

12 1-07.12.GR1 Federal Agency Inspection 13



1-07.12.OPT1.GR1 (January 25, 2016) 18 Use in all Federal Aid projects. 19

20 1-07.12.OPT2.FR1 Indian Preference And Tribal Ordinances 21

(August 1, 2011) 22 Use in projects with any portion of the project on an Indian 23 reservation. 24 (3 fill-ins) ($$1$$ is the Tribe or Reservation; $$2$$ is the 25 Group(s) as shown on the Summary of Quantities where 26 Work is performed on Tribal Lands, $$3$$ is the Tribal 27 representative, telephone and address.) 28

29 1-07.13.GR1 Contractor's Responsibility for Work 30

31 1-07.13(4).GR1 Repair of Damage 32



1-07.13(4).OPT1.GR1 (August 6, 2001) 37 For use on WSDOT projects only. 38 At the Region's discretion, include in projects when the 39 use of "Reimbursement for Third Party Damage" is NOT 40 desired and the Region wants to set up another method 41 of reimbursement for third party damages. 42

43 1-07.16.GR1 Protection and Restoration of Property 44



1-07.16.OPT1.GR1 (February 25, 2021) 49 Use in all projects. 50

51 1-07.16(2).GR1 Vegetation Protection and Restoration 52




1-07.16(2).OPT1.GR1 (August 2, 2010) 3 Use in projects to specify preservation of existing 4 desirable vegetation. 5

6 1-07.16(4).GR1 Archaeological and Historical Objects 7



1-07.16(4).OPT1.GR1 (December 6, 2004) 12 Use in projects when reconnaissance studies indicate 13 that there is the probability of finding cultural remains 14 within the project limits which will require monitoring the 15 project area during clearing, grubbing or excavation 16 operations. Requires a pay item. 17

18 1-07.17.GR1 Utilities and Similar Facilities 19



1-07.17.OPT1.FR1 (April 2, 2007) 24 Use in projects where there are utilities within the R/W that 25 will not be adjusted, replaced or constructed by the utility 26 owner or its contractor during the prosecution of the work. 27 (1 fill-in) 28

29 (May use with 1-07.17.OPT2.FR1 if utilities other than those 30 described in this provision will be adjusted, replaced or 31 constructed by the utility owner during the prosecution of the 32 work.) 33

34 1-07.17.OPT2.FR1 (April 2, 2007) 35

Use in projects where there are utilities within the R/W and 36 those utilities will be adjusted, relocated or replaced by the 37 utility owner or its contractor during the performance of the 38 contract, or when the utility owner or its contractor will 39 construct new utilities within the R/W during the performance 40 of the contract. 41 42 (3 fill-ins) ($$1$$ is a description and location of the work the 43 each utility owner or its contractor will complete, and the 44 duration of that work or anticipated date of completion by 45 each utility or its contractor. $$2$$ is the name of the utility 46 company or companies, contact person, address, telephone 47 number and e-mail address or other contact information as 48 required to enable the Contractor to identify and contact 49 each utility performing work during the life of the contract. 50 $$3$$ is a description of any additional requirements that 51 the contractor must perform in order to coordinate with the 52 utility owner or its contractor, such as advance notifications 53 to be provided to the utility for staged work. 54


1 (Use with 1-07.17.OPT1.FR1 if other utilities exist within the 2 R/W that will not be adjusted, relocated or replaced by the 3 utility owner.) 4

5 1-07.18.GR1 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance 6



1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 Relations With Railroad 11 (September 8, 2020) 12 Use in projects when a railroad is involved in the contract. 13 (6 fill-ins) ($$1$$ is list of railroad companies involved in 14 contract; $$2$$ is amount of advance notice contractor is 15 required to provide the Railroad prior to working adjacent to 16 tracks; $$3$$ is name, address and telephone of the railroad 17 contact person; $$4$$ is a list of work to be performed by 18 the Railroad, other than flagging, as specified in the Railroad 19 agreement; $$5$$ is the name, address, and telephone 20 number of the Railroad contact person for right of entry; and 21 $$6$$ is the Appendix number that lists the Draft Right of 22 Entry Agreement. 23 24 The design office shall contact the Development Division 25 Design Office, Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-7459 for 26 the fill in information. 27

28 1-07.18(5).GR1 Required Insurance Policies 29

30 1-07.18(5).INST1.GR1 (The first sentence of Item No. 1 of Section 1-07.18(5) is 31

revised to read) 32 Must use once preceding any of the following: 33

34 1-07.18(5).OPT1.FR1 (Increased Insurance Requirement – Owners and 35

Contractors Protective Insurance) 36 (January 3, 2011September 7, 2021) 37 Use in projects when the Engineer's estimate is in 38 excess of $10 million or in projects under $10 million 39 when in the Engineer's judgment the project involves 40 higher than normal risk(s). The project office should 41 contact the Risk Management & Legal Services Division, 42 Administrative Risk Manager (360) 704-6360 to discuss 43 the project's risks. The Administrative Risk Manager will 44 advise the region as to the need to require the additional 45 insurance, and if so, will provide the fill in amount. This 46 GSP should not be used if the fill-in amounts match the 47 values listed in the Standard Specifications. 48 (1 fill-in) 49

50 1-07.18(5).OPT2.GR1 (Reduced Insurance Requirement) 51

(January 5, 2004September 7, 2021) 52 Use in projects when the Engineer’s estimate is $500,000 or 53 less. 54


Do not use with 1-07.18(5).INST1.GR1 because this GSP 1 deletes Item number 1 in the first paragraph of Section 1-2 07.18(5). 3 Must use with 1-07.18(5).OPT6OPT3.GR1. 4

5 1-07.18(5).INST2.GR1 (The first sentence of Item No. 2 of Section 1-07.18(5) is 6

revised to read) 7 Must use once preceding any of the following: 8

9 1-07.18(5).OPT3.GR1 (Reduced Insurance Requirement) 10

(January 3, 2011September 7, 2021) 11 Use in all projects when the Engineer's estimate is 12 $500,000 or less. 13 Must use with 1-07.18(5).OPT2.GR1. 14 15

1-07.18(5).OPT4.FR1 (Increased Insurance Requirement - Commercial 16 General Liability (CGL)) 17 (April 1, 2013September 7, 2021) 18 Use in projects when the Engineer's estimate is in 19 excess of $10 million or in projects under $10 million 20 when in the Engineer's judgment the project involves 21 higher than normal risk(s). The project office should 22 contact the Risk Management & Legal Services Division, 23 Administrative Risk Manager (360) 704-6360 to discuss 24 the project's risks. The Administrative Risk Manager will 25 advise the region as to the need to require the additional 26 insurance, and if so, will provide the fill in amounts. This 27 GSP should not be used if the fill-in amounts match the 28 values listed in the Standard Specifications. 29 (2 1 fill-ins) 30

31 1-07.18(5).INST3.GR1 (Section 1-07.18.(5) is supplemented with the following) 32


1-07.18(5).OPT5.GR1 (Builders Risk Insurance) 35 (January 3, 2011) 36 Use in projects when in the Engineer's judgment the 37 project facilities themselves may be exposed to 38 significant damage. The Project Office should contact 39 the Administrative Risk Manager, at the Risk 40 Management & Legal Services Division to discuss any 41 high risk components of the project regarding damage to 42 departmental owned/rented facilities or assets. The 43 Administrative Risk Manager will advise the region as to 44 the need to require the additional insurance. 45 CAUTION: Using this provision will result in significantly 46 higher project costs. 47 48

1-07.18(5).OPT6.FR1 (Pollution Liability Insurance) 49 (January 7, 2013) 50 Use in all projects where in the Engineer’s judgment the 51 Work involves remediation of Environmental hazards, 52 the Contractor shall obtain Contractor’s Pollution Liability 53 Insurance. The Project Office should contact the 54


Administrative Risk Manager, at the Risk Management & 1 Legal Services Division, to discuss the Projects 2 Environmental risks to determine if Contractor’s 3 Pollution Liability Insurance (CPL) is needed. The 4 Administrative Risk Manager will advise the region as to 5 the need to require the additional insurance, and if so, 6 provide the fill in amount. 7 (1 fill-in) 8 9

1-07.18(5).OPT7.GR1 (Auto and Workers Compensation Insurance – BNSF) 10 (August 7, 2006) 11 Use with 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 when BNSF is involved in 12 the contract. Must include Contractor’s Right of Entry 13 and BNSF’s Contractor Requirements as appendices. 14 Contact the Environmental & Engineering Program 15 Design Office, Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-16 7271 for appendices. 17 18

1-07.18(5).OPT8.GR1 (Auto and Workers Compensation Insurance – UPRR) 19 (August 7, 2006) 20 Use with 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 when UPRR is involved in 21 the contract. Must include Contractor’s Right of Entry 22 and UPRR Contractor Requirements as appendices. 23 Contact the Environmental & Engineering Program 24 Design Office, Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-25 7271 for appendices. 26 27

1-07.18.INST1.GR1 (Item No. 1 of the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 28 is revised to read) 29 Must use once preceding any of the following: 30

31 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 Owners and Contractors Protective Insurance 32

(January 3, 2011) 33 Use in projects when the Engineer's estimate is in excess of 34 $10 million or in projects under $10 million when in the 35 Engineer's judgment the project involves higher than normal 36 risk(s). The project office should contact the Risk 37 Management & Legal Services Division, Administrative Risk 38 Manager (360) 704-6360 to discuss the project's risks. The 39 Administrative Risk Manager will advise the region as to the 40 need to require the additional insurance, and if so, will 41 provide the fill in amount. This GSP should not be used if the 42 fill-in amounts match the values listed in the Standard 43 Specifications. 44 (1 fill-in) 45 46

1-07.18.OPT2.GR1 Reduced Insurance Requirement 47 (January 5, 2004) 48 Use in all projects when the Engineer's estimate is $500,000 or 49 less. 50 Do not use with 1-07.18.INST1.GR1 because this GSP 51 deletes Item number 1 in the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18. 52 Must use with 1-07.18.OPT6.GR1. 53

54


1-07.18.INST2.GR1 (Item No. 2 of the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 1 is revised to read) 2 Must use once preceding any of the following: 3

4 1-07.18.OPT6.GR1 Reduced Insurance Requirement 5

(January 3, 2011) 6 Use in all projects when the Engineer's estimate is $500,000 7 or less. 8 Must use with 1-07.18.OPT2.GR1. 9 10

1-07.18.OPT7.FR1 Commercial General Liability (CGL) 11 (April 1, 2013) 12 Use in projects when the Engineer's estimate is in excess of 13 $10 million or in projects under $10 million when in the 14 Engineer's judgment the project involves higher than normal 15 risk(s). The project office should contact the Risk 16 Management & Legal Services Division, Administrative Risk 17 Manager (360) 704-6360 to discuss the project's risks. The 18 Administrative Risk Manager will advise the region as to the 19 need to require the additional insurance, and if so, will 20 provide the fill in amounts. This GSP should not be used if 21 the fill-in amounts match the values listed in the Standard 22 Specifications. 23 (2 fill-ins) 24 25


28 1-07.18.OPT11.GR1 Builders Risk Insurance 29

(January 3, 2011) 30 Use in projects when in the Engineer's judgment the project 31 facilities themselves may be exposed to significant damage. 32 The Project Office should contact the Administrative Risk 33 Manager, at the Risk Management & Legal Services Division 34 to discuss any high risk components of the project regarding 35 damage to departmental owned/rented facilities or assets. 36 The Administrative Risk Manager will advise the region as to 37 the need to require the additional insurance. 38 CAUTION: Using this provision will result in significantly 39 higher project costs. 40 41

1-07.18.OPT14.FR1 Pollution Liability Insurance 42 (January 7, 2013) 43 Use in all projects where in the Engineer’s judgment the 44 Work involves remediation of Environmental hazards, the 45 Contractor shall obtain Contractor’s Pollution Liability 46 Insurance. The Project Office should contact the 47 Administrative Risk Manager, at the Risk Management & 48 Legal Services Division, to discuss the Projects 49 Environmental risks to determine if Contractor’s Pollution 50 Liability Insurance (CPL) is needed. The Administrative Risk 51 Manager will advise the region as to the need to require the 52 additional insurance, and if so, provide the fill in amount. 53 (1 fill in) 54


1 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 Relations With Railroad 2

(September 8, 2020) 3 Use in projects when a railroad is involved in the contract. 4 (6 fill-ins) ($$1$$ is list of railroad companies involved in 5 contract; $$2$$ is amount of advance notice contractor is 6 required to provide the Railroad prior to working adjacent to 7 tracks; $$3$$ is name, address and telephone of the railroad 8 contact person; $$4$$ is a list of work to be performed by 9 the Railroad, other than flagging, as specified in the Railroad 10 agreement; $$5$$ is the name, address, and telephone 11 number of the Railroad contact person for right of entry; and 12 $$6$$ is the Appendix number that lists the Draft Right of 13 Entry Agreement. 14 15 The design office shall contact the Development Division 16 Design Office, Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-7459 for 17 the fill in information. 18

19 1-07.18.OPT17.GR1 Auto And Workers Compensation Insurance -BNSF 20

(August 7, 2006) 21 Use with 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 when BNSF is involved in the 22 contract. Must include Contractor’s Right of Entry and 23 BNSF’s Contractor Requirements as appendices. Contact 24 the Environmental & Engineering Program Design Office, 25 Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-7271 for appendices. 26

27 1-07.18.OPT18.GR1 Auto And Workers Compensation Insurance -UPRR 28

(August 7, 2006) 29 Use with 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 when UPRR is involved in the 30 contract. Must include Contractor’s Right of Entry and UPRR 31 Contractor Requirements as appendices. Contact the 32 Environmental & Engineering Program Design Office, 33 Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-7271 for appendices. 34

35 1-07.23.GR1 Public Convenience and Safety 36

37 1-07.23(1).GR1 Construction Under Traffic 38



1-07.23(1).OPT1.FB1 (Traffic Restrictions) 43 (March 13, 1995) 44 Use in bridge painting projects. 45 (1 fill-in) 46

47 1-07.23(1).OPT2.GR1 (Work Zone Clear Zone) 48

(February 3, 2020) 49 Use in all projects that require traffic control unless the 50 conditions described in Design Manual Chapter 1010 51 warrant a more restrictive special provision. 52

53 1-07.23(1).OPT4.GR1 (Temporary Access Breaks) 54


(December 6, 2004) 1 Use to allow temporary access to the traveled way at 2 locations other than those defined in Standard 3 Specifications 1-07.23(1). Consider for use on all 4 limited access facilities, and on non-interstate limited 5 access. 6 7 Requires Region Approval for all projects. Requires 8 FHWA Approval for use on limited access interstate 9 facilities (allow 30 days minimum for approval). Requires 10 Headquarters State Design Engineer approval for use 11 on non-interstate limited access facilities. Region Project 12 Development shall insure that site conditions meet the 13 criteria contained in the provision. Region Construction 14 and Traffic Offices should concur with projects selected 15 for use. Contact Headquarters Design, Access and 16 Hearings Engineer for guidance. 17

18 1-07.23(1).OPT5.FR1 (Lane Closure Restrictions) 19

(January 5, 2015) 20 Use in projects that prohibit lane closures prior to a 21 holiday, and where traffic volumes require that lane 22 closures are restricted. 23 (3 Fill-ins) Fill-in #1 describes the specific facility or 24 location and the hours that closures are allowed. 25 Fill-ins #2 and #3 designate the period of time over a 26 holiday weekend when closures will not be allowed. 27 28

1-07.23(1).OPT6.GR1 (Accommodating Oversized Loads through the Work 29 Zone) 30

(April 14, 2014) 31 Use in projects on the following routes: 32 33 I-5, I-405, I-90, I-82, I-182, SR 18, SR 167 and 34 US 395 (Tri-Cities to Spokane) 35 If there is the potential for the travelled way to be 36 reduced to less than 16 feet 37 38 The designer is authorized to modify this specification as 39 necessary to coordinate with the rest of the contract 40 provisions that may contradict, provided the intent of the 41 GSP is maintained. The intent being; provide a clear 42 width of at least 16 feet to accommodate a wide load, 43 provide windows of time to accommodate a wide load (if 44 possible) and/or provide notice as described. Changes 45 in this specification should be coordinated with 46 Commercial Vehicle Services. 47 48 This specification requires that the Engineer must 49 approve any proposed reduction of the travelled way to 50 a single lane with a clear width of less than 16 feet for 51 duration of 4 calendar days or more. 52

53 1-07.23(1).INST2.GR1 (The last paragraph of Section 1-07.23(1) is revised to read) 54



1-07.23(1).OPT7.GR1 (September 30, 2020) 3 Use in all projects. 4

5 1-07.24.GR1 Rights of Way 6



1-07.24.OPT1.FR1 (March 13, 1995) 11 Use in projects when it is possible that the right of way will 12 not be fully acquired at the time of award. 13 (2 fill-ins) 14

15 1-08.GR1 Prosecution and Progress 16

17 1-08.1.GR1 Subcontracting 18



1-08.1.OPT1.GR1 (Subcontracting) 23 (June 3, 2019) 24 Use in all Federal Aid projects. 25

26 1-08.1.OPT2.FR1 Specialty Items 27

(March 13, 1995) 28 Use in projects when unusual work will likely have to be 29 subcontracted. Obtain concurrence from Pre-contract 30 Administration. 31 (1 fill-in) 32

33 1-08.1.OPT3.GR1 Qualifications Of Building Contractor 34

(March 13, 1995) 35 Use in road construction projects that also include building 36 construction. 37 38

1-08.3.GR1 Progress Schedule 39 40 1-08.3(1).GR1 General Requirements 41

42 1-08.3(1).INST1.GR1 (The first sentence of Section 1-08.3(1) is revised to read) 43


1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1 (August 7, 2006) 46 Include in complex or high impact projects, requiring the 47 use of a Type C Schedule, as described for GSP 1-48 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 FR1 at the discretion of the Region 49 Construction Manager. Use requires the approval of the 50 HQ Construction Office. 51 Must include with 1-08.3(2).GR1, 1-52 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1FR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 1-53


08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1, and 1-1 08.3(5).OPT2.GR1. 2

3 1-08.3(2).GR1 Progress Schedule Types 4



1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1 (August 1, 2011) 9 Include in complex or high impact projects as described 10 for GSP 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 at the discretion of the 11 Region Construction Manager. Use requires the 12 approval of the HQ Construction Office. 13 Must include with 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 14 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 15 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1. 16


Must use once preceding any of the following: 19 20 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1FR1 (Type C Progress Schedule) 21

(August 1, 2016September 7, 2021) 22 Include in complex or high impact projects under the 23 following conditions: 24 25 The Engineers Estimate exceeds $15 million or Time for 26 Completion exceeds 180 working days, and when the 27 project includes some or all of the following 28 characteristics: multiple traffic shifts and staged 29 construction is required; complete closure of ramps, 30 surface streets, or interstate is required; designated 31 detour routes require inter-agency agreements; state 32 supplied materials and resources require significant 33 advanced coordination; utility relocation by others is 34 dependent on staged construction; significant impacts to 35 businesses and communities require regular public 36 information reports; commitments to funding partners 37 (not legislative) for specific completion timeframes are 38 documented to exist. 39

40 Use requires concurrence of the Region Construction 41 Manager and the approval of the HQ Construction 42 Office. Must include with 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 43 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 44 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT1 .GR1, and 1-45 08.3(5).OPT2.GR1. 46 (1 fill-in) 47 Fill-in #1 is the current version of the scheduling 48 software. 49

50 1-08.3(3).GR1 Schedule Updates 51


Must use once preceding any of the following: 54


1 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1 (January 2, 2012) 2

Include in complex or high impact projects requiring the 3 use of a Type C Schedule as described for GSP 1-4 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 FR1 at the discretion of the Region 5 Construction Manager. Use requires the approval of the 6 HQ Construction Office. 7 Must include with 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 8 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1FR1, 9 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1, and 1-10 08.3(5).OPT2.GR1. 11

12 1-08.3(4).GR1 Measurement 13

14 1-08.3(4).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-08.3(4) is revised to read supplemented with the 15

following) 16 Must use once preceding any of the following: 17

18 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1 (August 5, 2013) 19

Include in complex or high impact projects requiring the 20 use of a Type C Schedule as described for GSP 1-21 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 FR1 at the discretion of the Region 22 Construction Manager. Use requires the approval of the 23 HQ Construction Office. Must include with 1-24 08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-25 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1FR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, and 26 1-08.3(5).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT2.GR1. 27

28 1-08.3(5).GR1 Payment 29

30 1-08.3(5).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-08.3(5) is revised to readsupplemented with the 31


34 1-08.3(5).OPT1.FR1GR1 (Schedule Update) 35

(January 7, 2019September 7, 2021) 36 Include in complex or high impact projects, requiring the 37 use of a Type C Schedule, as described for GSP 1-38 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1 FR1 at the discretion of the Region 39 Construction Manager. Use requires the approval of the 40 HQ Construction Office. Must include with 1-41 08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-42 08.3(2).OPT2.GR1FR1, 1-08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, and 43 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1, and 1-08.3(5).OPT2.GR1. 44 45

1-08.3(5).OPT2.FR1GR1 (Progress Schedule) 46 (January 7, 2019September 7, 2021) 47 Include in complex or high impact projects, requiring the 48 use of a Type C Schedule, as described for GSP 1-49 08.3(2).OPT2.FR1 at the discretion of the Region 50 Construction Manager. Use requires the approval of the 51 HQ Construction Office. Must include with 1-52 08.3(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(2).OPT2.FR1, 1-53


08.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1 and 1-1 08.3(5).OPT1.GR1. 2 Use in projects that have a Type B or Type C minimum 3 bid schedule. 4 (4 fill-ins) 5 Fill-in #1 is the schedule type. 6 Fill-in #2 is the minimum bid amount. 7 Fill-in #3 is the schedule type. 8 Fill-in #4 is the schedule type. 9 Must use with 1-02.6.OPT6.FR1. 10 11

1-08.4.GR1 Prosecution of Work 12 13

1-08.4.INST1.GR1 (The first sentence of Section 1-08.4 is revised to read) 14 Must use once preceding any of the following: 15

16 1-08.4.OPT1.FR1 (Establish starting date for roadway operations) 17

(August 3, 2015) 18 Must also use 1-08.5.OPT9.FR1. 19 At the discretion of the Region Administrator, use in short 20 term projects when a delayed start is desirable to allow the 21 Contractor some latitude in scheduling the work. 22 Recommendation by the Region Construction Office is 23 advised. 24 (1 fill-in) 25

26 1-08.4.OPT2.GR1 (Variable start: State controls start) 27

(August 7, 2006) 28 Use in contracts where the contractor shall start work 29 immediately after a happening or event to avoid high 30 impacts to the public. At the time of issuance of the contract 31 the date of that event or happening is not known. Region 32 Construction Engineer, or equivalent, approval is required to 33 use this provision. Must include 1-08.5.OPT1.FR1 and 1-34 08.5.OPT7.FR1. 35

36 1-08.4.OPT3.FR1 (Fixed start: State controls start) 37

(August 7, 2006) 38 Use in contracts where the contractor shall start work 39 immediately after a happening or event to avoid high 40 impacts to the public. At the time of issuance of the contract 41 the date of that event or happening is known. Region 42 Construction Engineer, or equivalent, approval is required to 43 use this provision. Must include 1-08.5.OPT2.FR1 and 1-44 08.5.OPT7.FR1. 45 (1 fill-in) 46

47 1-08.5.GR1 Time for Completion 48 49

1-08.5.INST1.GR1 (The third paragraph of Section 1-08.5 is revised to read) 50 Must use once preceding any of the following: 51

52 1-08.5.OPT1.FR1 (Variable start: State controls start) 53

(August 7, 2006) 54


Use in contracts where the contractor shall start work 1 immediately after a happening or event to avoid high 2 impacts to the public. At the time of issuance of the contract 3 the date of that event or happening is not known. Region 4 Construction Engineer, or equivalent, approval is required to 5 use this provision. Must include 6 1-08.4.OPT2.GR1 and 1-08.5.OPT7.FR1. 7 (2 fill-ins) Fill-ins are contract start times. 8 9

1-08.5.OPT2.FR1 (Fixed start: State controls start) 10 (August 7, 2006) 11 Use in contracts where the contractor shall start work 12 immediately after a happening or event to avoid high 13 impacts to the public. At the time of issuance of the contract 14 the date of that event or happening is known. Region 15 Construction Engineer, or equivalent, approval is required to 16 use this provision. Must include 17 1-08.4.OPT3.FR1 and 1-08.5.OPT7.FR1. 18 (1 fill-in) Fill-in is contract start time. 19



1-08.5.OPT7.FR1 (Time for physical completion) 24 (March 13, 1995) 25 Use in all projects not requiring one of the following "TIME 26 FOR COMPLETION" GSP's. 27 (1 fill-in) 28

29 1-08.5.OPT8.FR1 (Time for physical completion) 30

(March 13, 1995) 31 Must also use 1-08.9.OPT1.FR1. 32 Use in projects requiring an interim or temporary controller 33 for early use of a signal system and where an intermediate 34 physical completion time is required. 35 (2 fill-ins) 36

37 1-08.5.OPT9.FR1 (Time for physical completion) 38

(December 4, 2006) 39 Must also use 1-08.4.OPT1.FR1. 40 (2 fill-ins) 41 Fill-in #2 is the same as fill-in #1 for 1-08.4.OPT1.FR1. 42 43

1-08.5.OPT10.FR1 (Time for physical completion) 44 (March 13, 1995) 45 Use in projects with signal work and the Contracting Agency 46 furnishes the signal control equipment. 47 (1 fill-in) 48

49 1-08.5.OPT11.FR1 Incentive For Early Completion 50

(August 4, 2003) 51 Use in projects requiring an incentive for early completion. 52 Prior approval from the State Construction office is required 53 for the use of this GSP. 54


(4 fill-ins) 1 $$1$$, $$2$$ and $$4$$ are substantial or physical, $$3$$ 2 is dollar value established by the Region, must be justified 3 by road user costs. 4

5 1-08.6.GR1 Suspension of Work 6



1-08.6.OPT1.FR1 (Procurement Suspension) 11 (January 3, 2017) 12 Requires approval of HQ Construction. Use in projects 13 requiring materials that have long lead times for 14 procurement or fabrication, or proprietary/specialized 15 materials, HMA Mix Design evaluation, and procurement of 16 the materials or HMA Design evaluation is a controlling 17 factor in the time for completion. Not recommended if 18 material procurement or mix design approval are not critical 19 path items. Use 1-08.6.OPT2.FR1 instead, if project does 20 not include HMA paving. 21 22 Fill-in #1 identifies materials that are critical for timely 23 completion and require fabrication or long lead times for 24 procurement. Examples of critical materials may include: 25 Hot Mix Asphalt, landscaping (cultivated) items, permanent 26 signing, steel guardrail posts, ITS equipment, modular 27 expansion joints, bridge railing, hydraulic/electrical 28 rehabilitation components, bridge girders, steel jackets for 29 seismic retrofits, castings, single-source drain pipe, signal 30 controllers, light standards, or signal standards. 31 32 Fill-in #2 limits the duration of the suspension for acquisition 33 of critical materials. The duration of the suspension should 34 be appropriate for the work being performed, and will vary 35 according to the type of materials required. 36 37 The use of a short duration may be impossible to achieve or 38 may raise the cost of the project. 39 (2 fill-ins) 40 41

1-08.6.OPT2.FR1 (Procurement Suspension 42 (January 2, 2018) 43 Use in projects requiring materials that have long lead times 44 for procurement or fabrication, or proprietary/specialized 45 materials, and procurement of the materials is a controlling 46 factor in the time for completion. 47 (1 fill-in) 48

49 1-08.9.GR1 Liquidated Damages 50

51 1-08.9.INST2.GR1 (Section 1-08.9 is revised to read) 52



1-08.9.OPT1.FR1 (Failure to complete temporary signal system) 1 (March 13, 1995) 2 Use in projects requiring an interim or temporary controller 3 for early use of a signal system and where an intermediate 4 physical completion time is required. The Region must 5 determine the appropriate liquidated damages based on 6 road user costs. 7 Must also use 1-08.5.OPT8.FR1 and 1-08.9.OPT3.FR1. 8 (1 fill-in) 9 10

1-08.9.OPT2.FR1 (Interim Completion Liquidated Damages) 11 (April 6, 2009) 12 Use in projects where an interim completion time is desired 13 (such as the completion of a stage of work, lane closure, or 14 ITS disruption), and the Region determines that user costs 15 for failure to complete the specified portion of work, as 16 calculated by the Transportation Data Office, are significant 17 enough to warrant liquidated damages. Determination of the 18 liquidated damage amount must adhere to Chapter 700.01 19 of the Plans Prep Manual. 20 (6 fill-ins) $$1$$ describes the work to be completed; $$2$$ 21 is the user cost; $$3$$ and $$4$$ is the unit of time 22 (minutes, hours or days); $$5$$ is the smallest increment of 23 time that will be measured; and $$6$$ is the contract 24 provision that specifies the completion time. 25 Must also use 1-08.9.OPT3.FR1. 26



1-08.9.OPT3.FR1 (Liquidated Damages) 31 (September 8, 2020) 32 Use in all projects. 33 (1 fill-in) 34 Fill-in shall be the amount determined by the Design 35 Liquidated Damages Calculation Sheet: 36 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/ProjectDev/D37 esignLiquidatedDamagesCalculationSheet.xlsm. 38 39

1-09.GR1 Measurement and Payment 40 41

1-09.2.GR1 Weighing Equipment 42 43

1-09.2(1).GR1 General Requirements for Weighing Equipment 44 45

1-09.2(1).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-09.2(1) is revised to read as follows) 46 Must use once preceding any of the following: 47

48 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1 (January 3, 2011) 49

If the Region chooses the General Special for Contractor 50 Weighing can be inserted. This provision requires the 51 Contractor to supply a scale operator. But it goes much 52 further. If this provision is used, the entire weighing 53 operation becomes an end product specification. The 54


Contractor weighs the trucks and issues the tickets 1 without oversight of the scale, the operator or the 2 operation while it’s going on. The oversight occurs after 3 the truck leaves the scale, when the inspector will 4 randomly select loads and send them to an independent 5 scale. Variations between the ticket and the check 6 weights will result in pay adjustments. Must include 7 1-09.2(1).OPT7.FR1 or 1-09.2(1).OPT8.GR1. Must also 8 use 1-09.2(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(3).OPT1.GR1, 1-9 09.2(4).OPT1.GR1, 1-09.2(5).OPT1.GR1 and 1-10 09.2(6).OPT1.GR1. 11

12 1-09.2(1).OPT2.GR1 (Electronic Ticketing System) 13

(January 13, 2021) 14 Use in all projects unless using 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 15 Do not use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 16



1-09.2(1).OPT7.FR1 (Designated Scale) 21 (August 6, 2001) 22 The location and quality of the check scale become 23 important. It will be up to the Region to find an 24 independent scale and arrange for its use (including an 25 agreement to pay fees). This selection will have to be 26 made jointly with the Construction PE, taking into 27 account convenience and haul time to get to the scale. 28 The decision is communicated to bidders through a 29 second GSP designating a scale location. Fill-in is scale 30 location. Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1 if 1-31 09.2(1).OPT8.GR1 isn’t used. 32 (1 fill-in). 33 34

1-09.2(1).OPT8.GR1 (Installed Scale) 35 (January 3, 2011) 36 If the Region desires to use Contractor weighing and 37 cannot find a convenient scale, then an alternate to the 38 designated scale has been prepared. The GSP for 39 installed scale directs the Contractor to provide and 40 install the check scale at a designated location. This 41 provision contains a lump sum pay item for the work. 42 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1 if 1-43 09.2(1).OPT7.FR1 is not used. 44

45 1-09.2(2).GR1 Specific Requirements for Batching and Hopper Scales 46

47 1-09.2(2).OPT1.GR1 (August 6, 2001) 48

This GSP deletes Section 1-09.2(2). 49 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 50

51 1-09.2(3).GR1 Specific Requirements for Platform Scales 52 53

1-09.2(3).OPT1.GR1 (August 6, 2001) 54


This GSP deletes Section 1-09.2(3). 1 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 2

3 1-09.2(4).GR1 Specific Requirements for Belt Conveyor Scales 4 5

1-09.2(4).OPT1.GR1 (August 6, 2001) 6 This GSP deletes Section 1-09.2(3). 7 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 8

1-09.2(5).GR1 Measurement 9 10


13 1-09.2(5).OPT1.GR1 (January 3, 2011) 14

Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 15 16

1-09.2(6).GR1 Payment 17 18


21 1-09.2(6).OPT1.GR1 (January 3, 2011) 22

Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1. 23 24


27 1-09.2(6).OPT7.GR1 (Installed Scale) 28

(August 7, 2017) 29 Must use with 1-09.2(1).OPT8.GR1. 30 31

1-09.3.GR1 Scope of Payment 32 33


36 1-09.3.OPT1.FR1 Fuel Cost Adjustment 37

(August 7, 2017) 38 Use requires Region Construction Manager Approval and 39 concurrence from HQ Construction Office. At the Region’s 40 discretion, use in projects with more than 200 working days 41 that include any of the bid items that are eligible for 42 adjustment. Include an estimated amount for the bid item 43 “Fuel Cost Adjustment” in the Engineers Estimate. Only the 44 items described below are eligible for adjustment. 45 46 (2 or more fill-ins) Fill-ins are the bid items that are eligible 47 for adjustment, and fuel usage factors for those bid items. 48 49 To determine which Bid Items are eligible for Adjustment: 50 If the bid proposal contains items that fit the description of 51 the items listed below, then those bid items are eligible for 52 adjustment. 53 54


Eligible Bid Item Fuel Usage Factor 1 ____ Excavation Incl. Haul, per cubic yard 0.29 gal/cy 2 ____ Excavation Incl. Haul – 3 Area ____ per cubic yard 0.29 gal/cy 4 ____ Borrow Incl. Haul, per cubic yard 0.25 gal/cy 5 ____ Borrow Incl. Haul, per ton 0.17 gal/ton 6 Structure Excavation Class ___ 7 Incl. Haul, per cubic yard 0.25 gal/cy 8 Shoring or Extra Excavation Class A _____, 9 lump sum 0.04 gal/dollar 10 Crushed Surfacing ____, per ton 0.70 gal/ton 11 Crushed Surfacing ____, per cubic yard 1.02 gal/cy 12 Processing and Finishing, per mile 270 gal/mile 13 Agg. From Stockpile for BST, per cubic yard 14

0.61 gal/cy 15 Furnishing and Placing Crushed ____, 16 per cubic yard 1.02 gal/cy 17 HMA Cl. ____ PG ____, per ton 0.90 gal/ton 18 HMA for ____, per ton 0.90 gal/ton 19 Commercial HMA, per ton 0.90 gal/ton 20 Cement Concrete Pavement, per cubic yard 1.0 gal/cy 21 Cement Concrete Pavement - 22 Including Dowels, per cubic yard 1.0 gal/cy 23 Concrete Class ____, per cubic yard 1.0 gal/cy 24 Commercial Concrete, per cubic yard 1.0 gal/cy 25 Superstructure ____, lump sum 0.02 gal/dollar 26 St. Reinf. Bar, per pound 0.02 gal/Lb 27 Epoxy-Coated St. Reinf. Bar, per pound 0.02 gal/Lb 28 29 Determine the Engineers Estimate for the bid item “Fuel 30 Cost Adjustment”: 31 32 Base Fuel Cost and Estimated Monthly Fuel Cost: 33 34 Obtain the most current Monthly fuel price from the U.S. 35 Energy Information Administration website. The website 36 location and directions are as follows: 37 38

http://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/ 39 On the web page, click on the West Coast less 40

California, listed under the heading U.S On-41 Highway Diesel Fuel Prices*(dollar per 42 gallon) at the lower end of the web page. 43

In the pull down box labeled Period pull down 44 Monthly 45

Click on the fuel price history found under the 46 column heading View History for the line Diesel 47 (On-Highway) – All Types. 48

49 Multiply the Base Fuel Cost by the appropriate Contract 50 Duration Factor (below) to determine the Estimated 51 Monthly Fuel Cost. 52 53

Contract Duration Contract Duration Factor


200 Working days to 1 year 1.12

1 to 2 years 1.25

2 to 3 years 1.37

3 to 4 years 1.49

4 to 5 years 1.62

1 Estimate the amount of the Adjustment: 2 Use the formulas below. 3 4 Adjustment = (Est. Monthly Fuel Cost – (1.10 x Base 5 Fuel Cost)) x Q 6 7 Where Q = ((Fuel Usage Factor) x (Total Quantity of 8 each Eligible Bid Item)) for all Eligible Bid Items. 9 10 Sample Calculation: 11 My project is 300 working days. It contains 10,000 tons 12 of HMA Cl. 1/2” PG 70-22, and 500 tons of CSBC. 13 14 HMA Cl. 1/2” PG 70-22 is Eligible for Adjustment. 15 Crushed Surfacing Base Course is Eligible for 16 Adjustment. 17 18 From U.S. Energy Information Administration website : 19 most recent Monthly Fuel Price = 3.06 dollars per gallon. 20 This monthly price becomes the Base Fuel Cost. 21 22 Therefore: 23 Base Fuel Cost = 3.06 dollars/gal 24 Est. Monthly Fuel Cost = Base Fuel Cost x Contract 25 Duration Factor 26 Est. Monthly Fuel Cost = 3.06 x 1.25 = 3.825 dollars/gal 27 28 Q = (0.70 gal/ton x 500 tons) + (0.90gal/ton x 10,000 29 tons) 30 Q = 9,350 gal 31 32 Adjustment = (3.82 dollars/gal – (1.10 x 3.06 dollars/gal)) 33 x 9,350 gal 34 35 Adjustment = $4,291.65= $4,300 36

37 1-09.3.OPT2.FR1 Steel Cost Adjustments 38

(August 6, 2018) 39 Use in all projects that use quantities of steel in excess of 40 50,000 pounds, including non-proprietary walls, pedestrian 41 bridges and vehicular bridges. 42 43 Fill-in #1 is the initial cost basis of steel and should use a 44 value of $0.40/lb. Any deviation from the default value of 45 $0.40/lb requires approval of the HQ Construction Office. 46 47 Fill-in #2 is a list of the bid items that are eligible for steel 48 cost adjustment. This can include bid items that are entirely 49


composed of steel (e.g., Steel Reinforcing Bar for Bridge) 1 and can also include lump sum items that use significant 2 quantities of steel (e.g., Superstructure, Lump Sum). 3 Contact the HQ Strategic Analysis and Estimating Unit for 4 assistance preparing the Engineer’s Estimate for the bid 5 item "Steel Cost Adjustment." 6 (2 fill-ins) 7 8

1-09.8.GR1 Payment for Material On Hand 9 10

1-09.8.INST1.GR1 (The last paragraph of Section 1-09.8 is revised to read) 11 Must use once preceding any of the following: 12

13 1-09.8.OPT1.GR1 (August 3, 2009) 14

Use in projects that are over $2 million and have more than 15 120 working days. 16 17

1-09.9.GR1 Payments 18 19


22 1-09.9.OPT1.FB1 (March 13, 1995) 23

Use when items are designated for payment by proposal 24 quantity. Must be used only for retaining walls and bridge 25 substructure items for steel reinforcing bars, epoxy-coated 26 steel reinforcing bars, and concrete, except for shafts and 27 seals. 28 (1 fill-in) 29

30 1-09.9.OPT2.GR1 (Electronic Transmittal and Signature of the FCVC) 31

(April 30, 2020) 32 Use in all projects. 33 34

1-09.9(1).GR1 Retainage 35 36

1-09.9(1).INST1.GR1 (Section 1-09.9(1) including title is deleted and replaced 37 with the following) 38 Must use once preceding any of the following: 39 40

1-09.9(1).OPT1.GR1 (Vacant) 41 (June 27, 2011) 42 Use in all Federal Aid projects. 43

44 1-10.GR1 Temporary Traffic Control 45

46 1-10.1.GR1 General 47 48


51 1-10.1.OPT1.FR1 (Agency-Provided Traffic Control Resources) 52

(April 1, 2013) 53


Use on projects where the Region will be providing some 1 labor, equipment or material resource to the Contractor. 2 Typically will include signs, posts, pilot car drivers, etc. The 3 decision to provide resources and the use of this provision 4 requires the approval of the Region Construction Manager. 5

6 The first fill-in is a detailed list of the resources to be 7 provided. Include a description of the item, the quantity (if 8 appropriate), its location and any special instructions to the 9 Contractor for acquiring the item. Include a reference to the 10 description of work provision where the resource is to be 11 applied. The second fill-in is the number of working days you 12 want the Contractor to notify the Engineer before each 13 duration of use of the resources. 14

15 (2 fill-ins) 16

17 1-10.1.OPT2.FR1 (Agency-Arranged Law Enforcement) 18

(May 20, 2020) 19 Use on projects where the use of WSP personnel is 20 included in the Contract. The decision to use this provision 21 requires the approval of the ARA for Construction or 22 designee. 23 (2 fill-ins) 24 25 Fill-in #1 is a list of the specific duties the WSP personnel 26 may perform during active work zones. Refer to the WSDOT 27 Traffic Manual (M 51-02), Appendix 5.A, Exhibit 1, for a list 28 of specific recommended assignments. WSP should not be 29 shown on the traffic control plans and the duties should be 30 independent from the traffic control installation, operation 31 and removal. 32 Fill-in #2 is the number of hours that the Contracting Agency 33 will pay the full cost of these WSP duties. This number may 34 be zero if allowing the contractor to request the WSP duties 35 at a 50/50 cost-sharing option during the project is 36 determined acceptable. 37

38 1-10.1(1).GR1 Materials 39



1-10.1(1).OPT1.GR1 (Automated Flagger Assistance Devices) 44 (April 7, 2014) 45 Use in projects utilizing the Automated Flagger 46 Assistance Devices. Use of this provision requires the 47 approval of the Region Construction Manager or 48 designee. 49 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT1.GR1, 1-50 10.4(2).OPT2.GR1, and 1-10.5(2).OPT1.GR1. 51 52

1-10.2.GR1 Traffic Control Management 53 54


1-10.2(1).GR1 General 1 2


5 1-10.2(1).OPT1.GR1 (Acceptable TCS Training) 6

(January 3, 2017September 7, 2021) 7 Include in all projects that include the bid item Traffic 8 Control Supervisor, or include the bid item Project 9 Temporary Traffic Control. 10

11 1-10.2(1).OPT2.GR1 (Traffic Control Supervisor) 12

(January 5, 2015) 13 May be used on projects with temporary traffic control 14 where a greater experience level is desired for the 15 primary Traffic Control Supervisor. Typical projects 16 where use of the GSP would be considered may have 17 complex traffic control plans, increased risk of worker 18 safety, or impacts to the public. 19

20 1-10.3.GR1 Traffic Control Labor, Procedures and Devices 21



1-10.3.OPT1.FR1 (Contractor-Provided Uniformed Police Officers) 26 (May 20, 2020) 27 Use on projects where the traffic control plans show 28 Uniformed Police Officers performing traffic control-related 29 duties. 30 31 (1 fill-in) 32 The fill-in should provide contact information for local law 33 enforcement agencies that may be able to provide this 34 service. The WSP district contact for the project location may 35 also be provided. 36 37 Use with 1-10.4(2).OPT6.GR1 and 1-10.5(2).OPT5.GR1. 38 For use on WSDOT projects only. 39

40 1-10.3(3).GR1 Traffic Control Devices 41



1-10.3(3).OPT1.GR1 (Automated Flagger Assistance Devices) 46 (April 7, 2014) 47 Use in projects to include the Automated Flagger 48 Assistance Devices (AFAD). Use of this provision 49 requires the approval of the Region Construction 50 Manager or designee. 51 Must use with 1-10.1(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-52 10.4(2).OPT2.GR1, and 1-10.5(2).OPT1.GR1. 53

54


1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Signs) 1 (January 2, 2018) 2 Consider use on freeway projects when traffic will be 3 reduced to a single lane with temporary traffic control 4 and workers will be present in close proximity behind 5 channelization devices. Consider a regulatory speed 6 limit reduction when the single lane of traffic will be 7 shifted onto the shoulder away from the work area. The 8 Region Traffic Engineer will need to approve the speed 9 limit reduction. 10 Must use with 1-10.3(3)(9-35).OPT1.GR1, 1-11 10.4(2).OPT3.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1, and 1-12 10.5(2).OPT2.GR1. 13

14 1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1 (Smart Work Zone System) 15

(May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 16 Consider including a smart work zone system (SWZS) 17 for projects where daily or long long-term (4 or more 18 days) temporary traffic control restrictions will cause 19 regular or ongoing traffic congestion and delays in 20 approximately the same location. This system is 21 intended for queues up to 9 miles. Typical traffic control 22 plans are available for 6-mile and 9-mile systems. 23 Queue detection warning, dynamic lane merge, and 24 travel delay offer work zone queue mitigation. Queue 25 detection warning may be all that is required but 26 including dynamic lane merge to help reduce the 27 queuing and work zone travel delay information may be 28 included for larger traffic impacts. Consult your region 29 traffic engineer for assistance. 30 31 If Project Temporary Traffic Control is lump sum (with 32 reinstated items), use with 1-10.4(3).OPT2.GR1 and 1-33 10.5(2).OPT3.GR1. 34 35 If Project Temporary Traffic Control is not lump sum (item 36 bids with lump sum for incidentals), use with 1-37 10.4(2).OPT5.GR1 and 1-10.5(2).OPT4OPT3.GR1. 38

39 1-10.3(3).OPT4.FR1 (Queue Warning System) 40

(September 7, 2021) 41 Consider including a queue warning system (QWS) for 42 projects where daily, nightly, weekend, or durations up to 43 one week where temporary traffic control restrictions will 44 cause intermittent traffic congestion and delays in 45 different locations as closures move with work 46 operations (such as pavers) but also in the same 47 location. This system is intended for queues of up to 3 48 miles. Freeway Typical Traffic Control Plans will soon be 49 updated to include the Queue Warning System option 50 (Sheet 1A). Queue detection warning and dynamic lane 51 merge offer work zone queue mitigation. Consult region 52 traffic engineer for assistance. 53


If Project Temporary Traffic Control is lump sum (with 1 reinstated items), use with 1-10.4(3).OPT3.GR1 and 1-2 10.5(2).OPT4.GR1. 3 4 If Project Temporary Traffic Control is not lump sum (item 5 bids with lump sum for incidentals), use with 1-6 10.4(2).OPT7.GR1 and 1-10.5(2).OPT4.GR1. 7

8 1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).GR1 (Section 9-35.8 is revised to read) 9


1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).OPT1.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Signs) 12 (April 1, 2019) 13 Use on projects that will be utilizing Radar Speed Display 14 Signs. The Region Traffic Engineer will need to approve 15 the speed limit reduction. 16 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1, 1-17 10.4(2).OPT3.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1, and 1-18 10.5(2).OPT2.GR1. 19

20 1-10.4.GR1 Measurement 21

One of these three GSPs must be included in every project with 22 traffic control: 1-10.4(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-23 10.4(3).OPT1.FR1. 24

25 1-10.4(1).GR1 Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items) 26 27


30 1-10.4(1).OPT1.GR1 (Total Project Lump Sum Payment) 31

(August 2, 2004) 32 Use on projects where there will be only one item for all 33 temporary traffic control in the bid proposal. Lump sum 34 traffic control requires the establishment of a lump sum 35 item and the deletion of all other standard temporary 36 traffic control items. 37

38 This method of payment may be used any project with 39 the approval of the Region Construction Manager or 40 designee. It is not recommended for projects with traffic 41 control costs that are difficult to determine as the bidder 42 must have a reasonable opportunity to predict the 43 necessary temporary traffic control measures and 44 prepare a responsible estimate. 45 46 Do not use with 1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1 or 47 1-10.4(3).OPT1.FR1. 48

49 1-10.4(2).GR1 Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals 50 51


54


1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1 (Standard Items) 1 (August 2, 2004) 2 Use on projects that will be utilizing the Traffic Control 3 Bid items referenced in the provisions. While there may 4 be lump sum Bid items within that list, this is not a total-5 project lump sum bid. 6 7 Do not use with 1-10.4(1).OPT1.GR1 or 8 1-10.4(3).OPT1.FR1. 9 10

1-10.4(2).OPT2.GR1 (Automated Flagger Assistance Devices) 11 (April 7, 2014) 12 Use on projects that will be utilizing Automated Flagger 13 Assistance Devices. Use of this provision requires the 14 approval of the Region Construction Manager or 15 designee. 16 Must use with 1-10.1(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-17 10.3(3).OPT1.GR1, and 1-10.5(2).OPT1.GR1. 18 19

1-10.4(2).OPT3.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Signs) 20 (January 2, 2018) 21 Use on projects that will be utilizing Radar Speed Display 22 Signs. The Region Traffic Engineer will need to approve 23 the speed limit reduction. 24 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1, 1-10.3(3)(9-25 35).OPT1.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1, and 1-26 10.5(2).OPT2.GR1. 27 28

1-10.4(2).OPT5.GR1 (Smart Work Zone System) 29 (May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 30 Use on projects when a Smart Work Zone System will 31 be utilized and Project Temporary Traffic Control is not 32 lump sum. 33 34 Use with 1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1 and 1-35 10.5(2).OPT4OPT3.GR1. 36 Do not use with 1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1, 1-37 10.4(3).OPT1.FR1, or 1-10.4(3).OPT2.GR1. 38 39

1-10.4(2).OPT6.GR1 (Contractor Provided Uniformed Police Officer) 40 (May 20, 2020) 41 Use on projects where the traffic control plans show 42 Uniformed Police Officers performing traffic control-43 related duties 44 45 Use with 1-10.3.OPT1.GR1 and 1-10.5(2).OPT5.GR1. 46 47

1-10.4(2).OPT7.GR1 (Queue Warning System) 48 (September 7, 2021) 49 Use on projects when a Queue Warning System will be 50 utilized and Project Temporary Traffic Control is not lump 51 sum. 52 53 Use with 1-10.3(3).OPT4.FR1 & 1-10.5(2).OPT4.GR1. 54


1 1-10.4(2).INST2.GR1 (The sixth bullet of the third paragraph in Section 1-10.4(2) 2

is revised to read) 3 Must use once preceding any of the following: 4

5 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Sign) 6

(January 2, 2018) 7 Use on projects that will be utilizing Radar Speed Display 8 Signs. The Region Traffic Engineer will need to approve 9 the speed limit reduction. 10 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1, 1-10.3(3)(9-11 35).OPT1.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT3.GR1, and 1-12 10.5(2).OPT2.GR1. 13

14 1-10.4(3).GR1 Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control 15 16


19 1-10.4(3).OPT1.FR1 (Project Lump Sum) 20

(August 2, 2004) 21 Use on projects that will be total project lump sum except 22 that some other traffic control Bid items will be utilized on 23 the project. Use of this provision requires the approval of 24 the Region Construction Manager or designee. 25

26 This method of payment might be applied to a job that 27 would be total project lump sum except that some part of 28 the work is not readily predictable. The need for Flaggers 29 might be unclear or there could be an indeterminate 30 future need for public information utilizing Portable 31 Changeable Message Signs. 32 33 The fill-in for this provision is a list of the traffic control 34 Bid items that are included according to Sections 1-35 10.4(3) and 1-10.5(3). Do not use with 1-36 10.4(1).OPT1.GR1 or 1-10.4(2).OPT1.GR1. 37 (1 fill-in) 38

39 1-10.4(3).OPT2.GR1 (Project Temporary Traffic Control Lump Sum – Smart 40

Work Zone System) 41 (May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 42 Use on projects that will be total project lump sum except 43 for and selected Bid items, including the operation of 44 Smart Work Zone System Bid items, will be utilized on 45 the project. Use of this provision requires the approval of 46 the Region Construction Manager or designee. 47

48 Use with 1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1 and 1-49 10.5(2).OPT3.GR1. 50 Do not use with 1-10.4(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-51 10.4(2).OPT1.GR1, or 1-10.4(3).OPT1.FR1. 52

53


1-10.4(3).OPT3.GR1 (Project Temporary Traffic Control Lump Sum Queue 1 Warning System) 2 (September 7, 2021) 3 Use on projects that will be project lump sum and 4 selected Bid items, including the Operation of Queue 5 Warning System, will be utilized on the project. Use of 6 this provision requires the approval of the Region 7 Construction Manager or designee. 8 9 Use with 1-10.3(3).OPT4.FR1 and 1-10 10.5(2).OPT4.GR1. 11

12 1-10.5.GR1 Payment 13

14 1-10.5(2).GR1 Item Bids with Lump Sum for Incidentals 15



1-10.5(2).OPT1.GR1 (Automated Flagger Assistance Devices) 20 (April 7, 2014) 21 Use in projects utilizing Automated Flagger Assistance 22 Devices. Use of this provision requires the approval of 23 the Region Construction Manager or designee. 24 Must use with 1-10.1(1).OPT1.GR1, 1-25 10.3(3).OPT1.GR1, and 1-10.4(2).OPT2.GR1. 26

27 1-10.5(2).OPT2.GR1 (Radar Speed Display Signs) 28

(January 2, 2018) 29 Use in projects utilizing Radar Speed Display Signs. The 30 Region Traffic Engineer will need to approve the speed 31 limit reduction. 32 Must use with 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1, 1-10.3(3)(9-33 35).OPT1.GR1, 1-10.4(2).OPT3.GR1, and 1-34 10.4(2).OPT4.GR1. 35

36 1-10.5(2).OPT3.GR1 (Smart Work Zone System) 37

(May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 38 Use in projects when a Smart Work Zone System will be 39 utilized and Project Temporary Traffic Control is lump 40 sum. 41 42 When using Project Temporary Traffic Control with 43 reinstated items, use with 1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1 and 1-44 10.4(3).OPT2.GR1. 45 46 When using Bid items with lump sum for incidentals (no 47 lump sum traffic control), use with 1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1 48 and 1-10.4(2).OPT5.GR1. 49 50

1-10.5(2).OPT4.GR1 (Smart Work ZoneQueue Warning System) 51 (May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 52


Use on projects when a Smart Work ZoneQueue 1 Warning System will be utilized. and Project Temporary 2 Traffic Control is not lump sum. 3 4 When using Project Temporary Traffic Control with 5 reinstated items, use with 1-10.3(3).OPT4.FR1 and 1-6 10.4(3).OPT3.GR1. 7 8 When using Bid items with lump sum for incidentals (no 9 lump sum traffic control), use with 1-10.3(3).OPT4.FR1 10 and 1-10.4(2).OPT7.GR1. 11 12 Use with 1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1 and 1-13 10.4(2).OPT5.GR1. 14 15

1-10.5(2).OPT5.GR1 (Contractor Provided Uniformed Police Officer) 16 (May 20, 2020) 17 Use on projects where the traffic control plans show 18 Uniformed Police Officers performing traffic control-19 related duties 20 21 Use with 1-10.3.OPT1.GR1 and 1-10.4(2).OPT6.GR1. 22

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

General Special Provisions Division Intro Page 1 September 7, 2021

INTRO.GR1 1

INTRODUCTION 2 3 This Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the 2021 2022 Standard Specifications 4 for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. 5 6

SPECIAL PROVISIONS 7 8 Several types of Special Provisions are included in this contract; General, Region, Bridges 9 and Structures, and Project Specific. Special Provisions types are differentiated as follows: 10 11

(date) General Special Provision 12 (******) Notes a revision to a General Special Provision 13 and also notes a Project Specific Special 14 Provision. 15 (Regions1 date) Region Special Provision 16 17

General Special Provisions are similar to Standard Specifications in that they typically apply 18 to many projects, usually in more than one Region. Usually, the only difference from one 19 project to another is the inclusion of variable project data, inserted as a “fill-in”. 20 21 Region Special Provisions are commonly applicable within the designated Region. Region 22 designations are as follows: 23 24

Regions1 25 ER Eastern Region 26 NCR North Central Region 27 NWR Northwest Region 28 OR Olympic Region 29 SCR South Central Region 30 SWR Southwest Region 31 32 WSF Washington State Ferries Division 33

34 Project Specific Special Provisions normally appear only in the contract for which they were 35 developed. 36

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

General Special Provisions Division 1-02 Page 1 September 7, 2021

1-02.GR1 1

Bid Procedures and Conditions 2 3 1-02.1.GR1 4

Prequalification of Bidders 5 6 1-02.1.INST1.GR1 7 Section 1-02.1, including title, is deleted and replaced with the following: 8 9 1-02.1.OPT1.GR1 10

(April 2, 2018) 11

Vacant 12 13 1-02.4.GR1 14

Examination of Plans, Specifications and Site of Work 15 16 1-02.4(1).GR1 17

General 18 19 1-02.4(1).INST1.GR1 20

Section 1-02.4(1) is supplemented with the following: 21 22 1-02.4(1).OPT1.FR1 23

(September 3, 2019) 24 The Reference Information for this project is available for review by the bidder at the 25 following location: 26

27 *** $$1$$ *** 28

29 The Reference Information includes the following: 30

31 *** $$2$$ *** 32

33 1-02.5.GR1 34

Proposal Forms 35 36 1-02.5.INST1.GR1 37 The first paragraph of Section 1-02.5 is revised to read: 38 39 1-02.5.OPT1.GR1 40

(February 25, 2021) 41 Bidders are authorized to access an electronic Proposal Form for submittal via 42 AASHTOWare Project Bids™ software and BidExpress®.At the request of a Bidder, the 43 Contracting Agency will provide a physical Proposal Form for any project on which the 44 Bidder is eligible to Bid. 45

46 1-02.6.GR1 47

Preparation of Proposal 48 49


1-02.6.INST2.GR1 1 The fourth paragraph of Section 1-02.6 is revised to read: 2 3 1-02.6.OPT2.GR1 4

(November 9, 2020) 5 The Bidder shall submit with the Bid a completed Disadvantaged Business Enterprise 6 (DBE) Utilization Certification, when required by the Special Provisions. For each and 7 every DBE firm listed on the Bidder’s completed Disadvantaged Business Enterprise 8 Utilization Certification, the Bidder shall submit written confirmation from that DBE firm 9 that the DBE is in agreement with the DBE participation commitment that the Bidder has 10 made in the Bidder’s completed Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 11 Certification. WSDOT Form 422-031 (Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written 12 Confirmation Document) is to be used for this purpose. Bidder must submit good faith 13 effort documentation only in the event the bidder’s efforts to solicit sufficient DBE 14 participation have been unsuccessful. The Bidder shall submit a DBE Bid Item 15 Breakdown form defining the scope of work to be performed by each DBE listed on the 16 DBE Utilization Certification. If the Bidder lists a DBE Trucking firm on the DBE Utilization 17 Certification, then the Bidder must also submit a DBE Trucking Credit Form (WSDOT 18 Form 272-058) documenting how the DBE Trucking firm will be able to perform the scope 19 of work subcontracted to them. Directions for delivery of the Disadvantaged Business 20 Enterprise Written Confirmation Documents, Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Good 21 Faith Effort documentation, DBE Bid Item Breakdown Form and the DBE Trucking Credit 22 Form are included in Section 1-02.9. 23

24 1-02.6.OPT3.GR1 25 (August 2, 2004) 26 The fifth and sixth paragraphs of Section 1-02.6 are deleted. 27 28 1-02.6.INST3.GR1 29 Section 1-02.6 is supplemented with the following: 30 31 1-02.6.OPT4.FR1 32

(April 2, 2018September 7, 2021) 33

Alternative Bids 34 The bidding proposal on this project permits the Bidder to submit a Bid on one or more 35 alternatives for the construction *** $$1$$ ***. 36 37

Bid Proposal 38 The bid proposal is composed of the following parts: Base Bid and Alternatives *** 39 $$2$$ *** i.e. A1, A2, etc. 40 41 The base bid includes all items that do not change as to quantity, dimension, or type 42 of construction, regardless of which alternative is Bid. 43 44 The Alternative portions of the bid proposal contain all items which change as to 45 quantity, dimension, or construction method, depending on which alternative is Bid. 46 47 Alternative A1 48 Alternative A1 is based on constructing the *** $$3$$ ***. 49 50 The bid items for Alternative A1 are as listed in the bid proposal. 51


1 Alternative A2 2 Alternative A2 is based on constructing the *** $$4$$ ***. 3 4 The bid items for Alternative A2 are as listed in the bid proposal. 5 6 Bidding Procedures 7 The Bidder shall submit a price on each and every item of Work included in the base 8 bid. The Bidder shall also submit prices on each and every item under the alternative 9 on which the Bidder chooses to bid, or, if the Bidder chooses to bid on more than one 10 alternative, the Bidder shall submit prices for each and every item under each 11 alternative chosen. If the Bidder chooses to bid on more than one alternative, the 12 Bidder shall submit their sealed Bid in the envelope provided by the Contracting 13 Agency using the Proposal Form provided. If the Bidder chooses to Bid on more than 14 one alternative, the Bid cannot be accepted electronically via Trns∙Port Expedite® 15 software and AASHTOWare Project BidsTM “BidExpress®.” 16 17 The successful Bidder will be determined by the lowest total of an alternative plus 18 the base bid. Award will be based on the lowest total subject to the requirements of 19 Section 1-03. 20

21 1-02.6.OPT5.FR1 22

(August 3, 2015) 23

Cumulative Alternates Bidding 24 The Bid Proposal for this Contract requires the Bidder to bid cumulative Alternates as part 25 of the bid. As such the Bidder is required to submit a Base Bid and a bid for each of the 26 Alternate(s). 27 28

Bid Proposal 29 The Bid Proposal includes the following: 30 31

1. Base Bid 32 The Base Bid shall include constructing all items included in the Proposal 33 except those items contained in the Alternate(s). 34 35

2. Alternate(s) 36 37

a. Alternate A1 38 Based on constructing (*** $$1$$ ***) 39 The Bid items for Alternate A1 are as listed in the Bid Proposal. 40 41

b. Alternate A2 42 Based on constructing (*** $$2$$ ***) 43 The Bid items for Alternate A2 are as listed in the Bid Proposal. 44 45

c. Alternate A3 46 Based on constructing (*** $$3$$ ***) 47 The Bid items for Alternate A3 are as listed in the Bid Proposal. 48

49


Bidding Procedures 1 To be considered responsive the Bidder shall submit a price on each and every Bid 2 item included in the Base Bid and all Alternate(s.) 3

4 The successful Bidder will be the Bidder submitting the lowest responsible Bid for 5 the highest order Preference that is within the amount of available funds for the 6 project. Available funds will be announced immediately prior to the opening of Bids. 7 The following are listed in order from highest to lowest Preference: 8 9

1. Preference 1: Lowest total for Base Bid plus Alternate A1 plus Alternate A2 10 plus Alternate A3, plus etcetera. 11

12 2. Preference 2: Lowest total for Base Bid plus Alternate A1 plus Alternate A2 13

plus Alternate A3. 14 15 3. Preference 3: Lowest total for Base Bid plus Alternate A1 plus Alternate A2. 16 17 4. Preference 4: Lowest total for Base Bid plus Alternate A1. 18 19 5. Preference 5: Lowest total for Base Bid. 20

21 The Contracting Agency may, at their discretion, award a Contract for the Base Bid, 22 without any additional Alternates, in the event that all Bids exceed the available funds 23 announced. In any case, the award will be subject to the requirements of Section 1-24 03. 25

26 1-02.6.OPT6.FR1 27

(January 7, 2019) 28

Progress Schedule Minimum Bid 29 A minimum bid of *** $$1$$ *** lump sum has been established for the item “Min Bid Req 30 - Type *** $$2$$ *** Progress Schedule *** $$3$$ ***.” The Contractor’s bid shall equal 31 or exceed that amount. If the Contractor’s bid is less than the minimum specified amount, 32 the Contracting Agency will unilaterally revise the bid amount to the minimum specified 33 amount and recalculate the Contractor’s total bid amount. The corrected total bid amount 34 will be used by the Contracting Agency for award purposes and to fix the amount of the 35 contract bond. 36

37 1-02.6.OPT7.FR1 38

(January 7, 2019) 39 A minimum bid of *** $$1$$ *** per each has been established for the item “Min Bid Req 40 - Schedule Update *** $$2$$ ***.” The Contractor’s bid shall equal or exceed that amount. 41 If the Contractor’s bid is less than the minimum specified amount, the Contracting Agency 42 will unilaterally revise the bid amount to the minimum specified amount and recalculate 43 the Contractor’s total bid amount. The corrected total bid amount will be used by the 44 Contracting Agency for award purposes and to fix the amount of the contract bond. 45

46 1-02.6.INST4.GR1 47 Item number 3 in the second paragraph of Section 1-02.6 is supplemented with the following: 48 49 1-02.6.OPT8.FR1 50

(September 3, 2019) 51


The successful Bidder will be the Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid that does 1 not exceed the maximum funds available. The maximum funds available for this Contract 2 is *** $$1$$ ***. 3 4 Submitting a Proposal that exceeds the maximum funds available will result in the 5 Proposal being declared irregular and shall cause the Bid to be rejected by the 6 Contracting Agency. Submitted Proposals that exceed the maximum funds available will 7 be opened publicly in accordance with Section 1-02.12 prior to being rejected. 8

9 1-02.9.GR1 10

Delivery of Proposal 11 12 1-02.9.INST1.GR1 13 Section 1-02.9 is supplemented with the following: 14 15 1-02.9.OPT1.GR1 16

(February 25September 7, 2021) 17

DBE Document Submittal Requirements 18 When a Proposal is submitted the following documents may be submitted as a 19 supplement to the Proposal: 20 21

1. DBE Utilization Certification (WSDOT Form 272-056); 22 23 2. DBE Written Confirmation Documents (WSDOT Form 422-031); 24 25 3. Good Faith Effort Documentation (GFE); 26 27 4. DBE Bid Item Breakdown (WSDOT Form 272-054); 28 29 5. DBE Trucking Credit Form (WSDOT Form 272-058). 30 31

The Bidder shall submit these supplemental documents as follows: 32 33

1. Physically in a sealed envelope marked as “BID SUPPLEMENT” and bearing 34 the Bidder’s company name, project title, Bid date, and description of all 35 contents (i.e., DBE Utilization Certification, DBE Written Confirmation 36 Documents, DBE Bid Item Breakdown Form, DBE Trucking Credit Form, and/or 37 DBE GFE Documentation); or 38

39 2. By facsimile to the following FAX number: 360-705-6966; or 40 41 3. By e-mail to the following e-mail address: [email protected] 42

43

DBE Utilization Certification 44 The DBE Utilization Certification shall be received at the same location and no later than 45 the time required for delivery of the Proposal. The Contracting Agency will not open or 46 consider any Proposal when the DBE Utilization Certification is received after the time 47 specified for receipt of Proposals or received in a location other than that specified for 48 receipt of Proposals. The DBE Utilization Certification may be submitted in the same 49 envelope as the Bid deposit. 50 51


NOTE: If the Bid is submitted electronically via AASHTOWare Project Bids™ 1 software, and “BidExpress,” the DBE Utilization Certification may be attached to 2 the electronic bid or submitted as a supplemental document as defined above. 3 4

DBE Written Confirmation and/or GFE Documentation 5 The DBE Written Confirmation Documents and/or GFE Documents are not required to be 6 submitted with the Proposal. The DBE Written Confirmation Document(s) and/or GFE (if 7 any) shall be received either with the Bid Proposal or as a Supplement to the Bid. The 8 documents shall be received no later than 48 hours (not including Saturdays, Sundays 9 and Holidays) after the time for delivery of the Proposal. To be considered responsive, 10 Bidders shall submit Written Confirmation Documentation from each DBE firm listed on 11 the Bidder’s completed DBE Utilization Certification and/or the GFE as required by 12 Section 1-02.6. 13 14

DBE Bid Item Breakdown and DBE Trucking Credit Form 15 The DBE Bid Item Breakdown and the DBE Trucking Credit Forms (if applicable), shall 16 be received either with the Bid Proposal or as a Supplement to the Bid. The documents 17 shall be received no later than 48 hours (not including Saturdays, Sundays and Holidays) 18 after the time for delivery of the Proposal. To be considered responsive, Bidders shall 19 submit a completed DBE Bid Item Breakdown and a DBE Trucking Credit Form for each 20 DBE Trucking firm listed on the DBE Utilization Certification, however, minor errors and 21 corrections to DBE Bid Item Breakdown or DBE Trucking Credit Forms will be returned 22 for correction for a period up to five calendar days (not including Saturdays, Sundays and 23 Holidays) after the time for delivery of the Proposal. A DBE Bid Item Breakdown or DBE 24 Trucking Credit Forms that are still incorrect after the correction period will be determined 25 to be non-responsive. 26 27 Although the DBE Bid Item Breakdown and DBE Trucking Credit Form are required as 28 part of a responsive Bid Proposal, the information contained in these documents is used 29 solely for Award purposes and will not be included as part of the executed Contract. 30 31 The only documents that can be accepted after the 11:00:59 am time for delivery of 32 Proposal are the Written Confirmation Documentation, the DBE Bid Item Breakdown 33 Form, the DBE Trucking Credit Form, and/or GFE. Incomplete or inaccurate documents 34 will be rejected, except as detailed above for the DBE Bid Item Breakdown Form and DBE 35 Trucking Credit Form. The Contracting Agency is not responsible for delayed, partial, 36 failed, illegible or partially legible FAX or e-mail document transmissions, and such 37 documents may be rejected as incomplete at the Bidder’s risk. 38

39 1-02.9.INST2.GR1 40 The first sentence of the first paragraph of Section 1-02.9 is revised to read: 41 42 1-02.9.OPT2.GR1 43

(February 25, 2021) 44 For projects scheduled for Bid opening in Olympia, the Proposal shall be sealed and 45 submitted in the envelope provided with it to the address provided below or shall be 46 submitted electronically via AASHTOWare Project Bids™ software and BidExpress®. 47

48 1-02.12.GR1 49

Public Opening of Proposals 50 51


1-02.12.INST1.GR1 1 Section 1-02.12 is supplemented with the following: 2 3 1-02.12.OPT1.FR1 4

(August 3, 2015) 5

Date of Opening Bids 6 The bid opening date for this project is *** $$1$$ ***. Bids received will be publicly opened 7 and read after 11:00:59 A. M. Pacific Time on this date. 8

9 1-02.INST1.GR1 10 Section 1-02 is supplemented with the following: 11 12 1-02.OPT1.GR1 13

(April 5, 2004) 14

Protest Procedures 15 Form and Substance 16 All protests regarding any contents or portion of the bid proposal must be submitted 17 to the Contracting Agency as soon as possible after the protestant becomes aware 18 of the reason(s) for the protest. All protests must be in writing and signed by the 19 protestant or an authorized agent. Such writing must state all facts and arguments 20 on which the protestant is relying as the basis for its action. Such protestant shall 21 also attach, or supply on demand by the Contracting Agency, any relevant exhibits 22 referenced in the writing. Copies of all protests and exhibits shall be mailed or 23 delivered by the protestant to the bidder against whom the protest is made (if any) at 24 the same time such protest and exhibits are submitted to the Contracting Agency. All 25 protests shall be directed to: 26 27

Washington State Department of Transportation 28 Attn: Manager, Contract Ad & Award 29 PO Box 47360 30 Olympia, Washington 98504-7360 31 Phone: (360) 705-7017 32 Fax: (360) 705-6810 33 34

Pre-award Protests 35 To allow sufficient response time, all pre-award protests must be received by the 36 contracting agency no later than 5:00 p.m. of the second business day after the bid 37 opening date. If the protest is mailed after the bid opening date and before the pre-38 award protest deadline, the protestant shall immediately notify WSDOT’s Manager, 39 Contract Ad & Award by telephone, or some other means of rapid communication, 40 that a protest has been made. 41 42 The Contracting Agency shall consider all the facts available to it, and issue a 43 decision in writing within five (5) business days after receipt of the protest, unless, in 44 the Contracting Agency's sole discretion, more time is needed. The protestant and 45 the bidder(s) against whom the protest is made will be notified if additional time is 46 necessary; and if the additional time required affects the bid opening date or the 47 award date, all bidders shall be notified. 48 49 The Contracting Agency’s decision shall be final and conclusive. Selection of the 50 successful bidder, if one is to be made, will be postponed until after the Contracting 51


Agency has issued its decision. The Contracting Agency shall provide the protestant 1 with written notice of this decision no later than two full working days prior to 2 execution of the contract. 3 4 Post-award Protests 5 The Contracting Agency shall immediately notify all unsuccessful bidders of the 6 Contracting Agency’s award decision. Any decision made by the Contracting Agency 7 regarding the award and execution of the contract or bid rejection shall be conclusive 8 subject to the scope of the judicial review permitted under Washington Law. Such 9 review, if any, shall be timely filed in the Superior Court of Thurston County, 10 Washington. 11 12 Protests which do not comply with the above-specified procedures will not be 13 considered. 14

15


1-03.GR1 1

Award and Execution of Contract 2 3 1-03.2.GR1 4

Award of Contract 5 6 1-03.2.INST1.GR1 7 The first sentence of Section 1-03.2 is revised to read: 8 9 1-03.2.OPT1.GR1 10

(April 7, 2008) 11 It is the Contracting Agency's intent to award the Contract within 24 hours of the bid 12 opening. 13

14 1-03.3.GR1 15

Execution Of Contract 16 17 1-03.3.INST1.GR1 18 Section 1-03.3 is supplemented with the following: 19 20 1-03.3.OPT1.GR1 21

(August 5, 2013September 7, 2021) 22

Escrow Bid Documentation 23 Scope and Purpose 24 The purpose of this specification is to preserve the Contractor's bid documentations 25 for use by the Contracting Agency in any litigation between the Contracting Agency 26 and Contractor arising out of this Contract. 27 28 The Contractor shall submit a legible copy of all documentation used to prepare the 29 Bid for this Contract to a escrow institution designated by the Contracting Agency. 30 Such documentation shall be placed in escrow with the escrow institution and 31 preserved by that institution as specified in the following sections of this specification. 32 33 Bid Documentation 34 The term "bid documentation" as used in this specification means any writings, 35 working papers, computer printouts, charts, and any other data compilations which 36 contain or reflect all information, data, and calculations used by the Contractor to 37 determine the Bid in bidding for this project. The Contractor shall submit its 38 documentation in whatever format it was created and shall also provide electronic 39 copies. The term "bid documentation" includes but is not limited to Contractor 40 equipment rates, Contractor overhead rates, labor rates, efficiency or productivity 41 factors, arithmetic extensions, and quotations from Subcontractors and materialmen 42 providers to the extent that such rates and quotations were used by the Contractor 43 in formulating and determining the amount of the bid. The term "bid documentation" 44 also includes any manuals which are standard to the industry used by the Contractor 45 in determining the bid for this project. Such manuals (including year of publication) 46 may be included in the Bid Documentation by reference. The term does not include 47 bid documents provided by the Contracting Agency for use by the Contractor in 48 bidding on this project. 49 50


Submittal of Bid Documentation 1 The Contractor shall submit the bid documentation to the escrow institution. The bid 2 documentation shall be submitted to the escrow institution within seven calendar 3 days after the Contract for this project has been executed by the Contracting Agency. 4 The bid documentation shall be submitted in a sealed container. The container shall 5 be clearly marked "Bid Documentation" and shall also show on the face of the 6 container the Contractor's name, the date of submittal, the project title, and the 7 contract number. 8 9 Affidavit 10 The sealed container shall contain, in addition to the bid documentation, an affidavit 11 signed under oath by an individual authorized by the Contractor to execute bidding 12 proposals. The affidavit shall list each bid document with sufficient specificity so a 13 comparison can be made between the list and the bid documentation to ensure that 14 all of the bid documentation listed in the affidavit has been enclosed in the sealed 15 container. The affidavit shall show that the affiant has personally examined the bid 16 documentation and that the affidavit lists all of the documents used by the Contractor 17 to determine the Bid for this project and that all such bid documentation has been 18 enclosed in the sealed container. 19 20 Verification 21 The escrow institution upon receipt of the sealed container shall place the container 22 in a safety deposit box, vault, or other secure place, and immediately notify the 23 Contracting Agency in writing that the container has been received. Upon receipt of 24 such notice, the Contracting Agency will promptly notify the Contractor in writing that 25 the Contracting Agency will open the sealed container to verify that the affidavit has 26 been enclosed and to compare the bid documents listed in the affidavit with the bid 27 documents enclosed in the container to ensure that all of the bid documentation has 28 been submitted and that the copies are legible. The notification will advise the 29 Contractor of the date and time the container will be opened and the name of the 30 Contracting Agency employee who will verify the contents of the container. The 31 Contracting Agency employee verifying the contents of the escrow container will not 32 be involved or connected with the review, evaluation, or resolution of any claim by 33 the Contractor made to the Contracting Agency in connection with the contract for 34 which the verification was made. The Contractor may have representatives present 35 at the opening. 36

37 Supplementation 38 Documents listed in the affidavit but not enclosed in the sealed container through 39 error or oversight shall be submitted in a sealed container within five calendar days 40 after the opening of the original container. Also, any bid documentation that is 41 illegible shall be replaced with legible copies and furnished within five calendar days 42 after the opening of the original container. The face of the container shall show the 43 same information as the original container except the container shall be marked 44 "Supplemental Bid Documentation". The same procedure used in verifying the 45 contents of the original container shall be used in verifying the contents of the 46 supplemental submittal. 47 48 Duration and Use 49 The bid documentation and affidavit shall remain in escrow during the life of the 50 Contract and will be returned to the Contractor by the escrow institution, provided 51


that the Contractor has signed the final contract voucher certification and has not 1 reserved any claims on the final contract voucher certification against the Contracting 2 Agency arising out of the Contract. In the event that claims against the Contracting 3 Agency are reserved on the final contract voucher certification, the bid 4 documentation and affidavit shall remain in escrow. If the claims are not resolved 5 and litigation ensues, the Contracting Agency may serve a request upon the 6 Contractor to authorize the escrow institution, in writing, to release the bid 7 documentation and affidavit in escrow to the Contracting Agency. The Contractor 8 shall respond to the request within 20 days after service of the request. If the 9 Contractor objects or does not respond to the request within 20 days after service of 10 the request, the Contracting Agency may file a motion under the Civil Rules 11 requesting the court to enter an order directing the escrow institution to deliver the 12 bid documentation and affidavit in escrow to the Contracting Agency. The Contractor 13 shall respond to the request within the time required by the then applicable Civil Court 14 Rules for the Superior Court of the State of Washington. If the Contractor objects or 15 does not respond to the request within the time required by the then applicable Civil 16 Rules, the Contracting Agency may file a motion pursuant to such rules requesting 17 the court to enter an order directing the escrow institution to deliver the bid 18 documentation and affidavit in escrow to the Contracting Agency. The escrow 19 institution shall release the bid documentation and affidavit as follows: 20

21 1. To the Contracting Agency upon receipt of a letter from the Contractor 22

authorizing the release; 23 24 2. To the Contracting Agency upon receipt of a certified copy of a court order 25

directing the release of the documents; 26 27 3. To the court for an in camera examination pursuant to a certified copy of a 28

court order; 29 30 4. The bid documentation and affidavit shall be returned to the Contractor if 31

litigation is not commenced within the time period prescribed by law. 32 33

The Contractor agrees that the sealed container placed in escrow and any 34 supplemental sealed container placed in escrow contain all of the bid documentation 35 used to determine the Bid and that no other bid documentation shall be utilized by 36 the Contractor in litigation over Certified Claims brought by the Contractor arising out 37 of this Contract unless otherwise ordered by the court. 38 39 Remedies for Refusal or Failure to Provide Bid Documentation 40 Failure or refusal to provide bid documentation shall be deemed a material breach of 41 this Contract. The Contracting Agency may at its option refuse to make payment for 42 progress estimates under Section 1-09.9 until the Contractor has submitted the bid 43 documentation required by this specification. The Contracting Agency may at its 44 option terminate the contract for default under Section 1-08.10. These remedies are 45 not exclusive and the Contracting Agency may take such other action as is available 46 to it under the law. 47 48 Confidentiality of Bid Documentation 49 The bid documentation and affidavit in escrow are and will remain the property of the 50 Contractor. The Contracting Agency has no interest in or right to the bid 51


documentation and affidavit other than to verify the contents and legibility of the bid 1 documentation unless litigation ensues between the Contracting Agency and 2 Contractor over Certified Claims brought by the Contractor arising out of this 3 Contract. In the event of such litigation, the bid documentation and affidavit may 4 become the property of the Contracting Agency for use in the litigation as may be 5 appropriate subject to the provisions of any court order limiting or restricting the use 6 or dissemination of the bid documentation and affidavit as provided in the preceding 7 section entitled Duration and Use. 8 9 Cost and Escrow Instructions 10 The cost of the escrow will be borne by the Contracting Agency. The Contracting 11 Agency will provide escrow instructions to the escrow institution consistent with this 12 specification. 13

14 1-03.3.OPT2.GR1 15

(July 6, 2021) 16 The Contracting Agency will provide the Bidder with the option for signing the Contract 17 documents either using electronic or traditional paper means. If the Contractor opts to 18 sign the Contract documents electronically, the Bidder shall notify the Contracting Agency 19 within 3 calendar days (not including Saturdays, Sundays, or Holidays) after the Award 20 date by sending notice to [email protected]. That notification shall include the contact 21 information for the authorized signer of the Contract documents including the full name, 22 email address, and phone number. Additionally, the name of the bonding agent, email 23 address, and phone number shall be provided. 24 25 The designees shall be an authorized signer in accordance with Section 1-02.1 and 1-26 03.4. 27 28 If the Bidder fails to provide the information necessary to proceed with the electronic 29 signing of the Contract documents as required herein, the Contracting Agency will issue 30 the documents using traditional paper means. 31

32 1-03.3.INST2.GR1 33 The first paragraph of Section 1-03.3 is supplemented with the following: 34 35 1-03.3.OPT3.GR1 36

(January 4, 2016) 37 Within 20 calendar days after the Award date, the successful Bidder shall return WSDOT 38 Form 421-013 with the Contractor’s costs for transit, bicycle and pedestrian Work. 39

40


1-04.GR1 1

Scope of the Work 2 3 1-04.4.GR1 4

Changes 5 6 1-04.4.INST1.GR1 7 Section 1-04.4 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 1-04.4.OPT1.GR1 10

(April 30, 2020) 11 Change Orders will be transmitted electronically to the Contractor for signature. The 12 Contractor shall apply all signatures electronically using the software provided by the 13 Contracting Agency. Within 21 days of execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall 14 submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the names, email addresses, and text-15 message capable phone numbers for the authorized change order signers and shall bear 16 the name, phone number and email of the officer providing this authorization. Delegation 17 of authority to sign Change Orders shall be by the officer authorized to sign the Contract 18 in accordance with Section 1-02.1. 19

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


1-06.GR1 1

Control of Material 2 3 1-06.INST1.GR1 4 Section 1-06 is supplemented with the following: 5 6 1-06.OPT1.GR1 7

Buy America 8 9 1-06.OPT1(A).GR1 10

(August 6, 2012) 11 In accordance with Buy America requirements contained in 23 CFR 635.410, the major 12 quantities of steel and iron construction material that is permanently incorporated into the 13 project shall consist of American-made materials only. Buy America does not apply to 14 temporary steel items, e.g., temporary sheet piling, temporary bridges, steel scaffolding 15 and falsework. 16 17 Minor amounts of foreign steel and iron may be utilized in this project provided the cost 18 of the foreign material used does not exceed one-tenth of one percent of the total contract 19 cost or $2,500.00, whichever is greater. 20 21 American-made material is defined as material having all manufacturing processes 22 occurring domestically. To further define the coverage, a domestic product is a 23 manufactured steel material that was produced in one of the 50 States, the District of 24 Columbia, Puerto Rico, or in the territories and possessions of the United States. 25 26 If domestically produced steel billets or iron ingots are exported outside of the area of 27 coverage, as defined above, for any manufacturing process then the resulting product 28 does not conform to the Buy America requirements. Additionally, products manufactured 29 domestically from foreign source steel billets or iron ingots do not conform to the Buy 30 America requirements because the initial melting and mixing of alloys to create the 31 material occurred in a foreign country. 32 33 Manufacturing begins with the initial melting and mixing, and continues through the 34 coating stage. Any process which modifies the chemical content, the physical size or 35 shape, or the final finish is considered a manufacturing process. The processes include 36 rolling, extruding, machining, bending, grinding, drilling, welding, and coating. The action 37 of applying a coating to steel or iron is deemed a manufacturing process. Coating 38 includes epoxy coating, galvanizing, aluminizing, painting, and any other coating that 39 protects or enhances the value of steel or iron. Any process from the original reduction 40 from ore to the finished product constitutes a manufacturing process for iron. 41 42 Due to a nationwide waiver, Buy America does not apply to raw materials (iron ore and 43 alloys), scrap (recycled steel or iron), and pig iron or processed, pelletized, and reduced 44 iron ore. 45 46 The following are considered to be steel manufacturing processes: 47 48

1. Production of steel by any of the following processes: 49 50

a. Open hearth furnace. 51


1 b. Basic oxygen. 2 3 c. Electric furnace. 4 5 d. Direct reduction. 6 7

2. Rolling, heat treating, and any other similar processing. 8 9 3. Fabrication of the products. 10 11

a. Spinning wire into cable or strand. 12 13 b. Corrugating and rolling into culverts. 14 15 c. Shop fabrication. 16 17

A certification of materials origin will be required for any items comprised of, or containing, 18 steel or iron construction materials prior to such items being incorporated into the 19 permanent work. The certification shall be on DOT Form 350-109EF provided by the 20 Engineer, or such other form the Contractor chooses, provided it contains the same 21 information as DOT Form 350-109EF. 22

23 1-06.OPT1(B).FR1 24

(August 6, 2012) 25 The following items of work containing steel or iron construction materials are considered 26 to be temporary and are excluded from the Buy America requirements contained in 23 27 CFR 635.410 as described in the above paragraphs: 28 29

*** $$1$$ *** 30 31 1-06.OPT1(C).FR1 32


Structural Steel Construction Material 34 Definitions 35 1. Construction material: Defined as any article, material, or supply brought to the 36

construction site for incorporation into the final product. 37 38 2. Domestic Construction Material: A manufactured construction material will be 39

considered domestic if it has been manufactured in the United States. 40 41 3. Manufactured in the United States: A construction material will be considered as 42

manufactured in the United States if all manufacturing processes have occurred 43 in the United States. 44

45 4. Structural Steel: Defined as all structural steel products included in the project. 46 47 5. United States: To further define the coverage, a domestic product is a 48

manufactured steel construction material that was produced in one of the 50 49 states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, or in the territories and possessions 50 of the United States. 51


1 Bidding and Award 2 The Contractor shall submit a Bid for the following bid items containing domestic 3 structural steel appearing in the proposal under the heading ALTERNATE *** $$1$$ 4 ***. 5 6

*** $$2$$ *** 7 8

(A) The Contractor may also submit a Bid for the following bid items containing 9 foreign structural steel appearing in the proposal under the heading ALTERNATE *** 10 $$3$$ ***. 11 12 *** $$4$$ *** 13 14

A Contractor electing to submit a Bid for any of the foreign structural steel items under 15 ALTERNATE *** $$5$$ *** must also submit a Bid for the appropriate domestic structural 16 steel items under ALTERNATE *** $$6$$ ***. If a Bid is received only for foreign structural 17 steel material on any of the above items, the Bid will be considered irregular. 18 19 Subject to the provisions of Section 1-03, all bidders are advised that the contract will be 20 awarded to the bidder who submits the lowest total bid based on furnishing domestic 21 structural steel construction material as specified, unless such total bid exceeds the 22 lowest total bid based on furnishing foreign structural steel construction material as 23 specified, by more than 25 percent. In that event, the contract will be awarded to the 24 bidder who submits the lowest total bid based on furnishing the specified foreign structural 25 steel material. 26 27 Except the material contained in the above foreign structural steel item(s) for which 28 alternate bids were submitted and accepted as a basis of award, the steel and iron 29 construction material that is permanently incorporated into the project shall consist of 30 American-made materials only. Buy America does not apply to temporary steel items, 31 e.g., temporary sheet piling, temporary bridges, steel scaffolding and falsework. 32 American-made material is defined as material having all manufacturing processes 33 occurring domestically. 34 35 If domestically produced steel billets or iron ingots are exported outside of the United 36 States for any manufacturing process, then the resulting product does not conform to the 37 Buy America requirements. Additionally, products manufactured domestically from foreign 38 source steel billets or iron ingots do not conform to the Buy America requirements 39 because the initial melting and mixing of alloys to create the material occurred in a foreign 40 country. 41 42 Manufacturing begins with the initial melting and mixing, and continues through the 43 coating stage. Any process which modifies the chemical content, the physical size or 44 shape, or the final finish is considered a manufacturing process. The processes include 45 rolling, extruding, machining, bending, grinding, drilling, welding, and coating. The action 46 of applying a coating to steel or iron is deemed a manufacturing process. Coating includes 47 epoxy coating, galvanizing, aluminizing, painting, and any other coating that protects or 48 enhances the value of steel or iron. Any process from the original reduction from ore to 49 the finished product constitutes a manufacturing process for iron. 50 51


Due to a nationwide waiver, Buy America does not apply to raw materials (iron ore and 1 alloys), scrap (recycled steel or iron), and pig iron or processed, pelletized, and reduced 2 iron ore. 3

4 1. Production of steel by any of the following processes: 5

6 a. Open hearth furnace. 7 8 b. Basic oxygen. 9 10 c. Electric furnace. 11 12 d. Direct reduction. 13 14

2. Rolling, heat treating, and any other similar processing. 15 16 3. Fabrication of the products. 17 18

a. Spinning wire into cable or strand. 19 20 b. Corrugating and rolling into culverts. 21 22 c. Shop fabrication. 23 24

The Contractor may utilize minor amounts of foreign steel and iron in this project provided 25 the cost of the foreign material used does not exceed one-tenth of one percent of the total 26 contract cost or $2,500.00, whichever is greater. 27 28 A certification of materials origin will be required for any items comprised of, or containing, 29 steel or iron construction materials prior to such items being incorporated into the 30 permanent work. The certification shall be on the form Certificate of Materials Origin 31 (WSDOT Form 350-109)EF provided by the Engineer, or such other form the Contractor 32 chooses, provided it contains the same information as the form Certificate of Materials 33 Origin (WSDOT Form 350-109)EF. 34

35 1-06.1.GR1 36

Approval of Materials Prior to Use 37 38 1-06.1.INST1.GR1 39 Section 1-06.1 is supplemented with the following: 40 41 1-06.1.OPT1.GR1 42

(April 3, 2017) 43 For each proposed material that is required to be submitted for approval using either the 44 QPL or RAM process the Contractor will be allowed to submit for approval two material 45 sources or manufacturers per material type at no cost. Additional material sources or 46 manufacturers may be submitted for approval and will be processed at a cost of $125.00 47 per material source or manufacturer submitted by QPL submittal and $400.00 per material 48 submitted by RAM. All costs for processing additional material sources or manufacturers 49 will be deducted from monies due or that may come due to the Contractor. Subject to a 50


request by the Contractor and a determination by the Engineer the costs for processing 1 may be waived. 2

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


1-07.GR1 1

Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public 2 3 1-07.1.GR1 4

Laws to be Observed 5 6 1-07.1.INST1.GR1 7 Section 1-07.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 1-07.1.OPT1.GR1 10

(March 25, 2009) 11

American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA) Employment 12

Report 13 The Contractor shall submit monthly reports of the number of employees actively working 14 on this project for the Contractor and all Subcontractors of every tier. The reports shall 15 include all employees actively working on this project at the jobsite, in the project office, 16 in the home office, or teleworking from a home or other alternative office location; and all 17 engineering personnel, inspectors, sampling and testing technicians, and lab technicians 18 actively performing work directly in support of this project (excluding suppliers) during 19 the reporting month. 20 21 The report shall be prepared using Form FHWA-1589 and submitted monthly to the 22 Engineer. The initial report shall be submitted to the Engineer within 30-days of 23 execution. Subsequent reports shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than 10-days 24 after the end of each report month. 25 26 Failure by the Contractor to submit ARRA Employment Reports for the Contractor and 27 all Subcontractors of every tier shall be reason for withholding all progress payments 28 until reports are received. The cost of preparing and submitting ARRA Employment 29 Reports is incidental to the Contract. The Contractor shall include all related costs in the 30 unit Bid prices of the Contract. 31

32 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 33


Lead Health Protection Program 35 Structural and non-structural materials located at the project site *** $$1$$ *** contain 36 lead-based products. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and health 37 of all on-site workers and compliant with Washington Administrative Code (WAC 296-38 155-176). The Contractors Lead Health Protection Program shall be submitted to the 39 Contracting Agency as a Type 2 Working Drawing prior to the Contractor beginning work 40 involving exposure to lead contamination. The Contractor shall communicate with the 41 Engineer to ensure a coordinated effort for providing and maintaining a safe worksite for 42 both the Contracting Agency’s and Contractor’s workers. 43 44

Construction Requirements 45 The Contractor shall be responsible for the containment measures required to provide 46 and maintain a safe and healthful jobsite for the duration of the project in accordance 47 with all applicable laws and this Special Provision. 48 49


Payment 1 All costs to comply with this Special Provision for the Lead Health Protection laws and 2 regulations are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in related items 3 of work. 4

5 1-07.1.OPT3.FR1 6

(April 3, 2006) 7

Confined Space 8 Confined spaces are known to exist at the following locations: 9

10 *** $$1$$ *** 11

12 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and health of all on-site workers 13 and compliant with Washington Administrative Code (WAC 296-809). 14 15 The Contractor shall prepare and implement a confined space program for each of the 16 confined spaces identified above. The Contractors Confined Space program shall be 17 sent to the Contracting Agency at least 30 days prior to the Contractor beginning work in 18 or adjacent to the confined space. No work shall be performed in or adjacent to the 19 confined space until the plan is submitted to the Engineer as required. The Contractor 20 shall communicate with the Engineer to ensure a coordinated effort for providing and 21 maintaining a safe worksite for both the Contracting Agency’s and Contractor’s workers 22 when working in or near a confined space. 23 24 All costs to prepare and implement the confined space program shall be included in the 25 bid prices for the various items associated with the confined space work. 26

27 1-07.1.OPT4.GR1 28

(May 13, 2020) 29

COVID-19 Health and Safety Plan 30 In response to COVID-19, the Contractor shall prepare a project specific COVID-19 31 health and safety plan (CHSP) in conformance with Section 1-07.4(2) as supplemented 32 in these specifications, COVID-19 Health and Safety Plan (CHSP). 33

34 1-07.1.INST2.GR1 35 Section 1-07.1 is revised to read: 36 37 1-07.1.OPT5.GR1 38

(February 25, 2021) 39

General 40 The Contractor shall always comply with all Federal, State, tribal, or local laws, 41 ordinances, and regulations that affect Work under the Contract. The Contractor shall 42 indemnify, defend, and save harmless the State (including the Governor, Commission, 43 Secretary, and any agents, officers, and employees) against any claims that may arise 44 because the Contractor (or any employee of the Contractor or Subcontractor or 45 materialperson) violated a legal requirement. 46 47 Without usurping the authority of other agencies, the Contracting Agency will cooperate 48 with them in their efforts to enforce legal requirements. Upon awareness of a violation of 49 a legal requirement, the Engineer will notify the Contractor in an effort to achieve 50


compliance. The Engineer may also notify the agency responsible for enforcement if the 1 Engineer deems that action is necessary to achieve compliance with legal requirements. 2 The Engineer will also assist the enforcement agency to obtain Contractor compliance 3 to the extent such assistance is consistent with the provisions of the Contract. 4 5

Health and Safety 6 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all workers and shall comply with all 7 appropriate state safety and health standards, codes, rules, and regulations, including, 8 but not limited to, those promulgated under the Washington Industry Safety and Health 9 Act RCW 49.17 (WISHA) and as set forth in Title 296 WAC (Department of Labor and 10 Industries). In particular the Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements of WAC 11 296.800 which requires employers to provide a safe workplace. More specifically WAC 12 296.800.11025 prohibits alcohol and narcotics from the workplace. The Contractor shall 13 likewise be obligated to comply with all federal safety and health standards, codes, rules, 14 and regulations that may be applicable to the Contract Work. A copy of all safety plans 15 (e.g., fall protection work plan) that are developed by the Contractor shall be submitted 16 to the Engineer as a Type 1 Working Drawing. When requested by the Engineer, the 17 Contractor shall provide training to Contracting Agency employees working on-site for 18 any activity covered by a safety plan. Costs for training that is provided solely to 19 Contracting Agency employees will be paid to the Contractor in accordance with Section 20 1-09.4. 21 22

Mine Safety 23 U.S. Mine Safety and Health Administration rules apply when the project includes pit or 24 quarry operations. Among other actions, these regulations require the Contractor to notify 25 the nearest Mine Safety and Health sub district office (1) of the project before it begins, 26 (2) of the starting date, and (3) of the Physical Completion Date. 27 28

Wells 29 When wells are included in the contract or encountered as part of the Work, the 30 Contractor shall meet all the requirements in WAC 173-160 Minimum Standards for 31 Construction and Maintenance of Wells and all environmental considerations for 32 installing, protecting in place, decommissioning, or abandonment of wells. 33 34

Changes to Laws to be Observed 35 General 36 The Contracting Agency will not adjust payment to compensate the Contractor for 37 changes in legal requirements unless those changes are specifically within the 38 scope of RCW 39.04.120. For changes under RCW 39.04.120, the Contracting 39 Agency will compensate the Contractor by negotiated change order as provided in 40 Section 1-04.4. 41 42 Taxes 43 Under certain conditions, the Contracting Agency will adjust payment to compensate 44 for tax changes. First, the changes shall involve federal or state taxes on materials 45 or fuel used in or consumed for the project. Second, the changes shall increase or 46 decrease Contractor-paid taxes by more than $500. For items in the original 47 Contract, the tax change must occur after the Bid opening date. For negotiated 48 Contracts or items in a supplemental agreement, the tax change must take place 49 after the execution date of the Contract or agreement. Within these conditions, the 50


Contracting Agency will adjust compensation by the actual dollar amounts of 1 increase or decrease caused by the tax changes. If the Engineer requests it, the 2 Contractor shall certify in writing that the Contract price does not include any extra 3 amount to cover a possible change in taxes. 4 5 The Contracting Agency may audit the records of the Contractor as provided in 6 Section 1-09.12, to verify any claim for compensation because of changes in laws 7 or taxes. 8

9 1-07.3.GR1 10

Forest Protection and Merchantable Timber Requirements 11 12 1-07.3.INST1.GR1 13 Section 1-07.3 is supplemented with the following: 14 15 1-07.3.OPT1.GR1 16

(August 2, 2004) 17 The Forest Service Provisions, included in the Appendix to these Special Provisions, are 18 made a part of this contract. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of these 19 Forest Service provisions at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. 20

21 1-07.3(2).GR1 22

Merchantable Timber Requirements 23 24 1-07.3(2).INST1.GR1 25

Section 1-07.3(2) is supplemented with the following: 26 27 1-07.3(2).OPT1.GR1 28

(April 7, 2008) 29 This project contains merchantable timber. 30

31 Export Restrictions - DOT Form 410-100, Purchaser Certification for Export 32 Restricted Timber, will be included when the contract is sent to the Contractor for 33 execution. The form shall be completed and signed by the Contractor. The 34 Contractor shall send the original signed form and one copy of the signed form 35 directly to the Washington State Department of Revenue at the address on the form. 36 The Contractor shall send one signed copy along with the other documents required 37 by Section 1-03.3 to the Contracting Agency with the executed contract. 38 39 State Tax Requirements - It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to pay to the 40 State Department of Revenue all taxes on harvested timber. 41

42 1-07.4.GR1 43

Sanitation 44 45 1-07.4(2).GR1 46

Health Hazards 47 48 1-07.4(2).INST1.GR1 49

Section 1-07.4(2) is revised to read: 50


1 1-07.4(2).OPT1.FR1 2

(August 7, 2017) 3 This project site is known to be occupied by transients and therefore contains 4 biological hazards and associated physical hazards. These may include, but not be 5 limited to violent and dangerous individuals, hypodermic needles, garbage, broken 6 glass, human and animal excrement, drug paraphernalia, and other hazards. 7 8 The Contractor shall take precautions and perform any necessary Work required to 9 provide and maintain a safe and healthful jobsite for all workers and the public for 10 the duration of the project in accordance with all applicable laws and contract 11 requirements. 12 13 The Contractor shall ensure that the public, including persons who may be non-14 English speaking or those who may not be able to recognize potential safety and 15 health hazards within the project area, are not harmed by the Contractors activities. 16 17 Nothing required by this Specification shall operate as a waiver of the Contractor’s 18 responsibility for taking all steps necessary to ensure the safety of the public under 19 Section 1-07.23 or responsibility for liability and damages under Section 1-07.14 or 20 for any other responsibility under the Contract or as may be required by law. 21 22

Health and Safety Plan 23 The Contractor shall prepare a written Health and Safety Plan. The plan shall 24 be prepared under the supervision of a certified industrial hygienist and shall 25 incorporate all required County, State, and Federal health and safety 26 provisions. The plan shall include requirements of the Federal Occupational 27 Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), all amendments, and all other 28 applicable health regulations. 29 30 Preparation of the Health and Safety Plan shall include an initial site 31 assessment by the industrial hygienist. The plan shall break initial cleanup of 32 the project into identifiable construction areas. The plan shall be submitted to 33 the Engineer prior to commencing cleanup Work. At least one copy of the plan 34 shall be posted at the work site while cleanup Work is in progress. The 35 industrial hygienist shall perform one or more follow-up site assessments as 36 needed to approve the site following completion of the initial site cleanup. 37 38 Public Notification 39 The Contractor shall furnish and install the “No Trespassing” signs shown in the 40 Plans at locations staked by the Engineer at least 72 hours prior to performing 41 site cleanup or any potentially hazardous Work (such as clearing or operating 42 equipment). 43 44 At the same time that “No Trespassing” signs are posted, provide written 45 notification of the following to the Engineer and to the chief law enforcement 46 officer of the local governmental entity where the Work will occur: 47 48

1. The precise location of each area that is posted “No Trespassing”; 49 50 2. The date and time that each site was posted “No Trespassing”; 51


1 3. The date, time, description and duration of the Work to be performed 2

at each site. 3 4

At least 72 hours prior to performing site cleanup in Work areas containing 5 encampments (such as tents, makeshift dwellings, sleeping sites, or 6 accumulations of personal property that are not refuse), the Contractor shall 7 post a notification at each encampment area. Each notice shall: 8

9 1. Be weather resistant, and written in both English and Spanish. 10 11 2. Be affixed to each dwelling or post mounted within 10-feet of each 12

encampment; 13 14 3. State the Prime Contractor’s company name as the entity that 15

performed the cleanup as required by the Washington State 16 Department of Transportation; 17

18 4. Provide the date that the notice is posted; 19 20 5. Provide date(s) and time(s) that cleanup will occur; 21 22 6. Provide the telephone number, business hours and physical address 23

of the location where stored personal property may be claimed. 24 25 7. State that personal property will be stored for 70-days from the date 26

of removal, and if unclaimed within that time, will be disposed of. 27 28

At the same time that notifications are posted at encampment areas, provide 29 written notification of the schedule to perform site cleanup to the Engineer and 30 to the following advocacy groups: 31 32

***$$1$$*** 33 34 Acceptance of signs and notifications will be based on visual inspection that the 35 sign and notifications meet these requirements. 36 37 Site Cleanup of Biological and Physical Hazards 38 An initial cleanup of the site, including all preparatory work required to make the 39 worksite sanitary and safe in accordance with applicable laws and with the 40 Contract, shall be completed to remove all individuals, encampments, and 41 personal property from areas signed “No Trespassing”, and to address all 42 biological and associated physical hazards present on the project. Necessary 43 worker training, on and off site preparations, and personal protective equipment 44 shall be provided by the Contractor to complete this Work. If aggressive or 45 violent individuals are encountered, the Contractor shall notify the local law 46 enforcement agency to assist them in clearing the Work area. 47

48 Site cleanup of individual areas identified in the Health and Safety Plan shall be 49 performed no more than 30 days in advance of performing other Work in each 50 area. 51


1 The refuse generated by the site cleanup shall become the property of the 2 Contractor and shall be removed from the project. Personal property shall be 3 handled as required by this Specification and applicable laws. 4 5 Removal, Storage and Return of Personal Property 6 Personal property may include radios, audio and video equipment, sleeping 7 bags, tents, stoves and cooking utensils, lanterns, flashlights, bed rolls, tarps, 8 foam, canvas, mats, blankets, pillows, medication, personal papers, 9 photographs, books and other reading materials, luggage, backpacks or other 10 storage containers, clothing, towels, shoes, toiletries and cosmetics, clocks and 11 watches, and eye glasses. Personal property does not include building 12 materials such as wood products, metal, or rigid plastic. 13 14 Personal property items that are not refuse, contaminated, illegal or hazardous 15 shall be removed from the Work area and stored at a location near the project 16 site for return to the property owner. Items shall be placed in large transparent 17 plastic bags and stored in a manner that protects them from adverse weather 18 and theft. Reasonable efforts shall be made to place all items from each 19 encampment into a separate bag. Each bag shall be labeled with an inventory 20 to include a brief description of the contents, a description of the location that it 21 was removed from, and the date that it was removed from the Work area. The 22 Contractor shall not open closed items of personal property unless, in its 23 determination, it is necessary to do so to protect public safety. 24 25 The Contractor shall retain the property for 70-days. 26 27 If the name and contact information of the owner of a personal property item is 28 identified on that item, then for a period of not less than 10-days after removing 29 the property from the Work area, the Contractor shall attempt to notify the 30 apparent owner of the property and make arrangements for the owner to claim 31 the property. 32 33 The Contractor shall release the property to any individual who claims 34 ownership provided they are able to establish ownership by identifying the 35 property and its approximate location. The Contractor shall maintain a record 36 of all property that is claimed. The record shall include a description of the 37 property, the date claimed, and the name of the claimant. 38 39 If personal property is not claimed within 70-days of removal from the 40 encampment, then the property shall become the property of the Contractor 41 and shall be removed from the project. 42 43 Site Preservation 44 The Contractor shall preserve the site after initial cleanup of biological and 45 physical hazards. 46 47 On a daily basis and prior to performing any Work in areas where pedestrians 48 or encampments may be present, the Contractor shall verify that the Work area 49 is cleared of all persons not associated with the project. Individuals may seek 50 shelter in dumpsters, equipment, under blankets, or other places hidden from 51


view. Individuals may be disabled, or under the influence of alcohol or drugs 1 and it should not be assumed that loud construction noise will wake them. 2 3 If the worksite becomes unsanitary or unsafe due to new encampments or new 4 biological and associated physical hazards after initial cleanup is completed, 5 then the Contractor shall perform additional site assessment, additional 6 notification and additional cleanup. 7 8 The Engineer may authorize additional site preservation measures. The nature 9 and frequency of these measures will be as agreed to by the Engineer. 10 Additional site preservation measures may include the use of fencing, lighting, 11 or security, provided it is approved in advance by the Engineer. Work performed 12 without Engineer authorization will not be eligible for payment. 13

14 Measurement 15 No trespassing signs will be measured per each. 16 17 Payment 18 Payment will be made for the following bid items when they are included in the 19 proposal: 20 21

“No Trespassing Sign”, per each. 22 The unit contract price per each “No Trespassing Sign” shall be full payment for 23 all Work required to furnish, install, maintain and remove the signs. 24 25 “Health and Safety Plan”, lump sum. 26

The lump sum unit contract price for “Health and Safety Plan” shall be full 27 payment for all Work associated with the preparation and implementation of the 28 Health and Safety Plan including the initial and follow up assessment(s) for 29 initial site cleanup, worker training and personal protective equipment, and 30 providing required notifications. 31 32 "FA-Site Cleanup of Bio. And Physical Hazards”, by force account as provided 33 in Section 1-09.6. 34 35 Removal and disposal of biological and physical hazards; removal of individuals 36 and encampments; removal, storage, and return of personal property; disposal 37 of unclaimed personal property; additional site assessment, notifications, 38 worker training and personal protective equipment required after the initial site 39 cleanup is completed; and site preservation Work authorized by the Engineer 40 will be paid for by force account in accordance with Section 1-09.6. 41 42 For the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting 43 Agency has entered an amount for the item “FA-Site Cleanup of Bio. And 44 Physical Hazards” in the bid proposal to become a part of the total bid by the 45 Contractor. 46

47 1-07.4(2).INST2.GR1 48

Section 1-07.4(2) is supplemented with the following: 49 50


1-07.4(2).OPT2.GR1 1 (May 13, 2020) 2 COVID-19 Health and Safety Plan (CHSP) 3 The Contractor shall prepare a project specific COVID-19 health and safety plan 4 (CHSP). The CHSP shall be prepared and submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing 5 prior to beginning physical Work. The CHSP shall be based on the most current 6 State and Federal requirements. If the State or Federal requirements are revised, 7 the CHSP shall be updated as necessary to conform to the current requirements. 8 9 The Contractor shall update and resubmit the CHSP as the work progresses and 10 new activities appear on the look ahead schedule required under Section 1-11 08.3(2)D. If the conditions change on the project, or a particular activity, the 12 Contractor shall update and resubmit the CHSP. Work on any activity shall cease if 13 conditions prevent full compliance with the CHSP. 14 15 The CHSP shall address the health and safety of all people associated with the 16 project including State workers in the field, Contractor personnel, consultants, 17 project staff, subcontractors, suppliers and anyone on the project site, staging areas, 18 or yards. 19 20 COVID-19 Health and Safety Plan (CHSP) Inspection 21 The Contractor shall grant full and unrestricted access to the Engineer for CHSP 22 Inspections. The Engineer (or designee) will conduct periodic compliance 23 inspections on the project site, staging areas, or yards to verify that any ongoing 24 work activity is following the CHSP. If the Engineer becomes aware of a 25 noncompliance incident either through a site inspection or other means, the 26 Contractor will be notified immediately (within 1 hour). The Contractor shall 27 immediately remedy the noncompliance incident or suspend all or part of the 28 associated work activity. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the 29 noncompliance incident has been corrected before the suspension will end. 30

31 1-07.5.GR1 32

Environmental Regulations 33 34 1-07.5.INST1.GR1 35 Section 1-07.5 is supplemented with the following: 36 37 1-07.5.OPT1.GR1 38

(September 20, 2010) 39

Environmental Commitments 40 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 41 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the various 42 documents referenced in the Special Provision Permits and Licenses. Throughout the 43 work, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements: 44

45 1-07.5.OPT1(A).FR1 46

(August 4, 2014) 47 The Contractor shall submit a written notification to the Engineer no later than 10 48 calendar days prior to beginning any ground disturbing activities *** $$1$$ ***. The 49


Contractor shall not commence any such ground disturbing activities until the 1 monitor is present. 2

3 1-07.5.OPT1(B).FR1 4

(April 1, 2019) 5 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of *** $$1$$ *** calendar days 6 prior to commencing any work in sensitive areas, mitigation areas, and wetland 7 buffers. Installation of construction fencing is excluded from this notice requirement. 8

9 1-07.5.OPT1(C).FR1 10

(April 1, 2019) 11 No *** $$1$$ *** is allowed within *** $$2$$ *** feet of *** $$3$$ ***. 12

13 1-07.5.OPT2.GR1 14

(August 3, 2009) 15

Payment 16 All costs to comply with this special provision for the environmental commitments and 17 requirements are incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor. 18 The Contractor shall include all related costs in the associated bid prices of the contract. 19

20 1-07.5(2).GR1 21

State Department of Fish And Wildlife 22 23 1-07.5(2).INST1.GR1 24


(April 2, 2018) 28 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 29 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the Washington 30 State Department of Fish and Wildlife. Throughout the work, the Contractor shall 31 comply with the following requirements: 32

33 1-07.5(2).OPT1(A).FR1 34

(April 2, 2018) 35 The Contractor may begin Work below the Ordinary High Water Line on *** 36 $$1$$ *** and must complete all the Work by *** $$2$$ ***. 37

38 1-07.5(2).OPT2.GR1 39

(April 2, 2018) 40 All costs to comply with this special provision are incidental to the Contract and are 41 the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall include all related costs in 42 the associated bid prices of the Contract. 43

44 1-07.5(3).INST1.GR1 45


(April 2, 2018) 49


The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 1 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the Washington 2 State Department of Ecology. Throughout the work, the Contractor shall comply with 3 the following requirements: 4

5 1-07.5(3).OPT1(A).FR1 6

(August 3, 2009) 7 A mixing zone is established within which the turbidity standard is waived during 8 actual in-water work. The mixing zone is established to only temporarily allow 9 exceeding the turbidity criteria (such as a few hours or days) and is not 10 authorization to exceed the turbidity standard for the entire duration of the 11 construction. The mixing zone shall not exceed *** $$1$$ *** feet downstream 12 from the construction area. 13

14 1-07.5(3).OPT1(B).GR1 15

(April 1, 2019) 16 Stormwater, dewatering water, or other authorized non-stormwater discharges 17 that has come into contact with pH modifying substances such as concrete 18 rubble, cast concrete or amended soils, need to be maintained between 6.5 – 19 8.5 standard units (su). If pH exceeds 8.5 su, the Contractor shall immediately 20 discontinue work and initiate treatment to prevent discharges outside the 21 acceptable range from occurring. All neutralization methods used shall be in 22 accordance with the permit. Work may resume once treatment has been 23 implemented and pH of the stormwater or authorized non-stormwater discharge 24 is between 6.5 - 8.5 su or it can be demonstrated that high pH waters will not 25 discharge to surface waters. 26 27 Stormwater, dewatering water, and other authorized non-stormwater 28 discharges are monitored weekly for compliance with the turbidity benchmark 29 (25 nephelometric turbidity units (ntu)) and the phone reporting trigger value 30 (250 ntu) by the Contracting Agency. When the turbidity benchmark is 31 breached, the best management practices (BMPs) installed on-site are not 32 working adequately and need to be adapted, maintained or more BMPs shall 33 be installed. When the turbidity phone reporting trigger value is breached, 34 immediate action is required in order to lower the turbidity to <25 ntu or to 35 eliminate the discharge. Daily follow-up discharge samples will be collected at 36 all locations where a discharge of 250 ntu or higher was collected unless the 37 discharge was stopped or eliminated. 38

39 1-07.5(3).OPT3.GR1 40

(February 25, 2021) 41 10. Comply with WAC 173-160 Minimum Standards for Construction and 42

Maintenance of Wells. 43 44 1-07.5(3).OPT2.GR1 45


50


1-07.5(5).GR1 1

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers 2 3 1-07.5(5).INST1.GR1 4


(April 2, 2018) 8 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 9 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the U.S. Army 10 Corps of Engineers. Throughout the work, the Contractor shall comply with the 11 following requirements: 12

13 1-07.5(5).OPT1(B).FR1 14

(February 25, 2013) 15 Temporary fills at *** $$1$$ *** must be removed within *** $$2$$ *** calendar 16 days of beginning placement of these fills. This time period may be extended 17 with approval from the Engineer. Requests to extend must be received a 18 minimum of 45 days prior to the expiration of number of days listed above, since 19 the extension is subject to concurrence by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 20

21 1-07.5(5).OPT1(C).GR1 22

(February 25, 2013) 23 Temporary structures and dewatering of areas under the jurisdiction of the U.S. 24 Army Corps of Engineers must maintain normal downstream flows and prevent 25 upstream and downstream flooding to the maximum extent practicable. 26

27 1-07.5(5).OPT1(D).GR1 28

(August 3, 2009) 29 Heavy equipment working in wetlands or mudflats must be placed on mats or 30 other measures taken to minimize soil disturbance as approved by the 31 Engineer. 32

33 1-07.5(5).OPT1(F).GR1 34

(August 3, 2009September 7, 2021) 35 The Contractor shall dispose of all creosoted timber, creosote piling and 36 associated debris as shown in the Plans in accordance with current federal, 37 state, and local regulations and provisions, and following Best Management 38 Practices. Disposal shall be made in a landfill which meets the liner and 39 leachate standards of the Minimum Functional Standards for Solid Waste 40 Handling, Chapter 173-304 WAC. The Contractor shall provide receipts from 41 the disposal facility to the Engineer. If the material is transported to a transfer 42 station, the Contractor shall obtain documentation indicating that final disposal 43 will comply with the standards referenced above. 44

45 1-07.5(5).OPT2.GR1 46


51


1-07.5(6).GR1 1

U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and National Marine Fisheries Service 2 3 1-07.5(6).INST1.GR1 4


(April 2, 2018) 8 The following Provisions summarize the requirements, in addition to those required 9 elsewhere in the Contract, imposed upon the Contracting Agency by the U.S. 10 Fish/Wildlife Services and the National Marine Fisheries Service. Throughout the 11 work, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements: 12

13 1-07.5(6).OPT1(B).GR1 14

(April 2, 2018) 15 The Contractor shall place temporary storage piles of erosive materials outside 16 the 100-year floodplain during the rainy season (October 1 through June 1). 17 Material that will be used within 12 hours of deposition is exempt from this 18 requirement. The Contractor shall employ best management practices to 19 prevent sediment delivery to waterbodies, wetlands, or conveyances that drain 20 to such features. 21

22 1-07.5(6).OPT1(C).FR1 23

(April 2, 2018) 24 The Contractor shall not allow temporary floating work platforms to run aground. 25 Anchors and chains shall never contact fish spawning areas in freshwater or 26 eelgrass, kelp, macro algae, or intertidal wetlands as indicated in the Plans. 27 Shading eelgrass, kelp, or macro algae beds by work platforms shall not exceed 28 *** $$1$$ *** days. 29

30 1-07.5(6).OPT1(D).GR1 31

(April 2, 2018) 32 The Contractor shall provide concrete truck chute cleanout areas to contain 33 fresh concrete and wash water. The Contractor shall dispose of the waste 34 material at a facility permitted to take such waste. 35

36 1-07.5(6).OPT1(E).GR1 37

(April 2, 2018) 38 The Contractor shall not use creosote-treated wood below the Ordinary High 39 Water Mark. 40

41 1-07.5(6).OPT1(F).GR1 42

(April 2, 2018) 43 The Contractor shall remove piles by directly pulling, using vibratory devices, 44 or by cutting the piles below ground level to minimize localized turbidity. If use 45 of a clamshell bucket is necessary due to pile breakage, turbidity curtains will 46 be employed by the Contractor. 47

48 1-07.5(6).OPT1(G).GR1 49

(April 2, 2018) 50


The Contractor shall remove piles and place them directly into a receptacle that 1 prevents sediment or other material from entering waters of the state. 2

3 1-07.5(6).OPT1(H).FR1 4

(April 2, 2018) 5 Contracting Agency staff will monitor sound pressure during in-water pile driving 6 of steel piles, including H-piles, and sheet piles. Results that exceed *** $$1$$ 7 *** will require the Contractor to adjust work methods or employ additional best 8 practices to safely proceed. 9

10 1-07.5(6).OPT1(I).FR1 11

(April 2, 2018) 12 The Contractor shall direct temporary lights for night work away from *** $$1$$ 13 ***. 14

15 1-07.5(6).OPT1(J).FR1 16

(April 2, 2018) 17 The Contractor shall conduct night Work only during the period from 2 hours 18 after sunset to 2 hours before sunrise. Setting up and taking down traffic control 19 are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the following website, using 20 the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 21 22

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 23 24 1-07.5(6).OPT1(K).FR1 25

(April 2, 2018) 26 The Contractor shall conduct night Work only during the period from 1 hour after 27 sunset to 1 hour before sunrise. Setting up and taking down traffic control are 28 exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the following website, using the 29 City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 30 31

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 32 33 1-07.5(6).OPT1(L).FR1 34

(April 2, 2018) 35 The Contractor must cease Work 2 hours before sunrise. Setting up and taking 36 down traffic control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the 37 following website, using the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise times: 38 39

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 40 41 1-07.5(6).OPT1(M).FR1 42

(April 2, 2018) 43 When night and day time Work is required, the Contractor shall not perform 44 Work from 1 hour before sunrise to 2 hours after sunrise and no Work from 2 45 hours before sunset to 1 hour after sunset. Setting up and taking down traffic 46 control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the following website, 47 using the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 48 49

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 50 51


1-07.5(6).OPT1(N).FR1 1 (April 2, 2018) 2 When night and day time Work is required, the Contractor shall not perform 3 Work from 1 hour before sunrise to 2 hours after sunrise. Setting up and taking 4 down traffic control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the 5 following website, using the City of *** $$1$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 6 7

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 8 9 1-07.5(6).OPT1(O).GR1 10

(April 2, 2018) 11 The Contractor shall develop a Type 2 Working Drawing to ensure that trash 12 and food waste is collected daily and contained in secured garbage 13 receptacles. 14

15 1-07.5(6).OPT1(P).FR1 16

(September 3, 2019) 17 Between April 1 and September 22, the Contractor *** $$1$$ *** are restricted 18 to between two hours after sunrise and two hours before sunset. Setting up and 19 taking down traffic control are exempt from these time restrictions. Refer to the 20 following website, using the City of *** $$2$$ *** for sunrise and sunset times: 21 22

http://www.sunrisesunset.com/usa/washington.asp 23 24 1-07.5(6).OPT1(Q).GR1 25

(September 7, 2021) 26 Galvanizing and zinc coatings shall not be used below the 100 year mean 27 recurrence interval water surface. 28

29 1-07.5(6).OPT1(R).FR1 30

(September 7, 2021) 31 Bird Protection and Monitoring 32

Description 33 This Work includes preparing a Project-specific Bird Projection Plan, 34 implementation of the Bird Protection Plan, updating the Bird Protection 35 Plan, surveying, monitoring, and reporting of bird activity, actions required 36 in the event nests and species are surveyed and encountered, and 37 Contractor training. 38 39 Construction Requirements 40 No onsite Work may begin on the Project until the Bird Protection Plan has 41 been accepted by the Engineer. 42 43 The Contractor shall maintain a copy of the Bird Protection Plan at the Work 44 site and update as necessary to reflect the conditions as the Work 45 progresses. 46 47 The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent birds from nesting on 48 bridges or other structures that would be demolished, modified, or 49 disturbed by Project construction. 50 51


The Contractor shall conduct site monitoring and shall report the results of 1 their inspections. From March 15 to September 15, the Contractor shall 2 conduct, at minimum, three inspections during the work week; once on 3 Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, to identify nest starts. The Contractor 4 shall indicate their intended inspection schedule in their Bird Protection 5 Plan. 6 7 The Contractor shall remove nest starts as soon as they are discovered in 8 accordance with their Project-specific Bird Protection Plan. If an active nest 9 (i.e., one that has eggs or chicks) is found, the Contractor must immediately 10 stop all associated Work and contact the Engineer before implementing the 11 relevant Project-specific Bird Protection Plan measures. Active nest 12 removal shall not proceed prior to notifying to and receiving approval from 13 the Engineer. 14 15 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer if a raptor nest is discovered or 16 suspected. If a raptor nest (including unoccupied ones outside the breeding 17 season) is found, it shall not be removed. 18 19 From September 16 to March 14, the Contractor may discontinue weekly 20 inspections and reports, but shall remove old nests in accordance with the 21 Project-specific Bird Protection Plan. In the rare instance that an active nest 22 is discovered during this time, the Migratory Bird Treaty Act (MBTA) 23 requirements apply and the Contractor must adhere to the Project-specific 24 Bird Protection Plan and applicable Contract provisions. However, the 25 Contractor shall not be responsible for the removal of active nests during 26 this time period. 27 28 The Contractor shall train all project staff. The Contractor shall provide a 29 list of training for all Project staff as part of their Bird Protection Plan. The 30 Contractor training shall include an overview of the MBTA and the Bald and 31 Golden Eagle Protection Act, how to identify nesting activity, and what to 32 do if a nest is discovered. 33 34 Submittals 35 The Contractor shall prepare a Project-specific Bird Protection Plan and 36 submit it to the Engineer no later than 10 days after the execution of the 37 Contract. The Plan shall be a Type 2 Working Drawing and apply to *** 38 $$1$$ *** during the active nesting season described as March 15 to 39 September 15. 40 41 The Contractor’s Project-specific Bird Protection Plan shall be prepared 42 and implemented by a qualified biologist. The biologist shall be available 43 to work during day or night to lead, direct, or carry out monitoring, 44 inspection, and activities described in the Project-specific Bird Protection 45 Plan. The Bird Protection Plan shall include the following information on 46 the biologist: 47 48

1. Evidence of the qualification for the designated Biologist and a 49 backup Biologist. The evidence of qualification will include at a 50 minimum a bachelor’s degree in biology, zoology, natural 51


resource management, environmental science, or a related 1 degree with a science emphasis. 2

3 2. Resumé of each biologists’ work experience including: 4 5

a. Description of applicable projects over a five-year period to 6 include a description of the work experience to identify birds 7 and bird nests with the associated projects. 8

9 b. Duration of each project including start date and finish date. 10 11 c. Position held for each applicable project. 12 13 d. Location of each project to include 2 years in the Pacific 14

Northwest. 15 16 e. References, including the name and contact information for 17

each project. 18 19

The Project-specific Bird Protection Plan shall also include: 20 21

1. Bird species identified by the Contracting Agency in the MBTA 22 Assessment Report (Appendix *** $$2$$ ***). 23

24 2. Precautions taken or to be taken to prevent birds from nesting on 25

bridges or other structures that would be demolished, modified, 26 or disturbed by project construction. 27

28 3. Methods, materials, and equipment used to remove nest starts, 29

which are described as partial or complete nests that don’t 30 contain eggs or chicks. 31

32 4. Containment methods to prevent removed nesting materials from 33

contributing to air or water pollution. 34 35 5. Disposal of nesting materials removed in accordance with 36

Section 2-03.3(7)C. 37 38 6. Communicating, notifying, and documenting: 39 40

a. Name and contact information of the Contractor’s qualified 41 biologist and one qualified emergency back-up biologist. 42

43 b. Name and contact information of the Engineer. 44 45 c. Describe notification, communication, and documentation 46

procedures to follow in the event an active nest (i.e., one that 47 has eggs or chicks) or unanticipated species upon the 48 discovery of a nest. 49

50


d. Describe notification to follow in the event a raptor nest (even 1 unoccupied ones outside the breeding season) is 2 discovered. 3

4 7. The list of Contractor employees that have received Bird 5

Protection training. 6 7 Once a week, the Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing to the 8 Engineer, detailing their findings from the prior week’s inspections. 9 10 Payment 11 Payment will be made for the following bid item when included in the 12 proposal: 13 14

“Bird Protection and Monitoring”, Lump Sum. 15 The lump sum Contract price for “Bird Protection and Monitoring” shall 16 be full pay for all the Work as specified. 17

18 1-07.6.GR1 19

Permits and Licenses 20 21 1-07.6.INST1.GR1 22 Section 1-07.6 is supplemented with the following: 23 24 1-07.6.OPT1.FR1 25

(January 2, 2018) 26 The Contracting Agency has obtained the below-listed permit(s) for this project. A copy 27 of the permit(s) is attached as an appendix for informational purposes. Copies of these 28 permits, including a copy of the Transfer of Coverage form, when applicable, are required 29 to be onsite at all times. 30 31 Contact with the permitting agencies, concerning the below-listed permit(s), shall be 32 made through the Engineer with the exception of when the Construction Stormwater 33 General Permit coverage is transferred to the Contractor, direct communication with the 34 Department of Ecology is allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining 35 Ecology’s approval for any Work requiring additional approvals (e.g. Request for 36 Chemical Treatment Form). The Contractor shall obtain additional permits as necessary. 37 All costs to obtain and comply with additional permits shall be included in the applicable 38 Bid items for the Work involved. 39 40 *** $$1$$ *** 41

42 1-07.6.OPT3.GB1 43

United States Coast Guard 44 45 1-07.6.OPT3(A).FB1 46

(September 3, 2019) 47 The Contracting Agency has obtained a United States Coast Guard Bridge Permit *** 48 $$1$$ *** for this project. 49 50


The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and remove all temporary navigation lights, 1 signs, signals, and any other warning devices required by the Coast Guard and as 2 required for public safety on all falsework, cofferdams, or other temporary structure in 3 the waterway. 4 5 The Contractor shall comply with all Coast Guard requirements inclusive of the following 6 Bridge Permit conditions: 7 8

1. The construction of falsework, cofferdams or other obstructions, if required, 9 shall be in accordance with plans submitted to and approved by the 10 Commander, 13th Coast Guard District, prior to construction of the bridge. All 11 work shall be so conducted that the free navigation of the waterway is not 12 unreasonably interfered with and the present navigable depths are not 13 impaired. Timely notice of any and all events that may affect navigation shall 14 be given to the District Commander during construction of the bridge. The 15 channel or channels through the structure shall be promptly cleared of all 16 obstructions placed therein or caused by the construction of the bridge to the 17 satisfaction of the District Commander, when in the District Commander's 18 judgment the construction work has reached a point where such action should 19 be taken, but in no case later than 90 calendar days after the bridge has been 20 opened to traffic. 21

22 2. *** $$2$$ *** 23 24

The Contractor shall notify the Coast Guard in writing, with a copy to the Engineer, of the 25 work start date at least seven calendar days before beginning any site work and shall at 26 that time designate the Contractor's authorized representative, and work phone number, 27 for coordination on matters that relate to Coast Guard approvals and requirements. 28 29 The Contractor's applications for required Coast Guard construction approvals for this 30 project shall include, but not be limited to, cofferdams, falsework, temporary navigation 31 lighting, work bridges, and other obstructions. These applications shall be submitted to 32 the Coast Guard by the Contractor, with a copy to the Engineer, a minimum of 30 33 calendar days in advance of the scheduled work. A schedule of when the work is to be 34 performed and when the obstructions are to be permanently removed shall be a part of 35 the Contractor's application. 36 37 The Contractor shall provide the Coast Guard and the Engineer with prompt verbal 38 notice, followed by written notice, of any subsequent changes to this proposed schedule. 39 40 A copy of all Coast Guard approvals shall be provided to the Engineer upon receipt but 41 not later than prior to beginning work on the items of work involved. 42 43 By the 20th of each month, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a schedule of the 44 work expected to be performed in the next two months. The Engineer will transmit this 45 information through the Bridge and Structures Office to the Coast Guard so that 46 interested users of the waterway can be notified. 47 48 The Coast Guard contact is: 49 50

Bridge Administrator 51


Thirteenth Coast Guard District 1 915 Second Avenue Suite 3510 2 Seattle, WA 98174-1067 3 [email protected] 4 Telephone: (206) 220-7282 5 6

All costs in connection with furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing temporary 7 navigation lights, signs, signals, or other warning devices shall be included in the contract 8 prices for the items of work involved. 9 10 All costs incurred in obtaining the required Coast Guard approvals and in complying with 11 all requirements specified herein shall be included in the contract prices for the items of 12 work involved. 13 14 All costs in connection with delays in the construction caused by the Contractor's failure 15 to obtain the necessary Coast Guard approvals shall be at the Contractor's expense. 16

17 1-07.6.OPT3(B).GB1 18

(September 3, 2019) 19 The Contractor shall comply with all United States Coast Guard requirements. 20 21 The Contractor shall submit a Type 3 Working Drawing consisting of a Navigation Work 22 Plan at least 60-calendar days prior to beginning activities and operations affecting any 23 part of the waterway in the vicinity of the bridge work. The Navigation Work Plan shall 24 include, at a minimum, the following: 25 26

1. Lead Contractor contact for the project, with associated email and phone 27 number. 28

29 2. Scheduled on-site start work date and finish work date. 30 31 3. Days and times of operation over the nominal work week. 32 33 4. Dates and times of stages of work, as applicable for operations involving 34

sequential or staged activities. 35 36 5. Location of the Work by latitude and longitude, river mile, and geographic point 37

of land, with latitude and longitude expressed in degrees, minutes, seconds, 38 and thousandths of seconds. 39

40 6. Identification and description of barges, vessels and equipment present in the 41

waterway, if any, to facilitate operations. The description shall include vessel 42 type, vessel name (as applicable), means of voice contact (VHF frequencies, 43 cell phone number, etc.) to the vessel, means of anchoring and mooring the 44 vessel and the location of such anchoring and mooring, the extent to which the 45 vessel is encroaching into the defined navigation channel, and lighting support 46 vessels in accordance with the Coast Guard Rules of the Road as applicable. 47

48 7. Point of contact phone number available for 24-hour-seven-days-a-week 49

contact from local mariners through the duration of the project. 50 51


8. Detailed identification of work operation hazards to mariners, if any, created by 1 operations (cables, buoys, machinery, tools, tows, containment and platform 2 structures, falling debris, etc.), including details such as size, diameter, color as 3 applicable. 4

5 9. Precautions regarding the in-water vessels, equipment, and work operation 6

hazards, if any, affecting local mariners such as operating speed and wake, 7 clearance distance, etc. 8

9 10. Systems and equipment causing a reduction in the available vertical clearance 10

beneath the bridge, if any, such as containment and platform systems and 11 supports and the equipment necessary to install, maintain, and remove such 12 systems, and the identification of any falling debris hazard to waterway traffic. 13

14 11. Description of advisory signage and lighting to be implemented by the 15

Contractor to advise local mariners of the operations, reduced clearances, and 16 presence of work operation hazards, as applicable. The description shall 17 include the advisory message, and placement and orientation of the signage 18 and flashing amber lighting (4-seconds/15 per minute). 19

20 The Engineer will submit the Navigation Work Plan to the US Coast Guard contact 21 identified below for concurrent review. Approval from the US Coast Guard and the 22 Engineer is required prior to the US Coast Guard issuing a Local Notice to Mariners 23 advising of the operations, and allowing the operations to commence. 24 25 The Contractor shall contact the US Coast Guard for requirements related to the mooring 26 of barges, placement of log booms, and all other equipment that could be a hazard to 27 waterway users. 28 29 Provisions shall be made for the removal, on 2 hours notice, of all equipment that would 30 block or partially block, the navigable portion of the waterway. 31 32 The US Coast Guard contact is: 33 34

Bridge Administrator 35 Thirteenth Coast Guard District 36 915 Second Avenue Suite 3510 37 Seattle, WA 98174-1067 38 [email protected] 39 Telephone: (206) 220-7282 40 41

All costs incurred in contacting the US Coast Guard and in complying with all the 42 requirements specified herein shall be included in the contract prices for the items of 43 work involved. 44 45 All costs in connection with delays in the construction caused by the Contractor's failure 46 to contact the US Coast Guard shall be at the Contractor's expense. 47

48 1-07.7.GR1 49

Load Limits 50 51


1-07.7.INST1.GR1 1 Section 1-07.7 is supplemented with the following: 2 3 1-07.7.OPT1.GR1 4

(March 13, 1995) 5 Except for the load limit restrictions specified in Section 1-07.7(2), the Contractor may 6 operate vehicles which exceed the legal gross weight limitations without special permits 7 or payment of additional fees provided such vehicles are employed in the construction 8 and within the limits of this project. 9 10 Subparagraph 1 of the second paragraph of Section 1-07.7(1) is deleted. 11

12 1-07.7.OPT2.FR1 13

(March 13, 1995) 14 Except for the load limit restrictions specified in Section 1-07.7(2), and as outlined below, 15 the Contractor may operate vehicles which exceed the legal gross weight limitations 16 without special permits or payment of additional fees provided such vehicles are 17 employed in the construction and within the limits of this project. 18 19 Subparagraph 1 of the second paragraph of Section 1-07.7(1) is deleted. 20 21 The Contractor shall not operate vehicles which exceed the maximum gross weight 22 provided by law within the following areas of this project: 23 24

*** $$1$$ *** 25 26 1-07.7.OPT3.FR1 27

(March 13, 1995) 28 The State has made arrangements with *** $$1$$ *** for the Contractor's use of the *** 29 $$2$$ *** shown in the Plans as a haul route for materials coming from *** $$3$$ *** Site 30 *** $$4$$ *** and used on this project. The Contractor shall comply with all existing legal 31 restrictions. 32 33 If the Contractor selects different haul routes than those designated, the Contractor shall, 34 at the Contractor's expense, make all arrangements for the use of the haul routes. 35

36 1-07.7.OPT4.FR1 37

(March 13, 1995) 38 The Contractor shall also comply with the further restrictions imposed by the owner of 39 the roads as follows: 40 41

*** $$1$$ *** 42 43 1-07.7.OPT5.GR1 44

(March 13, 1995) 45 Whenever the Contractor obtains materials from a source other than that provided by the 46 Contracting Agency, or provides a source for materials not designated to come from a 47 source provided by the State and the location of the source necessitates hauling on other 48 than State Highways, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, make all 49 arrangements for the use of the haul routes. 50

51


1-07.7.OPT6.GR1 1 (March 13, 1995) 2 If the sources of materials provided by the Contractor necessitates hauling over roads 3 other than State Highways, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, make all 4 arrangements for the use of the haul routes. 5

6 1-07.9.GR1 7

Wages 8 9 1-07.9(1).GR1 10

General 11 12 1-07.9(1).INST1.GR1 13


(January 13, 2021) 17 The Federal wage rates incorporated in this contract have been established by the 18 Secretary of Labor under United States Department of Labor General Decision No. 19 WA20210001. 20 21 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 22 activities associated with this contract. 23

24 1-07.9(1).OPT2.FR1 25

(January 13, 2021) 26 The Federal wage rates for Highway Construction incorporated in this contract have 27 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 28 Labor General Decision No. WA20210001. These rates are applicable to highway 29 construction. 30 31 The Federal wage rates for Building Construction incorporated in this contract have 32 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 33 Labor General Decision No. *** $$1$$ ***. These rates are applicable to building 34 construction. 35 36 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 37 activities associated with this contract. 38

39 1-07.9(1).OPT3.FR1 40

(May 11, 2010) 41 The Federal wage rates for Building Construction incorporated in this contract have 42 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 43 Labor General Decision No. *** $$1$$ ***. These rates are applicable to building 44 construction. 45 46 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 47 activities associated with this contract. 48

49


1-07.9(1).OPT4.GR1 1 (April 2, 2007) 2 Application of Wage Rates for the Occupation of Landscape Construction 3 State prevailing wage rates for public works contracts are included in this contract 4 and show a separate listing for the occupation: 5 6

Landscape Construction, which includes several different occupation 7 descriptions such as: Irrigation and Landscape Plumbers, Irrigation and 8 Landscape Power Equipment Operators, and Landscaping or Planting 9 Laborers. 10 11

In addition, federal wage rates that are included in this contract may also include 12 occupation descriptions in Federal Occupational groups for work also specifically 13 identified with landscaping such as: 14 15

Laborers with the occupation description, Landscaping or Planting, or 16 17 Power Equipment Operators with the occupation description, Mulch Seeding 18 Operator. 19 20

If Federal wage rates include one or more rates specified as applicable to 21 landscaping work, then Federal wage rates for all occupation descriptions, specific 22 or general, must be considered and compared with corresponding State wage rates. 23 The higher wage rate, either State or Federal, becomes the minimum wage rate for 24 the work performed in that occupation. 25 26 Contractors are responsible for determining the appropriate crafts necessary to 27 perform the contract work. If a classification considered necessary for performance 28 of the work is missing from the Federal Wage Determination applicable to the 29 contract, the Contractor shall initiate a request for approval of a proposed wage and 30 benefit rate. The Contractor shall prepare and submit Standard Form 1444, Request 31 for Authorization of Additional Classification and Wage Rate available at 32 http://www.wdol.gov/docs/sf1444.pdf, and submit the completed form to the 33 Engineer’s office. The presence of a classification wage on the Washington State 34 Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts does not exempt the use of form 35 1444 for the purpose of determining a federal classification wage rate. 36

37 1-07.9(1).OPT5.FR1 38

(January 13, 2021) 39 The Federal wage rates for Highway Construction incorporated in this contract have 40 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 41 Labor General Decision No. WA20210001. These rates are applicable to highway 42 construction. 43 44 The Federal wage rates for Heavy Construction incorporated in this contract have 45 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 46 Labor General Decision No. *** $$1$$ ***. These rates are applicable to heavy 47 construction. 48 49 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 50 activities associated with this contract. 51


1 1-07.9(1).OPT6.FR1 2

(January 13, 2021) 3 The Federal wage rates for Highway Construction incorporated in this contract have 4 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 5 Labor General Decision No. WA20210001. These rates are applicable to highway 6 construction. 7 8 The Federal wage rates for Heavy Construction incorporated in this contract have 9 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 10 Labor General Decision No. *** $$1$$ ***. These rates are applicable to heavy 11 construction. 12 13 The Federal wage rates for Building Construction incorporated in this contract have 14 been established by the Secretary of Labor under United States Department of 15 Labor General Decision No. *** $$2$$ ***. These rates are applicable to building 16 construction 17 18 The State rates incorporated in this contract are applicable to all construction 19 activities associated with this contract. 20

21 1-07.9(3).GR1 22

Apprentices 23 24 1-07.9(3).INST1.GR1 25


(January 6, 2020) 29 Apprentice Utilization 30 This Contract includes an Apprentice Utilization Requirement. No less than 15 31 percent of project Labor Hours shall be performed by Apprentices. 32 33 Definitions 34 For the purposes of this specification the following definitions apply: 35 36

1. Apprentice is a person enrolled in a State-approved Apprenticeship 37 Training Program. 38

39 2. Apprentice Utilization Requirement is the Apprentice labor hours 40

expressed as a percentage of the project Labor Hours. 41 42 3. Good Faith Effort (GFE) is used if the Contractor doesn’t meet the 43

Apprentice Utilization Requirement. It describes the Contractor’s efforts to 44 meet the Apprentice Utilization Requirement including but not necessarily 45 limited to the specific steps as described elsewhere in this specification. 46

47 4. Labor Hours are the total hours performed by all workers receiving an 48

hourly wage who are directly employed upon the project including hours 49 performed by workers employed by the Contractor and all Subcontractors. 50


Labor Hours do not include hours performed by foremen, superintendents, 1 owners, and workers who are not subject to prevailing wage requirements. 2

3 5. State-approved Apprenticeship Training Program is an apprenticeship 4

training program approved by the Washington State Apprenticeship 5 Council. 6

7 Electronic Reporting 8 The Contractor shall use the State L&I online Prevailing Wage Intent & Affidavit 9 (PWIA) System to submit the “Apprentice Utilization Plan” and “Good Faith Effort” 10 documentation. Reporting instructions are available in the application. 11 12 Apprentice Utilization Plan 13 The Contractor shall submit an “Apprentice Utilization Plan” by filling out the 14 Apprentice Utilization Plan Form (WSDOT Form 424-004) within 30 calendar days 15 of execution, demonstrating how and when they intend to achieve the Apprentice 16 Utilization Requirement. The Plan shall be in sufficient detail for the Engineer to 17 track the Contractor’s progress in meeting the utilization requirements and be 18 updated and resubmitted as the Work progresses or when ordered by the Engineer. 19 20 If the Contractor is unable to demonstrate ability to meet the Apprentice Utilization 21 Requirement in their Apprentice Utilization Plan, they must submit GFE 22 documentation to the State L&I online PWIA System for review and comment with 23 their Apprentice Utilization Plan. The Contractor shall actively seek out opportunities 24 to meet the Apprentice Utilization Requirement during the construction Work. 25 26 Contacts 27 The Contractor may obtain information on State-approved Apprenticeship Training 28 Programs by contacting the Department of Labor and Industries at: 29 30

Specialty Compliance And Services Division, Apprenticeship Section, P.O. Box 31 44530, Olympia, WA 98504-4530 or by phone at (360) 902-5320. 32

33 Compliance 34 In the event that the Contractor is unable to achieve the Apprentice Utilization 35 Requirement, the Contractor shall submit to the State L&I online PWIA System GFE 36 documentation for review and approval. The GFE documentation shall be submitted 37 after Substantial Completion but no later than 30 days after Physical Completion. If 38 GFE documentation was previously submitted as part of the Apprentice Utilization 39 Plan, it shall be updated and resubmitted after Substantial Completion but no later 40 than 30 days after Physical Completion. 41 42 If the Contractor fails to submit GFE documentation or if the Engineer does not 43 approve the GFE, the Contractor will be subject to disciplinary actions as allowed 44 under WAC 468-16-180. 45 46 Good Faith Efforts 47 The GFE shall describe in detail why the Contractor is not or was not able to attain 48 the Apprentice Utilization Requirement. The GFE documentation shall address one 49 or more of the following areas: 50 51


1. Correspondence on solicitation of Apprentices from a State-approved 1 Apprenticeship Training Program(s), and the response from the solicited 2 State-Approved Apprenticeship Training Program(s) when there is a lack 3 of availability of Apprentices. 4

5 2. Provide documentation that shows Contract requirements for TERO, 6

Special Training or Disadvantage Business Enterprise requirements affect 7 the ability to obtain Apprentice Labor Hours on the Contract. 8

9 3. Provide documentation demonstrating what efforts the Contractor has 10

taken to require Subcontractors to solicit and employ Apprentices. 11 Documentation could be posters placed on site, emphasis in subcontracts 12 about employing Apprentices, letters, memos or other correspondence 13 from Contractor to Subcontractor that put an emphasis on employing 14 Apprentices. 15

16 Contractors may receive a GFE credit for graduated Apprentice hours through the 17 end of the calendar year for all projects worked on as long as the Apprentice remains 18 continuously employed with the same Contractor they were working for when they 19 graduated. If an Apprentice graduates during employment on a project of significant 20 duration, they may be counted towards a GFE credit for up to one year after their 21 graduation or until the end of the project (whichever comes first). Determination of 22 whether or not Contract requirements were met in good faith will be made by 23 subtracting the hours from the journeyman total reported hours for the project and 24 adding them to the apprentice hour total. If the new utilization percentage meets the 25 Contract requirement, the Contractor will be reported as meeting the requirement in 26 good faith. 27 28 Payment 29 All costs incurred by the Contractor for complying with this specification shall be 30 included in the Contract prices for the Bid items of Work involved. 31

32 1-07.11.GR1 33

Requirements for Nondiscrimination 34 35 1-07.11.INST1.GR1 36 Section 1-07.11 is supplemented with the following: 37 38 1-07.11.OPT1.GR1 39

(September 3, 2019) 40 Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (Executive 41 Order 11246) 42 43 1. The Contractor's attention is called to the Equal Opportunity Clause and the 44

Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract 45 Specifications set forth herein. 46

47


2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation set by the Office of 1 Federal Contract Compliance Programs, expressed in percentage terms for the 2 Contractor's aggregate work force in each construction craft and in each trade on all 3 construction work in the covered area, are as follows: 4

5 Women - Statewide 6

7 Timetable Goal 8

9 Until further notice 6.9% 10 Minorities - by Standard Metropolitan Statistical Area (SMSA) 11 12 Spokane, WA: 13

SMSA Counties: 14 Spokane, WA 2.8 15

WA Spokane. 16 Non-SMSA Counties 3.0 17

WA Adams; WA Asotin; WA Columbia; WA Ferry; WA Garfield; WA 18 Lincoln, WA Pend Oreille; WA Stevens; WA Whitman. 19

20 Richland, WA 21

SMSA Counties: 22 Richland Kennewick, WA 5.4 23

WA Benton; WA Franklin. 24 Non-SMSA Counties 3.6 25

WA Walla Walla. 26 27 Yakima, WA: 28

SMSA Counties: 29 Yakima, WA 9.7 30

WA Yakima. 31 Non-SMSA Counties 7.2 32

WA Chelan; WA Douglas; WA Grant; WA Kittitas; WA Okanogan. 33 34 Seattle, WA: 35

SMSA Counties: 36 Seattle Everett, WA 7.2 37

WA King; WA Snohomish. 38 Tacoma, WA 6.2 39

WA Pierce. 40 Non-SMSA Counties 6.1 41

WA Clallam; WA Grays Harbor; WA Island; WA Jefferson; WA Kitsap; 42 WA Lewis; WA Mason; WA Pacific; WA San Juan; WA Skagit; WA 43 Thurston; WA Whatcom. 44

45


Portland, OR: 1 SMSA Counties: 2

Portland, OR-WA 4.5 3 WA Clark. 4

Non-SMSA Counties 3.8 5 WA Cowlitz; WA Klickitat; WA Skamania; WA Wahkiakum. 6

7 These goals are applicable to each nonexempt Contractor’s total on-site 8 construction workforce, regardless of whether or not part of that workforce is 9 performing work on a Federal, or federally assisted project, contract, or subcontract 10 until further notice. Compliance with these goals and time tables is enforced by the 11 Office of Federal Contract compliance Programs. 12 13 The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR 14 Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, 15 specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41 16 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female 17 employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the 18 contract, in each construction craft and in each trade, and the Contractor shall make 19 a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. 20 The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to 21 Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's 22 goal shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 23 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total 24 work hours performed. 25

26 3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Office of Federal Contract 27

Compliance Programs (OFCCP) within 10 working days of award of any 28 construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 or more that are Federally funded, at 29 any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The 30 notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the Subcontractor; 31 employer identification number of the Subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the 32 subcontract; estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and the 33 geographical area in which the contract is to be performed. The notification shall be 34 sent to: 35

36 U.S. Department of Labor 37 Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs Pacific Region 38 Attn: Regional Director 39 San Francisco Federal Building 40 90 – 7th Street, Suite 18-300 41 San Francisco, CA 94103(415) 625-7800 Phone 42 (415) 625-7799 Fax 43

44 4. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the Covered 45

Area is as designated herein. 46 47 Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications 48 (Executive Order 11246) 49 50 1. As used in these specifications: 51


1 a. Covered Area means the geographical area described in the solicitation 2

from which this contract resulted; 3 4 b. Director means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, 5

United States Department of Labor, or any person to whom the Director 6 delegates authority; 7

8 c. Employer Identification Number means the Federal Social Security number 9

used on the Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U. S. Treasury 10 Department Form 941; 11

12 d. Minority includes: 13 14

(1) Black, a person having origins in any of the Black Racial Groups 15 of Africa. 16

17 (2) Hispanic, a fluent Spanish speaking, Spanish surnamed person 18

of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central American, South 19 American, or other Spanish origin. 20

21 (3) Asian or Pacific Islander, a person having origins in any of the 22

original peoples of the Pacific rim or the Pacific Islands, the 23 Hawaiian Islands and Samoa. 24

25 (4) American Indian or Alaskan Native, a person having origins in any 26

of the original peoples of North America, and who maintain 27 cultural identification through tribal affiliation or community 28 recognition. 29

30 2. Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion 31

of the work involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each 32 subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of these specifications and the 33 Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and 34 which is set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted. 35

36 3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan 37

approved by the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area either individually 38 or through an association, its affirmative action obligations on all work in the Plan 39 area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan for those 40 trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors must be able to 41 demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such 42 Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or Subcontractor participating in an approved 43 Plan is individually required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause, 44 and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in 45 which it has employees. The overall good faith performance by other Contractors 46 or Subcontractors toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse any covered 47 Contractor's or Subcontractor's failure to take good faith effort to achieve the Plan 48 goals and timetables. 49

50


4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in 1 paragraphs 7a through 7p of this Special Provision. The goals set forth in the 2 solicitation from which this contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the 3 total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the 4 Contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which 5 it has employees in the covered area. Covered construction contractors performing 6 construction work in geographical areas where they do not have a Federal or 7 federally assisted construction contract shall apply the minority and female goals 8 established for the geographical area where the work is being performed. The 9 Contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress in meeting its goals 10 in each craft during the period specified. 11

12 5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a 13

union with whom the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer 14 either minorities or women shall excuse the Contractor's obligations under these 15 specifications, Executive Order 11246, or the regulations promulgated pursuant 16 thereto. 17

18 6. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted 19

in meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the 20 Contractor during the training period, and the Contractor must have made a 21 commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their 22 training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be 23 trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. 24

25 7. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment 26

opportunity. The evaluation of the Contractor's compliance with these specifications 27 shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its action. The 28 Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall implement affirmative action 29 steps at least as extensive as the following: 30

31 a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, 32

intimidation, and coercion at all sites, and in all facilities at which the 33 Contractor's employees are assigned to work. The Contractor, where 34 possible, will assign two or more women to each construction project. The 35 Contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and 36 other on-site supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the 37 Contractor's obligation to maintain such a working environment, with 38 specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or 39 in such facilities. 40

41 b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment 42

sources, provide written notification to minority and female recruitment 43 sources and to community organizations when the Contractor or its unions 44 have employment opportunities available, and maintain a record of the 45 organizations' responses. 46

47 c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of 48

each minority and female off-the-street applicant and minority or female 49 referral from a union, a recruitment source or community organization and 50 of what action was taken with respect to each such individual. If such 51


individual was sent to the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred 1 back to the Contractor by the union or, if referred, not employed by the 2 Contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefor, 3 along with whatever additional actions the Contractor may have taken. 4

5 d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or 6

unions with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement 7 has not referred to the Contractor a minority person or woman sent by the 8 Contractor, or when the Contractor has other information that the union 9 referral process has impeded the Contractor's efforts to meet its 10 obligations. 11

12 e. Develop on-the-job training opportunity and/or participate in training 13

programs for the area which expressly include minorities and women, 14 including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs 15 relevant to the Contractor's employment needs, especially those programs 16 funded or approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. The Contractor shall 17 provide notice of these programs to the sources compiled under 7b above. 18

19 f. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy 20

to unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in 21 assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in 22 any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in 23 the company newspaper, annual report, etc.; by specific review of the 24 policy with all management personnel and with all minority and female 25 employees at least once a year; and by posting the company EEO policy 26 on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where 27 construction work is performed. 28

29 g. Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative action 30

obligations under these specifications with all employees having any 31 responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination or other 32 employment decisions including specific review of these items with on-site 33 supervisory personnel such as Superintendents, General Foremen, etc., 34 prior to the initiation of construction work at any job site. A written record 35 shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these 36 meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of 37 the subject matter. 38

39 h. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any 40

advertising in the news media, specifically including minority and female 41 news media, and providing written notification to and discussing the 42 Contractor's EEO policy with other Contractors and Subcontractors with 43 whom the Contractor does or anticipates doing business. 44

45 i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written to minority, female and 46

community organizations, to schools with minority and female students and 47 to minority and female recruitment and training organizations serving the 48 Contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one 49 month prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for 50 apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source, the Contractor 51


shall send written notification to organizations such as the above, 1 describing the openings, screening procedures, and tests to be used in the 2 selection process. 3

4 j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority 5

persons and women and where reasonable, provide after school, summer 6 and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on the site 7 and in other areas of a Contractor's work force. 8

9 k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an 10

obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3. 11 12 l. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation of all minority and 13

female personnel for promotional opportunities and encourage these 14 employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., 15 such opportunities. 16

17 m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments and 18

other personnel practices, do not have a discriminatory effect by 19 continually monitoring all personnel and employment related activities to 20 ensure that the EEO policy and the Contractor's obligations under these 21 specifications are being carried out. 22

23 n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are nonsegregated except 24

that separate or single-user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall 25 be provided to assure privacy between the sexes. 26

27 o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for 28

subcontracts from minority and female construction contractors and 29 suppliers, including circulation of solicitations to minority and female 30 contractor associations and other business associations. 31

32 p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisors' adherence to and 33

performance under the Contractor's EEO policies and affirmative action 34 obligations. 35

36 8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in 37

fulfilling one or more of their affirmative action obligations (7a through 7p). The 38 efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor-union, contractor-community, or 39 other similar group of which the Contractor is a member and participant, may be 40 asserted as fulfilling any one or more of the obligations under 7a through 7p of this 41 Special Provision provided that the Contractor actively participates in the group, 42 makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the employment 43 of minorities and women in the industry, ensure that the concrete benefits of the 44 program are reflected in the Contractor's minority and female work-force 45 participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and timetables, 46 and can provide access to documentation which demonstrate the effectiveness of 47 actions taken on behalf of the Contractor. The obligation to comply, however, is the 48 Contractor's and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not be a defense 49 for the Contractor's noncompliance. 50

51


9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been 1 established. The Contractor, however, is required to provide equal employment 2 opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority groups, both male and 3 female, and all women, both minority and non-minority. Consequently, the 4 Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is 5 employed in substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the 6 Contractor has achieved its goals for women generally, the Contractor may be in 7 violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is 8 underutilized). 9

10 10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action standards 11

to discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national 12 origin. 13

14 11. The Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any person or firm debarred 15

from Government contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246. 16 17 12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these 18

specifications and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspensions, 19 terminations and cancellations of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or 20 ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing 21 regulations by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor 22 who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these 23 specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended. 24

25 13. The Contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall implement 26

specific affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed 27 in paragraph 7 of this Special Provision, so as to achieve maximum results from its 28 efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the Contractor fails to comply 29 with the requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these 30 specifications, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8. 31

32 14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment 33

related activity to ensure that the company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit 34 reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by the government and 35 to keep records. Records shall at least include, for each employee, their name, 36 address, telephone numbers, construction trade, union affiliation if any, employee 37 identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., 38 mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours 39 worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work 40 was performed. Records shall be maintained in an easily understandable and 41 retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records satisfy this 42 requirement, the Contractors will not be required to maintain separate records. 43

44 15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of 45

other laws which establish different standards of compliance or upon the application 46 of requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g., those under the 47 Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block 48 Grant Program). 49

50


16. Additional assistance for Federal Construction Contractors on contracts 1 administered by Washington State Department of Transportation or by Local 2 Agencies may be found at: 3

4 Washington State Dept. of Transportation 5 Office of Equal Opportunity 6 PO Box 47314 7 310 Maple Park Ave. SE 8 Olympia WA 9 98504-7314 10 Ph: 360-705-7090 11 Fax: 360-705-6801 12 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/equalopportunity/default.htm 13

14 1-07.11.OPT2.GR1 15

(April 3, 2018September 7, 2021) 16

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Participation 17 The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and 18 USDOT’s official interpretations (i.e., Questions & Answers) apply to this Contract. As 19 such, the requirements of this Contract are to make affirmative efforts to solicit DBEs, 20 provide information on who submitted a Bid or quote and to report DBE participation 21 monthly as described elsewhere in these Contract Provisions. No preference will be 22 included in the evaluation of Bids/Proposals, no minimum level of DBE participation shall 23 be required as a Condition of Award and Bids/Proposals may not be rejected or 24 considered non-responsive on that basis. 25 26

DBE Abbreviations and Definitions 27 Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 28 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in the 29 procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or supplies 30 required for the performance of the Contract, or, persons/companies who 31 arrange or expedite transactions. 32 33 Certified Business Description – Specific descriptions of work the DBE is 34 certified to perform, as identified in the Certified Firm Directory, under the 35 Vendor Information page. 36 37 Certified Firm Directory – A database of all Minority, Women, and 38 Disadvantaged Business Enterprises. The on-line Directory is available to 39 Contractors for their use in identifying and soliciting interest from DBE firms. 40 The database is located under the Firm Certification section of the Diversity 41 Management and Compliance System web page at: 42 https://omwbe.diversitycompliance.com. 43 44 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 45 49 CFR 26.55(c)(1) defines commercially useful function as: “A DBE performs 46 a commercially useful function when it is responsible for execution of the work 47 of the contract and is carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, 48 managing, and supervising the work involved. To perform a commercially useful 49 function, the DBE must also be responsible, with respect to materials and 50 supplies used on the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality and 51


quantity, ordering the material, and installing (where applicable) and paying for 1 the material itself. To determine whether a DBE is performing a commercially 2 useful function, you must evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry 3 practices, whether the amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is 4 commensurate with the work it is actually performing and the DBE credit 5 claimed for its performance of the work, and other relevant factors.” 6 7 Contract – For this Special Provision only, this definition supplements Section 8 1-01.3. 49 CFR 26.5 defines contract as: “… a legally binding relationship 9 obligating a seller to furnish supplies or services (including, but not limited to, 10 construction and professional services) and the buyer to pay for them. For 11 purposes of this part, a lease is considered to be a contract.” 12 13 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) – A business firm certified by the 14 Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises, as 15 meeting the criteria outlined in 49 CFR 26 regarding DBE certification. A 16 Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (UDBE) firm is a subset of 17 DBE. 18 19 Force Account Work – Work measured and paid in accordance with Section 20 1-09.6. 21 22 Manufacturer (DBE) – A DBE firm that operates or maintains a factory or 23 establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, articles, 24 or equipment required under the Contract. A DBE Manufacturer shall produce 25 finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or purchase and 26 substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable for construction 27 use before reselling them. 28 29 Regular Dealer (DBE) – A DBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, 30 warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies required 31 for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and regularly sold 32 to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Regular Dealer, the DBE 33 firm must be an established regular business that engages in as its principal 34 business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the products in question. 35 A Regular Dealer in such items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and petroleum 36 products need not own, operate or maintain a place of business if it both owns 37 and operates distribution equipment for the products. Any supplementing of 38 regular dealers’ own distribution equipment shall be by long-term formal lease 39 agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, packagers, manufacturers’ 40 representatives, or other persons who arrange or expedite transactions shall 41 not be regarded as Regular Dealers within the meaning of this definition. 42

43 DBE Goals 44 No DBE goals have been assigned as part of this Contract. 45 46 Affirmative Efforts to Solicit DBE Participation 47 The Contractor shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, sex, national 48 origin, age, or disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including 49 procurement of materials and leases of equipment. DBE firms shall have an equal 50


opportunity to compete for subcontracts in which the Contractor enters into pursuant 1 to this Contract. 2 3 Contractors are encouraged to: 4

5 1. Advertise opportunities for Subcontractors or suppliers in a timely and 6

reasonably designed manner to provide notice of the opportunity to DBEs 7 capable of performing the Work. All advertisements should include a 8 Contract Provision encouraging participation by DBE firms. This may be 9 accomplished through general advertisements (e.g. newspapers, journals, 10 etc.) or by soliciting Bids/Proposals directly from DBEs. 11

12 2. Establish delivery schedules that encourage participation by DBEs and 13

other small businesses. 14 15 3. Participate with a DBE as a joint venture. 16 17

DBE Eligibility/Selection of DBEs for Reporting Purposes Only 18 Contractor may take credit for DBEs utilized on this Contract only if the firm is 19 certified for the Work being performed, and the firm performs a commercially useful 20 function (CUF). 21 22 Absent a mandatory goal, all DBE participation that is attained on this project will be 23 considered as “race neutral” participation and shall be reported as such. 24 25 Crediting DBE Participation 26 All DBE Subcontractors shall be certified before the subcontract on which they are 27 participating is executed. 28 29 Be advised that although a firm is listed in the directory, there are cases where the 30 listed firm is in a temporary suspension status. The Contractor shall review the 31 OMWBE Suspended DBE Firms list. A DBE firm that is included on this list may not 32 enter into new contracts that count towards participation. 33 34 DBE participation is only credited upon payment to the DBE. 35 36 The following are some definitions of what may be counted as DBE participation. 37 38

DBE Prime Contractor 39 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 40 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE Prime Contractor 41 performs with its own forces and is certified to perform. 42 43 DBE Subcontractor 44 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract equal 45 to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE performs with 46 its own forces. The value of work performed by the DBE includes the cost of 47 supplies and materials purchased by the DBE and equipment leased by the 48 DBE, for its work on the contract. Supplies, materials or equipment obtained by 49 a DBE that are not utilized or incorporated in the contract work by the DBE will 50 not be eligible for DBE credit. 51


1 The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 2 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to DBE 3 subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited. 4 5 DBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease includes 6 the operator. The DBE is expected to operate the equipment used in the 7 performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. Situations where 8 equipment is leased and used by the DBE, but payment is deducted from the 9 Contractor’s payment to the DBE is not allowed. 10 11 If a DBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to another firm, the 12 value of the subcontracted Work may be credited only if the DBE’s Lower-Tier 13 Subcontractor is also a DBE. Work subcontracted to a non-DBE shall not be 14 credited. 15 16 Count expenditures toward race/gender-neutral participation only if the DBE is 17 performing a CUF on the contract. 18 19 DBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 20 There must be a subcontract agreement that complies with 49 CFR Part 26 and 21 fully describes the distinct elements of Work committed to be performed by the 22 DBE. The subcontract agreement shall incorporate requirements of the primary 23 Contract. Subcontract agreements of all tiers, including lease agreements shall 24 be readily available at the project site for the Engineer review. 25 26 DBE Service Provider 27 The value of fees or commissions charged by a DBE Broker, a DBE behaving 28 in a manner of a Broker, or another service provider for providing a bona fide 29 service, such as professional, technical, consultant, managerial services, or for 30 providing bonds or insurance specifically required for the performance of the 31 contract will only be credited as DBE participation, if the fee/commission is 32 determined by the Contracting Agency to be reasonable and the firm has 33 performed a CUF. 34 35 Temporary Traffic Control 36 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of only “Flagging”, the DBE firm 37 must provide a Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) and flagger, which are under 38 the direct control of the DBE. The DBE firm shall also provide all flagging 39 equipment (e.g. paddles, hard hats, and vests). 40 41 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of “Traffic Control Services”, the 42 DBE firm must provide a TCS, flaggers, and traffic control items (e.g., cones, 43 barrels, signs, etc.) and be in total control of all items in implementing the traffic 44 control for the project. In addition, if the DBE firm utilizes the Contractor’s 45 equipment, such as Transportable Attenuators and Portable Changeable 46 Message Signs (PCMS) no DBE credit can be taken for supplying and 47 operating the items. 48


1 Trucking 2 DBE trucking firm participation may only be credited as DBE participation for 3 the value of the hauling services, not for the materials being hauled unless the 4 trucking firm is also certified as a supplier. In situations where the DBE’s work 5 is priced per ton, the value of the hauling service must be calculated separately 6 from the value of the materials in order to determine DBE credit for hauling. 7 8 The DBE trucking firm must own and operate at least one licensed, insured and 9 operational truck on the contract. The truck must be of the type that is necessary 10 to perform the hauling duties required under the contract. The DBE receives 11 credit for the value of the transportation services it provides on the Contract 12 using trucks it owns or leases, licenses, insures, and operates with drivers it 13 employs. 14 15 The DBE may lease additional trucks from another DBE firm. The Work that a 16 DBE trucking firm performs with trucks it leases from other certified DBE 17 trucking firms qualify for 100% DBE credit 18 19 The trucking Work subcontracted to any non-DBE trucking firm will not receive 20 credit for Work done on the project. The DBE may lease trucks from a non-DBE 21 truck leasing company, but can only receive credit as DBE participation if the 22 DBE uses its own employees as drivers. 23 24 DBE credit for a truck broker is limited to the fee/commission that the DBE 25 receives for arranging transportation services. 26 27 Truck registration and lease agreements shall be readily available at the project 28 site for the Engineer review. 29 30 DBE Manufacturer and DBE Regular Dealer 31 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of the manufactured product obtained 32 from a DBE Manufacturer can count as DBE participation. 33 34 Sixty percent (60%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased from a DBE 35 Regular Dealer may be credited as DBE participation. If the role of the DBE 36 Regular Dealer is determined to be that of a pass-through, then no DBE credit 37 will be given for its services. If the role of the DBE Regular Dealer is determined 38 to be that of a Broker, then DBE credit shall be limited to the fee or commission 39 it receives for its services. Regular Dealer status and the amount of credit is 40 determined on a Contract-by-Contract basis. 41 42 Regular Dealer DBE firms must be approved before being used on a project. 43 The WSDOT Approved Regular Dealer list published on WSDOT’s Office of 44 Equal Opportunity (OEO) web site must include the specific project for which 45 approval is being requested. The Regular Dealer must submit the Regular 46 Dealer Status Request form a minimum of five days prior to being utilized on 47 the specific project. 48 49 Purchase of materials or supplies from a DBE which is neither a manufacturer 50 nor a regular dealer, (i.e. Broker) only the fees or commissions charged for 51


assistance in the procurement of the materials and supplies, or fees or 1 transportation charges for the delivery of materials or supplies required on a job 2 site, can count as DBE participation provided the fees are not excessive as 3 compared with fees customarily allowed for similar services. Documentation 4 will be required to support the fee/commission charged by the DBE. The cost 5 of the materials and supplies themselves cannot be counted toward as DBE 6 participation. 7 8 Note: Requests to be listed as a Regular Dealer will only be processed if the 9

requesting firm is a material supplier certified by the Office of Minority 10 and Women’s Business Enterprises in a NAICS code that falls within 11 the 42XXXX NAICS Wholesale code section. 12

13 Procedures Between Award and Execution 14 After Award and prior to Execution, the Contractor shall provide the additional 15 information described below. Failure to comply shall result in the forfeiture of the 16 Bidder’s Proposal bond or deposit. 17

18 1. A list of all firms who submitted a Bid or quote in attempt to participate in 19

this project whether they were successful or not. Include the business 20 name and mailing address. 21

22 Note: The firms identified by the Contractor may be contacted by the 23

Contracting Agency to solicit general information as follows: 24 age of the firm and average of its gross annual receipts over 25 the past three-years. 26

27 Procedures After Execution 28

Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 29 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work performed 30 by a DBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment must be 31 commensurate with the work actually performed by the DBE. This applies to 32 all DBEs performing Work on a project, whether or not the DBEs are COA, if 33 the Contractor wants to receive credit for their participation. The Engineer will 34 conduct CUF reviews to ascertain whether DBEs are performing a CUF. A DBE 35 performs a CUF when it is carrying out its responsibilities of its contract by 36 actually performing, managing, and supervising the Work involved. The DBE 37 must be responsible for negotiating price; determining quality and quantity; 38 ordering the material, installing (where applicable); and paying for the material 39 itself. If a DBE does not perform “all” of these functions on a furnish-and-install 40 contract, it has not performed a CUF and the cost of materials cannot be 41 counted toward UDBE COA Goal. Leasing of equipment from a leasing 42 company is allowed. However, leasing/purchasing equipment from the 43 Contractor is not allowed. Lease agreements shall be readily available for 44 review by the Engineer. 45 46 In order for a DBE traffic control company to be considered to be performing a 47 CUF, the DBE must be in control of its work inclusive of supervision. The DBE 48 shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who is directly involved in the 49 management and supervision of the traffic control employees and services. 50 51


The DBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 1 participant in a transaction, contract, or project through which the funds are 2 passed in order to obtain the appearance of DBE participation. 3 4 The following are some of the factors that the Engineer will use in determining 5 whether a DBE trucking company is performing a CUF: 6 7

• The DBE shall be responsible for the management and supervision 8 of the entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on the 9 Contract. The owner demonstrates business related knowledge, 10 shows up on site and is determined to be actively running the 11 business. 12

13 • The DBE shall with its own workforce, operate at least one fully 14

licensed, insured, and operational truck used on the Contract. The 15 drivers of the trucks owned and leased by the DBE must be 16 exclusively employed by the DBE and reflected on the DBE’s payroll. 17

18 • Lease agreements for trucks shall indicate that the DBE has 19

exclusive use of and control over the truck(s). This does not preclude 20 the leased truck from working for others provided it is with the 21 consent of the DBE and the lease provides the DBE absolute priority 22 for use of the leased truck. 23

24 • Leased trucks shall display the name and identification number of 25

the DBE. 26 27 Joint Checking 28 A joint check is a check between a Subcontractor and the Contractor to the 29 supplier of materials/supplies. The check is issued by the Contractor as payer 30 to the Subcontractor and the material supplier jointly for items to be 31 incorporated into the project. The DBE must release the check to the supplier, 32 while the Contractor acts solely as the guarantor. 33 34 A joint check agreement must be approved by the Engineer and requested by 35 the DBE involved using the DBE Joint Check Request Form (form # 272-053) 36 prior to its use. The form must accompany the DBE Joint Check Agreement 37 between the parties involved, including the conditions of the arrangement and 38 expected use of the joint checks. 39 40 The approval to use joint checks and the use will be closely monitored by the 41 Engineer. To receive DBE credit for performing a CUF with respect to obtaining 42 materials and supplies, a DBE must “be responsible for negotiating price, 43 determining quality and quantity, ordering the material and installing and paying 44 for the material itself.” The Contractor shall submit DBE Joint Check Request 45 Form for the Engineer approval prior to using a joint check. 46 47 Material costs paid by the Contractor directly to the material supplier is not 48 allowed. If proper procedures are not followed or the Engineer determines that 49 the arrangement results in lack of independence for the DBE involved, no DBE 50 credit will be given for the DBE’s participation as it relates to the material cost. 51


1 Prompt Payment 2 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-3 08.1. Prompt Payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 4 return of retainage. 5 6 Reporting 7 The Contractor and all subcontractors/suppliers/service providers that utilize 8 DBEs to perform work on the project, shall maintain appropriate records that 9 will enable the Engineer to verify DBE participation throughout the life of the 10 project. 11 12 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 13 this Contract. 14 15 Decertification 16 When a DBE is “decertified” from the DBE program during the course of the 17 Contract, the participation of that DBE shall continue to count as DBE 18 participation as long as the subcontract with the DBE was executed prior to the 19 decertification notice. The Contractor is obligated to substitute when a DBE 20 does not have an executed subcontract agreement at the time of decertification. 21 22 Consequences of Non-Compliance 23 Each contract with a Contractor (and each subcontract the Contractor signs 24 with a Subcontractor) must include the following assurance clause: 25 26 The Contractor, subrecipient, or Subcontractor shall not discriminate on the 27 basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. 28 The Contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the 29 award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the Contractor 30 to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may 31 result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as the recipient 32 deems appropriate, which may include, but is not limited to: 33

34 (1) Withholding monthly progress payments; 35 36 (2) Assessing sanctions; 37 38 (3) Liquidated damages; and/or 39 40 (4) Disqualifying the Contractor from future bidding as non-responsible. 41 42

Payment 43 Compensation for all costs involved with complying with the conditions of this 44 Specification and any other associated DBE requirements is included in 45 payment for the associated Contract items of Work, except otherwise provided 46 in the Specifications. 47

48


1-07.11.OPT3.FR1 1

(November 9, 2020September 7, 2021) 2

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Participation 3 The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and 4 USDOT’s official interpretations (i.e., Questions & Answers) apply to this Contract. 5 Demonstrating compliance with these Specifications is a Condition of Award (COA) of 6 this Contract. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Specification may result in 7 your Bid being found to be nonresponsive resulting in rejection or other sanctions as 8 provided by Contract. 9 10

DBE Abbreviations and Definitions 11 Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 12 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in the 13 procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or supplies 14 required for the performance of the Contract; or, persons/companies who 15 arrange or expedite transactions. 16 17 Certified Business Description – Specific descriptions of work the DBE is 18 certified to perform, as identified in the Certified Firm Directory, under the 19 Vendor Information page. 20 21 Certified Firm Directory – A database of all Minority, Women, and 22 Disadvantaged Business Enterprises currently certified by Washington State. 23 The on-line Directory is available to Bidders for their use in identifying and 24 soliciting interest from DBE firms. The database is located under the Firm 25 Certification section of the Diversity Management and Compliance System web 26 page at: https://omwbe.diversitycompliance.com. 27 28 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) – 49 CFR 26.55(c)(1) defines 29 commercially useful function as: “A DBE performs a commercially useful 30 function when it is responsible for execution of the work of the contract and is 31 carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, managing, and 32 supervising the work involved. To perform a commercially useful function, the 33 DBE must also be responsible, with respect to materials and supplies used on 34 the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality and quantity, ordering the 35 material, and installing (where applicable) and paying for the material itself. To 36 determine whether a DBE is performing a commercially useful function, you 37 must evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry practices, whether 38 the amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is commensurate with the 39 work it is actually performing and the DBE credit claimed for its performance of 40 the work, and other relevant factors.” 41 42 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) – A business firm certified by the 43 Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises, as 44 meeting the criteria outlined in 49 CFR 26 regarding DBE certification. 45 46 Force Account Work – Work measured and paid in accordance with Section 47 1-09.6. 48 49


Good Faith Efforts – Efforts to achieve the DBE COA Goal or other 1 requirements of this part which, by their scope, intensity, and appropriateness 2 to the objective, can reasonably be expected to fulfill the program requirement. 3 4 Manufacturer (DBE) – A DBE firm that operates or maintains a factory or 5 establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, articles, 6 or equipment required under the Contract. A DBE Manufacturer shall produce 7 finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or purchase and 8 substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable for construction 9 use before reselling them. 10 11 Reasonable Fee (DBE) – For purposes of Brokers or service providers a 12 reasonable fee shall not exceed 5% of the total cost of the goods or services 13 brokered. 14 15 Regular Dealer (DBE) – A DBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, 16 warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies required 17 for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and regularly sold 18 to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Regular Dealer, the DBE 19 firm must be an established regular business that engages in as its principal 20 business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the products in question. 21 A Regular Dealer in such items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and petroleum 22 products need not own, operate or maintain a place of business if it both owns 23 and operates distribution equipment for the products. Any supplementing of 24 regular dealers’ own distribution equipment shall be by long-term formal lease 25 agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, packagers, manufacturers’ 26 representatives, or other persons who arrange or expedite transactions shall 27 not be regarded as Regular Dealers within the meaning of this definition. 28 29 DBE Commitment – The scope of work and dollar amount the Bidder indicates 30 they will be subcontracting to be applied towards the DBE Condition of Award 31 Goal as shown on the DBE Utilization Certification Form for each DBE 32 Subcontractor. This DBE Commitment will be incorporated into the Contract 33 and shall be considered a Contract requirement. The Contractor shall utilize the 34 COA DBEs to perform the work and supply the materials for which they are 35 committed. Any changes to the DBE Commitment require the Engineer’s prior 36 written approval. 37 38 DBE Condition of Award (COA) Goal – An assigned numerical amount 39 specified as a percentage of the Contract. Initially, this is the minimum amount 40 that the Bidder must commit to by submission of the Utilization Certification 41 Form and/or by Good Faith Effort (GFE). 42 43

DBE COA Goal 44 The Contracting Agency has established a DBE COA Goal for this Contract in the 45 amount of: *** $$1$$ *** 46 47 Crediting DBE Participation 48 Subcontractors proposed as COA must be certified prior to the due date for bids on 49 the Contract. All non-COA DBE Subcontractors shall be certified before the 50 subcontract on which they are participating is executed. 51


1 DBE participation is only credited upon payment to the DBE. 2 3 The following are some definitions of what may be counted as DBE participation. 4 5

DBE Prime Contractor 6 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 7 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE Prime Contractor 8 performs with its own forces and is certified to perform. 9 10 DBE Subcontractor 11 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract that 12 is equal to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE performs 13 with its own forces and is certified to perform. The value of work performed by 14 the DBE includes the cost of supplies and materials purchased by the DBE and 15 equipment leased by the DBE, for its work on the contract. Supplies, materials 16 or equipment obtained by a DBE that are not utilized or incorporated in the 17 contract work by the DBE will not be eligible for DBE credit. 18 19 The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 20 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to DBE 21 subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited. 22 23 DBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease includes 24 the operator. The DBE is expected to operate the equipment used in the 25 performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. Situations where 26 equipment is leased and used by the DBE, but payment is deducted from the 27 Contractor’s payment to the DBE is not allowed. 28 29 When the subcontractor is part of a DBE Commitment, the following apply: 30 31

1. If a DBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to another 32 firm, the value of the subcontracted Work may be counted toward the 33 DBE COA Goal only if the Lower-Tier Subcontractor is also a DBE. 34 35

2. Work subcontracted to a Lower-Tier Subcontractor that is a DBE may 36 be counted toward the DBE COA Goal only if the Lower-Tier 37 Subcontractor self performs a minimum of 30 percent of the Work 38 subcontracted to them. 39 40

3. Work subcontracted to a non-DBE does not count towards the DBE 41 COA Goal. 42

43 DBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 44 There must be a subcontract agreement that complies with 49 CFR Part 26 and 45 fully describes the distinct elements of Work committed to be performed by the 46 DBE. 47 48 DBE Service Provider 49 The value of fees or commissions charged by a DBE firm behaving in a manner 50 of a Broker, or another service provider for providing a bona fide service, such 51


as professional, technical, consultant, managerial services, or for providing 1 bonds or insurance specifically required for the performance of the contract will 2 only be credited as DBE participation, if the fee/commission is determined by 3 the Contracting Agency to be reasonable and the firm has performed a CUF. 4 5 Force Account Work 6 When the Bidder elects to utilize force account Work to meet the DBE COA 7 Goal, as demonstrated by listing this force account Work on the DBE Utilization 8 Certification Form, for the purposes of meeting DBE COA Goal, only 50% of the 9 Proposal amount shall be credited toward the Bidder’s Commitment to meet the 10 DBE COA Goal. 11 12 One hundred percent of the actual amounts paid to the DBE for the force 13 account Work shall be credited towards the DBE COA Goal or DBE 14 participation. 15 16 Temporary Traffic Control 17 If the DBE firm only provides “Flagging”, the DBE firm must provide a Traffic 18 Control Supervisor (TCS) and flagger(s), which are under the direct control of 19 the DBE. The DBE firm shall also provide all flagging equipment for its 20 employees (e.g. paddles, hard hats, and vests). 21 22 If the DBE firm provides “Traffic Control Services”, the DBE firm must provide a 23 TCS, flaggers, and traffic control items (e.g., cones, barrels, signs, etc.) and be 24 in total control of all items in implementing the traffic control for the project. 25 26 Trucking 27 DBE trucking firm participation may only be credited as DBE participation for 28 the value of the hauling services, not for the materials being hauled unless the 29 trucking firm is also certified as a supplier of those materials. In situations 30 where the DBE’s work is priced per ton, the value of the hauling service must 31 be calculated separately from the value of the materials in order to determine 32 DBE credit for hauling 33 34 The DBE trucking firm must own and operate at least one licensed, insured and 35 operational truck on the contract. The truck must be of the type that is necessary 36 to perform the hauling duties required under the contract. The DBE receives 37 credit for the value of the transportation services it provides on the Contract 38 using trucks it owns or leases, licenses, insures, and operates with drivers it 39 employs. 40 41 The DBE may lease additional trucks from another DBE firm. The DBE who 42 leases additional trucks from another DBE firm receives credit for the value of 43 the transportation services the lessee DBE provides on the Contract. 44 45 The trucking Work subcontracted to any non-DBE trucking firm will not receive 46 credit for Work done on the project. 47 48 The DBE may lease trucks from a truck leasing company (recognized truck 49 rental center) but can only receive credit towards DBE participation if the DBE 50 uses its own employees as drivers. 51


1 DBE Manufacturer and DBE Regular Dealer 2 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of the manufactured product obtained 3 from a DBE manufacturer may count towards the DBE COA Goal. 4 5 Sixty percent (60%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased from a DBE 6 Regular Dealer may be credited toward the DBE Goal. If the role of the DBE 7 Regular Dealer is determined to be that of a Broker, then DBE credit shall be 8 limited to the fee or commission it receives for its services. Regular Dealer 9 status and the amount of credit is determined on a Contract-by-Contract basis. 10 11 DBE firms proposed to be used as a Regular Dealer must be approved before 12 being listed as a COA/used on a project. The WSDOT Approved Regular Dealer 13 list published on WSDOT’s Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO) web site must 14 include the specific project for which approval is being requested. For purposes 15 of the DBE COA Goal participation, the Regular Dealer must submit the Regular 16 Dealer Status Request form a minimum of five calendar days prior to bid 17 opening. 18 19 Purchase of materials or supplies from a DBE which is neither a manufacturer 20 nor a regular dealer, (i.e. Broker) only the fees or commissions charged for 21 assistance in the procurement of the materials and supplies, or fees or 22 transportation charges for the delivery of materials or supplies required on the 23 job site, may toward the DBE COA Goal provided the fees are not excessive as 24 compared with fees customarily allowed for similar services. Documentation will 25 be required to support the fee/commission charged by the DBE. The cost of the 26 materials and supplies themselves cannot be counted toward the DBE Goal. 27 28 Note: Requests to be listed as a Regular Dealer will only be processed if the 29


33 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 34 To be eligible for award of the Contract, the Bidder shall properly complete and 35 submit a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Utilization Certification with the 36 Bidder’s sealed Bid Proposal, as specified in Section 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 37 The Bidder’s DBE Utilization Certification must clearly demonstrate how the Bidder 38 intends to meet the DBE COA Goal. A DBE Utilization Certification (WSDOT Form 39 272-056) is included in the Proposal package for this purpose as well as instructions 40 on how to properly fill out the form. 41 42 The Bidder is advised that the items listed below when listed in the Utilization 43 Certification must have their amounts reduced to the percentages shown and those 44 reduced amounts will be the amount applied towards meeting the DBE COA Goal. 45 46

• Force account at 50% 47 • Regular dealer at 60% 48

49


In the event of arithmetic errors in completing the DBE Utilization Certification, the 1 amount listed to be applied towards the DBE COA Goal for each DBE shall govern 2 and the DBE total amount shall be adjusted accordingly. 3 4 Note: The Contracting Agency shall consider as non-responsive and shall 5

reject any Bid Proposal submitted that does not contain a DBE 6 Utilization Certification Form that accurately demonstrates how the 7 Bidder intends to meet the DBE COA Goal. 8

9 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation Document(s) 10 The Bidder shall submit a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Written 11 Confirmation Document (completed and signed by the DBE) for each DBE firm listed 12 in the Bidder’s completed DBE Utilization Certification submitted with the Bid. 13 Failure to do so will result in the associated participation being disallowed, which 14 may cause the Bid to be determined to be nonresponsive resulting in Bid rejection. 15 16 The Confirmation Documents provide confirmation from the DBEs that they are 17 participating in the Contract as provided in the Bidder’s Commitment. The 18 Confirmation Documents must be consistent with the Utilization Certification. 19 20 A DBE Written Confirmation Document (WSDOT Form 422-031) is included in the 21 Proposal package for this purpose. 22 23 The form(s) shall be received as specified in the special provisions for Section 1-24 02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 25 26 It is prohibited for the Bidder to require a DBE to submit a Written Confirmation 27 Document with any part of the form left blank. Should the Contracting Agency 28 determine that an incomplete Written Confirmation Document was signed by a DBE, 29 the validity of the document comes into question. The associated DBE participation 30 may not receive credit. 31 32 Selection of Successful Bidder/Good Faith Efforts (GFE) 33 The successful Bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest 34 responsive Bid, which demonstrates a good faith effort to achieve the DBE COA 35 Goal. The Contracting Agency, at any time during the selection process, may 36 request a breakdown of the bid items and amounts that are counted towards the 37 overall contract goal for any of the DBEs listed on the DBE Utilization Certification. 38 39 Achieving the DBE COA Goal may be accomplished in one of two ways: 40 41

1. By meeting the DBE COA Goal 42 Submission of the DBE Utilization Certification, supporting DBE Written 43 Confirmation Document(s) showing the Bidder has obtained enough DBE 44 participation to meet or exceed the DBE COA Goal, the DBE Bid Item 45 Breakdown and the DBE Trucking Credit Form, if applicable. 46

47 2. By documentation that the Bidder made adequate GFE to meet the DBE 48

COA Goal 49 The Bidder may demonstrate a GFE in whole or part through GFE 50 documentation ONLY IN THE EVENT a Bidder’s efforts to solicit sufficient 51


DBE participation have been unsuccessful. The Bidder must supply GFE 1 documentation in addition to the DBE Utilization Certification, supporting 2 DBE Written Confirmation Document(s), the DBE Bid Item Breakdown form 3 and the DBE Trucking Credit Form, if applicable. 4

5 Note: In the case where a Bidder is awarded the contract based on 6

demonstrating adequate GFE, the advertised DBE COA Goal will not 7 be reduced. The Bidder shall demonstrate a GFE during the life of the 8 Contract to attain the advertised DBE COA Goal. 9

10 GFE documentation, the DBE Bid Item Breakdown form, and the DBE Trucking 11 Credit Form, if applicable, shall be submitted as specified in Section 1-02.9. 12 13 The Contracting Agency will review the GFE documentation and will determine if the 14 Bidder made an adequate good faith effort. 15 16 Good Faith Effort (GFE) Documentation 17 GFE is evaluated when: 18 19

1. Determining award of a Contract that has COA goal, 20 21 2. When a COA DBE is terminated and substitution is required, and 22 23 3. Prior to Physical Completion when determining whether the Contractor has 24

satisfied its DBE commitments. 25 26 49 CFR Part 26, Appendix A is intended as general guidance and does not, in itself, 27 demonstrate adequate good faith efforts. The following is a list of types of actions, 28 which would be considered as part of the Bidder’s GFE to achieve DBE participation. 29 It is not intended to be a mandatory checklist, nor is it intended to be exclusive or 30 exhaustive. Other factors or types of efforts may be relevant in appropriate cases. 31 32

1. Soliciting through all reasonable and available means (e.g. attendance at 33 pre-bid meetings, advertising and/or written notices) the interest of all 34 certified DBEs who have the capability to perform the Work of the Contract. 35 The Bidder must solicit this interest within sufficient time to allow the DBEs 36 to respond to the solicitation. The Bidder must determine with certainty if 37 the DBEs are interested by taking appropriate steps to follow up initial 38 solicitations. 39

40 2. Selecting portions of the Work to be performed by DBEs in order to 41

increase the likelihood that the DBE COA Goal will be achieved. This 42 includes, where appropriate, breaking out contract Work items into 43 economically feasible units to facilitate DBE participation, even when the 44 Bidder might otherwise prefer to perform these Work items with its own 45 forces. 46

47 3. Providing interested DBEs with adequate information about the Plans, 48

Specifications, and requirements of the Contract in a timely manner to 49 assist them in responding to a solicitation. 50 51


a. Negotiating in good faith with interested DBEs. It is the Bidder’s 1 responsibility to make a portion of the Work available to DBE 2 subcontractors and suppliers and to select those portions of the 3 Work or material needs consistent with the available DBE 4 subcontractors and suppliers, so as to facilitate DBE participation. 5 Evidence of such negotiation includes the names, addresses, and 6 telephone numbers of DBEs that were considered; a description of 7 the information provided regarding the Plans and Specifications for 8 the Work selected for subcontracting; and evidence as to why 9 additional agreements could not be reached for DBEs to perform the 10 Work. 11

12 b. A Bidder using good business judgment would consider a number of 13

factors in negotiating with subcontractors, including DBE 14 subcontractors, and would take a firm’s price and capabilities as well 15 as the DBE COA Goal into consideration. However, the fact that 16 there may be some additional costs involved in finding and using 17 DBEs is not in itself sufficient reason for a Bidder’s failure to meet 18 the DBE COA Goal, as long as such costs are reasonable. Also, the 19 ability or desire of a Bidder to perform the Work of a Contract with its 20 own organization does not relieve the Bidder of the responsibility to 21 make Good Faith Efforts. Bidders are not, however, required to 22 accept higher quotes from DBEs if the price difference is excessive 23 or unreasonable. 24

25 4. Not rejecting DBEs as being unqualified without sound reasons based on 26

a thorough investigation of their capabilities. The Bidder’s standing within 27 its industry, membership in specific groups, organizations, or associations 28 and political or social affiliations (for example union vs. non-union 29 employee status) are not legitimate causes for the rejection or non-30 solicitation of bids in the Bidder’s efforts to meet the DBE COA Goal. 31

32 5. Making efforts to assist interested DBEs in obtaining bonding, lines of 33

credit, or insurance as required by the recipient or Bidder. 34 35 6. Making efforts to assist interested DBEs in obtaining necessary equipment, 36

supplies, materials, or related assistance or services. 37 38 7. Effectively using the services of available minority/women community 39

organizations; minority/women contractors’ groups; local, State, and 40 Federal minority/women business assistance offices; and other 41 organizations as allowed on a case-by-case basis to provide assistance in 42 the recruitment and placement of DBEs. 43

44 8. Documentation of GFE must include copies of each DBE and non-DBE 45

subcontractor quotes submitted to the Bidder when a non-DBE 46 subcontractor is selected over a DBE for Work on the Contract. (ref. 47 updated DBE regulations – 26.53(b)(2)(vi) & App. A) 48

49


Administrative Reconsideration of GFE Documentation 1 A Bidder has the right to request reconsideration if the GFE documentation 2 submitted with their Bid was determined to be inadequate. 3 4

• The Bidder must request within 48 hours of notification of being 5 nonresponsive or forfeit the right to reconsideration. 6

7 • The reconsideration decision on the adequacy of the Bidder’s GFE 8

documentation shall be made by an official who did not take part in the 9 original determination. 10

11 • Only original GFE documentation submitted as a supplement to the Bid 12

shall be considered. The Bidder shall not introduce new documentation at 13 the reconsideration hearing. 14

15 • The Bidder shall have the opportunity to meet in person with the official for 16

the purpose of setting forth the Bidder’s position as to why the GFE 17 documentation demonstrates a sufficient effort. 18

19 • The reconsideration official shall provide the Bidder with a written decision 20

on reconsideration within five working days of the hearing explaining the 21 basis for their finding. 22

23 DBE Bid Item Breakdown 24 The Bidder shall submit a DBE Bid Item Breakdown Form (WSDOT Form 272-054) 25 as specified in the Special Provisions for Section 1-02.9, Delivery of Proposal. 26 27 DBE Trucking Credit Form 28 The Bidder shall submit a DBE Trucking Credit Form (WSDOT Form 272-058), as 29 specified in the Special Provisions for Section 1-02.9, Delivery of Proposal. 30 31 Note: The DBE Trucking Credit Form is only required for a DBE Firm listed 32

on the DBE Utilization Certification as a subcontractor for “Trucking” or 33 “Hauling” and are performing a part of a bid item. For example, if the 34 item of Work is Structure Excavation including Haul, and another firm 35 is doing the excavation and the DBE Trucking firm is doing the haul, 36 the form is required. For a DBE subcontractor that is responsible for 37 an entire item of work that may require some use of trucks, the form is 38 not required. 39

40 Procedures between Award and Execution 41 After Award and prior to Execution, the Contractor shall provide the additional 42 information described below. Failure to comply shall result in the forfeiture of the 43 Bidder’s Proposal bond or deposit. 44 45

1. A list of all firms who submitted a bid or quote in attempt to participate in 46 this project whether they were successful or not. Include the business 47 name and mailing address. 48

49


Note: The firms identified by the Contractor may be contacted by the 1 Contracting Agency to solicit general information as follows: age of the 2 firm and average of its gross annual receipts over the past three-years. 3

4 Procedures after Execution 5

Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 6 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work performed 7 by a DBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment must be 8 commensurate with the work actually performed by the DBE. This applies to all 9 DBEs performing Work on a project, whether or not the DBEs are COA, if the 10 Contractor wants to receive credit for their participation. The Engineer will 11 conduct CUF reviews to ascertain whether DBEs are performing a CUF. A DBE 12 performs a CUF when it is carrying out its responsibilities of its contract by 13 actually performing, managing, and supervising the Work involved. The DBE 14 must be responsible for negotiating price; determining quality and quantity; 15 ordering the material, installing (where applicable); and paying for the material 16 itself. If a DBE does not perform “all” of these functions on a furnish-and-install 17 contract, it has not performed a CUF and the cost of materials cannot be 18 counted toward DBE COA Goal. Leasing of equipment from a leasing company 19 is allowed. However, leasing/purchasing equipment from the Contractor is not 20 allowed. Lease agreements shall be provided prior to the Subcontractor 21 beginning Work. Any use of the Contractor’s equipment by a DBE may not be 22 credited as countable participation. 23 24 The DBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 25 participant in a transaction, contract, or project through which the funds are 26 passed in order to obtain the appearance of DBE participation. 27 28 In order for a DBE traffic control company to be considered to be performing a 29 CUF, the DBE must be in control of its work inclusive of supervision. The DBE 30 shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who is directly involved in the 31 management and supervision of the traffic control employees and services. 32 33 The following are some of the factors that the Engineer will use in determining 34 whether a DBE trucking company is performing a CUF: 35 36

• The DBE shall be responsible for the management and supervision 37 of the entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on the 38 contract. The owner demonstrates business related knowledge, 39 shows up on site and is determined to be actively running the 40 business. 41

42 • The DBE itself shall own and operate at least one fully licensed, 43

insured, and operational truck used on the Contract. The drivers of 44 the trucks owned and leased by the DBE must be exclusively 45 employed by the DBE and reflected on the DBE’s payroll. 46


exclusive use of and control over the truck(s). This does not preclude 49 the leased truck from working for others provided it is with the 50


consent of the DBE and the lease provides the DBE absolute priority 1 for use of the leased truck. 2


the DBE. 5 6 UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Log 7 In addition to the subcontracting requirements of Section 1-08.1, each DBE 8 trucking firm shall submit supplemental information consisting of a completed 9 Primary UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Log (WSDOT Form 350-077) and 10 all Rental/Lease agreements (if applicable). The supplemental information 11 shall be submitted in an electronic format to the Engineer prior to any trucking 12 services being performed for DBE credit. Incomplete or incorrect supplemental 13 information will be returned for correction. The corrected Primary 14 UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Log and any Updated Primary 15 UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Logs shall be submitted and accepted by 16 the Engineer no later than ten calendar days of utilizing applicable trucks. 17 Failure to submit or update the DBE Truck Unit Listing Log may result in trucks 18 not being credited as DBE participation. 19 20 Each DBE trucking firm shall complete a Daily UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit 21 Listing Log for each day that the DBE performs trucking services for DBE credit. 22 The Daily UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Log forms shall be submitted by 23 Friday of the week after the Work was performed by email to the following email 24 address for the region administering the Contract: 25 26

Eastern Region - [email protected] 27 North Central Region - [email protected] 28 Northwest Region - [email protected] 29 Olympic Region - [email protected] 30 South Central Region - [email protected] 31 Southwest Region - [email protected] 32 Washington State Ferries - [email protected] 33

34 Joint Checking 35 A joint check is a check between a Subcontractor and the Contractor to the 36 supplier of materials/supplies. The check is issued by the Contractor as payer 37 to the Subcontractor and the material supplier jointly for items to be 38 incorporated into the project. The DBE must release the check to the supplier, 39 while the Contractor acts solely as the guarantor. 40 41 A joint check agreement must be approved by the Engineer and requested by 42 the DBE involved using the DBE Joint Check Request Form (form # 272-053) 43 prior to its use. The form must accompany the DBE Joint Check Agreement 44 between the parties involved, including the conditions of the arrangement and 45 expected use of the joint checks. 46 47 The approval to use joint checks and the use will be closely monitored by the 48 Engineer. To receive DBE credit for performing a CUF with respect to obtaining 49 materials and supplies, a DBE must “be responsible for negotiating price, 50 determining quality and quantity, ordering the material, installing and paying for 51


the material itself.” The Contractor shall submit DBE Joint Check Request Form 1 to the Engineer and be in receipt of written approval prior to using a joint check. 2 3 Material costs paid by the Contractor directly to the material supplier are not 4 allowed. If proper procedures are not followed or the Engineer determines that 5 the arrangement results in lack of independence for the DBE involved, no DBE 6 credit will be given for the DBE’s participation as it relates to the material cost. 7 8 Prompt Payment 9 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-10 08.1. Prompt payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 11 return of retainage. 12 13 Subcontracts 14 Prior to a DBE performing Work on the Contract, an executed subcontract 15 between the DBE and the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer. The 16 executed subcontracts shall be submitted by email to the following email 17 address for the region administering the Contract: 18 19

Eastern Region – [email protected] 20 North Central Region – [email protected] 21 Northwest Region – [email protected] 22 Olympic Region – [email protected] 23 South Central Region – [email protected] 24 Southwest Region – [email protected] 25 Washington State Ferries – [email protected] 26

27 Reporting 28 The Contractor and all subcontractors/suppliers/service providers that utilize 29 DBEs to perform work on the project, shall maintain appropriate records that 30 will enable the Engineer to verify DBE participation throughout the life of the 31 project. 32 33 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 34 this contract. 35

36 Changes in COA Work Committed to DBE 37 The Contractor shall utilize the COA DBEs to perform the work and supply the 38 materials for which each is committed unless prior written approval by the Engineer 39 has been received by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any 40 payment for work or material completed by the Contractor or subcontractors that 41 was committed to be completed by the COA DBEs in the DBE Utilization Certification 42 form. 43 44

Owner Initiated Changes 45 In instances where the Engineer makes changes that result in changes to Work 46 that was committed to a COA DBE, the Contractor may be directed to substitute 47 for the Work. 48 49

mailto:[email protected]








Contractor Initiated Changes 1 The Contractor cannot change the scope or reduce the amount of work 2 committed to a COA DBE without good cause. Reducing DBE Commitment is 3 viewed as partial DBE termination, and therefore subject to the termination 4 procedures below. 5 6 Original Quantity Underruns 7 In the event that Work committed to a DBE firm as part of the COA underruns 8 the original planned quantities the Contractor may be required to substitute 9 other remaining Work to another DBE. 10 11 Contractor Proposed DBE Substitutions 12 Requests to substitute a COA DBE must be for good cause (see DBE 13 termination process below), and requires prior written approval of the Engineer. 14 After receiving a termination with good cause approval, the Contractor may only 15 replace a DBE with another certified DBE. When any changes between 16 Contract Award and Execution result in a substitution of COA DBE, the 17 substitute DBE shall be certified prior to the bid opening on the Contract. 18 19 DBE Termination 20 Termination of a COA DBE (or an approved substitute DBE) is only allowed in 21 whole or in part for good cause and with prior written approval of the Engineer. 22 If the Contractor terminates a COA DBE without the prior written approval of the 23 Engineer, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for work or material 24 committed to, but not performed/supplied by the COA DBE. In addition, 25 sanctions may apply as described elsewhere in this specification. 26 27 Prior to requesting approval to terminate a COA DBE, the Contractor shall give 28 notice in writing to the DBE with a copy to the Engineer of its intent to request 29 to terminate DBE Work and the reasons for doing so. The DBE shall have five 30 (5) days to respond to the Contractor’s notice. The DBE’s response shall either 31 support the termination or advise the Engineer and the Contractor of the 32 reasons it objects to the termination of its subcontract. 33 34 If the request for termination is approved, the Contractor is required to 35 substitute with another DBE to perform at least the same amount of work as the 36 DBE that was terminated (or provide documentation of GFE). A plan to replace 37 the COA DBE Commitment amount shall be submitted to the Engineer within 2 38 days of the approval of termination. The plan to replace the Commitment shall 39 provide the same detail as that required in the DBE Utilization Certification. 40 41 As mentioned above, the Contractor must have good cause to terminate a COA 42 DBE. 43 44 Good cause typically includes situations where the DBE Subcontractor is 45 unable or unwilling to perform the work of its subcontract. Good cause may 46 exist if: 47 48

• The DBE fails or refuses to execute a written contract. 49 50


• The DBE fails or refuses to perform the Work of its subcontract in a 1 way consistent with normal industry standards. 2

3 • The DBE fails or refuses to meet the Contractor’s reasonable 4

nondiscriminatory bond requirements. 5 6 • The DBE becomes bankrupt, insolvent, or exhibits credit 7

unworthiness. 8 9 • The DBE is ineligible to work on public works projects because of 10

suspension and debarment proceedings pursuant to federal law or 11 applicable State law. 12

13 • The DBE is ineligible to receive DBE credit for the type of work 14

involved. 15 16 • The DBE voluntarily withdraws from the project and provides written 17

notice of its withdrawal. 18 19 • The DBE’s work is deemed unsatisfactory by the Engineer and not in 20

compliance with the Contract. 21 22 • The DBE’s owner dies or becomes disabled with the result that the 23

DBE is unable to complete its Work on the Contract. 24 25 Good cause does not exist if: 26 27 • The Contractor seeks to terminate a COA DBE so that the 28

Contractor can self-perform the Work. 29 30 • The Contractor seeks to terminate a COA DBE so the Contractor can 31

substitute another DBE contractor or non-DBE contractor after 32 Contract Award. 33

34 • The failure or refusal of the COA DBE to perform its Work on the 35

subcontract results from the bad faith or discriminatory action of the 36 Contractor (e.g., the failure of the Contractor to make timely 37 payments or the unnecessary placing of obstacles in the path of the 38 DBE’s Work). 39

40 Decertification 41 When a DBE is “decertified” from the DBE program during the course of the 42 Contract, the participation of that DBE shall continue to count as DBE 43 participation as long as the subcontract with the DBE was executed prior to the 44 decertification notice. The Contractor is obligated to substitute when a DBE 45 does not have an executed subcontract agreement at the time of decertification. 46 47

Consequences of Non-Compliance 48 Breach of Contract 49 Each contract with a Contractor (and each subcontract the Contractor signs 50 with a Subcontractor) must include the following assurance clause: 51


1 The Contractor, subrecipient, or Subcontractor shall not discriminate on the 2 basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. 3 The Contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the 4 award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the Contractor 5 to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this Contract, which may 6 result in the termination of this Contract or such other remedy as the recipient 7 deems appropriate, which may include, but is not limited to: 8 9

(1) Withholding monthly progress payments; 10 11 (2) Assessing sanctions; 12 13 (3) Liquidated damages; and/or 14 15 (4) Disqualifying the Contractor from future bidding as non-responsible. 16

17 Notice 18 If the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Consultant, Regular Dealer, or service 19 provider is deemed to be in non-compliance, the Contractor will be informed in 20 writing, by certified mail by the Engineer that sanctions will be imposed for 21 failure to meet the UDBE COA Commitment and/or submit documentation of 22 good faith efforts. The notice will state the specific sanctions to be imposed 23 which may include impacting a Contractor or other entity’s ability to participate 24 in future contracts. 25

26 Sanctions 27 If it is determined that the Contractor’s failure to meet all or part of the DBE COA 28 Commitment is due to the Contractor’s inadequate good faith efforts throughout the 29 life of the Contract, including failure to submit timely, required Good Faith Efforts 30 information and documentation, the Contractor may be required to pay DBE penalty 31 equal to the amount of the unmet Commitment, in addition to the sanctions outlined 32 in Section 1-07.11(5). 33 34 Payment 35 Compensation for all costs involved with complying with the conditions of this 36 Specification and any other associated DBE requirements is included in payment 37 for the associated Contract items of Work, except otherwise provided in the 38 Specifications. 39

40 1-07.11.OPT4.FR1 41

(January 13, 2021) 42

Special Training Provisions 43 General Requirements 44 The Contractor’s equal employment opportunity, affirmative action program shall 45 include the requirements set forth below. The Contractor shall provide on-the-job 46 training aimed at developing trainees to journey-level status in the trades involved. 47 The number of training hours shall be *** $$1$$ ***. Trainees shall not be assigned 48 less than 400 hours per individual per Contract. The Contractor may elect to 49 accomplish training as part of the work of a subcontractor, however, the Prime 50 Contractor shall retain the responsibility for complying with these Special Provisions 51


(achieving the training goal). When the Contractor’s training plan includes trainees 1 for Subcontractors or lower-tier Subcontractors, this special provision shall be 2 included in the subcontract. 3 4 Trainee Approval 5 The Contractor shall make every effort to employ/enroll minority and women trainees 6 to the extent such persons are available within a reasonable recruitment area. This 7 training provision is not intended and shall not be used to discriminate against any 8 applicant for training, whether that person is a minority, woman or otherwise. A non-9 minority male trainee or apprentice may be approved provided the following 10 requirements are met: 11

12 1. The Contractor is otherwise in compliance with the contract’s Equal 13

Employment Opportunity (EEO) and On-the-Job Training (OJT) 14 requirements and provides documentation of the efforts taken to fill the 15 specific training position with either minorities or females 16

17 2. or, if not otherwise in compliance, furnishes evidence of his/her systematic 18

and direct recruitment efforts in regard to the position in question and in 19 promoting the enrollment and/or employment of minorities and females in 20 the craft which the proposed trainee is to be trained 21

22 3. and the Contractor has made a good faith effort towards recruiting of 23

minorities and women. As a minimum good faith efforts shall consist of the 24 following: 25 26 a. Distribution of written notices of available employment opportunities 27

with the Contractor and enrollment opportunities with its unions. 28 Distribution should include but not be limited to; minority and female 29 recruitment sources, WSDOT’s OJT Support Services Coordinator, 30 and minority and female community organizations. 31

32 b. Records documenting the Contractor’s efforts and the outcome of 33

those efforts, to employ minority and female applicants and/or refer 34 them to unions. 35

36 c. Records reflecting the Contractor’s efforts in participating in 37

developing minority and female on-the-job training opportunities, 38 including upgrading programs and apprenticeship opportunities. 39

40 d. Distribution of written notices to unions and training programs 41

disseminating the Contractor’s EEO policy and requesting 42 cooperation in achieving EEO and OJT obligations (and their written 43 responses). For assistance in locating trainee candidates, the 44 Contractor may call WSDOT's OJT Support Services Coordinator at 45 (360) 704-6314 or email [email protected]. 46

47 No employee shall be employed as a trainee in any classification in which the 48 employee has successfully completed a training course leading to journey-level 49 worker status or in which the employee has been employed as a journey-level 50 worker. The Contractor’s records shall document the methods for determining the 51


trainee’s status and findings in each case. When feasible, 25 percent of apprentices 1 or trainees in each occupation shall be in their first year of apprenticeship or training. 2 3 For the purpose of this specification, acceptable training programs are those 4 employing trainees/apprentices registered with the following: 5

6 1. Washington State Department of Labor & Industries — State 7

Apprenticeship Training Council (SATC) approved apprenticeship 8 agreement: 9

10 a. Pursuant to RCW 49.04.060, an apprenticeship agreement shall 11

be; 12 13

i. an individual written agreement between an employer 14 and apprentice 15

ii. a written agreement between (an employer or an 16 association of employers) and an organization of 17 employees describing conditions of employment for 18 apprentices 19

iii. a written statement describing conditions of 20 employment for apprentices in a plant where there is no 21 bona fide employee organization. 22

23 All such agreements shall conform to the basic standards and other 24 provisions of RCW Chapter 49.04. 25

26 2. Apprentices must be registered with U.S. Department of Labor — 27

Apprenticeship Training, Employer, and Labor Services (ATELS) approved 28 program. 29

30 Or 31 32

3. Non-ATELS/SATC programs that have been submitted to the Contracting 33 Agency for approval by the FHWA for the specific project. 34

35 Obligation to Provide Information 36 Upon starting a new trainee, the Contractor shall furnish the trainee a copy of the 37 approved program the Contractor will follow in providing the training. Upon 38 completion of the training, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Agency with 39 a certification showing the type and length of training satisfactorily completed by 40 each trainee. 41

42 Training Program Approval 43 The Training Program shall meet the following requirements: 44

45 1. The Training Program (DOT Form 272-049) must be submitted to the 46

Engineer for approval prior to commencing contract work and shall be 47 resubmitted when modifications to the program occur. 48

49


2. The minimum length and type of training for each classification will be as 1 established in the training program as approved by the Contracting 2 Agency. 3

4 3. The Training Program shall contain the trades proposed for training, the 5

number of trainees, the hours assigned to the trade and the estimated 6 beginning work date for each trainee. 7

8 4. Unless otherwise specified, Training Programs will be approved if the 9

proposed number of training hours equals the training hours required by 10 contract and the trainees are not assigned less than 400 hours each. 11

12 5. After approval of the training program, information concerning each 13

individual trainee and good faith effort documentation shall be submitted 14 on (DOT Form 272-050.) 15

16 6. In King County, laborer trainees or apprentices will not be approved on 17

contracts containing less than 2000 training hours as specified in this 18 Section. In King County, no more than twenty percent (20%) of hours 19 proposed for trainees or apprentices shall be in the laborer classification 20 when the contract contains 2000 or more hours of training as specified in 21 this Section. Trainees shall not be assigned less than 400 hours per 22 contract. 23

24 7. Flagging programs will not be approved. Other programs that include 25

flagging training will only be approved if the flagging portion is limited to an 26 orientation of not more than 20 hours. 27

28 8. It is the intention of these provisions that training is to be provided in the 29

construction crafts rather than clerk-typists or secretarial-type positions. 30 Training is permissible in lower level management positions such as office 31 engineers, estimators, timekeepers, etc., where the training is oriented 32 toward construction applications. Some off-site training is permissible as 33 long as the training is an integral part of an approved training program. 34

35 9. It is normally expected that a trainee will begin training on the project as 36

soon as feasible after start of work, utilizing the skill involved and remain 37 on the project as long as training opportunities exist in the work 38 classification or the trainee reaches journey-level status. It is not required 39 that all trainees be on board for the entire length of the contract. The 40 number trained shall be determined on the basis of the total number 41 enrolled on the contract for a significant period. 42

43 10. Wage Progressions: Trainees will be paid at least the applicable ratios or 44

wage progressions shown in the apprenticeship standards published by 45 the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. In the event that 46 no training program has been established by the Department of Labor and 47 Industries, the trainee shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of 48 RCW 39.12.021, which reads as follows: 49

50


Apprentice workers employed upon public works projects for whom an 1 apprenticeship agreement has been registered and approved with the 2 State Apprenticeship Council pursuant to RCW 49.04, must be paid at 3 least the prevailing hourly rate for an apprentice of that trade. Any 4 worker for whom an apprenticeship agreement has not been 5 registered and approved by the State Apprenticeship Council shall be 6 considered to be a fully qualified journey-level worker, and, therefore, 7 shall be paid at the prevailing hourly rate for journey-level worker. 8

9 Compliance 10 In the event that the Contractor is unable to accomplish the required training hours 11 but can demonstrate a good faith effort to meet the requirements as specified, then 12 the Contracting Agency will adjust the training goals accordingly. 13 14 Noncompliance and Sanctions 15 When a contractor violates EEO provisions of the contract, the Contracting Agency 16 may impose damages in accordance with WSDOT’s Equal Opportunity Compliance 17 Program and the FHWA 1273. These damages consist of additional administrative 18 costs including, but not limited to, the inspection, supervision, engineering, 19 compliance, and legal staff time and expenses necessary for investigating, 20 reporting, and correcting violations, as well as loss of federal funding, if any. 21 Damages attributable to a contractor’s violations of the EEO provisions may be 22 deducted from progress payments due the Contractor. Before any money is 23 withheld, the Contractor will be provided with a notice of the basis of the violations, 24 the amount to be withheld and provided an opportunity to respond. The monetary 25 value of the sanction will be calculated on a case-by-case basis and based on the 26 damages incurred by the Contracting Agency. 27 28 The Contracting Agency’s decision to recover damages for an EEO violation does 29 not limit its ability to suspend or revoke the contractor’s pre-qualification status or 30 seek other remedies as allowed by federal or state law. In appropriate 31 circumstances, the Contracting Agency may also refer the Contractor to other state 32 or federal authorities for additional sanctions. 33

34 Requirements for Non ATELS/SATC Approved Training Programs 35 Contractors who are not affiliated with a program approved by ATELS or SATC may 36 have their training program approved (by FHWA) provided that the program is 37 submitted for approval on DOT Form 272-049, and the following standards are 38 addressed and incorporated in the Contractor’s program: 39 40

1. The program establishes minimum qualifications for persons entering the 41 training program. 42

43 2. The program shall outline the work processes in which the trainee will 44

receive supervised work experience and training on-the-job and the 45 allocation of the approximate time to be spent in each major process. The 46 program shall include the method for recording and reporting the training 47 completed shall be stated. 48

49 3. The program shall include a numeric ratio of trainees to journey-level 50

worker consistent with proper supervision, training, safety, and continuity 51


of employment. The ratio language shall be specific and clear as to 1 application in terms of job site and workforce during normal operations 2 (normally considered to fall between 1:10 and 1:4). 3

4 4. The terms of training shall be stated in hours. The number of hours 5

required for completion to journey-level worker status shall be comparable 6 to the apprenticeship hours established for that craft by the SATC. The 7 following are examples of programs that are currently approved: 8

9 CRAFT HOURS 10 Laborer 4,000 11 Ironworker 6,000 12 Carpenter 5,200-8,000 13 Construction Electrician 8,000 14 Operating Engineer 6,000-8,000 15 Cement Mason 5,400 16 Teamster 2,100 17

18 5. The method to be used for recording and reporting the training completed 19

shall be stated. 20 21

Measurement 22 The Contractor may request that the total number of “training” hours for the contract 23 be increased subject to approval by the Contracting Agency. This reimbursement 24 will be made even though the Contractor receives additional training program funds 25 from other sources, provided such other sources do not prohibit other 26 reimbursement. Reimbursement to the Contractor for off-site training as indicated 27 previously may only be made when the Contractor does one or more of the following 28 and the trainees are concurrently employed on a Federal-aid project: 29 30

1. contributes to the cost of the training, 31 32 2. provides the instruction to the trainee, 33 34 3. pays the trainee’s wages during the off- site training period. 35

36 Reimbursement will be made upon receipt of a certified invoice that shows the 37 related payroll number, the name of trainee, total hours trained under the program, 38 previously paid hours under the contract, hours due this estimate, and dollar amount 39 due this estimate. The certified invoice shall show a statement indicating the 40 Contractor’s effort to enroll minorities and women when a new enrollment occurs. If 41 a trainee is participating in a SATC/ATELS approved apprenticeship program, a 42 copy of the certificate showing apprenticeship registration must accompany the first 43 invoice on which the individual appears. Reimbursement for training occurring prior 44 to approval of the training program will be allowed if the Contractor verbally notifies 45 the Engineer of this occurrence at the time the apprentice/trainee commences work. 46 A trainee/apprentice, regardless of craft, must have worked on the contract for at 47 least 20 hours to be eligible for reimbursement. 48 49 Training hours that are not in compliance with the approved training plan will not be 50 measured. 51


1 Payment 2 The Contractor will be reimbursed under the item “Training” per hour for each hour 3 of approved training provided under the Contract. 4

5 1-07.11.OPT5.GR1 6

(January 7, 2019) 7

Voluntary Minority, Small, Veteran and Women's Business Enterprise 8

(MSVWBE) Participation 9 General Statement 10 The participation of minority, small, veteran, and women business enterprises 11 (MSVWBE) is an important strategic objective for the State of Washington. Voluntary 12 goals for minority, small, veteran and women business enterprises are included in 13 this Contract. The Contractor is encouraged to utilize MSVWBEs in accordance 14 with these Specifications, RCW 39.19 and Executive Order 13-01 (issued by the 15 Governor of Washington on May 10, 2013). 16 17 The goals are voluntary; efforts to provide MSVWBEs maximum practicable 18 opportunities are encouraged. 19 20 Non-Discrimination 21 Contractors shall not create barriers to open and fair opportunities for all businesses, 22 including MSVWBEs, to participate in the Work on this Contract. This includes the 23 opportunity to compete for subcontracts as sources of supplies, equipment, 24 construction or services. 25 26 The Contractor shall make Voluntary MSVWBE Participation a part of all 27 subcontracts and agreements entered into as a result of this Contract. 28 29 Voluntary MSVWBE Participation Goals 30 Goals for voluntary MSVWBE participation have been established as a percentage 31 of Contractor’s total Bid amount. 32 33 The Contracting Agency has established the following voluntary goals: 34 35

Minority 10% 36 Small 5% 37 Veteran 5% 38 Women 6% 39

40 Amounts paid to an MSVWBE will be credited to every voluntary goal in which they 41 are eligible. In other words, participation may be credited for participation in more 42 than one category. If the Contractor is a MSVWBE, their Work will be credited to 43 the voluntary goals in which they are eligible. 44 45 MSVWBE Abbreviations and Definitions 46

Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 47 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in the 48 procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or supplies 49


required for the performance of the Contract; or, persons/companies who 1 arrange or expedite transactions. 2 3 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 4 A MSVWBE performs a commercially useful function when it is responsible for 5 execution of the work of the contract and is carrying out its responsibilities by 6 actually performing, managing, and supervising the work involved. To perform 7 a commercially useful function, the MSVWBE must also be responsible, with 8 respect to materials and supplies used on the contract, for negotiating price, 9 determining quality and quantity, ordering the material, and installing (where 10 applicable) and paying for the material itself. 11 12 The MSVWBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 13 participant in a transaction, contract, or Project through which the funds are 14 passed in order to obtain the appearance of MSVWBE participation. 15 16 Manufacturer (MSVWBE) – A MSVWBE firm that operates or maintains a 17 factory or establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, 18 articles, or equipment required under the Contract. A MSVWBE Manufacturer 19 shall produce finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or 20 purchase and substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable 21 for construction use before reselling them. 22 23 Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) – A minority owned business meeting 24 the requirements of RCW 39.19 and WAC 326-20 and certified by the 25 Washington State Office of Minority & Women’s Business Enterprises. 26 27 Pass Through – When the MSVWBE firm participates as an extra participant 28 in a transaction, through which funds are passed in order to give the 29 appearance of participation by the MSVWBE firm and count toward the 30 voluntary goal. 31 32 Small Business – A business meeting the Washington State requirements for 33 a “Small business”, “Minibusiness” or “Microbusiness as defined in RCW 34 39.26.010 and included on the WSDOT Office of Equal Opportunity list of Small 35 Businesses at http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/equalopportunity/bddirectory.htm 36 37 Supplier (MSVWBE) – A MSVWBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a 38 store, warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies 39 required for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and 40 regularly sold to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Supplier, 41 the MSVWBE firm must be an established business that engages in as its 42 principal business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the products 43 in question. A Supplier in such items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and 44 petroleum products need not own, operate or maintain a place of business if it 45 both owns and operates distribution equipment for the products. Any 46 supplementing of suppliers’ own distribution equipment shall be by long-term 47 formal lease agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, packagers, 48 manufacturers’ representatives, or other persons who arrange or expedite 49 transactions shall not be regarded as Suppliers within the meaning of this 50 definition. 51


1 Veteran Business – A veteran owned business meeting the requirements of 2 RCW 43.60A.010 and included on the WSDOT Office of Equal Opportunity list 3 of Veteran Businesses at 4 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/equalopportunity/bddirectory.htm 5 6 Women Business Enterprise (WBE) – A women owned business meeting the 7 requirements of RCW 39.19 and WAC 326-20 and certified by the Washington 8 State Office of Minority & Women’s Business Enterprises. 9

10 Crediting MSVWBE Participation 11 Subcontractors proposed as counting toward the MSVWBE goal must be certified 12 and be performing a CUF during the execution of the Work. 13 14 MSVWBE participation cannot be counted toward the Contractor’s MSVWBE 15 Voluntary Goal until the amount being counted has actually been paid to the 16 MSVWBE. 17 18 The following are some examples of what may be counted as MSVWBE 19 participation: 20 21

MSVWBE Prime Contractor 22 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 23 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the MSVWBE Prime 24 Contractor performs with its own forces and is credited to perform. 25 26 MSVWBE Subcontractor 27 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract that 28 is equal to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the MSVWBE 29 performs with its own forces. The value of work performed by the MSVWBE 30 includes the cost of supplies and materials purchased by the MSVWBE and 31 equipment leased by the MSVWBE, for its work on the Contract. Supplies, 32 materials or equipment obtained by a MSVWBE that are not utilized or 33 incorporated in the Contract work by the MSVWBE will not be eligible for 34 MSVWBE credit unless the MSVWBE is certified as a supplier or equipment 35 leasing company. 36 37 The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 38 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to 39 MSVWBE subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited toward the MSVWBE 40 Voluntary Goals. 41 42 MSVWBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease 43 includes the operator. The MSVWBE is expected to operate the equipment 44 used in the performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. 45 46 If a MSVWBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to another firm, 47 the value of the subcontracted Work may be counted toward the MSVWBE 48 Voluntary Goal only if the MSVWBE’s Lower-Tier Subcontractor is also a 49 MSVWBE. 50 51


MSVWBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 1 There must be a subcontract agreement that fully describes the distinct 2 elements of Work committed to be performed by the MSVWBE. The 3 subcontract agreement shall incorporate requirements of the Contract. 4 Subcontract agreements of all tiers, including lease agreements, shall be 5 readily available at the Project site for the Engineer’s review. 6 7 MSVWBE Service Provider 8 When a MSVWBE participates as a service provider or consultant and provides 9 a bona fide services such as professional, technical, consultant, or managerial 10 services, 100 percent of the total cost counts toward the MSVWBE Voluntary 11 Goal if the firm performs a CUF. 12 13 MSVWBE Broker 14 When a MSVWBE participates as a broker (i.e. arranging a transaction or 15 service but does not provide a work product or enhancement), only the dollar 16 value of the fee or commission charged or 20 percent of the total dollar value 17 of expenditures by the MSVWBE (whichever is greater) counts toward the 18 MSVWBE Voluntary Goal if the firm performs a CUF. 19 20 Trucking 21 A MSVWBE trucking firm’s participation will be credited to MSVWBE Voluntary 22 Goal if the MSVWBE trucking firm has one leased or owned truck working on 23 the project and the MSVWBE trucking firm performs a CUF. MSVWBE trucking 24 companies may lease trucks from other MSVWBE firms and non-MSVWBE 25 firms and count this work toward the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. 26 27 A MSVWBE trucking firm that is also a supplier or manufacturer of the materials 28 or goods being transported can count 100 percent of the dollar value toward 29 the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. For an MSVWBE that is not a supplier or 30 manufacturer, only the fee charged to deliver the goods or materials can be 31 counted toward the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. 32 33 MSVWBE Manufacturer and MSVWBE Supplier 34 If materials or supplies are obtained from a MSVWBE Manufacturer, one 35 hundred percent (100%) of the cost of materials or supplies can count toward 36 the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. 37 38 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased 39 from a MSVWBE Supplier may be credited toward meeting the MSVWBE 40 Voluntary Goal. If the role of the MSVWBE Supplier is determined to be that of 41 a pass-through, then no MSVWBE credit will be given for its services. If the role 42 of the MSVWBE Supplier is determined to be that of a Broker, then MSVWBE 43 credit shall be limited to the fee or commission it receives for its services. 44 45

Procedures after Execution 46 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 47 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work performed 48 by a MSVWBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment must be 49 commensurate with the work actually performed by the MSVWBE, if the 50 Contractor wants to receive credit for their participation. If a MSVWBE does not 51


perform “all” of its responsibilities on a contract, it has not performed a CUF and 1 their Work cannot be counted toward MSVWBE Voluntary Goal. 2 3 To determine whether an MSVWBE is performing a CUF, the Contractor shall 4 evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry practices, whether the 5 amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is commensurate with the work 6 it is actually performing and the MSVWBE credit claimed for its performance of 7 the work, and other relevant factors. 8 9

Leasing of Equipment 10 Leasing of equipment from a leasing company is allowed. However, 11 leasing/purchasing equipment from the Contractor is not allowed. Lease 12 agreements shall be readily available for review by the Engineer. 13 14 Traffic Control 15 In order for a MSVWBE traffic control company to be considered to be 16 performing a CUF, the MSVWBE must be in control of its work inclusive of 17 supervision. The MSVWBE shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who 18 is directly involved in the management and supervision of the traffic control 19 employees and services. 20

21 Joint Checks 22 Joint checks will only be allowed for the purpose of purchasing supplies and 23 materials. The MSVWBE Subcontractor must submit a request to the Engineer 24 and receive approval from the Engineer prior to using a joint check to pay for 25 supplies and materials. Supplies and materials purchased with an approved 26 joint check shall count toward the voluntary goals. 27 28 Joint checks that did not receive prior approval from the Engineer or used for 29 purposes other than the purchase of supplies and materials shall not count 30 towards the voluntary goals. 31 32 Prompt Payment 33 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-34 08.1. Prompt payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 35 return of retainage. 36 37 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 38 this contract. 39 40 Removal from MSVWBE Program 41 When a MSVWBE is “removed” from the MSVWBE program during the course 42 of the Contract, the participation of that MSVWBE shall continue to count 43 towards the MSVWBE Voluntary Goal as long as the subcontract with the 44 MSVWBE was executed prior to the removal notice. 45

46 MSVWBE Participation Plan 47 A MSVWBE Participation Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the start 48 of Work on the project. The plan is submitted for the Contracting Agency’s 49 information. The plan shall include the information identified in the guidelines at 50 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/EqualOpportunity/MSVWBE.htm. 51


1 Approval of the plan is not required; however, an incomplete plan will be returned 2 for correction and resubmittal. An updated MSVWBE Participation Plan will be 3 submitted for Review and Comment annually on the date the original Participation 4 Plan was submitted. The Contractor shall provide a 30 Calendar Day review period 5 for WSDOT Review and Comment on all MSVWBE Participation Plan submittals. 6 7 MSVWBE Reporting 8 The Contractor shall report payments to all firms that were used as Subcontractors, 9 lower tier Subcontractors, manufactures, regular dealers, or service providers on the 10 Contract Work each month between Execution of the Contract and when the 11 Contract final estimate is processed, using the application available at 12 https://wsdot.diversitycompliance.com. The monthly report is due 20 Calendar Days 13 following the end of the month, whether payments were made or work occurred. 14 15 The monthly report shall include payments to all businesses regardless of their 16 listing on the MSVWBE Inclusion Plan. If the Contractor is a MSVWBE, the amounts 17 paid by WSDOT for Work performed by the certified Contractor shall also be 18 reported. 19 20 After Execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall send an email to 21 [email protected] containing the following information: the first and last name, 22 email address, title, and phone number of the person who will be submitting the 23 above reports for their company. The email shall include the WSDOT contract 24 number they will be reporting on. After receipt of this information by WSDOT, the 25 Contractor will receive an email providing information about their assignment. 26 Training and instructions are available in the application. 27 28 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with this 29 contract. 30 31 MSVWBE Payment 32 All costs for implementation of the requirements for Voluntary MSVWBE 33 Participation shall be included in the associated items of Contract Work. 34

35 1-07.11.OPT7.FR1 36

(November 4, 2019September 7, 2021) 37

Federal Small Business Enterprise Participation 38 The Federal Small Business Enterprise (FSBE) Program is an element of the 39 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) in accordance with the requirements of 49 40 CFR Part 26.39. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Specification may result 41 in sanctions as provided by the Contract. 42 43

FSBE Abbreviations and Definitions 44 Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 45 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in the 46 procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or supplies 47 required for the performance of the Contract; or, persons/companies who 48 arrange or expedite transactions. 49 50


Certified Business Description – Specific descriptions of work the FSBE is 1 certified to perform, as identified in the Certified Firm Directory, under the 2 Vendor Information page. 3 4 Certified Firm Directory – A database of all Minority, Women, and 5 Disadvantaged Business Enterprises, including those identified as a FSBE, 6 currently certified by Washington State. The on-line Directory is available to 7 Bidders for their use in identifying and soliciting interest from FSBE firms. The 8 database is located under the Firm Certification section of the Diversity 9 Management and Compliance System web page at: 10 https://omwbe.diversitycompliance.com. 11 12 Firms certified by OMWBE as SBE, DBE (including UDBEs), can be used to 13 fulfill the FSBE mandatory goal on a project. 14 15 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) – 49 CFR 26.55(c)(1) defines 16 commercially useful function as: “A DBE performs a commercially useful 17 function when it is responsible for execution of the work of the contract and is 18 carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, managing, and 19 supervising the work involved. To perform a commercially useful function, the 20 DBE must also be responsible, with respect to materials and supplies used on 21 the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality and quantity, ordering the 22 material, and installing (where applicable) and paying for the material itself. To 23 determine whether a DBE is performing a commercially useful function, you 24 must evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry practices, whether 25 the amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is commensurate with the 26 work it is actually performing and the DBE credit claimed for its performance of 27 the work, and other relevant factors.” 28 29 FSBE – A firm certified by OMWBE as meeting Federal requirements of a small 30 business enterprise. All firms on the OMWBE Certified Firm Directory with the 31 designation of SBE, UDBE or DBE are FSBEs. 32 33 Good Faith Efforts – Efforts to achieve the FSBE Goal or other requirements 34 of this part which, by their scope, intensity, and appropriateness to the objective, 35 can reasonably be expected to fulfill the program requirement. 36 37 Manufacturer (FSBE) – A FSBE firm that operates or maintains a factory or 38 establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, articles, 39 or equipment required under the Contract. A FSBE Manufacturer shall produce 40 finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or purchase and 41 substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable for construction 42 use before reselling them. 43 44 Reasonable Fee (FSBE) – For purposes of Brokers or service providers a 45 reasonable fee shall not exceed 5% of the total cost of the goods or services 46 brokered. 47 48 Regular Dealer (FSBE) – A FSBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a 49 store, warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies 50 required for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and 51


regularly sold to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Regular 1 Dealer, the FSBE firm must be an established regular business that engages in 2 as its principal business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the 3 products in question. A Regular Dealer in such items as steel, cement, gravel, 4 stone, and petroleum products need not own, operate or maintain a place of 5 business if it both owns and operates distribution equipment for the products. 6 Any supplementing of regular dealers’ own distribution equipment shall be by 7 long-term formal lease agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, 8 packagers, manufacturers’ representatives, or other persons who arrange or 9 expedite transactions shall not be regarded as Regular Dealers within the 10 meaning of this definition. 11 12

FSBE Goal 13 The Contracting Agency has established a FSBE Goal for this Contract in the 14 amount of: *** $$1$$ *** 15 16 Crediting FSBE Participation 17 All FSBE Subcontractors shall be certified before the subcontract on which they are 18 participating is executed. 19 20 FSBE participation is only credited upon payment to the FSBE. 21 22 The following are some definitions of what may be counted as FSBE participation. 23 24

FSBE Prime Contractor 25 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 26 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the FSBE Prime Contractor 27 performs with its own forces and is certified to perform. 28 29 FSBE Subcontractor 30 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract that 31 is equal to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the FSBE 32 performs with its own forces and is certified to perform. The value of work 33 performed by the FSBE includes the cost of supplies and materials purchased 34 by the FSBE and equipment leased by the FSBE, for its work on the contract. 35 Supplies, materials or equipment obtained by a FSBE that are not utilized or 36 incorporated in the contract work by the FSBE will not be eligible for FSBE 37 credit. 38 39 The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 40 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to 41 FSBE subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited. 42 43 FSBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease includes 44 the operator. The FSBE is expected to operate the equipment used in the 45 performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. Situations where 46 equipment is leased and used by the FSBE, but payment is deducted from the 47 Contractor’s payment to the FSBE is not allowed. 48 49 When the subcontractor is a FSBE, the following apply: 50 51


1. If a FSBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to 1 another firm, the value of the subcontracted Work may be counted 2 toward the FSBE Goal only if the Lower-Tier Subcontractor is also a 3 FSBE. 4

5 2. Work subcontracted to a non-FSBE does not count towards the 6

FSBE Goal nor FSBE participation. 7 8 FSBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 9 There must be a subcontract agreement that complies with 49 CFR Part 26 and 10 fully describes the distinct elements of Work committed to be performed by the 11 FSBE. 12 13 FSBE Service Provider 14 The value of fees or commissions charged by a FSBE firm behaving in a 15 manner of a Broker, or another service provider for providing a bona fide 16 service, such as professional, technical, consultant, managerial services, or for 17 providing bonds or insurance specifically required for the performance of the 18 contract will only be credited as FSBE participation, if the fee/commission is 19 determined by the Contracting Agency to be reasonable and the firm has 20 performed a CUF. 21 22 Temporary Traffic Control 23 If the FSBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of only “Flagging”, the FSBE 24 firm must provide a Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) and flagger, which are 25 under the direct control of the FSBE. The FSBE firm shall also provide all 26 flagging equipment (e.g. paddles, hard hats, and vests). 27 28 If the FSBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of “Traffic Control Services”, the 29 FSBE firm must provide a TCS, flaggers, and traffic control items (e.g., cones, 30 barrels, signs, etc.) and be in total control of all items in implementing the traffic 31 control for the project. 32 33 Trucking 34 FSBE trucking firm participation may only be credited as FSBE participation for 35 the value of the hauling services, not for the materials being hauled unless the 36 trucking firm is also certified as a supplier of those materials. In situations 37 where the FSBE’s work is priced per ton, the value of the hauling service must 38 be calculated separately from the value of the materials in order to determine 39 FSBE credit for hauling 40 41 The FSBE trucking firm must own and operate at least one licensed, insured 42 and operational truck on the contract. The truck must be of the type that is 43 necessary to perform the hauling duties required under the contract. The FSBE 44 receives credit for the value of the transportation services it provides on the 45 Contract using trucks it owns or leases, licenses, insures, and operates with 46 drivers it employs. 47 48 The FSBE may lease additional trucks from another FSBE firm. The FSBE who 49 leases additional trucks from another FSBE firm receives credit for the value of 50 the transportation services the lessee FSBE provides on the Contract. 51


1 The trucking Work subcontracted to any non-FSBE trucking firm will not receive 2 credit for Work done on the project. 3 4 The FSBE may lease trucks from a truck leasing company (recognized truck 5 rental center), but can only receive credit towards FSBE participation if the 6 FSBE uses its own employees as drivers. 7 8 FSBE Manufacturer and FSBE Regular Dealer 9 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of the manufactured product obtained 10 from a FSBE manufacturer can count as FSBE participation. If the manufacturer 11 is a FSBE, participation may count towards the FSBE Goal. 12 13 Sixty percent (60%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased from a FSBE 14 Regular Dealer may be credited as FSBE Participation. If the role of the FSBE 15 Regular Dealer is determined to be that of a Broker, then FSBE credit shall be 16 limited to the fee or commission it receives for its services. Regular Dealer 17 status and the amount of credit is determined on a Contract-by-Contract basis. 18 If the regular dealer is a FSBE, participation may count towards the FSBE Goal. 19 20 FSBE firms proposed to be used as a Regular Dealer must be approved before 21 being used on a project. The WSDOT Approved Regular Dealer list published 22 on WSDOT’s Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO) web site must include the 23 specific project for which approval is being requested. For purposes of FSBE 24 Goal participation, the Regular Dealer must submit the Regular Dealer Status 25 Request form and receive approval prior to providing any equipment or 26 materials or the signing of a purchase order, invoice, or subcontract. 27 28 Purchase of materials or supplies from a FSBE which is neither a manufacturer 29 nor a regular dealer, (i.e. Broker) only the fees or commissions charged for 30 assistance in the procurement of the materials and supplies, or fees or 31 transportation charges for the delivery of materials or supplies required on a job 32 site, can count as FSBE participation provided the fees are not excessive as 33 compared with fees customarily allowed for similar services. Documentation will 34 be required to support the fee/commission charged by the FSBE. The cost of 35 the materials and supplies themselves cannot be counted toward as FSBE 36 participation. 37 38

Good Faith Effort Documentation 39 GFE is evaluated prior to Physical Completion when determining whether the 40 Contractor has satisfied its FSBE Goal. 41 42 The Contracting Agency will measure GFE using the guidance in 49 CFR Part 26, 43 Appendix A. The following is a list of the types of actions which may be considered 44 as part of the Contractor’s GFE to achieve FSBE participation. It is not intended to 45 be a mandatory checklist, nor is it intended to be exclusive or exhaustive. Other 46 factors or types of efforts may be relevant in appropriate cases. 47 48

1. Solicited through all reasonable and available means the interest of all 49 certified FSBEs who had the capability to perform the Work of the Contract. 50 The Contractor must have solicited this interest within sufficient time to 51


allow the FSBEs to respond to the solicitation. The Contractor must have 1 determined with certainty that the FSBEs were interested by taking 2 appropriate steps to follow up initial solicitations with potential FSBEs. 3

4 2. Selected portions of the Work to be performed by FSBEs in order to 5

increase the likelihood that the FSBE Goal would be achieved. This 6 includes, where appropriate, breaking out contract Work items into 7 economically feasible units to facilitate FSBE participation, even when the 8 Contractor might otherwise prefer to perform these Work items with its own 9 forces. 10

11 3. Provided interested FSBEs with adequate information about the Plans, 12

Specifications, and requirements of the Contract in a timely manner to 13 assist them in responding to a solicitation. 14

15 a. Negotiated in good faith with interested FSBEs. It is the Contractor’s 16

responsibility to make a portion of the Work available to FSBE 17 subcontractors and suppliers and to select those portions of the 18 Work or material needs consistent with the available FSBE 19 subcontractors and suppliers, so as to facilitate FSBE participation. 20 Evidence of such negotiation includes the names, addresses, and 21 telephone numbers of FSBEs that were contacted; a description of 22 the information provided regarding the Plans and Specifications for 23 the Work selected for subcontracting; and evidence as to why 24 additional agreements could not be reached for FSBEs to perform 25 the Work. 26

27 b. A Contractor using good business judgment would consider a 28

number of factors in negotiating with subcontractors, including FSBE 29 subcontractors, and would take a firm’s price and capabilities as well 30 as the FSBE Goal into consideration. The fact that there may be 31 some additional costs involved in finding and using FSBEs is not in 32 itself sufficient reason for a Bidder’s failure to meet the FSBE Goal, 33 as long as such costs are reasonable. Also, the ability or desire of a 34 Contractor to perform the Work of a Contract with its own 35 organization does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to 36 make Good Faith Efforts. Contractors are not, however, required to 37 accept higher quotes from FSBEs if the price difference was 38 excessive or unreasonable. 39

40 4. Not rejecting FSBEs as being unqualified without sound reasons based on 41

a thorough investigation of their capabilities. The Contractor’s standing 42 within its industry, membership in specific groups, organizations, or 43 associations and political or social affiliations (for example union vs. non-44 union employee status) are not legitimate causes for the rejection or non-45 solicitation of bids in the Contractor’s efforts to meet the FSBE Goal. 46

47 5. Made efforts to assist interested FSBEs in obtaining bonding, lines of 48

credit, or insurance as required by the recipient or Contractor. 49 50


6. Made efforts to assist interested FSBEs in obtaining necessary equipment, 1 supplies, materials, or related assistance or services. 2

3 7. Effectively used the services of available minority/women community 4

organizations; minority/women contractors’ groups; local, State, and 5 Federal minority/women business assistance offices; and other 6 organizations as allowed on a case-by-case basis to provide assistance in 7 the recruitment and placement of FSBEs. 8

9 8. Documentation of GFE must include copies of each FSBE and non-FSBE 10

subcontractor quotes submitted to the Bidder when a non-FSBE 11 subcontractor is selected over a FSBE for Work on the Contract. 12


Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 15 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work performed 16 by a FSBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment must be 17 commensurate with the work actually performed by the FSBE. This applies to 18 all FSBEs performing Work on a project, if the Contractor wants to receive credit 19 for their participation. The Engineer will conduct CUF reviews to ascertain 20 whether FSBEs are performing a CUF. A FSBE performs a CUF when it is 21 carrying out its responsibilities of its contract by actually performing, managing, 22 and supervising the Work involved. The FSBE must be responsible for 23 negotiating price; determining quality and quantity; ordering the material, 24 installing (where applicable); and paying for the material itself. If a FSBE does 25 not perform “all” of these functions on a furnish-and-install contract, it has not 26 performed a CUF and the cost of materials cannot be counted toward FSBE 27 Goal. Leasing of equipment from a leasing company is allowed. However, 28 leasing/purchasing equipment from the Contractor is not allowed. Lease 29 agreements shall be provided prior to the Subcontractor beginning Work. Any 30 use of the Contractor’s equipment by a FSBE may not be credited as countable 31 participation. 32 33 The FSBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 34 participant in a transaction, contract, or project through which the funds are 35 passed in order to obtain the appearance of FSBE participation. 36 37 In order for a FSBE traffic control company to be considered to be performing 38 a CUF, the FSBE must be in control of its work inclusive of supervision. The 39 FSBE shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who is directly involved in the 40 management and supervision of the traffic control employees and services. 41 42 The following are some of the factors that the Engineer will use in determining 43 whether a FSBE trucking company is performing a CUF: 44 45

• The FSBE shall be responsible for the management and supervision 46 of the entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on the 47 contract. The owner demonstrates business related knowledge, 48 shows up on site and is determined to be actively running the 49 business. 50

51


• The FSBE itself shall own and operate at least one fully licensed, 1 insured, and operational truck used on the Contract. The drivers of 2 the trucks owned and leased by the FSBE must be exclusively 3 employed by the FSBE and reflected on the FSBE’s payroll. 4

5 • Lease agreements for trucks shall indicate that the FSBE has 6

exclusive use of and control over the truck(s). This does not preclude 7 the leased truck from working for others provided it is with the 8 consent of the FSBE and the lease provides the FSBE absolute 9 priority for use of the leased truck. 10


the FSBE. 13 14 UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Log 15 In addition to the subcontracting requirements of Section 1-08.1, each FSBE 16 trucking firm shall submit supplemental information consisting of a completed 17 Primary UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Log (WSDOT Form 350-077) and 18 all Rental/Lease agreements (if applicable). The supplemental information 19 shall be submitted in an electronic format to the Engineer prior to any trucking 20 services being performed for FSBE credit. Incomplete or incorrect supplemental 21 information will be returned for correction. The corrected Primary 22 UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Log and any Updated Primary 23 UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Logs shall be submitted and accepted by 24 the Engineer no later than ten calendar days of utilizing applicable trucks. 25 Failure to submit or update the DBE Truck Unit Listing Log may result in trucks 26 not being credited as FSBE participation. 27 28 Each FSBE trucking firm shall complete a Daily UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit 29 Listing Log for each day that the FSBE performs trucking services for FSBE 30 credit. The Daily UDBE/DBE/FSBE Truck Unit Listing Log forms shall be 31 submitted by Friday of the week after the Work was performed by email to the 32 following email address for the region administering the Contract: 33 34

Eastern Region - [email protected] 35 North Central Region - [email protected] 36 Northwest Region - [email protected] 37 Olympic Region - [email protected] 38 South Central Region - [email protected] 39 Southwest Region - [email protected] 40 Washington State Ferries - [email protected] 41

42 Joint Checking 43 A joint check is a check between a Subcontractor and the Contractor to the 44 supplier of materials/supplies. The check is issued by the Contractor as payer 45 to the Subcontractor and the material supplier jointly for items to be 46 incorporated into the project. The FSBE must release the check to the supplier, 47 while the Contractor acts solely as the guarantor. 48 49 A joint check agreement must be approved by the Engineer and requested by 50 the FSBE involved using the DBE Joint Check Request Form (WSDOT Form 51


#272-053) prior to its use. The form must accompany the FSBE Joint Check 1 Agreement between the parties involved, including the conditions of the 2 arrangement and expected use of the joint checks. 3 4 The approval to use joint checks and the use will be closely monitored by the 5 Engineer. To receive FSBE credit for performing a CUF with respect to obtaining 6 materials and supplies, a FSBE must “be responsible for negotiating price, 7 determining quality and quantity, ordering the material, installing and paying for 8 the material itself.” The Contractor shall submit DBE Joint Check Request Form 9 for the Engineer approval prior to using a joint check. 10 11 Material costs paid by the Contractor directly to the material supplier are not 12 allowed. If proper procedures are not followed or the Engineer determines that 13 the arrangement results in lack of independence for the FSBE involved, no 14 FSBE credit will be given for the FSBE’s participation as it relates to the material 15 cost. 16 17 Prompt Payment 18 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-19 08.1. Prompt payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 20 return of retainage. 21 22 Subcontracts 23 Prior to a FSBE performing Work on the Contract, an executed subcontract 24 between the FSBE and the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer. The 25 executed subcontracts shall be submitted by email to the following email 26 address for the region administering the Contract: 27 28


36 Reporting 37 The Contractor and all subcontractors/suppliers/service providers that utilize 38 FSBEs to perform work on the project, shall maintain appropriate records that 39 will enable the Engineer to verify FSBE participation throughout the life of the 40 project. 41 42 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 43 this contract. 44 45 Decertification 46 When a FSBE is “decertified” from the FSBE program during the course of the 47 Contract, the participation of that FSBE shall continue to count as FSBE 48 participation as long as the subcontract with the FSBE was executed prior to 49 the decertification notice. The Contractor is obligated to substitute when a 50


FSBE does not have an executed subcontract agreement at the time of 1 decertification. 2 3

Sanctions 4 If it is determined that the Contractor’s failure to meet all or part of the FSBE Goal 5 is due to the Contractor’s inadequate good faith efforts throughout the life of the 6 Contract, including failure to submit timely, required Good Faith Efforts information 7 and documentation, the Contractor may be required to pay FSBE penalty equal to 8 the amount of the unmet Goal, in addition to the sanctions outlined in Section 1-9 07.11(5). 10 11 Payment 12 Compensation for all costs involved with complying with the conditions of this 13 Specification and any other associated FSBE requirements is included in payment 14 for the associated Contract items of Work, except otherwise provided in the 15 Specifications. 16

17 1-07.11.OPT8.FR1 18

(June 1, 2017) 19

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Participation 20 The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and 21 USDOT’s official interpretations (i.e., Questions & Answers) apply to this Contract. 22 Demonstrating compliance with these Specifications is a Condition of Award (COA) of 23 this Contract. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Specification may result in 24 your Bid being found to be nonresponsive resulting in rejection or other sanctions as 25 provided by Contract. 26 27

DBE Abbreviations and Definitions 28 Broker – A business firm that provides a bona fide service, such as 29 professional, technical, consultant or managerial services and assistance in the 30 procurement of essential personnel, facilities, equipment, materials, or supplies 31 required for the performance of the Contract; or, persons/companies who 32 arrange or expedite transactions. 33 34 Certified Business Description – Specific descriptions of work the DBE is 35 certified to perform, as identified in the Certified Firm Directory, under the 36 Vendor Information page. 37 38 Certified Firm Directory – A database of all Minority, Women, and 39 Disadvantaged Business Enterprises currently certified by Washington State. 40 The on-line Directory is available to Contractors for their use in identifying and 41 soliciting interest from DBE firms. The database is located under the Firm 42 Certification section of the Diversity Management and Compliance System web 43 page (https://wsdot.diversitycompliance.com). 44 45 Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 46 49 CFR 26.55(c)(1) defines commercially useful function as: “A DBE performs 47 a commercially useful function when it is responsible for execution of the work 48 of the contract and is carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, 49 managing, and supervising the work involved. To perform a commercially useful 50 function, the DBE must also be responsible, with respect to materials and 51


supplies used on the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality and 1 quantity, ordering the material, and installing (where applicable) and paying for 2 the material itself. To determine whether a DBE is performing a commercially 3 useful function, you must evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry 4 practices, whether the amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is 5 commensurate with the work it is actually performing and the DBE credit 6 claimed for its performance of the work, and other relevant factors.” 7 8 Contract – For this provision only, this definition supplements Section 1-01.3. 9 49 CFR 26.5 defines contract as: “… a legally binding relationship obligating a 10 seller to furnish supplies or services (including, but not limited to, construction 11 and professional services) and the buyer to pay for them. For purposes of this 12 part, a lease is considered to be a contract.” 13 14 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) – A business firm certified by the 15 Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises, as 16 meeting the criteria outlined in 49 CFR 26 regarding DBE certification. 17 18 DBE Commitment – The dollar amount the Contractor indicates they will be 19 subcontracting to be applied towards the DBE Condition of Award Goal as 20 shown on the DBE Utilization Certification Form for each DBE Subcontractor. 21 This DBE Commitment amount will be incorporated into the Contract and shall 22 be considered a Contract requirement. Any changes to the DBE Commitment 23 shall require Engineer’s approval. 24 25 DBE Condition of Award (COA) Goal – An assigned numerical percentage of 26 the Bid amount of the Contract. This is the minimum amount that the Bidder 27 must commit to by submission of the Utilization Certification Form and/or by 28 Good Faith Effort (GFE). The DBE COA Goal will also be applied to change 29 orders associated with this Contract. 30 31 Force Account Work – Work measured and paid in accordance with Section 32 1-09.6. 33 34 Good Faith Efforts – Efforts to achieve the DBE COA Goal or other 35 requirements of this part which, by their scope, intensity, and appropriateness 36 to the objective, can reasonably be expected to fulfill the program requirement. 37 38 Manufacturer (DBE) – A DBE firm that operates or maintains a factory or 39 establishment that produces on the premises the materials, supplies, articles, 40 or equipment required under the Contract. A DBE Manufacturer shall produce 41 finished goods or products from raw or unfinished material or purchase and 42 substantially alters goods and materials to make them suitable for construction 43 use before reselling them. 44 45 Regular Dealer (DBE) – A DBE firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, 46 warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies required 47 for the performance of a Contract are bought, kept in stock, and regularly sold 48 to the public in the usual course of business. To be a Regular Dealer, the DBE 49 firm must be an established regular business that engages in as its principal 50 business and in its own name the purchase and sale of the products in question. 51


A Regular Dealer in such items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and petroleum 1 products need not own, operate or maintain a place of business if it both owns 2 and operates distribution equipment for the products. Any supplementing of 3 regular dealers’ own distribution equipment shall be by long-term formal lease 4 agreements and not on an ad-hoc basis. Brokers, packagers, manufacturers’ 5 representatives, or other persons who arrange or expedite transactions shall 6 not be regarded as Regular Dealers within the meaning of this definition. 7 8

DBE COA Goal 9 The Contracting Agency has established a COA Contract Goal in the amount of: *** 10 $$1$$ *** 11 12 DBE Eligibility/Selection of DBEs 13 In order to determine the distinct element(s) of work for which a DBE is certified, 14 Contractors should refer to the Certified Business Description. The Contractor shall 15 not use NAICS codes on the DBE Utilization Certification. 16 17 Crediting DBE Participation 18 Subcontractors proposed as COA must be certified prior to the due date for bids on 19 the Contract. All non-COA DBE Subcontractors shall be certified before the 20 subcontract on which they are participating is executed. 21 22 Be advised that although a firm is listed in the Certified Firm Directory, there are 23 cases where the listed firm is in a temporary suspension status. The Contractor shall 24 review the OMWBE Suspended DBE Firms list. A DBE firm that is included on this 25 list may not enter into new contracts that count towards participation. 26 DBE participation cannot be counted toward the Contractor’s contract goal until the 27 amount being counted has actually been paid to the DBE including return of 28 retainage. 29 30 In all cases the DBE must be certified in advance for the work being considered and 31 performing a CUF during the execution of the Work. The following are some 32 examples of what may be counted as DBE participation. 33 34

DBE Prime Contractor 35 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the Contract equal to 36 the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE Prime Contractor 37 performs with its own forces and is credited to perform. 38 39 DBE Subcontractor 40 Only take credit for that portion of the total dollar value of the subcontract that 41 is equal to the distinct, clearly defined portion of the Work that the DBE performs 42 with its own forces. The value of work performed by the DBE includes the cost 43 of supplies and materials purchased by the DBE and equipment leased by the 44 DBE, for its work on the contract. Supplies, materials or equipment obtained by 45 a DBE that are not utilized or incorporated in the contract work by the DBE will 46 not be eligible for DBE credit unless the DBE is certified as a supplier or 47 equipment leasing company. 48 49


The supplies, materials, and equipment purchased or leased from the 1 Contractor or its affiliate, including any Contractor’s resources available to DBE 2 subcontractors at no cost, shall not be credited. 3 4 DBE credit will not be given in instances where the equipment lease includes 5 the operator. The DBE is expected to operate the equipment used in the 6 performance of its work under the contract with its own forces. Situations where 7 equipment is leased and used by the DBE, but payment is deducted from the 8 Contractor’s payment to the DBE is not allowed. 9 10 If a DBE subcontracts a portion of the Work of its contract to another firm, the 11 value of the subcontracted Work may be counted toward the DBE COA Goal 12 only if the DBE’s Lower-Tier Subcontractor is also a DBE. Work subcontracted 13 to a non-DBE does not count towards the DBE COA Goal. 14 15 DBE Subcontract and Lower Tier Subcontract Documents 16 There must be a subcontract agreement that complies with 49 CFR Part 26 and 17 fully describes the distinct elements of Work committed to be performed by the 18 DBE. The subcontract agreement shall incorporate requirements of the primary 19 Contract. Subcontract agreements of all tiers, including lease agreements shall 20 be readily available at the project site for the Engineer’s review. 21 22 DBE Service Provider 23 The value of fees or commissions charged by a DBE Broker, a DBE behaving 24 in a manner of a Broker, or another service provider for providing a bona fide 25 service, such as professional, technical, consultant, managerial services, or for 26 providing bonds or insurance specifically required for the performance of the 27 contract will only be credited towards meeting the DBE COA Goal if the 28 fee/commission is determined by the Contracting Agency to be reasonable and 29 the firm has performed a CUF. Documentation will be required to support the 30 fee/commission charged by the DBE. 31 32 Force Account Work 33 When the Contractor elects to utilize force account Work to meet the DBE COA 34 Goal, as demonstrated by listing this force account Work on the DBE Utilization 35 Certification Form, for the purposes of meeting DBE COA Goal, only 50% of the 36 Proposal amount shall be credited toward the Contractors Commitment to meet 37 the DBE COA Goal. 38 39 One hundred percent of the actual amounts paid to the DBE for the force 40 account Work shall be credited towards DBE COA Goal or DBE participation. 41 42 Temporary Traffic Control 43 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of only “Flagging”, the DBE firm 44 must provide a Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) and flagger, which are under 45 the direct control of the DBE. The DBE firm shall also provide all flagging 46 equipment (e.g. paddles, hard hats, and vests). 47 48 If the DBE firm is being utilized in the capacity of “Traffic Control Services”, the 49 DBE firm must provide a TCS, flaggers, and traffic control items (e.g., cones, 50 barrels, signs, etc.) and be in total control of all items in implementing the traffic 51


control for the project. In addition if the DBE firm utilizes the Contractor’s 1 equipment, such as Transportable Attenuators and Portable Changeable 2 Message Signs (PCMS) no DBE credit can be taken for supplying and 3 operating the items. 4 5 Trucking 6 DBE trucking firm participation may only be credited to the DBE COA Goal for 7 the value of the hauling services, not for the materials being hauled unless the 8 trucking firm is also certified as a supplier. In situations where the DBE’s work 9 is priced per ton, the value of the hauling service must be calculated separately 10 from the value of the materials in order to determine DBE credit for hauling. 11 12 The DBE trucking firm must own and operate at least one licensed, insured and 13 operational truck on the contract. The truck must be of the type that is necessary 14 to perform the hauling duties required under the contract. The DBE receives 15 credit for the value of the transportation services it provides on the Contract 16 using trucks it owns or leases, licenses, insures, and operates with drivers it 17 employs. 18 19 The DBE may lease additional trucks from another DBE firm. 20 21 The trucking Work subcontracted to any non-DBE trucking firm will not receive 22 credit for Work done on the project. The DBE may lease trucks from a non-DBE 23 truck leasing company, but can only receive credit towards DBE participation if 24 the DBE uses its own employees as drivers. 25 26 DBE credit for a truck broker is limited to the fee/commission that the DBE 27 receives for arranging transportation services. 28 29 Truck registration and lease agreements shall be readily available at the project 30 site for the Engineer review. 31 32 DBE Manufacturer and DBE Regular Dealer 33 One hundred percent (100%) of the cost of the manufactured product obtained 34 from a DBE manufacturer may count toward the DBE COA Goal. The DBE 35 Manufacturer shall be certified as such by OMWBE. 36 37 Sixty percent (60%) of the cost of materials or supplies purchased from a DBE 38 Regular Dealer may be credited toward meeting the DBE COA Goal. If the role 39 of the DBE Regular Dealer is determined to be that of a pass-through, then no 40 DBE credit will be given for its services. If the role of the DBE Regular Dealer 41 is determined to be that of a Broker, then DBE credit shall be limited to the fee 42 or commission it receives for its services. Regular Dealer status and the 43 amount of credit is determined on a Contract-by-Contract basis. 44 45 Regular Dealer DBE firms must be approved before being used on a project. 46 The WSDOT Approved Regular Dealer list published on WSDOT’s Office of 47 Equal Opportunity (OEO) web site must include the specific project for which 48 approval is being requested. For purposes of the DBE COA Goal participation, 49 the Regular Dealer must submit the Regular Dealer Status Request form a 50 minimum of five days prior to bid opening. 51


1 Purchase of materials or supplies from a DBE which is neither a manufacturer 2 nor a regular dealer, (i.e. Broker) only the fees or commissions charged for 3 assistance in the procurement of the materials and supplies, or fees or 4 transportation charges for the delivery of materials or supplies required on a job 5 site, can count toward DBE COA Goal, provided the fees are not excessive as 6 compared with fees customarily allowed for similar services. Documentation will 7 be required to support the fee/commission charged by the DBE. The cost of the 8 materials and supplies themselves cannot be counted toward DBE COA Goal. 9 10 Note: Requests to be listed as a Regular Dealer will only be processed if the 11


15 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 16 To be eligible for award of the Contract, the Bidder shall properly complete and 17 submit a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification with the 18 Bidder’s sealed Bid Proposal, as specified in Section 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 19 The Bidder’s Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification must 20 clearly demonstrate how the Bidder intends to meet the DBE COA Goal. A 21 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification (WSDOT Form 272-22 056) is included in your Proposal package for this purpose as well as instructions on 23 how to properly fill out the form. 24 25 The Bidder is advised that the items listed below when listed in the Utilization 26 Certification must have their amounts reduced to the percentages shown and those 27 reduced amounts will be the amount applied towards meeting the DBE COA Goal. 28 29

• Force account at 50% 30 • Regular dealer at 60% 31

32 In the event of arithmetic errors in completing the Disadvantaged Business 33 Enterprise Utilization Certification the amount listed to be applied towards the DBE 34 COA Goal for each DBE shall govern and the DBE total amount shall be adjusted 35 accordingly. 36 37 Note: The Contracting Agency shall consider as non-responsive and shall 38

reject any Bid Proposal submitted that does not contain a 39 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification Form that 40 accurately demonstrates how the Bidder intends to meet the DBE COA 41 Goal. 42

43 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation Document(s) 44 The Bidder shall submit a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation 45 Document (completed and signed by the DBE) for each DBE firm listed in the 46 Bidder’s completed Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification 47 submitted with the Bid. Failure to do so will result in the associated participation 48 being disallowed, which may cause the Bid to be determined to be nonresponsive 49 resulting in Bid rejection. 50 51


The Confirmation Documents provide confirmation from the DBEs that they are 1 participating in the Contract as provided in the Contractor’s Commitment. The 2 Confirmation Documents must be consistent with the Utilization Certification. 3 4 A Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation Document (form No. 5 422-031) is included in your Proposal package for this purpose. 6 7 The form(s) shall be received as specified in the special provisions for Section 1-8 02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 9 10 It is prohibited for the Bidder to require a DBE to submit a Written Confirmation 11 Document with any part of the form left blank. Should the Contracting Agency 12 determine that an incomplete Written Confirmation Document was signed by a DBE, 13 the validity of the document comes into question. The associated DBE participation 14 may not receive credit. 15 16 Selection of Successful Bidder/Good Faith Efforts (GFE) 17 The successful Bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest 18 responsive Bid, which demonstrates a good faith effort to achieve the DBE COA 19 Goal. The Contracting Agency, at any time during the selection process, may 20 request a breakdown of the bid items and amounts that are counted towards the 21 overall contract goal for any of the DBEs listed on the DBE Utilization Certification. 22 23 Achieving the DBE COA Goal may be accomplished in one of two ways: 24 25

1. By meeting the DBE COA Goal 26 Submission of the DBE Utilization Certification and supporting DBE Written 27 Confirmation Document(s) showing the Bidder has obtained enough DBE 28 participation to meet or exceed the DBE COA Goal. 29

30 2. By documentation that the Bidder made adequate GFE to meet the DBE 31

COA Goal 32 The Bidder may demonstrate a GFE in whole or part through GFE 33 documentation ONLY IN THE EVENT a Bidder’s efforts to solicit sufficient 34 DBE participation have been unsuccessful. The Bidder must supply GFE 35 documentation in addition to the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise 36 Utilization Certification, and supporting Disadvantaged Business 37 Enterprise (DBE) Written Confirmation Document(s). 38

39 Note: In the case where the Bidder was awarded the contract based on 40

demonstrating adequate GFE the advertised DBE COA Goal will not 41 be reduced. The Bidder shall demonstrate a GFE during the life of the 42 Contract to attain the advertised DBE COA Goal. 43

44 GFE documentation shall be received, as specified in the special provisions for 45 Section 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal. 46 47 The Contracting Agency will review the GFE documentation and will determine if the 48 Bidder made an adequate good faith effort. 49 50


Good Faith Effort (GFE) Documentation 1 GFE is evaluated when: 2 3

1. Determining award of a Contract that has COA goal, 4 5 2. When a COA DBE is terminated and substitution is required, and 6 7 3. Prior to Physical Completion when determining whether the Contractor has 8

satisfied its DBE commitments. 9 10 49 CFR Part 26, Appendix A is intended as general guidance and does not, in itself, 11 demonstrate adequate good faith efforts. The following is a list of types of actions, 12 which would be considered as part of the Bidder’s GFE to achieve DBE participation. 13 It is not intended to be a mandatory checklist, nor is it intended to be exclusive or 14 exhaustive. Other factors or types of efforts may be relevant in appropriate cases. 15 16

1. Soliciting through all reasonable and available means (e.g. attendance at 17 pre-bid meetings, advertising and/or written notices) the interest of all 18 certified DBEs who have the capability to perform the Work of the Contract. 19 The Bidder must solicit this interest within sufficient time to allow the DBEs 20 to respond to the solicitation. The Bidder must determine with certainty if 21 the DBEs are interested by taking appropriate steps to follow up initial 22 solicitations. 23

24 2. Selecting portions of the Work to be performed by DBEs in order to 25

increase the likelihood that the DBE COA Goal will be achieved. This 26 includes, where appropriate, breaking out contract Work items into 27 economically feasible units to facilitate DBE participation, even when the 28 Contractor might otherwise prefer to perform these Work items with its own 29 forces. 30

31 3. Providing interested DBEs with adequate information about the Plans, 32

Specifications, and requirements of the Contract in a timely manner to 33 assist them in responding to a solicitation. 34 35 a. Negotiating in good faith with interested DBEs. It is the Bidder’s 36

responsibility to make a portion of the Work available to DBE 37 subcontractors and suppliers and to select those portions of the 38 Work or material needs consistent with the available DBE 39 subcontractors and suppliers, so as to facilitate DBE participation. 40 Evidence of such negotiation includes the names, addresses, and 41 telephone numbers of DBEs that were considered; a description of 42 the information provided regarding the Plans and Specifications for 43 the Work selected for subcontracting; and evidence as to why 44 additional agreements could not be reached for DBEs to perform the 45 Work. 46

47 b. A Bidder using good business judgment would consider a number of 48

factors in negotiating with subcontractors, including DBE 49 subcontractors, and would take a firm’s price and capabilities as well 50 as the DBE COA Goal into consideration. However, the fact that 51


there may be some additional costs involved in finding and using 1 DBEs is not in itself sufficient reason for a Bidder’s failure to meet 2 the DBE COA Goal, as long as such costs are reasonable. Also, the 3 ability or desire of a Contractor to perform the Work of a Contract 4 with its own organization does not relieve the Bidder of the 5 responsibility to make Good Faith Efforts. Contractors are not, 6 however, required to accept higher quotes from DBEs if the price 7 difference is excessive or unreasonable. 8

9 4. Not rejecting DBEs as being unqualified without sound reasons based on 10

a thorough investigation of their capabilities. The Contractor’s standing 11 within its industry, membership in specific groups, organizations, or 12 associations and political or social affiliations (for example union vs. non-13 union employee status) are not legitimate causes for the rejection or non-14 solicitation of bids in the Contractor’s efforts to meet the DBE COA Goal. 15

16 5. Making efforts to assist interested DBEs in obtaining bonding, lines of 17

credit, or insurance as required by the recipient or Contractor. 18 19 6. Making efforts to assist interested DBEs in obtaining necessary equipment, 20

supplies, materials, or related assistance or services. 21 22 7. Effectively using the services of available minority/women community 23

organizations; minority/women contractors’ groups; local, State, and 24 Federal minority/women business assistance offices; and other 25 organizations as allowed on a case-by-case basis to provide assistance in 26 the recruitment and placement of DBEs. 27

28 8. Documentation of GFE must include copies of each DBE and non-DBE 29

subcontractor quotes submitted to the Bidder when a non-DBE 30 subcontractor is selected over a DBE for Work on the Contract. (ref. 31 updated DBE regulations – 26.53(b)(2)(vi) & App. A) 32

33 Administrative Reconsideration of GFE Documentation 34 Any Bidder has the right to reconsideration but only for the purpose of reassessing 35 the GFE documentation that was originally submitted with their Bid, and determined 36 to be inadequate. 37 38

• The Bidder must request within 48 hours of notification of being 39 nonresponsive or forfeit the right to reconsideration. 40

41 • The reconsideration decision on the adequacy of the Bidder’s GFE 42

documentation shall be made by an official who did not take part in the 43 original determination. 44

45 • Only original GFE documentation submitted as a supplement to the Bid 46

shall be considered. The Bidder shall not introduce new documentation at 47 the reconsideration hearing. 48

49


• The Bidder shall have the opportunity to meet in person with the official for 1 the purpose of setting forth the Bidder’s position as to why the GFE 2 documentation demonstrates a sufficient effort. 3

4 • The reconsideration official shall provide the Bidder with a written decision 5

on reconsideration within five working days of the hearing explaining the 6 basis for their finding. 7

8 Procedures between Award and Execution 9 After Award and prior to Execution, the Contractor shall provide the additional 10 information described below. Failure to comply shall result in the forfeiture of the 11 Bidder’s Proposal bond or deposit. 12 13

1. A DBE Bid Item Breakdown is required which shall contain the following 14 information for all DBEs as shown on the Disadvantaged Business 15 Enterprise Utilization Certification: 16

17 a. Correct business name, federal employee identification number (if 18

available), and mailing address. 19 20 b. List of all Bid items assigned to each DBE with a clear description of 21

Work to be performed for each Bid item and the dollar value of the 22 Work to be performed by the DBE. 23

24 c. Description of partial items (if any) to be sublet to each DBE 25

specifying the Work committed under each item to be performed and 26 including the dollar value of the DBE portion. 27

28 d. Total amounts shown for each DBE shall match the amount shown 29

on the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification. A 30 DBE Bid Item Breakdown that does not conform to the 31 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification or that 32 demonstrates a different amount of DBE participation than that 33 included in the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization 34 Certification will be returned for correction. 35

36 2. A list of all firms who submitted a bid or quote in attempt to participate in 37

this project whether they were successful or not. Include the business 38 name and mailing address. 39

40 Note: The firms identified by the Contractor may be contacted by the 41

Contracting Agency to solicit general information as follows: age of the 42 firm and average of its gross annual receipts over the past three-years. 43


Commercially Useful Function (CUF) 46 The Contractor may only take credit for the payments made for Work performed 47 by a DBE that is determined to be performing a CUF. Payment must be 48 commensurate with the work actually performed by the DBE. This applies to all 49 DBEs performing Work on a project, whether or not the DBEs are COA, if the 50 Contractor wants to receive credit for their participation. The Engineer will 51


conduct CUF reviews to ascertain whether DBEs are performing a CUF. A DBE 1 performs a CUF when it is carrying out its responsibilities of its contract by 2 actually performing, managing, and supervising the Work involved. The DBE 3 must be responsible for negotiating price; determining quality and quantity; 4 ordering the material, installing (where applicable); and paying for the material 5 itself. If a DBE does not perform “all” of these functions on a furnish-and-install 6 contract, it has not performed a CUF and the cost of materials cannot be 7 counted toward DBE COA Goal. Leasing of equipment from a leasing company 8 is allowed. However, leasing/purchasing equipment from the Contractor is not 9 allowed. Lease agreements shall be readily available for review by the 10 Engineer. 11 12 In order for a DBE traffic control company to be considered to be performing a 13 CUF, the DBE must be in control of its work inclusive of supervision. The DBE 14 shall employ a Traffic Control Supervisor who is directly involved in the 15 management and supervision of the traffic control employees and services. 16 17 The DBE does not perform a CUF if its role is limited to that of an extra 18 participant in a transaction, contract, or project through which the funds are 19 passed in order to obtain the appearance of DBE participation. 20 21 The following are some of the factors that the Engineer will use in determining 22 whether a DBE trucking company is performing a CUF: 23 24

• The DBE shall be responsible for the management and supervision 25 of the entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on the 26 contract. The owner demonstrates business related knowledge, 27 shows up on site and is determined to be actively running the 28 business. 29

30 • The DBE shall with its own workforce, operate at least one fully 31

licensed, insured, and operational truck used on the Contract. The 32 drivers of the trucks owned and leased by the DBE must be 33 exclusively employed by the DBE and reflected on the DBE’s payroll. 34


exclusive use of and control over the truck(s). This does not preclude 37 the leased truck from working for others provided it is with the 38 consent of the DBE and the lease provides the DBE absolute priority 39 for use of the leased truck. 40


the DBE. 43 44 DBE Utilization Plan 45 The DBE Bid Item Breakdown is the initial plan for Bid Item work committed to 46 DBE firms. When a Contractor identifies a change in the plan, an update shall 47 be submitted within 7 calendar days between Execution and Physical 48 Completion. Plan updates shall not make changes to the Commitment or the 49 DBE Utilization Certification. 50 51


Joint Checking 1 A joint check is a check between a Subcontractor and the Contractor to the 2 supplier of materials/supplies. The check is issued by the Contractor as payer 3 to the Subcontractor and the material supplier jointly for items to be 4 incorporated into the project. The DBE must release the check to the supplier, 5 while the Contractor acts solely as the guarantor. 6 7 A joint check agreement must be approved by the Engineer and requested by 8 the DBE involved using the DBE Joint Check Request Form (form # 272-053) 9 prior to its use. The form must accompany the DBE Joint Check Agreement 10 between the parties involved, including the conditions of the arrangement and 11 expected use of the joint checks. 12 13 The approval to use joint checks and the use will be closely monitored by the 14 Engineer. To receive DBE credit for performing a CUF with respect to obtaining 15 materials and supplies, a DBE must “be responsible for negotiating price, 16 determining quality and quantity, ordering the material, installing and paying for 17 the material itself.” The Contractor shall submit DBE Joint Check Request Form 18 for the Engineer approval prior to using a joint check. 19 20 Material costs paid by the Contractor directly to the material supplier are not 21 allowed. If proper procedures are not followed or the Engineer determines that 22 the arrangement results in lack of independence for the DBE involved, no DBE 23 credit will be given for the DBE’s participation as it relates to the material cost. 24 25 Prompt Payment 26 Prompt payment to all subcontractors shall be in accordance with Section 1-27 08.1. Prompt payment requirements apply to progress payments as well as 28 return of retainage. 29 30 Reporting 31 The Contractor and all subcontractors/suppliers/service providers that utilize 32 DBEs to perform work on the project, shall maintain appropriate records that 33 will enable the Engineer to verify DBE participation throughout the life of the 34 project. 35 36 Refer to Section 1-08.1 for additional reporting requirements associated with 37 this contract. 38

39 Changes in COA Work Committed to DBE 40 The Contractor shall utilize the COA DBEs to perform the work and supply the 41 materials for which each is committed unless a change is approved by the Engineer. 42 The Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for work or material completed 43 by the Contractor or subcontractors that was committed to be completed by the COA 44 DBEs. 45 46

Owner Initiated Changes 47 Where the Engineer makes changes that result in changes to Work that was 48 committed to a COA DBE. The Contractor may be directed to substitute for the 49 Work in such instances. 50 51


Contractor Initiated Changes 1 The Contractor cannot reduce the amount of work committed to a COA DBE 2 without good cause. Reducing DBE Commitment is viewed as partial DBE 3 termination, and therefore subject to the termination procedures below. 4 5 Original Quantity Underruns 6 In the event that Work committed to a DBE firm as part of the COA underruns 7 the original planned quantities the Contractor may be required to substitute the 8 remaining applicable Work to another DBE. 9 10 Contractor Proposed DBE Substitutions 11 Requests to substitute a COA DBE must be for good cause (see DBE 12 termination process below), and requires prior written approval of the Engineer. 13 After receiving a termination with good cause approval, the Contractor may only 14 replace a DBE with another certified DBE. When any changes between 15 Contract Award and Execution result in a substitution of COA DBE, the 16 substitute DBE shall be certified prior to the bid opening on the Contract. 17 18 DBE Termination 19 Termination of a COA DBE (or an approved substitute DBE) is only allowed in 20 whole or in part with prior written approval of the Engineer. If the Contractor 21 terminates a COA DBE without the written approval of the Engineer, the 22 Contractor shall not be entitled to credit towards the DBE COA Goal for any 23 payment for work or material performed/supplied by the COA DBE. In addition 24 sanctions may apply as described elsewhere in this specification. 25 26 The Contractor must have good cause to terminate a COA DBE. 27 28 Good cause typically includes situations where the DBE Subcontractor is 29 unable or unwilling to perform the work of its subcontract. Good cause may 30 exist if: 31 32

• The DBE fails or refuses to execute a written contract. 33 34 • The DBE fails or refuses to perform the Work of its subcontract in a 35

way consistent with normal industry standards. 36 37 • The DBE fails or refuses to meet the Contractor’s reasonable 38

nondiscriminatory bond requirements. 39 40 • The DBE becomes bankrupt, insolvent, or exhibits credit 41

unworthiness. 42 43 • The DBE is ineligible to work on public works projects because of 44

suspension and debarment proceedings pursuant to federal law or 45 applicable State law. 46

47 • The DBE voluntarily withdraws from the project, and provides written 48

notice of its withdrawal. 49 50


• The DBE’s work is deemed unsatisfactory by the Engineer and not in 1 compliance with the Contract. 2

3 • The DBE’s owner dies or becomes disabled with the result that the 4

DBE is unable to complete its Work on the Contract. 5 6 Good cause does not exist if: 7 8 • The Contractor seeks to terminate a COA DBE so that the 9

Contractor can self-perform the Work. 10 11 • The Contractor seeks to terminate a COA DBE so the Contractor can 12

substitute another DBE contractor or non-DBE contractor after 13 Contract Award. 14

15 • The failure or refusal of the COA DBE to perform its Work on the 16

subcontract results from the bad faith or discriminatory action of the 17 Contractor (e.g., the failure of the Contractor to make timely 18 payments or the unnecessary placing of obstacles in the path of the 19 DBE’s Work). 20

21 Prior to requesting termination, the Contractor shall give notice in writing to the 22 DBE with a copy to the Engineer of its intent to request to terminate DBE Work 23 and the reasons for doing so. The DBE shall have five (5) days to respond to 24 the Contractor’s notice. The DBE’s response shall either support the 25 termination or advise the Engineer and the Contractor of the reasons it objects 26 to the termination of its subcontract. 27 28 When a COA DBE is terminated, or fails to complete its work on the Contract 29 for any reason, the Contractor shall substitute with another DBE or provide 30 documentation of GFE. A plan to achieve the COA DBE Commitment shall be 31 submitted to the Engineer within 2 days of the approval of termination or the 32 Contract shall be suspended until such time the substitution plan is submitted. 33 34 Decertification 35 When a DBE is “decertified” from the DBE program during the course of the 36 Contract, the participation of that DBE shall continue to count towards the DBE 37 COA Goal as long as the subcontract with the DBE was executed prior to the 38 decertification notice. The Contractor is obligated to substitute when a DBE 39 does not have an executed subcontract agreement at the time of decertification. 40 41

Consequences of Non-Compliance 42 Breach of Contract 43 Each contract with a Contractor (and each subcontract the Contractor signs 44 with a Subcontractor) must include the following assurance clause: 45 46 The Contractor, subrecipient, or Subcontractor shall not discriminate on the 47 basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. 48 The Contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the 49 award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the Contractor 50 to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this Contract, which may 51


result in the termination of this Contract or such other remedy as the recipient 1 deems appropriate, which may include, but is not limited to: 2 3

(1) Withholding monthly progress payments; 4 5 (2) Assessing sanctions; 6 7 (3) Liquidated damages; and/or 8 9 (4) Disqualifying the Contractor from future bidding as non-responsible. 10

11 Notice 12 If the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Consultant, Regular Dealer, or service 13 provider is deemed to be in non-compliance, the Contractor will be informed in 14 writing, by certified mail by the Engineer that sanctions will be imposed for 15 failure to meet the DBE COA Commitment and/or submit documentation of 16 good faith efforts. The notice will state the specific sanctions to be imposed 17 which may include impacting a Contractor or other entity’s ability to participate 18 in future contracts. 19

20 Sanctions 21 If it is determined that the Contractor’s failure to meet all or part of the DBE COA 22 Commitment is due to the Contractor’s inadequate good faith efforts throughout the 23 life of the Contract, including failure to submit timely, required Good Faith Efforts 24 information and documentation, the Contractor may be required to pay DBE penalty 25 equal to the amount of the unmet Commitment, in addition to the sanctions outlined 26 in Section 1-07.11(5). 27 28 Payment 29 Compensation for all costs involved with complying with the conditions of this 30 Specification and any other associated DBE requirements is included in payment 31 for the associated Contract items of Work, except otherwise provided in the 32 Specifications. 33

34 1-07.12.GR1 35

Federal Agency Inspection 36 37 1-07.12.INST1.GR1 38 Section 1-07.12 is supplemented with the following: 39 40 1-07.12.OPT1.GR1 41

(January 25, 2016) 42

Required Federal Aid Provisions 43 The Required Contract Provisions Federal Aid Construction Contracts (FHWA 1273) 44 Revised May 1, 2012 and the amendments thereto supersede any conflicting provisions 45 of the Standard Specifications and are made a part of this Contract; provided, however, 46 that if any of the provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, are less restrictive than 47 Washington State Law, then the Washington State Law shall prevail. 48 49


The provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, included in this Contract require that the 1 Contractor insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in each Subcontract, together 2 with the wage rates which are part of the FHWA 1273, as amended. Also, a clause shall 3 be included in each Subcontract requiring the Subcontractors to insert the FHWA 1273 4 and amendments thereto in any lower tier Subcontracts, together with the wage rates. 5 The Contractor shall also ensure that this section, REQUIRED FEDERAL AID 6 PROVISIONS, is inserted in each Subcontract for Subcontractors and lower tier 7 Subcontractors. For this purpose, upon request to the Engineer, the Contractor will be 8 provided with extra copies of the FHWA 1273, the amendments thereto, the applicable 9 wage rates, and this Special Provision. 10

11 1-07.12.OPT2.FR1 12

(August 1, 2011) 13

Indian Preference and Tribal Ordinances 14 This project is located on the *** $$1$$ ***. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to contact 15 the person and/or office listed in this special provision to determine whether any tribal 16 laws or taxes apply. If the tribal laws and taxes do apply, the Contractor shall comply 17 with them in accordance with Section 1-07.1. For informational purposes only, the Work 18 on this project that falls within Tribal Lands is shown on the Summary of Quantities in 19 Group(s) *** $$2$$ ***. 20 21 Tribal Employment Rights Ordinances (TEROs), may utilize a variety of tools to 22 encourage Indian employment. These tools may include, but are not limited to, TERO 23 fees, Indian hiring preference, Indian-owned business subcontracting preference and/or 24 an Indian training requirement. Other requirements may be a Tribal business license, a 25 required compliance plan and/or employee registration requirements. Every tribe is 26 different and each may be willing to work cooperatively with the Contractor to develop a 27 strategy that works for both parties. For specific details, the Contractor should contact 28 *** $$3$$ ***. 29 30 The state recognizes the sovereign authority of the tribe and supports the tribe's efforts 31 to enforce its rightful and legal ordinances and expects the Contractor to comply and 32 cooperate with the tribe. The costs related to such compliance shall be borne solely by 33 the Contractor, who is advised to contact the tribal representative listed above, prior to 34 submitting a bid, to assess the impact of compliance on the project. 35 36 Although Indian preference cannot be compelled or mandated by the Contracting 37 Agency, there is no limitation whereby voluntary Contractor or Subcontractor initiated 38 preferences are given, if otherwise lawful. 41 CFR 60-1.5(a)7 provides as follows: 39

40 Work on or near Indian reservations --- It shall not be a violation of the equal 41 opportunity clause for a construction or non-construction Contractor to extend a 42 publicly announced preference in employment to Indians living on or near an Indian 43 reservation in connection with employment opportunities on or near an Indian 44 reservation. The use of the word near would include all that area where a person 45 seeking employment could reasonably be expected to commute to and from in the 46 course of a work day. Contractors or Subcontractors extending such a preference 47 shall not, however, discriminate among Indians on the basis of religion, sex, or tribal 48 affiliation, and the use of such a preference shall not excuse a Contractor from 49 complying with the other requirements as contained in the August 25, 1981 50


Department of Labor, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, 1 Government Contractors Affirmative Actions Requirements. 2

3 1-07.13.GR1 4

Contractor's Responsibility for Work 5 6 1-07.13(4).GR1 7

Repair of Damage 8 9 1-07.13(4).INST1.GR1 10

Section 1-07.13(4) is revised to read: 11 12 1-07.13(4).OPT1.GR1 13

(August 6, 2001) 14 The Contractor shall promptly repair all damage to either temporary or permanent 15 work as directed by the Engineer. For damage qualifying for relief under Sections 16 1-07.13(1), 1-07.13(2) or 1-07.13(3), payment will be made in accordance with 17 Section 1-04.4. Payment will be limited to repair of damaged work only. No payment 18 will be made for delay or disruption of work. 19

20 1-07.16.GR1 21

Protection and Restoration of Property 22 23 1-07.16.INST1.GR1 24 Section 1-07.16 is supplemented with the following: 25 26 1-07.16.OPT1.GR1 27

(February 25, 2021) 28

Protection of Wells 29 The Contractor shall save and protect existing wells throughout the life of the Contract 30 at the locations as shown in the Plans. For the definition of wells types see WAC 173-31 160-111 and WAC 173-160-410. 32 33 The existing wells shall not be disturbed during any construction activity. 34 35

Discovery of Unidentified Wells 36 If unidentified wells are encountered by the Contractor, they shall not be further disturbed. 37 The Contractor shall ensure any unidentified wells encountered are protected from all 38 construction activities including spills. The Contractor shall follow the procedures set 39 forth in Section 1-04.7. The Engineer will determine if the well will be protected in 40 accordance with Section 1-07.1, 1-07.5(3), and 1-07.16 or the well will be 41 decommissioned as part of the Work. 42

43 1-07.16(2).GR1 44

Vegetation Protection and Restoration 45 46 1-07.16(2).INST1.GR1 47



1-07.16(2).OPT1.GR1 1 (August 2, 2010) 2 Vegetation and soil protection zones for trees shall extend out from the trunk to a 3 distance of 1 foot radius for each inch of trunk diameter at breast height. 4 5 Vegetation and soil protection zones for shrubs shall extend out from the stems at 6 ground level to twice the radius of the shrub. 7 8 Vegetation and soil protection zones for herbaceous vegetation shall extend to 9 encompass the diameter of the plant as measured from the outer edge of the plant. 10

11 1-07.16(4).GR1 12

Archaeological and Historical Objects 13 14 1-07.16(4).INST1.GR1 15


(December 6, 2004) 19 The project area potentially contains archaeological or historical objects that may 20 have significance from a historical or scientific standpoint. To protect these objects 21 from damage or destruction, the Contracting Agency, at its discretion and expense, 22 may monitor the Contractor’s operations, conduct various site testing and perform 23 recovery and removal of such objects when necessary. 24 25 The Contractor may be required to conduct its operations in a manner that will 26 accommodate such activities, including the reserving of portions of the work area 27 for site testing, exploratory operations and recovery and removal of such objects as 28 directed by the Engineer. If such activities are performed by consultants retained 29 by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall provide them adequate access to 30 the project site. 31 32 Added work necessary to uncover, fence, dewater, or otherwise protect or assist in 33 such testing, exploratory operations and salvaging of the objects as ordered by the 34 Engineer shall be paid by force account as provided in Section 1-09.6. If the 35 discovery and salvaging activities require the Engineer to suspend the Contractor’s 36 work, any adjustment in time will be determined by the Engineer pursuant to Section 37 1-08.8. 38 39 To provide a common basis for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an 40 amount for the item “Archaeological and Historical Salvage” in the Proposal to 41 become a part of the total bid by the Contractor. 42

43 1-07.17.GR1 44

Utilities and Similar Facilities 45 46 1-07.17.INST1.GR1 47 Section 1-07.17 is supplemented with the following: 48 49 1-07.17.OPT1.FR1 50

(April 2, 2007) 51


Locations and dimensions shown in the Plans for existing facilities are in accordance 1 with available information obtained without uncovering, measuring, or other verification. 2 3 The following addresses and telephone numbers of utility companies known or 4 suspected of having facilities within the project limits are supplied for the Contractor's 5 convenience: 6 7

*** $$1$$ *** 8 9 1-07.17.OPT2.FR1 10

(April 2, 2007) 11 Locations and dimensions shown in the Plans for existing facilities are in accordance 12 with available information obtained without uncovering, measuring, or other verification. 13 14 Public and private utilities, or their Contractors, will furnish all work necessary to adjust, 15 relocate, replace, or construct their facilities unless otherwise provided for in the Plans 16 or these Special Provisions. Such adjustment, relocation, replacement, or construction 17 will be done during the prosecution of the work for this project. It is anticipated that utility 18 adjustment, relocation, replacement or construction within the project limits will be 19 completed as follows: 20 21

*** $$1$$ *** 22 23 The Contractor shall attend a mandatory utility preconstruction meeting with the 24 Engineer, all affected Subcontractors, and all utility owners and their Contractors prior to 25 beginning onsite work. 26 27 The following addresses and telephone numbers of utility companies or their Contractors 28 that will be adjusting, relocating, replacing or constructing utilities within the project limits 29 are supplied for the Contractor's use: 30 31

*** $$2$$ *** 32 33 *** $$3$$ *** 34

35 1-07.18.GR1 36

Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance 37 38 1-07.18.INST1.GR1 39 Section 1-07.18 is supplemented with the following: 40 41 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 42


Relations With Railroad 44 The term Railroad Company, as used in these specifications shall be applicable to each 45 of the following railroad companies: 46 47

*** $$1$$ *** 48 49


Protection of Railroad Property 1 The Contractor shall exercise care in all operations and shall, at the Contractor's 2 expense, protect the property of the Railroad Company and the Company’s 3 appurtenances, property in its custody, or persons lawfully upon its right of way, from 4 damage, destruction, interference or injury caused by the Contractor’s operations. 5 The Contractor shall prosecute the work to not interfere with the Railroad Company 6 or its appurtenances, or any of the Railroad Company's trains or facilities, and shall 7 complete the work to a condition that shall not interfere with or menace the integrity 8 or safe and successful operations of the Railroad Company or its appurtenances, or 9 any of the Railroad Company's trains or facilities. 10

11 The Contractor shall not transport equipment, machinery, or materials across the 12 Railroad Company's tracks, except at a public crossing, without the written consent 13 of the Railroad Company. 14 15 The Contractor shall keep the right of way and ditches of the Railroad Company 16 open and clean from any deposits or debris resulting from its operations. The 17 Contractor shall be responsible for the cost to clean and restore ballast of the 18 Railroad Company which is disturbed or becomes fouled with dirt or materials when 19 such deposits or damage result from the Contractor’s operations, except as 20 provided elsewhere. 21

22 The Contractor's work shall be conducted in such a manner that there will be a 23 minimum of interference with the operation of the railroad. For Class 1 Railroads 24 (BNSF and UPRR) the Railroad Company will specify what periods will be available 25 to the Contractor for executing any part of the work in which the Railroad Company's 26 tracks will be obstructed or made unsafe for operation of the railroad. No 27 interference with Class 1 Railroad Company operations will be permitted between 28 October 1 and December 31. The Railroad Company may change these 29 requirements to be more or less restrictive. Requests for extensions of time due to 30 additional Railroad restrictions shall be in accordance with Section 1-08.8. 31 Additional Railroad restrictions will not be eligible for a cost adjustment. 32

33 In the event that an emergency occurs in connection with the work specified, the 34 Railroad Company reserves the right to do any and all work that may be necessary 35 to maintain railroad traffic. If the emergency is caused by the Contractor, the 36 Contractor shall be responsible for all Railroad Company costs associated with the 37 emergency response. 38

39 Protective services to protect the Railroad Company's facilities, property, and 40 movement of its trains or engines, including railroad flagging and other devices, may 41 be required by the Railroad Company as a result of the Contractor's operations. 42 43 The nature and extent of protective services, personnel and other measures 44 required will in all cases be determined by the Railroad Company. Nothing in these 45 specifications will limit the Railroad Company's right to determine and assign the 46 number of personnel, the classes of personnel for protective services, nor other 47 protective measures it deems necessary. 48 49 When, in the opinion of the Railroad Company, the services of flaggers or inspectors 50 are necessary for the protection of the Railroad Company's facilities by reason of 51


the Contractor's operations, the Railroad Company will furnish such flaggers or 1 inspectors as may be required. The Contractor shall notify the Railroad Company 2 a minimum of *** $$2$$ *** in advance of whenever the Contractor is about to 3 perform work within Railroad Company property or within 25 feet of the tracks to 4 enable the Railroad Company to provide flagging or other protective services. 5 6

The Railroad Company’s contact to schedule flagging or other protective 7 services is: 8 9 *** $$3$$ *** 10

11 No act of the Railroad Company in supervising or approving any work shall reduce 12 or in any way affect the liability of the Contractor for damages, expense, or cost 13 which may result to the Railroad Company from the construction of this Contract. 14

15 Unless otherwise provided, all personnel assigned by the Railroad Company, other 16 than those engaged in performing work by the Railroad Company as listed under 17 Construction Work by Railroad Company, will be considered protective personnel. 18 19 In general, the Railroad Company will furnish protective services whenever any of 20 the Contractor's operations take place within or near railroad right of way and, in the 21 opinion of the Railroad Company's representative, could endanger railroad facilities 22 or create a hazard to railroad operations. 23 24 The Railroad Company’s policy for assignment of railroad flaggers requires that the 25 flagging position is established for fixed work days and times. Any railroad flagging 26 performed outside of these parameters may be subject to overtime costs. The 27 Contractor shall verify with the Railroad Company what categories of railroad 28 flagging constitute overtime work, and obtain prior authorization from the Engineer 29 before coordinating with the Railroad Company for flagging requiring overtime 30 payments. 31 32 The Contractor shall submit to the Railroad Company and the Engineer, in writing, 33 an itinerary of work within the Railroad Company’s right of way or otherwise requiring 34 a Railroad Company flagger for the following week. If such work spans multiple 35 weeks, the itinerary shall be provided in advance of each work week. 36 37

There will be no cost to the Contractor for the railroad protective services, unless: 38 39

• Such services result from the Contractor’s failure to comply with the terms 40 and conditions of its contract with the Contracting Agency or with its 41 Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreements with the Railroad Company. 42 43

• The Contractor fails to obtain authorization from the Engineer prior to 44 coordinating with the Railroad Company for any flagging requiring 45 overtime payments. 46 47

• The Contractor arranges for assignment of a railroad flagger and alters 48 Project work so that a flagger is no longer needed, and adequate advance 49 notice is not provided to the Railroad Company of such change in the 50


need for a flagger (i.e. causing the Railroad Company to dispatch a 1 flagger billable to the Project when one is not required). 2

3

• The Contractor causes an emergency, as discussed above. 4 5

Construction Work by Railroad Company 6 The work by the Railroad Company as described below will be performed by the 7 Railroad Company with its own forces at no cost to the Contractor: 8 9

*** $$4$$ *** 10 11 All work which is performed by the Railroad Company at the Contractor's request 12 and which is for the Contractor's benefit or convenience shall be at the Contractor's 13 expense and the Contractor shall reimburse the Railroad Company for all costs for 14 such work. 15 16 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Railroad Company and so conduct 17 operations that the necessary reconstruction of its facilities and the removal of 18 existing facilities can be accomplished without interruption of service. 19

20 Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement 21 For all matters regarding the Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement, the Contractor 22 shall contact: 23 24

*** $$5$$ *** 25 26 No work shall be commenced within the Railroad Company’s Property until the 27 Contractor has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed 28 Contractor’s Right-of-Entry Agreement from the Railroad Company, and has 29 obtained all of the insurance required by the Railroad Company as specified therein. 30 All work within the Railroad Company’s right of way or within 25 feet of a public 31 railroad grade crossing shall be in accordance with Railroad’s Contractor 32 Requirements and the Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement. The Contracting 33 Agency has furnished a draft Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement in Appendix *** 34 $$6$$ ***. The draft Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement represents the 35 Contracting Agency’s assessment of the likely terms and conditions prior to 36 Advertisement for Bids. The final terms and conditions will be determined by the 37 Railroad Company after Contract Execution. 38 39 The Contractor, it subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 40 maintain in force all insurance required by Railroad until the completion date of the 41 contract as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated herein. 42 43 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to 44 the railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request to 45 the Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue all or part of the 46 insurance specified above. If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that 47 area is complete, the Engineer may approve the Contractor's request. However, if 48 for any reason the Contractor resumes or starts any new work in that area (including 49 being ordered to do so by the Engineer), the insurance shall be reinstated by the 50 Contractor before the work is started. If the insurance must be reinstated because 51


of the Contractor's operations or failure of the Contractor to perform all the contract 1 requirements, the costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. If the insurance 2 must be reinstated because of changes to the contract, the costs will be considered 3 in accordance with Section 1-04.4. 4 5 Submittals and Working Drawings 6 Unless specified elsewhere in the Contract, all submittals and Working Drawings 7 prepared by the Contractor for review by the Railroad Company shall be Type 3 or 8 3E Working Drawings. The Contractor shall submit Working Drawings to the Project 9 Engineer. The Contracting Agency will coordinate Working Drawing review with the 10 Railroad Company. The Contractor shall develop a progress schedule that includes 11 Working Drawing reviews by the Railroad Company. 12

13 1-07.18(5).GR1 14

Required Insurance Policies 15 16 1-07.18(5).INST1.GR1 17

The first sentence of Item No. 1 of Section 1-07.18(5) is revised to read: 18 19 1-07.18(5).OPT1.FR1 20

(January 3, 2011September 7, 2021) 21 1. Owners and Contractors Protective (OCP) Insurance providing bodily injury and 22

property damage liability coverage, with limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence 23 and per project in the aggregate for each policy period, which will be written 24 solely on Insurance Services Office (ISO) form CG0009 1204, together with 25 Washington State Department of Transportation amendatory endorsement CG 26 2908 1195, specifying the Contracting Agency, the State, the Governor, the 27 Commission, the Secretary, the Department and all officers and employees of 28 the State as named insured. 29

30 1-07.18(5).OPT2.GR1 31

(January 5, 2004September 7, 2021) 32 Item number 1 in the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18(5) is deleted. 33

34 1-07.18(5).INST2.GR1 35

The first sentence of Item No. 2 of Section 1-07.18(5) is revised to read: 36 37 1-07.18(5).OPT3.GR1 38

(January 3, 2011September 7, 2021) 39 2. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance written under ISO Form CG0001 40

or its equivalent with minimum limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence and in the 41 aggregate for each one-year policy period. Products and completed operations 42 coverage shall be provided for a period of three years following Substantial 43 Completion of the work. 44

45 1-07.18(5).OPT4.FR1 46

(April 1, 2013September 7, 2021) 47 2. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance written under ISO Form CG0001 48

or its equivalent, with minimum limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence and in the 49 aggregate for each 1-year policy period. This coverage may be any combination 50 of primary, umbrella, or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of 51


not less than *** $$2$$ *** per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and 1 completed operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years 2 following Substantial Completion of the Work. 3

4 1-07.18(5).INST3.GR1 5


(January 3, 2011) 9 Builder's Risk Insurance 10 Builder's Risk Insurance providing Broad Perils (All Risk) coverage upon any work 11 at the site, to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the 12 Contractor, its Subcontractors of every tier, and the State of Washington as named 13 insured on the policy. Coverage shall be included for all materials and supplies to 14 be incorporated into the work at the jobsite, while in transit to the jobsite, or while 15 stored away from the jobsite. 16

17 1-07.18(5).OPT6.FR1 18

(January 7, 2013) 19 The Contractor shall obtain Contractor’s Pollution Liability Insurance (CPL) with 20 minimum “per project” limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence and in the aggregate 21 for claims, including investigation, defense, or settlement costs and expenses for 22 bodily injury and property damage (including natural resources damages and loss 23 of use of tangible property that has not been physically injured) arising out of: 24 25

a. Pollution conditions caused or made worse by the Contractor’s 26 performance of the Work, including clean-up costs for a newly caused 27 condition or a historical condition that is made worse; and; 28

29 b. The vicarious liability of Subcontractors of any tier. 30

31 The Contractor shall be Named Insured and the Contracting Agency, the State, the 32 Governor, the Commission, the Secretary, the Department, all officers and 33 employees of the State, and their respective members, directors, officers, 34 employees, agents, and consultants (collectively the “Additional Insureds”) shall be 35 included as Additional Insureds, or, as appropriate, a Named Insured, under this 36 policy and coverage. 37

38 1-07.18(5).OPT7.GR1 39

(August 7, 2006) 40 Contractor’s Right of Entry and Insurance Requirements – BNSF 41 No work shall commence within BNSF Railway Company (BNSF) right of way until 42 the Contractor has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed 43 Contractor’s Right-of-Entry Agreement from BNSF, and has obtained all of the 44 insurance required by the Railroad. All work within BNSF’s right of way shall be in 45 accordance with BNSF’s Contractor Requirements and the Contractor’s Right of 46 Entry Agreement (See Appendices). 47 48 The Contractor, its Subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 49 maintain in force all insurance required by BNSF until the completion date of the 50 contract as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated herein. 51


1 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to 2 the Railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request 3 to the Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue the insurance required 4 by BNSF. If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that area is complete, the 5 Engineer may approve the Contractor's request. However, if for any reason the 6 Contractor resumes or starts any new work in that area (including being ordered to 7 do so by the Engineer), the insurance shall be reinstated by the Contractor before 8 the work is started. If the insurance must be reinstated because of the Contractor’s 9 activities or failure of the Contractor to perform all the contract requirements, the 10 costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. If the insurance must be reinstated 11 because of changes to the contract, the costs will be considered in accordance with 12 Section 1-04.4. 13

14 1-07.18(5).OPT8.GR1 15

(August 7, 2006) 16 Contractor’s Right of Entry and Insurance Requirements – UPRR 17 No work shall commence within Union Pacific Railroad right of way until the 18 Contractor has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed 19 Contractor’s Right-of-Entry Agreement from Union Pacific Railroad, and has 20 obtained all of the insurance required by the Railroad. All work within Union Pacific 21 Railroad’s right of way shall be in accordance with the Contractor’s Right of Entry 22 Agreement (See Appendixes). 23 24 The Contractor, its Subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 25 maintain in force all insurance required by Union Pacific Railroad until the 26 completion date of the contract as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated 27 herein. 28 29 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to 30 the railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request to 31 the Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue the insurance required 32 by Union Pacific Railroad. If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that area 33 is complete, the Engineer may approve the Contractor's request. However, if for any 34 reason the Contractor resumes or starts any new work in that area (including being 35 ordered to do so by the Engineer), the insurance shall be reinstated by the 36 Contractor before the work is started. If the insurance must be reinstated because 37 of the Contractors activities or failure of the Contractor to perform all the contract 38 requirements, the costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. If the insurance 39 must be reinstated because of changes to the contract, the costs will be considered 40 in accordance with Section 1-04.4. 41

42 1-07.18.INST1.GR1 43 Item No. 1 of the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 is revised to read: 44 45 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1 46

(January 3, 2011) 47 1. Owners and Contractors Protective (OCP) Insurance providing bodily injury and 48

property damage liability coverage, with limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence and 49 per project in the aggregate for each policy period, written on Insurance Services 50 Office (ISO) form CG0009 1204, together with Washington State Department of 51


Transportation amendatory endorsement CG 2908 1195, specifying the Contracting 1 Agency, the State, the Governor, the Commission, the Secretary, the Department 2 and all officers and employees of the State as named insured. 3

4 1-07.18.OPT2.GR1 5 (January 5, 2004) 6 Item number 1 in the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 is deleted. 7 8 1-07.18.INST2.GR1 9 Item No. 2 of the first paragraph of Section 1-07.18 is revised to read: 10 11 1-07.18.OPT6.GR1 12

(January 3, 2011) 13 2. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance written under ISO Form CG0001 or 14

its equivalent with minimum limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence and in the 15 aggregate for each one year policy period. Products and completed operations 16 coverage shall be provided for a period of three years following Substantial 17 Completion of the work. 18

19 1-07.18.OPT7.FR1 20

(April 1, 2013) 21 2. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance written under ISO Form CG0001 or 22

its equivalent, with minimum limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence and in the 23 aggregate for each 1-year policy period. This coverage may be any combination of 24 primary, umbrella, or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less 25 than *** $$2$$ *** per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and completed 26 operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years following Substantial 27 Completion of the Work. 28

29 1-07.18.INST4.GR1 30 Section 1-07.18 is supplemented with the following: 31 32 1-07.18.OPT11.GR1 33

(January 3, 2011) 34

Builder's Risk Insurance 35 Builder's Risk Insurance providing Broad Perils (All Risk) coverage upon any work at the 36 site, to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the Contractor, its 37 Subcontractors of every tier, and the State of Washington as named insured on the policy. 38 Coverage shall be included for all materials and supplies to be incorporated into the work 39 at the jobsite, while in transit to the jobsite, or while stored away from the jobsite. 40

41 1-07.18.OPT14.FR1 42

(January 7, 2013) 43 The Contractor shall obtain Contractor’s Pollution Liability Insurance (CPL) with minimum 44 “per project” limits of *** $$1$$ *** per occurrence and in the aggregate for claims, 45 including investigation, defense, or settlement costs and expenses for bodily injury and 46 property damage (including natural resources damages and loss of use of tangible 47 property that has not been physically injured) arising out of: 48

49


a. Pollution conditions caused or made worse by the Contractor’s performance of 1 the Work, including clean-up costs for a newly caused condition or a historical 2 condition that is made worse; and; 3

4 b. The vicarious liability of Subcontractors of any tier. 5

6 The Contractor shall be Named Insured and the Contracting Agency, the State, the 7 Governor, the Commission, the Secretary, the Department, all officers and employees of 8 the State, and their respective members, directors, officers, employees, agents, and 9 consultants (collectively the “Additional Insureds”) shall be included as Additional 10 Insureds, or, as appropriate, a Named Insured, under this policy and coverage. 11

12 1-07.18.OPT16.FR1 13


Relations With Railroad 15 The term Railroad Company, as used in these specifications shall be applicable to each 16 of the following railroad companies: 17 18

*** $$1$$ *** 19 20 Protection of Railroad Property 21 The Contractor shall exercise care in all operations and shall, at the Contractor's 22 expense, protect the property of the Railroad Company and the Company’s 23 appurtenances, property in its custody, or persons lawfully upon its right of way, from 24 damage, destruction, interference or injury caused by the Contractor’s operations. 25 The Contractor shall prosecute the work to not interfere with the Railroad Company 26 or its appurtenances, or any of the Railroad Company's trains or facilities, and shall 27 complete the work to a condition that shall not interfere with or menace the integrity 28 or safe and successful operations of the Railroad Company or its appurtenances, or 29 any of the Railroad Company's trains or facilities. 30

31 The Contractor shall not transport equipment, machinery, or materials across the 32 Railroad Company's tracks, except at a public crossing, without the written consent 33 of the Railroad Company. 34 35 The Contractor shall keep the right of way and ditches of the Railroad Company 36 open and clean from any deposits or debris resulting from its operations. The 37 Contractor shall be responsible for the cost to clean and restore ballast of the 38 Railroad Company which is disturbed or becomes fouled with dirt or materials when 39 such deposits or damage result from the Contractor’s operations, except as 40 provided elsewhere. 41

42 The Contractor's work shall be conducted in such a manner that there will be a 43 minimum of interference with the operation of the railroad. For Class 1 Railroads 44 (BNSF and UPRR) the Railroad Company will specify what periods will be available 45 to the Contractor for executing any part of the work in which the Railroad Company's 46 tracks will be obstructed or made unsafe for operation of the railroad. No 47 interference with Class 1 Railroad Company operations will be permitted between 48 October 1 and December 31. The Railroad Company may change these 49 requirements to be more or less restrictive. Requests for extensions of time due to 50


additional Railroad restrictions shall be in accordance with Section 1-08.8. 1 Additional Railroad restrictions will not be eligible for a cost adjustment. 2

3 In the event that an emergency occurs in connection with the work specified, the 4 Railroad Company reserves the right to do any and all work that may be necessary 5 to maintain railroad traffic. If the emergency is caused by the Contractor, the 6 Contractor shall be responsible for all Railroad Company costs associated with the 7 emergency response. 8

9 Protective services to protect the Railroad Company's facilities, property, and 10 movement of its trains or engines, including railroad flagging and other devices, may 11 be required by the Railroad Company as a result of the Contractor's operations. 12 13 The nature and extent of protective services, personnel and other measures 14 required will in all cases be determined by the Railroad Company. Nothing in these 15 specifications will limit the Railroad Company's right to determine and assign the 16 number of personnel, the classes of personnel for protective services, nor other 17 protective measures it deems necessary. 18 19 When, in the opinion of the Railroad Company, the services of flaggers or inspectors 20 are necessary for the protection of the Railroad Company's facilities by reason of 21 the Contractor's operations, the Railroad Company will furnish such flaggers or 22 inspectors as may be required. The Contractor shall notify the Railroad Company 23 a minimum of *** $$2$$ *** in advance of whenever the Contractor is about to 24 perform work within Railroad Company property or within 25 feet of the tracks to 25 enable the Railroad Company to provide flagging or other protective services. 26 27

The Railroad Company’s contact to schedule flagging or other protective 28 services is: 29 30 *** $$3$$ *** 31

32 No act of the Railroad Company in supervising or approving any work shall reduce 33 or in any way affect the liability of the Contractor for damages, expense, or cost 34 which may result to the Railroad Company from the construction of this Contract. 35

36 Unless otherwise provided, all personnel assigned by the Railroad Company, other 37 than those engaged in performing work by the Railroad Company as listed under 38 Construction Work by Railroad Company, will be considered protective personnel. 39 40 In general, the Railroad Company will furnish protective services whenever any of 41 the Contractor's operations take place within or near railroad right of way and, in the 42 opinion of the Railroad Company's representative, could endanger railroad facilities 43 or create a hazard to railroad operations. 44 45 The Railroad Company’s policy for assignment of railroad flaggers requires that the 46 flagging position is established for fixed work days and times. Any railroad flagging 47 performed outside of these parameters may be subject to overtime costs. The 48 Contractor shall verify with the Railroad Company what categories of railroad 49 flagging constitute overtime work, and obtain prior authorization from the Engineer 50


before coordinating with the Railroad Company for flagging requiring overtime 1 payments. 2 3 The Contractor shall submit to the Railroad Company and the Engineer, in writing, 4 an itinerary of work within the Railroad Company’s right of way or otherwise requiring 5 a Railroad Company flagger for the following week. If such work spans multiple 6 weeks, the itinerary shall be provided in advance of each work week. 7 8

There will be no cost to the Contractor for the railroad protective services, unless: 9 10

• Such services result from the Contractor’s failure to comply with the terms 11 and conditions of its contract with the Contracting Agency or with its 12 Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreements with the Railroad Company. 13 14

• The Contractor fails to obtain authorization from the Engineer prior to 15 coordinating with the Railroad Company for any flagging requiring 16 overtime payments. 17 18

• The Contractor arranges for assignment of a railroad flagger and alters 19 Project work so that a flagger is no longer needed, and adequate advance 20 notice is not provided to the Railroad Company of such change in the 21 need for a flagger (i.e. causing the Railroad Company to dispatch a 22 flagger billable to the Project when one is not required). 23

24

• The Contractor causes an emergency, as discussed above. 25 26

Construction Work by Railroad Company 27 The work by the Railroad Company as described below will be performed by the 28 Railroad Company with its own forces at no cost to the Contractor: 29 30

*** $$4$$ *** 31 32 All work which is performed by the Railroad Company at the Contractor's request 33 and which is for the Contractor's benefit or convenience shall be at the Contractor's 34 expense and the Contractor shall reimburse the Railroad Company for all costs for 35 such work. 36 37 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Railroad Company and so conduct 38 operations that the necessary reconstruction of its facilities and the removal of 39 existing facilities can be accomplished without interruption of service. 40

41 Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement 42 For all matters regarding the Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement, the Contractor 43 shall contact: 44 45

*** $$5$$ *** 46 47 No work shall be commenced within the Railroad Company’s Property until the 48 Contractor has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed 49 Contractor’s Right-of-Entry Agreement from the Railroad Company, and has 50


obtained all of the insurance required by the Railroad Company as specified therein. 1 All work within the Railroad Company’s right of way or within 25 feet of a public 2 railroad grade crossing shall be in accordance with Railroad’s Contractor 3 Requirements and the Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement. The Contracting 4 Agency has furnished a draft Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement in Appendix *** 5 $$6$$ ***. The draft Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement represents the 6 Contracting Agency’s assessment of the likely terms and conditions prior to 7 Advertisement for Bids. The final terms and conditions will be determined by the 8 Railroad Company after Contract Execution. 9 10 The Contractor, it subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 11 maintain in force all insurance required by Railroad until the completion date of the 12 contract as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated herein. 13 14 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to 15 the railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request to 16 the Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue all or part of the 17 insurance specified above. If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that 18 area is complete, the Engineer may approve the Contractor's request. However, if 19 for any reason the Contractor resumes or starts any new work in that area (including 20 being ordered to do so by the Engineer), the insurance shall be reinstated by the 21 Contractor before the work is started. If the insurance must be reinstated because 22 of the Contractor's operations or failure of the Contractor to perform all the contract 23 requirements, the costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. If the insurance 24 must be reinstated because of changes to the contract, the costs will be considered 25 in accordance with Section 1-04.4. 26 27 Submittals and Working Drawings 28 Unless specified elsewhere in the Contract, all submittals and Working Drawings 29 prepared by the Contractor for review by the Railroad Company shall be Type 3 or 30 3E Working Drawings. The Contractor shall submit Working Drawings to the Project 31 Engineer. The Contracting Agency will coordinate Working Drawing review with the 32 Railroad Company. The Contractor shall develop a progress schedule that includes 33 Working Drawing reviews by the Railroad Company. 34

35 1-07.18.OPT17.GR1 36

(August 7, 2006) 37

Contractor’s Right of Entry and Insurance Requirements - BNSF 38 No work shall commence within BNSF Railway Company (BNSF) right of way until the 39 Contractor has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed 40 Contractor’s Right-of-Entry Agreement from BNSF, and has obtained all of the insurance 41 required by the Railroad. All work within BNSF’s right of way shall be in accordance with 42 BNSF’s Contractor Requirements and the Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement (See 43 Appendices). 44 45 The Contractor, its Subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 46 maintain in force all insurance required by BNSF until the completion date of the contract 47 as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated herein. 48 49 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to the 50 Railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request to the 51


Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue the insurance required by BNSF. 1 If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that area is complete, the Engineer may 2 approve the Contractor's request. However, if for any reason the Contractor resumes or 3 starts any new work in that area (including being ordered to do so by the Engineer), the 4 insurance shall be reinstated by the Contractor before the work is started. If the 5 insurance must be reinstated because of the Contractor’s activities or failure of the 6 Contractor to perform all the contract requirements, the costs shall be the responsibility 7 of the Contractor. If the insurance must be reinstated because of changes to the contract, 8 the costs will be considered in accordance with Section 1-04.4. 9

10 1-07.18.OPT18.GR1 11

(August 7, 2006) 12

Contractor’s Right of Entry and Insurance Requirements - UPRR 13 No work shall commence within Union Pacific Railroad right of way until the Contractor 14 has executed, delivered, and received in return the fully executed Contractor’s Right-of-15 Entry Agreement from Union Pacific Railroad, and has obtained all of the insurance 16 required by the Railroad. All work within Union Pacific Railroad’s right of way shall be in 17 accordance with the Contractor’s Right of Entry Agreement (See Appendixes). 18 19 The Contractor, its Subcontractors or agents, shall at its own expense, obtain and 20 maintain in force all insurance required by Union Pacific Railroad until the completion 21 date of the contract as described in Section 1-08.5 except as stated herein. 22 23 When all the work involving construction activities within or immediately adjacent to the 24 railroad right of way is completed, the Contractor may make a written request to the 25 Engineer to be relieved of the responsibility to continue the insurance required by Union 26 Pacific Railroad. If the Engineer deems the portion of the work in that area is complete, 27 the Engineer may approve the Contractor's request. However, if for any reason the 28 Contractor resumes or starts any new work in that area (including being ordered to do 29 so by the Engineer), the insurance shall be reinstated by the Contractor before the work 30 is started. If the insurance must be reinstated because of the Contractors activities or 31 failure of the Contractor to perform all the contract requirements, the costs shall be the 32 responsibility of the Contractor. If the insurance must be reinstated because of changes 33 to the contract, the costs will be considered in accordance with Section 1-04.4. 34

35 1-07.23.GR1 36

Public Convenience and Safety 37 38 1-07.23(1).GR1 39

Construction Under Traffic 40 41 1-07.23(1).INST1.GR1 42

Section 1-07.23(1) is supplemented with the following: 43 44 1-07.23(1).OPT1.FB1 45

(March 13, 1995) 46 During the hours that cleaning and painting operations are actually in progress, 47 traffic may be restricted as follows: 48 49

*** $$1$$ *** 50


1 Whenever the Contractor's operations require lane reductions restricting the flow of 2 traffic on multiple lanes in the same direction, the Contractor shall furnish, maintain, 3 and operate a sequential arrow sign, for each lane closure, as specified in the 4 Special Provision SEQUENTIAL ARROW SIGN. 5 6 If the Engineer determines that such lane restrictions are causing traffic congestion, 7 the Contractor shall open all lanes to traffic until the congestion is eliminated. 8 9 For movable span structures, the Contractor's operations shall be arranged to permit 10 the opening of the moveable span whenever required by marine traffic. 11 12 Bridge sidewalks shall be kept clear and open to maintain safe pedestrian traffic. 13

14 1-07.23(1).OPT2.GR1 15

(February 3, 2020) 16 Work Zone Clear Zone 17 The Work Zone Clear Zone (WZCZ) applies during working and nonworking 18 hours. The WZCZ applies only to temporary roadside objects introduced by the 19 Contractor’s operations and does not apply to preexisting conditions or 20 permanent Work. Those work operations that are actively in progress shall be 21 in accordance with adopted and approved Traffic Control Plans, and other 22 contract requirements. 23 24 During nonworking hours equipment or materials shall not be within the WZCZ 25 unless they are protected by permanent guardrail or temporary concrete barrier. 26 The use of temporary concrete barrier shall be permitted only if the Engineer 27 approves the installation and location. 28 29 During actual hours of work, unless protected as described above, only 30 materials absolutely necessary to construction shall be within the WZCZ and 31 only construction vehicles absolutely necessary to construction shall be allowed 32 within the WZCZ or allowed to stop or park on the shoulder of the roadway. 33 34 The Contractor's nonessential vehicles and employees private vehicles shall 35 not be permitted to park within the WZCZ at any time unless protected as 36 described above. 37 38 Deviation from the above requirements shall not occur unless the Contractor 39 has requested the deviation in writing and the Engineer has provided written 40 approval. 41 42 Minimum WZCZ distances are measured from the edge of traveled way and 43 will be determined as follows: 44

45


Regulatory Posted Speed

Distance From Traveled Way

(Feet)

35 mph or less 10

40 mph 15

45 to 50 mph 20

55 to 60 mph 30

65 mph or greater 35

1 Minimum Work Zone Clear Zone Distance 2

3 1-07.23(1).OPT4.GR1 4

(December 6, 2004) 5 The portion of Section 1-07.16(1) that prohibits the merging of construction vehicles 6 with public traffic from an access gained through adjacent properties is rescinded, 7 provided the Contractor’s submittal is approved as required below. 8

9 Access for Construction 10 The Contractor may enter and leave the traveled way, auxiliary lanes or 11 shoulders at approved locations other than established legal movements. To 12 obtain approval of such an access location, the Contractor shall submit a 13 request to the Engineer. The Contractor’s request shall be submitted to the 14 Engineer at least 30 calendar days prior to the time the use of the access will 15 be required. This submittal shall include a vicinity map indicating the interstate 16 stationing at the centerline of the access, distances from the end of ramp tapers 17 of existing interchanges and a traffic control plan conforming with the 18 requirements specified in Section 1-10.2(2). The access shall meet the 19 following requirements: 20

21

• Access to and from the worksite adjacent to a multi-lane facility will 22 only be allowed to and from a closed lane. 23

24

• The merging point of construction vehicles and public traffic shall 25 provide a Decision Sight Distance for the traveling public of 1,640 ft 26 in urban areas and 1,360 ft in rural areas. 27

28

• In urban areas the access shall not be located within 3,280 ft of the 29 end of a ramp taper, or the centerline of a road approach. In rural 30 areas the access shall not be located within 2,720 ft of the end of a 31 ramp taper or the centerline of a road approach. 32

33

• Median crossings within 1.5 miles of the access point shall not be 34 used in conjunction with the access. 35

36

• No new median crossings shall be created for use in conjunction 37 within 1.5 miles of the access point. 38

39

• Short-duration shoulder stops in the construction zone, utilizing light 40 vehicles properly equipped with warning flashers, will be allowed 41 without a lane closure. 42


1

• When in use the access location shall have traffic control in place as 2 per Section 1-10. Unauthorized use of the access from adjacent 3 property is to be prohibited by the use of signing and/or flaggers as 4 conditions warrant. 5

6

• The continuity of the existing drainage system shall be maintained 7 through the access site. 8

9

• Air borne particulates created as a result of using the access shall be 10 effectively controlled. 11

12

• The access location shall not adversely affect wetlands or other 13 sensitive areas. 14

15 At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall restore the area of the access 16 site to its original, pre-contract, condition. Any damage to the traveled way, 17 shoulders, auxiliary lanes, side slopes or other items caused by the access shall be 18 repaired. All work to comply with this provision or to build, maintain, provide erosion 19 control, control airborne particulates, ensure that drainage continues through the 20 access site, provide traffic control when necessary, remove the temporary access 21 and restore the surrounding area when no longer required for use are the 22 responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall include all related costs in the 23 bid prices of the contract. 24

25 1-07.23(1).OPT5.FR1 26

(January 5, 2015) 27 Lane closures are subject to the following restrictions: 28 29

*** $$1$$ *** 30 31 If the Engineer determines the permitted closure hours adversely affect traffic, the 32 Engineer may adjust the hours accordingly. The Engineer will notify the Contractor 33 in writing of any change in the closure hours. 34 35 Lane closures are not allowed on any of the following: 36 37

1. A holiday, 38 39 2. A holiday weekend; holidays that occur on Friday, Saturday, Sunday or 40

Monday are considered a holiday weekend. A holiday weekend includes 41 Saturday, Sunday, and the holiday. 42

43 3. After *** $$2$$ *** on the day prior to a holiday or holiday weekend, and 44

45 4. Before *** $$3$$ *** on the day after the holiday or holiday weekend. 46

47 1-07.23(1).OPT6.GR1 48

(April 14, 2014) 49


Physical reductions of the width of thru travelling lanes are subject to the following 1 restrictions: 2 3

The Contractor shall not reduce the travelled way to a single lane with a clear 4 width of less than 16 feet for a duration that exceeds 4 calendar days without 5 prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a request for a width 6 reduction that exceeds 4 calendar days to the Engineer no later than 30 7 calendar days prior to the start of the proposed width reduction. At a minimum, 8 this request shall include: 9 10

1. Schedule showing the planned beginning date and end date of the 11 width reduction. 12

2. Plans showing the limits and cross-sections showing the clear 13 distance provided during the width reduction. 14

3. Details of available detour routes. 15 4. Plan to provide temporary windows of a minimum 16 foot width 16

periodically during the width reduction, where possible. 17 18

The Engineer will reply, in writing, to the request within 7 calendar days. The 19 Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer if there are any changes to the 20 schedule for the width reduction. 21

22 1-07.23(1).INST2.GR1 23

The last paragraph of Section 1-07.23(1) is revised to read: 24 25 1-07.23(1).OPT7.GR1 26

(September 30, 2020) 27 The Contractor shall conduct all operations to minimize any drop-offs (abrupt 28 changes in roadway elevation) left exposed to traffic during nonworking hours. 29 Unless otherwise specified in the Traffic Control Plan, drop-offs left exposed to traffic 30 during nonworking hours shall be protected as follows with an accepted traffic 31 control plan submittal in accordance with Section 1-10.2(2): 32 33

1. Drop-offs up to 0.20 foot, unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, may 34 remain exposed with appropriate warning signs alerting motorists of the 35 condition. 36

37 2. Drop-offs more than 0.20 foot that are in the Traveled Way or Auxiliary Lane 38

will not be allowed unless protected with appropriate warning signs and 39 further protected as indicated in 3b or 3c below. 40

41 3. Drop-offs more than 0.20 foot, but no more than 0.50 foot, that are not 42

within the Traveled Way shall be protected with appropriate warning signs 43 and further protected by having one of the following: 44

45 a. A wedge of compacted stable material placed at a slope of 4:1 or 46

flatter. 47 48 b. Channelizing devices (Type I barricades, plastic safety drums, or 49

other devices 36 inches or more in height) placed along the traffic 50 side of the drop-off and a new edge of pavement stripes placed a 51


minimum of 3 feet from the drop-off. The maximum spacing between 1 the devices in feet shall be the posted speed in miles per hour. 2 Pavement drop-off warning signs shall be placed in advance and 3 throughout the drop-off treatment. 4

5 c. A temporary concrete barrier, temporary steel barrier, or other 6

approved traffic barrier installed on the traffic side of a drop-off with a 7 new edge line placed a minimum of 2-feet from the traffic face of the 8 barrier. The barrier shall have a lateral offset from the edge of the 9 drop-off to the back of the barrier as follows: 10

11 i. A minimum offset of 3-feet for temporary Type F or Type 2 12

concrete barrier when not anchored. 13 14 ii. A minimum offset of 1-foot for temporary Type F or Type 2 15

concrete barrier when anchored on hot mix asphalt pavement as 16 shown on WSDOT Standard Plans C-60.10 or K-80.35. 17

18 iii. A minimum offset of 1-foot for temporary Type F concrete barrier 19

when anchored on cement concrete pavement as shown on 20 WSDOT Standard Plan C-60.10. 21

22 iv. A minimum offset of 9-inches for temporary Type F or Type 2 23

concrete barrier when anchored on cement concrete pavement 24 and/or concrete bridge decks as shown on WSDOT Standard 25 Plan K-80.35. 26

27 v. A minimum offset of 6-inches or 9-inches for temporary Type F or 28

Type 2 narrow base concrete barrier when anchored on cement 29 concrete pavement and concrete bridge decks as shown on 30 WSDOT Standard Plan K-80.37. 31

32 vi. A minimum offset following manufacturer recommendations for 33

temporary steel barrier when not anchored; or when anchored on 34 hot mix asphalt pavement, cement concrete pavement, or 35 concrete bridge decks. 36

37 vii. A minimum offset as directed by the Engineer for any barrier type 38

or configuration not shown in this Section. 39 40 An approved terminal, flare, or impact attenuator is required at the 41 approach end of the barrier run, and is required at the trailing end of a 42 barrier run in two-way operations when shown in the plans or as 43 directed by the Engineer. 44 45

4. Drop-offs more than 0.50 foot not within the Traveled Way or Auxiliary Lane 46 shall be protected with appropriate warning signs and further protected as 47 indicated in 3a, 3b, or 3c if all of the following conditions are met: 48 49 a. The drop-off is less than 2 feet; 50 51


b. The total length throughout the project is less than 1 mile; 1 2 c. The drop-off does not remain for more than 3 working days; 3 4 d. The drop-off is not present on any of the holidays listed in Section 1-5

08.5; and 6 7 e. The drop-off is only on one side of the Roadway. 8

9 5. Drop-offs more than 0.50 foot that are not within the Traveled Way or 10

Auxiliary Lane and are not otherwise covered by No. 4 above shall be 11 protected with appropriate warning signs and further protected as indicated 12 in 3a or 3c. 13

14 6. Open trenches within the Traveled Way or Auxiliary Lane shall have a 15

steel-plate cover placed and anchored over them. A wedge of suitable 16 material, if required, shall be placed for a smooth transition between the 17 pavement and the steel plate. Warning signs shall be used to alert 18 motorists of the presence of the steel plates. 19

20 1-07.24.GR1 21

Rights of Way 22 23 1-07.24.INST1.GR1 24 Section 1-07.24 is supplemented with the following: 25 26 1-07.24.OPT1.FR1 27

(March 13, 1995) 28 The Contracting Agency has not completed the acquisition of title to the following 29 described property: 30 31

*** $$1$$ *** 32 33

The Contractor shall not perform any work within these limits until ordered to do so by 34 the Engineer. The Contracting Agency has estimated that the above described property 35 will be available *** $$2$$ ***. 36

37

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


1-08.GR1 1

Prosecution and Progress 2 3 1-08.1.GR1 4

Subcontracting 5 6 1-08.1.INST1.GR1 7 Section 1-08.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 1-08.1.OPT1.GR1 10

(June 3, 2019) 11 Prior to any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor beginning work, the Contractor shall 12 submit to the Engineer a certification (WSDOT Form 420-004) that a written agreement 13 between the Contractor and the subcontractor or between the subcontractor and any 14 lower tier subcontractor has been executed. This certification shall also guarantee that 15 these subcontract agreements include all the documents required by the Special 16 Provision Federal Agency Inspection. 17 18 A Subcontractor or lower tier Subcontractor will not be permitted to perform any work 19 under the contract until the following documents have been completed and submitted to 20 the Engineer: 21 22

1. Request to Sublet Work (WSDOT Form 421-012), and 23 2. Contractor and Subcontractor or Lower Tier Subcontractor Certification for 24

Federal-aid Projects (WSDOT Form 420-004). 25 26

The Contractor shall submit a completed Monthly Retainage Report (WSDOT Form 272-27 065) within 15 calendar days after receipt of every monthly progress payment until every 28 Subcontractor and lower tier Subcontractor’s retainage has been released. This form 29 shall be submitted to the Engineer by email to the following email address for the region 30 administering the Contract: 31 32


40 The Contractor's records pertaining to the requirements of this Special Provision shall be 41 open to inspection or audit by representatives of the Contracting Agency during the life of 42 the contract and for a period of not less than three years after the date of acceptance of 43 the contract. The Contractor shall retain these records for that period. The Contractor 44 shall also guarantee that these records of all Subcontractors and lower tier 45 Subcontractors shall be available and open to similar inspection or audit for the same 46 time period. 47

48









1-08.1.OPT2.FR1 1

(March 13, 1995) 2

Specialty Items 3 For the purpose of determining the percentage of work that may be subcontracted, the 4 following items on this contract are designated as Specialty Items: 5 6

*** $$1$$ *** 7 8 1-08.1.OPT3.GR1 9

(March 13, 1995) 10

Qualifications of Building Contractor 11 If the Contractor is not prequalified for building construction or cannot demonstrate 12 satisfactory experience in constructing the general type of building included in the project, 13 it will be mandatory that the building work be subcontracted to a firm which can meet one 14 or both of these criteria. 15

16 1-08.3.GR1 17

Progress Schedule 18 19 1-08.3(1).GR1 20

General Requirements 21 22 1-08.3(1).INST1.GR1 23

The first sentence of Section 1-08.3(1) is revised to read: 24 25 1-08.3(1).OPT1.GR1 26

(August 6, 2006) 27 The Contractor shall submit Type C Progress Schedules and Schedule Updates to 28 the Engineer for approval. 29

30 1-08.3(2).GR1 31

Progress Schedule Types 32 33 1-08.3(2).INST2.GR1 34


(August 1, 2011) 38 Type A Progress Schedules are required on all projects that do not contain the bid 39 item for Type B or Type C Progress Schedules. Type B or Type C Progress Schedules 40 are required on all projects that contain the bid item for Type B or Type C Progress 41 Schedule. Weekly Look-Ahead Schedules and Schedule Updates are required on all 42 projects. 43

44 1-08.3(2).INST3.GR1 45



1-08.3(2).OPT2.GR1FR1 1 (August 1, 2016September 7, 2021) 2 Type C Progress Schedule 3 Type C progress schedules shall conform to all of the requirements of Section 4 1-08.3(2)B and this Section. 5 6 The Contractor shall submit a printed an electronic copy of a preliminary Type C 7 progress schedule no later than the first working day as defined in Section 1-8 08.5. The preliminary schedule shall comply with all of these the requirements 9 of this special provision and the requirements of Section 1-08.3(1), except that 10 it may be limited to only those activities occurring within the first 60 working days 11 of the project. 12 13 The Contractor shall submit a printed copy of a the Type C progress schedule 14 for all Work no later than 60 calendar days after the date the contract is 15 executed. 16 17 Each time that a preliminary schedule, progress schedule, or schedule update 18 is submitted, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with an electronic copy 19 (.XER or .XML file type extension) of that schedule. Each submitted progress 20 and update schedule shall have a unique file name and date identifier. 21 Regardless of the type of software used, the schedule data provided to the 22 Engineer shall be saved on a CD-ROM in submitted to the Engineer in a 23 compatible format of Primavera Project Manager Enterprise Version, P6 7.0 24 compatible format. 25 26 The current version of Primavera Project Manager Enterprise P6 is *** $$1$$ 27 ***. 28 29 Type C progress schedules shall display at least the following additional 30 information: 31

32 1. A time scaled logic diagram. 33 2. Activities for traffic detours and closures. 34 3. Milestones for required delivery of State furnished materials, if any. 35 4. Activities for State furnished traffic control resources, if any. 36 5. Activities for fabrication of materials longer than 90 calendar days 37

lead time. 38 6. Fixed constraints shall be identified on the activity listing, 39

supplemented with a written narrative describing why the constraint 40 exists. 41

7. Milestones for interim or stage completion dates. 42 8. Activities for scheduled outages on illumination systems, ITS 43

systems, traffic signal systems and other electrical service outages. 44 9. Nighttime activities shall be so coded. 45 10. Activities for all submittals requiring State review, including the 46

allowable review duration. 47 48 All calendars used shall be created as project calendars, not global or resource 49 calendars. If multiple calendars are applied to the progress schedule, the 50 Contractor shall submit a written narrative describing each one’s purpose. 51


1 Schedule files shall not contain User Defined Fields (UDF’s), all activity codes 2 shall be project level, no resources shall be assigned to activities and no project 3 codes shall be assigned. 4 5 If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supplement the progress 6 schedule with written explanations for each lead and lag time used, and a written 7 explanation describing the assumed production rates and planned resource 8 allocations to support the activity durations provided in the schedule. The written 9 explanations shall be documented as a notebook topic under “Assumptions and 10 Basis”. 11

12 1-08.3(3).GR1 13

Schedule Updates 14 15 1-08.3(3).INST1.GR1 16


(January 2, 2012) 20 The Contractor shall submit a printed copy of a Type C Schedule Update to the 21 Engineer by the first business day of each month, starting the month after the 22 Progress Schedule is accepted, or some other mutually agreed upon submittal time. 23 24 In addition to the other requirements of this Section, Schedule Updates shall reflect 25 at least the following information: 26 27

1. The actual duration and sequence of as-constructed work activities, 28 including changed work. 29

30 2. Approved time extensions. 31 32 3. Any construction delays or other conditions that affect the progress of the 33

work. 34 35 4. Any modifications to the as-planned sequence or duration of remaining 36

activities, supplemented with a written narrative describing each change 37 and the reason for the change. 38

39 5. The physical completion of all remaining work in the remaining contract 40

time. 41 42 6. Progress on partially completed activities shall be indicated using percent 43

complete. 44 45

Activity numbers on Schedule Updates shall be the same as the Progress Schedule, 46 with the exception of deleted or added activities. 47

48 Unresolved requests for time extensions shall be reflected in the Schedule Update 49 by assuming no time extension will be granted, and by showing the effects to follow-50


on activities necessary to physically complete the project within the currently 1 authorized time for completion. 2

3 1-08.3(4).GR1 4

Measurement 5 6 1-08.3(4).INST1.GR1 7

Section 1-08.3(4) is revised to read supplemented with the following: 8 9 1-08.3(4).OPT1.GR1 10

(August 5, 2013) 11 Schedule Updates will be measured per each for each update submitted and 12 approved per the requirements of Section 1-08.3(3). Schedule updates that are 13 returned for correction will not be measured. 14

15 1-08.3(5).GR1 16

Payment 17 18 1-08.3(5).INST1.GR1 19

Section 1-08.3(5) is revised to read supplemented with the following: 20 21 1-08.3(5).OPT1.FR1GR1 22

(January 7, 2019September 7, 2021) 23 Payment will be made for the following bid item when it is included in the proposal: 24

25 “Min Bid Req -– “Schedule Update” *** $$1$$ ***”, per each. 26 The unit Contract price per each “Min Bid Req -– “Schedule Update” *** $$2$$ 27 ***” shall be full payment for all costs required to complete the work specified in 28 Section 1-08.3(3). 29 30 All costs for providing Weekly Look-Ahead Schedules are to be included with 31 other bid items. 32

33 1-08.3(5).OPT2.FR1GR1 34

(January 7, 2019September 7, 2021) 35 Payment will be made for the following Bid item when it is included in the Proposal: 36 37

“Min Bid Req – Type *** $$1$$ *** Progress Schedule *** $$2$$ ***”“Type C 38 Progress Schedule”, lump sum. 39

40 The lump sum price shall be full pay for all costs for furnishing the Type *** $$3$$ *** 41 C Progress Schedule and preliminary Type *** $$4$$ *** C Progress Schedule. 42 43 Payment of 80 percent of the lump sum price will be made upon approval of the 44 Progress Schedule. 45 46 Payment will be increased to 100 percent of the lump sum price upon completion of 47 80 percent of the original total Contract Award amount. 48 49 All costs for providing Type A Progress Schedules and Weekly Look-Ahead 50 Schedules are considered incidental to other items of Work in the Contract. 51


1 No payment will be made for Schedule Updates that are required due to the 2 Contractor’s operations. Schedule Updates required by events that are attributed to 3 the actions of the Contracting Agency will be paid for in accordance with Section 1-4 09.4. 5

6 1-08.4.GR1 7

Prosecution of Work 8 9 1-08.4.INST1.GR1 10 The first sentence of Section 1-08.4 is revised to read: 11 12 1-08.4.OPT1.FR1 13

(August 3, 2015) 14 The Contractor shall commence onsite work on or before *** $$1$$ *** and shall notify 15 the Engineer in writing a minimum of 10 calendar days in advance of the date on which 16 the Contractor intends to begin work. 17

18 1-08.4.OPT2.GR1 19

(August 7, 2006) 20 The Contractor shall begin work no earlier than the begin work date stated in the written 21 notice provided by the Engineer. The Engineer will provide a minimum of 10 calendar 22 days written notice for the date identified as the first working day. 23

24 1-08.4.OPT3.FR1 25

(August 7, 2006) 26 The Contractor shall begin work no earlier than *** $$1$$ ***. 27

28 1-08.5.GR1 29

Time for Completion 30 31 1-08.5.INST1.GR1 32 The third paragraph of Section 1-08.5 is revised to read: 33 34 1-08.5.OPT1.FR1 35

(August 7, 2006) 36 Contract time shall begin on the date stated in the written notice provided to the 37 Contractor. In no case shall the beginning of contract time be prior to ***$$1$$*** or later 38 than *** $$2$$ ***. 39

40 1-08.5.OPT2.FR1 41

(August 7, 2006) 42 Contract time shall begin on the first working day. The first working day shall be *** $$1$$ 43 ***. 44

45 1-08.5.INST2.GR1 46 Section 1-08.5 is supplemented with the following: 47 48 1-08.5.OPT7.FR1 49

(March 13, 1995) 50 This project shall be physically completed within *** $$1$$ *** working days. 51


1 1-08.5.OPT8.FR1 2

(March 13, 1995) 3 This project shall be physically completed in its entirety within *** $$1$$ *** working days 4 and the temporary traffic signal portion of the project shall be physically completed within 5 the first *** $$2$$ *** working days. 6

7 8 1-08.5.OPT9.FR1 9

(December 4, 2006) 10 This project shall be physically completed within *** $$1$$ *** working days. 11 12 Contract time shall begin on the first working day the Contractor starts onsite work or *** 13 $$2$$ ***, whichever occurs first. 14

15 1-08.5.OPT10.FR1 16

(March 13, 1995) 17 This project shall be physically completed within *** $$1$$ *** working days. Contract 18 time shall commence on the first working day: 19 20

1. Following 60 calendar days after contract execution; or, 21 22 2. That the Engineer and the Contractor agree to start work after approval of 23

construction materials is obtained, whichever occurs first. 24 25

The Contractor is allowed a maximum of 60 calendar days after execution of the contract 26 to obtain approvals for construction materials 27

28 1-08.5.OPT11.FR1 29

(August 4, 2003) 30

Incentive for Early Completion 31 It is essential that the Contracting Agency has full and unrestricted use of the facilities at 32 the earliest possible time. As an incentive to the Contractor, the Contracting Agency will 33 pay the Contractor *** $$1$$ *** for each working day remaining in the contract prior to 34 the established *** $$2$$ *** completion date, but not to exceed an amount equal to *** 35 $$3$$ ***. 36 37 The days eligible for the incentive will be calculated by subtracting the working days 38 elapsed through the date of *** $$4$$ *** completion from the total working days 39 established in the Special Provision TIME FOR COMPLETION. 40

41 1-08.6.GR1 42

Suspension of Work 43 44 1-08.6.INST1.GR1 45 Section 1-08.6 is supplemented with the following: 46 47 1-08.6.OPT1.FR1 48

(January 3, 2017) 49 Contract time may be suspended for the HMA mix design evaluation report or for 50 procurement of critical materials (Procurement Suspension). In order to receive a 51


Procurement Suspension, the Contractor shall within 21 calendar days after execution by 1 the Contracting Agency, submit all HMA mix designs not already on the QPL according to 2 Section 5-04.2(1) or place purchase orders for all materials deemed critical by the 3 Contracting Agency for Physical Completion of the Contract. The Contractor shall provide 4 a copy of the completed WSDOT Form 350-042 indicating the date the mix design was 5 submitted, or copies of purchase orders for the critical materials. Such purchase orders 6 shall disclose the purchase order date and estimated delivery dates for such critical 7 material. 8 9 The Contractor shall show the HMA mix design evaluation report or procurement of the 10 critical materials listed below as activities in the Progress Schedule. If the approved 11 Progress Schedule indicates that acceptance of the HMA mix designs or materials 12 procurement are critical activities, and if the Contractor has provided documentation that 13 purchase orders are placed for the critical materials within the prescribed 21 calendar 14 days, then Contract time will be suspended upon Physical Completion of all critical work 15 except that work dependent upon the below listed critical materials: 16 17

*** $$1$$ *** 18 19 Charging of Contract time will resume upon the Contractor’s receipt of a WSDOT mix 20 design evaluation report or delivery of the critical materials to the Contractor, notification 21 that the critical materials are ready for delivery to the Contractor from the Contracting 22 Agency’s Materials Laboratory, or *** $$2$$ *** calendar days after execution by the 23 Contracting Agency, whichever occurs first. 24 25 No additional Procurement Suspension will be provided if the Contractor’s HMA mix 26 designs did not meet Contract requirements and are resubmitted. 27

28 1-08.6.OPT2.FR1 29

(January 2, 2018) 30 Contract time may be suspended for procurement of critical materials (Procurement 31 Suspension). In order to receive a Procurement Suspension, the Contractor shall within 32 21 calendar days after execution by the Contracting Agency, place purchase orders for 33 all materials deemed critical by the Contracting Agency for physical completion of the 34 contract. The Contractor shall provide copies of purchase orders for the critical materials. 35 Such purchase orders shall disclose the purchase order date and estimated delivery 36 dates for such critical material. 37 38 The Contractor shall show procurement of the materials listed below as activities in the 39 Progress Schedule. If the approved Progress Schedule indicates that the materials 40 procurement are critical activities, and if the Contractor has provided documentation that 41 purchase orders are placed for the critical materials within the prescribed 21 calendar 42 days, then contract time will be suspended upon physical completion of all critical work 43 except that work dependent upon the below listed critical materials: 44 45

*** $$1$$ *** 46 47 Charging of contract time will resume upon delivery of the critical materials to the 48 Contractor or 120 calendar days after execution by the Contracting Agency, whichever 49 occurs first. 50

51


1-08.9.GR1 1

Liquidated Damages 2 3 1-08.9.INST2.GR1 4 Section 1-08.9 is revised to read: 5 6 1-08.9.OPT1.FR1 7

(March 13, 1995) 8 Liquidated damages in the amount of *** $$1$$ *** per working day will be assessed for 9 failure to physically complete the temporary traffic signal portion of the contract within the 10 physical completion time specified. Liquidated damages in an amount based upon the 11 original contract amount and original time, will be assessed for failure to physically 12 complete the entire project within the physical completion time specified. Such damages 13 will accrue separately for each phase or stage of work. In the event damages occur on a 14 concurrent date, the larger of the two damages will apply for such days. 15

16 1-08.9.OPT2.FR1 17

(April 6, 2009) 18 Delayed completion of *** $$1$$ *** will result in impacts to the traveling public, increase 19 fuel consumption, increase vehicle operating costs, increase pollution, and cause other 20 inconveniences and harm. 21 22 Accordingly, the Contractor agrees: 23 24

1. To pay *** $$2$$ *** liquidated damages per *** $$3$$ *** for each *** $$4$$ *** 25 prorated to the nearest *** $$5$$ *** that the work is not completed as specified 26 in *** $$6$$ ***. 27

28 2. To authorize the Engineer to deduct these liquidated damages from any money 29

due or coming due the Contractor. 30 31 1-08.9.INST3.GR1 32 Section 1-08.9 is supplemented with the following: 33 34 1-08.9.OPT3.FR1 35

(September 8, 2020) 36 Liquidated damages in the amount of *** $$1$$ *** per working day will be assessed for 37 failure to physically complete the Contract within the physical completion time specified. 38

39

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


1-09.GR1 1

Measurement and Payment 2 3 1-09.2.GR1 4

Weighing Equipment 5 6 1-09.2(1).GR1 7

General Requirements for Weighing Equipment 8 9 1-09.2(1).INST1.GR1 10

Section 1-09.2(1) is revised to read as follows: 11 12 1-09.2(1).OPT1.GR1 13

(January 3, 2011) 14 Unless otherwise specified any highway or bridge construction materials to be 15 proportioned or measured and paid for by weight, shall be weighed on scales. The 16 Contractor shall provide, set up, operate and maintain the scales necessary to 17 perform the weighing or shall designate permanently installed, certified commercial 18 scales for the purpose. Each truck to be weighed shall bear a unique identification 19 number. This number shall be legible and in plain view of both the scale operator and 20 the person receiving the material at the jobsite. 21 22 Scales provided or designated by the Contractor shall be accurate to within one-half 23 of one percent of the correct weight throughout the range of use. If platform scales 24 are used, each platform scale shall be able to weigh the entire hauling vehicle or 25 combination of connected vehicles at one time. No part of the vehicle or vehicle 26 combination will be permitted off the platform as it is weighed. 27 28 An agent of the scale manufacturer shall test and service any scale before its use at 29 each new site and then at 6-month intervals. The Contractor shall provide the 30 Engineer a copy of the final results after each test. 31 32 All initial weighing at the dispatch site or at another site approved by the Engineer 33 shall be performed by a Contractor employee or by another person designated by 34 the Contractor. The designated weigher shall prepare a weigh or load ticket to 35 accompany each load. Each ticket shall contain the truck identification number, the 36 date and time of weighing the load, a description of the material being weighed and 37 the signature or initials of the weigher. 38 39 Each weigh or load ticket shall also contain a determination of the net weight of the 40 load. This shall be a reading from any device which weighs as material is loaded or 41 a calculation including gross weight and tare weight when the method of loading does 42 not include weighing. It shall also identify the weighed material. When used, tare 43 weights shall be taken of each hauling vehicle at least once each day. The ticket 44 shall be provided to the inspector at the jobsite immediately after the material is 45 delivered. A record of each day’s tare weights shall be furnished to the Engineer daily 46 using Form 422-027 EF, or on an alternate form approved by the Engineer. 47 48 The vehicle operator shall deliver the ticket to the material receiver at the material 49 delivery point. The material delivery point is defined as the location where the 50 material is incorporated into the permanent work. 51


1 Except as noted below, all weighing shall be subject to confirmation testing through 2 random checks made with a second, separate scale. The secondary scale shall be 3 described in the contract provisions, either as a designated independent commercial 4 scale or as a platform scale installed by the Contractor at a location named in the 5 provisions. The inspector will select loaded trucks at random and weigh them with 6 the secondary scale. The same trucks will be weighed empty when the tested load 7 has been delivered. 8 9 The frequency of confirmation testing will be such that at least one test weekly is 10 performed for each weighed contract item of work being performed during that week. 11 Confirmation testing will not be routinely conducted for small quantities of weighed 12 material. A small quantity shall be defined as one who’s estimated proposal quantity, 13 multiplied by its unit price, has a value of less than $20,000. The inspector may 14 choose to apply confirmation testing to a minor quantity item if, in the inspector’s 15 judgment, there is reason to suspect that the ticket weight might be incorrect. 16

17 1-09.2(1).OPT2.GR1 18

(January 13, 2021) 19 Unless specified otherwise, any Highway or Bridge construction materials to be 20 proportioned or measured and paid for by weight shall be weighed on a scale. 21 22 Scales – Scales shall: 23 24

1. Be accurate to within 0.5 percent of the correct weight throughout the range 25 of use; 26

27 2. Not include spring balances; 28 29 3. Include beams, dials, or other reliable readout equipment; 30 31 4. Be built to prevent scale parts from binding, vibrating, or being displaced 32

and to protect all working parts from falling material, wind, and weather; and 33 34 5. Be carefully maintained, with bunkers and platforms kept clear of 35

accumulated materials that could cause errors and with knife edges given 36 extra care and protection. 37

38 Scale Operations – “Contractor-provided scale operations” are defined as 39 operations where a Scale is set up by the Contractor specifically for the project and 40 most, if not all, material weighed on the scale is utilized for Contract Work. In this 41 situation, the Contractor shall provide a person to operate the project scale, generate 42 E-Tickets, perform scale checks, and prepare reports. 43 44 “Commercial scale operations” include the use of established scales used to sell 45 materials to the public on a regular basis. In addition, for the purposes of this 46 Specification, all batch, hopper, and belt scales are considered to be commercial 47 scales. When a commercial scale is used as the project scale, the Contractor may 48 utilize a commercial scale operator provided it is at no additional cost to the 49 Contracting Agency. 50 51


In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that: 1 2

1. The Engineer is allowed to observe the weighing operation and check the 3 daily scale weight record; 4

5 2. Scale verification checks are performed at the direction of the Contracting 6

Agency (see Section 1-09.2(5)); 7 8 3. Several times each day, the scale operator records and makes certain the 9

platform scale balances and returns to zero when the load is removed; and 10 11 4. Test results and Daily Summary Reports for each day’s hauling operations 12

are provided to the Engineer daily. 13 14 Trucks and E-Tickets – Each truck to be weighed shall bear a unique identification 15 number. This number shall be legible and in plain view of the scale operator. The 16 Contractor shall provide E-tickets for all weighed materials. All E-tickets shall, at a 17 minimum, contain the following information: 18 19

1. Date of haul; 20 21 2. Contract number; 22 23 3. Contract unit Bid item; 24 25 4. Unit of measure; 26 27 5. Identification number of hauling vehicle; and 28 29 6. Weight delivered: 30 31

a. Net weight in the case of batch and hopper scales. 32 33 b. Gross weight, tare weight (am and pm minimum), and net weight in 34

the case of platform scales. 35 36 c. Approximate load out weight in the case of belt conveyor scales. 37

38 The E-Ticket shall be uploaded to a designated site so that it can be accessed by the 39 material receiver at the material delivery point. The material delivery point is defined 40 as the location where the material is incorporated into the permanent Work. The 41 Contractor’s representative shall make report summaries available to the Engineer’s 42 designated receiver, not later than the end of shift, for reconciliation. E-tickets for 43 loads not verified as delivered will receive no pay. 44 45 Electronic Delivery Management System (E-Ticketing) 46 No fewer than 30 days prior to delivery or placement activities, the Contractor shall 47 submit a Type 2 Working Drawing to the Engineer detailing all E-Ticketing Systems 48 used to provide the required information. It is recognized that multiple systems may 49 be used to accommodate individual Contractors and Material supplier capabilities. 50 The Working Drawings shall explain how partial loads will be tracked, and include 51


contingency plans for lost internet connectivity and/or phone reception. The 1 Contractor shall provide on-site technical assistance and training during the initial 2 setup to all parties requiring access to the e-ticket information. The Contractor shall 3 provide ETS support as necessary during the Work to ensure effective ongoing 4 utilization. 5 6 Equipment 7 The Contractor shall demonstrate that the ETS can provide the following: 8 9

1. The ETS shall be fully integrated with the Contractor's Load Read-Out scale 10 system at the material source site. In the absence of a fully integrated 11 system, digital data can be captured by a photo of the ticket (pdf ticket) 12 generated at the scale at load out. The information shall be immediately 13 uploaded to a designated site so the information can be accessed by the 14 Inspector located at the material delivery site. 15

16 2. The ETS shall be accessible by real-time monitoring with a mobile 17

communication device such as a tablet, smartphone, etc. 18 19 The Material Source site (point of load out) shall have a reliable, stable internet 20 connection, with a local Wi-Fi device (hot spot) in areas with poor or no cell service. 21 22 The Contractor shall install and operate equipment in accordance with their accepted 23 ETS. The Type 2 Working Drawing shall identify an alternative method for manually 24 capturing and electronically delivering data if internet access and/or cell phone 25 service is temporarily unavailable at the load out site. 26 27 E-Tickets 28 The E-Tickets must provide at a minimum, the information required in Section 1-29 09.2(1) for truck weight measurement and Section 6-02.3(5)B for concrete delivery. 30 31 Daily Summary Report 32 The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a means in which to gather report 33 summaries using mobile communication devices. The following summary of 34 information shall be provided to the Engineer electronically, in a file format that 35 cannot be edited, at the end of the days hauling operation or as agreed to by the 36 Project Engineer. The summary report shall include: 37 38

1. for each Material: 39 40

a. List of Individual Loads including; 41 42

i. Contractor Name and Material Producer 43 44 ii. Project Number and County 45 46 iii. Truck Number 47 48 iv. Net Weight for Payment (nearest 0.1 tons) or volume for payment 49 50 v. Date Placed 51


1 vi. Time Loaded 2 3

2. for each Bid Item: 4 5

a. Total Quantity for Payment (weight or volume) 6 7 Payment 8 Payment will be made for the following bid item when included in the proposal: 9 10

“Electronic Ticketing System”, lump sum. 11 The lump sum contract price for “Electronic Ticketing System” shall be full pay 12 for all costs related to providing all equipment, information, and reporting. All 13 quality control procedures including technical support and on-site training shall 14 be included in the Contract lump sum price. 15

16 1-09.2(1).INST2.GR1 17


(August 6, 2001) 21 The Contracting Agency has selected the following independent commercial scale 22 for the purpose of conducting confirmation testing for weighed materials on this 23 project. The Agency will pay any fees required by the owner of the scale. All other 24 costs associated with complying with the confirmation testing requirement shall be 25 borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the bid price for the material being 26 hauled. 27 28 *** $$1$$ ***. 29

30 1-09.2(1).OPT8.GR1 31

(January 3, 2011) 32 The Contractor shall install a platform scale on or near the jobsite at a specific 33 location to be designated by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide, set up, 34 operate and maintain the scales. Scales shall: 35 36

1. Be accurate to within one-half of one percent of the correct weight 37 throughout the range of use; 38

39 2. Not include spring balances; 40 41 3. Include beams, dials, or other reliable readout equipment; 42 43 4. Be arranged so that operators and inspectors can safely and easily see the 44

dials, beams, rods, and operating scale mechanisms; 45 46 5. Be built to prevent scale parts from binding, vibrating, or being displaced 47

and to protect all working parts, and 48 49 6. Be carefully maintained, with bunkers and platforms kept clear of 50

accumulated materials that could cause errors. 51


1 The scale shall be able to weigh, at one time, any hauling vehicle or combination of 2 connected vehicles that will be utilized for weighed materials on the project. No part 3 of a vehicle or vehicle combination will be permitted off the platform as it is weighed. 4 5 The scale shall be installed and maintained with the platform level and with rigid 6 bulkheads at either end to prevent binding or shifting. The readout device shall be 7 marked at intervals of no more than 40 pounds. Test records shall show results to 8 the nearest 20 pounds. 9 10 Before use at its new location and then at 6-month intervals, the scale shall be: (a) 11 approved under rules of the Washington State Department of Agriculture’s Weights 12 and Measures Section, or (b) serviced and tested with at least 10,000 pounds by an 13 agent of its manufacturer. In either case, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer 14 with a copy of the final test results. 15 16 When notified by the Engineer that all confirmation testing has been completed for 17 the project and that the scale is no longer needed, the Contractor shall remove the 18 equipment and restore the site to a satisfactory condition. The scale equipment shall 19 be removed from the jobsite and shall remain the property of the Contractor. 20

21 1-09.2(2).GR1 22

Specific Requirements for Batching and Hopper Scales 23 24 1-09.2(2).OPT1.GR1 25

(August 6, 2001) 26 Section 1-09.2(2) is deleted. 27

28 1-09.2(3).GR1 29

Specific Requirements for Platform Scales 30 31 1-09.2(3).OPT1.GR1 32


35 1-09.2(4).GR1 36

Specific Requirements for Belt Conveyor Scales 37 38 1-09.2(4).OPT1.GR1 39


42 1-09.2(5).GR1 43

Measurement 44 45 1-09.2(5).INST1.GR1 46


(January 3, 2011) 50


If confirmation testing shows the initial scale has been underweighing, the on-site 1 representative of the Contractor shall be notified. The Contractor shall not be 2 compensated for any loss from underweighing. 3 4 If the initial scale has been overweighing, the on-site representative of the Contractor 5 shall be notified and the Contracting Agency will calculate a price adjustment as 6 follows: 7 8

The combined weight of all materials weighed after the last test showing 9 accurate results through the load preceding the next confirmation test shall be 10 calculated. This combined weight will then be reduced by the percentage of 11 weighing error that exceeds one-half of one percent. If subsequent confirmation 12 tests continue to show overweighing, then the highest correction factor 13 calculated from all tests shall be applied to all loads weighed after the last 14 successful test and before a new confirmation test that shows accurate results. 15

16 If the specifications and plans require weight measurement for minor construction 17 items, the Contractor may request permission to convert volume to weight. If the 18 Engineer approves, an agreed factor may be used to make this conversion. 19

20 1-09.2(6).GR1 21

Payment 22 23 1-09.2(6).INST1.GR1 24


(January 3, 2011) 28 Unless otherwise specified, the Contracting Agency will pay for no materials received 29 by weight unless they have been weighed in accordance with the requirements of 30 this section. 31 32 Unit contract prices for the various pay items of the project cover all costs related to 33 weighing and proportioning materials for payment. These costs include those for 34 furnishing, installing, certifying, maintaining and operating scales for initial weighing, 35 those for extra haul distance and time involved in complying with confirmation testing 36 requirements, and those for any other related item specified in this section. 37

38 1-09.2(6).INST2.GR1 39


(August 7, 2017) 43 Payment will be made for the following bid item when included in the proposal: 44 45 “Confirmation Scale,” Lump Sum 46 The lump sum payment for this item shall be full compensation for all costs related 47 to the procurement, installation, testing, maintenance, operation and removal of the 48 scale in accordance with the provisions. 49

50


1-09.3.GR1 1

Scope of Payment 2 3 1-09.3.INST1.GR1 4 Section 1-09.3 is supplemented with the following: 5 6 1-09.3.OPT1.FR1 7

(August 7, 2017) 8

Fuel Cost Adjustment 9 General 10 The Contracting Agency will make a fuel cost adjustment, either a credit or a 11 payment, for qualifying changes in the index price of on-highway diesel fuel. The 12 adjustment will be applied to partial payments made according to Section 1-09.9. 13 14 The adjustment is not a guarantee of full compensation for fuel price changes. Any 15 adjustment provided by this provision shall not obligate the Contracting Agency for 16 any costs due solely to changes in fuel costs beyond the amount adjusted by this 17 provision. The Contracting Agency does not guarantee that fuel will be available at 18 the base fuel cost or monthly fuel cost. No additional adjustment will be made for 19 rates of fuel consumption or actual fuel types that differ from those specified for the 20 purpose of determining the adjustment. 21 22 For the purpose of calculating the adjustment, the Base Fuel Cost shall be the 23 Weekly fuel price from the U.S. Energy Information Administration website. The 24 website location and directions are as follows: 25 26

• http://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/ 27 • On the web page, click on the West Coast less California, listed under the 28

heading U.S On-Highway Diesel Fuel Prices*(dollar per gallon) at the 29 lower end of the web page. 30

• In the pull down box labeled Period pull down Weekly. 31 • Click on the fuel price history found under the column heading View History 32

for the line Diesel (On-Highway) – All Types. 33 • On this web page obtain the nearest weekly fuel cost for the Monday 34

occurring three weeks prior to the date that bids are opened. This weekly 35 fuel cost becomes the Base Fuel Cost and is fixed for the duration of the 36 Contract and will be used in calculating all adjustments. 37

38 The Monthly Fuel Cost shall be the most recent Monthly fuel price from the U.S. 39 Energy Information Administration website. The website location and directions are 40 as follows: 41 42

• http://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/ 43 • On the web page, click on the West Coast less California, listed under the 44

heading U.S On-Highway Diesel Fuel Prices*(dollar per gallon) at the 45 lower end of the web page. 46

• In the pull down box labeled Period pull down Monthly. 47 • Click on the fuel price history found under the column heading View History 48

for the line Diesel (On-Highway) – All Types. 49 • On this web page obtain the most current monthly fuel price. 50 51

http://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/

http://www.eia.gov/petroleum/gasdiesel/


If the specified index ceases to be available for any reason, the Contracting Agency 1 at its discretion will select and begin using a substitute price source or index to 2 establish the Monthly Fuel Cost. 3 4 Measurement 5 No adjustment will be made if the Monthly Fuel Cost is within 10 percent of the Base 6 Fuel Cost. No adjustment will be made for work performed after the authorized Time 7 for Completion. 8 9 If the Monthly Fuel Cost is greater than or equal to 110% of the Base Fuel Cost, then: 10 11

Adjustment = (Monthly Fuel Cost – (1.10 x Base Fuel Cost)) x Q 12 13

If the Monthly Fuel Cost is less than or equal to 90% of the Base Fuel Cost, then: 14 15

Adjustment = (Monthly Fuel Cost – (0.90 x Base Fuel Cost)) x Q 16 17

Where Q = ((Fuel Usage Factor for each Eligible Bid Item) x (Quantity paid in the 18 current months progress estimate for each Eligible Bid Item)) for all Eligible Bid Items 19 listed below: 20 21

Eligible Bid Item Fuel Usage Factor 22 *** $$1$$ *** *** $$2$$ *** 23 *** $$3$$ *** *** $$4$$ *** 24

25 Payment 26 Payment will be made for the following bid item when included in the bid proposal: 27

28 “Fuel Cost Adjustment”, by calculation. 29

30 To provide a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered 31 an amount in the proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total bid. 32

33 1-09.3.OPT2.FR1 34

(August 6, 2018) 35

Steel Cost Adjustment 36 The Contractor may elect to participate in the steel cost adjustments for work permanently 37 incorporated into this Contract. Steel cost adjustment is not a guarantee of full 38 compensation for changes to the cost of steel items; not eligible for all items with steel; 39 and any adjustment provided by this provision will not obligate the Contracting Agency for 40 any costs beyond the amount adjusted by this provision. 41 42 This Special Provision provides the option to opt-in to steel cost adjustments for eligible 43 Bid items. The Contractor is provided one opportunity to opt-in and there are no future 44 opt-out provisions. The steel cost adjustment requirements of this Special Provision apply 45 for the duration of the Contract. 46 47

General 48 The Contractor may select Bid items from the list below to be included in the steel 49 cost adjustment. The Contractor is not obligated to select any Bid items or to 50


participate in the steel cost adjustment program. The steel cost adjustment will apply 1 only to the Bid items selected by the Contractor. 2 3 Prior to Contract execution the Contractor shall submit the Steel Cost Adjustment 4 Opt-In Bid Item List, WSDOT Form 410-031, to the WSDOT Contract Ad and Award 5 Office. The form is to be received at the WSDOT Bid Room, located at the 6 Transportation Building, 310 Maple Park Avenue SE, Room 2D20, Olympia, WA 7 98501-2361 or may be submitted by facsimile to the following FAX number, (360) 8 705-6966. The Steel Cost Adjustment Opt-In Bid Item List shall be signed by an 9 authorized representative of the Contractor. Should the Contractor fail to return this 10 document as required no Bid items will be eligible for steel cost adjustment. 11 12 Steel Index Values 13 The Contracting Agency will use the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS) producer price 14 index (PPI) series Id: WPUSISTEEL1 index value for steel cost adjustments. 15 16 The Base Steel Materials Index Value (BV) will be the most recent value published 17 on the BLS website on the day of bid opening. This value will be fixed on the day of 18 bid opening even if the BLS lists this as a preliminary value. The Monthly Steel 19 Materials Index Value (MV) will be the final index value published on the BLS website 20 for any month during the Contract. 21 22 Measurement 23 The Contracting Agency has determined the initial cost basis (ICB) of steel to be *** 24 $$1$$ ***. This cost basis is reflected in the steel cost adjustment calculations below, 25 is non-negotiable and will be taken as a fixed value for the duration of the Contract. 26 27 For each month that steel material is incorporated into the permanent Work of the 28 Contract or paid for as Materials on Hand and the MV is more than 110 percent or 29 less than 90 percent of the BV the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the 30 following for each eligible Bid item by the end of the following month: 31 32

1. The weight of steel material for the month, and 33 34 2. Documentation of the weight and shipment to the Contractor of the steel 35

material by bills of lading, invoices, or purchase orders. 36 37

Should the Contractor not provide the required documentation as specified the 38 following shall apply: 39 40

1. Steel material that has an MV that is more than 110 percent of the BV will 41 not be eligible for a steel cost adjustment. 42

43 2. The steel cost adjustment for a Bid item with an MV that is less than 90 44

percent of the BV will be calculated using a weight of steel determined by 45 the Engineer. 46 47

Steel materials will not be eligible for cost adjustments until all requirements of the 48 Contract have been met. Steel added to a Contract as part of a Value Engineering 49 Change Proposal will not be eligible for steel cost adjustment. Steel cost adjustments 50 made in accordance with this Special Provision will not be reflected on payments 51


made to the Contractor until after the index value required for the calculation 1 becomes final. Preliminary index values may be used to establish the BV, but will 2 not be used to establish the MV in calculations. 3 4 For each Bid Item selected by the Contractor on the Steel Cost Adjustment Opt-In 5 Bid Item List form a cost adjustment evaluation will be made. A cost adjustment will 6 only be made if the MV for the month the Work associated with the Bid Item is 7 performed differs by more than ten-percent from the BV. 8 9 The steel cost adjustment will be determined as follows: 10

11 1. If the MV is within ten-percent of the BV, there will be no adjustment. 12 13 2. If the MV is more than 110-percent of the BV, then 14

15 CA = (((MV - BV) ÷ BV) - 0.10) × (ICB × WS) 16 17

3. If the MV is less than 90-percent of the BV, then 18 19

CA = (((MV - BV) ÷ BV) + 0.10) × (ICB × WS) 20 21 Where: 22 23

CA = Cost Adjustment, dollars 24 MV = Monthly Steel Materials Index Value from BLS for the month determined 25

above 26 BV = Base Steel Materials Index Value taken as the most recent value published 27

on the BLS website on the day of bid opening. 28 ICB = Initial Cost Basis of steel per pound 29 WS = Weight of steel (in pounds) eligible for cost adjustment 30 31

The following Bid Items are eligible for the steel cost adjustment program for this 32 Project: 33 34

*** $$2$$ *** 35 36 Payment 37 Payment will be made for the following bid item when included in the bid proposal: 38 39

“Steel Cost Adjustment”, by calculation. 40 41

To provide a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered 42 an amount in the proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total bid. 43 44

45 1-09.8.GR1 46

Payment For Material On Hand 47 48 1-09.8.INST1.GR1 49 The last paragraph of Section 1-09.8 is revised to read: 50 51


1-09.8.OPT1.GR1 1 (August 3, 2009) 2 The Contracting Agency will not pay for material on hand when the invoice cost is less 3 than $2,000. As materials are used in the work, credits equaling the partial payments for 4 them will be taken on future estimates. Each month, no later than the estimate due date, 5 the Contractor shall submit a letter to the Engineer that clearly states: 1) the amount 6 originally paid on the invoice (or other record of production cost) for the items on hand, 2) 7 the dollar amount of the material incorporated into each of the various work items for the 8 month, and 3) the amount that should be retained in material on hand items. If work is 9 performed on the items and the Contractor does not submit a letter, all of the previous 10 material on hand payment will be deducted on the estimate. Partial payment for materials 11 on hand shall not constitute acceptance. Any material will be rejected if found to be faulty 12 even if partial payment for it has been made. 13

14 1-09.9.GR1 15

Payments 16 17 1-09.9.INST1.GR1 18 Section 1-09.9 is supplemented with the following: 19 20 1-09.9.OPT1.FB1 21

(March 13, 1995) 22 The quantity of the following items to be paid for on this project shall be the quantity shown 23 in the Proposal, unless changes are made in accordance with Section 1-04.4 which affect 24 this quantity. The quantity shown in the Proposal will be adjusted by the amount of the 25 change and will be paid for as specified in Section 1-04.4. 26 27

*** $$1$$ *** 28 29 The quantities in the Proposal are listed only for the convenience of the Contractor in 30 determining the volume of work involved and are not guaranteed to be accurate. The 31 prospective bidders shall verify these quantities before submitting a bid. No adjustments 32 other than for approved changes will be made in the quantity even though the actual 33 quantities required may deviate from those listed. 34 35 The unit contract price for these items shall be full pay to construct and complete this 36 portion of the work. 37

38 1-09.9.OPT2.GR1 39

(April 30, 2020) 40 The Contractor shall sign electronically using the software provided by the Contracting 41 Agency and return the Final Contract Voucher Certification (FCVC) as indicated in this 42 section. Within 21 days of execution, the Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working 43 Drawing designating who will sign the FCVC, including their full name, email address, and 44 text-message capable phone number. The designee shall be an authorized signer in 45 accordance with Section 1-02.1. 46

47 1-09.9(1).GR1 48

Retainage 49 50


1-09.9(1).INST1.GR1 1 Section 1-09.9(1) content and title is deleted and replaced with the following: 2

3 1-09.9(1).OPT1.GR1 4

(June 27, 2011) 5 Vacant 6

7

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


1-10.GR1 1

Temporary Traffic Control 2 3 1-10.1.GR1 4

General 5 6 1-10.1.INST1.GR1 7 Section 1-10.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 1-10.1.OPT1.FR1 10

(April 1, 2013) 11 The Contracting Agency will provide the following labor, equipment and/or materials 12 resources to the Contractor for use on the project. 13 14

*** $$1$$ *** 15 16 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when each resource is to be utilized and shall 17 provide a minimum of *** $$2$$ *** working days advance notice to allow any necessary 18 arrangements to be made. 19

20 1-10.1.OPT2.FR1 21

(May 20, 2020) 22 The Contracting Agency has arranged for the Washington State Patrol (WSP) to perform 23 the following tasks during the project: 24

25 *** $$1$$ *** 26 27

There shall be no entitlement for any impacts for any reason as a result of WSP 28 personnel. 29 30 WSP personnel may not be used for any other work without prior acceptance from the 31 Engineer. The acceptance will identify the added work allowed, the terms under which 32 the WSP personnel may be used for the added work, and how the cost of the added work 33 will be shared by the Contractor and Contracting Agency. 34 35 This resource is provided at no additional cost to the Contractor for the initial *** $$2$$ 36 *** hours and includes all costs (e.g., WSP labor, vehicle miles, etc.). Additional hours of 37 WSP personnel may be requested by the Contractor. If allowed by the Engineer, the cost 38 for these hours will be shared by the Contracting Agency and the Contractor. The 39 Contractor’s share of the cost for additional hours will be one-half of the amount billed 40 by the law enforcement agency. 41 42 All costs for cancelled work due to unsuitable weather will be shared by the Contracting 43 Agency and the Contractor. The Contractor’s share of the cost for cancelled work will be 44 one-half of the amount billed by the law enforcement agency, regardless of when the 45 actual work occurs. All costs for cancelled work for any other reason shall be the full 46 responsibility of the Contractor. 47 48 The Contractor’s share of costs for additional hours of uniformed law enforcement 49 personnel will be credited to the Contracting Agency under the bid item “WSP 50 Reimbursement”, by calculation. 51


1 1-10.1(1).GR1 2

Materials 3 4 1-10.1(1).INST1.GR1 5


(April 7, 2014) 9 Automated Flagger Assistance Devices 10 Automated Flagger Assistance Devices (AFADs) shall meet the requirements of the 11 MUTCD. 12

13 1-10.2.GR1 14

Traffic Control Management 15 16 1-10.2(1).GR1 17

General 18 19 1-10.2(1).INST1.GR1 20


(January 3, 2017September 7, 2021) 24 Only training with WSDOT TCS card and WSDOT training curriculum is recognized 25 in the State of Washington. The Traffic Control Supervisor shall be certified by one 26 of the following: 27 28

The Northwest Laborers-Employers Training Trust 29 27055 Ohio Ave. 30 Kingston, WA 98346 31 (360) 297-3035 32 https://www.nwlett.edu 33 34 Evergreen Safety Council 35 12545 135th Ave. NE 36 Kirkland, WA 98034-8709 37 1-800-521-0778 38 https://www.esc.org 39 40 The American Traffic Safety Services Association 41 15 Riverside Parkway, Suite 100 42 Fredericksburg, Virginia 22406-1022 43 Training Dept. Toll Free (877) 642-4637 44 Phone: (540) 368-1701 45 https://altssa.com/training 46 47 Integrity Safety 48 13912 NE 20th Ave. 49 Vancouver WA 98686 50

https://www.nwlett.edu/

https://www.esc.org/

https://altssa.com/training


(360) 574-6071 1 https://www.integritysafety.com 2 3 US Safety Alliance 4 (904) 705-5660 5 https://www.ussafetyalliance.com 6

7 1-10.2(1).OPT2.GR1 8

(January 5, 2015) 9 The primary TCS shall have a minimum of 500 hours of experience providing traffic 10 control as a TCS or traffic control labor on multilane highways with a speed limit of 11 55 mph or greater. The Contractor shall submit a certification of the TCS’s 12 experience with the TCS designation. Documentation of experience shall be 13 available upon request by the Engineer. 14

15 1-10.3.GR1 16

Traffic Control Labor, Procedures and Devices 17 18 1-10.3.INST1.GR1 19 Section 1-10.3 is supplemented with the following: 20 21 1-10.3.OPT1.FR1 22

(May 20, 2020) 23

Contractor Provided Uniformed Police Officers 24 The Contractor shall provide, direct, and monitor Uniformed Police Officers having 25 jurisdiction to control traffic in accordance with the Plans. A uniformed police officer 26 (UPO) is a sworn police officer from a local law enforcement agency or a Washington 27 State Patrol officer. The UPO shall provide traffic control as shown in an accepted traffic 28 control plan. 29 30 The following contact information for potential service providers is supplied for the 31 Contractor's convenience: 32 33

*** $$1$$ *** 34 35 1-10.3(3).GR1 36

Traffic Control Devices 37 38 1-10.3(3).INST1.GR1 39


(April 7, 2014) 43 Automated Flagger Assistance Devices 44 Where shown on an approved traffic control plan, the Contractor shall provide, 45 operate and maintain AFADs. 46 47 An AFAD is a self-contained, portable traffic control system that enable a flagger to 48 be positioned out of the lane of traffic and is used to control road users through 49 temporary traffic control zones for short-term lane closures, on two-lane highways. 50

https://www.integritysafety.com/

https://www.ussafetyalliance.com/


The Contractor shall submit the manufacturers’ specifications for each AFAD to the 1 Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to use. A manufacturers’ representative shall 2 be required to demonstrate the capabilities of each device prior to its use and 3 provide training to the certified flaggers that will be operating the device. Each AFAD 4 shall require a flagger near enough to the device to see the device and remotely 5 operate it. Only a qualified flagger who has been trained on the operation of the 6 AFAD shall operate the AFAD. The flagger operating the AFAD shall not leave the 7 device unattended at any time while the AFAD is being used to control traffic. 8 9 An AFAD shall only be used in situations where there is only one lane of approaching 10 traffic in the direction to be controlled. When used at night, the AFAD location shall 11 be illuminated in accordance with Section 1-10.3(1)A. 12 13 During the setup and take down operation of the work area, the AFAD display shall 14 be set to a yellow flash mode when the signal heads are deployed into normal 15 operating position. 16 17 If repairs are required the Contractor shall respond immediately and provide flagger 18 traffic control and the unit shall be either repaired or replaced with a backup unit 19 within 48 hours. 20 21 The Engineer may order adjustments to the location as needed based on traffic and 22 field conditions. 23

24 1-10.3(3).OPT2.GR1 25

(January 2, 2018) 26 Radar Speed Display Sign 27 Where shown on an approved traffic control plan or where ordered by the Engineer, 28 the Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain radar speed display signs 29 (RSDS). A RSDS shall be placed with a minimum of 4 ft. of lateral clearance to edge 30 of a travelled lane and be delineated by channelization devices. The Contractor shall 31 remove the RSDS from the clear zone when not in use unless protected by barrier 32 or guardrail. 33

34 1-10.3(3).OPT3.FR1 35

(May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 36 Smart Work Zone System 37 Where shown on an approved traffic control plan, the Contractor shall provide, 38 operate, maintain, and remove a Smart Work Zone System. A Smart Work Zone 39 System (SWZS) uses portable roadside sensor information to display real-time 40 dynamic work zone traffic information and instructions to motorists on a series of 41 Portable Changeable Message Signs (PCMSs) approaching a work zone. 42 43 The SWZS shall be capable of communicating three types of work zone traffic 44 information: 45 46

1. Queue detection warning for slowed or queued traffic ahead. 47 48 2. Dynamic lane merge guidance to use all open lanes up to the lane closure 49

tapers and zipper merge instructions during times of congestion. 50 51


3. Work zone travel delay for current work zone delays in minutes. 1 2 In locations with multiple SWZS setups each setup shall be capable of operating 3 independently. One SWZS Technician may operate all systems concurrently. 4 5 Vendor 6 The Contractor shall select an independent vendor listed below to provide the SWZS 7 as shown on an approved SWZS Plan: 8 9

Street Smart 10 Phone: (888) 653-6800 11 Website: https://www.streetsmartrental.com/smart-work-zones/ 12 13 Hill and Smith Inc. 14 Phone: (302) 328-3220 15 Website: https://www.hillandsmith.com/portfolio_category/its-smart-work-zone/ 16 17 ICONE by ICONE Products 18 Phone: (315) 626-6800 19 Website: http://iconeproducts.com/ 20 21 Road-Tech Safety Services, Inc. 22 Phone: (888) 762-3832 23 Website: https://www.road-tech.com/ 24 25 Salander LLC 26 Phone: (812) 777-5637 27 Website: https://www.slndrtech.com/ 28 29 SolarTech 30 Phone: (610) 391-8600 31 Website: http://solartechnology.com/ 32 33 Ver-Mac 34 Phone: (888) 488-7446 35 Website: https://www.ver-mac.com/en/jamlogic-software/smart-work-zones 36 37 WANCO 38 Phone: (800) 972-0755 39 Website: https://www.wanco.com 40

41 Devices and Communications 42 The Contractor and/or Vendor shall provide all devices necessary to operate the 43 system in accordance with the approved accepted traffic control plans and these 44 specifications. 45 46 The traffic sensors shown in the traffic control plans in advance of lane closure 47 tapers are used to operate the SWZS by detecting vehicle speed approaching the 48 lane closures, where queuing is expected. Typically, these traffic sensors use 49 Doppler radar technology. 50 51


Separate side-fire traffic sensor(s), Wavetronix SmartSensor HD or similar accepted 1 by the Engineer, shall be post-mounted or trailer-mounted to obtain traffic 2 volume/speed data where shown in the traffic control plans. If not shown, then the 3 side-fire traffic sensor shall be placed after the final lane closure taper but before 4 lanes are reopened or any open on-ramps to measure the following: 5 6

1. Traffic volume, in vehicles per hour per open lane 7 8 2. Speed – time graph used to determine the median & 85th percentile speed 9

in each open lane 10 11 The Contractor shall use and relocate as necessary side-fire traffic sensor(s) at 12 locations compatible with lane closures. As an alternative, multiple side-fire traffic 13 sensors can be used throughout the project limits provide the traffic volume/speed 14 data remains accurate. 15 16 A vendor website or other wireless remote system is required for monitoring SWZS 17 functions and remote management of PCMS messages. 18 19 Technician 20 The Vendor shall provide a technician skilled in the operation of all system 21 equipment and software. The technician may be an employee of the Vendor or 22 someone trained and authorized by the Vendor to operate the system. The 23 technician shall be independent of the Contractor and Traffic Control Supervisor but 24 shall collaborate and coordinate as appropriate. The technician shall be on site while 25 the SWZS is in use and able to respond to system issues in person. 26 27 Duties of the Technician include, but are not limited to, the following: 28 29

1. Program the automated, real-time operation of the SWZS with traffic 30 sensor trigger speed thresholds and PCMS messages shown on the 31 approved SWZS Plan. 32

33 2. Service, debug, troubleshoot, and maintain all SWZS components. 34 35 3. Maintain SWZS equipment maintenance logs. 36 37 4. Collect and process system data and provide data as described below: 38 39

a. System Data – System data shall include: 40 41

i. Data in table format of traffic volume (vehicles per hour per each 42 open lane), 50th-percentile traffic speed of all open lanes, and 43 85th-percentile traffic speed of all open lanes for 15-minute 44 intervals organized by Day and Hour of day for each SWZS 45 implementation measured by the side-fire traffic sensor.Graph of 46 traffic volume and traffic speed versus time organized by Day and 47 Hour of day for each SWZS implementation. 48

49 ii. Day and Hour of day each traffic sensor was triggered, and the 50

message displayed on each PCMS while the SWZS is in use. 51


1 b. Agency Access to System Data – Provide password protected 2

access to the Engineer and identified Agency personnel to the 3 System Data via a dedicated website or other wireless remote 4 system. 5

6 c. Provide System Data to Agency – At the completion of the Project, 7

provide System Data logs in an electronic format approved by the 8 Engineer. 9

10 5. Immediately respond to all system failures in accordance with the Smart 11

Work Zone System Failure Protocol section of these Specifications. 12 13 Operation 14 Operate the SWZS according to the following: 15 16

Scheduled Use 17 Use a dynamic lane merge, queue detection warning, and work zone travel 18 delay system on the following roadway(s), locations, and work operations: 19

20 *** $$1$$ *** 21

22 Installation, Relocation, Removal, and Storage 23 The Contractor shall store, install, relocate, and remove all the SWZS 24 components as follows: 25 26

1. Install all components with the SWZS Technician’s concurrence at 27 least 30 minutes prior to commencing the first lane closure 28

29 2. Relocate components as necessary with the SWZS Technician’s 30

concurrence 31 32 3. Assist the Technician as needed when the Smart Work Zone System 33

Failure Protocol occurs 34 35 4. Remove all components within the Work Zone Clear Zone within 60 36

minutes when no longer required unless components are placed 37 behind guardrail or barrier. 38

39 Initial SWZS Turn-On Meeting 40 The Contractor shall arrange a meeting at least one week before the initial 41 system turn-on. 42 43 The meeting shall include the Contractor, Traffic Control Manager, Traffic 44 Control Supervisor, Alternative Traffic Control Supervisor (if applicable), SWZS 45 Technician, and WSDOT Project Engineering Office staff. 46 47 During this meeting, the following topics should be discussed at a minimum: 48 49

1. Provide and review the approved traffic control plans, including lane 50 closure plans and the associated SWZS plan that will be used. 51


1 2. Review roles and responsibilities for implementation of the SWZS. 2 3 3. Provide contact information for critical personnel. 4 5 4. Provide a schedule of the anticipated operation times, dates and 6

durations for the initial operation. 7 8 5. Review Measurement and Payment for duties related to SWZS 9

installation, operation, and removal. 10 11 SWZS Operation Coordination and Collaboration 12 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 72 hours in advance of using 13 the SWZS including providing a schedule of the anticipated operation times, 14 dates and durations for each subsequent operation. 15 16 The Contractor’s Traffic Control Management shall coordinate and collaborate 17 as needed for the successful implementation of the SWZS and associated lane 18 closures. Any delays and associated costs due to implementing the SWZS 19 shall be at the Contractor’s expense. 20 21

Smart Work Zone System Failure Protocol 22 In the event of a failure, perform the following protocol: 23 24

1. SWZS Technician – Upon discovery of the malfunction, perform the 25 following: 26 27 a. Immediately notify Contractor Traffic Control Management. 28 29 b. Begin troubleshooting the SWZS to address the malfunction. 30 31 c. If the malfunction is not resolved within 15 minutes, notify Contractor 32

Traffic Control Management. The SWZS shall be taken out of 33 service and repaired within 12 hours of the malfunction. 34

35 2. Contractor Traffic Management – After receiving the initial notification of 36

the malfunction, perform the following: 37 38 a. Notify the Traffic Control Supervisor. 39 40 b. Prepare crews to immediately implement the Emergency PCMS 41

Implementation if the malfunction is not resolved within 15 minutes. 42 43 c. Notify the Engineer of the malfunction and failure protocol status. 44 45 d. Collaborate with SWZS Technician to provide replacement parts 46

needed to make repairs to the SWZS within 12 hours of the system 47 or a system component malfunction. 48

49 3. Emergency PCMS Implementation – If the SWZS Technician has not 50

resolved the issue within 15 minutes, perform following failure protocol: 51


1 a. Install two PCMSs as described below until the SWZS is repaired, 2

functioning properly, and back in service or until all lane closures 3 have been reopened. The PCMSs may be from the SWZS if 4 needed. 5

6 i. PCMS #1: Maintain positioned 0.5 ± mile in advance of traffic 7

queue, relocated as necessary, except when no traffic queue is 8 present. PCMS #1 may be truck-mounted. 9

10 Phase 1 Phase 2

SLOW OR STOPPED TRAFFIC

NEXT #

MILES Where “#” is the approximate queue length

rounded up to the nearest mile 11

ii. PCMS #2: Place 1.5 ± mile in advance of first lane closure taper. 12 Program message as appropriate. Phase 1 is to describe the 13 current lane closure in place. Phase 2 is to describe the distance 14 ahead to the beginning of the first lane closure rounded up to the 15 nearest 0.5 mile interval. For example, if a double right lane 16 closure is 1.5 mile ahead, the PCMS message would be: “2 17 RIGHT LANES CLOSED” / “1.5 MILE AHEAD”. 18

1-10.3(3).OPT4.FR1 19 (September 7, 2021) 20 Queue Warning System 21 Where shown on an accepted traffic control plan, the Contractor shall provide, 22 operate, maintain, and remove a Queue Warning System. A Queue Warning System 23 (QWS) uses portable roadside sensor information to display real-time traffic queue 24 information to motorists on Portable Changeable Message Signs (PCMS) 25 approaching a work zone. QWS is a simplified smart work zone system intended for 26 work zone queues up to 2 miles, measured from the first lane closure taper, but may 27 be modified for queuing up to 3 miles by extending spacing between the two PCMSs 28 from 1± mile to 1.5 ± mile spacing and adjusting the PCMS messages. Traffic sensor 29 placement remains unchanged. 30 31 The QWS shall be capable of communicating two types of work zone traffic 32 information: 33 34

1. Queue detection warning for slowed or queued traffic ahead. 35 36 2. Dynamic lane merge guidance to use all open lanes up to the lane closure 37

tapers and to take turns at merges during times of congestion. 38 39 In locations with multiple QWS setups each setup shall be capable of operating 40 independently. One QWS Technician may operate all systems concurrently. 41 42 Vendors 43 The Contractor shall select an independent vendor listed below to provide a QWS 44 as shown on an accepted traffic control plan: 45


1 Street Smart 2 Phone: (888) 653-6800 3 Website: https://www.streetsmartrental.com/smart-work-zones/ 4 5 Hill and Smith Inc. 6 Phone: (302) 328-3220 7 Website: https://www.hillandsmith.com/portfolio_category/its-smart-work-zone/ 8 9 ICONE by ICONE Products 10 Phone: (315) 626-6800 11 Website: http://iconeproducts.com/ 12 13 Road-Tech Safety Services, Inc. 14 Phone: (888) 762-3832 15 Website: https://www.road-tech.com/ 16 17 Salander LLC 18 Phone: (812) 777-5637 19 Website: https://www.slndrtech.com/ 20 21 SolarTech 22 Phone: (610) 391-8600 23 Website: http://solartechnology.com/ 24 25 Ver-Mac 26 Phone: (888) 488-7446 27 Website: https://www.ver-mac.com/en/jamlogic-software/smart-work-zones 28 29 WANCO 30 Phone: (800) 972-0755 31 Website: https://www.wanco.com 32

33 Devices and Communications 34 The Contractor and/or Vendor shall provide all devices necessary to operate the 35 system in accordance with the accepted traffic control plans and these 36 specifications. 37 38 The traffic sensors shown in the traffic control plans in advance of lane closure 39 tapers are used to operate the SWZS by detecting vehicle speed approaching the 40 lane closures, where queuing is expected. Typically, these traffic sensors use 41 Doppler radar technology. 42 43 A vendor website or other wireless remote system is required for monitoring QWS 44 functions and remote management of PCMS messages. 45 46 Technician 47 The Vendor shall provide a technician skilled in the operation of all system 48 equipment and software. The technician may be an employee of the Vendor or 49 someone trained and authorized by the Vendor to operate the system. The 50 technician may be Contractor or Subcontractor personnel, including the Traffic 51


Control Supervisor. The technician is not required be on site while the QWS is in 1 use but must be able to respond to any system issues remotely. 2 3 Duties of the Technician or trained traffic control personnel include, but are not 4 limited to, the following: 5 6

1. Program the automated, real-time operation of the QWS with traffic sensor 7 trigger speed thresholds and PCMS messages shown on the accepted 8 traffic control plan or in these Specifications. 9

10 2. Service, debug, troubleshoot, and maintain all QWS components. 11 12 3. Maintain QWS equipment maintenance logs. 13 14 4. Immediately respond to all system failures in accordance with the Queue 15

Warning System Failure Protocol section of these Specifications. 16 17 Operation 18 Operate the QWS according to the following: 19 20

Scheduled Use 21 Use the QWS on the following roadway(s), locations, and work operations: 22 23

*** $$1$$ *** 24 25 Installation, Relocation, Removal, and Storage 26 The Contractor or Subcontractor shall store, install, relocate, and remove all the 27 QWS components as follows: 28 29

1. Install all QWS components with the QWS Technician’s concurrence 30 prior to commencing the first lane closure. 31

32 2. Relocate components as necessary with the QWS Technician’s 33

concurrence. 34 35 3. Assist the Technician as needed when the Queue Warning System 36

Failure Protocol occurs. 37 38 4. Remove all components within the Work Zone Clear Zone when no 39

longer required unless components are placed behind guardrail or 40 barrier. 41

42 QWS Operation Coordination and Collaboration 43 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 72 hours in advance of using 44 the QWS including providing a schedule of the anticipated operation times, 45 dates and durations for each subsequent operation. 46 47 The Contractor’s Traffic Control Management shall coordinate and collaborate 48 as needed for the successful implementation of the QWS and associated lane 49 closures. Any delays and associated costs due to implementing the QWS shall 50 be at the Contractor’s expense. 51


1 Queue Warning System Failure Protocol 2 In the event of a failure that is not resolved within 15 minutes, reprogram QWS 3 PCMSs to display the following message for the remainder of the Scheduled Use 4 duration: 5 6

PCMS 1 PCMS 2 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 1 Phase 2 WATCH NEXT (Lane) 1

FOR SLOW 2 (Closure) MILE TRAFFIC MILES (Description) AHEAD 2.0 SEC 2.0 SEC 2.0 SEC 2.0 SEC

PCMS 1 placed 2± miles from first lane

closure taper

PCMS 2 placed 1± mile from first lane closure taper

7 8 (Lane Closure Description) message is similar to LEFT LANE CLOSED or LEFT 2 9 LANES CLOSED. 10 11 If the QWS as modified for queuing up to 3 miles, then modify the messaging as 12 follows: 13 14

PCMS 1 PCMS 2 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 1 Phase 2 WATCH NEXT (Lane) 1.5

FOR SLOW 3 (Closure) MILES TRAFFIC MILES (Description) AHEAD 2.0 SEC 2.0 SEC 2.0 SEC 2.0 SEC

PCMS 1 placed 3± miles from first lane

closure taper

PCMS 2 placed 1.5± miles from first lane closure taper

15 1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).GR1 16

Vacant 17 Section 9-35.8 is revised to read: 18

19 1-10.3(3)(9-35.8).OPT1.GR1 20

(April 1, 2019) 21 Radar Speed Display Sign 22 Radar Speed Display Signs (RSDS) shall consist of a fully self-contained see-23 through trailer with power supply and an LED speed indicator display with a one-24 direction radar. Above or below the display shall be the message “YOUR SPEED” 25 or “YOUR SPEED IS” in letters of 5 to 8 inches in height. The lowest portion of the 26 display shall be high enough to be visible over concrete barriers or safety drums and 27 a 36”x48” speed limit sign as shown on the approved traffic control plan shall be 28 mounted above the speed display. 29 30 The radar speed measurement shall provide a minimum detection distance of 1000 31 ft. and have an accuracy of +/ - 1 mile per hour. The radar shall be mounted so 32 detection will function when located behind concrete barrier or drums. 33


1 The numeric speed display range shall be 0 to 99 MPH with numerals of 18 inches 2 in height minimum, amber in color with a black background with automatic dimming 3 for nighttime operations. 4 5 The speed indicator display shall be equipped with a violation alert that flashes the 6 displayed detected speed when the work zone posted speed limit is exceeded. The 7 speed indicator shall have a maximum speed cutoff. Detected speeds more than 25 8 MPH over the posted speed shall not be displayed and speeds under 25 MPH shall 9 not be displayed. 10 11 The unit shall have traffic data collection capabilities. Traffic data shall be collected 12 and transmitted to the Engineer upon request. 13

14 1-10.4.GR1 15

Measurement 16 17 1-10.4(1).GR1 18

Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items) 19 20 1-10.4(1).INST1.GR1 21


(August 2, 2004) 25 The proposal contains the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control”, lump sum. The 26 provisions of Section 1-10.4(1) shall apply. 27

28 1-10.4(2).GR1 29

Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals 30 31 1-10.4(2).INST1.GR1 32


(August 2, 2004) 36 The bid proposal does not contain the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control,” lump 37 sum. The provisions of Section 1-10.4(2) shall apply. 38

39 1-10.4(2).OPT2.GR1 40

(April 7, 2014) 41 “Automated Flagger Assistance Device” will be measured per each one time only 42 for each automated flagger assistance device used on the project. The final pay 43 quantity shall be the maximum number of such devices in place at any one time as 44 approved by the Engineer. 45

46 1-10.4(2).OPT3.GR1 47

(January 2, 2018) 48 “Radar Speed Display Sign” will be measured by the hour for the time that each sign 49 is operating as shown on an approved Traffic Control Plan. 50


1 1-10.4(2).OPT5.GR1 2

(May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 3 For “Smart Work Zone System Mobilization”, there will be no measurement of unit 4 items for Work. 5 6 “Operation of Smart Work Zone System” will be measured by the hour the system 7 is actively operating as defined in Section 1-10.3(3) as supplemented in these 8 special provisions. When the smart work zone system malfunctions for longer than 9 15-minutes or if the smart work zone system is not used in accordance with the 10 applicable approved Smart Work Zone System traffic control plan, no measurement 11 will be made for the smart work zone system for that hour. Payment for all other 12 Work to implement and decommission the SWZS will be made under the applicable 13 items shown in the Proposal. 14 15 “Other Traffic Control Labor”, per hour will be measured in accordance with Section 16 1-10.4(2) for installing, removing, relocating smart work zone system components 17 by the Contractor or the Work Zone Traffic Control subcontractor. 18

19 1-10.4(2).OPT6.GR1 20

(May 20, 2020) 21 "Contractor Provided Uniformed Police Officer" will be measured by the hour. 22

23 1-10.4(2).OPT7.GR1 24

(September 7, 2021) 25 “Operation of Queue Warning System” will be measured by the hour each system is 26 actively operating as defined in Section 1-10.3(3) as supplemented in these special 27 provisions. When the Queue Warning System malfunctions for longer than 15 28 minutes or is not used in accordance with the applicable accepted traffic control 29 plan, no measurement will be made for the queue warning system for that hour. 30 Payment for all other Work to implement and decommission the Queue Warning 31 System will be made under the applicable items shown in the Proposal. 32

33 1-10.4(2).INST2.GR1 34

The sixth bullet of the third paragraph in Section 1-10.4(2) is revised to read: 35 36 1-10.4(2).OPT4.GR1 37

(January 2, 2018) 38 • Relocation of Portable Changeable Message Signs or Radar Speed Display 39

Signs within the project limits. 40 41 1-10.4(3).GR1 42

Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control 43 44 1-10.4(3).INST1.GR1 45


(August 2, 2004) 49


The bid proposal contains the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control,” lump sum 1 and the additional temporary traffic control items listed below. The provisions of 2 Section 1-10.4(1), Section 1-10.4(3), and Section 1-10.5(3) shall apply. 3

4 *** $$1$$ *** 5

6 1-10.4(3).OPT2.GR1 7

(May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 8 The bid proposal contains the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control,” lump sum 9 and the additional temporary traffic control items listed below. The provisions of 10 Section 1-10.4(1), Section 1-10.4(3), and Section 1-10.5(3) shall apply. 11 12 For “Smart Work Zone System Mobilization”, there will be no measurement of unit 13 items for Work. 14 15 “Operation of Smart Work Zone System” will be measured by the hour the system 16 is actively operating as defined in the “Smart Work Zone System – Scheduled Use” 17 specification. When the smart work zone system malfunctions for longer than 15-18 minutes or if the smart work zone system is not used in accordance with the 19 applicable approved Smart Work Zone System traffic control plan, no measurement 20 will be made for the smart work zone system for that hour. Payment for all other 21 Work to implement and decommission the Smart Work Zone System will be made 22 under applicable bid items shown in the Proposal. 23

24 1-10.4(3).OPT3.GR1 25

(September 7, 2021) 26 The bid proposal contains the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control,” lump sum 27 and the additional temporary traffic control items listed below. The provisions of 28 Section 1-10.4(1), Section 1-10.4(3), and Section 1-10.5(3) shall apply. 29 30 “Operation of Queue Warning System” will be measured by the hour each system is 31 actively operating as defined in Section 1-10.3(3) as supplemented in these special 32 provisions. When the Queue Warning System malfunctions for longer than 15 33 minutes or is not used in accordance with the applicable accepted traffic control 34 plan, no measurement will be made for the queue warning system for that hour. 35 Payment for all other Work to implement and decommission the Queue Warning 36 System will be made under the applicable items shown in the Proposal. 37

38 1-10.5.GR1 39

Payment 40 41 1-10.5(2).GR1 42

Item Bids with Lump Sum for Incidentals 43 44 1-10.5(2).INST1.GR1 45


(April 7, 2014) 49 “Automated Flagger Assistance Device”, per each. 50


The unit Contract price per each for “Automated Flagger Assistance Device”, when 1 applied to the number of units measured for this item in accordance with Section 1-2 10.4(2), shall be full pay to provide, maintain and remove the AFAD as described 3 including transporting, installing and resetting the devices. 4 5 All costs associated with operating Automated Flagger Assistance Devices shall be 6 included in the unit Contract price per hour for “Flaggers”. 7

8 1-10.5(2).OPT2.GR1 9

(January 2, 2018) 10 “Radar Speed Display Sign”, per hour. 11 The unit Contract price, when applied to the number of units measured for this item 12 in accordance with Section 1-10.4(2), shall be full compensation for all costs 13 incurred by the Contractor in performing the Work for procuring all radar speed 14 display signs required for the project and for transporting these signs to and from 15 the project. 16

17 1-10.5(2).OPT3.GR1 18

(May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 19 “Smart Work Zone System Mobilization”, lump sum. 20 The lump sum Contract price shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by the 21 Vendor in mobilizing and demobilizing the smart work zone components. Based on 22 the Contract price for this bid item, partial payments will be made as follows: 23 24

• When all Smart Work Zone System components specified in these Special 25 Provisions have been delivered to the project and the initial system turn on 26 has been successful, 80 percent of the amount bid for mobilization will be 27 paid. 28

29 • When all Smart Work Zone System components specified in these Special 30

Provisions have been removed from the project and the system is no 31 longer needed as defined in the “Scheduled Use for a Smart Work Zone 32 System”, the final 20 percent of the amount bid for mobilization will be paid. 33

34 “Operation of Smart Work Zone System”, per hour. 35 The unit Contract price, when applied to the number of units measured for this item 36 in accordance with Section 1-10.4(2) shall be full compensation for all costs incurred 37 by the Contractor, SWZS Vendor, and SWZS Technician for mobilizing and 38 demobilizing the smart work zone system components; the hardware, software, 39 PCMSs, traffic sensors, and other required Smart Work Zone equipment; 40 maintenance data logs; traffic data logs; Contracting Agency access to Smart Work 41 Zone System data; and wireless system operations including Contracting Agency 42 access. Payment for all other Work to implement and decommission the SWZS will 43 be made under the applicable items shown in the Proposal. 44

45 1-10.5(2).OPT4.GR1 46

(May 20, 2020September 7, 2021) 47 “Operation of Queue Warning System”, per hour. 48 The unit Contract price, when applied to the number of units measured for this item 49 in accordance with Section 1-10.4(2) shall be full compensation for all costs incurred 50 by the Contractor, Vendor, and/or Queue Warning System Technician for mobilizing 51


and demobilizing the queue warning system components; the hardware, software, 1 traffic sensors, and other required Queue Warning System equipment; maintenance 2 data logs; traffic data logs; and wireless system operations including Contracting 3 Agency access. Payment for all other Work to implement and decommission the 4 Queue Warning System will be made under the applicable items shown in the 5 Proposal. 6 “Smart Work Zone System Mobilization”, lump sum. 7 The lump sum Contract price shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by the 8 Contractor in mobilizing and demobilizing the smart work zone components. Based 9 on the Contract price for this bid item, partial payments will be made as follows: 10 11

• When all Smart Work Zone System components specified in these Special 12 Provisions have been delivered to the project and the initial system turn on 13 has been successful, 80 percent of the amount bid for mobilization will be 14 paid. 15

16 • When all Smart Work Zone System components specified in these Special 17

Provisions have been removed from the project and the system is no 18 longer needed as defined in the “Scheduled Use for a Smart Work Zone 19 System”, the final 20 percent of the amount bid for mobilization will be paid. 20

21 “Operation of Smart Work Zone System”, per hour. 22 The unit Contract price, when applied to the number of units measured for this item 23 in accordance with Section 1-10.4(2) shall be full compensation for all costs incurred 24 by the Vendor and Smart Work Zone System Technician for the hardware, software, 25 PCMSs, traffic sensors, and other required Smart Work Zone equipment; 26 maintenance data logs; traffic data logs; Contracting Agency access to Smart Work 27 Zone System data; wireless system operations including Contracting Agency 28 access. 29

30 1-10.5(2).OPT5.GR1 31

(May 20, 2020) 32 "Contractor Provided Uniformed Police Officer", per hour. 33 34 The unit Contract price per hour for "Contractor Provided Uniformed Police Officer" 35 shall be full pay for performing the Work as specified and as shown in the Plans, 36 including all costs for arrangement for and supervision of a uniformed law 37 enforcement personnel and vehicles to participate in the Contractor's traffic control 38 activities. 39

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

Index - General Special Provisions Division 2 EGSP2.docx February 25September 7, 2021 Page 1

DIVISION2.GR2 Earthwork 1 2 2-01.GR2 Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup 3 4

2-01.1.GR2 Description 5 6 2-01.1.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-01.1 is supplemented with the following) 7


2-01.1.OPT1.FR2 (Clearing and Grubbing) 10 (March 13, 1995) 11 Use when the payment for clearing and grubbing is either 12 lump sum or included in other work. 13 (1 fill-in) (Fill-in describes the longitudinal and lateral limits 14 of clearing and grubbing) 15 16

2-01.3.GR2 Construction Requirements 17 18

2-01.3(1).GR2 Clearing 19 20

2-01.3(1).INST1.GR2 (Item number 1 of Section 2-01.3(1) is revised to read) 21 Must use once preceding any of the following: 22

23 2-01.3(1).OPT1.GR2 (April 2, 2018) 24


27 2-01.3(4).GR2 Roadside Cleanup 28



2-01.3(4).OPT1.FR2 (Roadside Cleanup) 33 (January 5, 1998) 34 Use if additional work is required under the item 35 "Roadside Cleanup". 36 (fill-ins) 37 38

2-01.5.GR2 Payment 39 40 2-01.5.INST1.GR2 (The first and second paragraphs of Section 2-01.5 41

are revised to read) 42 Must use once preceding any of the following: 43

44 2-01.5.OPT1.FR2 (Clearing and Grubbing) 45

(August 7, 2017) 46 Must be used with 2-01.1.OPT1.FR2 when the payment for 47 clearing and grubbing is included in other work. 48 (1 fill-in) 49

50 2-02.GR2 Removal of Structures and Obstructions 51 52

2-02.1.GR2 Description 53




2-02.1.OPT1.GR2 (Removal of Misc. Traffic Items) 5 (March 13, 1995) 6 Must also use 2-02.3.OPT2.FR2 and 2-02.5.OPT8.GR2 7 Use in projects requiring the removal of minor quantities of 8 miscellaneous traffic items such as traffic islands, traffic 9 curb, lane markers, plastic traffic buttons, guide posts, etc. 10 when there is no pay item for Removal of Structures and 11 Obstructions and the cost of removing each type of item is 12 under $10,000. 13

14 2-02.1.OPT2.FR2 (Asbestos Handling and Removal) 15

(March 13, 1995) 16 Must also use 2-02.3.OPT5.GR2 and 2-02.5.OPT11.GR2. 17 Use in projects when asbestos removal is required. 18 (1 fill-in) 19

20 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2 (Removing Portions of Existing Box Culvert) 21

(March 13, 1995) 22 Use in projects requiring removal of portions of existing box 23 culverts prior to extending or widening the structure. Include 24 with 2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, 6-02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-25 02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, 6-26 02.5.OPT5.GB6, and 2-02.5.OPT12.GR2. 27

28 2-02.1.OPT4.GR2 (Asbestos Handling and Removal) 29

(September 30, 1996) 30 Must also use 2-02.3.OPT4.GR2 and 2-02.5.OPT14.GR2. 31 Use in projects when there is a reason to suspect asbestos 32 may be encountered. 33

34 2-02.1.OPT5.GR2 (Decommissioning Wells) 35

(February 25, 2021) 36 Include in projects when wells will not be removed prior to 37 advertisement and will be removed as part of the Contract. 38 Use with 2-02.2.OPT1.GR2, 2-02.3.OPT7.GR2, and 2-39 02.5.OPT2.GR2. 40

41 2-02.2.GR2 Materials 42



2-02.2.OPT1.GR2 (Decommissioning Wells) 47 (February 25, 2021) 48 Include in projects when wells will not be removed prior to 49 advertisement and will be removed as part of the Contract. 50 Use with 2-02.1.OPT5.GR2, 2-02.3.OPT7.GR2, and 2-51 02.5.OPT2.GR2. 52

53


2-02.3.GR2 Construction Requirements 1 2 2-02.3.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-02.3 is supplemented with the following) 3


2-02.3.OPT1.FR2 (Removal of Obstructions) 6 (February 17, 1998September 7, 2021) 7 Use except when the combined cost of all obstruction 8 removal is $5,000 or less and payment is to be included in 9 other payment items. 10 11 Removal of obstructions that are readily measurable and 12 for which the cost of removal is $5,000 or less per 13 obstruction may be included in this pay item. 14 15 Removal of obstructions that are not readily measurable, 16 such as foundations, may be included in this item 17 regardless of the removal cost. 18 19 List all items and approximate quantities to be removed 20 under "Removal of Structure and Obstruction". 21 (1 fill-in) 22

23 2-02.3.OPT2.FR2 (Removing Miscellaneous Traffic Items) 24

(March 13, 1995) 25 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT1.GR2. 26

27 2-02.3.OPT3.FR2 (Removal and Disposal of Hazardous Material) 28

(August 1, 2005September 7, 2021) 29 Must also use 2-02.4.OPT1.GR2 and 2-02.5.OPT7.GR2. 30 Use only for subsurface removal of known or suspected 31 hazardous or contaminated material. Fill-in is for type of 32 material, depth of contamination in soil, and depth of 33 contamination in water. Fill-in information is to be provided 34 by the Region Environmental Staff. 35 (1 fill-in) 36

37 2-02.3.OPT4.GR2 (Asbestos Handling and Disposal) 38

(September 30, 1996) 39 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT4.GR2. 40

41 2-02.3.OPT5.GR2 (Asbestos Handling and Disposal) 42

(September 30, 1996) 43 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT2.FR2. 44

45 2-02.3.OPT6.FB2 (Salvage of Removed Structure Items) 46

(June 26, 2000) 47 Use when removal items are to remain the property of the 48 Contracting Agency. The first fill-in specifies the salvaged 49 items. The second fill-in specifies the name and address 50 (street address or highway milepost) of the material storage 51 site. Include with either 52


2-02.3(2).OPT1.FB2, 2-02.3(2).OPT2.FB2, or 2-1 02.3(2).OPT3.FB2, and 2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2. 2 (2 fill-ins) 3

4 2-02.3.OPT7.GR2 (Well Decommissioning) 5

(February 25, 2021) 6 Include in projects when wells will not be removed prior to 7 advertisement and will be removed as part of the Contract. 8 Use with 2-02.1.OPT5.GR2, 2-02.2.OPT1.GR2, and 2-9 02.5.OPT2.GR2. 10

11 2-02.3(2).GB2 Removal of Bridges, Box Culverts, and other Drainage 12

Structures 13 14

2-02.3(2).INST1.GB2 (Section 2-02.3(2) is supplemented with the following) 15 Must use once preceding any of the following: 16

17 2-02.3(2).OPT1.FB2 (Removing Existing Bridge) 18

(June 26, 2000) 19 Use in projects requiring the removal of existing 20 bridge(s) in one stage. The first fill-in specifies the 21 bridge(s). The second fill-in specifies where traffic is 22 directed (onto the detour route or bridge, onto the new 23 bridge, etc.). Include with 2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2. 24 Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the bridge being 25 removed has steel members with lead paint. 26 (2 fill-ins) 27

28 2-02.3(2).OPT2.FB2 (Removing Existing Bridge) 29

(June 26, 2000) 30 Use in projects requiring the removal of existing 31 bridge(s) in two or more stages. The fill-in specifies the 32 bridge(s). Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the bridge 33 being removed has steel members with lead paint. 34 (1 fill-in) 35

36 2-02.3(2).OPT3.FB2 (Removing Portion of Existing Bridge) 37

(June 26, 2000) 38 Use in projects requiring the removal of portions of 39 existing bridge(s). The first fill-in specifies the bridge(s). 40 The second fill-in specifies the portions being removed. 41 Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the bridge being 42 partially removed has steel members with lead paint. 43 (2 fill-ins) 44

45 2-02.3(2).OPT7.FB2 (Removal in Water) 46

(June 26, 2000) 47 Use in projects requiring the removal of existing 48 bridge(s) when removal involves piers within the wetted 49 perimeter of a stream, lake or bay. The first fill-in 50 specifies the bridge(s). The second and fourth fill-ins 51 specify the body of water. The third fill-in specifies the 52 elevation of the removal level. Include with either 2-53


02.3(2).OPT1.FB2, 2-02.3(2).OPT2.FB2, or 2-1 02.3(2).OPT3.FB2, and 2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2. 2

3 2-02.3(2).OPT10.GB2 (Use of Explosives) 4


2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2 (Structure Removal By Explosives) 7 (January 2, 2018) 8 Use in projects requiring removal of existing 9 bridges only if explosives may be used. The fill-in 10 specifies the bridge where the use of explosives is 11 permitted for removal operations. Include with 2-12 02.3(2).OPT1.FB2. Include with 1-13 07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the bridge involved has steel 14 members with lead paint. 15 (1 fill-in) 16

17 2-02.3(2).OPT11.GB2 (Requirements for Closing Bridge Prior to Removal) 18

(January 2, 2018) 19 Use in projects requiring removal of existing bridges 20 when it is necessary to close the bridge to traffic in order 21 to complete removal as soon as possible. Include with 22 2-02.3(2).OPT1.FB2, and 2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2. 23 Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the bridge involved has 24 steel members with lead paint. 25 26

2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2 (Removing Portions of Existing Box Culvert) 27 (June 26, 2000) 28 Use in projects requiring removal of portions of existing 29 box culverts prior to extending or widening the structure. 30 Include with 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2, 6-02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-31 02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, and 6-32 02.5.OPT5.GB6, and either 2-02.5.OPT12.GR2 or 2-33 02.5.OPT15.GR2. 34

35 2-02.3(3).GR2 Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters 36



2-02.3(3).OPT1.FR2 (September 8, 1997) 41 Include in projects when removal of pavement is outside 42 the limits of roadway excavation, and the removal is to 43 be paid by the square yard. 44 Must also use 2-02.4.OPT2.GR2 and 2-45 02.5.OPT13.FR2. 46 (2 fill-ins) 47





1 2-02.4.OPT1.GR2 (Removal and Disposal of Hazardous Material) 2

(December 4, 2006) 3 Must include with 2-02.3.OPT3.FR2 and 4 2-02.5.OPT7.GR2. 5

6 2-02.4.OPT2.GR2 (Pavement Removal) 7

(September 8, 1997) 8 Must include with 2-02.3(3).OPT1.FR2.. 9

10 2-02.4.OPT3.GR2 (Sidewalk Removal) 11

(October 25, 1999) 12 Include in projects when removal of sidewalk is outside the 13 limits of roadway excavation, and the removal is to be paid 14 by the square yard. 15 Must include with 2-02.5.OPT16.FR2. 16

17 2-02.4.OPT4.GR2 (Curb Removal) 18

(September 8, 1997) 19 Include in projects when removal of curb is outside the limits 20 of roadway excavation, and the removal is to be paid by the 21 linear foot. 22 Must include with 2-02.5.OPT17.FR2. 23

24 2-02.5.GR2 Payment 25

26 2-02.5.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-02.5 is revised by the following) 27


2-02.5.OPT1.FR2 (Removal of structures and obstructions included in other 30 work) 31 (August 1, 2017) 32 (1 fill-in) 33



2-02.5.OPT2.GR2 (Well Decommissioning) 38 (February 25, 2021) 39 Include in projects when wells will not be removed prior to 40 advertisement and will be removed as part of the Contract. 41 Use with 2-02.1.OPT5.GR2, 2-02.2.OPT1.GR2, and 2-42 02.3.OPT7.GR2. 43

44 2-02.5.OPT7.GR2 (Removal and Disposal of Hazardous Material) 45

(December 4, 2006) 46 Must include with 2-02.3.OPT3.FR2 and 47 2-02.4.OPT1.GR2. 48

49 2-02.5.OPT8.GR2 (Removing Miscellaneous Traffic Items) 50


53


2-02.5.OPT11.GR2 (Removal and Disposal of Asbestos Material) 1 (September 30, 1996) 2 Must include with 2-02.1.OPT2.FR2. 3

4 2-02.5.OPT12.GR2 (Removing Portion of Conc. Box Culvert) 5

(June 26, 2000) 6 Use in projects requiring removal of portions of existing box 7 culverts prior to extending or widening the structure. Include 8 with 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2, 2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, 6-9 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-10 02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, and 6-02.5.OPT5.GB6. 11

12 2-02.5.OPT13.FR2 (Pavement Removal) 13

(September 30, 1996) 14 Must include with 2-02.3(3).OPT1.FR2. 15 (1 fill-in) 16

17 2-02.5.OPT14.GR2 (Asbestos removal as changed condition) 18


21 2-02.5.OPT15.GR2 (Removal of portions of box culvert) 22

(June 26, 2000) 23 Use in projects requiring removal of portions of existing box 24 culverts prior to extending or widening the structure. Include 25 with 2-02.1.OPT3.GR2, 2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, 6-26 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-27 02.3(24)C.OPT2.GR6, and 6-02.5.OPT5.GB6. 28

29 2-02.5.OPT16.FR2 (Sidewalk Removal) 30

(November 3, 1999) 31 Must include with 2-02.4.OPT3.GR2 32 (1 fill-in) 33

34 2-02.5.OPT17.FR2 (Removal of portions of Curb) 35

(September 8, 1997) 36 Must include with 2-02.4.OPT4.GR2. 37 (1 fill-in) 38

39 2-03.GR2 Roadway Excavation and Embankment 40 41


2-03.3(2).GR2 Rock Cuts 44 45

2-03.3(2).INST1.GR2 (Section 2-03.3(2) is supplemented with the following) 46 Must use once preceding any of the following: 47 48

2-03.3(2).OPT1.GR2 (Rock Slope Scaling and Removal and Disposal 49 of Rock Slope Scaling Debris) 50 (April 5, 2010September 7, 2021) 51 Use in projects with rock slope scaling. Include with 2-52 03.4.OPT4.GR2 and 2-03.5.OPT3.GR2. 53


1 2-03.3(7).GR2 Disposal of Surplus Material 2



2-03.3(7).OPT1.FR2 (Contracting Agency furnished waste site) 7 (March 13, 1995) 8 Use in projects with Contracting Agency provided waste 9 sites. 10 (1 fill-in) 11 12

2-03.3(7).OPT2.FR2 (Waste material by embankment widening) 13 (March 13, 1995) 14 Use in projects where the Contracting Agency specifies 15 embankments to be widened. 16 (2 fill-ins) 17

18 2-03.3(7).OPT3.GR2 (Contracting Agency provided sites are not mandatory) 19

(March 13, 1995) 20 Use, when applicable, with 2-03.3(7).OPT1.FR2 21 or 2-03.3(7).OPT2.FR2. 22 23

2-03.3(7).OPT4.GR2 (Contracting Agency provided sites are 24 not of sufficient size) 25 (March 13, 1995) 26 Use, when applicable, with 2-03.3(7).OPT1.FR2 27 or 2-03.3(7).OPT2.FR2. 28 29

2-03.3(14).GR2 Embankment Construction 30 31

2-03.3(14)C.GR2 Compacting Earth Embankments 32 33

2-03.3(14)C.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-03.3(14)C is supplemented 34 with the following) 35 Must use once preceding any of the following: 36

37 2-03.3(14)C.OPT1.GR2 (March 13, 1995) 38

Use in projects when no payment for embankment 39 compaction (Method A) is included. 40

41 2-03.3(14)I.GB2 Embankments At Bridge And Trestle Ends. 42

43 2-03.3(14)I.INST1.GB2 (Section 2-03.3(14)I is supplemented 44

with the following) 45 Must use once preceding any of the following: 46 47

2-03.3(14)I.OPT1.FB2 (March 13, 1995) 48 Use in projects when the bridge approach 49 embankments must be constructed before the end 50 piers. 51 (2 fill-ins) 52

53


2-03.4.GR2 Measurement 1 2 2-03.4.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-03.4 is supplemented with the following) 3


2-03.4.OPT1.GR2 (Embankment In Place) 6 (March 13, 1995) 7 Must also include 2-03.5.OPT1.GR2. 8 Use in projects that require embankment widening for beam 9 guardrail and no other grading pay items are included in the 10 contract to construct the widening. 11

12 2-03.4.OPT2.GR2 (Measurement of roadway excavation and embankment) 13

(March 13, 1995) 14 Must include with 1-05.4.OPT2.GR1, Contractor surveying 15 - roadway. May be used without Contractor surveying. 16

17 2-03.4.OPT3.GR2 (Measurement of roadway excavation and embankment) 18

(March 13, 1995) 19 Use in minor grading projects when the original cross-20 sections are satisfactory for construction payment. 21

22 2-03.4.OPT4.GR2 (Rock Slope Scaling and Rock 23

Slope Scaling Debris Removal Including Haul) 24 (April 5, 2010) 25 Use in projects with rock slope scaling. Include with 26 2-03.3(2).OPT1.GR2 and 2-03.5.OPT3.GR2. 27

28 2-03.5.GR2 Payment 29



2-03.5.OPT1.GR2 (Embankment In Place) 34 (September 30, 1996) 35 Must include with 2-03.4.OPT1.GR2. 36

37 2-03.5.OPT2.FR2 (Preparation of waste sites) 38

(March 13, 1995) 39 Use in projects when the preparation of waste sites is 40 included in other work. 41 (1 fill-in) 42 43

2-03.5.OPT3.GR2 (Rock Slope Scaling and Rock Slope Scaling 44 Debris Removal Including Haul) 45 (April 5, 2010) 46 Use in projects with rock slope scaling. Include with 2-47 03.3(2).OPT1.GR2 and 2-03.4.OPT4.GR2. 48

49 2-06.GR2 Subgrade Preparation 50 51



2-06.3(1).GR2 Subgrade For Surfacing 1 2 2-06.3(1).INST1.GR2 (Section 2-06.3(1) is supplemented with the following) 3


2-06.3(1).OPT1.GR2 (Subgrade trimmer required) 6 (March 13, 1995) 7 Use in projects where a treated base or pavement will 8 be placed directly on the subgrade. 9 The project should include a bid item for "Gravel Borrow 10 Including Haul" or "Borrow Excavation Including Haul" 11 to ensure that sufficient fine material is available for 12 trimming. 13 14

2-06.3(1).OPT2.GR2 (Subgrade trimmer not required) 15 (March 13, 1995) 16 Use in grading-only projects where a treated base is 17 planned for construction on a future project. 18 The project should include a bid item for "Gravel Borrow 19 Including Haul" or "Borrow Excavation Including Haul" to 20 ensure that sufficient fine material is available for 21 trimming. The position of the future treated base is to 22 shown on the plans. 23

24 2-09.GR2 Structure Excavation 25 26

2-09.3.GR2 Construction Requirements 27 28 2-09.3(1).GR2 General Requirements 29

30 2-09.3(1)C.GR2 Removal Of Unstable Base Material 31 32

2-09.3(1)C.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-09.3(1)C is supplemented 33 with the following) 34 Must use once preceding any of the following: 35

36 2-09.3(1)C.OPT1.FB2 (Soils Prone to Disturbance) 37

(September 8, 2020) 38 Use in bridge projects in where soil in the bottom 39 of footing excavation is susceptible to disturbance 40 and may become unsuitable. Use at the 41 recommendation of the Geotechnical office. 42 (1 fill-in) 43 Fill-in #1 is the location of the soils prone to 44 disturbance. 45

46 2-09.3(3).GR2 Construction Requirements, Structure Excavation, 47

Class A 48 49

2-09.3(3)B.GR2 Excavation Using Open Pits – Extra 50 Excavation 51

52 2-09.3(3)B.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-09.3(3)B is supplemented 53

with the following) 54


Must use once preceding any of the following: 1 2 2-09.3(3)B.OPT1.FB2 (Extra Excavation and Open Pit Excavation 3

Not Allowed) 4 (April 3, 2017September 7, 2021) 5 Use in projects where extra excavation and 6 open pit excavation is not allowed at specific 7 locations. The fill-in specifies the location(s) 8 where extra excavation and open pit 9 excavation is not allowed. 10 (1 fill-in) 11

12 2-09.3(3)B.OPT2.FR2 (Extra Excavation and Open Pit Excavation) 13

(April 1, 2019) 14 Use in projects where temporary excavation 15 slopes are located beneath structures, critical 16 facilities, or where recommended by the 17 Geotechnical Office. The fill-in specifies the 18 location(s) where extra excavation and open 19 pit excavation is allowed. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22 2-09.3(3)D.GR2 Shoring And Cofferdams 23 24

2-09.3(3)D.INST1.GR2 (Section 2-09.3(3)D is supplemented with the 25 following) 26 Must use once preceding any of the following: 27

28 2-09.3(3)D.OPT1.GB2 (Protecting existing pavement) 29

(March 13, 1995) 30 Use in projects when bridges are over or adjacent 31 to existing highways. 32

33 2-09.3(3)D.OPT2.GB2 (Protecting RR tracks) 34

(August 2, 2010) 35 Use in projects when bridges are over or adjacent 36 to existing railroad tracks. 37

38 2-09.3(3)D.OPT3.FB2 (March 13, 1995) 39

Use with 2-09.3(3)D.OPT2.GB2 when 40 construction is required near railroad tracks, or 41 structures which require extensive shoring. 42 (3 fill-ins) 43


46 2-09.4.INST1.GR2 (The subsection Lower Limits of Section 2-09.4 is 47

supplemented with the following) 48 Must use once preceding any of the following: 49

50 2-09.4.OPT1.GB2 (January 4, 2010) 51

(Additional structure excavation under girders 52 at end piers) 53


Use in projects where excavation is required outside of 1 normal structure excavation limits for end pier footings. 2

3 2-12.GR2 Construction Geosynthetic 4 5



2-12.1.OPT1.GR2 Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope 11 (November 17, 1997) 12 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes. 13 Slope design should be performed by the Olympia Service 14 Center Materials Laboratory or a geotechnical consultant. 15 Use details from DETAILS.CEL Library; D225, D229, D230, 16 and D230A or D230B. 17


20 2-12.2(9-03.14).GR2 (Borrow) 21

(Section 9-03.14 is supplemented with the following) 22 Must use once preceding any of the following: 23

24 2-12.2(9-03.14).OPT1.FR2 (Borrow for Geosynthetic Reinforced Slopes) 25

(November 17, 1997) 26 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 27 slopes. 28 (1 fill-in) 29

30 2-12.2(9-07.9).GR2 (Cold Drawn Wire) 31


34 2-12.2(9-07.9).OPT1.GR2 (Cold Drawn Wire) 35

(November 17, 1997) 36 Use in projects where welded wire faced geosynthetic 37 reinforced slopes are specified. 38

39 2-12.2(9-33.2(2)).GR2 (Geosynthetic Properties for Retaining Walls and 40

Reinforced Slopes) 41 (Section 9-33.2(2) is supplemented with the following) 42 Must use once preceding any of the following: 43

44 2-12.2(9-33.2(2)).OPT1.FR2 (Geosynthetic Properties for Reinforced 45

Slopes) 46 (January 2, 2012) 47 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 48 slopes. The slope class must be identified in fill-in 6 49 based on the following: Class 1 is typically reinforced 50 slopes which support bridge abutments, buildings, 51 critical utilities, or other facilities which the 52 consequences of poor performance or failure would be 53


severe. In general, slopes greater than 30 feet in height. 1 Class 2 is all reinforced slopes not categorized as Class 2 1. 3 (6 fill-ins) 4

5 2-12.2(9-33.2(2)).OPT2.GR2 (Geosynthetic Properties for Turf 6

Reinforcement Mat) 7 (April 5, 2004) 8 Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 9 with a turf reinforcement mat facing are specified. 10

11 2-12.2(9-33.4(1)).GR2 (Source Approval) 12

(Section 9-33.4(1) is supplemented with the following) 13 Must use once preceding any of the following: 14

15 2-12.2(9-33.4(1)).OPT1.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope) 16

Primary Reinforcement 17 (April 5, 2004) 18 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 19 slopes. 20


Secondary Reinforcement 23 (April 5, 2004) 24 Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 25 with secondary reinforcement are specified. 26 27

2-12.2(9-33.4(1)).OPT3.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope) 28 Turf Reinforcement Mat 29 (November 17, 1997) 30 Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 31 with turf reinforcement mat facing are specified. 32

33 2-12.2(9-33.4(3)).GR2 (Acceptance Samples) 34


37 2-12.2(9-33.4(3)).OPT1.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced) 38

Slope Primary Reinforcement 39 (November 17, 1997) 40 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 41 slopes. 42


Secondary Reinforcement 45 (April 5, 2004) 46 Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 47 with secondary reinforcement are specified. 48 49

50 2-12.2(9-33.4(3)).OPT3.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope Turf) 51

Reinforcement Mat 52 (November 17, 1997) 53


Use in projects where geosynthetic reinforced slopes 1 with turf reinforcement mat facing are specified. 2

3 2-12.2(9-33.4(4)).GR2 (Acceptance by Certificate of Compliance) 4


7 2-12.2(9-33.4(4)).OPT1.GR2 (Reinforced Slope) 8

(November 17, 1997) 9 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced 10 slopes. 11

12 2-12.3.GR2 Construction Requirements 13

14 2-12.3.INST1.GR2 (Supplemental Instructions) 15


18 2-12.3.OPT1.GR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope Construction 19

Requirements) 20 (November 17, 1997) 21 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes. 22 Slope facing options which include vegetative cover should 23 only be used at sites where the average annual 24 precipitation is 20 inches or more. 25

26 2-12.3.OPT2.FR2 (Turf Reinforced Mat Facing Construction) 27

(August 2, 2010) 28 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes 29 with turf reinforcement mat facing. In general, use for 30 slopes no steeper than 1.2H:1V. 31 (2 fill-ins) 32

33 2-12.3.OPT3.GR2 (Geosynthetic Wrapped Slope Facing Construction) 34

(November 17, 1997) 35 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes 36 with geosynthetic wrapped facing. Because of planting 37 requirements, do not use this option for sites where the 38 elevation is over 1500 feet. In general, use for slopes no 39 steeper than 1H:1V. 40

41 2-12.3.OPT4.GR2 (Welded Wire Facing Construction) 42

(November 17, 1997) 43 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes 44 with welded wire facing. In general, use for slopes no 45 steeper than 1H:2V. 46

47 2-12.3.OPT5.GR2 (Installing Guardrail Posts in Geosynthetic) 48

Reinforced Slopes 49 (November 17, 1997) 50 Use in projects requiring guardrail on geosynthetic 51 reinforced slopes. 52

53


2-12.4.GR2 Measurement 1 2 2-12.4.INST1.GR2 (Supplemental Instructions) 3


6 2-12.4.OPT1.FR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope) 7

(January 5, 1998) 8 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes. 9 (1 fill-in) 10

11 2-12.5.GR2 Payment 12

13 2-12.5.INST1.GR2 (Supplemental Instructions) 14


17 2-12.5.OPT1.FR2 (Geosynthetic Reinforced Slope) 18

(November 17, 1997) 19 Use in projects requiring geosynthetic reinforced slopes. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


2-02.GR2 1

Removal of Structures and Obstructions 2 3 2-02.2.INST1.GR2 4 Section 2-02.2 is supplemented with the following: 5 6 2-02.2.OPT1.GR2 7

(February 25, 2021) 8 Materials shall conform to WAC 173-160-381 for the type of well scheduled for 9 decommissioning. 10

11 2-02.3.GR2 12

Construction Requirements 13 14 2-02.3.INST1.GR2 15 Section 2-02.3 is supplemented with the following: 16 17 2-02.3.OPT1.FR2 18

(February 17, 1998September 7, 2021) 19

Removal of Obstructions 20 The following miscellaneous Obstructions shall be removed and disposed of: 21 22

*** $$1$$ *** 23 24 2-02.3.OPT2.FR2 25

(March 13, 1995) 26

Removing Miscellaneous Traffic Items 27 The following miscellaneous traffic items shall be removed and disposed of: 28 29

*** $$1$$ *** 30 31 2-02.3.OPT3.FR2 32


Removal and Disposal of Hazardous Material 34 Hazardous material is suspected to exist on this project. Approximate limits of 35 contamination are identified in the Plans. The site history, prior studies and/or test results 36 indicate a potential for encountering *** $$1$$ ***. 37 38 Copies of the environmental reports are available for review at the Engineer’s office. All 39 necessary permits for this work will be furnished by the Contracting Agency. The 40 Contractor is responsible for all work, records, and reports required to perform the work 41 described in this section. The Contracting Agency will perform all testing of suspected 42 hazardous or contaminated material. 43 44 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 10 working days prior to beginning work in the 45 area identified in the Plans as contaminated. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 46 immediately if contamination is discovered in areas other than those identified in the 47 Plans, or is suspected through observations such as an oily sheen or discolored soils that 48 may or may not emit strong chemical odors. 49 50


Contaminated Soil and Hazardous Material 1 The Engineer will determine the limits of excavation required. All material that is 2 designated by the Engineer to be removed shall be handled and stored in a manner that 3 prevents the spread of contamination to adjacent soil or water. Separate stockpiles shall 4 be maintained for known hazardous or contaminated material and for suspected 5 hazardous or contaminated material. The Contractor shall transport hazardous or 6 contaminated material and dispose of it at a permitted facility. The Contractor shall provide 7 the Engineer with a copy of the shipping manifest or bill of lading indicating the amount 8 of material hauled to disposal, and bearing the disposal site operator’s confirmation for 9 receipt of the material. Manifests shall be submitted in accordance with Section 1-07.5(7). 10 11

Contaminated Water 12 All water that is removed from the areas of contamination, including free water that 13 leaches from contaminated soil stockpiles or water that is suspected of being 14 contaminated, shall be collected, handled and stored in a manner that prevents the 15 spread of contamination to adjacent soil or water. The Contractor shall transport 16 contaminated water and dispose of it at a permitted facility. The Contractor shall provide 17 the Engineer with a copy of the shipping manifest or bill of lading indicating the amount 18 of material hauled to disposal, and bearing the disposal site operator’s confirmation for 19 receipt of the material. Manifests shall be submitted in accordance with Section 1-07.5(7). 20

21 2-02.3.OPT4.GR2 22

(September 30, 1996) 23

Asbestos Handling And Disposal 24 Prior to and during, the performance of any contract work, the Contractor shall verify that 25 no asbestos containing materials are involved or will be disturbed. When asbestos is 26 encountered, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits from, and 27 provide notification to, the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries, the U.S. 28 EPA, the local air pollution control agency, and other permitting and regulatory agencies 29 with jurisdiction over the work involving asbestos as the law requires. 30 31 Prior to commencing asbestos related work, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer 32 with written verification of approvals and notifications that have been given and/or 33 obtained from the required jurisdictional agencies, and the Contractor’s schedule for all 34 work involving asbestos removal. The schedule shall include the sequencing and 35 scheduling of asbestos related work, and coordination with subcontractors. The 36 Contractor shall notify the Engineer when all approvals have been received and 37 notifications have been made, as required by the agencies involved. 38 39 The Contractor shall ensure the safety of all workers, visitors to the site, and the general 40 public in accordance with all applicable laws, rules, and regulations. 41 42 The Contractor shall designate a Washington State Certified Asbestos Supervisor (CAS) 43 to personally supervise the asbestos removal and to ensure that the handling and removal 44 of asbestos is accomplished by certified asbestos workers, pursuant to Washington State 45 Department of Labor and Industries standards. The Contractor shall ensure that the 46 removal and disposal of asbestos meets the requirements of EPA regulations 40 CFR 47 Part 61, local health department regulations, and all other applicable regulations. 48

49


2-02.3.OPT5.GR2 1


Asbestos Handling And Disposal 3 Prior to performance of any contract work, the Contractor shall obtain all permits from, 4 and provide notification to, the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries, the 5 U.S. EPA, the local air pollution control agency, and other permitting and regulatory 6 agencies with jurisdiction over the work involving asbestos as the law requires. 7 8 Prior to commencing asbestos related work, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer 9 with written verification of approvals and notifications that have been given and/or 10 obtained from the required jurisdictional agencies, and the Contractor’s schedule for all 11 work involving asbestos removal. The schedule shall include the sequencing and 12 scheduling of asbestos related work, and coordination with subcontractors. The 13 Contractor shall notify the Engineer when all approvals have been received and 14 notifications have been made, as required by the agencies involved. 15 16 The Contractor shall ensure the safety of all workers, visitors to the site, and the general 17 public in accordance with all applicable laws, rules, and regulations. 18

19 The Contractor shall designate a Washington State Certified Asbestos Supervisor (CAS) 20 to personally supervise the asbestos removal and to ensure that the handling and removal 21 of asbestos is accomplished by certified asbestos workers, pursuant to Washington State 22 Department of Labor and Industries standards. The Contractor shall ensure that the 23 removal and disposal of asbestos meets the requirements of EPA regulation 40 CFR Part 24 61, local health department regulations, and all other applicable regulations. 25

26 2-02.3.OPT6.FB2 27

(June 26, 2000) 28

Salvage of Removed Structure Items 29 All *** $$1$$ *** of the existing bridge or structure being removed shall remain the 30 property of the Contracting Agency. 31 32 The Contractor shall transport the specified salvaged items to the following location: 33

34 ***$$2$$*** 35 36

The Contractor shall stack the material where directed by the Engineer. The Contractor 37 shall contact the Engineer at least five working days prior to scheduled delivery of the 38 items to confirm delivery arrangements. 39

40 2-02.3.OPT7.GR2 41

(February 25, 2021) 42

Decommissioning of Wells 43 1. Protect the well in place until decommissioned. 44 45 2. The Contractor shall provide the Department of Ecology (Ecology) a Notice of Intent 46

(NOI) prior to decommissioning a well. A pdf of the NOI shall be provided to the 47 Engineer within 24 hours of submittal to Ecology. A pdf of any Ecology required well 48 reports shall be provided to the Engineer within 24 hours of submittal to the Ecology. 49 Well reports shall include tag numbers, coordinates or other data required by Ecology 50 for incorporation into the Ecology database for wells. 51


1 3. Licensed well drillers shall be utilized in accordance with Chapter 18.104 RCW, the 2

Washington Well Construction Act. 3 4 4. The Contractor shall comply with WAC 173-160-381 which describes the standards 5

for decommissioning a well. 6 7 5. The Contractor shall comply with WAC 173-160-261 requiring all dug wells to have 8

a proper cap to prevent injury and contamination. 9 10 6. The Contractor shall comply with local laws pertaining to the decommissioning of 11

wells. 12 13 7. This Work shall be completed prior to physical completion of the project or as agreed 14

upon with the Engineer. 15 16 2-02.3(2).GB2 17

Removal of Bridges, Box Culverts, and other Drainage Structures 18 19 2-02.3(2).INST1.GB2 20


(June 26, 2000) 24 The Contractor shall remove existing Bridge *** $$1$$ *** after routing traffic onto *** 25 $$2$$ ***. 26

27 2-02.3(2).OPT2.FB2 28

(June 26, 2000) 29 The Contractor shall remove existing Bridge ***$$1$$*** in stages as shown in the 30 Plans. 31

32 2-02.3(2).OPT3.FB2 33

(June 26, 2000) 34 The Contractor shall remove the following portions of Bridge *** $$1$$ ***, as shown 35 in the Plans: 36

37 *** $$2$$ *** 38

39 2-02.3(2).OPT7.FB2 40

(June 26, 2000) 41 Removal Limits in Water 42 The existing piers of Bridge *** $$1$$ *** within the wetted perimeter of the *** $$2$$ 43 *** which do not conflict with new construction shall be removed to elevation *** 44 $$3$$ ***. All broken concrete, and other bridge removal debris shall be removed 45 from the bottom of the *** $$4$$ ***. 46

47 2-02.3(2).OPT10.GB2 48

Use of Explosives 49 50


2-02.3(2).OPT10(B).FB2 1 (January 2, 2018) 2 The Contractor may use explosives in the demolition of *** $$1$$ ***. 3 4 If explosives are used for any removal operation, the Contractor shall: 5

6 1. Conform with Section 1-07.22, including providing notice of the time and 7

duration of the blasting operation to all residents and property owners within 8 the safety zone. 9

10 2. Submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a detailed blasting plan. 11 12 3. Perform a pre-blast survey to document the pre-blast condition of all 13

structures within the safety zone, and provide copies of the pre-blast survey 14 to the Engineer. 15

16 4. Obtain permits and approvals from all applicable governmental agencies. 17

18 The blasting plan shall include, at a minimum, the following: 19

20 1. Show all stages of the demolition work. 21 22 2. Show details of all “pre-weakening” of the bridge, including locations and 23

extent of the Structure modifications. 24 25 3. Specify the explosive and charge type and quantity. 26 27 4. Specify the firing sequence. 28 29 5. Specify the fall direction and fall sequence of the bridge, and show locations 30

and details of all cables and structure attachments used for control. 31 32 6. Show details of drill holes and explosive placement. 33 34 7. Specify types of ground vibration monitoring equipment and show the 35

locations of such equipment. 36 37 8. Specify how noise and shock waves are kept to a minimum. 38 39 9. Specify fragment, dust, and debris control. 40 41 10. Name, address, and phone number(s) of the licensed explosives expert 42

supervising the operation. 43 44 11. Specify safety and security procedures, including, but not limited to, the 45

following: 46 47 a. Methods of storage and transportation. 48 49 b. Measures taken to secure the blasting materials at all times, 50

including all non-working hours. 51


1 c. Measures taken to secure the bridge site at all times during and 2

after installation of all charges and after blasting. 3 4 d. Safeguards against accidental discharge. 5 6 e. Safety zone limits. 7 8 f. Barricade locations. 9 10 g. Location of firing device, warning signals, warning signs. 11 12 h. Communication procedures for notifying the Engineer, nearby 13

residents, and all personnel of impending blasting. 14 15 The Contractor shall enlist a licensed, experienced explosives expert to supervise all 16 stages of explosive work, including hole drilling and explosive placement, safety 17 procedures, and blasting operations. 18 19 At least five to ten working days prior to the scheduled blast, a pre-blast conference 20 shall be held to discuss the blasting plan, all pre-blast preparations of the bridge, the 21 pre-blast, blast, and post-blast procedures, and the responsibilities and activities of 22 the personnel and equipment involved. Those attending shall include, at a minimum, 23 the project superintendent, the licensed explosives expert assigned to supervise the 24 work, and the work crew leaders responsible for performing the pre-blast and post-25 blast activities. 26 27 Traffic shall not be allowed in the vicinity during blasting operations. 28 29 All damage as a result of the Contractor’s blasting operations shall be repaired by 30 the Contractor at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency in accordance 31 with Sections 1-07.13 and 1-07.14. 32

33 2-02.3(2).OPT11.GB2 34

(January 2, 2018) 35 Requirements for Closing Bridge to Traffic Prior to Beginning Removal 36 The Contractor shall not close the existing bridge to traffic, and shall not begin bridge 37 removal operations, until the following conditions are met: 38 39

1. The Contractor’s bridge demolition plan Working Drawing submittal has 40 been processed and all comments from the Engineer have been 41 addressed. 42

43 2. The Contractor has received the Engineer's acceptance of all shop 44

drawings and materials submittals for materials required for the work to be 45 executed during the closure. 46

47 3. The Contractor has submitted a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of a 48

report on the status of material delivery. The report shall specify the 49 materials already available at the site, the materials yet to arrive at the site, 50 and the scheduled delivery dates of the materials yet to arrive at the site, 51


with written verification from the supplier or copies of confirmed purchase 1 orders indicating the delivery dates of the materials yet to arrive at the site. 2

3 4. The Contractor shall provide an updated progress schedule in accordance 4

with Section 1-08.3 confirming that the scheduled delivery of materials will 5 meet the schedule to complete the work within the allowed time. The 6 Contractor shall supplement the progress schedule with a written narrative 7 describing the assumed production rates and planned resource allocations 8 that support the bridge construction activity durations provided in the 9 progress schedule. 10

11 5. The Contractor has received the Engineer’s concurrence to proceed. 12

13 2-02.3(2).OPT12.GR2 14

(June 26, 2000) 15 Removing Portions of Existing Box Culvert 16 The Contractor shall remove, to the limits shown in the Plans, the existing wingwalls, 17 wingwall footings, aprons, and parapet walls of the box culvert to be extended. 18

19 2-02.3(3).GR2 20

Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters 21 22 2-02.3(3).INST1.GR2 23


(September 8, 1997) 27 The approximate thickness of the *** $$1$$ *** pavement is *** $$2$$ ***. 28

29 2-02.4.GR2 30

Measurement 31 32 2-02.4.INST1.GR2 33 Section 2-02.4 is supplemented with the following: 34 35 2-02.4.OPT1.GR2 36

(December 4, 2006) 37 Hazardous material excavation including haul will be measured by the cubic yard. All 38 excavated material will be measured in the position it occupied before the excavation was 39 performed. An original ground measurement will be taken using cross-section or digital 40 terrain modeling survey techniques. The original ground will be compared with a survey 41 of the excavation area taken after the work is completed. 42

43 2-02.4.OPT2.GR2 44

(September 8, 1997) 45 Pavement removal will be measured by the square yard. 46

47 2-02.4.OPT3.GR2 48

(October 25, 1999) 49 Sidewalk removal will be measured by the square yard. 50

51


2-02.4.OPT4.GR2 1 (September 8, 1997) 2 Curb removal will be measured by the linear foot. 3

4 2-02.5.GR2 5

Payment 6 7 2-02.5.INST1.GR2 8 Section 2-02.5 is revised by the following: 9 10 2-02.5.OPT1.FR2 11

(August 7, 2017) 12 Payment will be made for the following bid item when it is included in the proposal. 13 14 All costs for the removal of structures and obstructions shall be included in *** $$1$$ ***. 15


(February 25, 2021) 21 “Decommissioning Wells”, lump sum including all Work as specified and payment to 22 regulatory agencies for any associated fees for monitoring or decommissioning of wells. 23

24 2-02.5.OPT7.GR2 25

(December 4, 2006) 26 “Hazardous Material Handling And Disposal”, by force account as provided in Section 1-27 09.6. 28 29 All costs associated with storing stockpiled hazardous waste and contaminated soils, 30 collecting, handling and storing contaminated water, loading the stockpiled material into 31 the hauling conveyance for transport to the disposal site, and transporting and disposing 32 of hazardous or contaminated materials at an approved facility will be paid by force 33 account under the item “Hazardous Material Handling And Disposal”. 34 35 To provide a common basis for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount 36 in the proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total bid. 37 38 “Hazardous Material Excavation Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard. 39 The unit contract price for “Hazardous Material Excavation Incl. Haul” shall be full pay for 40 all costs associated with excavating the material designated to be removed, hauling it to 41 the stockpile location, and stockpiling the excavated material. 42

43 2-02.5.OPT8.GR2 44

(September 30, 1996) 45 "Removing Miscellaneous Traffic Item", lump sum. 46

47 2-02.5.OPT11.GR2 48

(September 30, 1996) 49 "Removal and Disposal of Asbestos Material", lump sum. 50

51


2-02.5.OPT12.GR2 1 (June 26, 2000) 2 "Removing Portion of Conc. Box Culv.", lump sum. 3 4 The lump sum contract price for "Removing Portion of Conc. Box Culv." shall be full pay 5 for preparing the box culvert for the extension by removing and disposing of all concrete 6 and other debris specified. 7

8 2-02.5.OPT13.FR2 9

(September 30, 1996) 10 "Removing *** $$1$$ *** Pavement", per square yard. 11

12 2-02.5.OPT14.GR2 13

(September 30, 1996) 14 Payment for asbestos removal, handling, disposal, cost of permits, and all other work will 15 be as provided in Section 1-04.7, unless such work is explicitly included as a part of 16 another pay item in the contract. 17

18 2-02.5.OPT15.GR2 19

(June 26, 2000) 20 All costs in connection with removing the box culvert wingwalls, footings, aprons, and 21 parapet wall and disposing of concrete and other debris as specified shall be included in 22 the unit contract prices for the items of work involved in the extension of the box culvert(s). 23

24 2-02.5.OPT16.FR2 25

(November 3, 1999) 26 "Removing *** $$1$$ *** Sidewalk”, per square yard. 27

28 2-02.5.OPT17.FR2 29

(September 8, 1997) 30 “Removing *** $$1$$ *** Curb”, per linear foot. 31

32

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


2-03.GR2 1

Roadway Excavation and Embankment 2 3 2-03.3.GR2 4

Construction Requirements 5 6 2-03.3(2).GR2 7

Rock Cuts 8 9 2-03.3(2).INST1.GR2 10


(April 5, 2010September 7, 2021) 14 Rock Slope Scaling and Removal and Disposal of Rock Slope Scaling Debris 15 The Contractor shall remove loose rock and soil from the existing rock slope locations 16 shown in the Plans or as specified by the Engineer, and shall remove and dispose of 17 all rock slope scaling debris generated by the work. 18 19

Equipment 20 Rock slope scaling shall be performed with scaling bars, portable hydraulic 21 wedges, air pillows, hand drills, splitters, and other mechanical or hand tools 22 demonstrated to be effective in performing the work to the satisfaction of the 23 Engineer. 24 25 Submittals 26 The Contractor shall submit a rock slope scaling plan to the Engineer for 27 approval in accordance with Section 1-05.3 as a Type 2 Working Drawing. The 28 rock slope scaling plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 29

30 1. Documented work experience of all rock slope scaling foremen 31

supervisors and scalers scheduled to be working on the project. Rock 32 slope scaling foremen supervisors shall have at least 1,500 hours of 33 documented experience as a rock slope scaler. Rock slope scalers 34 shall have at least 1,000 hours of documented experience as a rock 35 slope scaler. 36

37 2. The proposed construction sequence and schedule. 38 39 3. The type of tools and equipment to be used for rock scaling 40

purposes. 41 42 4. The number of rock slope scaling crews to be employed on the 43

project, with a rock slope scaling crew defined as one qualified 44 foreman scaling supervisor and two qualified scalers. 45

46 5. Operation plan for collection, removal and disposal of all rock slope 47

scaling debris generated by the rock slope scaling work. 48 49


6. Operation plan for protection of roadway surface, railroad facilities, 1 structures, utilities, and other facilities adjacent to the rock slope 2 scaling locations. 3

4 7. If the Roadway is exposed to the collection of rock slope scaling 5

debris, the submittal shall include the equipment and procedure to be 6 used to clear the Roadway for public use between rock slope scaling 7 operations. 8

9 The Contractor shall not begin rock slope scaling operations until receiving the 10 Engineer's approval of the rock slope scaling plan. 11 12 Rock Slope Scaling Construction Requirements 13 As a first item of work, the Contractor shall clear the rock slope of trees and 14 woody vegetation within the work zone within 15 feet of the slope crest or as 15 otherwise specified by the Engineer. Clearing shall conform to Sections 2-01.1 16 and 2-01.3(1), and the requirement that the vegetation shall be close cut, leaving 17 the root wad intact. 18 19 The Contractor shall conduct rock slope scaling operations in accordance with 20 the details shown in the Plans, the traffic control restrictions and requirements 21 shown in the Plans and specified in the Special Provisions, and the rock slope 22 scaling plan as approved by the Engineer. The size and work experience of the 23 rock slope scaling crew as defined above shall be maintained at all times. 24 25 Rock slope scaling shall begin at the top of the rock slope and work shall 26 proceed down slope, removing loose rock and soil as the work progresses. The 27 extent of rock slope scaling shall be as shown in the Plans and as adjusted in 28 the field by the Engineer. 29 30 Rock Slope Scaling Debris Collection and Removal 31 The Contractor shall collect, remove and dispose of all rock slope scaling debris 32 generated by the work, including all rock debris within the limits of the project 33 present at the base of the slope at the beginning of the project. Ditches and 34 benches shall be cleared of all rock slope scaling debris and returned to original 35 functional condition as specified by the Engineer 36 37 The Contractor shall break up any rocks that are too large to transport into 38 manageable sized pieces for haul. 39 40 Rock slope scaling debris collection and removal shall be conducted in 41 accordance with the traffic control restrictions and requirements shown in the 42 Plans and specified in the Special Provisions, and the rock slope scaling plan 43 as approved by the Engineer. 44 45 Except when the Plans or Special Provisions specify a Contracting Agency 46 provided site for disposal of all or specific portions of the rock slope scaling 47 debris, all rock slope scaling debris shall be disposed of at a site conforming to 48 Section 2-03.3(7)C. 49

50


2-03.3(7).GR2 1

Disposal Of Surplus Material 2 3 2-03.3(7).INST1.GR2 4


(March 13, 1995) 8 Surplus materials may be disposed of within the Contracting Agency furnished site, 9 as detailed in the Plans. For informational purposes the maximum capacity of this 10 site is *** $$1$$ *** cubic yards, neat line measurement. 11

12 2-03.3(7).OPT2.FR2 13

(March 13, 1995) 14 Surplus materials may be disposed of by widening embankments at the following 15 locations, as may be designated by the Engineer : 16 17

*** $$1$$ *** 18 19

For informational purposes the maximum capacity of the embankment widening sites 20 is *** $$2$$ *** cubic yards, neat line measurement 21

22 2-03.3(7).OPT3.GR2 23

(March 13, 1995) 24 The Contractor is not required to utilize the Contracting Agency provided site(s), and 25 may make arrangements, at the Contractor's expense, for the disposal of waste 26 materials, and shall protect the Contracting Agency from all damages arising from 27 the Contractor's waste disposal operations. 28

29 2-03.3(7).OPT4.GR2 30

(March 13, 1995) 31 It is anticipated that the waste site(s) provided by the Contracting Agency will not be 32 of sufficient size or capacity to dispose of all excess materials. Therefore, it will be 33 necessary for the Contractor to make arrangements, at the Contractor's expense, for 34 the disposal of excess waste materials and shall protect the Contracting Agency from 35 all damages that may arise from the waste disposal operations. 36

37 2-03.3(14).GR2 38

Embankment Construction 39 40 2-03.3(14)C.GR2 41

Compacting Earth Embankments 42 43 2-03.3(14)C.INST1.GR2 44

Section 2-03.3(14)C is supplemented with the following: 45 46 2-03.3(14)C.OPT1.GR2 47

(March 13, 1995) 48 All embankments, except waste embankments, shall be compacted using 49 Method A. 50

51


2-03.3(14)I.GB2 1 Embankments at Bridge And Trestle Ends 2

3 2-03.3(14)I.INST1.GB2 4

Section 2-03.3(14)I is supplemented with the following: 5 6 2-03.3(14)I.OPT1.FB2 7

(March 13, 1995) 8 The approach embankments at the ends of *** $$1$$ *** shall be constructed 9 *** $$2$$ *** before undertaking the construction of the end piers. 10

11 2-03.4.GR2 12


(March 13, 1995) 19 The embankment widening for guardrail will be measured by the cubic yard, between the 20 original roadway slope and the neat lines of the widened embankment. 21

22 2-03.4.OPT2.GR2 23

(March 13, 1995) 24 Only one determination of the original ground elevation will be made on this project. 25 Measurement for roadway excavation and embankment will be based on the original 26 ground elevations recorded previous to the award of this contract. 27 28 If discrepancies are discovered in the ground elevations which will materially affect the 29 quantities of earthwork, the original computations of earthwork quantities will be adjusted 30 accordingly. 31 32 Earthwork quantities will be computed, either manually or by means of electronic data 33 processing equipment, by use of the average end area method or by the finite element 34 analysis method utilizing digital terrain modeling techniques. 35 36 Copies of the ground cross-section notes will be available for the bidder's inspection, 37 before the opening of bids, at the Engineer's office and at the Region office. 38 39 Upon award of the contract, copies of the original ground cross-sections will be furnished 40 to the successful bidder on request to the Engineer. 41

42 2-03.4.OPT3.GR2 43

(March 13, 1995) 44 Only one determination of the original ground elevation will be made on this project. 45 Measurement for roadway excavation and embankment will be based on the original 46 ground elevations recorded previous to the award of this contract. Control stakes will be 47 set during construction to provide the Contractor with all essential information for the 48 construction of excavation and embankments. 49 50


If discrepancies are discovered in the ground elevations which will materially affect the 1 quantities of earthwork, the original computations of earthwork quantities will be adjusted 2 accordingly. 3 4 Earthwork quantities will be computed, either manually or by means of electronic data 5 processing equipment, by use of the average end area method or by the finite element 6 analysis method utilizing digital terrain modeling techniques. 7 8 Copies of the ground cross-section notes will be available for the bidder's inspection, 9 before the opening of bids, at the Engineer's office and at the Region office. 10 11 Upon award of the contract, copies of the original ground cross-sections will be furnished 12 to the successful bidder on request to the Engineer. 13

14 2-03.4.OPT4.GR2 15

(April 5, 2010) 16 Rock slope scaling will be measured by the crew hour. 17 18 Rock slope scaling debris removal including haul will be measured by the cubic yard in 19 the hauling conveyance at the point of removal from the work site. 20

21 2-03.5.GR2 22

Payment 23 24 2-03.5.INST1.GR2 25 Section 2-03.5 is supplemented with the following: 26 27 2-03.5.OPT1.GR2 28

(September 30, 1996) 29 "Embankment in Place", per cubic yard. 30 31 The unit contract price per cubic yard shall be full pay to perform the work as specified, 32 including terracing the existing slope. 33

34 2-03.5.OPT2.FR2 35

(March 13, 1995) 36 All costs in connection with the preparation of waste sites and waste deposits shall be 37 included in the *** $$1$$ ***. 38

39 2-03.5.OPT3.GR2 40

(April 5, 2010) 41 "Rock Slope Scaling", per crew hour. 42 The unit contract price per crew hour for "Rock Slope Scaling" shall be full pay for 43 performing the work as specified. 44 45 "Rock Slope Scaling Debris Removal Incl. Haul", per cubic yard. 46 The unit contract price per cubic yard for "Rock Slope Scaling Debris Removal Incl. Haul" 47 shall be full pay for performing the work as specified, including collection, removal and 48 disposal of all rock debris within the limits of the project present at the base of the slope 49 at the beginning of the project. 50 51


All costs in connection with felling of trees and woody vegetation from the site as 1 specified, and collection, removal and disposal of all trees and woody vegetation cut and 2 removed from the slope, shall be included in the lump sum contract price for "Clearing 3 and Grubbing". 4

5


2-09.GR2 1

Structure Excavation 2 3 2-09.3.GR2 4


General Requirements 8 9 2-09.3(1)C.GR2 10

Removal of Unstable Base Material 11 12 2-09.3(1)C.INST1.GR2 13

Section 2-09.3(1)C is supplemented with the following: 14 15 2-09.3(1)C.OPT1.FB2 16

(September 8, 2020) 17 If the soil in the footing excavation *** $$1$$ *** is disturbed and becomes 18 unsuitable before placement of the concrete footing, the Contractor shall 19 excavate below the plan grade a maximum of 1 foot, as determined by the 20 Engineer, and backfill with gravel backfill for foundations. 21

22 2-09.3(3).GR2 23

Construction Requirements, Structure Excavation, Class A 24 25 2-09.3(3)B.GR2 26

Excavation Using Open Pits – Extra Excavation 27 28 2-09.3(3)B.INST1.GR2 29

Section 2-09.3(3)B is supplemented with the following: 30 31 2-09.3(3)B.OPT1.FB2 32

(April 3, 2017September 7, 2021) 33 Extra excavation and open pit excavation, as defined in this section, will not be 34 allowed at the following location(s): 35 36

*** $$1$$ *** 37 38 Shoring for the excavation sites specified above shall be Structural Shoring in 39 accordance with Section 2-09.3(3)D. The Contractor shall submit Type 3E 2E 40 Working Drawings consisting of shoring plans in accordance with Section 2-41 09.3(3)D. 42

43 2-09.3(3)B.OPT2.FR2 44

(April 1, 2019) 45 The Contracting Agency has identified the following areas where the Contractor 46 may dig open pits or perform extra excavation without shoring or cofferdams 47 provided slope stability is evaluated using limit equilibrium methods: 48 49

*** $$1$$ *** 50 51


Submittals and Design Requirements 1 At the locations identified above, the temporary excavation slopes shall be 2 designed by an engineer or engineering geologist licensed in Washington State. 3 The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings for the areas identified 4 above. The Type 2E Working Drawings may address each site individually, as 5 groups, or in entirety. The design shall use limit equilibrium slope stability 6 methods and software and shall be completed in conformance with the WSDOT 7 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03. The design shall be based on site specific 8 conditions and shall include a stability assessment of interim or intermediate 9 stages if they are used and shall include all applicable surcharge loads including 10 those from construction equipment or stock piled materials. Required submittal 11 elements include, at a minimum, the following: 12 13

1. A plan view showing the limits of the excavation and its relationship to 14 traffic, Structures, utilities and other pertinent project elements. If the 15 stability of the excavation requires no-load zones or equipment 16 setback distances, those shall be shown on the plan view. 17

18 2. A typical or controlling cross section showing the proposed 19

excavation, original ground line, and locations of traffic, existing 20 Structures, utilities, site constraints, surcharge loads, or other 21 conditions that could affect the stability of the slope. If the stability of 22 the excavation requires no-load zones or equipment setback 23 distances, those shall be shown in cross section. 24

25 3. A summary clearly describing subsurface conditions and groundwater 26

conditions, sequencing considerations, and governing assumptions. 27 28 4. Supporting calculations for the design of the excavation, the soil and 29

material properties selected for design, and the justification for the 30 selection for those properties, in accordance with the WSDOT 31 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03. 32

33 5. Safety factors, or load and resistance factors used, and justification 34

for their selection, in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical 35 Design Manual M 46-03, and referenced AASHTO design manuals. 36

37 6. A monitoring plan to evaluate the excavation performance throughout 38

its design life. 39 40 7. Any supplemental subsurface explorations made by the Contractor to 41

meet the requirements for geotechnical design of excavation slopes, 42 in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-43 03. 44

45 2-09.3(3)D.GR2 46

Shoring And Cofferdams 47 48 2-09.3(3)D.INST1.GR2 49

Section 2-09.3(3)D is supplemented with the following: 50 51


2-09.3(3)D.OPT1.GB2 1 (March 13, 1995) 2 The Contractor shall protect the existing pavement from damage due to the 3 Contractor's operations and shall shore all excavation adjacent to the existing 4 pavement. 5

6 2-09.3(3)D.OPT2.GB2 7

(August 2, 2010) 8 The Contractor shall protect the existing track and facilities of the Railroad 9 Company from damage due to the Contractor's operations, and shall shore all 10 excavation adjacent to the existing railroad track. Shoring shall be steel sheet 11 piling designed for a Cooper E-80 loading according to the American Railway 12 Engineering and Maintenance Association (AREMA) Manual For Railway 13 Engineering. Damage to the railroad track or railroad facilities, due to the 14 Contractor's operations, will be repaired by the Railroad at the Contractor's 15 expense. 16

17 2-09.3(3)D.OPT3.FB2 18

(March 13, 1995) 19 Because of the nearness of the work to the existing *** $$1$$, *** the Contractor 20 shall protect the *** $$2$$ *** during the *** $$3$$ ***. 21

22 2-09.4.GR2 23

Measurement 24 25 2-09.4.INST1.GR2 26 The subsection Lower Limits of Section 2-09.4 is supplemented with the following: 27 28 2-09.4.OPT1.GB2 29

(January 4, 2010) 30 Under girders, at end pier embankments, the lower limit will follow a line parallel to the 31 bottom of the girders and three feet below them. 32

33

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank

Index – General Special Provisions Division 5 EGSP5.docx January 13September 7, 2021 PAGE 1

DIVISION5.GR5 Surface Treatments and Pavements 1 2 5-01.GR5 Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation 3 4

5-01.1.GR5 Description 5 6


9 5-01.1.OPT1.GR5 (Partial Depth Spall Repair) 10

(September 7, 2021) 11 Use in projects that have the Bid item “Partial Depth Spall 12 Repair”, by force account. 13 Must also use 5-01.2.OPT1.GR5 & 5-01.3(5).OPT1.GR5. 14

15 5-01.2.GR5 Materials 16 17


20 5-01.2.OPT1.GR5 (Partial Depth Spall Repair) 21

(January 7, 2019September 7, 2021) 22 Use in projects that have the Bid item “Partial Depth Spall 23 Repair”, by force account. 24 Must also use 5-01.1.OPT1.GR5 & 5-01.3(5).OPT1.GR5. 25


28 5-01.3(5).GR5 Partial Depth Spall Repair 29



5-01.3(5).OPT1.GR5 (Partial Depth Spall Repair) 34 (September 8, 2020September 7, 2021) 35 Use in projects that have the Bid item “Partial Depth 36 Spall Repair”, by force account. 37 Must also use 5-01.1.OPT1.GR5 & 5-01.2.OPT1.GR5. 38

39 5-01.3(9).GR5 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Grinding 40



5-01.3(9).OPT1.GR5 (April 1, 2013) 45 Use in projects that require 10,000 or more square 46 yards of cement concrete pavement grinding. 47

48 5-02.GR5 Bituminous Surface Treatment 49 50


5-02.3(3).GR5 Application Of Asphalt Emulsion and Aggregate 53




5-02.3(3).OPT1.FR5 (BST New Construction) 5 (August 5, 2013) 6 May use with 5-02.3(3).OPT2.FR5. 7 Use in projects requiring a Bituminous Surface 8 Treatment on a newly constructed roadway.) 9 (2 fill-ins) 10

11 5-02.3(3).OPT2.FR5 (BST Seal Coat) 12

(August 5, 2013) 13 May use with 5-02.3(3).OPT1.FR5. 14 Use in projects requiring a Bituminous Surface 15 Treatment seal coat on an existing roadway. 16 (1 fill-in) 17

18 5-02.4.GR5 Measurement 19 20


23 5-02.4.OPT2.GR5 (BST existing road approaches) 24

(March 13, 1995) 25 Must also use 5-02.5.OPT2.GR5. 26 Use in BST projects when there are a substantial number 27 of existing road approaches to be paved and the extra cost 28 of labor for paving approaches becomes a factor in 29 determining the bid price for BST. 30

31 5-02.5.GR5 Payment 32 33


36 5-02.5.OPT2.GR5 (Bituminous Surface Treatment For Road Approach) 37

(February 5, 2001) 38 Must include with 5-02.4.OPT2.GR5. 39 Use in BST projects when there are a substantial number 40 of existing road approaches to be paved and the extra cost 41 of labor for paving approaches becomes a factor in 42 determining the bid price for BST. 43

44 5-02.5.OPT3.GR5 (CRS-2P Cost Price Adjustment Payment) 45

(August 5, 2013) 46 Include in all BST projects. 47 Must include standard item #5294. 48 To determine the Engineers Estimate for this bid item, refer 49 to the guidance at: 50 https://wsdot.wa.gov/Design/ProjectDev/EngineeringApplic51 ations/AdReady.htm 52


1 5-02.5.OPT4.GR5 (AC-15P Cost Price Adjustment Payment) 2

(January 3, 2017) 3 Include in all BST projects. 4 Must include standard item #5280. 5

6 5-04.GR5 Hot Mix Asphalt 7 8

5-04.2.GR5 Materials 9 10

5-04.2.INST1.GR5 (The sixth and seventh materials listed in Section 5-04.2 are 11 revised to read:) 12 Must use once preceding any of the following: 13

14 5-04.2.OPT1.GR5 (Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) and Reclaimed 15

Asphalt Shingles (RAS)) 16 (May 20, 2020) 17 Include in all projects using HMA. 18

19 5-04.2(2).GR5 Mix Design – Obtaining Project Approval 20 21


24 5-04.2(2).OPT1.FR5 (HMA Test Requirements) 25

(January 3, 2011) 26 Include in all projects using HMA. 27 Fill-in (number of ESAL's) is included in the pavement 28 design report. 29 (1 fill-in) 30

31 5-04.2(9-03.8(7)).GR5 (HMA Tolerances, Specification Limits and Adjustments) 32

(The second paragraph of item number 1 of Section 9-33 03.8(7) is revised to read:) 34 Must use once preceding any of the following: 35

36 5-04.2(9-03.8(7)).OPT1.GR5 (September 8, 2020) 37

Include in all projects using HMA. 38 39



44 5-04.3.OPT4.FR5 (Asphalt Binder Revision) 45

(January 3, 2017) 46 Use in projects when the Contracting Agency provides a 47 source of aggregate for HMA. 48 Must use with 5-04.5.OPT3.GR5. 49

50 5-04.3(1).GR5 Weather Limitations 51 52

5-04.3(1).INST1.GR5 (The first sentence of Section 5-04.3(1) is revised to 53


read) 1 Must use once preceding any of the following: 2

3 5-04.3(1).OPT1.FR5 (August 3, 2009) 4

Use in projects when it is anticipated that paving will be 5 conducted in the Fall. 6 (1 fill-in) (Fill-in to be provided by Region Materials 7 Engineer) 8

9 5-04.3(3).GR5 Equipment 10

11 5-04.3(3)C.GR5 Pavers 12

13 5-04.3(3)C.INST1.GR5 (Section 5-04.3(3)C is supplemented with the following) 14


5-04.3(3)C.OPT1.GR5 (Reference line required for paver) 17 (March 13, 1995) 18 Use in projects with a 70 MPH or higher design 19 speed, except when the paving will be done under 20 traffic. 21

22 5-04.3(3)D.GR5 (Material Transfer Device/Vehicle) 23

24 5-04.3(3)D.OPT1.GR5 (August 3, 2009) 25

(Section 5-04.3(3)D is deleted in its entirety) 26 Use in projects containing Hot Mix Asphalt when 27 the Region Materials Lab recommends that a 28 MTD/V not be used. Use requires approval of the 29 Region Construction Office. MTD/V’s are not 30 recommended for projects with small quantities of 31 HMA or when the paving is limited to areas where 32 there is insufficient room for the MTD/V in the 33 paving train. 34

35 5-04.3(3)D.INST1.GR5 (Section 5-04.3(3)A including title is revised to read) 36


5-04.3(3)D.OPT2.GR5 (Material Transfer Vehicle) 39 (August 1, 2011) 40 Use in projects containing Hot Mix Asphalt when 41 only an MTV is to be used (no MTD). Use requires 42 approval of the Region Construction Office. 43 44

5-04.3(8).GR5 Aggregate Acceptance Prior to Incorporation in HMA 45 46

5-04.3(8).INST1.GR5 (The third sentence of the second paragraph of Section 5-47 04.3(8) is revised to read) 48 Must use once preceding any of the following: 49

50 5-04.3(8).OPT1.GR5 (September 8, 2020) 51

Include in all projects using HMA. 52 53


5-04.3(9).GR5 HMA Mixture Acceptance 1 2


5 5-04.3(9).OPT1.FR5 Visual Evaluation 6

(August 1, 2016) 7 Use in projects where the area that visual evaluation of 8 hot mix asphalt is to be used is not identified in the 9 Standard Specifications 10 (1 fill-in) 11

12 5-04.3(10).GR5 HMA Compaction Acceptance 13 14

5-04.3(10).INST1.GR5 (The column in Table 14 of Section 5-04.3(10), titled 15 “Statistical Evaluation of HMA Compaction is Required for:”, 16 is supplemented with the following) 17 Must use once preceding any of the following: 18

19 5-04.3(10).OPT1.GR5 HMA Shoulder Compaction 20

(April 3, 2017) 21 Use in projects to add compaction control on the 22 shoulders. 23 24

5-04.3(10)D.GR5 HMA Compaction – Visual Evaluation 25 26 5-04.3(10)D.INST2.GR5 (The last sentence of Section 5-04.3(10)D is revised to 27


30 5-04.3(10)D.OPT1.GR5 (HMA Prelevel Compaction) 31

(August 3, 2009) 32 Use in projects to require a pneumatic tire roller 33 for the compaction of all prelevel. 34

35 5-04.3(12).GR5 Joints 36 37


40 5-04.3(12).OPT1.GR5 (Feathering Hot Mix Asphalt) 41

(January 5, 2004) 42 Use in projects requiring the feathering of hot mix 43 asphalt. May be used with the recommendation of the 44 Region Construction Engineer. 45

46 5-04.3(13).GR5 Surface Smoothness 47 48

5-04.3(13).INST1.GR5 (The first four paragraphs of Section 5-04.3(13) are revised 49 to read) 50 Must use once preceding any of the following: 51

52 5-04.3(13).OPT1.FR5 (Surface Smoothness) 53


(January 5, 2015) 1 Use in all projects that contain HMA paving at the 2 discretion of the Region Construction Manager. Paving 3 must be a minimum of one mile in length. For accurate 4 measurements, the HQ Materials Lab profiler must be 5 able to move through the sections to be measured 6 unimpeded at a minimum speed of 35 MPH. Notification 7 must be made to HQ Materials Lab Pavements section 8 in order to schedule the post paving IRI determination. 9 Fill-ins #1-6 are to be provided by the HQ Materials Lab 10 Pavements section. Use with 5-04.5.OPT1.FR5. Do 11 not use with 5-04.3(13).OPT2.FR5 or 5-12 04.3(13).OPT3.GR5. 13 14 (6 fill-ins) Contact 15 [email protected] to schedule 16 the IRI determination and to complete the fill-ins. 17 18

5-04.3(13).INST2.GR5 (The second sentence of Section 5-04.3(13) is deleted 19 and replaced with the following) 20 Must use once preceding any of the following: 21

22 5-04.3(13).OPT2.FR5 (Smoothness requirements) 23

(March 13, 1995) 24 Use at the discretion of the Region Construction 25 Manager in projects with roadways to be paved that 26 have a combination of posted speeds both greater than 27 and less than 45 MPH. Do not use with 5-28 04.3(13).OPT1.FR5. 29 (1 fill-in is for sections of roadway with a posted speed 30 limit less than 45 mph) 31

32 5-04.3(13).INST3.GR5 (The second sentence of Section 5-04.3(13) is revised to 33


36 5-04.3(13).OPT3.GR5 (Smoothness requirements) 37

(January 5, 2004) 38 Use at the discretion of the Region Construction 39 Manager in projects where all roadways to be paved are 40 posted less than 45 MPH. Do not use with 5-41 04.3(13).OPT1.FR5. 42

43 5-04.3(14).GR5 Planing Bituminous Pavement 44 45


48 5-04.3(14).OPT1.FR5 (January 5, 2004) 49

Use in projects when it is necessary to control the time 50 the planed area will be open and exposed to traffic prior 51 to paving. 52 (1 fill-in) 53


1 5-04.3(14).OPT2.GR5 (Requires test section and smoothness 2

requirements) 3 (January 5, 2004) 4 Use in projects with large quantities of planing. When 5 using this GSP consider the need to control the amount 6 of time the planed area is open to traffic by adding 5-7 04.3(14).OPT1.FR5 where appropriate. 8

9 5-04.3(14).OPT3.GR5 (Vertical Edge Planing) 10

(March 13, 1995) 11 Use in projects when planed lanes shall be paved prior 12 to being open to traffic. 13

14 5-04.3(14).OPT4.GR5 (Beveled Edge Planing) 15

(August 3, 2009) 16 Use in projects when a beveled edge is required on a 17 planed lane that will be opened to traffic prior to paving. 18 The GSP is required for depths greater than 0.20 feet 19 and may be used with the recommendation of the 20 Region Construction Engineer for depths up to 0.20 21 feet. When using this GSP consider the need to control 22 the amount of time the planed area is open to traffic by 23 adding 5-04.3(14).OPT1.FR5 where appropriate. 24

25 5-04.5.GR5 Payment 26



5-04.5.OPT1.FR5 (Surface Smoothness) 31 (January 5, 2015) 32 Must include with 5-04.3(13).OPT1.FR5. 33 34 Fill-in is the appropriate Pay Adjustment Schedule as 35 determined using the criteria below. 36

37 Pay Adjustment Schedule 1 = Interstate highways, new 38 pavement construction or multiple lift pavement overlays (at 39 least one (1) leveling course + wearing course). 40

41 Note: Pre-leveling allowances are not to be counted as a 42 leveling course paving lift with respect to this definition. 43

44 Pay Adjustment Schedule 2 = Single lift pavement 45 overlays with allowance for surface variance corrections 46 with smoothness averaging devices (paving skis) or full 47 width pavement milling (including shoulder) with single lift 48 replacement overlay. 49

50 Note: Sufficient preleveling and/or pavement thickness 51 variance allowances should be included to repair obvious 52 existing deficiencies (humps, valleys, ruts etc.). 53


1 Pay Adjustment Schedule 3 = Smoothness will be difficult 2 to attain or when risk associated with meeting a 3 smoothness criteria is unknown. Examples include 4 matching to existing concrete gutter lines; sections with 5 multiple surface utility structures; intersections; multiple 6 skip sections resulting in short paving lengths; and 7 milling/replacement paving where both the shoulder and 8 adjacent lane is not also milled. Bonus incentives are 9 applied to encourage maximum effort to obtain smooth 10 pavements in difficult applications. 11 (1 fill-in) 12

13 5-04.5.OPT2.GR5 (Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment) 14

(January 13, 2021) 15 Include in all projects containing Hot Mix Asphalt. 16 Must include standard item 5837. 17 To determine the Engineers Estimate for this bid item, refer 18 to the guidance at: 19 https://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Design/ProjectDev/Engineering20 Applications/AdReady.htm 21

22 5-04.5.OPT3.GR5 (Asphalt Binder Revision) 23

(August 3, 2009) 24 Must include with 5-04.3.OPT4.FR5. 25 26

5-05.GR5 Cement Concrete Pavement 27 28



33 5-05.1.OPT1.GR5 (Use when cement concrete pavement has pigmented or 34

textured cement concrete in roundabout locations) 35 (August 6, 2012) 36 Use in projects requiring color treatment, textured treatment 37 or both for roundabout truck aprons, splitter islands, and 38 mainline crossings. 39 Requires approval by the Region Landscape Architect or 40 the HQ Roadside and Site Development Manager for 41 regions without a landscape architect. 42 Use with 5-05.2.OPT1.FR5, 5-05.3.OPT1.GR5 or 5-43 05.3.OPT2.FR5 or both. 44 45


5-05.2.INST1.GR5 (Section 5-05.2 is supplemented with the following) 48 Must use once preceding the following: 49

50 5-05.2.OPT1.FR5 (Pigmented cement concrete pavement in roundabouts 51 locations) 52

(August 6, 2012) 53


Use in projects requiring color treatment in roundabout 1 truck aprons, splitter islands, and mainline crossings. 2 Concrete color must contrast with pavement color. 3 4 Requires approval by the Region Landscape Architect or 5 the HQ Roadside and Site Development Manager for 6 regions without a landscape architect. 7 (1 fill-ins) 8 9 Get Primary Pigment from Region Landscape Architect or 10 the HQ Roadside and Site Development Manager and then 11 list all the Manufactures and Pigment Color for that Primary 12 Pigment as fill-in information from list shown below: 13 14 Primary Pigment - Brick: 15 16

Manufacturer Pigment Color

BASF “Red River Clay”, RC5006

Bomanite “Brick Red”

Davis Colors “Brick Red”, 160

Increte Systems “Brick Red”

Solomon Colors Brick”, 417

17 Primary Pigment - Brown: 18 19


Davis Colors “River Bank”

Scofield “Sand Buff”

Solomon Colors “306 Canvas”

20 Primary Pigment - Dark Gray: 21 22


Davis Colors “Dark Gray (iron oxide) 860”

Increte Systems “Dark Gray”

Solomon Colors “Onyx”, 920

23 Use with 5-05.1.OPT1.GR5, 5-05.3.OPT1.GR5, 5-24 05.3.OPT2.FR5 (if textured pattern also needed) and 5-25 05.4.OPT1.GR5. 26 27



32 5-05.3.OPT1.GR5 (Use when cement concrete pavement has pigmented 33 color in roundabout locations) 34

(August 6, 2012) 35


Use in projects requiring pigmented colored cement 1 concrete pavement in roundabout truck aprons, splitter 2 islands and mainline crossings. 3 Requires approval by the Region Landscape Architect or 4 the HQ Roadside and Site Development Manager for 5 regions without a landscape architect. 6 7 Use with 5-05.1.OPT1.GR5, 5-05.2.OPT1.FR5, 5-8 05.3.OPT2.FR5 (if textured pattern also needed) and 5-9 05.4.OPT1.GR5. 10 11

12 5-05.3.OPT2.FR5 (Use when cement concrete pavement has textured 13 pattern in roundabout locations) 14

(August 6, 2012) 15 Use in projects requiring textured cement concrete 16 pavement patterns on roundabouts, truck aprons, splitter 17 islands and mainline crossings. 18 19 Requires approval by the Region Landscape Architect or 20 the HQ Roadside and Site Development Manager for 21 regions without a landscape architect. 22 (1 fill-in) 23 24 Get the Primary Pattern from Region Landscape Architect 25 or the HQ Roadside and Site Development Manager and 26 then list all the Manufactures and Patterns for that Primary 27 Pattern as fill-in information from list below: 28 29 Primary Pattern - Ashlar Stone : 30 31

Manufacturer Pattern

Increte Systems, Inc.

“Ashlar Slate”

Renew Crete Systems

“Royal Ashlar”

Bomanite “Flagstone”

32 Primary Pattern - Brick 33 34


Bomanite “Running Bond Cobblestone”

Brickform “Pennsylvania Cobble-Sanded Joint”, TM820

Increte Systems, Inc

“Euro Cobble Running Bond”, SECR S001

Matcrete “Large Cobblestone”, P-16

Renew-Crete Systems

“London Cobblestone”


Scofield “Old Belgium Stone: Running Bond” (4530)

1 Primary Pattern - River Rock 2 3


Bomanite. River Rock

Increte Systems Savanah Stone

Matcrete Large River Rock 4 5 Use with 5-05.1.OPT1.GR5, 5-05.2.OPT1.FR5 (if 6 pigmented color also needed), 5-05.3(1).OPT8.GR5 and 5-7 05.4.OPT1.GR5. 8

9 5-05.3(1).GR5 Concrete Mix Design for Paving 10

11 5-05.3(1).INST1.GR5 (Item number 1 of Section 5-05.3(1) is supplemented with 12

the following:) 13 Must use once preceding any of the following: 14

15 5-05.3(1).OPT1.GR5 (Cement Concrete Pavement) 16

(January 2, 2018) 17 Use in projects that include reconstruction of the 18 concrete pavement with a recommendation from the 19 State Pavements Engineer. 20



5-05.3(1).OPT8.GR5 (Aggregate size for textured cement concrete 25 pavement) 26 (August 6, 2012) 27 Use when textured cement concrete pavement patterns 28 are needed in roundabouts, truck aprons, splitter 29 islands and mainlinecrossings. Provides aggregate 30 requirements for textured cement concrete pavement 31 patterns. 32 33 Requires approval by the Region Landscape Architect 34 or the HQ Roadside and Site Development Manager for 35 regions without a landscape architect 36 Use with 5-05.1.OPT1.GR5, GSP 5-05.3.OPT2.FR5, 37 and GSP 5-05.4.OPT1.GR5.. 38

39 5-05.3(12).GR5 Surface Smoothness 40

41 5-05.3(12).INST1.GR5 (The third paragraph of Section 5-05.3(12) is replaced with 42

the following) 43 Must use once preceding any of the following: 44

45 5-05.3(12).OPT1.GR5 (Surface Smoothness) 46

(January 7, 2019) 47


Use in projects where concrete paving will occur in 1 multiple short segments or in projects where paving will 2 occur in multiple seasons. 3 4

5-05.3(17).GR5 Opening to Traffic 5 6

5-05.3(17).INST2.GR5 (Section 5-05.3(17) is revised to read) 7 Must use once preceding any of the following: 8

9 5-05.3(17).OPT1.GR5 (Maturity Testing for Concrete Pavement) 10

(August 7, 2017) 11 Use in all projects where the Portland Cement Concrete 12 Pavement (PCCP) or the Replacement of Portland 13 Cement Concrete Panels are required to be opened to 14 traffic within 24 hours of placement. Requires the 15 approval of State Pavement Engineer or Headquarters 16 Construction Office. 17 Use with 5-05.5.OPT5.GR5. 18



24 5-05.4.OPT1.GR5 (August 6, 2012) 25

(Textured and pigmented cement concrete pavement per 26 square yard.) 27 Use with 5-05.5.OPT2.GR5, GSP 5-05.5.OPT3.GR5 or 5-28 05.5.OPT4.GR5. 29

30 5-05.5.GR5 Payment 31 32


35 5-05.5.OPT2.GR5 (August 6, 2012) 36

Pigmented cement concrete pavement per square yard. 37 Use with 5-05.1.OPT1.GR5 and 5-05.4.OPT1.GR5. 38

39 5-05.5.OPT3.GR5 (August 6, 2012) 40

Textured cement concrete pavement per square yard. Use 41 with 42 Use with 5-05.1.OPT1.GR5 and 5-05.4.OPT1.GR5. 43

44 5-05.5.OPT4.GR5 (August 6, 2012) 45

Textured and pigmented cement concrete pavement per 46 square yard. 47 Use with 5-05.1.OPT1.GR5 and 5-05.4.OPT1.GR5. 48 49

5-05.5.OPT5.GR5 (August 5, 2013) 50 Maturity Testing for Concrete Pavement incidental to bid 51 items Cement Conc. Pavement or Replacement Cement 52 Concrete Panel. 53


Use with 5-05.3(17).OPT1.GR5. 1 2

5-SA1.FR5 Just in Time Training 3 (August 7, 2017) 4 Use in all projects with cement concrete pavement unless approved by 5 the ASCE or State Pavement Engineer. 6

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


5-01.GR5 1

Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation 2 3 5-01.1.GR5 4

Description 5 6 5-01.1.INST1.GR5 7 Section 5-01.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 5-01.1.OPT1.GR5 10

(September 7, 2021) 11 This work consists of repairing partial depth spalls using polyester concrete. 12

13 5-01.2.GR5 14

Materials 15 16 5-01.2.INST1.GR5 17 Section 5-01.2 is supplemented with the following: 18 19 5-01.2.OPT1.GR5 20

(January 7, 2019September 7, 2021) 21

Partial Depth Spall Repair – Epoxy Concrete 22 Epoxy Resin Binder 23 Epoxy resin binder shall meet the requirements of ASTM C881 Type III Grade 1 or 24 2, Class A, B, or C. 25 26 Aggregate 27 The aggregate shall be thoroughly washed and kiln dried. 28 29 The aggregate for epoxy concrete shall conform to Section 9-03.1 and the following 30 requirements for grading except that ASR mitigation will not apply to aggregate for 31 epoxy concrete: 32 33

Sieve Size Percent Passing

Gradation 1 Gradation 2

½” 100

⅜” 100 83-100

#4 62-85 65-82

#8 45-67 45-65

#16 29-50 27-48

#30 16-36 12-30

#50 5-20 6-17

#100 0-7 0-7

#200 0-3 0-3

All percentages are by weight.

34 The combined aggregate shall have a maximum of 45 percent crushed particles. 35 36 The surface of the aggregate shall be dry and the moisture content of the combined 37 aggregate shall not exceed 1.0 percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 38


255. The aggregate temperature shall be between 40°F and 100°F at the time of 1 mixing. 2 3 Sand for Abrasive Finish 4 The sand for abrasive finish shall be commercial quality blast sand having at least 5 95 percent passing the No. 8 sieve and at least 95 percent retained on the No. 20 6 sieve when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27. The moisture content of the 7 sand shall not exceed 1.0 percent. 8 9

Partial Depth Spall Repair – Polyester Concrete 10 The components of the polyester concrete including the polyester resin binder, aggregate, 11 and high molecular weight methacrylate resin surface primer shall be provided through a 12 single system provider. 13 14

Polyester Resin Binder 15 Polyester resin binder shall be an unsaturated isophthalic polyester-styrene co-16 polymer. 17 18 Prior to adding the initiator, the resin shall conform to the following requirements: 19 20

Viscosity: 75 to 200 cps (20 rpm at 77°F, RVT No. 1 spindle)

ASTM D2196

Specific Gravity: 1.05 to 1.10 at 77°F ASTM D1475 Styrene Content: 40% to 50% by weight of

polyester styrene resin ASTM D2369

21 The hardened resin shall conform to the following requirements: 22

23 Elongation: 35% minimum, type I specimen,

thickness 0.25" ± 0.03", Rate – 0.45 in./min.

ASTM D638

Tensile Strength: 2,500 psi minimum, type I specimen thickness 0.25" ± 0.03", Rate – 0.45 in./min.

ASTM D 638

Conditioning: 18 hours/77°F/50% + 5 hours/158°F

ASTM D618

Silane Coupler: 1.0% minimum (by weight of polyester-styrene resin) 24

The silane coupler shall be an organosilane ester, 25 gammamethacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane. The promoter/hardeners shall be 26 compatible with suitable methyl ethyl ketone peroxide (MEKP) and cumene 27 hydroperoxide (CHP) initiators. MEKP and CHP initiators shall be used as 28 recommended by the manufacturer. 29 30 Polyester resin binder will be accepted based on submittal to the Engineer of a 31 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 32 33 High Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) Resin 34 HMWM resin shall be wax-free, low odor and consist of a resin, initiator and promotor 35 conforming to the following requirements: 36 37


Viscosity <25 cps (Brookfield RVT with UL adaptor, 50 rpm at 77°F)

ASTM D2196

Flash Point: 180°F minimum ASTM D3278 Tack-Free Time: 400 minutes

maximum California Test 551

SSD Bond Strength 700 PSI minimum at 24 hours and 70 ± 1°F

California Test 551

Specific Gravity 0.90 minimum at 77°F ASTM D1475 Volatile Content 30 percent,

maximum. ASTM D2369

Vapor Pressure 0.04 inches Hg, maximum at 77°F

ASTM D323

1 The promoter/initiator system for the methacrylate resin shall consist of a metal drier 2 and peroxide. 3 4 If supplied separately from the resin, the drier shall not be mixed directly with the 5 peroxide. The containers shall not be stored in a manner that allows leakage or 6 spilling to contact the containers or materials of the other. 7 8 HMWM resin will be accepted based on submittal to the Engineer of a Manufacturer’s 9 Certificate of Compliance. 10 11 Aggregate 12 The aggregate shall be thoroughly washed and kiln dried. 13 14 The aggregate for polyester concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 9-03.1 15 except that ASR mitigation will not apply to aggregate for polyester concrete. 16 Polyester concrete aggregate shall conform to the following requirements for 17 gradation: 18 19



½” 100

⅜” 100 83-100

#4 62-85 65-82

#8 45-67 45-65

#16 29-50 27-48

#30 16-36 12-30

#50 5-20 6-17

#100 0-7 0-7

#200 0-3 0-3

All percentages are by weight.

20 The combined aggregate shall have a maximum of 45 percent crushed particles. 21 22 The surface of the aggregate shall be dry and the absorption shall not exceed 1.0. 23 The moisture content of the combined aggregate shall not exceed one-half of the 24 aggregate absorption when tested in accordance with AASHTO T255. The aggregate 25 temperature shall be between 40°F and 100°F at the time of mixing. 26


1 Sand for Abrasive Finish 2 The sand for abrasive finish shall be commercial quality blast sand having at least 3 95 percent passing the No. 8 sieve and at least 95 percent retained on the No. 20 4 sieve when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27. The moisture content of the 5 sand shall not exceed 0.5 percent. 6

7 5-01.3.GR5 8


Partial Depth Spall Repair 12 13 5-01.3(5).INST1.GR5 14

Section 5-01.3(5) is revised to read supplemented with the following: 15 16 5-01.3(5).OPT1.GR5 17

(September 87, 20202021) 18 Partial Depth Spall Repair - Polyester Concrete 19

Description 20 This work consists of repairing partial depth spalls using either epoxy concrete 21 or polyester concrete. 22 23 Partial Depth Spall Repair – Epoxy Concrete 24

Materials 25 Epoxy Resin Binder 26 Epoxy resin binder shall meet the requirements of ASTM C881 Type III 27 Grade 1 or 2, Class A, B, or C. 28 29 Aggregate 30 The aggregate shall be thoroughly washed and kiln dried. 31 32 The aggregate for epoxy concrete shall conform to Section 9-03.1 and 33 the following requirements for grading except that ASR mitigation will 34 not apply to aggregate for epoxy concrete: 35 36



½” 100

⅜” 100 83-100

#4 62-85 65-82

#8 45-67 45-65

#16 29-50 27-48

#30 16-36 12-30

#50 5-20 6-17

#100 0-7 0-7

#200 0-3 0-3

All percentages are by weight. 37 38


The combined aggregate shall have a maximum of 45 percent crushed 1 particles. 2 3 The surface of the aggregate shall be dry and the moisture content of 4 the combined aggregate shall not exceed 1.0 percent when tested in 5 accordance with AASHTO T255. The aggregate temperature shall be 6 between 40°F and 100°F at the time of mixing. 7 8 Sand for Abrasive Finish 9 The sand for abrasive finish shall be commercial quality blast sand 10 having at least 95 percent passing the No. 8 sieve and at least 95 11 percent retained on the No. 20 sieve when tested in accordance with 12 AASHTO T 27. The moisture content of the sand shall not exceed 1.0 13 percent. 14 15

16 Construction Requirements 17

Manufacturer’s Technical Representative 18 The Contractor shall have the services of a qualified epoxy resin binder 19 manufacturer's technical representative physically present at the job 20 site during the first shift of epoxy concrete placement. The 21 manufacturer’s technical representative shall assist the Contractor in 22 training the Contractor’s personnel and providing technical assistance 23 in preparing the concrete surface, applying primer, and mixing, placing, 24 and curing the epoxy concrete. If the epoxy concrete Work is 25 unsatisfactory, or additional training or technical assistance is needed 26 the Contractor shall have the services of the manufacturer’s at the job 27 site for additional time as deemed necessary by the Engineer. 28 29 Mix Design 30 Epoxy concrete shall be composed of epoxy resin binder and 31 aggregate. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Type 1 Working 32 Drawing consisting of the epoxy concrete mix proportions and mixing 33 procedure. The epoxy resin binder in the epoxy concrete shall be 34 between 11 to 13 percent by weight of the dry aggregate. The mix 35 design shall include the proportion of epoxy resin binder as a 36 percentage of the dry weight of aggregate, the approximate set time 37 and the time for opening to traffic for the temperature ranges expected 38 during epoxy concrete placement. 39 40 Delivery and Storage of Materials 41 All materials shall be delivered in their original containers bearing the 42 manufacturer's label, specifying date of manufacturing, batch number, 43 trade name brand, and quantity. Each shipment shall be accompanied 44 by a Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each component of the 45 resin binder. 46 47 The material shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s 48 recommendations. 49 50


Surface Preparation 1 Removal of the existing pavement shall not damage any pavement to 2 be left in place. Any existing pavement that is to remain that has been 3 damaged shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense. If 4 jackhammers are used for removing pavement, they shall not weigh 5 more than 30 pounds, and chipping hammers shall not weigh more 6 than 15 pounds. All power driven hand tools used for the removal of 7 pavement shall be operated at angles less than 45 degrees as 8 measured from the surface of the pavement to the tool. The patch limits 9 shall extend beyond the spalled area a minimum of 3 inches. Repair 10 areas shall be kept square, rectangular or circular. Repair areas that 11 are within 12 inches of another repair area shall be combined. 12 13 A vertical cut shall be made to a minimum depth of 2 inches around the 14 perimeter to be patched using a saw or core drill as marked by the 15 Engineer. The Contractor shall remove material within the perimeter of 16 the saw cut to a depth of 2 inches, or to sound concrete as determined 17 by the Engineer. 18 19 The concrete surfaces shall be prepared by removing all material which 20 may act as a bond breaker between the surface and the epoxy 21 concrete. The surfaces to receive the epoxy concrete shall be sand 22 blasted and all loose material removed. All sandblasting residue shall 23 be removed. 24 25 Spall repair shall not be done in areas where dowel bars are 26 encountered. 27 28 When a partial depth repair is placed directly against an adjacent 29 longitudinal joint, a bond-breaking material such as polyethylene film, 30 roofing paper, or other material as accepted by the Engineer shall be 31 placed between the existing concrete and the area to be patched. 32 33 Working transverse joints or cracks adjacent to or within the repair area 34 require placement of a compressible insert. The new joint or crack shall 35 be formed to the same width as the existing joint or crack. The 36 compressible joint material shall be placed into the existing joint 1 inch 37 below the depth of repair. The compressible insert shall extend at least 38 3 inches beyond each end of the patch boundaries. 39 40 Patches that abut the Lane/Shoulder joint require placement of a 41 formed edge, along the slab edge, even with the surface. 42 43 If the concrete surfaces become contaminated, the contaminated 44 areas shall be re-cleaned by abrasive blasting at the Contractor's 45 expense. 46 47 Precautions shall be taken to ensure that no dust or debris leaves the 48 roadway and that all traffic is protected from rebound and dust. 49 Appropriate shielding shall be provided as required at no additional 50 cost to the Contracting Agency and shall be approved by the Engineer. 51


The Contractor shall reseal all joints in accordance with Section 5-1 05.3(8)B. 2 3 Application of Prime Coat 4 Application of the prime coat and the epoxy concrete shall not begin if 5 rain is forecast within 12-hours of completion of the Work. The area 6 receiving the prime coat shall be dry and had no rain within the past 12 7 hours. Immediately prior to applying the prime coat, loose material 8 shall be removed using oil and moisture free compressed air. The 9 concrete surface shall be between 40°F and 100°F when applying the 10 prime coat. 11 12 Immediately before placing epoxy concrete, the prepared concrete 13 surface shall be given a prime coat consisting of one coat of the epoxy 14 resin binder. 15 16 The prime coat shall be worked into the concrete in a manner to assure 17 complete coverage of the area receiving epoxy concrete. 18 19 If the primed surface becomes contaminated, the contaminated area 20 shall be cleaned by abrasive blasting and re-primed. 21 22 The prime coat shall not be allowed to run into drainage structures, 23 joints or working cracks. 24 25 Mixing Components 26 The components of the epoxy resin binder shall be thoroughly blended 27 just prior to mixing with the aggregate. The epoxy concrete shall be 28 thoroughly mixed prior to placing. 29 30 The Contractor shall prevent any cleaning chemicals from reaching the 31 epoxy concrete mix during the mixing operations. 32 33 Epoxy Concrete Placement 34 Under no circumstances shall any epoxy resin or epoxy concrete be 35 allowed to run into drainage structures, joints or working cracks. 36 37 The epoxy concrete shall be placed on the liquid prime coat and 38 consolidated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 39 40 Finished Epoxy Concrete Surface 41 All repair areas shall be struck off level with the adjacent concrete. 42 Forms shall be coated with suitable bond release agent to permit ready 43 release of forms. 44 45 Sand for abrasive finish shall be broadcast onto surface to uniformly 46 cover any smooth or glossy areas immediately after finishing and 47 before resin gelling occurs. The completed surface shall be free of any 48 smooth or glossy areas. After the epoxy concrete has cured any 49 smooth or glossy areas shall be repaired by the Contractor in the 50


manner recommended by the System Provider and approved by the 1 Engineer at no additional cost. 2 3 The surface texture of epoxy concrete shall be uniform and impervious 4 to moisture. 5 6 Curing 7 The epoxy concrete shall be cured in accordance with the 8 manufacturer’s recommendations. The Contractor shall measure the 9 compressive strength of the cured epoxy concrete with a rebound 10 hammer in accordance with ASTM C 805. Traffic and equipment shall 11 not be permitted on the epoxy concrete until it achieves a compressive 12 strength of 2,500 psi based on the rebound hammer manufactures 13 correlation of rebound number to compressive strength for the rebound 14 hammer used. 15

16 Partial Depth Spall Repair – Polyester Concrete 17

Materials 18 The components of the polyester concrete including the polyester resin 19 binder, aggregate, and high molecular weight methacrylate resin surface 20 primer shall be provided through a single system provider. 21 22 Polyester Resin Binder 23 Polyester resin binder shall be an unsaturated isophthalic polyester-styrene 24 co-polymer. 25 26 Prior to adding the initiator, the resin shall conform to the following 27 requirements: 28 29

Viscosity: 75 to 200 cps ASTM D2196 30 (20 rpm at 77°F, RVT No. 1 spindle) 31 32 Specific Gravity: 1.05 to 1.10 at 77°F ASTM D1475 33 34 Styrene Content: 40% to 50% by weight ASTM D2369 35 of polyester styrene resin 36 37

The hardened resin shall conform to the following requirements: 38 39

Elongation: 35% minimum, type I ASTM D638 40 specimen, thickness 41 0.25" ± 0.03", Rate – 0.45 in./min. 42 43 Tensile Strength: 2,500 psi minimum, type I ASTM D 638 44 Specimen thickness 45 0.25" ± 0.03", Rate – 0.45 in./min. 46 47 Conditioning: 18 hours/77°F/50% + ASTM D618 48 5 hours/158°F 49 50


Silane Coupler: 1.0% minimum (by weight of polyester-styrene 1 resin) 2

3 The silane coupler shall be an organosilane ester, gammamethacryloxypro-4 pyltrimethoxysilane. The promoter/hardeners shall be compatible with 5 suitable methyl ethyl ketone peroxide (MEKP) and cumene hydroperoxide 6 (CHP) initiators. MEKP and CHP initiators shall be used as recommended 7 by the manufacturer. 8 9 Polyester resin binder will be accepted based on submittal to the Engineer 10 of a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 11 12 High Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) Resin 13 HMWM resin shall be wax-free, low odor and consist of a resin, initiator and 14 promotor conforming to the following requirements: 15 16

Viscosity <25 cps (Brookfield RVT ASTM D2196 17 with UL adaptor, 50 rpm 18 at 77°F) 19 20 Flash Point: 180°F minimum ASTM D3278 21 22 Tack-Free Time: 400 minutes maximum California Test 551 23 24 SSD Bond 700 PSI minimum at California Test 551 25 Strength 24 hours and 70 ± 1°F 26 27 Specific Gravity 0.90 minimum at 77°F ASTM D1475 28 29 Volatile Content 30 percent, maximum. ASTM D2369 30 31 Vapor Pressure 0.04 inches Hg, maximum ASTM D323 32 at 77°F 33

34 The promoter/initiator system for the methacrylate resin shall consist of a 35 metal drier and peroxide. 36 37 If supplied separately from the resin, the drier shall not be mixed directly 38 with the peroxide. The containers shall not be stored in a manner that 39 allows leakage or spilling to contact the containers or materials of the other. 40 41 HMWM resin will be accepted based on submittal to the Engineer of a 42 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 43 44 Aggregate 45 The aggregate shall be thoroughly washed and kiln dried. 46 47 The aggregate for polyester concrete shall meet the requirements of 48 Section 9-03.1 except that ASR mitigation will not apply to aggregate for 49 polyester concrete. Polyester concrete aggregate shall conform to the 50 following requirements for gradation: 51


1


½” 100

⅜” 100 83-100

#4 62-85 65-82

#8 45-67 45-65

#16 29-50 27-48

#30 16-36 12-30

#50 5-20 6-17

#100 0-7 0-7

#200 0-3 0-3

All percentages are by weight. 2 3

The combined aggregate shall have a maximum of 45 percent crushed 4 particles. 5 6 The surface of the aggregate shall be dry and the absorption shall not 7 exceed 1.0. The moisture content of the combined aggregate shall not 8 exceed one-half of the aggregate absorption when tested in accordance 9 with AASHTO T255. The aggregate temperature shall be between 40°F and 10 100°F at the time of mixing. 11 12 Sand for Abrasive Finish 13 The sand for abrasive finish shall be commercial quality blast sand having 14 at least 95 percent passing the No. 8 sieve and at least 95 percent retained 15 on the No. 20 sieve when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27. The 16 moisture content of the sand shall not exceed 0.5 percent. 17 18 Construction Requirements 19

Manufacturer’s Technical Representative 20 The Contractor shall have the services of a qualified polyester concrete 21 manufacturer's technical representative physically present at the job site during 22 the first shift of polyester concrete placement. The manufacturer’s technical 23 representative shall assist the Contractor in training the Contractor’s personnel 24 and providing technical assistance in preparing the concrete surface, applying 25 primer, and mixing, placing, and curing the polyester concrete. If the polyester 26 concrete Work is unsatisfactory, or additional training or technical assistance is 27 needed the Contractor shall have the services of the manufacturer’s at the job 28 site for additional time as deemed necessary by the Engineer to correct the 29 deficiency. 30 31 Mix Design 32 Polyester concrete shall be composed of a polyester resin binder and aggregate. 33 The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting 34 of the polyester concrete mix proportions and mixing procedure. The polyester 35 resin binder in the polyester concrete shall be between 11 to 13 percent by 36 weight of the dry aggregate. The mix design shall include the proportion of 37 polyester resin binder as a percentage of the dry weight of aggregate, the 38 approximate set time and time for opening to traffic for the temperature ranges 39 expected during polyester concrete placement. 40


1 Delivery and Storage of Materials 2 All materials shall be delivered in their original containers bearing the 3 manufacturer's label, specifying date of manufacturing, batch number, trade 4 name brand, and quantity. Each shipment shall be accompanied by a Materials 5 Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each component of the resin binder. 6 7 The material shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s 8 recommendations. 9 10 Surface Preparation 11 Removal of the existing pavement shall not damage any pavement to be left in 12 place. Any existing pavement that is to remain that has been damaged shall be 13 repaired at the Contractor’s expense. If jackhammers are used for removing 14 pavement, they shall not weigh more than 30 pounds, and chipping hammers 15 shall not weigh more than 15 pounds. All power driven hand tools used for the 16 removal of pavement shall be operated at angles less than 45 degrees as 17 measured from the surface of the pavement to the tool. The patch limits shall 18 extend beyond the spalled area a minimum of 3 inches. Repair areas shall be 19 kept square, rectangular or circular. Repair areas that are within 12 inches of 20 another repair area shall be combined. 21 22 A vertical cut shall be made to a minimum depth of 2 inches around the perimeter 23 to be patched using a saw or core drill as marked by the Engineer. The 24 Contractor shall remove material within the perimeter of the saw cut to a depth 25 of 2 inches, or to sound concrete as determined by the Project Engineer. 26 27 The concrete surfaces shall be prepared by removing all material which may act 28 as a bond breaker between the surface and the polyester concrete. The surfaces 29 to receive the polyester concrete shall be sand blasted and all loose material 30 removed. All sandblasting residue shall be removed. 31 32 Spall repair shall not be done in areas where dowel bars are encountered. 33 34 When a partial depth repair is placed directly against an adjacent longitudinal 35 joint, a bond-breaking material such as polyethylene film, roofing paper, or other 36 material as accepted by the Engineer shall be placed between the existing 37 concrete and the area to be patched. 38 39 Working transverse joints or cracks adjacent to or within the repair area require 40 placement of a compressible insert. The new joint or crack shall be formed to 41 the same width as the existing joint or crack. The compressible joint material 42 shall be placed into the existing joint 1 inch below the depth of repair. The 43 compressible insert shall extend at least 3 inches beyond each end of the patch 44 boundaries. 45 46 Patches that abut the Lane/Shoulder joint require placement of a formed edge, 47 along the slab edge, even with the surface. 48 49 If the concrete surfaces become contaminated, the contaminated areas shall be 50 re-cleaned by abrasive blasting at the Contractor's expense. 51


1 Precautions shall be taken to ensure that no dust or debris leaves the roadway 2 and that all traffic is protected from rebound and dust. Appropriate shielding shall 3 be provided as required at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency and shall 4 be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall reseal all joints in accordance 5 with Section 5-05.3(8)B. 6 7 Application of Prime Coat 8 Application of the prime coat and the polyester concrete shall not begin if rain is 9 forecast within 12-hours of completion of the Work. The area receiving the prime 10 coat shall be dry and had no rain within the past 12 hours. Immediately prior to 11 applying the prime coat, loose material shall be removed using oil and moisture 12 free compressed air. 13 14 The concrete surface shall be between 40°F and 100°F when applying the prime 15 coat. 16 17 The Contractor shall apply a prime coat consisting of one coat of 18 promoted/initiated wax-free HMWM resin to the prepared concrete and steel 19 surfaces immediately before placing the polyester concrete. 20 21 The prime coat shall be worked into the concrete in a manner to assure complete 22 coverage of the area receiving polyester concrete. 23 24 If the primed surface becomes contaminated, the contaminated area shall be 25 cleaned by abrasive blasting and re-primed. 26 27 The prime coat shall not be allowed to run into drainage structures, joints or 28 working cracks. 29 30 Mixing Components 31 The components of the polyester resin binder shall be thoroughly blended just 32 prior to mixing with the aggregate. The polyester concrete shall be thoroughly 33 mixed prior to placing. 34 35 The Contractor shall prevent any cleaning chemicals from reaching the polyester 36 concrete mix during the mixing operations. 37 38 Polyester Concrete Placement 39 Under no circumstances shall any polyester resin or polyester concrete be 40 allowed to run into drainage structures, joints or working cracks. 41 42 Place polyester concrete within two hours of placing the HMWM prime coat. 43 44 Polyester concrete shall be placed within 15 minutes following initiation. 45 Polyester concrete that is not placed within this time shall be discarded. 46 47 The surface temperature of the area receiving the polyester concrete shall be 48 the same as specified above for the HMWM prime coat. 49 50


The polyester concrete shall be consolidated in accordance with the 1 manufacturer’s recommendations. 2 3 Finished Polyester Concrete Surface 4 All repair areas shall be struck off level with the adjacent concrete. Forms shall 5 be coated with suitable bond release agent to permit ready release of forms. 6 7 Sand for abrasive finish shall be broadcast onto surface to uniformly cover any 8 smooth or glossy areas immediately after finishing and before resin gelling 9 occurs. The completed surface shall be free of any smooth or glossy areas. After 10 the polyester concrete has cured, any smooth or glossy areas shall be repaired 11 by the Contractor in the manner recommended by the System Provider and 12 approved by the Engineer at no additional cost. The surface texture of polyester 13 concrete shall be uniform and impervious to moisture. 14 15 Curing 16 The polyester concrete shall be cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s 17 recommendations. The Contractor shall measure the compressive strength of 18 the cured polyester concrete with a rebound hammer in accordance with ASTM 19 C 805. Traffic and equipment shall not be permitted on the polyester concrete 20 until it achieves a compressive strength of 2,500 psi based on the rebound 21 hammer manufactures correlation of rebound number to compressive strength 22 for the rebound hammer used. 23

24 5-01.3(9).GR5 25

Cement Concrete Pavement Grinding 26 27 5-01.3(9).INST1.GR5 28


(April 1, 2013) 32 The Contractor shall grind a test section 1500 foot long across the full width of a lane 33 for evaluation by the Engineer to determine if the Work meets the Specifications. If 34 the Specifications have been met the Contractor may proceed with the remaining 35 cement concrete pavement grinding. If the Specifications have not been met, the 36 Contractor shall make adjustments and another test section shall be completed. 37

38

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


5-04.GR5 1

Hot Mix Asphalt 2 3 5-04.2.GR5 4

Materials 5 6 5-04.2.INST1.GR5 7 The sixth and seventh materials listed in Section 5-04.2 are revised to read: 8 9 5-04.2.OPT1.GR5 10

(May 20, 2020) 11 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) 9-03.8(3)B, 9-03.21 12 Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles (RAS) 9-03.8(3)B, 9-03.21 13

14 5-04.2(2).GR5 15

Mix Design – Obtaining Project Approval 16 17 5-04.2(2).INST1.GR5 18


(January 3, 2011) 22 ESAL's 23 The number of ESAL's for the design and acceptance of the HMA shall be *** 24 $$1$$ *** million. 25

26 5-04.2(9-03.8(7)).GR5 27

HMA Tolerances, Specification Limits and Adjustments 28 The second paragraph of item number 1 of Section 9-03.8(7) is revised to read: 29

30 5-04.2(9-03.8(7)).OPT1.GR5 31

(September 8, 2020) 32 These tolerance and specification limits constitute the allowable limits as described 33 in Section 1-06.2. The tolerance limit for aggregate shall not exceed the limits of the 34 control points, except the No. 8 tolerance is ± 4% from the JMF, the No. 200 tolerance 35 is ± 2.0% from the JMF with a minimum of 2% and a maximum of 8.0% passing the 36 No. 200 sieve, other tolerance limits for sieves designated as 100 percent passing 37 will be 99-100. 38

39 5-04.3.GR5 40

Construction Requirements 41 42 5-04.3.INST1.GR5 43 Section 5-04.3 is supplemented with the following: 44 45 5-04.3.OPT4.FR5 46

(January 3, 2017) 47 The expected percentage of new asphalt binder in the HMA is *** $$1$$ ***. Should the 48 actual percentage of new asphalt binder required by the job mix formula for HMA 49 produced with Agency-provided aggregate vary by more than plus or minus 0.3-percent 50 an adjustment in payment will be made. The adjustment in payment (plus or minus) will 51


be based on the invoice cost to the Contractor. When RAP and/or RAS are used in the 1 production of HMA the adjustment will be reduced by the percentage of RAP and/or RAS 2 asphalt binder. No adjustment will be made when the Contractor elects not to use a 3 Contracting Agency provided source. 4

5 5-04.3(1).GR5 6

Weather Limitations 7 8 5-04.3(1).INST1.GR5 9

The first sentence of Section 5-04.3(1) is revised to read: 10 11 5-04.3(1).OPT1.FR5 12

(August 3, 2009) 13 HMA for wearing course shall not be placed on any travelled way from *** $$1$$ *** 14 and through March 31st of the following year without written approval from the 15 Engineer. 16

17 5-04.3(3).GR5 18

Equipment 19 20 5-04.3(3).INST1.GR5 21


(March 13, 1995) 25 Reference lines will be required for both outer edges of the traveled way for each 26 mainline roadway for vertical control in accordance with Section 5-04.3(3). 27

28 5-04.3(3)C.GR5 29

Pavers 30 31 5-04.3(3)C.INST1.GR5 32

Section 5-04.3(3)C is supplemented with the following: 33 34 5-04.3(3)C.OPT1.GR5 35

(April 4, 2016) 36 Reference lines will be required for both outer edges of the traveled way for 37 each mainline roadway for vertical control in accordance with Section 5-38 04.3(3)C. 39

40 5-04.3(3)D.GR5 41

Material Transfer Device or Material Transfer Vehicle 42 43 5-04.3(3)D.OPT1.GR5 44

(April 4, 2016) 45

Section 5-04.3(3)D is deleted in its entirety. 46 47 5-04.3(3)D.INST1.GR5 48

Section 5-04.3(3)D including title is revised to read: 49 50


5-04.3(3)D.OPT2.GR5 1 (August 1, 2011) 2 Material Transfer Vehicle 3 Direct transfer of HMA from the hauling equipment to the paving machine will 4 not be allowed in the top 0.30-feet of the pavement section of hot mix asphalt 5 (HMA) used in traffic lanes with a depth of 0.08-feet or greater. A material 6 transfer vehicle (MTV) shall be used to deliver the HMA from the hauling 7 equipment to the paving machine. HMA placed in irregularly shaped and minor 8 areas such as road approaches, tapers, and turn lanes are excluded from this 9 requirement. 10 11 The MTV shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to 12 lay down by the paving machine. Mixing of the HMA shall be sufficient to obtain 13 a uniform temperature throughout the mixture 14

15 5-04.3(8).GR5 16

Aggregate Acceptance Prior to Incorporation in HMA 17 18 5-04.3(8).INST1.GR5 19

The third sentence of the second paragraph of Section 5-04.3(8) is revised to read: 20 21 5-04.3(8).OPT1.GR5 22

(September 8, 2020) 23 The Contractor may request aggregate specific gravity (Gsb) testing be performed 24 by the Contracting Agency twice per project for the first 10,000 HMA tons produced, 25 and once thereafter. 26

27 5-04.3(9).GR5 28

HMA Mixture Acceptance 29 30 5-04.3(9).INST1.GR5 31


(August 1, 2016) 35 Visual Evaluation 36 The following HMA will be accepted by visual evaluation: 37 38

*** $$1$$ *** 39 40 5-04.3(10).GR5 41

HMA Compaction Acceptance 42 43 5-04.3(10).INST1.GR5 44

The column in Table 14 of Section 5-04.3(10), titled “Statistical Evaluation of HMA 45 Compaction is Required for”, is supplemented with the following: 46

47 5-04.3(10).OPT1.GR5 48

(April 3, 2017) 49 • Any HMA for which the specified course thickness is greater than 0.10 feet and 50

the HMA is placed in the shoulder. 51


1 5-04.3(10)D.GR5 2

HMA Compaction – Visual Evaluation 3 4 5-04.3(10)D.INST2.GR5 5

The last sentence in Section 5-04.3(10)D is revised to read: 6 7 5-04.3(10)D.OPT1.GR5 8

(April 4, 2016) 9 HMA that is used for preleveling shall be compacted with a pneumatic tire 10 roller unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 11

12 5-04.3(12).GR5 13

Joints 14 15 5-04.3(12).INST1.GR5 16


(January 5, 2004) 20 The HMA overlay shall be feathered to produce a smooth riding connection to the 21 existing pavement. 22 23 HMA utilized in the construction of the feathered connections shall be modified by 24 eliminating the coarse aggregate from the mix at the Contractor's plant or the 25 commercial source or by raking the joint on the roadway, to the satisfaction of the 26 Engineer. 27

28 5-04.3(13).GR5 29

Surface Smoothness 30 31 5-04.3(13).INST1.GR5 32

The first four paragraphs of Section 5-04.3(13) are revised to read: 33 34 5-04.3(13).OPT1.FR5 35

(January 5, 2015) 36 Pavement surface smoothness for this project will include International Roughness 37 Index (IRI) testing that will be completed by the Contracting Agency. The Contracting 38 Agency will perform the IRI testing on each through lane, climbing lane, and passing 39 lane, greater than one mile in length and these lanes will be subject to 40 incentive/disincentive adjustments. IRI testing for a lane will be reported every 0.01 41 mile by averaging the IRI data for the left and right wheelpath within the section. 42 43 Bridge approaches and bridge decks that are located within the lanes specified to be 44 tested and are paved with HMA will be included in the IRI testing. Bridge structures, 45 approach slabs and 0.02 miles on either side of the bridge structures and approach 46 slabs will be eligible for price adjustment incentives and excluded from disincentive 47 adjustments. 48 49 Ramps, shoulders and tapers will not be included in IRI testing for pavement 50 smoothness and will not be subject to incentive adjustments. They will be subject to 51


parallel and transverse 10-foot surface requirements, corrective work and 1 disincentive adjustments. 2 3 Upon completion of the paving operation the Contractor shall notify the Engineer that 4 the roadway is ready for IRI testing. Notification shall not take place until the following 5 conditions are met for all lanes to be tested on the project: 6 7

1. All lanes are open to traffic, unrestricted and in their final configuration. 8 9 2. All permanent pavement markings are in place or temporary pavement 10

markings to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 11 12 If requested by the Engineer the Contractor shall sweep the roadway immediately 13 prior to testing. If the sweeping is needed as a result of the Contractor’s operation it 14 shall be the responsibility and expense of the Contractor. Should the Contracting 15 Agency not be able to complete the testing as a result of the Contractor’s Work the 16 testing will be rescheduled and any additional costs to the Contracting Agency will 17 be deducted from monies due or that may become due the Contractor. 18 19 It is the intent that the testing will be completed and the results provided to the 20 Contractor within 30 calendar days of the Contractor’s notification that the roadway 21 is ready for testing. If weather or other conditions exist which are determined by the 22 Engineer to be unsuitable for IRI testing of the pavement then the testing will be 23 deferred until favorable conditions are available and the 30 calendar days extended. 24 25 Provided that all other Work required for Substantial Completion has been 26 completed; the day following the Contractor’s notification that the roadway is ready 27 for IRI testing through the day the IRI data is provided to the Contractor will be 28 nonworking days in accordance with Section 1-08.5. 29 30 Corrective work for pavement smoothness may be taken by the Contractor prior to 31 IRI testing. After completion of the IRI testing the Contractor shall measure the 32 smoothness of each 0.01 mile section with an IRI greater than 125 with a 10-foot 33 straightedge within 14 calendar days or as approved by the Engineer. The 34 Contractor shall identify all locations that require corrective work and provide the 35 straight edge measurements at each location that exceeds the allowable limit to the 36 Engineer. If all measurements in a 0.01 section comply with the smoothness 37 requirements the Contractor shall provide the maximum measurement to the 38 Engineer and a statement that corrective work is not required. Unless approved by 39 the Engineer, corrective work shall be taken by the Contractor for pavement identified 40 by the Contractor or Engineer that does not meet the following requirements: 41 42

1. The completed surface of all courses shall be of uniform texture, smooth, 43 uniform as to crown and grade, and free from defects of all kinds. 44

45 2. The completed surface of the wearing course shall not vary more than ⅛ 46

inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed on the surface 47 parallel to the centerline. 48

49 3. The completed surface of the wearing course shall vary not more than ¼ 50

inch in 10 feet from the rate of transverse slope shown in the Plans. 51


1 All corrective work shall be completed at no additional expense, including traffic 2 control, to the Contracting Agency. Pavement shall be repaired by one or more of 3 the following methods: 4 5

1. Diamond grinding; repairs shall not reduce pavement thickness by more 6 than ¼ inch. 7

8 2. Removal and replacement of the HMA wearing course. 9

10 3. By other method approved by the Engineer. 11 12

For repairs following IRI testing the repaired area shall be checked by the Contractor 13 with a 10-foot straightedge to ensure it no longer requires corrective work. With 14 approval of the Engineer a lightweight profiler, California profilograph or other device 15 may be used in place of the 10-foot straight edge. 16 17 If correction of the roadway as listed above either will not or does not produce 18 satisfactory results as to smoothness or serviceability the Engineer may accept the 19 completed pavement and a credit will be calculated in accordance with Section 5-20 04.5(1). Under these circumstances the decision whether to accept the completed 21 pavement or to require corrective work as described above shall be vested entirely 22 in the Engineer. 23 24 During the last review of this roadway, which was conducted on *** $$1$$ ***, by the 25 Contracting Agency the following IRI (inches/mile) values were obtained. The IRI 26 values are informational only and are average IRI values for 0.10 mile sections. 27 Additional information may be available for review at the Engineer’s Office. 28 29 *** 30

SR Begin End IRI Running Avg

NB/EB

IRI Running Avg

SB/WB

Milepost Milepost (Inch/mile) (Inch/mile)

$$2$$ $$3$$ $$4$$ $$5$$ $$6$$

*** 31 32

33 5-04.3(13).INST2.GR5 34

The second sentence of Section 5-04.3(13) is deleted and replaced with the following: 35 36 5-04.3(13).OPT2.FR5 37

(March 13, 1995) 38


The completed surface of the wearing course of the following sections of Roadway 1 shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed 2 on the surface parallel to centerline: 3 4

1. *** $$1$$ *** 5 6

The completed surface of the wearing course of all other sections of Roadway shall 7 not vary more than 1/8 inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed on 8 the surface parallel to centerline. 9

10 5-04.3(13).INST3.GR5 11

The second sentence of Section 5-04.3(13) is revised to read: 12 13 5-04.3(13).OPT3.GR5 14

(January 5, 2004) 15 The completed surface of the wearing course shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from 16 the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed on the surface parallel to centerline. 17

18 5-04.3(14).GR5 19

Planing Bituminous Pavement 20 21 5-04.3(14).INST1.GR5 22


(January 5, 2004) 26 The Contractor shall perform the planing operations no more than *** $$1$$ *** 27 calendar days ahead of the time the planed area is to be paved with HMA, unless 28 otherwise allowed by the Engineer in writing. 29

30 5-04.3(14).OPT2.GR5 31

(January 5, 2004) 32 At the start of the planing operation the Contractor shall plane a 500 foot test section 33 to be evaluated by the Engineer for compliance with the surface tolerance 34 requirements. The test section shall have a minimum width of 10 feet. If the planing 35 is in accordance with the surface tolerance requirements, the Contractor may begin 36 production planing. If the planing is not in conformance with the surface tolerance 37 requirements, the Contractor shall make adjustments to the planing operation and 38 then plane another test section. 39 40 If at any time during the planing operation the Engineer determines the required 41 surface tolerance is not being achieved, the Contractor shall stop planing. Planing 42 shall not resume until the Engineer is satisfied that specification planing can be 43 produced or until successful completion of another test section. The forward speed 44 during production planing shall not exceed the speed used for the test section. 45 46 The completed surface after planing and prior to paving shall not vary more than 1/4 47 inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed on the surface parallel or 48 transverse to the centerline. The planed surface shall have a matted texture and the 49 difference between the high and low of the matted surface shall not exceed 1/8 inch. 50 51


Pavement repair operations, when required, shall be accomplished prior to planing. 1 2 5-04.3(14).OPT3.GR5 3

(March 13, 1995) 4 Vertical Edge Planing 5 During planing of bituminous pavement in the travelled lanes, the Contractor shall 6 coordinate the planing and paving operations such that the planed roadway surface 7 shall not remain unpaved at the end of the work day. The Contractor shall have a 8 contingency plan to ensure that no planed areas remain unpaved due to equipment 9 breakdown or other emergency. 10

11 5-04.3(14).OPT4.GR5 12

(August 3, 2009) 13 Beveled Edge Planing 14 A beveled edge shall be constructed in areas that will not be paved during the same 15 work shift. 16 17 The Contractor shall use a beveled cutter on the mandrel of the planing equipment, 18 or other approved method(s), to eliminate the vertical edge(s). The beveled edge(s) 19 shall be constructed at a 4:1 slope. 20

21 5-04.5.GR5 22

Payment 23 24 5-04.5.INST2.GR5 25 Section 5-04.5 is supplemented with the following: 26 27 5-04.5.OPT1.FR5 28

(January 5, 2015) 29 “Smoothness Compliance Adjustment” by calculation. 30 31

Smoothness Compliance Adjustments 32 Section 5-04.5(1) is supplemented with the following: 33 34

Smoothness Compliance Adjustments will be based on the requirements in Section 35 5-04.3(13) and the following calculations: 36 37

1. Final IRI acceptance and incentive/disincentive payments for pavement 38 smoothness will be calculated on an IRI value per 0.10 mile in accordance 39 with the price adjustment schedule. 40

41 a. For sections of a lane that are a minimum of 0.01 mile and less than 42

0.10 mile, the price adjustment will be calculated using the average of 43 the 0.01 mile IRI values and the price adjustment prorated for the 44 length of the section. 45

46 b. For bridges, approach slabs and 0.02 miles on either side the price 47

adjustment will be calculated independently from other measured 48 lanes. 49

50


c. IRI values per 0.01 miles that were measured prior to corrective work 1 will be included in the 0.10 mile price adjustment for sections with 2 corrective work. 3

4 2. A smoothness compliance adjustment will be calculated in the sum of 5

minus $250.00 for each and every section of single traffic lane 0.01 miles 6 in length in that does not meet the 10-foot straight edge requirements in 7 Section 5-04.3(13). 8

9 10 The price adjustment schedule for this contract shall be *** $$1$$ ***. 11 12

Price Adjustment Schedule 13

IRI for Pay Pay Pay each 0.10 Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment mi. section Schedule 1 Schedule 2 Schedule 3

in. / mi. $ / 0.10 mi. $ / 0.10 mi. $ / 0.10 mi.

< 30 600 600 600

30 600 600 600

31 580 580 580

32 560 560 560

33 540 540 540

34 520 520 520

35 500 500 500

36 480 480 480

37 460 460 460

38 440 440 440

39 420 420 420

40 400 400 400

41 380 380 380

42 360 360 360

43 340 340 340

44 320 320 320

45 300 300 300

46 280 280 280

47 260 260 260

48 240 240 240

49 220 220 220

50 200 200 200

51 180 180 180

52 160 160 160

53 140 140 140

54 120 120 120

55 100 100 100

56 80 80 80

57 60 60 60

58 40 40 40

59 20 20 20

60 0 0 0


61 0 0 0

62 0 0 0

63 0 0 0

64 0 0 0

65 0 0 0

66 -20 0 0

67 -40 0 0

68 -60 0 0

69 -80 0 0

70 -100 0 0

71 -120 0 0

72 -140 0 0

73 -160 0 0

74 -180 0 0

75 -200 0 0

76 -220 -20 0

77 -240 -40 0

78 -260 -60 0

79 -280 -80 0

80 -300 -100 0

81 -320 -120 0

82 -340 -140 0

83 -360 -160 0

84 -380 -180 0

85 -400 -200 0

86 -420 -220 0

87 -440 -240 0

88 -460 -260 0

89 -480 -280 0

90 -500 -300 0

91 -520 -320 0

92 -540 -340 0

93 -560 -360 0

94 -580 -380 0

95 -600 -400 0

96 -620 -420 0

97 -640 -440 0

98 -660 -460 0

99 -680 -480 0

100 -700 -500 0

101 -720 -520 0

102 -740 -540 0

103 -760 -560 0

104 -780 -580 0

105 -800 -600 0

106 -820 -620 0

107 -840 -640 0

108 -860 -660 0

109 -880 -680 0


110 -900 -700 0

111 -920 -720 0

112 -940 -740 0

113 -960 -760 0

114 -980 -780 0

115 -1000 -800 0

116 -1020 -820 0

117 -1040 -840 0

118 -1060 -860 0

119 -1080 -880 0

120 -1100 -900 0

121 -1120 -920 0

122 -1140 -940 0

123 -1160 -960 0

124 -1180 -980 0

≥125 -1200 -1000 0

1

2 5-04.5.OPT2.GR5 3

(January 13, 2021) 4

Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment 5 The Contracting Agency will make an Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment, either a credit or a 6 payment, for qualifying changes in the reference cost of asphalt binder. The adjustment 7 will be applied to partial payments made according to Section 1-09.9 for the following bid 8 items when they are included in the proposal: 9 10

“HMA Cl. ___ PG ___” 11 “HMA for Approach Cl. ___ PG ___” 12 “HMA for Preleveling Cl. ___ PG ___” 13 “HMA for Pavement Repair Cl. ___ PG ___” 14 “Commercial HMA” 15

16 The adjustment is not a guarantee of full compensation for changes in the cost of asphalt 17 binder. The Contracting Agency does not guarantee that asphalt binder will be available 18 at the reference cost. 19 20 The Contracting Agency will establish asphalt binder reference costs twice each month 21 and post the information on the Agency website at: 22 http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/EscalationClauses.htm. The reference 23 cost will be determined using posted prices furnished by Poten & Partners, Inc. If the 24 selected price source ceases to be available for any reason, then the Contracting Agency 25 will select a substitute price source to establish the reference cost. 26

27 Price adjustments will be calculated one time per month. No price adjustment will be made 28 if the Current Reference Cost is within +/-5% of the Base Cost. Reference costs for 29 projects located in Eastern versus Western Washington shall be selected from the column 30 in the WSDOT website table labeled “Eastern”, or “Western”, accordingly. The adjustment 31 will be calculated as follows: 32

33

http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/Construction/EscalationClauses.htm


If the reference cost is greater than or equal to 105% of the base cost, then 1 Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment = (Current Reference Cost – (1.05 x Base Cost)) x (Q 2 x 0.056). 3 4 If the reference cost is less than or equal to 95% of the base cost, then 5 Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment = (Current Reference Cost – (0.95 x Base Cost)) x (Q 6 x 0.056). 7 8 Where: Current Reference Cost is selected from the website table based on 9

the “Date Effective” that immediately precedes the current month’s 10 progress estimate end date. For work completed after all authorized 11 working days are used, the adjustment will be based on the posted 12 reference cost during which contract time was exhausted. 13

14 Base Cost is selected from the website table based on the “Date 15

Effective” that immediately precedes the contract bid opening date, and 16 shall be a constant for all monthly adjustments. 17

18 Q = total tons of all classes of HMA paid in the current month’s progress 19 payment. 20

21 “Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment”, by calculation. 22 “Asphalt Cost Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in this 23 section. For the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting 24 Agency has entered an amount in the proposal to become a part of the total bid by the 25 Contractor. 26

27 5-04.5.OPT3.GR5 28

(April 4, 2016) 29 “Asphalt Binder Revision” by calculation. 30 “Asphalt Binder Revision” shall be calculated and paid for as described in Section 5-04.3. 31

32


DIVISION6.GR6 Structures 1 2

6-01.GR6 General Requirements For Structures 3 4

6-01.5.GR6 Work Access and Temporary Structures 5 6

6-01.5.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-01.5 is re-titled and revised to read:) 7 Must use once preceding any of the following: 8

9 6-01.5.OPT1.FB6 (Work Access) 10

(April 1, 2019) 11 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to construct work 12 access to perform structure removal and construction, 13 including work trestle construction for work within or above 14 an environmentally sensitive area as required by resource 15 agency environmental permits and restrictions. The fill-in 16 specifies the name of the environmentally sensitive area or 17 waterway. Include with 6-01.5.OPT1(B).GB6. 18 Must use once preceding any of the following: 19 (1 fill-in) 20

21 6-01.5.OPT1(A).FB6 (Waterway Clearance Requirements) 22

(April 6, 2015) 23 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to construct the 24 work access structure to conform to navigation 25 clearance requirements of the USCG. The first fill-in 26 specifies the minimum horizontal clearance required for 27 the channel span. The second fill-in specifies the 28 minimum elevation required for the bottom of the work 29 access structure superstructure. Include with 6-30 01.5.OPT1.FB6 and 6-01.5.OPT1(B).GB6. 31 (2 fill-ins) 32

33 6-01.5.OPT1(B).GB6 (Payment) 34

(April 6, 2015) 35 Use in projects requiring the Contractor to construct 36 work access to perform structure removal and 37 construction, including work trestle construction for 38 work within or above an environmentally sensitive area 39 as required by resource agency environmental permits 40 and restrictions. Include with 6-01.5.OPT1.FB6. 41

42 6-01.5.OPT2.FB6 (Temporary Bridge) 43

(August 6, 2018) 44 Use in projects requiring construction of a temporary bridge. 45 The first fill-in specifies the minimum overall length of the 46 temporary bridge, and can also be used to specify 47 requirements for number of spans and lengths of specific 48 spans, if necessary. The second fill-in specifies the 49 minimum roadway width required between barriers or 50 railings. The third fill-in specifies the minimum vertical 51 clearance dimension to the roadway, body of water, or 52 surface, specified in the fourth fill-in. If the length, width or 53


vertical clearance of the temporary bridge is shown in the 1 plans, the specific geometric requirement item text in the 2 specification can be deleted (or if all are shown in the plans, 3 the entire geometric requirements paragraph can be 4 deleted). 5 (4 fill-ins) 6 7

6-02.GR6 Concrete Structures 8 9

6-02.2.GR6 Materials 10 11 6-02.2.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.2 is supplemented with the following) 12


6-02.2.OPT1.GR6 (Resin Bonded Anchors) 15 (April 1, 2013) 16 Include in projects requiring resin bonded anchors for 17 attaching and anchoring items to concrete structures. Must 18 also include 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6. 19

20 6-02.2.OPT2.GB6 (Epoxy Bonding Agent For Surfaces And For Steel 21

Reinforcing Bar Dowels) 22 (September 8, 2020) 23 Use in projects when epoxy resin is required for setting 24 steel reinforcing bars into holes drilled into concrete. 25 Include with 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6. 26

27 6-02.2.OPT4.GB6 (Epoxy Crack Sealing) 28

(August 3, 2015) 29 Use in projects which require sealing cracks in existing 30 concrete with injected epoxy resin. Include with 6-31 02.3.OPT1.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT49.GB6. 32

33 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6 (Rapid Cure Silicone Sealant) 34

(April 6, 2015) 35 Use in projects where rapid cure silicone sealant is used for 36 expansion joint modification. Include with 6-37 02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6, either 6-02.3(13).OPT7(I).GB6 or 38 6-02.3(13).OPT7(J).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-39 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable expansion joint 40 modification GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-41 02.3(13). 42 43

6-02.2.OPT27.GB6 (Polyester Concrete) 44 (April 6, 2015) 45 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 46 Include with 6-02.3.OPT9.GB6. 47

48 6-02.2.OPT28.GB6 (Elastomeric Concrete) 49

(April 6, 2015) 50 Use in projects where elastomeric concrete is required. 51 Include with 6-02.3.OPT10.GB6. 52 53


6-02.2.OPT46.GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 1 Must use once preceding any of the following: 2

3 6-02.2.OPT46(A).GB6 (June 26, 2000) 4

Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 5 supports include concrete inserts. Include with 6-6 02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-7 02.5.OPT26.FB6. 8

9 6-02.2.OPT46(B).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 10

(September 3, 2019) 11 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 12 supports include steel rods, bars, and plates. Include 13 with 6-02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, and 14 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6, and either 6-02.3.OPT2(B).GB6, or 15 6-02.3.OPT2(C).GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT93.GB6. 16 17

6-02.2.OPT46(C).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 18 (September 3, 2019) 19 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 20 supports include transverse braces. Include with 6-21 02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.2.OPT46(B).GB6, 6-22 02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6, and either 23 6-02.3.OPT2(B).GB6, or 6-02.3.OPT2(C).GB6 and 6-24 02.5.OPT93.GB6. 25 26

6-02.2.OPT46(D).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 27 (June 26, 2000) 28 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 29 supports include pipe rolls or pipe saddles. Include with 30 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 and other applicable bridge 31 supported utility material and construction requirement 32 GSP’s. 33 34

6-02.2.OPT46(E).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 35 (September 3, 2019) 36 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities in 37 concrete box girder bridges when the utilities are 38 supported on anchor blocks on the bottom slab. Include 39 with 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 and other applicable bridge 40 supported utility material and construction requirement 41 GSP’s. 42

43 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6 (Bridge Drain Risers) 44

(April 30, 2001) 45 Use in projects requiring the raising of bridge drains prior to 46 asphalt or modified concrete overlay work on bridge decks. 47 Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6. Also include with 6-48 02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 if the bridge deck is overlaid with 49 membrane waterproofing and ACP. Include with 6-50 02.5.OPT53.FB6 if the work is included in the cost of the 51 membrane waterproofing or modified concrete overlay. 52 Include with 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT51.GB6 if 53


the unit contract bid item “Modify Bridge Drain” is used to 1 pay for the work. 2

3 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 4

(September 8, 2020) 5 Use in projects with core drilled bridge deck drains. Include 6 with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6, and either 6-7 02.4.OPT32.GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT58.GB6, or 6-8 02.5.OPT59.FB6. 9

10 6-02.2.OPT60.GB6 (Seismic Retrofit Materials) 11

(April 6, 2015) 12 Use in projects with seismic retrofit construction. 13 Must use once preceding any of the following: 14

15 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6 (Steel and PVC Pipe) 16

(April 6, 2015) 17 Use in projects with seismic retrofit work when steel 18 and/or PVC pipe are used as materials. Include with 6-19 02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other 20 applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 21 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 22 23

6-02.2.OPT60(C).GB6 (Structural Steel and Steel Fastening 24 Hardware) 25 (September 8, 2020) 26 Use in projects with seismic retrofit work when structural 27 steel and steel fastening hardware are used as 28 materials. Include with 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-29 02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all applicable other seismic 30 retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-31 02.3. 32 33

6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6 (High-Strength Steel Rods) 34 (September 8, 2020) 35 Use in projects with seismic retrofit work requiring the 36 installation of longitudinal seismic restrainer 37 assemblies. Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(L).GB6, 6-38 02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other 39 applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 40 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 41 42

6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6 (Column Jacketing Materials) 43 (September 8, 2020) 44 Use in projects with seismic retrofit work when column 45 jacketing is required. Include with 6-46 02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-47 02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-48 02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-49 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-50 02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-fabrication field 51 measuring requirements for specific existing bridge 52 columns are waived. 53


1 6-02.2.OPT61.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 2

(September 8, 2020) 3 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete stay-4 in-place panels. Include with 6-02.3(9)A.OPT6.GB6, 6-5 02.3(9)E.OPT6.GB6, 6-02.3(9)F.OPT1.GB6, 6-6 02.3(9)G.OPT6.GB6 and 6-02.3(9)I.OPT6.GB6. 7




6-02.3.OPT1.GB6 (Epoxy Crack Sealing) 14 (August 3, 2015September 7, 2021) 15 Use in projects which require sealing cracks in existing 16 concrete with injected epoxy resin. Include with 6-17 02.2.OPT4.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT24.GB6, and 6-18 02.5.OPT49.GB6. 19

20 6-02.3.OPT2.GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 21


6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 24 (August 3, 2015) 25 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 26 supports include concrete inserts. Include with 6-27 02.2.OPT46.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-28 02.5.OPT26.FB6. 29 30

6-02.3.OPT2(B).GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 31 (June 26, 2000) 32 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 33 Contractor furnishes and installs the supports and the 34 utility pipe or conduit pipe. Include with 6-35 02.5.OPT92.FB6 and other applicable bridge supported 36 utility material GSP’s. Include with 6-37 02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-38 02.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the 39 supports include concrete inserts. 40 41

6-02.3.OPT2(C).FB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 42 (June 26, 2000) 43 Use in projects with bridge supported utilities when the 44 Utility Company furnishes, or furnishes and installs, 45 some of the supports and pipe for the utilities. The first 46 fill-in specifies the items to be furnished and installed by 47 the Utility Company. The second and third fill-ins specify 48 the items to be installed by the Contractor which are 49 furnished by either the Utility Company or the 50 Contractor. Include with 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 and 6-51 02.5.OPT93.GB6, and other applicable bridge 52 supported utility material GSP’s. Include with 6-53


02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-1 02.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the 2 supports include concrete inserts. 3 (3 fill-ins) 4

5 6-02.3.OPT8.GB6 (Seismic Retrofit) 6

Must use once preceding one of the following: 7 8

6-02.3.OPT8(B).GB6 (Seismic Retrofit Demolition Plan) 9 (April 6, 2015) 10 Use in seismic retrofit projects where removal of 11 portions of existing concrete and steel reinforcing bars, 12 or cleaning and preparing of existing concrete surfaces 13 is required. Include with 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6, 6-14 02.3.OPT8(H).GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all 15 other applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 16 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 17

18 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6 (Column Jacket Installation Plan) 19

(April 6, 2015) 20 Use in projects with column jacketing of existing 21 bridges. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-22 02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-23 02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-24 02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include 25 with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-fabrication field 26 measuring requirements for specific existing bridge 27 columns are waived. 28

29 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6 (Column Jacket Shop Drawings) 30

(April 6, 2015) 31 Use in projects with column jacketing of existing 32 bridges. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-33 02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-34 02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-35 02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 36 Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-37 fabrication field measuring requirements for specific 38 existing bridge columns are waived. 39 40

6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6 (Field Measuring Existing Bridge Columns) 41 (September 8, 2020) 42 Use in projects where field measuring of existing bridge 43 columns is required. Include with 6-44 02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-45 02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-46 02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-47 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-48 02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-fabrication field 49 measuring requirements for specific existing bridge 50 columns are waived. 51

52 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 (Field Measuring Waiver for Specific 53


Existing Bridge Columns) 1 (April 6, 2015) 2 Use in projects where the requirement of pre-fabrication 3 field measuring of specific existing bridge columns is 4 waived. The fill-in specifies the bridge(s) and pier(s) 5 where the column receiving the waiver is located. 6 Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-7 02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-8 02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-9 02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-10 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 11 (1 fill-in) 12

13 6-02.3.OPT8(G).FB6 (Field Measuring for Seismic 14

Retrofit Components) 15 (April 6, 2015) 16 Use in projects where field measuring of existing bridge 17 members is required for seismic retrofit components. 18 The first fill-in specifies the bridge(s) where the field 19 measuring work is required. The second fill-in specifies 20 the members or components to be measured. Include 21 with 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and 22 all other applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 23 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 24 (2-fill-ins) 25

26 6-02.3.OPT8(H).GB6 (Removing Portions of Existing Concrete) 27

(April 6, 2015) 28 Use in seismic retrofit projects where removal of 29 portions of existing concrete and steel reinforcing bars, 30 or cleaning and preparing of existing concrete surfaces 31 is required. Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(B).GB6, 6-32 02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other 33 applicable seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing 34 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 35

36 6-02.3.OPT8(J).GB6 (Drilling Holes and Setting Steel 37

Reinf. Bars, and Placing Concrete) 38 (April 6, 2015) 39 Use in seismic retrofit projects requiring the 40 construction of catcher blocks, girder stops, and other 41 concrete appendages. Include with 6-42 02.3.OPT8(B).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(H).GB6, 6-43 02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6, and 6-44 02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other applicable seismic 45 retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-46 02.3. 47

48 6-02.3.OPT8(K).GB6 (Installing and Tensioning High-Strength 49

Steel Bar Reinforcement) 50 (April 6, 2015) 51 Use in seismic retrofit projects requiring the installation, 52 stressing, and grouting of high-strength steel bar 53


reinforcement. Include with 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-1 02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other applicable seismic 2 retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-3 02.3. 4

5 6-02.3.OPT8(L).GB6 (Longitudinal Seismic Restrainers) 6

(April 6, 2015) 7 Use in seismic retrofit projects requiring the installation 8 of longitudinal seismic restrainer assemblies. Include 9 with 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6, 6-10 02.2.OPT60(C).BSP.GB6, 6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6, 6-11 02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, either 6-02.4.OPT43.GB6 and 6-12 02.5.OPT71.GB6, or 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and 6-13 02.5.OPT72.GB6, and all other applicable seismic 14 retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-15 02.3. 16

17 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6 (Column Jacketing) 18

(September 8, 2020) 19 Use in projects with column jacketing of existing 20 bridges. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-21 02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-22 02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6, 6-23 02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include 24 with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 when the pre-fabrication field 25 measuring requirements for specific existing bridge 26 columns are waived. 27

28 6-02.3.OPT9.GB6 (Polyester Concrete) 29

(January 7, 2019) 30 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 31 Include with 6-02.2.OPT27.GB6. 32

33 6-02.3.OPT10.GB6 (Elastomeric Concrete) 34

(January 7, 2019) 35 Use in projects where elastomeric concrete is required. 36 Include with 6-02.2.OPT28.GB6. 37

38 6-02.3(2).GR6 Proportioning Materials 39

40 6-02.3(2).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(2) is supplemented with the 41

following) 42 Must use once preceding any of the following: 43 44

6-02.3(2).OPT1.GB6 (Expansion Joint Header Concrete) 45 (September 8, 2020) 46 Use in projects with expansion joint modifications where 47 the headers for the modified joints are made of a high 48 early strength concrete mix. Include with 6-49 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-50 02.3(13).OPT7(H).GB6, , or 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-51 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable expansion 52


joint modification GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 1 and 6-02.3(13). 2

3 6-02.3(6).GR6 Placing Concrete 4

5 6-02.3(6)B.GR6 Placing Concrete in Foundation Seals 6 7

6-02.3(6)B.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(6)B is supplemented with the 8 following) 9 Must use once preceding any of the following: 10 11

6-02.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6 (Concrete Seals) 12 (June 26, 2000) 13 Use in projects where there is the possibility of 14 seals being omitted during construction, in which 15 case the footing is to be lowered to bottom of seal. 16 17

6-02.3(6)B.OPT2.GB6 (Concrete Seals) 18 (June 26, 2000) 19 Use in projects where there is the possibility of 20 seals being omitted during construction, in which 21 case the footing is not to be lowered. 22

23 6-02.3(9).GR6 Precast Concrete Panels 24

25 6-02.3(9)A.GR6 Shop Drawings 26 27

6-02.3(9)A.INST2.GR6 (The list included in the third paragraph of 28 Section 6-02.3(9)A is supplemented with the following) 29 Must use once preceding any of the following: 30 31

6-02.3(9)A.OPT6.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 32 (September 8, 2020) 33 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 34 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-35 02.2.OPT61.GB6, 6-02.3(9)E.OPT6.GB6, 6-36 02.3(9)F.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.3(9)G.OPT6.GB6 and 37 6-02.3(9)I.OPT6.GB6. 38 39

6-02.3(9)E.GR6 Finishing 40 41

6-02.3(9)E.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(9)E is supplemented with 42 the following) 43 Must use once preceding any of the following: 44

45 6-02.3(9)E.OPT6.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 46

(September 8, 2020) 47 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 48 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-49 02.2.OPT61.GB6, 6-02.3(9)A.OPT6.GB6, 6-50 02.3(9)F.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.3(9)G.OPT6.GB6 and 51 6-02.3(9)I.OPT6.GB6. 52

53


6-02.3(9)F.GR6 Tolerances 1 2

6-02.3(9)F.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(9)F is supplemented with the 3 following) 4 Must use once preceding any of the following: 5

6 6-02.3(9)F.OPT1.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 7

(September 8, 2020) 8 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 9 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-10 02.2.OPT61.GB6, 6-02.3(9)A.OPT6.GB6, 6-11 02.3(9)E.OPT6.GB6, 6-02.3(9)G.OPT6.GB6 and 12 6-02.3(9)I.OPT6.GB6. 13

14 6-02.3(9)G.GR6 Handling and Storage 15

16 6-02.3(9)G.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(9)G is supplemented with 17


20 6-02.3(9)G.OPT6.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 21

(September 8, 2020) 22 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 23 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-24 02.2.OPT61.GB6, 6-02.3(9)A.OPT6.GB6, 6-25 02.3(9)E.OPT6.GB6, 6-02.3(9)F.OPT1.GB6 and 26 6-02.3(9)I.OPT6.GB6. 27

28 6-02.3(9)I.GR6 Erection 29

30 6-02.3(9)I.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(9)I is supplemented with the 31


34 6-02.3(9)I.OPT6.GB6 (PCPS Conc. SIP Panels) 35

(September 8, 2020) 36 Use in projects with precast prestressed concrete 37 stay-in-place panels. Include with 6-38 02.2.OPT61.GB6, 6-02.3(9)A.OPT6.GB6, 6-39 02.3(9)E.OPT6.GB6, 6-02.3(9)F.OPT1.GB6 and 40 6-02.3(9)G.OPT6.GB6. 41

42 6-02.3(10).GR6 Bridge Decks and Bridge Approach Slabs 43 44

6-02.3(10)D.GR6 Concrete Placement, Finishing, and Texturing 45 46

6-02.3(10)D.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(10)D is supplemented with 47 the following) 48 Must use once preceding any of the following: 49

50 6-02.3(10)D.OPT1.GB6 (Repairing Slab Left Exposed After 51

Removing Existing Curb or Sidewalk) 52 (August 4, 2008) 53


Use in projects when existing curbs or sidewalks 1 are to be removed and the portion of the slab 2 under the curb or sidewalk that is to remain 3 exposed will be within two feet from the traffic 4 lane. 5

6 6-02.3(10)D.OPT2.GB6 (Repairing Slab Left Exposed After 7

Removing 8 Existing Curb or Railbase) 9 (August 4, 2008) 10 Use in projects when existing curbs or railbases 11 are to be removed and the portion of the slab 12 under the curb or railbase that is to remain 13 exposed will be more than two feet from the traffic 14 lane. 15

16 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6 (Bridge Drain Risers) 17

(August 3, 2015) 18 Use in projects requiring the raising of bridge 19 drains prior to asphalt or modified concrete 20 overlay work on bridge decks. Include with 6-21 02.2.OPT48.GB6. Include with 6-22 02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 if the bridge deck is 23 overlaid with membrane waterproofing and ACP. 24 Include with 6-02.5.OPT53.FB6 if the work is 25 included in the cost of the membrane 26 waterproofing or modified concrete overlay. 27 Include with 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 and 6-28 02.5.OPT51.GB6 if the unit contract bid item 29 “Modify Bridge Drain” is used to pay for the work. 30 Must use once preceding any of the following: 31

32 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3(A).GB6 (Bridge Drain Risers) 33

(August 4, 2008) 34 Use in projects requiring the raising of bridge 35 drains prior to membrane waterproofing and 36 asphalt overlay work. Include with 6-37 02.2.OPT48.GB6 and 6-38 02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6. Include with 6-39 02.5.OPT53.FB6 if the work is included in 40 the cost of the membrane waterproofing. 41 Include with 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 and 6-42 02.5.OPT51.GB6 if the unit contract bid item 43 “Modify Bridge Drain” is used to pay for the 44 work. 45

46 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 (Plugging Existing Bridge Drain) 47

(August 3, 2015) 48 Use in projects requiring plugging of bridge drains. 49 Include with 6-02.5.OPT53.FB6 if the work is 50 included in the cost of the membrane 51 waterproofing or modified concrete overlay. 52 Include with 6-02.4.OPT27.GB6 and 6-53


02.5.OPT52.GB6 if the unit contract bid item 1 “Plugging Existing Bridge Drain” is used to pay for 2 the work. 3

4 6-02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 5

(April 6, 2015) 6 Use in projects with core drilled bridge deck 7 drains. Include with 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6, and 8 either 6-02.4.OPT32.GB6 and 6-9 02.5.OPT58.GB6, or 6-02.5.OPT59.FB6. 10

11 6-02.3(10)F.GR6 Bridge Approach Slab Orientation and Anchors 12

13 6-02.3(10)F.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(10)F is supplemented with 14

the following) 15 Must use once preceding any of the following: 16 17

6-02.3(10)F.OPT2.GB6 (Construct pavement end of approach 18 slabs parallel to pavement seat) 19 (August 4, 2008) 20 Use in projects when the pavement ends of all 21 approach slabs are constructed parallel to the 22 pavement seat. 23

24 6-02.3(10)F.OPT3.FB6 (Construct pavement end of approach 25

slabs both 26 normal to the roadway centerline and parallel to 27 pavement seat) 28 (August 4, 2008) 29 Use in projects when the pavement ends of the 30 approach slabs are constructed both normal to the 31 roadway centerline and parallel to the pavement 32 seat. 33 (2 fill-ins) 34

35 6-02.3(13).GR6 Expansion Joints 36



41 6-02.3(13).OPT7.GB6 Expansion Joint Modification 42

43 6-02.3(13).OPT7(B).GB6 (Expansion Joint Demolition Plan) 44

(April 6, 2015) 45 Use in projects where removal of portions of the 46 existing bridge expansion joint assembly, and/or 47 adjacent concrete and steel reinforcing bars, is 48 required. Include with 6-02.3(13).OPT7(E).FB6, 49 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and 50 all other applicable expansion joint modification 51 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-52 02.3(13). 53


1 6-02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6 (Joint Preparation and Installation 2

Procedure) 3 (April 6, 2015) 4 Use in projects where rapid cure silicone sealant 5 is used for expansion joint modification. Include 6 with 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6, either 6-7 02.3(13).OPT7(I).GB6 or 6-8 02.3(13).OPT7(J).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-9 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 10 expansion joint modification GSPs supplementing 11 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 12

13 6-02.3(13).OPT7(D).FB6 (Field Measuring Existing Expansion 14

Joint) 15 (April 6, 2015) 16 Use in projects where field measuring of the 17 existing expansion joint is required. The fill-in 18 specifies the bridge(s) included in the field 19 measuring requirement. Include with 6-20 02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all 21 other applicable expansion joint modification 22 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-23 02.3(13). 24 (1 fill-in) 25 26

6-02.3(13).OPT7(E).FB6 (Removing Portions of Existing Bridge 27 Expansion Joints) 28 (April 6, 2015) 29 Use in projects where removal of portions of the 30 existing bridge expansion joint assembly, and/or 31 adjacent concrete and steel reinforcing bars, is 32 required. The fill-in specified the bridge(s) where 33 the expansion joint removal work is required. 34 Include with 6-02.3(13).OPT7(B).GB6, 6-35 02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all 36 other applicable expansion joint modification 37 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-38 02.3(13). 39 (1-fill-in) 40 41

6-02.3(13).OPT7(F).GB6 (Drilling Holes and Setting St. Reinf. Bars) 42 (April 6, 2015) 43 Use in projects with expansion joint modification 44 where drilling holes and setting steel reinforcing 45 bar dowels are required. Include with 6-46 02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-47 02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all 48 other applicable expansion joint modification 49 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-50 02.3(13). 51 52

6-02.3(13).OPT7(G).GB6 (Placing Polyester Concrete or 53


Elastomeric Concrete Headers) 1 (April 6, 2015) 2 Use in projects when the headers for modified 3 bridge expansion joints are made of either 4 polyester concrete or elastomeric concrete. 5 Include with either 6-02.2.OPT27.GB6 and 6-6 02.3.OPT9.GB6, or 6-02.2.OPT28.GB6 and 6-7 02.3.OPT10.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-8 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 9 expansion joint modification GSPs supplementing 10 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 11 12

6-02.3(13).OPT7(H).GB6 (Placing Concrete Headers) 13 (September 8, 2020) 14 Use in projects where the headers for modified 15 bridge expansion joints are made of concrete. 16 Include with 6-02.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-17 02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6, 6-02.3(13).OPT7(F).GB6, 18 6-02.3(2).OPT1.GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-19 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 20 expansion joint modification GSPs supplementing 21 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 22 23

6-02.3(13).OPT7(I).GB6 (Placing Expansion Joint Sealant) 24 (September 8, 2020) 25 Use in projects where rapid cure silicone sealant 26 is used for modified bridge expansion joints with 27 concrete or polymer concrete or polyester 28 concrete or elastomeric concrete headers. Include 29 with 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6, 6-30 02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-31 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 32 expansion joint modification GSPs supplementing 33 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 34 35

6-02.3(13).OPT7(J).GB6 (Placing Expansion Joint Sealant) 36 (September 8, 2020) 37 Use in projects where rapid cure silicone sealant 38 is used for modified bridge expansion joints with 39 modified concrete overlay headers. To be used 40 only for bridges with low ADT, and only with the 41 approval of the Bridge and Structures Office 42 Bearing and Expansion Joint Specialist. Include 43 with 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6, 6-44 02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and 6-45 02.5.OPT33.GB6, and all other applicable 46 expansion joint modification GSPs supplementing 47 Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13) and the pertinent 48 modified concrete overlay GSP’s. 49 50

6-02.3(13)C.GR6 Modular Expansion Joint System 51 52

6-02.3(13)C.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(13)C is supplemented with 53



3 6-02.3(13)C.OPT1.FB6 (Acceptable Manufacturers) 4

(September 8, 2020) 5 Include in projects requiring a modular expansion 6 joint system. The fill-in specifies the percentage of 7 the amplified vertical load range to be used for the 8 horizontal load range for the fatigue design. The 9 fill-in value shall be 20-percent except for 10 installations at locations subject to significant 11 braking and acceleration forces or subject to 12 particularly large movement ranges where the fill-13 in value shall be 50-percent. Coordination with the 14 Bridge and Structures Office Bridge Bearing and 15 Expansion Joint Specialist is required. 16 Include with 6-02.4.OPT3.FB6 and 6-17 03.3(30).FB6. 18 (1-fill-in) 19 20

6-02.3(14).GR6 Finishing Concrete Surfaces 21 22

6-02.3(14)C.GR6 Pigmented Sealer for Concrete Surfaces 23 24

6-02.3(14)C.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(14)C is supplemented with 25 the following) 26 Must use once preceding any of the following: 27

28 6-02.3(14)C.OPT1.GB6 (Washington Gray Pigmented Sealer) 29

(April 6, 2009) 30 Use in projects requiring application of pigmented 31 sealer to concrete surfaces, with Washington Gray 32 being the sole color. 33

34 6-02.3(14)C.OPT2.GB6 (Mt. St. Helens Gray Pigmented Sealer) 35

(April 6, 2009) 36 Use in projects requiring application of pigmented 37 sealer to concrete surfaces, with Mt. St. Helens 38 Gray being the sole color. 39

40 6-02.3(14)C.OPT3.GB6 (Mt. Baker Gray Pigmented Sealer) 41

(April 6, 2009) 42 Use in projects requiring application of pigmented 43 sealer to concrete surfaces, with Mt. Baker Gray 44 being the sole color. 45 46

6-02.3(14)C.OPT4.GB6 (Cascade Green Pigmented Sealer) 47 (April 6, 2009) 48 Use in projects requiring application of pigmented 49 sealer to concrete surfaces, with Cascade Green 50 being the sole color. 51 52

6-02.3(14)C.OPT5.FB6 (Multiple Color Pigmented Sealer) 53


(April 6, 2009) 1 Use in projects requiring application of pigmented 2 sealer to concrete surfaces, with two or more 3 colors specified. Each fill-in pair is to be used to 4 specify the structural features receiving a specific 5 color of pigmented sealer. 6 (2 fill-ins) 7 8

6-02.3(17).GR6 Falsework and Formwork 9 10

6-02.3(17)C.GR6 Falsework and Formwork at Special Locations 11 12


16 6-02.3(17)C.OPT1.FB6 (Falsework Adjacent to or over 17

Railroad Tracks) 18 (September 3, 2019) 19 Use in bridge projects requiring falsework 20 adjacent to or over railroad tracks. 21 (1 fill-in) 22 Contact the Railroad Liaison Engineer (360) 705-23 7271 for the fill in information. 24

25 6-02.3(17)K.GR6 Concrete Forms on Steel Spans 26

27 6-02.3(17)K.INST1.GR6 (The first paragraph of Section 6-02.3(17)K is 28

revised to read as follows) 29 Must use once preceding any of the following: 30

31 6-02.3(17)K.OPT1.GB6 (Stay-in-place Metal forms for 32

Steel Box Girders) 33 (August 3, 2015) 34 Use in projects with steel box girder bridges when 35 stay-in-place metal forms are allowed by the 36 Bridge and Structures Office Steel Specialist. 37 Include with 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6, 6-38 02.5.OPT26.FB6, 6-03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-39 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, and 40 6-03.4.OPT1.FB6. 41

42 6-02.3(18).GR6 Placing Anchor Bolts 43

44 6-02.3(18).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-02.3(18) is supplemented with the . 45


48 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6 (January 3, 2011) 49

Include in projects requiring resin bonded anchors for 50 attaching and anchoring items to concrete structures. 51 Must also include 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6. 52

53


6-02.3(24).GR6 Reinforcement 1 2

6-02.3(24)C.GR6 Placing and Fastening 3 4


8 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6 (Drilling Holes for, and Setting, Steel 9

Reinforcing Bar Dowels) 10 (September 8, 2020) 11 Use in projects where holes are drilled into 12 existing concrete and steel reinforcing bar dowels 13 are set with epoxy resin. Include with 6-14 02.2.OPT2.GB6. Include the above with 2-15 02.1.OPT3.GR2, 2-02.3(2).OPT8.GB2, 2-16 02.3(2).OPT12.GR2, and either 2-17 02.5.OPT7.GR2 or 2-02.5.OPT10.GR2 when 18 extending a conc. box culvert. 19

20 6-02.3(26).GR6 Cast-in-Place Prestressed Concrete 21

22 6-02.3(26).INST1.GR6 (The third paragraph of Section 6-02.3(26) is 23

revised to 24 read as follows) 25 Must use once preceding any of the following: 26

27 6-02.3(26).OPT1.GB6 (Cast-in-Place Prestressed Concrete) 28

(January 4, 2010) 29 Use in projects with segmental post-tensioned 30 structures. Check with the Region Construction 31 Engineer to see if testing equipment is available. 32




6-02.4.OPT1.FB6 (Summary of Quantities for Superstructure 39 and Bridge Deck) 40 (September 8, 2020) 41 Use in bridge construction projects with lump sum items for 42 superstructure or bridge deck. The first and third fill-in 43 specify the appropriate bid item name (“Superstructure - 44 _____” or “Bridge Deck - _____”). The second fill-in 45 itemizes the approximate quantities included. Include with 46 6-02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the “Bridge Deck - _____” bid 47 item is used. 48 (3 fill-ins) 49

50 6-02.4.OPT3.FB6 (Modular Expansion Joint System) 51



Include in projects requiring a modular expansion joint 1 system. The fill-in in is to itemize the quantities of work and 2 materials included in the lump sum item. Coordination with 3 the Bridge and Structures Office Bearing and Expansion 4 Joint Specialist is required. Include with 6-5 02.3(13)C.OPT1.FB6 and 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. 6 (1 fill-in) 7

8 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 (Expansion Joint Modification) 9

(September 8, 2020) 10 Use in projects with lump sum item for expansion joint 11 modification. The fill-in specifies the approximate quantities 12 included. Include with 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6 and all 13 applicable expansion joint modification GSPs 14 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 15 (1 fill-in) 16 17

6-02.4.OPT24.GB6 (Epoxy Crack Sealing) 18 (August 6, 2012) 19 Use in projects which require sealing cracks in existing 20 concrete with injected epoxy resin. Include with 6-21 02.2.OPT4.GB6, 6-02.3.OPT1.GB6, and 6-22 02.5.OPT49.GB6. 23 24

6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 (Modifying Bridge Drain) 25 (June 26, 2000) 26 Use in projects where modifying bridge drains is a stand-27 alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6, 6-28 02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT51.GB6 with 29 modified concrete overlay projects. Include the above with 30 6-02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 with membrane waterproofing and 31 ACP overlay projects. 32 33

6-02.4.OPT27.GB6 (Plugging Existing Bridge Drain) 34 (June 26, 2000) 35 Use in projects where plugging existing bridge drains is a 36 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 37 and 6-02.5.OPT52.GB6. 38 39

6-02.4.OPT32.GB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 40 (April 6, 2015) 41 Use in projects where core drilled bridge deck drain is a 42 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6, 6-43 02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6, and 6-02.5.OPT58.GB6. 44 45

6-02.4.OPT43.GB6 (Longitudinal Seismic Restrainer) 46 (April 6, 2015) 47 Use in projects where longitudinal seismic restrainer is a 48 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6, 49 6-02.2.OPT60(C).GB6, 6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6, 6-50 02.3.OPT8(L).GB6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 6-51 02.5.OPT71.GB6 and all other applicable seismic retrofit 52 GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 53


1 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 (Seismic Retrofit) 2

(September 8, 2020) 3 Use in projects with a lump sum item for seismic retrofit. 4 The fill-in specifies the approximate quantities included. 5 Include with 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6 and all other applicable 6 seismic retrofit GSPs supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 7 6-02.3. 8 (1 fill-in) 9

10 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6 (Column Jacketing) 11

(September 8, 2020) 12 Use in projects with a lump sum item for column jacketing. 13 The fill-in specifies the approximate quantities included. 14 Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 15 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-16 02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6, and 6-17 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 18 when the pre-fabrication field measuring requirements for 19 specific existing bridge columns are waived. 20 (1 fill-in) 21

22 6-02.5.GR6 Payment 23

24 6-02.5.INST3.GR6 (The fifth and sixth bid items under Section 6-02.5 are 25


28 6-02.5.OPT20.GB6 (Epoxy-coated St. Reinf. Bar for Bridge) 29

(April 6, 2015) 30 Use in projects with small amounts of epoxy-coated steel 31 reinforcing bar in bridge substructure which is included in 32 the quantity for “St. Reinf. Bar for Bridge” in lieu of a 33 separate stand-alone bid item. 34



6-02.5.OPT26.FB6 (Bridge Deck) 39 (August 2, 2010) 40 Use in steel bridge construction projects with lump sum 41 items for bridge deck. The fill-in specifies work items 42 included in the bid item. Include with 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6. 43 (1 fill-in) 44 45

6-02.5.OPT33.GB6 (Expansion Joint Modification) 46 (April 6, 2015) 47 Use in projects where expansion joint modification is a lump 48 sum item. Include with 6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 and all applicable 49 expansion joint modification GSPs supplementing Sections 50 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(13). 51 52

6-02.5.OPT49.GB6 (Epoxy Crack Sealing) 53


(August 1, 2011) 1 Use in projects which require sealing cracks in existing 2 concrete with injected epoxy resin. Include with 6-3 02.2.OPT4.GB6, 6-02.3.OPT1.GB6, and 6-4 02.4.OPT24.GB6. 5 6

6-02.5.OPT51.GB6 (Modify Bridge Drain) 7 (June 26, 2000) 8 Use in projects where modifying bridge drains is a stand-9 alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6, 6-10 02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6, and 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 with 11 modified concrete overlay projects. Include the above with 12 6-02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 with waterproof membrane and 13 HMA overlay projects. 14 15

6-02.5.OPT52.GB6 (Plugging Existing Bridge Drain) 16 (June 26, 2000) 17 Use in projects where plugging existing bridge drains is a 18 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 19 and 6-02.4.OPT27.GB6. 20 21

6-02.5.OPT53.FB6 (Modifying or Plugging Existing Bridge Drain) 22 (June 26, 2000) 23 Use in projects where payment for modifying or plugging 24 existing bridge drains is included under either “Waterproof 25 Membrane” or “Finishing and Curing Modified Conc. 26 Overlay”. The first fill-in specifies whether the work is 27 modifying or plugging existing bridge drains. The second 28 fill-in specifies appropriate pay item for the work. Include 29 with 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6, and 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6 for 30 modifying bridge drains with modified concrete overlay 31 projects. Include the above with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT4.GB6 for 32 modifying bridge drains with waterproof membrane and 33 HMA overlay projects. Include with 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 34 for plugging existing bridge drains. 35 (2 fill-ins) 36 37

6-02.5.OPT58.GB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 38 (April 6, 2015) 39 Use in projects where core drilled bridge deck drain is a 40 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6, 6-41 02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6, and 6-02.4.OPT32.GB6. 42 43

6-02.5.OPT59.FB6 (Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain) 44 (April 6, 2015) 45 Use in projects where core drilled bridge deck drain is 46 included in a separate bid item. The fill-in specifies the bid 47 item including this work. Include with 6-02.2.OPT58.GB6 48 and 6-02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6. 49 (1 fill-in) 50 51

6-02.5.OPT71.GB6 (Longitudinal Seismic Restrainer) 52 (April 6, 2015) 53


Use in projects where longitudinal seismic restrainer is a 1 stand-alone bid item. Include with 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6, 2 6-02.2.OPT60(C).GB6, 6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6, 6-3 02.3.OPT8(L).GB6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 6-4 02.4.OPT43.GB6 and all applicable seismic retrofit GSPs 5 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 6

7 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6 (Seismic Retrofit) 8

(April 6, 2015) 9 Use in projects with seismic retrofit of bridges. Include with 10 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 and all applicable seismic retrofit GSPs 11 supplementing Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. 12

13 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6 (Column Jacketing) 14

(April 6, 2015) 15 Use in projects with column jacketing of bridges. Include 16 with 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6, 6-17 02.3.OPT8(D).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6, 6-18 02.3.OPT8(M).GB6, 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6, and 6-19 03.3(30).OPT1.FB6. Include with 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 20 when the pre-fabrication field measuring requirements for 21 specific existing bridge columns are waived. 22

23 6-02.5.OPT91.FB6 (Bridge and Structures Minor Items) 24

(June 26, 2000) 25 Use in projects with bridges and other structures when 26 there are minor items that are incidental to a lump sum or a 27 unit price bid item. The first fill-in specifies the minor items. 28 The second fill-in specifies the appropriate pay item(s) for 29 the minor items. 30 (2 fill-ins) 31 32

6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 33 (June 26, 2000) 34 Use in projects requiring installation of bridge supported 35 utilities. The first fill-in specifies the type of utility. The 36 second fill-in specifies the bridge(s). The third fill-in 37 specifies the work performed by the Contractor (furnishing 38 materials, installing materials, coordination with utility, etc.), 39 excluding furnishing and installing inserts. The fourth fill-in 40 specifies the pay item. Include with 6-02.3.OPT2(B).GB6, 41 with appropriate bridge supported utility material GSP’s, if 42 all materials and work are supplied and performed by the 43 Contractor. Include with 6-02.3.OPT2(C).GB6 and 6-44 02.5.OPT93.GB6 if a utility company is supplying and 45 performing a portion of the utility materials and work. 46 Include with 6-02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 47 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the 48 supports include concrete inserts. 49 (4 fill-ins) 50 51

6-02.5.OPT93.GB6 (Bridge Supported Utilities) 52 (June 26, 2000) 53


Use in projects requiring installation of bridge supported 1 utilities where a utility company is supplying and performing 2 a portion of the utility materials and work. Include with 6-3 02.3.OPT2(C).GB6 and 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6, and 4 appropriate bridge supported utility material GSP’s. Include 5 with 6-02.2.OPT46(A).GB6, 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-6 02.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-02.5.OPT26.FB6 when the 7 supports include concrete inserts. 8

9 6-03.GR6 Steel Structures 10


13 6-03.3(7).GR6 Shop Plans 14

15 6-03.3(7)A.GR6 Erection Methods 16

17 6-03.3(7)A.INST1.GR6 (The list in the second paragraph of Section 18

6-03.3(7)A is supplemented with the following) 19 Must use once preceding any of the following: 20

21 6-03.3(7)A.OPT1.GB6 (Erection by Girder Launching) 22

(April 6, 2015) 23 Use in projects where girder launching may be 24 used as an erection method. 25

26 6-03.3(7)A.OPT2.GB6 (Hand-held Drilling and Reaming) 27

(April 6, 2015) 28 Use in projects where drilling and reaming 29 operations with hand-held devices is permissible. 30 Include with 6-03.3(27)B.OPT1.FB6. 31 (1 fill-in) 32

33 6-03.3(25).GR6 Welding and Repair Welding 34



39 6-03.3(25).OPT2.GB6 (Narrow Gap Improved-Electroslag Welding 40

(NGI-ESW) Procedure) 41 (April 6, 2015) 42 Use in projects with steel plate girder bridges and box 43 girder bridges primarily with Grades 50 and 50W steel. 44 Accompanying details are required in the Plans for NGI-45 ESW test joint configurations for WPS qualification and 46 charpy v-notch test specimens. 47

48 6-03.3(27).GR6 High Strength Bolt Holes 49

50 6-03.3(27)B.GR6 Reamed and Drilled Holes 51

52 6-03.3(27)B.INST1.GR6 (The second sentence of the first paragraph 53


of Section 6-03.3(27)B is revised to read) 1 Must use once preceding any of the following: 2

3 6-03.3(27)B.OPT1.FB6 (Hand-held Drilling and Reaming) 4

(September 8, 2020) 5 Use in projects where drilling and reaming 6 operations with hand-held devices is permissible. 7 The first fill-in specifies the members and items 8 being drilled and reamed, and the second fill-in 9 specifies the bridge(s) where the work is being 10 done. Include with 6-03.3(7)A.OPT2.GB6. 11 (2 fill-ins) 12

13 6-03.3(28).GR6 Shop Assembly 14

15 6-03.3(28)A.GR6 Method of Shop Assembly 16

17 6-03.3(28)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-03.3(28)A is supplemented with 18


21 6-03.3(28)A.OPT1.GB6 (Progressive Transverse Shop Assembly) 22

(August 5, 2013) 23 Use in projects with new steel girder bridges that 24 have curved or skewed geometry, with the 25 concurrence of the Bridge and Structures Office 26 Steel Specialist. Include with 6-27 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-28 03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, 6-03.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-29 03.5.OPT1.GB6. 30

31 6-03.3(28)B.GR6 Check of Shop Assembly 32

33 6-03.3(28)B.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-03.3(28)B is supplemented with 34


37 6-03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6 (Check of Shop Assembly) 38

(August 3, 2015) 39 Use in projects with new steel bridges. Include 40 with 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-41 03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, 6-03.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-42 03.5.OPT1.GB6. 43

44 6-03.3(30).GR6 Painting 45



50 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6 (Color of Finish Coat) 51

(August 3, 2009) 52


Use in projects with new steel bridges and steel 1 members to cover paint color requirements by 2 specifying the SAE AMS Standard 595 Color Number, 3 or the color name if no number. Include with 6-4 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, 6-5 03.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-03.5.OPT1.GB6. 6 7 Also include in projects with new minor steel items such 8 as steel expansion joints (6-02.3(13).OPT3.FB6, 6-9 02.4.OPT3.FB6, 6-02.5.OPT28.GB6, and 6-10 02.2.OPT22.GB6) and bearings (6-11 02.3(19)B.OPT1.GB6). 12 (1 fill-in) 13

14 6-03.3(30).OPT6.FB6 (Painting Galvanized Seismic Retrofit 15

Components) 16 (April 6, 2015) 17 Use in seismic retrofit projects where galvanized steel 18 components are attached to painted members of 19 existing steel bridges to cover paint color requirements. 20 The first fill-in specifies the galvanized components to 21 be painted. The second fill-in specifies the SAE AMS 22 Standard 595 Color Number, or the color name if no 23 number. 24 (2 fill-ins) 25 26

6-03.3(38).GR6 Placing Superstructure 27 28


31 6-03.3(38).OPT1.GB6 (Concrete Protection) 32

(August 3, 2015) 33 Use within projects with bridges having weathering steel 34 superstructure members which remain unpainted at 35 completion of construction, and which are above 36 concrete surfaces which require protection from 37 staining while the steel members develop their 38 weathered protective surface. Include with 6-39 03.5.OPT7.FB6. 40

41 6-03.3(39).GR6 Swinging the Span 42

43 6-03.3(39).INST1.GR6 (Supplemental Instructions) 44


6-03.3(39).OPT1.GB6 (Girder Camber Field Measurements) 47 (June 26, 2000) 48 Use in projects with new steel bridges. Include with 6-49 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-50 03.4.OPT1.FB6, and 6-03.5.OPT1.GB6. 51





6-03.4.OPT1.FB6 (Structural Low Alloy Quantities) 5 (August 6, 2007) 6 Use in projects with new steel bridges. Include with 6-7 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, and 6-8 03.3(39).OPT1.GB6. Include with 6-03.5.OPT1.GB6 when 9 the steel girder includes a pipe railing. 10 (2 fill-ins) 11

12 6-03.5.GR6 Payment 13

14 6-03.5.INST1.GR6 (The second bid item under Section 6-03.5 is 15


18 6-03.5.OPT1.GB6 (Payment for Steel Girder Railing) 19

(August 6, 2007) 20 Use in projects with new steel bridges when the steel girder 21 includes a pipe railing. Include with 6-22 03.3(28)B.OPT1.GB6, 6-03.3(30).OPT1.FB6, 6-23 03.3(39).OPT1.GB6, and 6-03.4.OPT1.FB6. 24



6-03.5.OPT7.FB6 (Payment for Concrete Protection) 29 (June 26, 2000) 30 Use in projects with bridges having weathering steel 31 members which remain unpainted at the completion of 32 construction, and which are above concrete surfaces which 33 require protection from staining while the steel members 34 develop their weathered protective surface. Include with 6-35 03.3(38).OPT1.GB6. 36 (1 fill-in) 37

38 6-04.GR6 Timber Structures 39


42 6-04.3(1).GR6 Storing and Handling Material 43 44


47 6-04.3(1).OPT1.GB6 (Fire Prevention) 48

(March 6, 2000) 49 Use in all timber bridge construction and timber deck 50 replacement projects. Include with 6-04.5.OPT1.FB6. 51

52 6-04.3(1).OPT2.GB6 (Top Flange Treatment) 53


(January 2, 2018) 1 Include in timber redecking projects. Include with 6-2 04.3(1).OPT1.GB6, 6-04.5.OPT1.FB6, and 6-3 04.5.OPT2.FB6. 4 5

6-04.5.GR6 Payment 6 7


10 6-04.5.OPT1.FB6 (Fire Protection) 11

(March 6, 2000) 12 Use in all timber bridge construction and timber deck 13 replacement projects. Include with 6-04.3(1).OPT1.GB6. 14 (1 fill-in) 15

16 6-04.5.OPT2.FB6 (Top Flange Treatment) 17

(March 6, 2000) 18 Use in timber deck replacement projects. Include with 6-19 04.3(1).OPT1.GB6, 6-04.3(1).OPT2.GB6, and 6-20 04.5.OPT1.FB6. 21 (1 fill-in) 22

23 6-05.GR6 Piling 24 25


6-05.2.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-05.2 is supplemented with the following) 28 Must use once preceding any of the following: 29 30

6-05.2.OPT1.GB6 Micropiles 31 (April 6, 2015) 32 Use in projects where micropiles are required. Include with 33 6-05.3.OPT1.FB6, 6-05.4.OPT6.GB6, and 6-34 05.5.OPT6.GB6. 35




6-05.3.OPT1.FB6 Micropiles 42 (September 8, 2020) 43 Use in projects where micropiles are required. The first fill-44 in specifies the top elevation of the micropile bond zone. 45 The second fill-in specified the permanent casting minimum 46 tip elevations. The third fill-in specifies the location(s) of 47 micropile verification tests. Include with 6-05.2.OPT1.FB6, 48 6-05.4.OPT6.GB6, and 6-05.5.OPT6.GB6. 49 (Three fill-ins) 50

51 6-05.3(5).GR6 Manufacture of Steel Piles 52




3 6-05.3(5).OPT1.GB6 (Furnishing St. Piling) 4

(September 8, 2020) 5 Use in projects with steel piling where the piling consists 6 of hollow steel pipe that may or may not be filled with 7 concrete and steel reinforcing bars for a portion of its 8 length. Include with 6-05.3(6).OPT1.GB6 9 10

6-05.3(6).GR6 Splicing Steel Casings and Steel Piles 11 12

6-05.3(6).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-05.3(6) is supplemented with the 13 following) 14 Must use once preceding any of the following: 15

16 6-05.3(6).OPT1.GB6 (Furnishing St. Piling) 17

(September 8, 2020) 18 Use in projects with steel piling where the piling consists 19 of hollow steel pipe that may or may not be filled with 20 concrete and steel reinforcing bars for a portion of its 21 length. Include with 6-05.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 22

23 6-05.3(10).GR6 Test Piles 24



29 6-05.3(10).OPT1.FB6 (Furnishing and Driving Test Piles) 30

(March 6, 2000) 31 Include in projects having test piles, as recommended 32 by the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. The 33 first, third, and fourth fill-ins specify the pile type (cast-34 in-place conc., steel, timber, etc.). The second fill-in 35 specifies the general location (bridge and pier). 36 (4 fill-ins) 37

38 6-05.3(11).GR6 Driving Piles 39

40 6-05.3(11)D.GR6 Achieving Minimum Tip Elevation and 41

Bearing 42 43

6-05.3(11)D.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-05.3(11)D is supplemented with 44 the following) 45 Must use once preceding any of the following: 46

47 6-05.3(11)D.OPT2.GB6 (Vibration From Pile Driving) 48

(August 3, 2015) 49 Include in projects where minimizing vibration 50 from driving piles is critical, as recommended by 51 the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. 52 53


6-05.3(11)D.OPT3.FB6 (Preboring Piles) 1 (August 3, 2015) 2 Include in projects where preboring of piles is 3 required to prevent downdrag from settlement, as 4 recommended by the Materials Laboratory 5 Geotechnical Branch. The first fill-in specifies the 6 pile type (cast-in-place conc., steel, timber, etc.). 7 The second fill-in specifies the general location 8 (bridge and pier). The third fill-in specifies the 9 bottom elevation of the preboring. Include with 6-10 05.4.OPT1.FB6 and 6-05.5.OPT1.FB6. 11 (3 fill-ins) 12 13

6-05.3(11)D.OPT4.FB6 (Preboring Piles) 14 (August 3, 2015) 15 Include in projects where preboring of piles is 16 required, as recommended by the Materials 17 Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. The first fill-in 18 specifies the pile type (cast-in-place conc., steel, 19 timber, etc.). The second fill-in specifies the 20 general location (bridge and pier). The third fill-in 21 specifies the bottom elevation of the preboring. 22 Include with 6-05.4.OPT1.FB6 and 6-23 05.5.OPT1.FB6. 24 (3 fill-ins) 25

26 6-05.3(11)D.OPT9.FB6 (Overdriving) 27

(April 6, 2015) 28 Include in projects where overdriving of piles is 29 anticipated in order to reach the minimum tip 30 elevation, as recommended by the Materials 31 Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. The first fill-in 32 specifies the general location(s) (bridge and pier) 33 of the anticipated pile overdriving. The second fill-34 in specifies the approximate magnitude of 35 expected overdriving. 36 (2 fill-ins) 37




6-05.4.OPT1.FB6 (Preboring Piles) 44 (March 6, 2000) 45 Use in projects where preboring of piles is required, as 46 recommended by the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical 47 Branch. The fill-in specifies the pile type (cast-in-place 48 conc., steel, timber, etc.). Include with 6-49 05.3(11)D.OPT3.FB6 or 6-05.3(11)D.OPT4.FB6, and 6-50 05.5.OPT1.FB6. 51 (1 fill-in) 52

53 6-05.4.OPT6.GB6 Micropiles 54


(April 6, 2015) 1 Use in projects where micropiles are required. Include with 2 6-05.2.OPT1.FB6, 6-05.3.OPT1.FB6, and 6-3 05.5.OPT6.GB6. 4

5 6-05.5.GR6 Payment 6



6-05.5.OPT1.FB6 (Preboring Piles) 11 (March 6, 2000) 12 Use in projects where preboring of piles is required, as 13 recommended by the Materials Laboratory Geotechnical 14 Branch. Both fill-ins specify the pile type (cast-in-place 15 conc., steel, timber, etc.). Include with 6-16 05.3(11)D.OPT3.FB6 or 6-05.3(11)D.OPT4.FB6, and 6-17 05.4.OPT1.FB6. 18 (2 fill-ins) 19

20 6-05.5.OPT6.GB6 Micropiles 21

(April 6, 2015) 22 Use in projects where micropiles are required. Include with 23 6-05.2.OPT1.FB6, 6-05.3.OPT1.FB6, and 6-24 05.4.OPT6.GB6. 25

26 6-06.GR6 Bridge Railings 27




6-06.2.OPT1.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence) 34 (January 5, 2004) 35 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence. 36 Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 37 and 6-06.3(2).OPT1.GB6. Also include 6-06.5.OPT1.FB6 if 38 the work is included as part of a separate bid item such as 39 “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. 40 41

6-06.2.OPT2.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence) 42 (March 6, 2000) 43 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence 44 where the posts are set into blockouts with epoxy resin. 45 Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 6-46 06.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-06.3(2).OPT2.GB6. Also include 6-47 06.5.OPT1.FB6 if the work is included as part of a separate 48 bid item such as “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck 49 - ___”. 50

51 6-06.2.OPT7.GB6 (Tamper Proof Nuts for steel Bridge Railing 52

Type BP) 53


(April 6, 2015) 1 Use in projects where steel Bridge Railing Type BP is used. 2

3 6-06.2.OPT8.FB6 (Bridge Railing Type Snow Fence and Bridge 4

Railing Type Wire Fabric Fence) 5 (May 28, 2020) 6 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Snow Fence or 7 Bridge Railing Type Wire Fabric Fence. The fill-in specifies 8 the Federal Standard 595 Color Number, or the color name 9 if no number. 10 Include with 6-06.3(2).OPT7.GB6. 11 (1 fill-in) 12


15 6-06.3(2).GR6 Metal Railings 16 17

6-06.3(2).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-06.3(2) is supplemented with the 18 following) 19 Must use once preceding any of the following: 20 21

6-06.3(2).OPT1.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence) 22 (March 6, 2000) 23 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Chain Link 24 Fence where the posts are fastened into position with 25 anchor bolts or resin bonded anchors. Include with 6-26 02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, and 6-27 06.2.OPT1.GB6. Also include 6-06.5.OPT1.FB6 if the 28 work is included as part of a separate bid item such as 29 “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. 30

31 6-06.3(2).OPT2.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Chain Link Fence) 32

(March 6, 2000) 33 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Chain Link 34 Fence where the posts are set into blockouts with epoxy 35 resin. Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-36 02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 6-06.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-37 06.2.OPT2.GB6. Also include 6-06.5.OPT1.FB6 if the 38 work is included as part of a separate bid item such as 39 “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. 40

41 6-06.3(2).OPT7.GB6 (Bridge Railing Type Snow Fence and 42

Bridge Railing Type Wire Fabric Fence) 43 (May 28, 2020) 44 Use in projects with Bridge Railing Type Snow Fence or 45 Bridge Railing Type Wire Fabric Fence. Include with 6-46 06.2.OPT8.FB6. 47 48

6-06.5.GR6 Payment 49 50 6-06.5.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-06.5 is supplemented with the following) 51



6-06.5.OPT1.FB6 (Bridge Railing) 1 (March 6, 2000) 2 Use in projects with bridge railing where the work is 3 included as part of a separate bid item such as 4 “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. The first 5 fill-in specifies the bridge railing type. The second fill-in 6 specifies the bid item name. 7 (2 fill-ins) 8

9 6-07.GR6 Painting 10

11 6-07.1.GR6 Description 12



6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 (Scope of Work) 17 (August 3, 2009) 18 Include in projects with cleaning and painting of existing 19 steel bridge(s). Use to define limits of cleaning and painting 20 by using the second fill-in to specify surfaces that are not to 21 be painted (light fixtures, utilities, bridge attachments, etc.). 22 Include with 6-07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 and/or 6-23 07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 as appropriate for the surface 24 preparation requirements. Include with DESWORK2.FB1 25 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 26 if the existing bridge(s) contain lead paint. Include with 1-27 07.6.OPT4.GB1 if the bridge(s) cross a navigable 28 waterway. 29 (2 fill-ins) 30

31 6-07.1.OPT2.FB6 (Scope of Work) 32

(August 3, 2009) 33 Include in projects with cleaning and painting of existing 34 timber bridge(s). Use to define limits of cleaning and 35 painting by using the second fill-in to specify the surfaces to 36 be painted (railing, rail posts, wheelguards, etc.). Include 37 with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the existing bridge(s) contain lead 38 paint. Project specific Special Provisions supplementing 39 Section 6-07.3(13) may be required to specify specific 40 primer and top coat paint requirements. 41 (2 fill-ins) 42

43 6-07.3.GR6 Construction Requirements 44 45

6-07.3(10).GR6 Painting Existing Steel Structures 46 47


51 6-07.3(10).OPT1.FB6 (Utility Conduits) 52

(August 3, 2009) 53


Include only when utility conduits are attached to the 1 existing bridge(s) being painted. Fill-in to read "shall or 2 "shall not". Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-3 07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 4 (1 fill-in) 5

6 6-07.3(10).OPT2.GB6 (Light Fixtures) 7

(August 3, 2009) 8 Include only when light fixtures are attached to existing 9 bridge(s) being painted. Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 10 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 11 12

6-07.3(10).OPT3.GB6 (Railroad Facilities) 13 (August 3, 2009) 14 Include when paint could spill or drip on railroad right-15 of-way. Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-16 07.1.OPT1.FB6, 1-07.18.OPT1.FR1, either 17 07183.GR1 or 1-07.18.OPT3.GR1, and 6-18 07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 19 20

6-07.3(10).OPT4.GB6 (Cleaning Grid Deck) 21 (August 3, 2015) 22 Use with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6, 6-23 07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6, and 6-07.3(10)N.OPT1.GB6 if 24 the bridge has a grid roadway deck or steel grid 25 catwalks which require cleaning and painting. 26

27 6-07.3(10)A.GR6 Containment 28

29 6-07.3(10)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-07.3(10)A is supplemented with 30


33 6-07.3(10)A.OPT1.GB6 (Protection of Existing Structure) 34

(August 3, 2009) 35 Use only when the bridge has mechanical 36 equipment to protect such as a draw bridge. 37 Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 38 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 39

40 6-07.3(10)A.OPT2.FB6 (Containment System) 41

(January 2, 2018September 7, 2021) 42 Use when a paint removal containment system 43 must be removed from a bridge when winds at the 44 site exceed a wind speed/gust threshold. 45 Fill-in #1 specifies the bridge(s) that have wind 46 speed/gust thresholds. 47 Fill-in #2 specifies the wind speed/gust threshold. 48 (2 fill-ins) 49

50 6-07.3(10)D.GR6 Surface Preparation Prior to Overcoat Painting 51

52 6-07.3(10)D.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-07.3(10)D is supplemented with 53



3 6-07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 (Surfaces Requiring Overcoat Painting 4

Surface Preparation) 5 (April 6, 2015) 6 Use in bridge painting projects with bridges and 7 bridge members requiring surface preparation for 8 overcoat painting. Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 9 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 10 Include with 6-07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 if the 11 bridge(s) also have bridge members requiring full 12 paint removal. Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 if 13 the existing bridge(s) contain lead paint. Include 14 with 1-07.6.OPT4.GB1 if the bridge(s) cross a 15 navigable waterway. The first fill-in specifies the 16 bridge(s) requiring overcoat painting surface 17 preparation. The second fill-in specifies the bridge 18 members requiring overcoat painting surface 19 preparation. 20 (2 fill-ins) 21

22 6-07.3(10)E.GR6 Surface Preparation – Full Paint Removal 23

24 6-07.3(10)E.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-07.3(10)E is supplemented with 25

the following) 26 Use once preceding any of the following: 27 28

6-07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 (Surfaces Requiring Full Paint Removal 29 Surface) 30 Preparation) 31 (April 5, 2010) 32 Use in bridge painting projects with bridges and 33 bridge members requiring surface preparation for 34 full paint removal. Include with DESWORK2.FB1, 35 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6. 36 Include with 6-07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 if the 37 bridge(s) also have bridge members requiring 38 overcoat painting. Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1 39 if the existing bridge(s) contain lead paint. Include 40 with 1-07.6.OPT4.GB1 if the bridge(s) cross a 41 navigable waterway. The first fill-in specifies the 42 bridge(s) requiring full paint removal surface 43 preparation. The second fill-in specifies the bridge 44 members requiring full paint removal surface 45 preparation. 46 (2 fill-ins) 47

48 6-07.3(10)I.GR6 Paint Color 49

50 6-07.3(10)I.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-07.3(10)I is supplemented with the 51



1 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6 (Color of Top Coat) 2

(August 3, 2009) 3 Use in projects with existing steel bridges and 4 bridge members to cover paint color requirements 5 by specifying the SAE AMS Standard 595 Color 6 Number, or the color name if no number. Use with 7 DESWORK2.FB1, and 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6. . 8 Include with 6-07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 and/or 6-9 07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 as appropriate for the 10 surface preparation requirements. Include with 1-11 07.1.OPT2.FR1 if the existing bridge(s) contain 12 lead paint. Include with 1-07.6.OPT4.GB1 if the 13 bridge(s) cross a navigable waterway. 14 (1 fill-in) 15

16 6-07.3(10)N.GR6 Field Coating Application Methods 17

18 6-07.3(10)N.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-07.3(10)N is supplemented with 19


22 6-07.3(10)N.OPT1.GB6 (Painting Grid Deck) 23

(August 3, 2009) 24 Use with DESWORK2.FB1, 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6, 6-25 07.3(10).OPT4.GB6 and 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6 if 26 the bridge has a grid roadway deck or steel grid 27 catwalks which require painting. 28

29 6-07.3(11).GR6 Painting or Powder Coating of Galvanized Surfaces 30



35 6-07.3(11).OPT1.FB6 (Coating Color) 36

(August 3, 2009) 37 Use in projects requiring coating of galvanized surfaces 38 with either paint or powder coating. The fill-in specifies 39 the SAE AMS Standard 595 color number, or the color 40 name if no number. 41 (1 fill-in) 42

43 6-08.GR6 Bituminous Surfacing on Structure Decks 44



Must use once preceding the following: 49 50

6-08.3.OPT1.FB6 (Surfacing Removal and Paving Equipment Load and 51 Spacing Restrictions) 52 (October 29, 2020) 53


Use in bridge deck paving projects where specific bridges 1 are subject to surfacing removal and paving equipment load 2 and spacing restrictions as shown and specified in the 3 Plans. The fill-in specifies the Bridge Number(s) of the 4 bridge(s) affected by these restrictions. 5 (1-fill-in) 6

7 6-08.3(2).GR6 Contractor Survey for Grade-Controlled Structure Decks 8



13 6-08.3(2).OPT1.FB6 (Contractor Structure Survey Not Applicable) 14

(January 3, 2017) 15 Use in projects where the Contracting Agency performs 16 the Structure survey for Grade Controlled Structure 17 Decks, and the Contract Plans were adjusted for Final 18 Grade Profile and Adjusted Removal Depth as needed. 19 The fill-in specifies the Bridge number(s) where the 20 Contracting Agency is performing the survey. 21 (1 fill-in) 22

23 6-08.3(5).GR6 Full Depth Removal of Bituminous Pavement from Bridge 24

Decks 25 26


30 6-08.3(5).OPT1.FB6 (Rotary milling/planing equipment prohibited) 31

(January 2, 2018) 32 Use in bridge deck paving projects where equipment 33 used to perform full depth removal of existing surfacing 34 from specific Grade Controlled bridges is restricted to 35 exclude rotary milling/planing equipment. Bridges in 36 this category are generally identified in the Bridge 37 Condition Report (BCR) prepared for the project by the 38 Bridge Asset Management unit of the Bridge and 39 Structures Office and provided to the Region Design PE 40 Offices as part of the site data at the beginning of the 41 project design phase. The fill-in specifies the Bridge 42 Number(s) of the bridges affected by these restrictions. 43 (1 fill-in) 44

45 6-08.3(5).OPT2.FB6 (Rotary milling/planing equipment restricted to upper 46

layer of existing surfacing) 47 (January 2, 2018) 48 Use in bridge deck paving projects where equipment 49 used to perform full depth removal of existing surfacing 50 from specific Grade Controlled bridges is restricted to 51 allow rotary milling/planing equipment for the upper 52 layer 0.10-feet above the bridge deck. Existing 53 surfacing thicknesses at these bridges shall be 0.20-54


feet minimum. The fill-in specifies the Bridge Number(s) 1 of the bridges affected by these restrictions. 2 (1 fill-in) 3

4 6-09.GR6 Modified Concrete Overlays 5 6



6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6 (Materials For Polyester Concrete) 11 (******) 12 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 13 Include with 6-09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-14 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-15 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-17 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-19 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-20 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-21 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-22 09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-23 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6 and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 24


27 6-09.3(1).GR6 Equipment 28



33 6-09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Mobile Mixer for Polyester Concrete) 34

(******) 35 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 36 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 39 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 40 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 42 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 43 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-44 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 45 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6 and 6-48 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 49

50 6-09.3(2).GR6 Submittals 51




3 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Submittals for Polyester Concrete) 4

(******) 5 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 6 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-8 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 9 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 10 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 12 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 13 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-14 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 15 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-17 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-18 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 19

20 6-09.3(3).GR6 Concrete Overlay Mixes 21


following) 24 Must use once preceding any of the following: 25 26

6-09.3(3).OPT1.GB6 (FMC, LMC, and MMC) 27 (January 7, 2002) 28 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where all 29 three concrete overlay mixes are allowed. Include with 30 either 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 or 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 31

32 6-09.3(3).OPT2.GB6 (FMC or LMC Only) 33

(January 7, 2002) 34 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where only fly 35 ash modified concrete or latex modified concrete 36 overlay mixes are allowed. Include with either 6-37 09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 or 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 38

39 6-09.3(3).OPT3.GB6 (LMC Only) 40

(January 7, 2002) 41 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where only 42 latex modified concrete overlay mixes are allowed. 43 Include with either 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 or 6-44 09.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 45

46 6-09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete) 47

(******) 48 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 49 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-51 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 52 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 53


6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-1 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 2 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 3 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-4 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 5 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-6 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-8 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 9

10 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6 (Deck Repair Concrete for Polyester 11

Concrete Overlays) 12 (******) 13 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 14 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-15 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-17 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 19 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 20 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 21 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-22 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 23 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-24 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-25 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 26 27

6-09.3(4).GR6 Storing and Handling 28 29


33 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Storing and Handling of Polyester 34

Concrete Materials) 35 (******) 36 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 37 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 40 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 41 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 43 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 44 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-45 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 46 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-48 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-49 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 50

51 6-09.3(5).GR6 Scarifying Concrete Surface 52

53



4 6-09.3(5).OPT1.GB6 (Rotary Mill, Hydro-Demolisher, or Shot 5

Blaster) 6 (January 7, 2002) 7 Include in modified concrete overlay projects where all 8 three types of scarifying machines are allowed. Include 9 with either 6-09.3(3).OPT1.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT2.GB6, 10 or 6-09.3(3).OPT3.GB6. 11

12 6-09.3(5).OPT2.GB6 (Hydro-Demolisher or Shot Blaster Only) 13

(January 7, 2002) 14 Include in modified concrete overlay projects where 15 only hydro-demolisher or shot blaster scarifying 16 machines are allowed. Include with either 6-17 09.3(3).OPT1.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT2.GB6, or 6-18 09.3(3).OPT3.GB6. 19

20 6-09.3(5).OPT7.GB6 (Hydro-Demolisher Only) 21

(April 6, 2015) 22 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where only 23 hydro-demolisher scarifying machines are allowed. 24

25 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6 (Shot Blaster Only) 26

(******) 27 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where only 28 shot blaster scarifying machines are allowed. Required 29 for all polyester concrete overlay projects. 30

31 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6 (Scarification Depth for Polyester 32

Concrete Overlay) 33 (******) 34 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 35 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-36 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 38 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 39 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-40 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 41 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 42 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 44 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-45 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-47 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 48

49 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6 (Epoxy-coated St. Reinf. Bars for Bridge 50

Deck 51 Repair) 52 (******) 53


Use in projects where epoxy-coated steel reinforcing 1 bars are required for bridge deck repair. Required for all 2 polyester concrete overlay projects. 3 4

6-09.3(6).GR6 Further Deck Preparation 5 6

6-09.3(6)B.GR6 Deck Repair Preparation 7 8

6-09.3(6)B.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-09.3(6)B is supplemented with the 9 following) 10 Must use once preceding any of the following: 11

12 6-09.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6 (Forms For Full Depth Deck Repair) 13

(April 6, 2015) 14 Use in modified concrete overlay projects where 15 the anticipated depth required for bridge deck 16 repair following scarification of concrete surface 17 may be full depth of the bridge deck. Include with 18 6-09.5.OPT11.GB6. 19

20 6-09.3(6)C.GR6 Placing Deck Repair Concrete 21

22 6-09.3(6)C.INST1.GR6 (Supplemental Instructions) 23


6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Placing Patching Concrete For Polyester 26 Concrete Overlay) 27 (******) 28 Use in projects where polyester concrete is 29 required. Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-30 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-31 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-32 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-33 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-34 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-35 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-36 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-40 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-44 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-45 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-48 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 49

50 6-09.3(8).GR6 Quality Assurance 51




3 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6 (Quality Assurance For Polyester 4

Concrete Overlay) 5 (******) 6 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 7 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-8 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-9 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 10 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 11 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 12 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-13 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-14 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 15 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 17 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 19

20 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Trial Overlay) 21

(******) 22 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 23 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-24 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-25 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 26 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 27 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 28 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-29 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-30 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 31 6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-32 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 33 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-34 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 35

36 6-09.3(9).GR6 Mixing Concrete for Concrete Overlay 37



42 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Mixing Polyester Concrete) 43

(******) 44 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 45 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 48 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 49 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 50 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-51 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-52 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 53


6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-1 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 2 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-3 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 4

5 6-09.3(10).GR6 Overlay Profile and Screed Rails 6



11 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Overlay Thickness) 12


27 6-09.3(11).GR6 Placing Concrete Overlay 28



33 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Placing Polyester Concrete Overlay) 34


49 6-09.3(12).GR6 Finishing Concrete Overlay 50


following) 53



6-09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Finishing Polyester Concrete Overlay) 3 (******) 4 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 5 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-6 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-7 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 8 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 9 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 10 6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 13 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-14 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 15 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 17

18 6-09.3(13).GR6 Curing Concrete Overlay 19



24 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Curing Polyester Concrete) 25


40 6-09.3(14).GR6 Checking For Bond 41



6-09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6 (Checking Polyester Concrete For Bond) 46 (******) 47 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 48 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-49 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 51 6-09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 52 6-09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 53


6-09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-1 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-2 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 3 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-4 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 5 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-6 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 7




6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Overlay) 14 (******) 15 Use in projects where polyester concrete is required. 16 Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-17 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-19 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-20 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-21 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-22 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-23 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-24 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-25 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, 6-26 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 27

28 6-09.5.GR6 Payment 29


Must use once preceding any of the following: 32 33 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Trial Overlay) 34

(******) 35 Use in projects where polyester concrete is 36 required. Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-40 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-44 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-45 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-48 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-49 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-51 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-52


09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-1 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 2 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6, and 6-3 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 4

5 6-09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6 (Force Account Grinding Polyester 6

Conc. Overlay) 7 (******) 8 Use in projects where polyester concrete is 9 required. Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-10 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-11 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-12 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-13 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-14 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-15 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-16 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-17 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-18 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-19 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-20 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-21 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-22 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-23 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-24 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-25 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-26 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 27 6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6 and 6-28 09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6. 29 30

6-09.5.OPT9.BSP.GB6 (Polyester Concrete Overlay) 31 (******) 32 Use in projects where polyester concrete is 33 required. Include with 6-09.2.OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-34 09.3(1).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-35 09.3(2).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-36 09.3(3).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-37 09.3(3).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-38 09.3(4).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-39 09.3(5).OPT8.BSP.GB6, 6-40 09.3(5).OPT9.BSP.GB6, 6-41 09.3(5).OPT10.BSP.GB6, 6-42 09.3(6)C.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-43 09.3(8).OPT3.BSP.GB6, 6-44 09.3(8).OPT4.BSP.GB6, 6-45 09.3(9).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-46 09.3(10).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-47 09.3(11).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-48 09.3(12).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-49 09.3(13).OPT2.BSP.GB6, 6-50 09.3(14).OPT1.BSP.GB6, 6-09.4.OPT2.BSP.GB6, 51


6-09.5.OPT7.BSP.GB6, and 6-1 09.5.OPT8.BSP.GB6. 2 3

6-09.5.OPT11.GB6 (Forms For Full Depth Deck Repair) 4 (April 6, 2015) 5 Use in projects where the anticipated depth required 6 for bridge deck repair following scarification of 7 concrete surface may be full depth of the bridge 8 deck. Include with 6-09.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6. 9 10

6-10.GR6 Concrete Barrier 11 12


6-10.3(5).GR6 Temporary Barrier 15 16

6-10.3(5).INST1.GR6 (The first paragraph of Section 6-10.3(5) is revised to read) 17 Must use once preceding any of the following: 18

19 6-10.3(5).OPT1.GR6 (Type F Temporary Barrier) 20

(February 3, 2020) 21 Use in projects that have less than 1,000 linear feet of 22 temporary barrier. 23

24 6-10.3(5).INST2.GR6 (The following sentence is inserted before the second to 25

last sentence of the first paragraph of Section 6-10.3(5)) 26 Must use once preceding any of the following: 27

28 6-10.3(5).OPT2.GR6 (September 30, 2020) 29


6-10.3(6).GR6 Placing Concrete Barrier 32 33


37 6-10.3(6).OPT1.GR6 (Use Permanent Barrier as Temporary) 38

(March 13, 1995) 39 Use in projects when permanent barrier may be used 40 as temporary barrier. 41

42 6-10.5.GR6 Payment 43



6-10.5.OPT1.GR6 (Temporary barrier delineators) 48 (August 1, 2016) 49 Use in projects that require temporary barrier to be placed 50 adjacent to a travelled lane. 51

52 6-10.5.OPT2.FB6 (Bridge Concrete Barrier) 53


(March 6, 2000) 1 Use in projects with concrete barrier on bridges only where 2 the barrier is included as part of a separate bid item such 3 as “Superstructure - ___”, or “Roadway Deck - ___”. The 4 first fill-in specifies the barrier type (traffic barrier, traffic-5 pedestrian barrier, pedestrian barrier, etc.). The second fill-6 in specifies the bid item name. 7 (2 fill-ins) 8

9 6-12.GR6 Noise Barrier Walls 10




6-12.2.OPT1.GB6 (Precast Concrete Noise Barrier Walls) 17 (September 8, 2020) 18 Use in projects with noise barrier walls of precast concrete 19 panels. Include with 6-12.3(6).OPT1.FB6 and all other 20 applicable noise barrier wall GSP’s. 21

22 6-12.2.OPT2.FB6 (Masonry Noise Barrier Walls) 23

(September 8, 2020) 24 Use in projects with noise barrier walls of masonry block 25 panels. The fill-in describes the surface texture and color 26 requirements for the field, cap, accent, and other CMU 27 blocks used for the masonry wall. Include with 6-28 12.3(7).OPT1.GB6 and all other applicable noise barrier 29 wall GSP’s. 30 (1 fill-in) 31


34 6-12.3(1).GR6 Submittals 35 36


40 6-12.3(1).OPT1.GB6 (Noise Barrier Wall Existing Groundline Field 41

Survey) 42 (August 3, 2015) 43 Use in noise barrier wall projects where the Contractor 44 is required to perform and submit a field survey of the 45 existing noise barrier wall alignment. Include with 1-46 05.4.OPT1.GR1, 6-12.5.OPT1.GB6, and all other 47 applicable noise barrier wall GSP’s. 48 49

6-12.3(6).GR6 Precast Concrete Panel Fabrication and Erection 50 51

6-12.3(6).INST1.GR6 (Section 6-12.3(6) is supplemented with the 52 following) 53



6-12.3(6).OPT1.FB6 (Precast Concrete Panel Surface 3 Finish Requirements) 4 (April 5, 2004) 5 Use in projects with noise barrier walls of precast 6 concrete panels. The fill-ins specify the type or name of 7 the formed finish on the traffic side and on the 8 residential side of the precast concrete panels. Include 9 with 6-12.2.OPT1.GB6 and all other applicable noise 10 barrier wall GSP’s. 11 (2 fill-ins) 12 13

6-12.3(7).GR6 Masonry Wall Construction 14 15


19 6-12.3(7).OPT1.GB6 (Masonry Noise Barrier Wall 20

Construction Requirements) 21 (August 3, 2015) 22 Use in projects with noise barrier walls of masonry block 23 panels. Include with 6-12.2.OPT2.FB6 and all other 24 applicable noise barrier wall GSP’s. 25 26



6-12.5.OPT1.GB6 (Payment for Noise Barrier Wall Groundline Field 32 Survey) 33 (April 5, 2004) 34 Use in noise barrier wall projects where the Contractor is 35 required to perform and submit a field survey of the existing 36 noise barrier wall alignment. Include with 1-37 05.4.OPT1.GR1, 6-12.3(1).OPT1.GB6, and all other 38 applicable noise barrier wall GSP’s. 39

40 6-13.GR6 Structural Earth Walls 41




6-13.2.OPT1.GB6 (Welded Wire Faced Structural Earth Wall 48 Materials) 49 (October 29, 2020) 50 Use in projects with structural earth walls where welded 51 wire faced walls are an acceptable alternative. Include with 52 6-13.3.OPT1.GB6 and 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6. 53


1 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6 (Precast Concrete Panel Faced 2

Structural Earth Wall Materials) 3 (January 2, 2018) 4 Use in projects with structural earth walls where precast 5 concrete panel faced walls are an acceptable alternative. 6 Include with 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-7 13.3(4).OPT1.GB6. 8

9 6-13.2.OPT2(A).GB6 (Lock + Load Retaining Wall System Wall Materials) 10

(August 3, 2015) 11 Use in projects with structural earth walls only when the 12 following conditions apply: 13

1. Both precast concrete panel faced structural 14 earth walls AND precast concrete block faced 15 structural earth walls are included in the project 16 as acceptable alternatives. 17

2. Lock + Load retaining wall system shall be 18 constructed in areas where the wall will be 19 constructed above the water table. 20

Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-21 13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-13.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-22 13.3(4).OPT1.GB6, 6-13.3(4).OPT1(A).GB6, and 6-23 13.3(7).OPT1.GB6. 24

25 6-13.2.OPT3.GB6 (Concrete Block Faced Structural Earth Wall 26

Materials) 27 (January 2, 2018) 28 Use in projects with structural earth walls where concrete 29 block faced walls are an acceptable alternative. Include with 30 6-13.3.OPT3.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, and 6-31 13.3(5).OPT2.GB6. 32 33



38 6-13.3.OPT1.GB6 (Welded Wire Faced Structural Earth Wall) 39

(April 4, 2011) 40 Use in projects with structural earth walls where welded 41 wire faced walls are an acceptable alternative. Include with 42 6-13.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6. 43 44

6-13.3.OPT2.GB6 (Precast Concrete Panel Faced Structural Earth 45 Wall) 46 (January 7, 2019) 47 Use in projects with structural earth walls where precast 48 concrete panel faced walls are an acceptable alternative. 49 Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, and 50 6-13.3(4).OPT1.GB6. 51 52

6-13.3.OPT2(A).GB6 (Lock + Load Retaining Wall System Walls) 53


(August 3, 2015) 1 Use in projects with structural earth walls only when the 2 following conditions apply: 3



Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.2.OPT2(A).GB6, 11 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-12 13.3(4).OPT1.GB6, 6-13.3(4).OPT1(A).GB6, and 6-13 13.3(7).OPT1.GB6. 14

15 6-13.3.OPT3.GB6 (Concrete Block Faced Structural Earth Wall) 16

(January 2, 2018) 17 Use in projects with structural earth walls where concrete 18 block faced walls are an acceptable alternative. Include with 19 6-13.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, and 6-20 13.3(5).OPT2.GB6. 21 22

6-13.3(2).GR6 Submittals 23 24


28 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6 (Structural Earth Wall Geotechnical Design 29

Parameters) 30 (January 3, 2011) 31 Use in projects with structural earth walls. The first fill-in 32 identifies the wall by name or number, and the 33 remaining fill-ins specify the values for various 34 geotechnical design parameters as specified in the 35 geotechnical report prepared for the project. The table 36 may be repeated as necessary for additional walls with 37 differing geotechnical design parameters. 38 (13 fill-ins) 39

40 6-13.3(4).GR6 Precast Concrete Facing Panel and Concrete Block 41

Fabrication 42 43


47 6-13.3(4).OPT1.GB6 (Specific Fabrication Requirements for 48

Precast Concrete Panel Faced Structural Earth Walls) 49 (April 3, 2017) 50 Use in projects with structural earth walls where precast 51 concrete panel faced walls are an acceptable 52 alternative. Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-53


13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, and 6-1 13.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 2 3

6-13.3(4).OPT1(A).GB6 (Lock + Load Retaining Wall System Walls) 4 (August 3, 2015) 5 Use in projects with structural earth walls only 6 when the following conditions apply: 7

1. Both precast concrete panel faced 8 structural earth walls AND precast 9 concrete block faced structural earth walls 10 are included in the project as acceptable 11 alternatives. 12


Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-16 13.2.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-17 13.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-18 13.3(4).OPT1.GB6, and 6-13.3(7).OPT1.GB6. 19

20 6-13.3(5).GR6 Precast Concrete Facing Panel and Concrete 21

Block Erection 22 23


6-13.3(5).OPT2.GB6 (Specific Erection Requirements for 27 Precast Concrete 28 Block Faced Structural Earth Walls) 29 (April 2, 2012) 30 Use in projects with structural earth walls where 31 concrete block faced walls are an acceptable 32 alternative. Include with 6-13.2.OPT3.GB6 6-33 13.3.OPT3.GB6, and 6-13.3(2).OPT1.FB6. 34

35 6-13.3(7).GR6 Backfill 36



41 6-13.3(7).OPT1.GB6 (Specific Backfill Requirements for Precast 42

Concrete Panel Faced Structural Earth Walls) 43 (August 3, 2015) 44 Use in projects with structural earth walls only when the 45 following conditions apply: 46




Include with 6-13.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.2.OPT2(A).GB6, 1 6-13.3.OPT2.GB6, 6-13.3.OPT2(A).GB6, 6-2 13.3(2).OPT1.FB6, 6-13.3(4).OPT1.GB6, and 6-3 13.3(4).OPT1(A).GB6 4

5 6-14.GR6 Geosynthetic Retaining Walls 6

7 6-14.2.GR6 Materials 8 9

6-14.2(9-33.2(2)).GR6 (Geosynthetic Properties For Retaining Walls 10 and Reinforced Slopes 11 (Section 9-33.2(2) is supplemented with the following) 12 Must use once preceding any of the following: 13

14 6-14.2(9-33.2(2)).OPT1.FB6 (Geosynthetic Properties For Temporary 15

Geosynthetic Retaining Walls) 16 (August 7, 2006) 17 Use in projects with temporary geosynthetic retaining walls. 18 The first fill-in identifies the wall location. The second fill-in 19 specifies the reinforcement layer vertical spacing. The third 20 fill-in specifies the dimension from the top of wall to the 21 reinforcement layer. The fourth fill-in specifies the 22 geosynthetic tensile strength. 23 (4 fill-ins) 24 25

6-15.GR6 Soil Nail Walls 26 27



32 6-15.2.OPT1.GB6 (Permanent Soil Nail Materials and Components) 33

(August 3, 2015) 34 Use in projects with soil nail retaining walls. Include with 6-35 18.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-15.3(8)A.OPT1.FB6. 36


39 6-15.3(8).GR6 Soil Nail Testing And Acceptance 40

41 6-15.3(8)A.GR6 Verification Testing 42 43

6-15.3(8)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-15.3(8)A is supplemented with the 44 following) 45 Must use once preceding any of the following: 46

47 6-15.3(8)A.OPT1.FB6 (Soil Nail Verification Test Locations) 48

(April 5, 2004) 49 Use in projects with soil nail retaining walls. The 50 fill-ins specify the soil nail verification test 51 locations and the number of successful tests 52


required at each location. Include with 6-1 15.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6. 2 (3 fill-ins) 3

4 6-17.GR6 Permanent Ground Anchors 5

6 6-17.1.GR6 Description 7 8


11 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6 (Rock Bolts and Rock Dowels) 12

(January 7, 2013) 13 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 14 with 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-15 17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, 6-17.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-16 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 17

18 6-17.2.GR6 Materials 19 20


23 6-17.2.OPT1.GB6 (Permanent Ground Anchor Materials and 24

Components) 25 (September 8, 2020) 26 Use in projects with walls using permanent ground anchors. 27

28 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6 (Rock Bolt and Rock Dowel Materials) 29

(January 7, 2013) 30 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 31 with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-32 17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, 6-17.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-33 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 34




6-17.3.OPT1.GB6 (Rock Bolt and Rock Dowel 41 Construction Requirements) 42 (September 8, 2020) 43 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 44 with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-45 17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, 6-17.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-46 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 47

48 6-17.3(8).GR6 Testing And Stressing 49




1 6-17.3(8).OPT1.GB6 Rock Bolt and Rock Dowel Testing 2

(January 7, 2013) 3 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. 4 Include with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-5 17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-6 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 7

8 6-17.3(8)A.GR6 Verification Testing 9 10

6-17.3(8)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-17.3(8)A is supplemented with the 11 following) 12 Must use once preceding any of the following: 13

14 6-17.3(8)A.OPT1.GB6 (August 3, 2015) 15

Use in projects with permanent ground anchors 16 where the soil conditions require a verification 17 testing program for the permanent ground anchors 18 as recommended by the WSDOT Materials 19 Laboratory Geotechnical Services Division. Include 20 with 6-17.3(8)B.OPT1.GB6 and 6-21 17.3(8)C.OPT1.GB6. 22

23 6-17.3(8)B.GR6 Performance Testing 24 25

6-17.3(8)B.INST1.GR6 (The performance test schedule following the 26 second paragraph of Section 6-17.3(8)B is revised to read) 27 Must use once preceding any of the following: 28

29 6-17.3(8)B.OPT1.GB6 (January 3, 2011) 30

Use in projects with permanent ground anchors where 31 the soil conditions require a verification testing program 32 for the permanent ground anchors, as recommended by 33 the WSDOT Materials Laboratory Geotechnical 34 Services Division. Include with 6-17.3(8)A.OPT1.GB6 35 and 6-17.3(8)C.OPT1.GB6. 36

37 6-17.3(8)C.GR6 Proof Testing 38 39

6-17.3(8)C.INST1.GR6 (The proof test schedule following the first 40 paragraph of Section 6-17.3(8)C is revised to read) 41 Must use once preceding any of the following: 42

43 6-17.3(8)C.OPT1.GB6 (January 3, 2011) 44

Use in projects with permanent ground anchors where 45 the soil conditions require a verification testing program 46 for the permanent ground anchors, as recommended by 47 the WSDOT Materials Laboratory Geotechnical 48 Services Division. Include with 6-17.3(8)A.OPT1.GB6 49 and 6-17.3(8)B.OPT1.GB6. 50





(January 4, 2010) 5 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 6 with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-7 17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, and 6-8 17.5.OPT1.GB6. 9

10 6-17.5.GR6 Payment 11 12



(January 4, 2010) 17 Use in projects with rock bolts and/or rock dowels. Include 18 with 6-17.1.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-19 17.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-17.3(8).OPT1.GB6, and 6-20 17.4.OPT1.GB6. 21

22 6-18.GR6 Shotcrete Facing 23

24 6-18.2.GR6 Materials 25 26


29 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6 (Shotcrete Facing) 30

(August 1, 2005) 31 Use in projects with shotcrete facing. Include with 6-32 15.2.OPT1.GB6 and 6-15.3(8)A.OPT1.FB6 for all soil nail 33 retaining wall projects. Include with 6-18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-34 18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6 35 and 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6 for all projects with shotcrete facing 36 for rock/soil slope stabilization. 37 38

6-18.2.OPT2.GB6 (Coloration for Shotcrete Facing Finishing 39 Alternative C) 40 (August 3, 2015) 41 Use in projects with shotcrete facing where tinting of the 42 finish coating of shotcrete is required. Include with 6-43 15.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-15.3(8)A.OPT1.FB6, and 6-44 18.2.OPT1.GB6 for all soil nail retaining wall projects with 45 such requirements. Include with 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-46 18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6 47 and 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6 for all projects with shotcrete facing 48 for rock/soil slope stabilization. 49 50

6-18.2.OPT3.GB6 (Fiber Reinforcement for Shotcrete Facing) 51 (August 3, 2015) 52


Use in projects with shotcrete facing where fiber 1 reinforcement in the shotcrete is specified. Include with 6-2 18.2.OPT1.GB6. Include with 6-18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-3 18.3.OPT1.GB6, 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6 and 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6 4 for all projects with shotcrete facing for rock/soil slope 5 stabilization. 6



12 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6 (Shotcrete Facing For Rock/Soil Slope Stabilization) 13

(August 3, 2015) 14 Use in projects with shotcrete facing for rock/soil slope 15 stabilization. Include with 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-16 18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6 and 17 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6. 18 19

6-18.4.GR6 Measurement 20 21



(April 5, 2010) 26 Use in projects with shotcrete facing for rock/soil slope 27 stabilization. Include with 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-28 18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6 29 and 6-18.5.OPT1.GB6. 30

31 6-18.5.GR6 Payment 32 33



(April 5, 2010) 38 Use in projects with shotcrete facing for rock/soil slope 39 stabilization. Include with 6-18.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-40 18.2.OPT2.GB6, 6-18.2.OPT3.GB6, 6-18.3.OPT1.GB6 41 and 6-18.4.OPT1.GB6. 42 43

6-19.GR6 Shafts 44 45


6-19.2(9-36.2(2)).GR6 Synthetic Slurry 48 (Section 9-36.2(2) is supplemented with the following) 49 Must use once preceding any of the following: 50

51 6-19.2(9-36.2(2)).OPT1.GB6 (Fresh Water For Synthetic Slurry) 52

(January 2, 2012) 53


Use in projects with shafts constructed in salt water when 1 the geotechnical report specifies that the use of fresh water 2 for synthetic slurry is feasible and when the Contracting 3 Agency restricts the water for synthetic slurry to fresh water 4 only. Include with 6-19.4.OPT3.GB6 and 6-5 19.5.OPT2.GB6. 6


9 6-19.3(3).GR6 Shaft Excavation 10



6-19.3(3).OPT1.GB6 (Variations In Bearing Layer Elevations) 15 (January 2, 2012) 16 Use in projects where shaft embedment to a minimum 17 penetration into a bearing layer is required, and where 18 the bearing layer elevation cannot be accurately 19 specified with certainty. Include with 6-20 19.3(5).OPT1.GB6. 21

22 6-19.3(3)B.GR6 Temporary and Permanent Shaft Casing 23

24 6-19.3(3)B.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(3)B is supplemented with 25


28 6-19.3(3)B.OPT2.GB6 (Rotating/Oscillating Method Required) 29

(January 2, 2012) 30 Use in projects where the geotechnical report for 31 the project recommends, and the ADSC/WSDOT 32 Shaft Task Force concurs, that site conditions 33 dictate the use of the rotating/oscillating method 34 for shaft excavation. 35

36 6-19.3(3)B4.GR6 Temporary Telescoping Shaft Casing 37

38 6-19.3(3)B4.INST1.GR6 (The second paragraph of Section 6-19.3(3)B4 39

is revised to read as follows) 40 Must use once preceding any of the following: 41

42 6-19.3(3)B4.OPT1.GB6 (Temp. Telescoping Casing Not Allowed 43

At End Piers) 44 (January 2, 2012) 45 Use in projects where design conditions exist 46 where the option of temporary telescoping casing 47 for shafts at bridge end piers is not appropriate for 48 the overall design behavior of the overall bridge. 49

50 6-19.3(3)I.GR6 Required Use of Slurry in Shaft Excavation 51

52 6-19.3(3)I.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(3)I is supplemented with the following) 53



6-19.3(3)I.OPT1.GB6 (Exception For Casing Sealed Against 3 Influx Of Water Into Excavation) 4 (August 3, 2015) 5 Use in projects where the geotechnical conditions, 6 as documented in the geotechnical report for the 7 project, allow the possibility of performing shaft 8 excavation in a cased hole beneath the water 9 table level without the need for slurry to ensure the 10 stability of the bottom of the excavation. 11

12 6-19.3(4).GR6 Slurry Installation Requirements 13

14 6-19.3(4)A.GR6 Slurry Technical Assistance 15 16

6-19.3(4)A.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(4)A is supplemented 17 with the following) 18 Must use once preceding any of the following: 19 20

6-19.3(4)A.OPT1.FB6 (Slurry Manufacturer’s Representative’s 21 Presence Required At Specific Shaft Sites) 22 (January 2, 2012) 23 Use in projects where the geotechnical conditions 24 vary enough from one shaft site to another to 25 affect how the slurry is used at each shaft site. 26 The fill-in identifies the specific shaft locations 27 where the presence of the slurry manufacturer’s 28 representative is required. 29 (1 fill-in) 30

31 6-19.3(5).GR6 Assembly and Placement of Reinforcing Steel 32



6-19.3(5).OPT1.GB6 (Variations In Bearing Layer Elevations) 37 (August 1, 2016) 38 Use in projects where shaft embedment to a 39 minimum penetration into a bearing layer is 40 required, and where the bearing layer elevation 41 cannot be accurately specified with certainty. 42 Include with 6-19.3(3).OPT1.GB6. 43

44 6-19.3(6).GR6 Contractor Furnished Accessories for Nondestructive QA 45

Testing 46 47

6-19.3(6)E.GR6 Thermal Wire and Thermal Access Points (TAPs) 48 49

6-19.3(6)E.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(6)E is supplemented with 50 the following) 51 Must use once preceding any of the following: 52

53


6-19.3(6)E.OPT1.GB6 (Thermal Wire and Associated Couplers) 1 (January 2, 2018) 2 Use in projects that include shaft construction 3 requiring nondestructive testing. This includes all 4 bridge foundation shafts, but may or may not 5 include other shafts such as sign bridges, 6 cantilever sign structures, signal standards, etc. 7

8 6-19.3(7).GR6 Placing Concrete 9

10 6-19.3(7)D.GR6 Requirements for Placing Concrete Underwater 11

12 6-19.3(7)D.INST1.GR6 (Section 6-19.3(7)D is supplemented with 13


16 6-19.3(7)D.OPT1.GB6 (Tremie Allowed As An Alternative To Concrete 17

Pump) 18 (January 2, 2012) 19 Use in projects where the construction site is at a 20 remote location where it may be difficult to make 21 arrangements to have a concrete pump at the site. 22




6-19.4.OPT3.GB6 (Fresh Water For Synthetic Slurry) 29 (January 2, 2012) 30 Use in projects with shafts constructed in salt water when 31 the geotechnical report specifies that the use of fresh water 32 for synthetic slurry is feasible and when the Contracting 33 Agency restricts the water for synthetic slurry to fresh water 34 only. Include with 6-19.2(9-36.2(2)).OPT1.GB6 and 6-35 19.5.OPT2.GB6. 36

37 6-19.5.GR6 Payment 38



6-19.5.OPT2.GB6 (Fresh Water for Synthetic Slurry) 43 (January 2, 2012) 44 Use in projects with shafts constructed in salt water when 45 the geotechnical report specifies that the use of fresh water 46 for synthetic slurry is feasible and when the Contracting 47 Agency restricts the water for synthetic slurry to fresh water 48 only. Include with 6-19.2(9-36.2(2)).OPT1.GB6 and 6-49 19.4.OPT3.GB6. 50

51 6-20.GR6 Buried Structures 52 53



6-20.1(1).GR6 Definitions 3 4

6-20.1(1).INST1.GR6 (The list of types of buried structures in Section 6-20.1(1) is 5 supplemented with the following:) 6 Must use once preceding any of the following: 7

8 6-20.1(1).OPT1.GB6 (February 25, 2021) 9

Use in projects including the Composite Arch Bridge 10 System (CAS) as a buried Structure alternative 11 structure type. Must be included with 6-12 20.2.OPT1.GB6, 6-20.3.OPT1.GB6, and 6-13 20.5.OPT1.GB6. 14 15



20 6-20.2.OPT1.GB6 (February 25, 2021) 21

Use in projects including the Composite Arch Bridge 22 System (CAS) as a buried Structure alternative structure 23 type. Must be included with 6-20.1(1).OPT1.GB6, 6-24 20.3.OPT1.GB6, and 6-20.5.OPT1.GB6. 25




6-20.3.OPT1.GB6 (February 25, 2021) 32 Use in projects including the Composite Arch Bridge 33 System (CAS) as a buried Structure alternative structure 34 type. Must be included with 6-20.1(1).OPT1.GB6, 6-35 20.2.OPT1.GB6, and 6-20.5.OPT1.GB6. 36

37 6-20.5.GR6 Payment 38



6-20.5.OPT1.GB6 (February 25, 2021) 43 Use in projects including the Composite Arch Bridge 44 System (CAS) as a buried Structure alternative structure 45 type. Must be included with 6-20.1(1).GB6, 6-46 20.2.OPT1.GB6, and 6-20.3.OPT1.GB6. 47


6-02.GR6 1

Concrete Structures 2 3 6-02.2.GR6 4


(April 1, 2013) 11

Resin Bonded Anchors 12 The resin bonded anchor system shall include the nut, washer, and threaded anchor rod 13 which is installed into hardened concrete with a resin bonding material. 14 15 Resin bonding material used in overhead and horizontal application shall be specifically 16 recommended by the resin manufacturer for those applications. 17 18 Resin bonding material used in submerged liquid environment shall be specifically 19 recommended by the resin manufacturer for this application. 20 21 The resin bonded anchor system shall conform to the following requirements: 22 23

1. Threaded Anchor Rod and Nuts 24 Threaded anchor rods shall conform to ASTM A 193 Grade B7 or ASTM A 449, 25 except as otherwise noted, and be fully threaded. Threaded anchor rods for 26 stainless steel resin bonded anchor systems shall conform to ASTM F 593 and 27 shall be Type 304 unless otherwise specified. 28 29 Nuts shall conform to ASTM A 563, Grade DH, except as otherwise noted. Nuts 30 for stainless steel resin bonded anchor systems shall conform to ASTM F 594 31 and shall be Type 304 unless otherwise specified. 32 33 Washers shall conform to ASTM F 436, and shall meet the same requirements 34 as the supplied anchor rod, except as otherwise noted. Washers for stainless 35 steel resin bonded anchor systems shall conform to ASTM A 240 and the 36 geometric requirements of ASME B18.21.1 and shall be Type 304 Stainless 37 Steel unless otherwise specified. 38 39 Nuts and threaded anchor rods, except those manufactured of stainless steel, 40 shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 232. Galvanized threaded 41 anchor rods shall be tested for embrittlement after galvanizing, in accordance 42 with Section 9-29.6(5). 43 44 Threaded anchor rods used with resin capsules shall have the tip of the rod 45 chiseled in accordance with the resin capsule manufacturer's recommendations. 46 Galvanized threaded rods shall have the tip chiseled prior to galvanizing. 47 48

2. Resin Bonding Material 49 Resin bonding material shall be a two component epoxy resin conforming to 50 Type IV ASTM C 881 or be one of the following: 51


1 a. Vinyl ester resin. 2 3 b. Polyester resin. 4 5 c. Methacrylate resin. 6 7 8

9 3. Ultimate Anchor Tensile Capacity 10

Resin bonded anchors shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 488 to have 11 the following minimum ultimate tensile load capacity when installed in concrete 12 having a maximum compressive strength of 6000 pounds per square inch (psi) 13 at the embedment specified below: 14 15

Anchor Diameter (inch)

Tensile Capacity (lbs.)

Embedment (inch)

3/8 7,800 3-3/8

1/2 12,400 4-1/2

5/8 19,000 5-5/8

3/4 27,200 6-3/4

7/8 32,000 7-7/8

1 41,000 9

1-1/4 70,000 11-1/4

16 17 The Contractor shall submit items 1 and 2 below to the Engineer for all resin bonded 18 anchor systems. If the resin bonded anchor system and anchor diameter are not listed in 19 the current WSDOT Qualified Products List, the Contractor shall also submit item 3 below 20 to the Engineer. 21

22 For resin bonded anchor systems that are installed in a submerged liquid environment 23 the Contractor shall submit items 1, 2, and 4 below. If the resin bonded anchor system 24 and anchor diameter are not listed in the current WSDOT Qualified Products List, the 25 Contractor shall also submit item 3 below to the Engineer. 26

27 1 The resin manufacturer's written installation procedure for the anchors. 28 29 2. The manufacturer's certificate of compliance for the threaded anchor rod 30

certifying that the anchor rod meets these requirements. 31 32 3. Test results by an independent laboratory certifying that the threaded anchor rod 33

system meets the ultimate anchor tensile load capacity specified in the above 34 table. The tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 488. 35

36 4. For threaded anchors intended to be installed in submerged liquid environments 37

the Contractor shall submit tests performed by an independent laboratory within 38 the past 24 months which certifies that anchors installed in a submerged 39 environment meet the strength requirements specified in the above table. 40

41


6-02.2.OPT2.GB6 1


Epoxy Bonding Agent For Surfaces And For Steel Reinforcing Bar Dowels 3 Epoxy bonding agent for surfaces shall be Type II, as specified in Section 9-26.1. Epoxy 4 bonding agent for steel reinforcing bar dowels shall be either Type I or Type IV, as 5 specified in Section 9-26.1. The grade and class of epoxy bonding agent shall be as 6 recommended by the resin manufacturer. 7

8 6-02.2.OPT4.GB6 9

(August 3, 2015) 10

Epoxy Crack Sealing Materials 11 Epoxy sealing paste shall be a thixotropic compound. 12 13 Epoxy injection resin shall be a moisture-insensitive, two-component material capable of 14 restoring the structural integrity of a structure by structurally bonding cracks, 15 delaminations and hollow planes. Resin formulations shall be hydrophilic with variable 16 viscosity to allow full depth penetration in cracks having a width of 6 mils and greater. 17 18 Epoxy injection resin, when mixed with the hardener in accordance with the 19 manufacturer's written instructions, shall cure to a non-shrink solid material. The material 20 shall have a normal curing time of less than 24 hours. 21 22 Epoxy injection resin shall have the following physical properties: 23 24

Solids Content, by weight (minimum) 98 percent 25 26 Viscosity (maximum) at 77F (Brookfield) 700 cps 27 28 Compressive Yield Strength (minimum) 12,000 psi 29 30 Minimum Flexural Strength (ASTM D 790) 10,000 psi 31 32 Bond Strength (minimum) 500 psi 33

34 The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of sample of the 35 material of the epoxy sealing paste and epoxy injection resin together with sufficient 36 directions and technical data for its use. 37 38 The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the Materials Safety 39 Data Sheet (MSDS) for each type of epoxy sealing paste and epoxy injection resin. 40

41 6-02.2.OPT26.GB6 42

(April 6, 2015) 43

Rapid Cure Silicone Sealant 44 Rapid cure silicone sealant shall be Dow Corning 902 RCS Joint Sealant. 45 46 The Contractor shall deliver the joint sealant to the job site in the sealant manufacturer's 47 original sealed container. Each container shall be marked with the sealant manufacturer's 48 name and lot or batch number. Each lot or batch shall be accompanied by the 49 manufacturer's Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), and Manufacturer’s Certificate of 50


Compliance, identifying the lot or batch number, and certifying that the materials conform 1 to the properties stated on the product data sheet. 2 3 The backer rod shall be closed cell expanded polyethylene foam as recommended by the 4 sealant manufacturer. The diameter of the backer rod shall be as recommended by the 5 sealant manufacturer for the expansion joint opening at the time of installation. 6

7 6-02.2.OPT27.GB6 8

(April 6, 2015) 9

Polyester Concrete 10 Polyester Resin Binder 11 The resin shall be an unsaturated isophthalic polyester-styrene co-polymer. 12 13 Prior to adding the initiator, the resin shall conform to the following requirements: 14

15 Viscosity: 75 to 200 cps ASTM D 2196 16 (20 rpm at 77F, RVT No. 1 spindle) 17 18 Specific Gravity: 1.05 to 1.10 at 77F ASTM D 1475 19 20 Styrene Content: 45% to 50% by weight ASTM D2369 21 of polyester styrene resin 22

23 The hardened resin shall conform to the following requirements: 24

25 Elongation: 35% minimum ASTM D 638 26 w/ thickness 0.25" ± 0.04" 27 28 Tensile Strength: 2,500 psi minimum ASTM D 638 29 w/ thickness 0.25" ± 0.04" 30 31 Conditioning 18 hours/77F/50% + 5 hours/158F ASTM D 618 32 33 Silane Coupler: 1.0% minimum (by weight of polyester-styrene resin) 34 35 The silane coupler shall be an organosilane ester, gammamethacryloxypro-36 pyltrimethoxysilane. The promoter/hardeners shall be compatible with suitable 37 methyl ethyl ketone peroxide (MEKP) and cumene hydroperoxide (CHP) 38 initiators. MEKP and CHP initiators shall be used as recommended by the 39 manufacturer. 40

41 Polyester resin binder will be accepted based on submittal to the Engineer of a 42 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 43 44 High Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) Resin 45 In addition to the viscosity and density properties, and the promoter/initiator system, 46 specified in Section 6-09.2, the HMWM resin for polyester concrete shall conform to 47 the following requirements: 48

49 Flash Point: 180F minimum ASTM D 3278 50 51


Tack-Free Time: 400 minutes maximum California Test 551 1 2 Prior to adding initiator, the HMWM resin shall have a maximum volatile content of 3 30 percent, when tested in conformance with ASTM D 2369. 4 5 HMWM resin will be accepted based on submittal to the Engineer of a Manufacturer’s 6 Certificate of Compliance. 7 8 Aggregate 9 The aggregate shall be from a WSDOT approved pit site and shall be thoroughly 10 washed and kiln dried. 11 12 The aggregate shall conform to Section 9-03.1(5)B for either 1/2-inch or 3/8-inch 13 maximum nominal aggregate size. 14 15 The combined aggregate shall have a maximum of 45 percent crushed particles. 16 Fine aggregate shall conform to Section 9-03.13. 17 18 Aggregate absorption shall not exceed 1.0 percent. The moisture content of the 19 aggregate shall not exceed one half of the aggregate absorption at the time of mixing 20 with the polyester resin binder. The aggregate temperature shall be between 45F 21 and 100F at the time of mixing. 22 23 Sand for Abrasive Finish 24 The sand for abrasive finish shall conform to Section 6-09.2, and the aggregate 25 moisture content requirements specified above. 26

27 6-02.2.OPT28.GB6 28

(April 6, 2015) 29

Elastomeric Concrete 30 Elastomeric concrete shall be one of the following three products: 31

32 BASF/Watson Bowman Acme Wabo Crete II 33 34 D. S. Brown Delcrete 35 36 R. J. Watson Poly-Tron 37 38

The elastomeric concrete aggregate shall be as specified, gradated, and packaged by 39 the elastomeric concrete manufacturer. 40 41 The primer shall be as recommended by the elastomeric concrete manufacturer. 42 43 The Contractor shall deliver the elastomeric concrete components to the job site in the 44 elastomeric concrete manufacturer's original sealed containers. Each container shall be 45 marked with the sealant manufacturer's name and lot or batch number. Each lot or batch 46 shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS), and 47 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, identifying the elastomeric concrete 48 manufacturer and the lot or batch number, and certifying that the materials conform to the 49 properties stated in the product data sheet. 50

51


6-02.2.OPT46.GB6 1

Bridge Supported Utilities 2 3 6-02.2.OPT46(A).GB6 4

(June 26, 2000) 5 Inserts shall be of the type and model specified in the Plans. Inserts shall be galvanized 6 in accordance with AASHTO M 111. 7

8 6-02.2.OPT46(B).GB6 9

(September 3, 2019) 10 Hanger rods, and associated nuts and washers, shall conform to Section 9-06.5(1), and 11 shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329. 12 13 Steel bars and plates shall conform to ASTM A 36 and shall be galvanized in accordance 14 with AASHTO M 111. 15

16 6-02.2.OPT46(C).GB6 17

(September 3, 2019) 18 Horizontal strut bolts or threaded rods, and associated nuts and washers, shall conform 19 to Section 9-06.5(1), and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329. 20 21 Pre-formed fabric pads shall be composed of multiple layers of duck, impregnated and 22 bound with high quality oil resistant synthetic rubber, compressed into resilient pads. The 23 pre-formed fabric pads shall conform to latest edition of MIL C 882 and the following 24 requirements. The number of plies shall be as required to produce the specified 25 thickness, after compression and vulcanizing. 26 27 Pre-formed fabric pads shall have a shore A hardness of 90+5 in accordance with ASTM 28 D 2240. 29 30 Pre-formed fabric pads for bridge utility supports will be accepted based on the 31 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance that the material furnished conforms to these 32 specifications. 33

34 6-02.2.OPT46(D).GB6 35

(June 26, 2000) 36 Pipe rolls or pipe saddles shall be of the type and model specified in the Plans. 37

38 6-02.2.OPT46(E).GB6 39

(September 3, 2019) 40 Anchor straps shall conform to ASTM A 36 and shall be galvanized after fabrication in 41 accordance with AASHTO M 111. 42 43 Anchor bolts, and associated nuts and washers, shall conform to Section 9-06.5(4), and 44 shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329. 45

46 6-02.2.OPT48.GB6 47

(April 30, 2001) 48

Bridge Drain Risers 49 Spacer bars and riser bars for the drain riser assembly shall conform to ASTM A 36. 50

51


6-02.2.OPT58.GB6 1


Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain 3 Bridge deck drain pipe sleeve shall be any smooth wall, non-perforated, PVC pipe of the 4 diameter and minimum wall thickness specified in the Plans. 5 6 Epoxy bonding agent shall be Type II conforming to Section 9-26.1. The grade and class 7 of the epoxy bonding agent shall be as recommended by the bonding agent manufacturer. 8

9 6-02.2.OPT60.GB6 10

(April 6, 2015) 11

Seismic Retrofit Materials 12 Components fabricated and constructed for seismic retrofit work shall conform to the 13 following requirements: 14

15 6-02.2.OPT60(B).GB6 16

(April 6, 2015) 17 Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A 53, Grade B, Type E or S, galvanized. The pipe 18 shall be Schedule 40, except as otherwise specified in the Plans. 19 20 PVC pipe shall be any smooth wall, non-perforated, PVC pipe of the diameter and 21 minimum wall thickness or Schedule specified in the Plans. 22

23 6-02.2.OPT60(C).GB6 24

(September 8, 2020) 25 Steel bars, plates and shapes shall conform to ASTM A 36 except that structural 26 shapes may conform to ASTM A 992. 27 28 Epoxy bonding agent, where shown in the Plans for bonding steel components to 29 concrete, shall be Type II as specified in Section 9-26.1. The grade and class of 30 epoxy bonding agent shall be as recommended by the bonding agent manufacturer. 31 32 All steel components and assemblies for seismic restrainers, except as otherwise 33 specified, shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 111. 34 35 Bolts, nuts, and washers shall conform to Section 9-06.5(3), and shall be galvanized 36 after fabrication in accordance with ASTM F2329. 37 38 Resin bonded anchors shall conform to Section 6-02.2 as supplemented in these 39 Special Provisions. Additionally, the threaded anchor rods for seismic retrofit 40 elements shall conform to either ASTM A 193 Grade B7 or ASTM F 1554 Grade 105, 41 and shall conform to the appropriate supplemental requirements for grade and 42 manufacturer’s identification, and charpy impact testing (15-foot-pounds minimum at 43 40F). Results of the charpy impact testing for the production lot(s) including the 44 anchor rods furnished for seismic retrofit components and assemblies shall be 45 submitted to the Engineer along with the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 46

47 6-02.2.OPT60(D).GB6 48

(September 8, 2020) 49 High-strength steel rods for longitudinal seismic restrainer assemblies shall conform 50 to ASTM F 1554 Grade 105, including Supplemental Requirements S2, S3, and S5. 51


Nuts, and couplers if required, shall conform to ASTM A 563 Grade DH. Washers 1 shall conform to ASTM F 436. 2 3 High-strength steel rods and associated couplers, nuts and washers shall be 4 galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM F2329. 5

6 6-02.2.OPT60(F).GB6 7

(September 8, 2020) 8 Column Jacketing Materials 9 All metal components shall conform to ASTM A 36, and shall be painted in 10 accordance with Section 6-07.3(9), and Section 6-03.3(30) as supplemented in these 11 Special Provisions. Metal surfaces in contact with grout shall be considered in 12 contact with concrete for the purposes of Section 6-07.3(9). 13 14 Grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-20.3(4) and the following 15 requirements: 16 17

The grout shall be a pumpable mix capable of filling the annulus between the 18 concrete column and steel column jacket assembly. The grout shall be free of 19 lumps and undispersed cement, and shall not show any visible signs of 20 separation of water and cement during pumping operations. 21

22 Aggregate conforming to Section 9-03.1(5) with a maximum aggregate size of 3/8 23 inch may be used to extend the grout. Mortar shall conform to Section 9-20.4(2). 24 25 Epoxy bonding agent for filling grout voids shall be Type II, as specified in Section 9-26 26.1. The grade and class of epoxy bonding agent shall be as recommended by the 27 bonding agent manufacturer. 28

29 6-02.2.OPT61.GB6 30


Precast Prestressed Concrete Stay-In-Place Panels 32 Concrete shall have an initial strength at strand release of at least 5,000 psi, and a 28 33 day minimum compressive strength as specified in the Plans. 34 35 Prestressing reinforcement strand shall conform to Section 9-07.10, except that the 36 diameter shall be as specified in the Plans. The strand shall be provided by a 37 manufacturer and facility capable of producing ½” diameter strand with an average bond 38 pull-out force of 16.0 kips when tested in accordance with ASTM A1081. Test reports for 39 ASTM A1081 shall be submitted with the Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, and 40 testing shall have been performed on strand produced within the previous 36 months. 41 42 Grout shall conform to Section 9-20.3(2). 43 44 Leveling bolts shall conform to Section 9-06.5(1), and shall be galvanized after fabrication 45 in accordance with AASHTO M 232. 46 47 Backer rod shall be closed cell expanded polyethylene foam. 48

49


6-02.3.GR6 1

Construction Requirements 2 3 6-02.3.INST1.GR6 4 Section 6-02.3 is supplemented with the following: 5 6 6-02.3.OPT1.GB6 7


Epoxy Crack Sealing 9 The materials being used may be dermatetic. The Contractor’s contact with and use of 10 the materials shall conform to the requirements specified in the MSDS for each material, 11 and all personnel shall be provided with appropriate clothing and protective garments. 12 13 All materials shall be stored and protected from ignition sources as recommended by the 14 material manufacturer. 15 16 The cracks shall be cleaned of efflorescence, deteriorated concrete and other surface 17 debris, by vacuuming, flushing, routing, sawing or other means as required. 18 19 Entry ports shall consist of tubes, tees or other valve devices as recommended by the 20 resin manufacturer. The ports shall be placed at intervals along each crack in accordance 21 with the manufacturer's written instructions for the resin being used. The holes for the 22 entry ports shall be drilled with a hollow bit with an attached vacuum chuck to prevent 23 concrete dust from becoming embedded in the crack. 24 25 The exposed crack surfaces and the areas around the entry ports shall be sealed with 26 epoxy sealing paste and cured in accordance with the resin manufacturer's written 27 instructions, to attain a seal capable of withstanding the applied injection pressures. 28 29 The Contractor shall furnish the services of a factory trained technical representative to 30 perform the epoxy crack sealing injection. 31 32 Injection shall be accomplished with a pressure or injection machine compatible with the 33 resin selected for use and shall begin at the lowest port and continue until there is 34 evidence of the resin at the entry port directly above and adjacent to the port being 35 pumped. When material travel is indicated, the nozzle shall be moved to the port that 36 shows resin. The previously pumped port shall be sealed. Injection shall continue until 37 the crack is completely filled. On wide cracks where resin travel between ports will be 38 rapid, two or more ports may be pumped simultaneously. On exceptionally large cracks, 39 a formulation (dependent upon crack width, ambient temperature, modulus requirements 40 and other variables) of epoxy resin and fine sands shall be used as recommended by the 41 resin manufacturer. 42 43 After all ports have been pumped and the crack is full, the epoxy resin shall be cured 44 without disturbance in accordance with the resin manufacturer's written instructions as 45 necessary to ensure development of the full bond capacity of the material. 46 47 After the epoxy has cured completely, the epoxy sealing paste and port stems shall be 48 ground flush with the original surface of the concrete. 49 50


At the discretion of the Engineer, cores shall be taken after the repair is completed to 1 confirm penetration and bonding. The number and locations of such cores will be as 2 specified by the Engineer. These cores shall be submitted to the Engineer for testing in 3 the WSDOT State Materials Laboratory. The Contractor shall submit a Working Drawing 4 for repair of core holes in accordance with Section 6-01.16. 5

6 6-02.3.OPT2.GB6 7

Bridge Supported Utilities 8 9 6-02.3.OPT2(A).GB6 10

(August 3, 2015) 11 The Contractor shall furnish and install inserts for the bridge utility supports as shown in 12 the Plans. The Contractor shall verify that the hanger rods freely hang plumb in their 13 inserts, and shall make adjustments to the inserts as necessary and as accepted by the 14 Engineer prior to utility installation. 15

16 6-02.3.OPT2(B).GB6 17

(June 26, 2000) 18 The Contractor shall furnish and install the bridge utility supports, and the utility pipe or 19 conduit pipe, as shown in the Plans. 20

21 6-02.3.OPT2(C).FB6 22

(June 26, 2000) 23 The Utility Company will furnish material for and install *** $$1$$ ***. The Contractor shall 24 install *** $$2$$ *** furnished by the *** $$3$$ ***. 25 26 The Contractor shall notify the utility company a sufficient time in advance and shall 27 cooperate with the utility company in order that the utility furnished items may be installed 28 in the structure. 29

30 6-02.3.OPT8.GB6 31

Seismic Retrofit 32 33 6-02.3.OPT8(B).GB6 34

(April 6, 2015) 35 Seismic Retrofit Demolition Plan 36 The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings showing the method of 37 removing the specified portions of the existing bridges required by the seismic retrofit 38 work. The Working Drawings shall show the sequence of demolition and removal, 39 the type of equipment to be used in all demolition and removal operations, and details 40 of the methods and equipment used for containment, collection, and disposal of all 41 debris. The Working Drawings shall show all stages of demolition. 42

43 6-02.3.OPT8(C).GB6 44

(April 6, 2015) 45 Column Jacket Installation Plan 46 The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings describing the column jacket 47 installation plan. The submittal shall include at a minimum, the following: 48 49

1. Step by step installation procedure. 50 51


2. The methods of cleaning and preparing the existing column surfaces prior 1 to installing the column jacket assembly. 2

3 3. The methods of containing, collecting, and disposing of the debris 4

generated by cleaning and preparing the existing column surfaces. 5 6 4. The methods of containing, collecting, and disposing of all excess grout 7

generated during the grouting process. 8 9 5. The locations of grout injection valves, and the methods and materials used 10

to remove them following use, and to fill the void following removal. 11 12 6. The method of sealing the gap between the existing column surface and 13

the column jacket assembly prior to grouting. 14 15 7. The method and materials used to clamp and brace the column jacket 16

assembly in place during field assembly and grouting. 17 18 8. The proposed grout mix with manufacturer’s data sheets. 19 20 9. The equipment used to pump the grout and monitor the grout pressure and 21

the quantity of grout injected. 22 23 10. The method, materials, and equipment used to fill grout voids within the 24

column jacket assembly, and to finish the exposed surface flush after repair. 25 26 11. The method, materials, and equipment used to field repair all damaged 27

primer coatings, and to field apply the intermediate and finish coats of paint. 28 29 6-02.3.OPT8(D).GB6 30

(April 6, 2015) 31 Column Jacket Shop Drawings 32 The Contractor shall submit column jacket shop drawings as Type 2 Working 33 Drawings. The shop drawings shall include, at a minimum, the following: 34 35

1. Plan, elevation, and sections of the jacket system and all components, with 36 all dimensions and tolerances. 37

38 2. Field measurements of the existing column(s). 39 40 3. All material designations. 41 42 4. Location of horizontal and vertical splices. 43 44 5. Location of spacers and method of attachment. 45 46 6. Welds and welding procedures. 47

48


6-02.3.OPT8(E).GB6 1 (September 8, 2020) 2 Field Measuring Existing Bridge Columns 3 The Contractor shall field measure the dimensions (diameter, or width and thickness, 4 as appropriate for column shape) of the existing bridge columns receiving column 5 jackets prior to preparing column jacket assembly shop drawings. The following 6 locations shall be field measured as a minimum for each column: 7 8

1. Top of footing or footing pedestal. 9 10 2. Bottom of crossbeam. 11 12 3. Mid-height of column. 13

14 The Contractor shall field measure the column height from top of footing or footing 15 pedestal to bottom of crossbeam for each column. 16 17 The Contractor shall tabulate these field measured dimensions and submit them to 18 the Engineer along with the column jacket assembly shop drawings. 19 20 Where site conditions, such as traffic control requirements or deeply buried 21 foundations, create difficulties for field measuring buried portions of the bridge 22 columns, the Contractor may request a waiver of the pre-fabrication field measuring 23 requirements for specific columns. If the Engineer concurs with the Contractor’s 24 request for a waiver of the pre-fabrication field measuring requirement for specific 25 columns, and for columns identified in the Special Provisions as already designated 26 with a waiver, the Contractor shall: 27 28

1. Field measure the diameter, or width and thickness, as appropriate for the 29 column shape, of the above ground portion of the column receiving the 30 waiver. 31

32 2. Fabricate the column jacket to a length exceeding the column height (2’-0” 33

or ten percent of the estimated column height, whichever is greater) based 34 on the original plans and other available site data. The shop drawing details 35 shall specify the column jacket fabrication length, and the assumed column 36 height based on the available information. 37

38 3. Submit the method, template, and equipment used to field cut the top of the 39

column jacket assembly at installation. 40 41 The Contractor shall submit the request for a waiver of the pre-fabrication field 42 measuring requirement prior to preparing column jacket assembly shop drawings, 43 and shall not submit shop drawings until receiving the Engineer’s confirmation of the 44 waiver request and completing all field measurements still required. 45

46 6-02.3.OPT8(F).FB6 47

(April 6, 2015) 48 The column(s) at the Bridge and Pier location(s) specified below has (have) received 49 a waiver of the pre-fabrication field measuring requirement, and no separate waiver 50 request from the Contractor is required for this (these) specific column(s): 51


1 *** $$1$$ *** 2

3 However, the Contractor shall conform to all other requirements specified above for 4 columns receiving a waiver of the pre-fabrication field measuring requirement. 5

6 6-02.3.OPT8(G).FB6 7

(April 6, 2015) 8 Field Measuring for Seismic Retrofit Components 9 The Contractor shall field measure dimensions of existing items and members of 10 Bridge No(s). *** $$1$$ *** prior to preparing shop drawings for fabricated steel 11 components and assemblies. 12 13 The Contractor shall field measure dimensions of the following items: 14 15

*** $$2$$ *** 16 17 The Contractor shall tabulate these field measured dimensions and submit them to 18 the Engineer along with the shop drawing submittals for the corresponding steel 19 components and assemblies. 20

21 6-02.3.OPT8(H).GB6 22

(April 6, 2015) 23 Removing Portions of Existing Concrete 24 The Contractor shall remove portions of existing concrete required by the seismic 25 retrofit work in accordance with Section 2-02.3(2)A2 and as shown in the Plans. 26 27 The Contractor shall dispose of all materials removed by the demolition operations 28 in accordance with Section 2-02.3. 29 30 The Contractor shall roughen, clean, and saturate the existing concrete surfaces 31 bonding to the fresh concrete in accordance with Section 6-02.3(12). 32

33 6-02.3.OPT8(J).GB6 34

(April 6, 2015) 35 Drilling Holes and Setting Steel Reinforcing Bars, and Placing Concrete 36 The Contractor shall drill holes for, and set, steel reinforcing bars into the existing 37 concrete as shown in the Plans in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)C as 38 supplemented in these Special Provisions. 39

40 6-02.3.OPT8(K).GB6 41

(April 6, 2015) 42 Installing and Tensioning High-Strength Steel Bar Reinforcement 43 The Contractor shall furnish and install high-strength steel bars as shown in the 44 Plans. The hole through existing concrete shall be core drilled. The concrete surface 45 in contact with the high-strength steel bar bearing plate shall be coated with epoxy 46 bonding agent just prior to stressing the high-strength steel bar. After stressing, the 47 high-strength steel bar shall be grouted in accordance with Section 6-02.3(26)H. 48

49


6-02.3.OPT8(L).GB6 1 (April 6, 2015) 2 Longitudinal Seismic Restrainers 3 The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of shop drawings 4 of the steel components of the longitudinal seismic restrainer assemblies in 5 accordance with Section 6-03.3(7). 6 7 The Contractor shall core drill holes through the pier diaphragm for the high-strength 8 steel bar as shown in the Plans. The Contractor shall set the PVC pipe in place with 9 epoxy bonding agent as shown in the Plans. 10 11 Holes for the resin bonded anchors for the longitudinal seismic restrainer anchorages 12 shall be located and drilled in accordance with Section 6-02.3(18) as supplemented 13 in these Special Provisions, and as follows: 14 15

1. The bottom layer of steel reinforcing bars in the slab in the vicinity of the 16 longitudinal seismic restrainer anchorage as shown in the Plans shall be 17 located and marked on the concrete surface. 18

19 2. Using the anchorage assembly as a template, the Contractor shall align and 20

slightly shift the anchorage assembly as required so that the holes avoid 21 the existing steel reinforcing bars. 22

23 3. The Contractor shall drill holes for the resin bonded anchors with the 24

anchorage assembly in position as a template. 25 26 4. If, after shifting the anchorage assembly, conflicts still exist between hole 27

locations and existing steel reinforcing bars, the Contractor may, with the 28 Engineer’s approval, core drill holes at the conflict locations. 29

30 The surface of the concrete in contact with the anchorage assembly shall be coated 31 with Type II epoxy bonding agent conforming to Section 9-26.2, with the grade and 32 class as recommended by the epoxy bonding agent manufacturer. The longitudinal 33 seismic restrainer anchorage assembly shall be set in place within the set time 34 specified in the manufacturer’s data sheet for the epoxy bonding agent. 35 36 All longitudinal seismic restrainers at a pier shall be installed so that the free end (the 37 end with the gap as shown in the Plans) shall be on the same side of the pier. 38

39 6-02.3.OPT8(M).GB6 40

(September 8, 2020) 41 Column Jacketing 42 The steel column jacket assembly for each column shown in the Plans shall be 43 fabricated in accordance with the shop drawings. 44 45 The Contractor shall excavate and shore as required to expose the column surface 46 below ground to the top of the existing footing or footing pedestal. Dirt, debris and 47 any surface attachments shall be removed from the surface of the column in 48 accordance with the Contractor’s column jacket installation plan. 49 50


For specific columns for which the Engineer confirms a waiver of the pre-fabrication 1 field measuring of the column height dimension, the Contractor shall field measure 2 the column height upon completion of the excavation. The Contractor shall field cut 3 the top of the column jacket assembly using the method, template, and equipment 4 as specified in the pre-fabrication field measuring waiver request submittal. 5 6 The Contractor shall position the steel column jacket around the existing column 7 using spacers to center the assembly. The spacers may be welded to the inside of 8 the jacket and, if used, shall be placed and attached as shown in the shop drawings. 9 10 Field welded complete penetration groove welds of the column jacket assemblies 11 shall be inspected in accordance with Section 6-03.3(25)A. Field weld inspection 12 shall be performed by a certified welding inspector (CWI). The Contractor shall not 13 begin welding until receiving acceptance of the joint fit-up from the CWI. The CWI 14 shall randomly monitor the intermediate stages of welding. The CWI’s daily reports 15 and nondestructive testing reports indicating compliance with contract requirements 16 shall be submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing upon completion of the last column 17 jacket in the Contract. 18 19 The Contractor shall install external grout injection valves for use in filling the cavity 20 with grout. The valves shall be spaced such that the grout will uniformly fill the gap 21 between the jacket assembly and the column surface. The grout pump shall be 22 equipped with a pressure gauge to monitor grout pressures. The grouting equipment 23 shall be sized to enable the grout to be pumped in one continuous operation. The 24 mixer shall be capable of continuously agitating the grout. 25 26 The production grout compressive strength shall be measured using four inch 27 diameter by eight inch cylinders, cast and cured in accordance with Section 6-28 02.3(5)H. The cylinders shall attain a 7-day minimum compressive strength of 4,000 29 psi. 30 31 The gap between the column jacket assembly and the existing column surface at the 32 base of the assembly shall be sealed in accordance with the column jacket 33 installation plan. 34 35 The grouting operation shall conform to Section 6-02.3(6)A. 36 37 The grouting operation shall begin from the base of the assembly and from the base 38 of each successive lift. The Contractor shall pump grout into the assembly while 39 maintaining a uniform level grout head around the column. 40 41 The Contractor shall limit the height of each lift of grout to minimize undulations and 42 displacements of the surface of the column jacket assembly during grouting. For 43 column jacket assemblies of circular (constant radius) cross section, the height of 44 each lift of grout shall be limited to 20 feet maximum, except as otherwise accepted 45 by the Engineer. For column jacket assemblies with cross sections of all other 46 shapes, the height of each lift of grout shall be limited to 8 feet maximum, except as 47 otherwise accepted by the Engineer. 48 49 The Contractor may restrain the column jacket assembly within the specified 50 tolerances during grouting operations by using a bracing system in accordance with 51


the column jacket installation plan. Except as otherwise shown in the Plans, restraints 1 for the bracing system shall not pass through the column. Except when a bracing 2 system is used, placement of the next grout lift shall not begin until the previous grout 3 lift has hardened. 4 5 The Contractor shall contain and collect all grout outside the column jacket assembly. 6 7 When the assembly is completely grouted to the top, the Contractor shall place 8 mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2) over the top of the grout at the top of the 9 assembly, and shall slope the mortar to drain. 10 11 All clamps, valves, injection ports, lifting ears, and other attachments shall be 12 removed not less than 24 hours after completing grouting operations at the column. 13 The Contractor shall fill all voids with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2), and 14 shall finish them flush with the exterior surface of the column jacket assembly. The 15 Contractor shall not remove the attachments by flame cutting. 16 17 Seven calendar days after completing the grouting of a column jacket assembly, the 18 Engineer will inspect the assembly for voids between the steel casing and the grout. 19 The Contractor shall completely fill all voids detected by the Engineer by injecting 20 epoxy bonding agent into the lowest point of each void and venting at the highest 21 point. The exposed epoxy bonding agent shall be finished flush with the exterior 22 surface of the column jacket assembly. 23 24 After inspection for voids and epoxy injection of voids is complete, steel surfaces with 25 damaged primer coat shall be repaired with field primer in accordance with Section 26 6-07.3(9). The primer repair shall be followed by application of the intermediate and 27 finish field coats of paint to all exposed steel surfaces in accordance with Section 6-28 07.3(9) and Section 6-03.3(30) as supplemented in these Special Provisions. 29 30 Backfill shall not be placed against the column jacket assembly until the finish coat 31 of paint is completely cured, based on the cure duration recommended by the paint 32 manufacturer. The Contractor shall fill and compact the excavation with native 33 backfill, except as otherwise specified in the Plans, in accordance with Section 2-34 09.3(1)E. 35

36 6-02.3.OPT9.GB6 37

(January 7, 2019) 38

Polyester Concrete 39 Manufacturer’s Technical Representative 40 The Contractor shall have the services of a qualified polyester concrete 41 manufacturer's technical representative physically present at the job site. The 42 manufacturer’s technical representative shall assist the Contractor in training the 43 Contractor’s personnel and providing technical assistance in preparing the header 44 blockout surface, applying primer, and mixing, placing, and curing the polyester 45 concrete. 46 47 Mix Design 48 Polyester concrete shall be composed of the following three components – polyester 49 resin binder, high molecular weight methacrylate (HMWM) resin, and aggregate, in 50 accordance with Section 6-02.2 as supplemented in these Special Provisions. 51


1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the 2 polyester concrete design mix and mixing procedure. The mix design shall include a 3 recommended initiator percentage for the expected application temperature, and the 4 recommended amount of polyester resin binder as a percentage of the dry weight of 5 aggregate. The amount of peroxide initiator used shall result in a polyester concrete 6 set time between 30 and 120 minutes during placement as determined by California 7 Test 551, Part 2, “Method of Test For Determination of Set Time of Concrete Overlay 8 and Patching Materials”, by Gilmore Needles. Accelerators or inhibitors may be 9 required as recommended by the polyester resin binder supplier. 10 11 Delivery and Storage of Materials 12 All materials shall be delivered in their original containers bearing the manufacturer's 13 label, specifying date of manufacturing, batch number, trade name brand, and 14 quantity. Each shipment of polyester resin binder and HMWM resin shall be 15 accompanied by a Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). 16 17 The material shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s 18 recommendations. 19 20 Sufficient material to perform the entire polyester concrete application shall be in 21 storage at the site prior to any field preparation. 22 23 Equipment and Containment 24 The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of all equipment 25 for cleaning the concrete and steel surfaces, and mixing and applying the polyester 26 concrete. 27 28 The HMWM resin, and abrasive blasting materials, shall be contained and restricted 29 to the surface receiving the polyester concrete only, and shall not escape to the 30 surrounding environment. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing 31 consisting of the method and materials used to collect and contain the HMWM resin, 32 and abrasive blasting materials. 33 34 Surface Preparation 35 The concrete and steel surfaces shall be prepared by removing all material which 36 may act as a bond breaker between the surface and the polyester concrete. Surface 37 cleaning shall be by abrasive blasting. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that no 38 dust or debris leaves the bridge deck and that all traffic is protected from rebound 39 and dust. 40 41 If the concrete or steel surfaces become contaminated, the contaminated areas shall 42 be recleaned by abrasive blasting. 43 44 Application of Prime Coat 45 Application of the HMWM prime coat and the polyester concrete shall not begin if 46 rain is forecast within 12-hours of completion of the Work. The area receiving the 47 prime coat shall be dry and had no rain within the past 12 hours. Immediately prior 48 to applying the prime coat, the surfaces shall be cleaned to remove accumulated 49 dust and any other loose material. 50 51


The concrete bridge deck surface shall be between 50F and 85F when applying the 1 prime coat. 2 3 The Contractor shall apply one coat of promoted/initiated wax-free HMWM resin to 4 the prepared concrete and steel surfaces immediately before placing the polymer 5 concrete. The promoted/initiated resin shall be worked into the concrete in a manner 6 to assure complete coverage of the area receiving polyester concrete. A one pint 7 sample of each batch of promoted/initiated HMWM resin shall be retained and 8 submitted to the Engineer at the time of primer application. 9 10 The prime coat shall cure for 30 minutes minimum before beginning placement of 11 the polyester concrete. Placement of the polymer concrete shall not proceed until the 12 Engineer verifies that the HMWM resin was properly promoted and initiated, as 13 evidenced by the HMWM batch sample. 14 15 If the primed surface becomes contaminated, the contaminated area shall be cleaned 16 by abrasive blasting and reprimed. 17 18 Mixing Equipment for Polyester Concrete 19 Polyester concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated mixers in accordance 20 with the mix design as approved by the Engineer. The mixer size shall be limited to 21 a nine cubic yard maximum capacity, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 22 23 The aggregate and resin volumes shall be recorded for each batch along with the 24 date of each recording. A printout of the recordings shall be furnished to the Engineer 25 at the end of each work shift. 26 27 The Contractor shall prevent any cleaning chemicals from reaching the polyester mix 28 during the mixing operations. 29 30 Mixing Components 31 The polyester resin binder in the polyester modified concrete shall be approximately 32 12 percent by weight of the dry aggregate. The Contractor shall specify the exact 33 percentage in the mix design Working Drawing submittal. 34 35 The polyester resin binder shall be initiated and thoroughly blended just prior to 36 mixing the aggregate and binder. The polyester concrete shall be thoroughly mixed 37 prior to placing. 38 39 Polyester Concrete Placement 40 The polyester concrete shall be placed within two hours of placing the prime coat. 41 42 Polyester concrete shall be placed within 15 minutes following initiation. Polyester 43 concrete that is not placed within this time shall be discarded. 44 45 The surface temperature of the area receiving the polyester concrete shall be the 46 same as specified above for the HMWM prime coat. 47 48 The polyester concrete shall be consolidated in accordance with the manufacturer’s 49 recommendations. 50 51


Finished Polyester Concrete Surface 1 The finished surface of the polyester concrete shall smooth and uniform as to crown 2 and grade in accordance with Section 6-02.3(10)D3. 3 4 Finishing equipment used shall strike off the polyester concrete to the established 5 grade and cross section. 6 7 The polyester concrete shall receive an abrasive sand finish. The sand finish shall 8 be applied by hand immediately after strike-off and before gelling occurs. Sand shall 9 be broadcast onto the surface to affect a uniform coverage of a minimum of 0.8 10 pounds per square yard. 11 12 Curing 13 The polyester concrete shall be cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s 14 recommendations. The Contractor shall measure the compressive strength of the 15 cured polyester concrete with a rebound hammer in accordance with ASTM C 805. 16 The readings of the rebound hammer used shall be correlated to the compressive 17 strength of the polyester concrete product in accordance with ASTM C 805 Section 18 5.4, and the Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing of this correlation. 19 20 Traffic and equipment shall not be permitted on the polyester concrete until it 21 achieves a compressive strength of 2500 psi based on the rebound hammer readings 22 and the correlation chart for the rebound hammer used. 23

24 6-02.3.OPT10.GB6 25

(January 7, 2019) 26

Elastomeric Concrete 27 Elastomeric concrete shall be composed of the following three components – two-28 component polyurethane resin binder, and aggregate, in accordance with Section 6-02.2 29 as supplemented in these Special Provisions. 30 31

Manufacturer’s Technical Representative 32 The Contractor shall have the services of a qualified elastomeric concrete 33 manufacturer's technical representative physically present at the job site. The 34 manufacturer’s technical representative shall assist the Contractor in training the 35 Contractor’s personnel and providing technical assistance in preparing the header 36 blockout surface, applying primer, and mixing, placing, and curing the elastomeric 37 concrete. 38 39 Delivery and Storage of Materials 40 All materials shall be delivered in their original containers bearing the manufacturer's 41 label, specifying date of manufacturing, batch number, trade name brand, and 42 quantity. Each shipment of polyurethane resin binder shall be accompanied by a 43 Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). 44 45 The materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s 46 recommendations. 47 48 Sufficient material to perform the entire elastomeric concrete application shall be in 49 storage at the site prior to any field preparation. 50 51


Equipment and Containment 1 The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of all equipment 2 for cleaning the concrete and steel surfaces, and mixing and applying the elastomeric 3 concrete. 4 5 The abrasive blasting materials, shall be contained and restricted to the surface 6 receiving the elastomeric concrete only, and shall not escape to the surrounding 7 environment. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of 8 the method and materials used to collect and contain the abrasive blasting materials. 9 10 Surface Preparation 11 The concrete and steel surfaces shall be prepared by removing all material which 12 may act as a bond breaker between the surface and the elastomeric concrete, 13 including the removal of all loose, deteriorated, or otherwise unsound concrete. Steel 14 surfaces shall be cleaned and prepared to an SSPC SP-10 surface condition. 15 Surface cleaning shall be by abrasive blasting. 16 17 Precautions shall be taken to ensure that no dust or debris leaves the bridge deck 18 and that all traffic is protected from rebound and dust. 19 20 If the concrete or steel surfaces become contaminated, the contaminated areas shall 21 be recleaned by abrasive blasting. 22 23 Freshly placed concrete shall be cured for a minimum of 14 calendar days before 24 application of primer and elastomeric concrete. 25 26 Application of Prime Coat 27 Application of the prime coat and the elastomeric concrete shall not begin if rain is 28 forecast within 12-hours of completion of the Work. The area receiving the prime coat 29 shall be dry and had no rain within the past 12 hours. Immediately prior to applying 30 the prime coat, the surfaces shall be cleaned to remove accumulated dust and any 31 other loose material. 32 33 The concrete bridge deck surface shall be between 50F and 85F when applying the 34 prime coat. 35 36 The Contractor shall apply primer in accordance with the elastomeric concrete 37 manufacturer's recommendations, and shall limit the extent of primer application to 38 that surface area that can be covered by a layer of elastomeric concrete before 39 primer cure. 40 41 If the primed surface becomes contaminated, the contaminated area shall be cleaned 42 by abrasive blasting and reprimed. 43 44 Mixing Components 45 The Contractor shall mix the elastomeric concrete components and the resultant 46 mixture in accordance with the equipment and procedure recommended by the 47 elastomeric concrete manufacturer. 48 49


Elastomeric Concrete Placement 1 The elastomeric concrete shall be placed on the liquid prime coat within the time 2 limits specified by the manufacturer. Elastomeric concrete shall be placed in layers 3 not to exceed the maximum depth recommended by the elastomeric concrete 4 manufacturer. At locations deep enough to require placement of multiple layers of 5 elastomeric concrete, each layer shall be cured, and the top of the previous layer 6 roughened, as recommended by the elastomeric concrete manufacturer before 7 placement of the next layer. 8 9 Elastomeric concrete shall be placed within five minutes of initiation. 10 11 The surface temperature of the area receiving the elastomeric concrete shall be the 12 same as specified above for the prime coat. 13 14 Finished Elastomeric Concrete Surface 15 The finished surface of the elastomeric concrete shall be smooth and uniform as to 16 crown and grade in accordance with Section 6-02.3(10)D3. 17 18 Finishing tools or equipment used shall strike off the elastomeric concrete to the 19 established grade and cross section. 20 21 The finished surface of elastomeric concrete shall receive an abrasive sand finish. 22 The sand finish shall be applied by hand immediately after strike-off and before 23 gelling occurs. Sand shall be broadcast onto the surface to affect a uniform coverage 24 of a minimum of 0.8 pounds per square yard. 25 26 Curing 27 The elastomeric concrete shall be cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s 28 recommendations. The Contractor shall measure the compressive strength of the 29 cured elastomeric concrete with a rebound hammer in accordance with ASTM C 805. 30 The readings of the rebound hammer used shall be correlated to the compressive 31 strength of the elastomeric concrete product in accordance with ASTM C 805 Section 32 5.4, and the Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing of this correlation. 33 34 Traffic and equipment shall not be permitted on the elastomeric concrete until it 35 achieves a compressive strength of 2500 psi based on the rebound hammer readings 36 and the correlation chart for the rebound hammer used. 37

38 6-02.3(2).GR6 39

Proportioning Materials 40 41 6-02.3(2).INST1.GR6 42

Section 6-02.3(2) is supplemented with the following: 43 44 6-02.3(2).OPT1.GB6 45

(September 8, 2020) 46 Expansion Joint Header Concrete 47 Expansion joint header concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 48 4,000 psi at 28 days. Unless the Plans or Special Provisions specify a different 49 strength, the concrete shall achieve a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi 50


based on early break cylinders prior to allowing traffic to pass across the expansion 1 joint. 2 3 Type III cement conforming to Section 9-01.2(1) may be used. 4 5 The nominal maximum size aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inch. 6 7 Section 6-02.3(3) notwithstanding, non-chloride accelerating admixtures conforming 8 to the following specifications may be used: 9 10

Admixture Specifications 11 Accelerating Section 9-23.6(4) 12 13 Water Reducing/Accelerating Section 9-23.6(6) 14

15 6-02.3(6).GR6 16

Placing Concrete 17 18 6-02.3(6)B.GR6 19

Placing Concrete in Foundation Seals 20 21 6-02.3(6)B.INST1.GR6 22

Section 6-02.3(6)B is supplemented with the following: 23 24 6-02.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6 25

(June 26, 2000) 26 If, in the opinion of the Engineer, water conditions at the time of construction do 27 not require seals for footing construction, the Engineer may specify that the 28 seals be omitted. In such a case the Contractor shall lower and construct the 29 footing, as shown in the Plans, at the elevation shown in the Plans for the bottom 30 of seal. The height of the pier shaft or columns shall be adjusted accordingly. 31 32 No adjustment will be allowed in the unit contract prices for concrete, steel 33 reinforcing bar, and excavation by reason of any increase or decrease in 34 quantities involved due to the deletion of seals. 35

36 6-02.3(6)B.OPT2.GB6 37

(June 26, 2000) 38 If, in the opinion of the Engineer, water conditions at the time of construction do 39 not require seals for construction, the Engineer may specify that the seals be 40 omitted. In such a case, the Contractor shall excavate only to the bottom of 41 footing elevation and shall construct the footing as shown in the Plans. 42 43 No adjustment will be allowed in the unit contract prices for concrete, steel 44 reinforcing bar, and excavation by reason of any increase or decrease in 45 quantities involved due to the deletion of seals. 46

47 6-02.3(9).GR6 48

Precast Concrete Panels 49 50


6-02.3(9)A.GR6 1 Shop Drawings 2

3 6-02.3(9)A.INST2.GR6 4

The list included in the third paragraph of Section 6-02.3(9)A is supplemented with 5 the following: 6

7 6-02.3(9)A.OPT6.GB6 8

(September 8, 2020) 9 7. Construction sequence and method of forming the precast prestressed 10

concrete stay-in-place panels. 11 12 8. Details of additional reinforcement, if any, provided at lifting and support 13

locations. 14 15 9. Method and equipment used to support the precast prestressed concrete 16

stay-in-place panels during storage, transporting, and erection. 17 18 10. Method used to identify the precast prestressed concrete stay-in-place 19

panel’s location for calculating its position accounting for profile grade and 20 transverse slope, and for ensuring correct placement during erection. 21

22 11. Erection sequence, including the method of lifting the panels, placing and 23

adjusting the panels to proper alignment and grade, and supporting the 24 panels during leveling and grouting operations. 25

26 12. Method for forming the grout pad on the exterior face of the prestressed 27

concrete girder flange, if an alternative method is proposed, and at the 28 interior face of the stay-in-place panel to the dimensions detailed in the 29 Plans. 30

31 6-02.3(9)E.GR6 32

Finishing 33 34 6-02.3(9)E.INST1.GR6 35

Section 6-02.3(9)E is supplemented with the following: 36 37 6-02.3(9)E.OPT6.GB6 38

(September 8, 2020) 39 The Contractor shall furnish a Class 2 surface finish, as specified in Section 6-40 02.3(14)B, on all surfaces of the precast prestressed concrete stay-in-place 41 panels, except as otherwise noted. The top surface of all panels shall be 42 textured using a metal tined comb. It shall leave striations in the fresh concrete 43 ¼-inch deep by at least 1/8-inch wide, spaced at 2 to 3 times the groove width 44 apart, and oriented perpendicular to the prestressing strand. The timing and 45 method used shall produce the required texture without displacing larger 46 particles of aggregate. Areas of mortar buildup more than 1/4 inch above the top 47 surface of the panel shall be removed. 48

49


6-02.3(9)F.GR6 1 Tolerances 2

3 6-02.3(9)F.INST1.GR6 4

Section 6-02.3(9)F is supplemented with the following: 5 6 6-02.3(9)F.OPT1.GB6 7

(September 8, 2020) 8 The precast prestressed concrete stay-in-place panels shall not exceed the 9 following scalar tolerances: 10

11

Length (perpendicular to strands): 3/16 inch 12 13

Width (parallel to strands): 1/4 inch 14 15 Thickness: + 1/4, -1/8 inch 16 17

Squareness (difference in diagonal lengths): 1/4 inch 18 per 5 feet, 19

1/2" max. 20 21

Vertical location of strand group C.G.: 1/16 inch 22 23

Vertical location of individual strands: 1/8 inch 24 25

Horizontal location of strands: 1/4 inch 26 27

Strand or bar projection from ends: 1/2 inch 28 29 Camber (either upward or downward) ± 1/4 inch 30 at time of placement on structure: per ten feet 31

32 Precast prestressed concrete stay-in-place panels with tolerances exceeding 33 those specified above, or with hairline cracks visibly apparent radiating from the 34 strand at the end of the panel and extending more than three inches along the 35 panel will be subject to evaluation by the Engineer for possible rejection. 36

37 6-02.3(9)G.GR6 38

Handling and Storage 39 40 6-02.3(9)G.INST1.GR6 41

Section 6-02.3(9)G is supplemented with the following: 42 43 6-02.3(9)G.OPT6.GB6 44

(September 8, 2020) 45 Precast prestressed concrete stay-in-place panels shall be maintained in a flat 46 and level position, without any twisting, at all times. Supports shall be oriented 47 transverse to the prestressed strands, extend the full width of the panel, and be 48 located in a manner to minimize elastic and time-dependent deformation of the 49 panels. 50 51


Unloading and reloading at a site other than the bridge site will be permitted only 1 under the direct supervision of the Engineer. The panels shall not be stacked, 2 unless otherwise allowedby the Engineer. If such permission is granted, the 3 panel supports shall be in the same vertical plane and shall be of sufficient height 4 to prevent damage to the lifting bar loops. The Contractor shall have received 5 the Engineer’s verification that the bottom panel of the stack is flat and level, 6 without any twisting, prior to stacking additional panels. The Contractor shall 7 not stack panels on top of adjacent girders of the structure. 8

9 6-02.3(9)I.GR6 10

Erection 11 12 6-02.3(9)I.INST1.GR6 13

Section 6-02.3(9)I is supplemented with the following: 14 15 6-02.3(9)I.OPT6.GB6 16

(September 8, 2020) 17 The precast prestressed concrete stay-in-place panels shall be at least 60 days 18 old at the time of placing bridge deck concrete. The Contractor shall place the 19 panels atop the prestressed girders as shown in the Plans, adjusting the leveling 20 bolts as required to match the level of adjacent panels and accommodate 21 camber. 22 23 The grout pad shall be placed after the panels have been fully adjusted for grade 24 and camber. The exposed portion of the grout pad forms that are intended to 25 be left in place permanently shall be tinted to match the color of the adjacent 26 concrete surfaces and shall be secured with an acceptedadhesive or other 27 method as acceptedby the Engineer. 28 29 Prior to placing the bridge deck steel reinforcing bars and concrete, the 30 Contractor shall place a backer rod at the intersection between panels as shown 31 in the Plans. All intersections between panels shall be sealed to prevent leakage 32 during concrete placement. Prior to placing the bridge deck concrete, the 33 surface of the panels shall be cleaned of all foreign materials and saturated with 34 water for a minimum of 4 hours before fresh concrete is placed. 35

36 6-02.3(10).GR6 37

Bridge Decks and Bridge Approach Slabs 38 39 6-02.3(10)D.GR6 40

Concrete Placement, Finishing, and Texturing 41 42 6-02.3(10)D.INST1.GR6 43

Section 6-02.3(10)D is supplemented with the following: 44 45 6-02.3(10)D.OPT1.GB6 46

(August 4, 2008) 47 Repairing Slab Left Exposed After Removing Existing Curb or Sidewalk 48 The concrete exposed by the removal of the existing curb or sidewalk shall be 49 removed to a depth of 1-inch below finished grade or to the top of the existing 50 roadway deck steel reinforcing bars, whichever is less. The Contractor shall not 51


remove concrete below the top of the existing steel reinforcing bars. The 1 Contractor shall not damage the bond between the existing steel reinforcing bars 2 and the concrete. 3 4 After roughening, cleaning and wetting the surface in accordance with Section 5 6-02.3(12), the Contractor shall place concrete over the surface to the finish 6 grade of the adjacent concrete roadway deck using a modified Class 4000 7 concrete mix. The maximum aggregate size in the modified Class 4000 8 concrete mix shall be 3/8 inch. The finished portion of the deck shall have the 9 same texture, slope and grade as that of the existing deck. 10

11 6-02.3(10)D.OPT2.GB6 12

(August 4, 2008 13 Repairing Slab Left Exposed After Removing Existing Curb and Railbase 14 After roughening and cleaning the concrete exposed by the removal of the 15 existing curb and railbase, that portion of the exposed surface not covered by 16 the new traffic barrier shall be coated with epoxy mortar and finished to have the 17 same texture, slope and grade as that of the existing deck. 18

19 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3.GB6 20

(August 3, 2015) 21 Bridge Drain Risers 22 The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the method 23 of removing the bridge drain grate nipple extrusion, the method of grinding the 24 existing curb as necessary for bridge drain riser installation, and the method of 25 cleaning the existing drain casting surfaces in contact with the drain risers. The 26 shop drawings and weld procedures for the drain riser assemblies shall be 27 submitted in accordance with Sections 6-03.3(7) and 6-03.3(25). 28 29 The existing bridge drain grate bolt, debris from removing the nipple extrusion 30 and cleaning the drain casting contact surfaces, and all debris in the bridge drain 31 cavity, shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 2-02.3. 32 33 After cleaning the bridge drain casting contact surfaces, the Contractor shall 34 install the spacer bars and riser bars of the bridge drain riser assembly as shown 35 in the Plans. 36 37 All exposed surfaces of the spacer bars and riser bars following installation shall 38 be painted with two coats of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)F. Each coat 39 shall have a minimum dry film thickness of two mils. 40

41 6-02.3(10)D.OPT3(A).GB6 42

(August 4, 2008) 43 A minimum of four slotted holes, each 2 inches long and 3/4 inches high, shall 44 be provided on each bridge drain riser. The slotted holes shall be located at the 45 bottom of the riser, two on the traffic side of the assembly and one each on the 46 short ends of the assembly. Risers shall be installed to be flush with the 47 proposed roadway profile and shall maintain uniform contact with the existing 48 drain. This portion of work shall be completed prior to the installation of the 49 membrane waterproofing. 50 51


The membrane waterproofing shall extend to the bottom of and all around the 1 bridge drain riser, except that the Contractor shall ensure that the slotted holes 2 of the bridge drain riser assembly remain open and unplugged by the membrane 3 waterproofing. Water seeping under the overlay shall be allowed to drain 4 through the slotted holes and into the bridge drains. 5 6 After all the items of work on this project have been completed, the Contractor 7 shall clean and flush all the bridge drains. 8

9 6-02.3(10)D.OPT5.GB6 10

(August 3, 2015) 11 Plugging Existing Bridge Drain 12 The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the method 13 and materials used to plug the existing bridge drains specified in the Plans to be 14 plugged. The submittal shall include the following: 15

16 1. Material used to plug the drain outlet, and method of securing the 17

plug in position. 18 19 2. The type of concrete material used to fill the drain cavity. 20 21 3. The method used to remove the exposed drainpipe, if removal is 22

specified in the Plans. 23 24 All cut, damaged, and exposed metal surfaces to remain, including the drain 25 outlet plug if metal components are used, shall be painted with two coats of paint 26 conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)F. Each coat shall have a minimum dry film 27 thickness of two mils. 28

29 When the removal of exposed drainpipe is specified in the Plans, the Contractor 30 shall remove the embedded anchors a minimum of one inch beneath the existing 31 concrete surface. The void left by removal of the embedded anchors shall be 32 filled with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2). The mortar shall match the 33 color of the existing concrete surface as near as practicable. 34

35 All materials removed from the bridge drains specified in the Plans to be plugged 36 shall be disposed of as specified in Section 2-02.3. 37

38 6-02.3(10)D.OPT12.GB6 39

(April 6, 2015) 40 Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain 41 The Contractor shall core drill drain holes through the bridge deck of the bridges 42 and in the locations shown in the Plans. The Contractor shall grind the concrete 43 bridge deck to provide a taper at the top of the cored hole if shown in the Plans. 44 The Contractor shall contain, collect and dispose of the concrete cores and 45 debris in accordance with Section 2-02.3. 46 47 The Contractor shall coat the surfaces of the cored holes with epoxy bonding 48 agent, and shall set a bridge deck drain pipe sleeve in place as shown in the 49 Plans. The Contractor shall ensure that the void between the cored hole surface 50 and the outside of the pipe sleeve is completely filled with epoxy bonding agent. 51


The Contractor shall take appropriate measures to prevent the epoxy bonding 1 agent from escaping from the void and shall secure the pipe sleeve in position 2 until the epoxy bonding agent is cured. 3

4 6-02.3(10)F.GR6 5

Bridge Approach Slab Orientation and Anchors 6 7 6-02.3(10)F.INST1.GR6 8

Section 6-02.3(10)F is supplemented with the following: 9 10 6-02.3(10)F.OPT2.GB6 11

(August 4, 2008) 12 The pavement end of the bridge approach slab shall be constructed parallel to 13 the pavement seat. 14

15 6-02.3(10)F.OPT3.FB6 16

(August 4, 2008) 17 The pavement end of the bridge approach slab shall be constructed parallel to 18 the pavement seat for bridge(s) No. *** $$1$$ ***. The pavement end of the 19 bridge approach slab shall be constructed normal to the roadway center line for 20 bridge(s) No. *** $$2$$ ***. 21

22 6-02.3(13).GR6 23

Expansion Joints 24 25 6-02.3(13).INST1.GR6 26

Section 6-02.3(13) is supplemented with the following: 27 28 6-02.3(13).OPT7.GB6 29

Expansion Joint Modification 30 31 6-02.3(13).OPT7(B).GB6 32

(April 6, 2015) 33 Expansion Joint Demolition Plan 34 The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings showing the method of 35 removing the specified portions of the existing bridge expansion joints. The 36 Working Drawings shall show the sequence of demolition and removal, the type 37 of equipment to be used in all demolition and removal operations, and details of 38 the methods and equipment used for containment, collection, and disposal of all 39 debris. The Working Drawings shall show all stages of demolition. 40

41 6-02.3(13).OPT7(C).GB6 42

(April 6, 2015) 43 Joint Preparation and Installation Procedure 44 The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the sealant 45 manufacturer's recommended joint preparation and installation procedure. 46

47


6-02.3(13).OPT7(D).FB6 1 (April 6, 2015) 2 Field Measuring Existing Bridge Expansion Joints 3 The Contractor shall field measure the following dimensions of the existing 4 bridge expansion joints of Bridge No(s). *** $$1$$ ***: 5 6

1. Length along the roadway surface and the horizontal and vertical 7 surfaces of the concrete curb. 8

9 2. Opening width at both curb lines and at the centerline of the roadway 10

surface. 11 12 The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the field 13 measured dimensions. 14

15 6-02.3(13).OPT7(E).FB6 16

(April 6, 2015) 17 Removing Portions of Existing Bridge Expansion Joints 18 The Contractor shall remove all concrete, expansion joint materials, overlay, dirt 19 and debris at the bridge expansion joints of Bridge No(s). *** $$1$$ *** within 20 the blockout dimensions shown in the Plans. 21 22 Concrete removal shall conform to Section 2-02.3(2)A2 and the following 23 restriction on power driven tools: 24 25

1. Jack hammers no heavier than the nominal 30 pound class. 26 27 2. Chipping hammers no heavier than the nominal 15 pound class. 28

29 No other power driven equipment shall be used to remove concrete in the vicinity 30 of the bridge expansion joints. The power driven tools shall be operated at 31 angles less than 45 degrees as measured from the surface of the deck to the 32 tool. 33 34 The Contractor shall dispose of all materials removed from the bridge expansion 35 joints in accordance with Section 2-02.3. 36 37 For polyester concrete headers, or elastomeric concrete headers, the Contractor 38 shall clean and prepare all existing concrete surfaces bonding to the header in 39 accordance with the Polyester Concrete or Elastomeric Concrete subsection, 40 respectively, to Section 6-02.3 as supplemented in these Special Provisions. 41 For concrete headers, the Contractor shall clean and prepare all existing 42 concrete surfaces bonding to the header in accordance with Section 6-43 02.3(12)B. 44

45 6-02.3(13).OPT7(F).GB6 46

(April 6, 2015) 47 Drilling Holes and Setting Steel Reinforcing Bars 48 The Contractor shall drill holes for, and set, steel reinforcing bars into the existing 49 concrete as shown in the Plans in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)C as 50 supplemented in these Special Provisions. 51


1 6-02.3(13).OPT7(G).GB6 2

(April 6, 2015) 3 Placing Polyester Concrete or Elastomeric Concrete Headers 4 The Contractor shall form the polyester concrete or the elastomeric concrete 5 headers in accordance with either the Polyester Concrete or the Elastomeric 6 Concrete subsection to Section 6-02.3 as supplemented in these Special 7 Provisions. The Contractor shall remove all forms from the bridge expansion 8 joints after casting and curing the polyester concrete or the elastomeric concrete 9 headers. 10

11 6-02.3(13).OPT7(H).GB6 12

(September 8, 2020) 13 Placing Concrete Headers 14 The Contractor shall form, cast, and cure, the concrete headers in accordance 15 with Section 6-02.3 and as shown in the Plans. Unless the Plans or Special 16 Provisions specify a different strength, the concrete headers shall have attained 17 a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi before the Contractor may allow 18 traffic to pass across the expansion joint. 19

20 6-02.3(13).OPT7(I).GB6 21

(September 8, 2020) 22 Placing Expansion Joint Sealant 23 The Contractor shall have the services of a qualified sealant manufacturer's 24 technical representative physically present at the job site to assist in assuring 25 the proper installation of the rapid cure silicone sealant, provide technical 26 assistance for the use of the joint sealant, train the Contractor's personnel 27 installing the joint sealant, and to observe and inspect the installation of at least 28 the first complete joint. 29 30 The joint sealant shall not be placed against concrete until at least seven days 31 after concrete placement. The joint sealant shall not be placed against polyester 32 concrete or elastomeric concrete until a time period recommended by the 33 sealant manufacturer. 34 35 The Contractor shall clean the bridge expansion joints of all forms, dirt, form oil, 36 grease, and other deleterious material. The Contractor shall clean and prepare 37 the entire joint surface receiving the joint sealant in accordance with the 38 manufacturer’s joint preparation procedure, and as recommended by the 39 sealant manufacturer's technical representative, including two stage abrasive 40 blasting surface preparation and compressed air cleaning. All steel surfaces to 41 be in contact with the joint sealant shall be cleaned to an SSPC-SP10 condition. 42 The joint receiving the sealant shall be sound, clean, dry, and frost free. 43 44 After the cleaned and prepared joint has received the Engineer's acceptance for 45 joint dimensions, alignment, and preparation, the Contractor shall apply the 46 primer, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer, to all surfaces to be in 47 contact with the joint sealant. The primer shall dry and cure for the time period 48 recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the surface type. 49 50


After the primer is cured, the Contractor shall place the backer rod, and place 1 the rapid cure silicone sealant in accordance with the joint installation procedure. 2 3 If the joint width at the time of installation is less than 1-inch or greater than three 4 inches, the Contractor shall not proceed with the expansion joint modification 5 until the installation procedure is revised as recommended by the sealant 6 manufacturer's technical representative. 7 8 After installing the rapid cure silicone sealant, the Contractor shall flood the joint 9 area with water. If leakage is detected, the bridge expansion joint system shall 10 be repaired by the Contractor, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 11

12 6-02.3(13).OPT7(J).GB6 13

(September 8, 2020) 14 Placing Expansion Joint Sealant 15 The Contractor shall have the services of a qualified sealant manufacturer's 16 technical representative physically present at the job site to assist in assuring 17 the proper installation of the rapid cure silicone sealant, provide technical 18 assistance for the use of the joint sealant, train the Contractor's personnel 19 installing the joint sealant, and to observe and inspect the installation of at least 20 the first complete joint. 21 22 Prior to scarifying the concrete deck for the modified concrete overlay, the 23 Contractor shall remove all expansion joint materials and debris from the 24 existing expansion joints, and shall dispose of these materials and debris as 25 specified in Section 2-02.3. 26 27 Prior to placing the modified concrete overlay, the Contractor shall install a 28 temporary form as shown in the Plans to fill the expansion joint gap. The 29 temporary form shall preserve the expansion joint gap during the modified 30 concrete overlay placement, and shall not damage the joint or the concrete 31 overlay upon removal. The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawing 32 consisting of the type of temporary form material, and the method of installation 33 and removal. 34 35 The joint sealant shall not be placed against concrete (including concrete 36 overlay except for polyester concrete overlay) until at least seven days after 37 concrete placement. 38 39 After placing the modified concrete overlay and rounding the corner of the 40 overlay at the joints with a 3/8 inch radius, the Contractor shall clean the bridge 41 expansion joints of all temporary forms, dirt, form oil, grease, and other 42 deleterious material. The Contractor shall clean and prepare the entire joint 43 surface receiving the joint sealant in accordance with the manufacturer’s joint 44 preparation procedure, and as recommended by the sealant manufacturer's 45 technical representative, including two stage abrasive blasting surface 46 preparation and compressed air cleaning. All steel surfaces to be in contact with 47 the joint sealant shall be cleaned to an SSPC-SP10 condition. The joint 48 receiving the sealant shall be sound, clean, dry, and frost free. 49 50


After the cleaned and prepared joint has received the Engineer's acceptance for 1 joint dimensions, alignment, and preparation, the Contractor shall apply the 2 primer, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer, to all surfaces to be in 3 contact with the joint sealant. The primer shall dry and cure for the time period 4 recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the surface type. 5 6 After the primer is cured, the Contractor shall place the backer rod, and place 7 the rapid cure silicone sealant in accordance with the joint installation procedure. 8 9 If the joint width at the time of installation is less than 1-inch or greater than three 10 inches, the Contractor shall not proceed with the expansion joint modification 11 until the installation procedure is revised as recommended by the sealant 12 manufacturer's technical representative and as approved by the Engineer. 13 14 After installing the rapid cure silicone sealant, the Contractor shall flood the joint 15 area with water. If leakage is detected, the bridge expansion joint system shall 16 be repaired by the Contractor, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 17

18 6-02.3(13)C.GR6 19

Modular Expansion Joint System 20 21 6-02.3(13)C.INST1.GR6 22


(September 8, 2020) 26 Acceptable Manufacturers 27 The following manufacturers are known to have prequalified modular expansion 28 joint system details by successfully completing fatigue testing in accordance with 29 Section 6-02.3(13)C: 30

31 1. The D.S. Brown Company 32

P.O. Box 158 33 300 E. Cherry Street 34 North Baltimore, Ohio 45872-0158 35 Tel. (419) 257-3561 36 Fax (419) 257-2200 37 www.dsbrown.com 38

39 2. Watson Bowman ACME Corporation 40

95 Pineview Drive 41 Amherst, New York 14228-2166 42 Tel. (716) 691-7566 43 Fax (716) 691-9239 44 www.wbacorp.com 45

46 3. Mageba USA, LLC 47

575 Lexington Ave FI-4 48 New York, New York 10022-6146 49 Tel. (212) 644-3335 50 Fax (212) 644-3339 51

http://www.dsbrown.com/

http://www.wbacorp.com/


www.magebausa.com 1 2 Design Axle Loads and Impact Factors 3 The vertical load range for fatigue design shall be a 32.0 kip tandem. This 4 tandem shall be taken as two 16.0 kip axles spaced four feet apart. Only one of 5 these tandem axles must be considered in the design, unless the joint opening 6 exceeds four feet. The load range shall be increased by the dynamic load 7 allowance (Impact Factor) of 75%. Load factors shall be applied in accordance 8 with Table 3.4.1-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, current 9 edition and latest interims. 10 11 The vertical load for strength design shall be a 50.0 kip tandem. This tandem 12 shall be taken as two 25.0 kip axles spaced four feet apart. Only one of these 13 tandem axles must be considered in the design, unless the joint opening 14 exceeds four feet. This load shall be increased by the dynamic load allowance 15 (Impact Factor) of 75%. Load factors shall be applied in accordance with Table 16 3.4.1-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, current edition and 17 latest interims. 18 19 The horizontal load range for fatigue design shall be *** $$1$$ *** percent of the 20 amplified vertical load range (LL+IM) specified above. For modular expansion 21 joint systems installed on vertical grades in excess of five percent, the horizontal 22 component of the amplified vertical load range (LL+IM) specified above shall be 23 added to this horizontal load range. 24 25 The horizontal load for strength design shall be 20 percent of the amplified 26 vertical load (LL+IM) specified above. For modular expansion joint systems 27 installed on vertical grades in excess of five percent, the horizontal component 28 of the amplified vertical load (LL+IM) specified above shall be added to this 29 horizontal load. 30 31 Fatigue Testing Laboratory 32 The following facilities are known to be capable of performing the fatigue testing 33 specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C: 34

35 1. Structural Engineering Testing Laboratory (SETL) 36

University of Washington 37 Seattle, WA 38 SETL Director: 39

Dr. Dawn Lehman: (206) 715-2108 40 SETL Manager 41

Vince Chaijaroen: (206) 543-7433 42 43 2. Bowen Laborabory 44

Purdue University 45 West Lafayette, IN 46 Director of Bowen Laboratory: 47

Dr. Amit Varma: (765) 496-3419 48 49

3. ATLSS Engineering Research Center 50 Lehigh University 51

http://www.magebausa.com/


Bethlehem, PA 1 ATLSS Engineering Research Center Director: 2

Dr. Richard Sause: (610) 758-3565 3 ATLSS Engineering Research Center Administrative Director: 4

Dr. Chad Kusco: (610) 758-5299 5 6 6-02.3(14).GR6 7

Finishing Concrete Surfaces 8 9 6-02.3(14)C.GR6 10

Pigmented Sealer Materials 11 12 6-02.3(14)C.INST1.GR6 13

Section 6-02.3(14)C is supplemented with the following: 14 15 6-02.3(14)C.OPT1.GB6 16

(April 6, 2009) 17 The color of the pigmented sealer shall be Washington Gray. 18

19 6-02.3(14)C.OPT2.GB6 20

(April 6, 2009) 21 The color of the pigmented sealer shall be Mt. St. Helens Gray. 22

23 6-02.3(14)C.OPT3.GB6 24

(April 6, 2009) 25 The color of the pigmented sealer shall be Mt. Baker Gray. 26

27 6-02.3(14)C.OPT4.GB6 28

(April 6, 2009) 29 The color of the pigmented sealer shall be Cascade Green. 30

31 6-02.3(14)C.OPT5.FB6 32

(April 6, 2009) 33 The color for the following structure feature(s) shall match the specified color(s): 34 35

Structure and Feature Pigmented Sealer Color 36 *** $$1$$ *** *** $$2$$ *** 37

38 6-02.3(17).GR6 39

Falsework and Formwork 40 41 6-02.3(17)C.GR6 42

Falsework and Formwork at Special Locations 43 44 6-02.3(17)C.INST1.GR6 45


(September 3, 2019) 49 The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Railroad Company for the 50 Contractor’s falsework openings over railroad tracks. The Contractor shall notify 51


the Railroad Company at least *** $$1$$ *** working days prior to erecting 1 falsework over a track, and shall include the dimensions of the opening and the 2 duration of the restricted clearance in the submittal. 3

4 6-02.3(17)K.GR6 5

Concrete Forms on Steel Spans 6 7 6-02.3(17)K.INST1.GR6 8

The first paragraph of Section 6-02.3(17)K is revised to read as follows: 9 10 6-02.3(17)K.OPT1.GB6 11

(August 3, 2015) 12 Except as otherwise specified, concrete forms on all steel structures shall be 13 removable and shall not remain in place. Where needed, the forms shall have 14 openings for truss or girder members. Each opening shall be large enough to 15 leave at least 1-1/2 inches between the concrete and steel on all sides of the 16 steel member after the forms have been removed. Unit contract prices cover all 17 costs related to these openings. 18 19 Permanent metal forms may be used to form that portion of the concrete slab 20 inside the webs of the steel box girders, subject to the following requirements: 21

22 1. Metal forms shall be 18 gage minimum thickness, zinc coated, steel 23

sheet conforming to ASTM A 653 Coating Designation G 210. All 24 accessories shall conform to ASTM A 36 or Section 9-06.1 with a zinc 25 coating of 2.0 ounces per square foot. 26

27 2. Forms shall be designed by the Contractor to support the plastic 28

concrete, metal forms, steel reinforcing bars, and a construction live 29 load of 60 pounds per square foot. Deflection of the metal form shall 30 not exceed 1/360 of the span. Camber of the metal form shall not 31 exceed the anticipated deflection. The working unit stress shall not 32 exceed 0.725 of the specified yield strength of the metal form 33 material. 34

35 3. The metal forms shall provide for the full depth of the deck slab above 36

the uppermost portions of the form. Bottom transverse steel 37 reinforcing bars of the deck slab shall be at least 1 inch clear of the 38 metal forms at all points. Forms or supports shall not be welded to 39 girder flanges. 40

41 4. The bridge deck concrete shall be placed continuously between the 42

transverse construction joints shown in the Plans, except in an 43 emergency when the Engineer authorizes an interruption in the 44 concrete placement. In such an emergency, the Contractor shall 45 construct a transverse joint at the bottom of a flute and shall field drill 46 1/4 inch weep holes through the metal form at 12 inch centers along 47 the line of the joint. 48

49


5. All zinc coating on exposed metal form damaged or removed during 1 construction shall be repaired with one coat of paint conforming to 2 Section 9-08.1(2)B, two mils minimum dry film thickness. 3

4 6. Should the Engineer determine that inspection of the underside of the 5

hardened slab is warranted, the Contractor shall remove at least one 6 section of metal form in each span at no extra cost to the Contracting 7 Agency. If excessive honeycomb or other defects are found, the 8 Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer, remove additional form 9 sections at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency, and 10 shall revise concrete placing methods as required to produce sound 11 concrete. All unacceptable concrete shall be removed or repaired. 12

13 7. Complete layout, details, and a description of materials, for the 14

permanent metal forms shall be included in the Contractor’s 15 falsework and formwork submittal as specified in Section 6-02.3(16). 16

17 8. No adjustment will be made to the lump sum contract price for 18

“Bridge Deck - ____” for additional quantities of materials required 19 because of the use of the permanent forms. 20

21 6-02.3(18).GR6 22

Placing Anchor Bolts 23 24 6-02.3(18).INST1.GR6 25


(January 3, 2011) 29 Resin Bonded Anchors 30 The embedment depth of the anchors shall be as specified in the Plans. If the 31 embedment depth of the anchor is not specified in the Plans then the embedment 32 depth shall be as specified in the table of minimum and maximum torque below. 33 34 The anchors shall be installed in accordance with the resin manufacturer's written 35 procedure. 36

37 Holes shall be drilled as specified in the Plans. Holes may be drilled with a rotary 38 hammer drill when core drilling is not specified in the Plans. If holes are core drilled, 39 the sides of the holes shall be roughened with a rotary hammer drill after core drilling. 40 41 Holes shall be prepared in accordance with the resin manufacturer's 42 recommendations and shall meet the minimum requirements as specified herein. 43 Holes drilled into concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of debris, dust, and laitance 44 prior to installing the threaded rod and resin bonding material. Holes shall not have 45 any standing liquid at the time of installation of the threaded anchor rod. 46 47 The anchor nuts shall be tightened to the following torques when the embedment 48 equals or exceeds the minimum embedment specified. 49

50 51


Anchor Diameter

(inch)

Minimum Torque (ft-lbs)

Maximum Torque (ft-lbs)

Minimum Embedment

(Inch)

3/8 12 18 3-3/8

1/2 22 35 4-1/2

5/8 55 80 5-5/8

3/4 106 140 6-3/4

7/8 165 190 7-7/8

1 195 225 9

1-1/4 370 525 11-1/4

1 When the anchor embedment depth is less than the minimum values specified, the 2 anchor nuts shall be tightened to the torque values specified in the Plans, or as 3 recommended by the resin bonded anchor system manufacturer and approved by 4 the Engineer. 5

6 6-02.3(24).GR6 7

Reinforcement 8 9 6-02.3(24)C.GR6 10

Placing and Fastening 11 12 6-02.3(24)C.INST1.GR6 13

Section 6-02.3(24)C is supplemented with the following: 14 15 6-02.3(24)C.OPT1.GB6 16

(September 8, 2020) 17 Drilling Holes for, and Setting, Steel Reinforcing Bar Dowels 18 Where called for in the Plans, holes shall be drilled into existing concrete to the 19 size and dimension shown in the Plans. The Contractor may use any method 20 for drilling the holes provided the method selected does not damage the 21 concrete and the steel reinforcing bar that is to remain. Core drilling will be 22 required when specifically noted in the Plans. 23 24 The Contractor shall exercise care in locating and drilling the holes to avoid 25 damage to existing steel reinforcing bars and concrete. Location of the holes 26 may be shifted slightly with the acceptance of the Engineer in order to avoid 27 damaging the existing steel reinforcing bars. All damage caused by the 28 Contractor's operations shall be repaired by the Contractor in accordance with 29 Section 1-07.13. 30 31 Steel reinforcing bars shall be set into the holes noted in the Plans with epoxy 32 resin. The holes shall be cleaned before placing the resin. 33 34 The Contractor shall demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that the 35 method used for setting the steel reinforcing bars completely fills the void 36 between the steel reinforcing bar and the concrete with epoxy resin. Dams shall 37 be placed at the front of the holes to confine the epoxy and shall not be removed 38 until the epoxy has cured in the hole. 39

40


6-02.3(25).GR6 1

Prestressed Concrete Girders 2 3 6-02.3(26).GR6 4

Cast-in-Place Prestressed Concrete 5 6 6-02.3(26).INST1.GR6 7

The third paragraph of Section 6-02.3(26) is revised to read as follows: 8 9 6-02.3(26).OPT1.GB6 10

(January 4, 2010) 11 Before tensioning, the Contractor shall remove all side forms from the girders. The 12 Contractor shall not release the falsework supporting the superstructure, and shall 13 not place construction loads and other live loads on the superstructure, until the job-14 cured 2-inch grout cubes, fabricated in accordance with WSDOT TM 813, reach a 15 minimum compressive strength of 800 psi in accordance with WSDOT FOP for 16 AASHTO T 106. 17

18 6-02.4.GR6 19

Measurement 20 21 6-02.4.INST1.GR6 22 Section 6-02.4 is supplemented with the following: 23 24 6-02.4.OPT1.FB6 25

(September 8, 2020) 26 *** $$1$$ *** contains the following approximate quantities of materials and work: 27

28 *** $$2$$ *** 29

30 The quantities are listed only for the convenience of the Contractor in determining the 31 volume of work involved and are not guaranteed to be accurate. The prospective bidders 32 shall verify these quantities before submitting a bid. No adjustments other than for 33 accepted changes will be made in the lump sum Contract price for *** $$3$$ *** even 34 though the actual quantities required may deviate from those listed. 35

36 6-02.4.OPT3.FB6 37

(September 8, 2020) 38 “Modular Expansion Joint System___” contains the following approximate quantities of 39 materials and work: 40

41 *** $$1$$ *** 42

43 The quantities are listed only for the convenience of the Contractor in determining the 44 volume of work involved and are not guaranteed to be accurate. The prospective bidders 45 shall verify these quantities before submitting a bid. No adjustments other than for 46 accepted changes will be made in the applicable modular expansion joint system lump 47 sum Contract price for “Modular Expansion Joint System___” even though the actual 48 quantities required may deviate from those listed. 49

50


6-02.4.OPT8.FB6 1 (September 8, 2020) 2 Expansion joint modification contains the following approximate quantities of materials 3 and work: 4

5 *** $$1$$ *** 6

7 The quantities are listed only for the convenience of the Contractor in determining the 8 volume of work involved and are not guaranteed to be accurate. The prospective bidders 9 shall verify these quantities before submitting a bid. No adjustments other than for 10 accepted changes will be made in the lump sum Contract price for “Expansion Joint 11 Modification___” even though the actual quantities required may deviate from those 12 listed. 13

14 6-02.4.OPT24.GB6 15

(August 6, 2012) 16 Epoxy crack sealing will be measured by the linear foot along the sealed crack at the 17 concrete surface. 18

19 6-02.4.OPT26.GB6 20

(June 26, 2000) 21 Modify bridge drain will be measured per each for each bridge drain modified. 22

23 6-02.4.OPT27.GB6 24

(June 26, 2000) 25 Plugging existing bridge drain will be measured per each for each bridge drain plugged. 26

27 6-02.4.OPT32.GB6 28

(April 6, 2015) 29 Core drilled bridge deck drain will be measured per each for each bridge deck drain core 30 drilled and completed with a PVC pipe sleeve. 31

32 6-02.4.OPT43.GB6 33

(April 6, 2015) 34 Longitudinal seismic restrainer will be measured per each. 35

36 6-02.4.OPT44.FB6 37

(September 8, 2020) 38 Seismic retrofit contains the following approximate quantities of materials and work: 39

40 *** $$1$$ *** 41

42 The quantities are listed only for the convenience of the Contractor in determining the 43 volume of work involved and are not guaranteed to be accurate. The prospective bidders 44 shall verify these quantities before submitting a bid. No adjustments other than for 45 accepted changes will be made in the lump sum Contract price for “Seismic Retrofit - 46 _____” even though the actual quantities required may deviate from those listed. 47

48 6-02.4.OPT45.FB6 49

(September 8, 2020) 50 Column jacketing contains the following approximate quantities of materials and work: 51


1 *** $$1$$ *** 2

3 The quantities are listed only for the convenience of the Contractor in determining the 4 volume of work involved and are not guaranteed to be accurate. The prospective bidders 5 shall verify these quantities before submitting a bid. No adjustments other than for 6 accepted hanges will be made in the lump sum Contract price for “Column Jacketing - 7 _____” even though the actual quantities required may deviate from those listed. 8

9 6-02.5.GR6 10

Payment 11 12 6-02.5.INST3.GR6 13 The fifth and sixth bid items under Section 6-02.5 are supplemented with the following: 14 15 6-02.5.OPT20.GB6 16

(April 6, 2015) 17 The contract quantity specified for “Steel Reinf. Bar for Bridge” includes the quantity for 18 the epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bars located in the substructure of the bridge(s) 19 included in this project. 20

21 6-02.5.INST4.GR6 22 Section 6-02.5 is supplemented with the following: 23 24 6-02.5.OPT26.FB6 25

(August 2, 2010) 26 “Bridge Deck - _____”, lump sum. 27 The lump sum contract price for “Bridge Deck - _____” shall be full pay for constructing 28 the reinforced concrete portions of the steel bridge superstructure, including *** $$1$$ 29 ***. 30

31 6-02.5.OPT33.GB6 32

(April 6, 2015) 33 “Expansion Joint Modification ___”, lump sum. 34

35 6-02.5.OPT49.GB6 36

(August 1, 2011) 37 “Epoxy Crack Sealing”, per linear foot. 38 39 Payment for taking and submitting cores to the Engineer for testing, as specified by the 40 Engineer, will be by force account in accordance with Section 1-09.6. For the purpose of 41 providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an 42 amount for the item “Force Account Epoxy Crack Sealing Cores” in the bid proposal to 43 become a part of the total bid by the Contractor. 44

45 6-02.5.OPT51.GB6 46

(June 26, 2000) 47 “Modify Bridge Drain”, per each. 48

49 6-02.5.OPT52.GB6 50

(June 26, 2000) 51


“Plugging Existing Bridge Drain”, per each. 1 2 6-02.5.OPT53.FB6 3

(June 26, 2000) 4 All costs in connection with *** $$1$$ *** bridge drains as specified shall be included in 5 the unit contract price per square yard for *** $$2$$ ***. 6

7 6-02.5.OPT58.GB6 8

(April 6, 2015) 9 “Core Drilled Bridge Deck Drain”, per each. 10

11 6-02.5.OPT59.FB6 12

(April 6, 2015) 13 All costs in connection with constructing the core drilled bridge deck drains as specified 14 shall be included in the ***$$1$$***. 15

16 6-02.5.OPT71.GB6 17

(April 6, 2015) 18 “Longitudinal Seismic Restrainer”, per each. 19

20 6-02.5.OPT72.GB6 21

(April 6, 2015) 22 “Seismic Retrofit - _____”, lump sum. 23

24 6-02.5.OPT73.GB6 25

(April 6, 2015) 26 “Column Jacketing - _____”, lump sum. 27

28 6-02.5.OPT91.FB6 29

(June 26, 2000) 30

Bridge and Structures Minor Items 31 For the purpose of payment, such bridge and structures items as *** $$1$$ *** etc., for 32 which there is no pay item included in the proposal, are considered as bridge and 33 structures minor items. All costs in connection with furnishing and installing these bridge 34 and structures minor items as shown and noted in the Plans and as outlined in these 35 specifications and in the Standard Specifications shall be included in the *** $$2$$ *** 36

37 6-02.5.OPT92.FB6 38

(June 26, 2000) 39

Bridge Supported Utilities 40 All costs in connection with placing *** $$1$$ *** through the superstructure of *** $$2$$ 41 *** as shown in the Plans, including all *** $$3$$ ***, shall be included in the *** $$4$$. 42 *** 43

44 6-02.5.OPT93.GB6 45

(June 26, 2000) 46 No additional compensation will be made by reason of any delay or other expense to the 47 Contractor caused by coordination with the utility company or by installing utility company 48 furnished items. However, any unavoidable delays to the Contractor caused by 49 coordination with the utility company or resulting from installing utility company furnished 50 items will be adjusted in accordance with Section 1-08.8. 51


1


6-07.GR6 1

Painting 2 3 6-07.1.GR6 4

Description 5 6 6-07.1.INST1.GR6 7 Section 6-07.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 6-07.1.OPT1.FB6 10

(August 3, 2009) 11 This work shall consist of cleaning and painting all exposed metal surfaces of Bridge 12 No(s). *** $$1$$ ***, in accordance with Section 6-07.3(10), except as otherwise noted 13 below. 14 15 Portions of the structure(s) excluded from this work include: 16

17 *** $$2$$ *** 18

19 6-07.1.OPT2.FB6 20

(August 3, 2009) 21 This work shall consist of cleaning and painting the exposed timber surfaces of Bridge 22 No(s). *** $$1$$ ***, in accordance with Section 6-07.3(13) as supplemented in these 23 Special Provisions and as specified below: 24

25 *** $$2$$ *** 26

27 6-07.3.GR6 28


Painting Existing Steel Structures 32 33 6-07.3(10).INST1.GR6 34


(August 3, 2009) 38 The Contractor *** $$1$$ *** paint the existing utility company conduits attached to 39 the structure, such as sewer, water, gas and telephone. The Contractor shall protect 40 the utilities from damage due to operations on the bridges. 41

42 6-07.3(10).OPT2.GB6 43

(August 3, 2009) 44 Light fixtures and lenses, including navigation, aircraft, flag pole luminaire, and 45 luminaire light fixtures and lenses, shall not be painted and shall be kept clean from 46 paint. The Contractor shall remove all paint from the light fixtures and lenses due to 47 the painting operation. 48

49 6-07.3(10).OPT3.GB6 50

(August 3, 2009) 51


A portion of the work involved in this project is located over or near railroad facilities. 1 The Contractor shall exercise great care in all operations in order that no interruptions 2 or damage will occur to the railroad trains or facilities. The Contractor shall contact 3 the Railroad Company regarding the times and the conditions under which cleaning 4 and painting work over or adjacent to railroad tracks may be accomplished. 5

6 6-07.3(10).OPT4.GB6 7

(August 3, 2015) 8 In the cleaning operation, particular attention shall be paid to cleaning the grid deck. 9 Any means acceptable to the Engineer, in addition to flushing, as required to clean 10 dirt, oil and grease from the grid surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 shall be 11 used. 12

13 6-07.3(10)A.GR6 14

Containment 15 16 6-07.3(10)A.INST1.GR6 17

Section 6-07.3(10)A is supplemented with the following: 18 19 6-07.3(10)A.OPT1.GB6 20

(August 3, 2009) 21 The Contractor shall adequately protect all gears, machinery, mechanical 22 equipment, electrical equipment, navigation and clearance light lenses, motors, 23 sheaves and cables and all other equipment which might become damaged by 24 and during the cleaning and painting operations. Should the Contractor's 25 operation foul or otherwise contaminate the lubricated surfaces, the Contractor 26 shall, if directed by the Engineer, clean and relubricate the surfaces at the 27 Contractor's expense. 28

29 6-07.3(10)A.OPT2.FB6 30

(January 2, 2018September 7, 2021) 31 The following bridge(s) have a wind speed/gust threshold: 32 33

Bridge Wind Speed/Gust Threshold (miles per hour)

Bridge No(s). *** $$1$$ *** *** $$2$$ ***

34 Each day, the Contractor shall review the five-day wind speed/gust forecast for 35 each bridge site from the Western Region Headquarters of the National Weather 36 Service at www.wrh.noaa.gov. The Contractor shall lower or withdraw tarps, 37 plastic exterior, and other containment components presenting an exposed face 38 to the wind when either of the following apply: 39 40

1. When wind speeds or gusts exceeding the threshold are forecast by 41 the National Weather Service. 42

43 2. When the structure site weather station records wind speeds or gusts 44

exceeding the threshold. 45 46


The containment system may be restored after 2 hours without winds or gusts 1 exceeding the threshold, and no forecast of such wind speeds or gusts to return 2 within 24 hours. 3 4 Weather Station 5 Prior to installing any components of a containment system on a bridge with a 6 specified wind speed/gust threshold, the Contractor shall install a wireless 7 weather station on the bridge at a location acceptable to the Engineer. The 8 Contractor shall provide one of the following wireless weather station systems, 9 or an accepted equal: 10 11

1. Davis Instruments Vantage Pro2 model 06163. 12 13 2. Weather Hawk 916 Wireless Weather Station. 14 15 3. Columbia Weather Systems Capricom FLX. 16

17 The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of details of 18 the selected wireless weather station system, including installation and 19 operation details. The Contractor shall install wireless display console units for 20 both the Contracting Agency’s and the Contractor’s use at locations acceptable 21 to the Engineer. The Contractor shall protect the wireless weather station 22 system from damage during all paint removal, surface cleaning, and paint 23 application operations. 24 25 The Contractor shall maintain a log of daily weather data updated on a daily 26 basis. The log shall be available to the Engineer for review at any time during 27 the project. The weather data shall be tabulated in the form of a spreadsheet. 28 At a minimum, the weather data shall indicate the high and low temperature, 29 relative humidity, maximum wind speed and direction, wind gusts, and rainfall. 30 If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working 31 Drawing of weather data. Upon request, the Contractor shall provide wireless 32 access to the weather station data. 33 34 At the end of the Contract, the wireless weather station and all associated 35 system components shall be removed from the bridge and become the property 36 of the Contractor. 37

38 6-07.3(10)D.GR6 39

Surface Preparation Prior to Overcoat Painting 40 41 6-07.3(10)D.INST1.GR6 42

Section 6-07.3(10)D is supplemented with the following: 43 44 6-07.3(10)D.OPT1.FB6 45

(April 6, 2015) 46 The following steel surfaces of Bridge No(s). *** $$1$$ *** shall receive surface 47 preparation in accordance with SSPC SP1 followed by cleaning in accordance 48 with this Section: 49

50 *** $$2$$ *** 51


1 6-07.3(10)E.GR6 2

Surface Preparation - Full Paint Removal 3 4 6-07.3(10)E.INST1.GR6 5

Section 6-07.3(10)E is supplemented with the following: 6 7 6-07.3(10)E.OPT1.FB6 8

(April 5, 2010) 9 The following steel surfaces of Bridge No(s). *** $$1$$ *** shall receive full paint 10 removal surface preparation in accordance with this Section: 11

12 *** $$2$$ *** 13

14 6-07.3(10)I.GR6 15

Paint Color 16 17 6-07.3(10)I.INST1.GR6 18

Section 6-07.3(10)I is supplemented with the following: 19 20 6-07.3(10)I.OPT1.FB6 21

(August 3, 2009) 22 The color of the top coat, when dry, shall match *** $$1$$ ***. 23

24 6-07.3(10)N.GR6 25

Field Coating Application Methods 26 27 6-07.3(10)N.INST1.GR6 28

Section 6-07.3(10)N is supplemented with the following: 29 30 6-07.3(10)N.OPT1.GB6 31

(August 3, 2009) 32 Spray painting will be permitted for the application of paint to the surfaces of the 33 steel grid roadway decking and steel grid catwalks, provided every precaution 34 or means necessary to prevent any damage due to spraying operations or from 35 wind borne paint is taken, provided further that if satisfactory results are not, in 36 the opinion of the Engineer, obtained with the spraying application, the 37 Contractor shall revert to the use of brushes. In the event spray painting is used 38 on the steel grid roadway decking, the application shall be made only from the 39 underside of the roadway, and then only at such times as traffic has been 40 diverted to other lanes. A protective covering shall be placed immediately over 41 areas of the roadway decking being spray painted to prevent damage from wind 42 borne paint. 43

44 6-07.3(11).GR6 45

Painting or Powder Coating of Galvanized Surfaces 46 47 6-07.3(11).INST1.GR6 48



6-07.3(11).OPT1.FB6 1 (August 3, 2009) 2 The color of the finish coat, when dry, shall match *** $$1$$ *** 3

4

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


6-10.GR6 1

Concrete Barrier 2 3 6-10.3.GR6 4


Temporary Barrier 8 9 6-10.3(5).INST1.GR6 10

The first paragraph of Section 6-10.3(5) is revised to read: 11 12 6-10.3(5).OPT1.GR6 13

(February 3, 2020) 14 For temporary barrier, the Contractor shall use precast concrete barrier type F. 15 Temporary concrete barrier type F shall comply with Standard Plan requirements and 16 cross-sectional dimensions, except that: (1) it may be made in other lengths than 17 those shown in the Standard Plan, and (2) it may have permanent lifting holes no 18 larger than 4 inches in diameter or lifting loops. 19

20 6-10.3(5).INST2.GR6 21

The following sentence is inserted before the second to last sentence of the first 22 paragraph of Section 6-10.3(5): 23

24 6-10.3(5).OPT2.GR6 25

(September 30, 2020) 26 New Type 2 and Type 4 temporary precast concrete barrier shall not be fabricated 27 after December 31, 2019. 28

29 6-10.3(6).GR6 30

Placing Concrete Barrier 31 32 6-10.3(6).INST1.GR6 33


(March 13, 1995) 37 Precast barrier intended for permanent placement may be used at temporary 38 locations and will be considered temporary barrier until installed at a permanent 39 location. 40 41 Barrier damaged while being used at a temporary location shall not be reused at a 42 permanent location even though it has been repaired, and when no longer required 43 at a temporary location, shall become the property of the Contractor and removed 44 from the project. 45

46 6-10.5.GR6 47

Payment 48 49 6-10.5.INST1.GR6 50 Section 6-10.5 is supplemented with the following: 51


1 6-10.5.OPT1.GR6 2

(August 1, 2016) 3 The following paragraph is added immediately following the bid item, “Temporary Barrier”: 4 5

The unit contract price per linear foot for "Temporary Barrier" shall include all costs 6 for furnishing, placing, maintaining, replacing, and cleaning barrier delineation. 7

8 6-10.5.OPT2.FB6 9

(March 6, 2000) 10 All costs in connection with constructing *** $$1$$ *** barrier shall be included in the *** 11 $$2$$ ***. 12

13

Index - General Special Provisions Division 8 EGSP8.docx July 6September 7, 2021 Page 1

DIVISION8.GR8 Miscellaneous Construction 1 2 8-01.GR8 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control 3


6 8-01.1(1).GR8 Definitions 7 8

8-01.1(1).INST1.GR8 (Item 1C of Section 8-01.1(1) is revised to read) 9 Must use once preceding any of the following: 10

11 8-01.1(1).OPT1.GR8 (February 25, 2021) 12


8-01.1(1).INST2.GR8 (Item 2E of Section 8-01.1(1) is revised to read) 15 Must use once preceding any of the following: 16

17 8-01.1(1).OPT2.GR8 (February 25, 2021) 18



8-01.3(1).GR8 General 23 24

8-01.3(1).INST1.GR8 (The tenth paragraph of Section 8-01.3(1) is revised to 25 read) 26 Must use once preceding any of the following: 27

28 8-01.3(1).OPT1.GR8 (Erodible Soil Eastern Washington) 29

(January 25, 2010) 30 Use for projects east of the Cascade range in areas 31 receiving 12 inches or less annual precipitation. Do not 32 use if any portion of the project lies in areas that receive 33 more than 12 inches of annual precipitation. See 34 https://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/fulltext/Hydrauli35 cs/Wa_MeanAnnualPrecip.pdf. 36



8-01.3(1).OPT8.FR8 (Side Slope Treatment) 41 (April 1, 2002) 42 Use on projects where erodible soils are anticipated and 43 it is desired to have the newly exposed slopes walked 44 before final erosion control can be accomplished, in 45 accordance with recommendation from environmental 46 office. 47 (1 fill-in) 48

49 8-01.3(1)B.GR8 Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Lead 50

51 8-01.3(1)B.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(1)B is revised to read) 52



8-01.3(1)B.OPT1.GR8 (Non-Permit with ESC Lead) 1 (May 28, 2020) 2 Use on projects without a CSWGP but with ESC 3 Lead Item. 4

5 8-01.3(1)B.INST2.GR8 (The second sentence of the first paragraph of Section 6

8-01.3(1)B is revised to read) 7 Must use once preceding any of the following: 8

9 8-01.3(1)B.OPT2.GR8 (February 25, 2021) 10

Use in all projects. 11 Do not use with 8-01.3(1)B.OPT1.GR8. 12

13 8-01.3(1)B.INST3.GR8 (The second sentence of the second paragraph of 14

Section 8-01.3(1)B (excluding the numbered list) is 15 revised to read) 16 Must use once preceding any of the following: 17

18 8-01.3(1)B.OPT3.GR8 (February 25, 2021) 19

Use in all projects. 20 Do not use with 8-01.3(1)B.OPT1.GR8. 21 22

8-01.3(1)C.GR8 Water Management 23 24

8-01.3(1)C1.GR8 Disposal of Dewatering Water 25 26 8-01.3(1)C1.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(1)C1 is revised to read) 27


8-01.3(1)C1.OPT1.GR8 (February 25, 2021) 30 Use in all projects. 31

32 8-01.3(1)C4.GR8 Management of Off-Site Water 33 34 8-01.3(1)C4.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(1)C4 is supplemented with the 35


38 8-01.3(1)C4.OPT1.FR8 (Off-site stormwater routed through or around 39

Project site) 40 (August 6, 2012) 41 Use when there are known locations where 42 stormwater enters the project site and it is desired 43 to prevent this stormwater from flowing 44 uncontrolled through the project site. 45 (1 fill-in) 46

47 8-01.3(2).GR8 Temporary Seeding and Mulching 48

49 8-01.3(2)B.GR8 Temporary Seeding 50

51 8-01.3(2)B.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(2)B is supplemented with the 52



1 8-01.3(2)B.OPT1.FR8 (Composition, proportion, quality and application 2

rate of grass seed) 3 (August 4, 2014) 4 Use on projects where a common, non-native or 5 non-source-identified seed can be used. This mix 6 will generally be used within urban areas on small 7 areas of disturbance. The fill-ins for the seed 8 should be provided by the Region Landscape 9 Architect or Headquarters Roadside and Site 10 Development for regions without a Landscape 11 Architect. 12 (2 fill-ins) (Fill-ins with dollar signs only are to be 13 used as required) 14 15

8-01.3(2)B.OPT2.FR8 (Composition, proportion, quality and 16 application rate of grass seed) 17 (August 4, 2014) 18 Use in projects where the Region Landscape 19 Architect recommends source identified (local 20 genetics) native seed. The fill-ins should be 21 provided by the Region Landscape Architect or 22 Headquarters Roadside and Site Development for 23 regions without a Landscape Architect. 24 (3 fill-ins) (Fill-ins with dollar signs only are to be 25 used as required.) 26 27

8-01.3(2)B.OPT3.GR8 (Seeding by hand) 28 (September 3, 2019) 29 Use in projects with seeding and fertilizing of less 30 than 1 acre, the use of mechanical equipment 31 would not be cost effective, or on remote projects 32 with many small areas. 33 34

8-01.3(2)B.OPT4.FR8 (One application of fertilizer) 35 (January 3, 2006) 36 Use in projects requiring only one application of 37 fertilizer. 38 (4 fill-ins) (The fill-ins for the fertilizer itself should 39 be by consulting the State Horticulturist, the 40 Region Landscape Architect, or Headquarters 41 Roadside and Site Development. Fill-in $$4$$ 42 should be 2/3 the amount of nitrogen in fill-in 43 $$1$$.) 44 45

8-01.3(2)B.OPT8.FR8 (Composition, proportion, quality and application 46 rate of grass seed) 47 (August 4, 2014) 48 Use in projects where the Region Landscape 49 Architect recommends native seed that is not 50 source identified. The fill-ins should be provided 51 by the Region Landscape Architect or 52 Headquarters Roadside and Site Development for 53 regions without a Landscape Architect. 54


(3 fill-ins) 1 2

8-01.3(2)D.GR8 Temporary Mulching 3 4

8-01.3(2)D.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-01.3(2)D is supplemented with the 5 following) 6 Must use once preceding any of the following: 7

8 8-01.3(2)D.OPT1.FR8 (Type and rate of application of mulch) 9

(January 5, 2015) 10 Use in projects requiring the application of mulch 11 when the application rate per acre or the allowable 12 pounds in any single lift are revised from the 13 Standard Specifications. 14 (3 fill-ins) 15

16 8-02.GR8 Roadside Restoration 17




8-02.1.OPT1.GR8 (Removal of Buried Man-Made Debris) 24 (August 4, 2014) 25 Use on projects that include soil amendment, and/or 26 irrigation systems, and where man-made construction 27 debris is known or suspected to exist. Requires the 28 approval of the Region Construction Manager. Must include 29 8-02.3(5).OPT4.GR8 and 8-02.5.OPT2.GR8. 30

31 8-02.1.OPT2.GR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 32

(April 1, 2019) 33 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which have a 34 lack of organic matter and little to no bioactivity) using Biotic 35 Soil Amendments (BSAs). Should only be used if the soil is 36 determined to be deficient from the results of a soil organic 37 matter test or the soil analysis and the application of 38 compost or topsoil is not possible due to steepness or 39 access. Use requires the approval of the Region Landscape 40 Architect or the HQ Region Liaison Landscape Architect. 41 Must also use 8-02.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-02.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-42 02.4.OPT2.GR8, and 8-02.5.OPT4.FR8. 43

44 8-02.2.GR8 Materials 45 46

8-02.2.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-02.2 is supplemented with the following) 47 Must use once preceding the following: 48

49 8-02.2.OPT1.GR8 (Conservation Grade Plant Material) 50

(January 3, 2011) 51 Use in projects that include “conservation grade” plant 52 material in the plant list. Use requires approval of the 53


Region Landscape Architect or HQ Region Liaison 1 Landscape Architect. 2 3

8-02.2.OPT2.GR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 4 (April 1, 2019) 5 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which have a 6 lack of organic matter and little to no bioactivity) using Biotic 7 Soil Amendments (BSAs). Should only be used if the soil is 8 determined to be deficient from the results of a soil organic 9 matter test or the soil analysis and the application of 10 compost or topsoil is not possible due to steepness or 11 access. Use requires the approval of the Region Landscape 12 Architect or the HQ Region Liaison Landscape Architect. 13 Must also use 8-02.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-02.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-14 02.4.OPT2.GR8, and 8-02.5.OPT4.FR8. 15

16 8-02.2(9-14).GR8 (Erosion Control and Roadside Planting) 17

18 8-02.2(9-14).INST1.GR8 (Section 9-14 is supplemented with the following) 19


8-02.2(9-14).OPT1.FR8 (Weed Barrier Mats) 22 (January 3, 2011) 23 Use in projects requiring weed barrier mats. 24 (1 fill-in) Fill-in is the staple length. 25 Contact the Region Landscape Architect or HQ Region 26 Liaison Landscape Architect for fill-in information. 27

28 8-02.2(9-14.2).GR8 (Topsoil) 29

30 8-02.2(9-14.2(1)).GR8 (Topsoil Type A) 31

(Section 9-14.1(1) is supplemented with the 32 following) 33 Must use once preceding any of the following: 34

35 8-02.2(9-14.2(1)).OPT1.FR8 (February 25, 2021) 36

For use on projects where Topsoil Type A is 37 needed for stormwater BMPs and for plant 38 growth and establishment. Contact the 39 Landscape Architect for fill-ins and depth of 40 application. 41 (4 fill-ins) 42

43 8-02.2(9-14.5).GR8 (Mulch and Amendments) 44

45 8-02.2(9-14.5(8)).GR8 (Compost) 46

(Section 9-14.4(8) is supplemented with the 47 following) 48 Must use once preceding any of the following: 49

50 8-02.2(9-14.5(8)).OPT1.GR8 (January 3, 2010) 51

Use when the contract has less than100 52 yards of compost, or less than 30 working 53 days and 100 yards of compost or greater. 54


1 8-02.2(9-14.5(8)).OPT2.GR8 (September 3, 2019) 2

May be used to allow biosolids compost on 3 projects that do not use compost on 4 stormwater BMPs. Use with concurrence of 5 the Hydraulics Engineer. 6




8-02.3.OPT1.GR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 13 (April 1, 2019) 14 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which have a 15 lack of organic matter and little to no bioactivity) using Biotic 16 Soil Amendments (BSAs). Should only be used if the soil is 17 determined to be deficient from the results of a soil organic 18 matter test or the soil analysis and the application of 19 compost or topsoil is not possible due to steepness or 20 access. Use requires the approval of the Region Landscape 21 Architect or the HQ Region Liaison Landscape Architect. 22 Must also use 8-02.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-02.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-23 02.4.OPT2.GR8, and 8-02.5.OPT4.FR8. 24

25 8-02.3(4).GR8 Topsoil 26

27 8-02.3(4)A.GR8 Topsoil Type A 28

29 8-02.3(4)A.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-02.3(4)A is supplemented with the 30


33 8-02.3(4)A.OPT1.FR8 (Topsoil Type A) 34

(August 3, 2015) 35 Must include with 8-02.2(9-14.2(1)).OPT1.FR8. 36

37 8-02.3(5).GR8 Roadside Seeding, Lawn and Planting Area Preparation 38



8-02.3(5).OPT1.FR8 (Application of Compost) 43 (August 5, 2013) 44 Include when no incorporation of compost is required. 45 (1 fill-in) 46

47 8-02.3(5).OPT2.FR8 (Application of Compost) 48

(August 5, 2013) 49 Include when compost is to be incorporated into the soil 50 and irrigation lines are included in the Contract. 51 (2 fill-ins) 52

53


8-02.3(5).OPT3.FR8 (Application of Compost) 1 (August 5, 2013) 2 Include when compost is to be incorporated onto the soil 3 and there are no irrigation lines included in the Contract. 4 (2 fill-ins). 5 6

8-02.3(5).OPT4.GR8 (Removal of Buried Man-Made Debris) 7 (August 4, 2014) 8 Must include with 8-02.1.OPT1.GR8 and 8-9 02.5.OPT2.GR8. 10

11 8-02.3(6).GR8 Mulch and Amendments 12

13 8-02.3(6)B.GR8 Fertilizers 14



19 8-02.3(6)B.OPT1.FR8 (One application of fertilizer) 20

(September 3, 2019) 21 Use in projects requiring only one application of 22 fertilizer. 23 (4 fill-ins) (The fill-ins for the fertilizer itself should 24 be by consulting the State Horticulturist, the 25 Region Landscape Architect, or Headquarters 26 Roadside and Site Development. Fill-in $$4$$ 27 should be 2/3 the amount of nitrogen in fill-in 28 $$1$$.) 29

30 8-02.3(6)B.OPT2.FR8 (More than one application of fertilizer) 31

(September 3, 2019) 32 Use in projects when the Region Landscape Arch. 33 recommends more than one fertilizer application. 34 (7 fill-ins) (The fill-ins for the fertilizer itself should 35 be by consulting the Region Landscape Architect, 36 or Headquarters Roadside and Site Development. 37 Fill-in $$7$$ should be 2/3 the amount of nitrogen 38 in fill-in $$4$$.) 39

40 8-02.3(6)B.OPT3.GR8 (Fertilizing by hand) 41

(September 3, 2019) 42 Must include with 8-02.3(9)B.OPT2.GR8. 43 Use in projects with seeding and fertilizing of less 44 than 1 acre, the use of mechanical equipment 45 would not be cost effective, or on remote projects 46 with many small areas. 47

48 8-02.3(6)B.OPT4.FR8 (Fertilizer Application in Eastern Washington) 49

(September 3, 2019) 50 Use this GSP for projects in eastern Washington 51 where soils tests show excess potassium and 52 phosphorous and high pH. 53

54


8-02.3(8).GR8 Planting 1 2


5 8-02.3(8).OPT1.FR8 (February 25, 2013) 6

Must use when the project requires a U.S. Army Corps 7 of Engineers Nationwide Permit. Use the Environmental 8 Commitment Meeting to determine applicability of this 9 provision for the project. 10 (1 fill-in) 11

12 8-02.3(9).GR8 Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching 13

14 8-02.3(9)B.GR8 Seeding and Fertilizing 15



20 8-02.3(9)B.OPT1.FR8 (Composition, proportion, quality and 21

application rate of grass seed) 22 (September 3, 2019) 23 Use in projects where the Region Landscape 24 Architect recommends source identified (local 25 genetics) native seed. The fill-ins should be 26 provided by the Region Landscape Architect or 27 Headquarters Roadside and Site Development for 28 regions without a Landscape Architect. 29 (3 fill-ins) (Fill-ins with dollar signs only are to be 30 used as required.) 31 32

8-02.3(9)B.OPT2.GR8 (Seeding by hand) 33 (September 3, 2019) 34 Use in projects with seeding and fertilizing of less 35 than 1 acre, the use of mechanical equipment 36 would not be cost effective, or on remote projects 37 with many small areas. 38 39

8-02.3(9)B.OPT3.FR8 (Composition, proportion, quality and application 40 rate of grass seed) 41 (September 3, 2019) 42 Use in projects where the Region Landscape 43 Architect recommends native seed that is not 44 source identified. The fill-ins should be provided 45 by the Region Landscape Architect or 46 Headquarters Roadside and Site Development for 47 regions without a Landscape Architect. 48 (3 fill-ins) 49

50 8-02.3(11).GR8 Mulch 51




1 8-02.3(11).OPT1.FR8 (Placement of Bark or Wood Chip Mulch) 2

(April 2, 2012) 3 Use in projects requiring bark and wood chip mulch. 4 Use requires approval of the Region Landscape 5 Architect or HQ Region Liaison Landscape Architect. 6 (1 fill-in) 7

8 8-02.3(11)A.GR8 Mulch for Seeding Areas 9

10 8-02.3(11)A.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-02.3(11)A is supplemented with the 11


14 8-02.3(11)A.OPT1.FR8 (Type and rate of application of mulch) 15

(September 3, 2019) 16 Use in projects requiring the application of mulch 17 when the application rate per acre or the allowable 18 pounds in any single lift are revised from the 19 Standard Specifications. 20 (3 fill-ins) 21

22 8-02.3(13).GR8 Plant Establishment 23



8-02.3(13).OPT1.GR8 (January 5, 2015) 28 Use in projects with multiple year plant establishment. 29 Must include with 8-02.5.OPT1.GR8. 30




8-02.4.OPT1.GR8 (January 5, 2015) 37 Use in projects where Topsoil, Compost, Soil Amendments, 38 or Bark or Wood Chip Mulch is applied around trees or 39 shrub beds, or in areas of less than one acre. Must include 40 with 8-02.5.OPT3.GR8. 41

42 8-02.4.OPT2.GR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 43

(April 1, 2019) 44 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which have a 45 lack of organic matter and little to no bioactivity) using Biotic 46 Soil Amendments (BSAs). Should only be used if the soil is 47 determined to be deficient from the results of a soil organic 48 matter test or the soil analysis and the application of 49 compost or topsoil is not possible due to steepness or 50 access. Use requires the approval of the Region Landscape 51 Architect or the HQ Region Liaison Landscape Architect. 52 Must also use 8-02.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-02.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-53 02.3.OPT1.GR8, and 8-02.5.OPT4.FR8. 54


1 8-02.5.GR8 Payment 2



8-02.5.OPT1.GR8 (January 5, 2015) 7 Must include with 8-02.3(13).OPT1.GR8. 8

9 8-02.5.OPT2.GR8 (Removal of Buried Man-Made Previously Fabricated 10

Debris) 11 (August 4, 2014September 7, 2021) 12 Must include with 8-02.1.OPT1.GR8 and 8-13 02.3(5).OPT4.GR8. 14 15

8-02.5.OPT3.GR8 (January 5, 2015) 16 Use in projects where Topsoil, Compost, Soil Amendments, 17 or Bark or Wood Chip Mulch is applied around trees or 18 shrub beds, or in areas of less than one acre. Must include 19 with 8-02.4.OPT1.GR8. 20

21 8-02.5.OPT4.FR8 (Biotic Soil Amendments) 22

(April 1, 2019) 23 Use on projects to amend poor quality soils (which have a 24 lack of organic matter and little to no bioactivity) using Biotic 25 Soil Amendments (BSAs). Should only be used if the soil is 26 determined to be deficient from the results of a soil organic 27 matter test or the soil analysis and the application of 28 compost or topsoil is not possible due to steepness or 29 access. Use requires the approval of the Region Landscape 30 Architect or the HQ Region Liaison Landscape Architect. 31 (1 fill-in) (Fill-in #1 indicates which seed item will be used in 32 conjunction with the BSA. Consult with the Region 33 Landscape Architect to determine which permanent 34 seeding item to use.) 35 Must also use 8-02.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-02.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-36 02.3.OPT1.GR8, and 8-02.4.OPT2.GR8. 37

38 8-02.5.INST2.GR8 (The Bid item “Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching”, per acre in 39

Section 8-02.5 is revised to read:) 40 Must use once preceding any of the following: 41

42 8-02.5.OPT5.GR8 (February 25, 2021) 43


8-10.GR8 Guide Posts 46 47



8-10.1.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 53 (April 1, 2002) 54


Must also use 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.3.OPT1.GR8 or 8-1 10.3.OPT2.GR8, 8-10.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-2 10.5.OPT1.GR8. 3




8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 10 (August 6, 2018) 11 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.3.OPT1.GR8 or 8-12 10.3.OPT2.GR8, 8-10.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-13 10.5.OPT1.GR8. 14



Must use once preceding any of the following: 19 20 8-10.3.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 21

(April 1, 2002) 22 Delineators placed 6" down from top. 23 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 8-24 10.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-10.5.OPT1.GR8. 25

26 8-10.3.OPT2.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 27

(April 1, 2002) 28 Delineators placed on top of barrier. 29 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 8-30 10.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-10.5.OPT1.GR8. 31




8-10.4.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 38 (April 1, 2002) 39 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 8-40 10.3.OPT1.GR8, or 8-10.3.OPT2.GR8, and 8-41 10.5.OPT1.GR8. 42

43 8-10.5.GR8 Payment 44



8-10.5.OPT1.GR8 (Barrier Delineators) 49 (April 1, 2002) 50 Must also use 8-10.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-10.2.OPT1.GR8 8-51 10.3.OPT1.GR8, or 8-10.3.OPT2.GR8, and 8-52 10.4.OPT1.GR8. 53

54


8-11.GR8 Guardrail 1 2


Must use once preceding any of the following: 6 7 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 4 Cable) 8

(February 3, 2020) 9 Must also use 8-11.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-10 11.4.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8. 11

12 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 13

(January 7, 2019) 14 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for Beam 15 Guardrail. This replaces the use of Weathering Steel Beam 16 Guardrail. 17 Must also use 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8, 8-11.3.OPT4.GR8, 8-18 11.4.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT1.GR8. 19




8-11.2.OPT2.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 4 Cable) 26 (September 3, 2019) 27 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-28 11.4.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-29 11.5.OPT8.GR8. 30

31 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 32

(January 2, 2018) 33 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for Beam 34 Guardrail. This replaces the use of Weathering Steel Beam 35 Guardrail. 36 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.3.OPT4.GR8, 8-37 11.4.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT1.GR8. 38

39 8-11.2(9-16.3).GR8 (Beam Guardrail) 40

41 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).GR8 (Posts and Blocks) 42

43 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).INST1.GR8 (Section 9-16.3(2) is supplemented with 44

the following) 45 Must use once preceding any of the following: 46 47

8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8 (Steel shear plates and backing plates) 48 (April 6, 2015) 49 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam guardrail 50 Type Thrie Beam using timber blockouts wedged 51 between openings in existing concrete baluster rails. 52 Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 53


8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-1 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8, and 8-2 11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8. 3

4 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT2.GB8 (Grout) 5

(April 6, 2015) 6 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam guardrail 7 Type Thrie Beam using a steel post connection to the 8 existing concrete curb or railbase. Include with 6-9 02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 8-11.2(9-10 16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8. 11

12 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT3.GB8 (Steel Angles for Timber Blockout 13

Connection to Truss) 14 (April 6, 2015) 15 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam guardrail 16 Type Thrie Beam requiring timber blockout connection 17 to existing steel truss members. Include with 8-11.2(9-18 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8 and other appropriate GSPs 19 supplementing Sections 8-11.2 and 8-11.3(1). 20

21 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 22

(April 6, 2015) 23 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak post thrie 24 beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail Type WP Thrie 25 Beam). Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-11.2(9-26 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8, 8-27 11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8, 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8, and 8-28 11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8. 29

30 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).GB8 (Hardware) 31


34 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8 (Resin bonded anchors) 35

(April 6, 2015) 36 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects requiring resin 37 bonded anchors for connection to concrete baluster 38 railing end posts, and concrete curbs and railbases. 39 Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 40 and either 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-41 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8, and 8-42 11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8, or 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT2.GB8 43 and 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8. 44

45 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8 (Lag screws) 46

(April 6, 2015) 47 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects requiring connections 48 with lag screws to timber members and blockouts. 49





8-11.3.OPT1.GR8 (Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Posts) 3 (August 6, 2018) 4 Must also use 8-11.4.OPT1.GR8 and 8-11.5.OPT6.GR8. 5 Use in projects requiring the construction of steel guardrail 6 posts on top of existing concrete box culverts. 7

8 8-11.3.OPT2.FR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 4 Cable) 9

(February 3, 2020) 10 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-11 11.4.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-12 11.5.OPT8.GR8. 13 Fill-in is the location(s) of Contracting Agency sites to 14 deliver complete sets of Additional High-Tension Cable 15 Barrier Components. 16 (1 fill-in) 17 18

8-11.3.OPT4.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 19 (January 7, 2019) 20 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for 21 Beam Guardrail. This replaces the use of Weathering Steel 22 Beam Guardrail. 23 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8, 8-24 11.4.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT1.GR8. 25

26 8-11.3(1).GR8 Beam Guardrail 27 28

8-11.3(1).INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1) is supplemented with the following) 29 Must use once preceding any of the following: 30 31

8-11.3(1).OPT1.GR8 Post Selection 32 (April 5, 2010) 33 Use in all projects that specifically require wood 34 guardrail posts or specifically require steel guardrail 35 posts. 36 37

8-11.3(1)A.GR8 Erection of Posts 38 39

8-11.3(1)A.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1)A is supplemented with 40 the following) 41 Must use once preceding any of the following: 42

43 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8 (Timber Blockouts for Beam Guardrail 44

Type Thrie Beam) 45 (April 6, 2015) 46 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam 47 guardrail Type Thrie Beam using timber blockouts 48 wedged between openings in existing concrete 49 baluster rails. Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-50 02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 8-11.2(9-51 16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-52


16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-1 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8. 2

3 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8 (Steel Posts for Beam Guardrail Type 4

Thrie Beam) 5 (January 4, 2016) 6 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam 7 guardrail Type Thrie Beam using a steel post 8 connection to the existing concrete curb or 9 railbase. Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-10 02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 8-11.2(9-11 16.3(2)).OPT2.GB8, 8-11.2(9-12 16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)A.OPT2.GB8. 13

14 8-11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 15

(September 8, 2020) 16 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak 17 post thrie beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail 18 Type WP Thrie Beam). Include with 1-19 07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8, 8-20 11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-21 11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8, 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8, and 22 8-11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8. 23

24 8-11.3(1)A.INST2.GR8 (The fourth paragraph of Section 8-11.3(1)A is revised 25

to read:) 26 Must use once preceding any of the following: 27

28 8-11.3(1)A.OPT4.GR8 (Guardrail Leave-Outs) 29

(January 13, 2021) 30 Use in all projects with guardrail. 31

32 8-11.3(1)B.GR8 Erection of Rail 33 34

8-11.3(1)B.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1)B is supplemented with the 35 following) 36 Must use once preceding any of the following: 37

38 8-11.3(1)B.OPT6.GB8 (Field Measuring to Existing 39

Type 3 Anchors) 40 (April 6, 2015) 41 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects when 42 existing Type 3 anchors are being salvaged for 43 reuse as part of the retrofitted guardrail system. 44

45 8-11.3(1)B.OPT7.GB8 (Attaching Beam Guardrail Type 46

Thrie Beam to Timber Blockouts) 47 (April 6, 2015) 48 Use in thrie beam retrofit projects with beam 49 guardrail Type Thrie Beam using timber blockouts 50 wedged between openings in existing concrete 51 baluster rails. Include with 6-02.2.OPT1.GR6, 6-52 02.3(18).OPT1.GR6, 8-11.2(9-53


16.3(2)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-1 16.3(4)).OPT1.GB8, 8-11.2(9-2 16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, and 8-11.3(1)A.OPT1.GB8. 3

4 8-11.3(1)B.OPT8.GB8 (Thrie Beam Expansion Joint Element) 5

(January 13, 2021) 6 Use in projects where the guardrail elements are 7 continuous across interior bridge expansion joints. 8 Contact HQ Design for the thrie beam expansion 9 joint element detail to include in the project plans 10

11 8-11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 12

(April 6, 2015) 13 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak 14 post thrie beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail 15 Type WP Thrie Beam). Include with 1-16 07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-11.2(9-16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8, 8-17 11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-18 11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8, 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8, and 19 8-11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8. 20 21

8-11.3(1)D.GR8 Removing Guardrail 22 23

8-11.3(1)D.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1)D is supplemented with the following) 24 Must use once preceding any of the following: 25

26 8-11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 27

(September 8, 2020) 28 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak post 29 thrie beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail Type WP 30 Thrie Beam). Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-11.2(9-31 16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8, 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-32 11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8, 8-11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8, and 8-33 11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8. 34

35 36

8-11.3(1)H.GR8 Guardrail Construction Exposed to Traffic 37 38

8-11.3(1)H.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-11.3(1)H is supplemented with the following) 39 Must use once preceding any of the following: 40

41 8-11.3(1)H.OPT1.GB8 (Beam Guardrail Type WP Thrie Beam) 42

(April 6, 2015) 43 Include in thrie beam retrofit projects with weak post 44 thrie beam guardrail retrofit (beam guardrail Type WP 45 Thrie Beam). Include with 1-07.1.OPT2.FR1, 8-11.2(9-46 16.3(2)).OPT4.GB8, 8-11.2(9-16.3(4)).OPT2.GB8, 8-47 11.3(1)A.OPT3.GB8, 8-11.3(1)B.OPT9.GB8, and 8-48 11.3(1)D.OPT1.GB8. 49 50



Must use once preceding any of the following: 1 2 8-11.4.OPT1.GR8 (Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Posts) 3

(March 13, 1995) 4 Must include with 8-11.3.OPT1.GR8 5 and 8-11.5.OPT6.GR8. 6 Use in projects requiring the construction of steel guardrail 7 posts on top of concrete box culverts. 8

9 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier System 4 Cable) 10

(February 3, 2020) 11 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-12 11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8. 13 14 15

8-11.4.OPT4.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 16 (April 2, 2018) 17 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for Beam 18 Guardrail. 19 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8, 8-20 11.3.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.5.OPT1.GR8. 21 22



8-11.5.OPT1.GR8 (Aesthetic Treatment for Beam Guardrail) 28 (April 2, 2018) 29 Use in all projects that require Aesthetic Treatment for 30 Beam Guardrail. 31 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT2.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT4.GR8, 8-32 11.3.OPT4.GR8, and 8-11.4.OPT4.GR8. 33

34 8-11.5.OPT2.GR8 (Guardrail Leave-Outs) 35

(January 13, 2021) 36 Use in all projects with guardrail. 37

38 8-11.5.OPT6.GR8 (Box Culvert Guardrail Steel Posts) 39

(August 6, 2018) 40 Must include with 8-11.3.OPT1.GR8 41 and 8-11.4.OPT1.GR8. 42 Use in projects requiring the construction of steel guardrail 43 posts on top of concrete box culverts. 44

45 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8 (High-Tension Cable Barrier) 46

(February 3, 2020) 47 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-48 11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8 and 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8. 49

50 8-11.5.OPT8.GR8 (Additional High-Tension Cable Barrier Components) 51

(February 3, 2020) 52 Must also use 8-11.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-11.2.OPT2.GR8, 8-53 11.3.OPT2.FR8, 8-11.4.OPT2.GR8 and 8-11.5.OPT7.GR8. 54


No Federal funding participation. Must be in state funds 1 group. 2

3 8-12.GR8 Chain Link Fence and Wire Fence 4




8-12.2.OPT1.FR8 (Coated chain link fence) 11 (September 8, 2020) 12 Use in projects requiring the construction of coated chain 13 link fence. Must include 8-12.5.OPT1.GR8. 14 (1 fill-in) 15 16

8-12.2.OPT6.GB8 (Cable Fence) 17 (September 3, 2019) 18 Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-19 12.3.OPT1(B).GB8, 8-12.4.OPT1.GB8, and 8-20 12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 when 21 anchoring the cable fence posts to existing concrete 22 structures. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 when 23 painting of the galvanized fence posts is required. 24 25



30 8-12.3.OPT1.GB8 (Cable Fence) 31

Use once preceding the following: 32 33 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 (Field Measuring For Cable Fence) 34

(April 6, 2015) 35 Use in projects with cable fence when anchoring the 36 cable fence posts to existing concrete structures. 37 Include with 8-12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.3.OPT1(B).GB8, 38 8-12.4.OPT1.GB8, and 8-12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include 39 with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 when painting of the 40 galvanized fence posts is required. 41 42

8-12.3.OPT1(B).GB8 (Cable Fence) 43 (April 6, 2015) 44 Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-45 12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.4.OPT1.GB8, and 8-46 12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 47 when anchoring the cable fence posts to existing 48 concrete structures. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 49 when painting of the galvanized fence posts is required. 50 51

8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 (Cable Fence) 52 (January 2, 2018) 53


Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-1 12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.4.OPT1.GB8, and 8-2 12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 3 when anchoring the cable fence posts to existing 4 concrete structures. 5 6



8-12.4.OPT1.GB8 (Cable Fence) 12 (April 6, 2015) 13 Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-14 12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.3.OPT1(B).GB8, and 8-15 12.5.OPT6.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 when 16 anchoring the cable fence posts to existing concrete 17 structures. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 when 18 painting of the galvanized fence posts is required. 19

20 8-12.5.GR8 Payment 21



8-12.5.OPT1.GR8 (Coated chain link fence) 26 (April 1, 2002) 27 Use in projects requiring the construction of coated chain 28 link fence. 29

30 8-12.5.OPT6.GB8 (Cable Fence) 31

(April 6, 2015) 32 Use in projects with cable fence. Include with 8-33 12.2.OPT6.GB8, 8-12.3.OPT1(B).GB8, and 8-34 12.4.OPT1.GB8. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(A).GB8 when 35 anchoring the cable fence posts to existing concrete 36 structures. Include with 8-12.3.OPT1(C).GB8 when 37 painting of the galvanized fence posts is required. 38

39 8-13.GR8 Monument Cases 40


43 8-13.1.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-13.1 is deleted and replaced by the following) 44


8-13.1.OPT1.GR8 (Monument pipes included in work) 47 (March 13, 1995) 48 Must also use 8-13.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-13.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-49 13.4.OPT1.GR8 and 8-13.5.OPT1.GR8. 50 Use in projects requiring that the monument pipes be 51 installed by the Contractor. 52

53




8-13.2.OPT1.GR8 (Monument pipes included in work) 6 (March 13, 1995) 7 Must include with 8-13.1.OPT1.GR8. 8 Use in projects requiring that the monument pipes be 9 installed by the Contractor. 10


13 8-13.3.INST1.GR8 (The last paragraph of Section 8-13.3 is revised to read) 14




24 8-13.4.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-13.4 is deleted and replaced by the following) 25



33 8-13.5.GR8 Payment 34



8-13.5.OPT1.GR8 (Monument pipes included in work) 39 (April 28, 1997) 40 Must include with 8-13.1.OPT1.GR8. 41 Use in projects requiring that the monument pipes be 42 installed by the Contractor. 43

44 8-14.GR8 Cement Concrete Sidewalks 45 46


8-14.1.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-14.1 is revised to read) 49 Must use once preceding any of the following: 50

51 8-14.1.OPT1.GR8 (ADA Feature work) 52

(April 3, 2017) 53 Use in all projects that require any ADA Feature work. 54


Must use with 1-05.4.OPT4.GR1, 8-14.3.OPT2.GR8, and 1 8-14.3.OPT3.GR8. 2




8-14.3.OPT1.GR8 (Pre-construction meeting for cement concrete sidewalks, 9 curb ramps or other pedestrian access routes to discuss 10 ADA issues before Work begins) 11 (April 3, 2017) 12 Use in projects where pedestrian access route Work 13 (cement concrete sidewalks, curb ramps or other 14 pedestrian access) is proposed and it is felt that a pre-15 construction meeting is needed by Region Construction 16 Office to discuss ADA compliance. 17

18 8-14.3.OPT2.GR8 (Timing Restrictions) 19

(January 7, 2019) 20 Use in all projects that require any ADA Feature work where 21 sidewalk, curb ramp, or bus stop closures are required to 22 perform the work. 23 Must use with 1-05.4.OPT4.GR8, 8-14.1.OPT1.GR8, and 24 8-14.3.OPT3.GR8. 25

26 8-14.3.OPT3.GR8 (Layout and Conformance to Grades) 27

(January 7, 2019) 28 Use in all projects that require any ADA Feature work. 29 Must use with 1-05.4.OPT4.GR8, 8-14.1.OPT1.GR8, and 30 8-14.3.OPT2.GR8. 31

32 8-14.3(5).GR8 Detectable Warning Surface 33

34 8-14.3(5).INST1.GR8 (The first paragraph of Section 8-14.3(5) is revised to read:) 35


8-14.3(5).OPT1.GR8 (January 13, 2021) 38 Use in all projects constructing detectable warning 39 surfaces. 40

41 8-15.GR8 Riprap 42




8-15.4.OPT3.GR8 (Special excavation) 49 (March 13, 1995) 50 Must also use 8-15.5.OPT8.GR8. 51 Use in projects requiring excavation outside the limits of 52 structure excavation for riprap at bridge piers located within 53 streams. 54


1 8-15.4.OPT5.GR8 (Excavation for riprap is included in cost 2

of riprap) 3 (The last paragraph of Section 8-14.5 is deleted) 4 (February 5, 2001) 5 Must also use 8-15.5.OPT1.GR8. 6 Use in projects with small quantities of riprap or upon 7 recommendation of the Construction and Materials Division. 8

9 8-15.5.GR8 Payment 10

11 8-15.5.INST1.GR8 (The first sentence of the second paragraph of Section 12

8-15.5 is revised to read) 13 Must use once preceding any of the following: 14

15 8-15.5.OPT1.GR8 (Excavation for riprap is included in cost 16

of riprap) 17 (March 13, 1995) 18 Must include with 8-15.4.OPT5.GR8. 19 Use in projects with small quantities of riprap or upon 20 recommendation of the Construction and Materials 21 Division. 22



8-15.5.OPT8.GR8 (Special excavation) 27 (September 30, 1996) 28 Must include with 8-15.4.OPT3.GR8. 29 Use in projects requiring excavation outside the limits of 30 structure excavation for riprap at bridge piers located within 31 streams. 32 33

8-16.GR8 Concrete Slope Protection 34 35


8-16.3(2).GR8 Placing Semi-Open Concrete Masonry Units 38 39


42 8-16.3(2).OPT1.GR8 (Requirements for semi-open precast masonry 43

units) 44 (December 19, 2005) 45 Must include with 8-16.5.OPT1.GR8. 46 Use in projects requiring semi-open concrete masonry 47 slope protection. 48

49 8-16.5.GR8 Payment 50




8-16.5.OPT1.GR8 (Semi-open Conc. Masonry Slope Protection) 1 (September 30, 1996) 2 Must include with 8-16.3(2).OPT1.GR8. 3 Use in projects requiring semi-open concrete masonry 4 slope protection. 5

6 8-20.GR8 Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation 7

Systems, and Electrical 8 9



8-20.2.OPT1.GB8 (Traffic Signal Shaft Foundation Shaft Casing and 15 Slurry) 16 (April 6, 2015) 17 Use in traffic signal projects with shaft foundations in weak 18 soils, with the concurrence of the Materials Laboratory 19 Geotechnical Branch. Include with 8-20.3(4).OPT1.FB8 20 and 8-20.5.OPT1.GB8. 21

22 8-20.2(9-29.1).GR8 (Conduit, Innerduct, and Outerduct) 23 24

8-20.2(9-29.1(11)).GR8 (Foam Conduit Sealant) 25 (Section 9-29.1(11) is supplemented with the following) 26 Must use once preceding any of the following: 27 28

8-20.2(9-29.1(11)).OPT1.GR8 (January 7, 2019) 29 Use in projects where new conduit is installed, 30 wiring is added to existing conduit, or wiring is 31 removed from existing conduit. 32

33 8-20.2(9-29.2).GR8 (Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull Boxes) 34

(Section 9-29.2 is supplemented with the following:) 35 Must use once preceding any of the following: 36

37 8-20.2(9-29.2).OPT1.GR8 (Slip-Resistant Surfacing) 38

(September 3, 2019) 39 Use in projects where junction boxes, cable vaults, pull 40 boxes, or Structure mounted boxes require slip-41 resistant surfacing. 42

43 8-20.2(9-29.6).GR8 (Light and Signal Standards) 44


47 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT1.GR8 Light Standards With Type 1 Luminaire Arms 48

(January 13, 2021) 49 Use in projects requiring Type 1 luminaire arms and the 50 Engineer is not required to verify the H1 distances 51 shown in the Plans. 52

53 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT2.GR8 Light Standards With Type 1 Luminaire Arms 54


(January 13, 2021) 1 Use in projects requiring Type 1 luminaire arms and H1 2 distances are not shown in the Plans or the Engineer is 3 required to verify the H1 distances shown in the Plans. 4

5 8-20.2(9-29.6).OPT5.GR8 Traffic Signal Standards 6

(July 6, 2021) 7 Use in projects requiring traffic signal standards, or 8 combination traffic signal/light standards with Type 1 9 luminaire arms, or both. 10

11 8-20.2(9-29.6(5)).GR8 (Foundation Hardware) 12

(Section 9-29.6(5) is supplemented with the following) 13 Must use once preceding any of the following: 14 15

8-20.2(9-29.6(5)).OPT1.GR8 (January 13, 2021) 16 Use in all projects where light standards are to 17 be installed. 18

19 8-20.2(9-29.13).GR8 (Control Cabinet Assemblies) 20


23 8-20.2(9-29.13).OPT1.GR8 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 24

(January 2, 2018) 25 With Region Traffic Engineer approval, use in projects 26 where Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) cabinets are 27 required. Include with 8-20.3(14).OPT1.GR8. 28

29 8-20.2(9-29.13(11)).GR8 (Traffic Data Accumulator and Ramp Meters) 30

(Section 9-29.13(11) is supplemented with the 31 following) 32 Must use once preceding any of the following: 33 34

8-20.2(9-29.13(11)).OPT1.GR8 (July 6, 2021) 35 Use in all projects where a Ramp Meter or ITS 36 Data Station controller is required. 37

38 8-20.2(9-29.15).GR8 (Flashing Beacon Control) 39


42 8-20.2(9-29.15).OPT1.GR8 Rapid Flashing Beacons (RFB) 43

(January 7, 2019) 44 Use in projects where Rectangular Rapid Flashing 45 Beacons (RRFBs) are required. 46 47

8-20.2(9-29.19).GR8 (Pedestrian Push Buttons) 48 (Section 9-29.19 is supplemented with the following) 49 Must use once preceding any of the following: 50

51 8-20.2(9-29.19).OPT1.FR8 Accessible Pedestrian Signal (APS) Pushbuttons 52

(January 13, 2021) 53


Use in projects requiring accessible pedestrian signal 1 (APS) pushbuttons. Do not use for RRFB system 2 pushbuttons. 3 4 For the fill-in, enter one of the following: 5 6 “See Contract Plans for table.” 7 8

or 9 10 Copy and paste in the following table (insert additional 11 lines as necessary): 12 13

Street (A) Street (B) Arrow Direction

QTY

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R 14 See http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Design/Traffic/APS.htm 15 for instructions for filling out the tables. 16 (1 fill-in) 17 18

8-20.2(1).GR8 Equipment List and Drawings 19 20


23 8-20.2(1).OPT1.GR8 (Light standards when H1 dimension is 24

shown on the Plans) 25 (March 13, 1995) 26 Use in projects with illumination systems and the 27 lighting standard H1 dimension is shown in the Plans 28 and verification by the Engineer is not required prior to 29 fabrication. 30 31

8-20.2(1).OPT2.GR8 (Light standards when H1 dimension is not 32 Shown on the Plans or must be verified prior to 33 fabrication) 34 (March 13, 1995) 35 Use in projects with illumination systems and the 36 lighting standard H1 dimension is not shown in the 37 Plans or the dimension shown in the Plans must be 38 verified by the Engineer prior to fabrication. 39 40

8-20.2(1).OPT3.GR8 (Traffic signal standards, strain pole standards 41 or combination traffic signal/lighting standards) 42 (March 13, 1995) 43


Use in projects with traffic signal systems when 1 standards are to be installed. 2


8-20.3(4).GR8 Foundations 6 7


10 8-20.3(4).OPT1.FB8 (Shafts for Signal Standard Foundations) 11

(August 7, 2017) 12 Use in traffic signal projects with shaft foundations in 13 weak soils, with the concurrence of the Materials 14 Laboratory Geotechnical Branch. The fill-in specifies 15 the location(s) of the shaft(s) requiring construction 16 under these construction requirements. Include with 8-17 20.2.OPT1.GB8 and 8-20.5.OPT1.GB8. 18 (One fill-in). 19

20 8-20.3(8).GR8 Wiring 21



8-20.3(8).OPT1.GR8 Field Wiring Chart 26 (March 13, 1995) 27 Use in projects with traffic signal systems. 28

29 8-20.3(14).GR8 Signal Systems 30 31


34 8-20.3(14).OPT1.GR8 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 35

(January 2, 2018) 36 With Region Traffic Engineer approval use in projects 37 where Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) cabinets are 38 required. Include with 8-20.2(9-29.13).OPT1.GR8 39

40 8-20.3(14)A.GR8 Signal Controllers 41

42 8-20.3(14)A.INST1.GR8 (Supplemental Instructions) 43


8-20.3(14)A.OPT1.GR8 Testing 46 (August 2, 2010) 47 Use in projects with Contractor furnished signal 48 controllers. 49 50




8-20.5.OPT1.GB8 (Removing Traffic Signal Shaft Obstructions) 3 (April 6, 2015) 4 Use in traffic signal projects with shaft foundations in weak 5 soils, with the concurrence of the Materials Laboratory 6 Geotechnical Branch. Include with 8-20.2.OPT1.GB8 and 7 8-20.3(4).OPT1.FB8. 8

9 8-21.GR8 Permanent Signing 10

11 8-21.2.GR8 Materials 12 13

8-21.2(9-06.16).GR8 (Roadside Sign Structures) 14 (Section 9-06.16 is supplemented with the following) 15 Must use once preceding the following: 16

17 8-21.2(9-06.16).OPT1.GR8 (January 3, 2011) 18

Use in projects with perforated steel square sign posts. 19 20

8-21.2(9-28.11).GR8 (Hardware) 21 (Section 9-28.11 is supplemented with the following) 22 Must use once preceding any of the following: 23

24 8-21.2(9-28.11).OPT1.GB8 (Overhead Sign Structure Locknuts) 25

(August 3, 2015) 26 Use in all projects with overhead sign structures (sign 27 bridge, cantilever sign structure, bridge mounted sign 28 bracket). 29

30 8-21.2(9-28.14).GR8 (Sign Support Structures) 31


34 8-21.2(9-28.14).OPT6.GR8 (Roadside Signing Material and Fabrication) 35

(September 8, 2020) 36 Use in all projects that have steel sign supports. 37


40 8-21.3(9).GR8 Sign Structures 41

42 8-21.3(9)A.GR8 Fabrication of Sign Structures 43

44 8-21.3(9)A1.GR8 Fabrication of Monotube Sign Bridges and 45

Cantilever Sign Structures 46 47

8-21.3(9)A1.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-21.3(9)A1 is supplemented with the 48 following) 49 Must use once preceding any of the following: 50

51 8-21.3(9)A1.OPT1.FB8 (Non-Conventional Paint Color) 52



Use in projects with monotube sign bridges 1 and/or monotube cantilever sign structures 2 painted a color other than the conventionally 3 specified gray color. Include with 8-4 21.4.OPT1.FB8. The fill-in specifies the SAE 5 AMS Standard 595 color number, or the color 6 name if no number. 7 (1 fill-in) 8

9 8-21.3(9)E.GR8 Bridge Mounted Sign Brackets 10

11 8-21.3(9)E.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-21.3(9)E is supplemented with the 12


15 8-21.3(9)E.OPT1.FB8 (Bridge Mounted Sign Brackets) 16

(April 6, 2015) 17 Use in projects with bridge mounted sign brackets. 18 The first and third fill-ins specify the sign bracket 19 number(s). The second fill-in itemizes the 20 structural carbon steel quantity for each sign 21 bracket. The fourth fill-in specifies the quantity of 22 hole drilling required for the resin bonded anchors 23 for each sign bracket. 24 (4 fill-ins) 25

26 8-21.3(9)F.GR8 Foundations 27

28 8-21.3(9)F1.GR8 Fabrication of Monotube Sign Bridges and 29

Cantilever Sign Structures 30 31

8-21.3(9)F1.INST1.GR8 (Section 8-21.3(9)F1 is supplemented with the 32 following) 33 Must use once preceding any of the following: 34

35 8-21.3(9)F1.OPT1.FB8 (Temporary Casing Requirements) 36

(September 8, 2020) 37 Use in sign structure projects with shaft 38 foundations where the shaft diameter is 48 39 inches or greater, or where the shaft depth is 40 15 feet or greater, or where the Materials 41 Laboratory Geotechnical Branch identifies the 42 foundation soils as sufficiently weak to require 43 use of this specification. The fill-in specifies 44 the location(s) of the shaft(s) requiring 45 construction under these construction 46 requirements. 47 (1 fill-in) 48





1 8-21.4.OPT1.FB8 (Monotube Sign Structures) 2

(September 8, 2020) 3 Use in projects with monotube sign bridges and/or 4 monotube cantilever sign structures. The first fill in 5 specifies the type of sign structure work included (sign 6 bridge or cantilever sign structure or both). The second fill-7 in itemizes the quantities and work involved with each sign 8 structure. 9 (2 fill-ins) 10 11

8-23.GR8 Temporary Pavement Markings 12 13


8-23.3(4).GR8 Pavement Marking Application 16 17

8-23.3(4)(9-34.5).GR8 (Temporary Pavement Marking Tape) 18 19 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(1)).GR8 (Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Short 20

Duration (Non-Removable)) 21 (Section 9-34.5(1)), including title, is revised to read) 22 Must use once preceding any of the following: 23

24 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(1)).OPT1.GR8 (Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – 25

Short Duration) 26 (February 25, 2021) 27 Use in all projects. 28

29 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(2)).GR8 (Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Long 30

Duration (Non-Removable)) 31 (Section 9-34.5(2)), including title, is revised to read) 32 Must use once preceding any of the following: 33

34 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(2)).OPT1.GR8 (Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – 35

Long Duration) 36 (February 25, 2021) 37 Use in all projects. 38

39 8-24.GR8 Rock and Gravity Block Wall, and Gabion 40

Cribbing 41 42



8-24.2.OPT1.GR8 (Gravity Block Wall) 48 (January 7, 2002) 49 Use in projects constructing gravity block walls. Include 50 with 8-24.3(2).OPT1.GR8 51



1 8-24.3(2).GR8 Gravity Block Wall 2



8-24.3(2).OPT1.GR8 (Gravity Block Wall) 7 (January 7, 2002) 8 Use in projects constructing gravity block walls. Include 9 with 8-24.2.OPT1.GR8. 10 11

8-25.GR8 Glare Screen 12 13



18 8-25.1.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 19

Use in projects when the work zone analysis determines the 20 need for temporary barrier screening. 21 8-25.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-25.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-25.4.OPT1.GR8, 22 and 8-25.5.OPT1.GR8. 23




8-25.2.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 30 Use in projects when the work zone analysis determines the 31 need for temporary barrier screening. 32 Must use with 8-25.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-25.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-33 25.4.OPT1.GR8, and 8-25.5.OPT1.GR8. 34



40 8-25.3.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 41




51 8-25.4.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 52



5 8-25.5.GR8 Payment 6 7


10 8-25.5.OPT1.GR8 (April 1, 2002) 11


16 8-29.GR8 Wire Mesh Slope Protection 17

18 8-29.1.GR8 Description 19 20


23 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection) 24

(April 5, 2010) 25 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include with 26 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.4.OPT1.GR8 27 and 8-29.5.OPT1.GR8. 28

29 8-29.2.GR8 Materials 30 31


34 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection Materials) 35

(January 2, 2018) 36 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include with 37 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.3.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.4.OPT1.GR8 38 and 8-29.5.OPT1.GR8. 39



45 8-29.3.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection Construction Requirements) 46

(January 3, 2011) 47 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include with 48 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.4.OPT1.GR8 49 and 8-29.5.OPT1.GR8. 50




3 8-29.4.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection) 4

(April 5, 2010) 5 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include with 6 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.3.OPT1.GR8, 7 and 8-29.5.OPT1.GR8. 8

9 8-29.5.GR8 Payment 10



8-29.5.OPT1.GR8 (Cable Net Slope Protection) 15 (January 3, 2011) 16 Use in projects with cable net slope protection. Include with 17 8-29.1.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.2.OPT1.GR8, 8-29.3.OPT1.GR8, 18 and 8-29.4.OPT1.GR8. 19

20 8-SA1.GR8 Field Office Building 21

(August 7, 2017) 22 Use in projects when a field office building is required. 23

24 8-SA2.GR8 Bollards 25

(January 2, 2018) 26 Use in projects requiring bollards. 27 Contact Headquarters Design Standard Plans Office for plan details on 28 Type 3 Bollards. 29 30

8-SA3.GR8 (Environmental Compliance) 31 (August 6, 2018) 32 For use on projects where the project has a high risk of soil erosion due 33 to soil type, slope gradiant and work in or has proximity to waters of the 34 State (Hydraulics Runoff Manual (HRM) defines projects susceptible for 35 high risk soil erosion). Also for use on projects where there is extensive 36 monitoring of environmental permit compliance. 37 The Region Construction Engineer and Region Environmental Office 38 should be consulted for use as the provision introduces an 39 Environmental Compliance Lead person that incorporates, expands and 40 replaces the duties of the ESC Lead person. 41 42


8-01.GR8 1

Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control 2 3 8-01.1.GR8 4

Description 5 6 8-01.1(1).GR8 7

Definitions 8 9 8-01.1(1).INST1.GR8 10

Item 1C of Section 8-01.1(1) is revised to read: 11 12 8-01.1(1).OPT1.GR8 13

(February 25, 2021) 14 May be neutralized and discharged to surface waters or neutralized and infiltrated. 15

16 8-01.1(1).INST2.GR8 17

Item 2E of Section 8-01.1(1) is revised to read: 18 19 8-01.1(1).OPT2.GR8 20

(February 25, 2021) 21 May be neutralized, treated, and discharged to surface waters or neutralized and 22 infiltrated in accordance with the CSWGP, with the exception of water-only shaft 23 drilling slurry. Water-only shaft drilling slurry may be treated, neutralized, and 24 infiltrated but not discharged to surface waters (Refer to Special Conditions S1.C. 25 Authorized Discharges and S1.d Prohibited Discharges of the CSWGP). 26

27 8-01.3.GR8 28


General 32 33 8-01.3(1).INST1.GR8 34

The tenth paragraph of Section 8-01.3(1) is revised to read: 35 36 8-01.3(1).OPT1.GR8 37

(January 25, 2010) 38 Erodible Soil Eastern Washington 39 Erodible soil not being worked whether at final grade or not, shall be covered within 40 the following time period using an approved soil cover practice: 41

42 July 1 through September 30 30 days 43 October 1 through June 30 15 days 44

45 8-01.3(1).INST2.GR8 46



8-01.3(1).OPT8.FR8 1 (April 1, 2002) 2 Side Slope Treatment 3 Slopes shall be compacted within *** $$1$$ *** days of exposure of a new section of 4 cut and construction of a new portion of an embankment. 5

6 8-01.3(1)B.GR8 7

Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Lead 8 9 8-01.3(1)B.INST1.GR8 10

Section 8-01.3(1)B is revised to read: 11 12 8-01.3(1)B.OPT1.GR8 13

(May 28, 2020) 14 The Contractor shall identify the ESC Lead at the preconstruction discussions 15 and in the TESC Plan. The ESC Lead shall have, for the life of the Contract, a 16 current Certificate of Training in Construction Site Erosion and Sediment Control 17 from a course approved by the Washington State Department of Ecology. The 18 ESC Lead must be onsite or on call at all times throughout construction. The 19 ESC Lead shall be listed on the Emergency Contact List required under Section 20 1-05.13(1). 21 22 The ESC Lead shall implement the TESC Plan. Implementation shall include, 23 but is not limited to: 24 25

1. Installing, adaptively managing, and maintaining temporary erosion 26 and sediment control BMPs to assure continued performance of their 27 intended function. Damaged or inadequate BMPs shall be corrected 28 immediately. 29

30 2. Updating the TESC Plan to reflect current field conditions. 31 32 3. Inspecting and reporting on all areas disturbed by construction 33

activities, all on-site erosion and sediment control BMPs, and all 34 storm water discharge points every calendar week and within 24 35 hours of runoff events in which storm water discharges from the site 36 or as directed by the Engineer. 37

38 4. Submit to the Engineer no later than the end of the next working day 39

following the inspection a TESC Inspection Report that includes: 40 41

a. When, where, and how BMPs were installed, maintained, 42 modified, and removed. 43

44 b. Observations of BMP effectiveness and proper placement. 45 46 c. Recommendations for improving future BMP performance with 47

upgraded or replacement BMPs when inspections reveal TESC 48 BMP deficiencies. 49

50


d. Identify for each discharge point location whether there is 1 compliance with state water quality standards in WAC 173-201A 2 for turbidity and pH. 3

4 Inspection of temporarily stabilized, or inactive sites may be reduced to once 5 every calendar month if allowed by the Engineer. 6

7 8-01.3(1)B.INST2.GR8 8

The second sentence of the first paragraph of Section 8-01.3(1)B is revised to read: 9 10 8-01.3(1)B.OPT2.GR8 11

(February 25, 2021) 12 The ESC Lead shall have, for the life of the Contract, a current Certificate of 13 Training in Construction Site Erosion and Sediment Control from a course 14 approved by the Washington State Department of Ecology. 15

16 8-01.3(1)B.INST3.GR8 17

The second sentence of the second paragraph of Section 8-01.3(1)B (excluding the 18 numbered list) is revised to read: 19

20 8-01.3(1)B.OPT3.GR8 21

(February 25, 2021) 22 Implementation shall include, but is not limited to: 23

24 8-01.3(1)C.GR8 25

Water Management 26 27 8-01.3(1)C1.GR8 28

Disposal of Dewatering Water 29 30 8-01.3(1)C1.INST1.GR8 31

Section 8-01.3(1)C1 is revised to read: 32 33 8-01.3(1)C1.OPT1.GR8 34

(February 25, 2021) 35 When uncontaminated turbid dewatering water is encountered onsite, it 36 must pass through BMPs to reduce sedimentation prior to discharging to a 37 sediment trap or sediment pond. Turbid uncontaminated dewatering water 38 disposal options may include sheet flow dispersion and infiltration within 39 vegetation onsite not designated as sensitive areas, transport in a vehicle 40 for off-site legal disposal, Ecology-approved on-site chemical treatment, 41 sanitary or combined sewer discharge with local sewer district approval, or 42 use of a sedimentation bag that discharges to a ditch or swale for small 43 volumes of localized dewatering. Highly turbid or contaminated dewatering 44 water must be handled separately from stormwater. 45 46 Clean and non-turbid dewatering water may be discharged to systems 47 tributary to or directly into sur-face waters of the state provided it does not 48 cause erosion or flooding of receiving waters, in accordance with the 49 CSWGP and water quality standards in WAC 173-201A. 50

51


8-01.3(1)C4.GR8 1 Management of Off-Site Water 2

3 8-01.3(1)C4.INST1.GR8 4

Section 8-01.3(1)C4 is supplemented with the following: 5 6 8-01.3(1)C4.OPT1.FR8 7

(August 6, 2012) 8 Off-site Stormwater 9 Stormwater is known to enter the project site at the following locations: 10

11 *** $$1$$ *** 12

13 8-01.3(2).GR8 14

Temporary Seeding and Mulching 15 16 8-01.3(2)B.GR8 17

Temporary Seeding 18 19 8-01.3(2)B.INST1.GR8 20

Section 8-01.3(2)B is supplemented with the following: 21 22 8-01.3(2)B.OPT1.FR8 23

(August 4, 2014) 24 Seed of the following mix, rate, and analysis shall be applied at the rates shown 25 below on all areas requiring ***$$1$$*** seeding within the project: 26 27

Seed by Common Name Pounds Pure Live Seed 28 and (Botanical name) (PLS) Per Acre 29 30 *** $$2$$ $$ 31 32 $$ $$ 33 34 $$ $$ 35 36 Total $$ *** 37 38

The seed shall be certified in accordance with WAC 16-302 and meet the 39 following requirements: 40 41

Prohibited Weed 0% max. 42 Noxious Weed 0% max. 43 Other Weed 0.20% max. 44 Other Crop 0.40% max. 45 46

47 8-01.3(2)B.OPT2.FR8 48

(August 4, 2014) 49 Seed of the following mix, rate, and analysis shall be applied at the rates shown 50 below on all areas requiring ***$$1$$*** seeding within the project: 51


1 Seed by Common Name, 2 (Botanical Name), and Pounds Pure Live Seed 3 “Source Identification” (PLS) Per Acre 4 5 *** $$2$$ $$ 6 7 $$ $$ 8 9 $$ $$ 10 11 Total $$ *** 12 13

Source Identified seed shall be generation four or less. Non-Source Identified 14 seed shall meet or exceed Washington State Department of Agriculture Certified 15 Seed Standards and be from within the appropriate genetic zones of the *** 16 $$3$$ *** Ecoregion(s) as defined by the US Environmental Protection Agency 17 (EPA). 18 19 The seed certification class shall be Certified (blue tag) in accordance with WAC 20 16-302 and meet the following requirements: 21 22

Prohibited Weed 0% max. 23 Noxious Weed 0% max. 24 Other Weed 0.20% max. 25 Other Crop 0.40% max. 26

27 The Contractor shall document all Source Identified seed by providing the 28 Association of Official Seed Certifying Agents (AOSCA) yellow seed label for 29 each species in the mix. Site Identification Logs can be supplied for collections 30 where the AOSCA yellow label is not available. 31

32 8-01.3(2)B.OPT3.GR8 33

(September 3, 2019) 34 Grass seed shall be a commercially prepared mix, made up of low growing 35 species which will grow without irrigation at the project location, and approved 36 by the Engineer. The application rate shall be two pounds per 1000 square feet. 37 Fertilizer shall be a commercially prepared mix of 10-20-20 and shall be applied 38 at the rate of 10 pounds per 1000 square feet. 39

40 8-01.3(2)B.OPT4.FR8 41

(January 3, 2006) 42 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following amounts 43 of nutrients: 44

45 Total Nitrogen as N - *** $$1$$ *** pounds per acre. 46 47 Available Phosphoric Acid as P2O5 - *** $$2$$ *** pounds per acre. 48

49 Soluble Potash as K2O - *** $$3$$ *** pounds per acre. 50

51


*** $$4$$ *** pounds of nitrogen applied per acre shall be derived from 1 isobutylidene diurea (IBDU), cyclo-di-urea (CDU), or a time release, 2 polyurethane coated source with a minimum release time of 6 months. The 3 remainder may be derived from any source. 4 5 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the Engineer 6 before use. 7

8 8-01.3(2)B.OPT8.FR8 9

(August 4, 2014) 10 Seed of the following mix, rate, and analysis shall be applied at the rates shown 11 below on all areas requiring *** $$1$$ *** seeding within the project: 12 13

Seed by Common Name, 14 (Botanical Name), and Pure Live Seed 15 “Source Identification” Pounds (PLS) Per Acre 16 17 *** $$2$$ $$ 18 19 $$ $$ 20 21 $$ $$ 22 23 Total $$ *** 24 25

Seed shall meet or exceed Washington State Department of Agriculture Certified 26 Seed Standards and be from within the *** $$3$$ *** Ecoregion(s) as defined by 27 the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 28 29 The seed certification class shall be Certified (blue tag) in accordance with WAC 30 16-302 and meet the following requirements: 31 32


37 8-01.3(2)D.GR8 38

Temporary Mulching 39 40 8-01.3(2)D.INST1.GR8 41

Section 8-01.3(2)D is supplemented with the following: 42 43 8-01.3(2)D.OPT1.FR8 44

(January 5, 2015) 45 *** $$1$$ *** shall be applied at a rate of *** $$2$$ *** pounds per acre with no 46 more than *** $$3$$ *** pounds per acre applied in a single lift. 47

48


8-02.GR8 1

Roadside Restoration 2 3 8-02.1.GR8 4

Description 5 6 8-02.1.INST1.GR8 7 Section 8-02.1 is supplemented with the following: 8 9 8-02.1.OPT1.GR8 10

(August 4, 2014) 11 This work shall consist of removing and disposing of buried man-made debris that may 12 be encountered during soil amendment incorporation or excavation for irrigation systems. 13

14 8-02.1.OPT2.GR8 15

(April 1, 2019) 16 This Work consists of supplying and applying a Biotic Soil Amendment (BSA) in 17 accordance with these Specifications and as shown in the Plans or as designated by the 18 Engineer. 19

20 8-02.2.GR8 21


(January 3, 2011) 28

Conservation Grade Plant Material 29 Conservation grade plant material is defined as healthy plants that do not meet aesthetic 30 standards as defined in ASNS. The plants have healthy, well-developed roots and in all 31 other ways meet standards for healthy and vigorous growth. However, these plants may 32 have multiple leaders, damaged or missing leaders, Y crotches, bent branches, or other 33 unusual shapes or forms. These plants may be used where shown in the plans. 34

35 8-02.2.OPT2.GR8 36

(April 1, 2019) 37 Biotic Soil Amendments (BSAs), also known as biotic soil media and hydraulic growth 38 medium, shall be soil amendments engineered to improve the development of deficient 39 soils and to facilitate sustainable vegetation. BSAs shall consist of a blend of organic 40 material, nutrient sources, soil building and biostimulant components. BSAs shall 41 increase the water and nutrient holding capacity of the soil and promote the growth of 42 beneficial microorganisms. BSAs shall provide for enhanced seed germination and 43 vegetative establishment. 44 45 Biotic Soil Amendment shall be certified to be free of weed seeds and pathogens, free of 46 plastic, composed of non-toxic materials, and be a pre-mixed formulation unaltered by 47 synthetic materials. 48 49 The biotic soil amendment shall have a minimum of 90% organic matter (organic growth 50 medium) and contain other materials designed to improve seed germination, vegetation 51


establishment and overall soil health. In addition to organic growth medium BSA shall 1 include mycorrhizal fungi and a minimum of three of the following ingredients: 2 3

• Biochar 4 • Humus/Humic Acid 5 • Porous Ceramics or Water-holding Organic Polymers 6 • Seaweed Extract 7 • Beneficial Bacteria 8 • Micronutrients 9 10

The Contractor shall provide test results dated within 3 years prior to the date of 11 application from an independent, accredited laboratory that has been recognized by an 12 accrediting organization to test and evaluate products to product safety standards. The 13 independent, accredited lab shall be free from commercial, financial, and other pressures 14 that may influence the results of the testing and evaluation process. Test results shall 15 show that the product meets the following table requirements: 16 17

Table 1: Biotic Soil Amendment Requirements

BSA Properties Test Methods Requirements

Physical

Organic Matter ASTM D586 90% minimum

pH ASTM D1293 5.0 - 8.5

C:N Ratio ASTM E1508 10:1 minimum 50:1 maximum

Water-Holding Capacity1 ASTM D7367 400% minimum

Moisture Content ASTM 2974 10% minimum, 50% maximum

Environmental

Acute Toxicity EPA Method 2021.0 Non-toxic

EPA Metal Limits SW846-6020 04.06 Pass

Performance

Growth Enhancement ASTM D7322 500% minimum 1Water holding capacity of the pre-packaged material without the addition of ancillary amendments.

18

Submittal Requirements 19 At the time of delivery, the Contractor shall submit the specific biotic soil amendment 20 packing list to the Engineer for acceptance. The packing list shall include complete 21 identification including, but not limited to, the following information: 22 23

• Manufacturer name and location, 24 • Manufacturer telephone number and fax number, 25 • Manufacturer’s e-mail address and web address, and 26 • BSA name. 27 • Certification that the specific BSA meets the physical, environmental and 28

performance criteria of this specification and test results. 29 30

Acceptance 31 Acceptance of the materials shall be based on: 32 33

1. Certificate of Compliance demonstrating adherence to the Specifications, 34 2. Visual inspection ensuring the material is free of plastic. 35


1 8-02.2(9-14).GR8 2

Erosion Control and Roadside Planting 3 4 8-02.2(9-14).INST1.GR8 5

Section 9-14 is supplemented with the following: 6 7 8-02.2(9-14).OPT1.FR8 8

(January 3, 2011) 9 Weed Barrier Mats 10 Weed Barrier Mats shall be 3 feet square. They shall be made of UV stabilized 11 geotextile colored with carbon black and shall provide a minimum of 3 years of weed 12 control. Weed Barrier Mats shall be 2.5 mils thick with a minimum of 400 micropores 13 per square inch. Staples shall be a minimum of 11 gauge wire and be *** $$1$$ *** 14 inches in length. 15 16 Acceptance will be based on a catalog cut. 17


(April 1, 2019) 23

Storage and Handling 24 Biotic soil amendments in accordance with the above requirements shall be furnished by 25 the manufacturer in pre-packaged, standard unopened containers with weight, name of 26 plant nutrients and manufacturer’s guaranteed statement of analysis clearly marked in 27 accordance with State and Federal laws. Field mixing of BSA components will not be 28 permitted. Containers shall be kept safe in storage protected from weather, excessive 29 temperatures, and construction operations. Products shall be handled in compliance with 30 any instructions or recommendations stated by the manufacturer. Any spills shall be 31 promptly cleaned. 32 33

Installation of Biotic Soil Amendment 34 The Contractor shall comply with the equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions 35 and recommendations. Biotic soil amendment shall be hydraulically applied at the rate of 36 4000 pounds per acre with no more than 2500 pounds applied in any single lift. Lifts shall 37 be applied from opposing directions to soil surface for uniform coverage. If recommended 38 by the BSA manufacturer, seed, tackifier and/or fertilizer shall be added to the slurry as 39 recommended by manufacturer or BSA shall be applied within 48 hours of the seeding 40 operation. A continuous and uniform cover shall be provided to the depth specified by the 41 manufacturer. Thin areas or areas of bare soil will not be allowed, and supplemental biotic 42 soil amendment applied by the Contractor shall be at no additional cost to the Contracting 43 Agency. 44

45 8-02.3(4).GR8 46

Topsoil 47 48 8-02.3(4)A.GR8 49

Topsoil Type A 50 51


8-02.3(4)A.INST1.GR8 1 Section 8-02.3(4)A is supplemented with the following: 2

3 8-02.3(4)A.OPT1.FR8 4

(August 3, 2015) 5 Topsoil Type A shall be placed to a non-compacted depth of *** $$1$$ *** inches. 6 The topsoil shall be thoroughly blended prior to placement. 7 8 The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of 9 independent test results from an accredited laboratory demonstrating the Topsoil 10 Type A meets the requirements of Section 9-14.1(1). The Type 1 Working 11 Drawing shall also include the Request for Approval of Material in accordance 12 with Section 1-06.1(2). 13

14 8-02.3(5).GR8 15

Roadside Seeding, Lawn and Planting Area Preparation 16 17 8-02.3(5).INST1.GR8 18


(August 5, 2013) 22 After the initial planting area weed control, soil placement, grading, and the 23 installation of irrigation lines are completed, and prior to planting, all designated 24 planting areas shall be covered with compost. 25 26 Prior to placement of compost, the application methods shall be approved by the 27 Engineer. 28 29 Compost shall not be placed when a condition exists, such as frozen or water 30 saturated soil that may be detrimental to successful application or soil structure. 31 32 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of five working days prior to the 33 start of compost work. 34 35 Compost shall be uniformly and evenly placed in all designated areas at a depth of 36 *** $$1$$ *** inches. 37

38 8-02.3(5).OPT2.FR8 39

(August 5, 2013) 40 After the initial planting area weed control, soil placement, and grading are 41 completed, and prior to the installation of irrigation lines and planting, all designated 42 planting areas shall be covered with compost. 43 44 Prior to placement and incorporation of compost, the application and incorporation 45 methods shall be approved by the Engineer. 46 47 Compost shall not be placed when a condition exists, such as frozen soil or water 48 saturated soil that may be detrimental to successful application, incorporation, or soil 49 structure. 50 51


The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of five working days prior to the 1 start of compost work. 2 3 Compost shall be uniformly and evenly placed in all designated areas at a depth of 4 *** $$1$$ *** inches. 5 6 After placement of the compost, the Contractor shall incorporate the layer uniformly 7 into the existing soil to a depth of *** $$2$$ *** inches. 8

9 8-02.3(5).OPT3.FR8 10

(August 5, 2013) 11 After initial area weed control, grading, and soil placement are completed, all soil 12 shall be covered with compost. 13 14 Prior to the placement and incorporation of compost, the application and 15 incorporation methods shall be approved by the Engineer. 16 17 Compost shall not be placed when a condition exists, such as frozen or water 18 saturated soil that may be detrimental to successful application, incorporation, or soil 19 structure. 20 21 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of five working days prior to the 22 start of compost work. 23 24 Compost shall be uniformly and evenly placed in all designated areas at a depth of 25 *** $$1$$ *** inches. 26 27 After placement of the compost, the Contractor shall incorporate the layer uniformly 28 into the existing soil to a depth of *** $$2$$ *** inches. 29

30 8-02.3(5).OPT4.GR8 31

(August 4, 2014) 32 Removal of Buried Man-Made Debris 33 The Contractor shall remove buried man-made debris as directed by the Engineer to 34 a maximum depth of two feet. The excavated debris shall be removed from the 35 project site to a disposal facility approved by the Engineer. 36

37 8-02.3(6).GR8 38

Mulch and Amendments 39 40 8-02.3(6)B.GR8 41

Fertilizers 42 43 8-02.3(6)B.INST1.GR8 44


(September 3, 2019) 48 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following amounts 49 of nutrients: 50

51


Total Nitrogen as N - *** $$1$$ *** pounds per acre. 1 2 Available Phosphoric Acid as P2O5 - *** $$2$$ *** pounds per acre. 3


6 *** $$4$$ *** pounds of nitrogen applied per acre shall be derived from 7 isobutylidene diurea (IBDU), cyclo-di-urea (CDU), or a time release, 8 polyurethane coated source with a minimum release time of 6 months. The 9 remainder may be derived from any source. 10 11 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the Engineer 12 before use. 13

14 8-02.3(6)B.OPT2.FR8 15

(September 3, 2019) 16 First Application of Fertilizer 17 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following amounts 18 of nutrients: 19



26 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the Engineer 27 before use. 28

29 Second Application of Fertilizer 30 A second application of fertilizer shall be applied during the period of March 1 to 31 April 15 or November 15 to December 15. In no instance shall the second 32 application of fertilizer occur less than 90 days after the first fertilizer application. 33 34 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following amounts 35 of nutrients: 36


41 Soluble Potash as K20 - *** $$6$$ *** pounds per acre. 42

43 *** $$7$$ *** pounds of nitrogen applied per acre shall be derived from 44 isobutylidene diurea (IBDU), cyclo-di-urea (CDU), or a time release, 45 polyurethane coated source with a minimum release time of 6 months. The 46 remainder may be derived from any source. 47 48 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the Engineer 49 before use. 50


1 8-02.3(6)B.OPT3.GR8 2

(September 3, 2019) 3 Fertilizer shall be a commercially prepared mix of 10-20-20 and shall be applied 4 at the rate of 10 pounds per 1000 square feet. 5

6 8-02.3(6)B.OPT4.FR8 7

(September 3, 2019) 8 Sufficient quantities of fertilizer shall be applied to supply the following amounts 9 of nutrients: 10

11 Total Nitrogen as N – *** $$1$$ *** pounds per acre. 12 13 Sulfur – *** $$2 $$ ***pounds per acre. 14

15 *** $$3$$ *** pounds of nitrogen applied per acre shall be derived from 16 isobutylidene diurea (IBDU), cyclo-di-urea (CDU), or a time release, 17 polyurethane coated source with a minimum release time of 6 months. The 18 remainder may be derived from any source. 19

20 The fertilizer formulation and application rate shall be approved by the Engineer 21 before use. 22

23 8-02.3(8).GR8 24

Planting 25 26 8-02.3(8).INST1.GR8 27


(February 25, 2013) 31 When work requiring disturbance within planting area(s) *** $$1$$ *** is complete, 32 the Contractor shall perform planting work within the next available planting window. 33

34 8-02.3(9).GR8 35

Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching 36 37 8-02.3(9)B.GR8 38

Seeding and Fertilizing 39 40 8-02.3(9)B.INST1.GR8 41


(September 3, 2019) 45 Seed of the following mix, rate, and analysis shall be applied at the rates shown 46 below on all areas requiring ***$$1$$*** seeding within the project: 47 48

Seed by Common Name, 49 (Botanical Name), and Pounds Pure Live Seed 50 “Source Identification” (PLS) Per Acre 51


1 *** $$2$$ $$ 2 3 $$ $$ 4 5 $$ $$ 6 7 Total $$ *** 8 9

Source Identified seed shall be generation four or less. Non-Source Identified 10 seed shall meet or exceed Washington State Department of Agriculture Certified 11 Seed Standards and be from within the appropriate genetic zones of the *** 12 $$3$$ *** Ecoregion(s) as defined by the US Environmental Protection Agency 13 (EPA). 14 15 The seed certification class shall be Certified (blue tag) in accordance with WAC 16 16-302 and meet the following requirements: 17 18


23 The Contractor shall document all Source Identified seed by providing the 24 Association of Official Seed Certifying Agents (AOSCA) yellow seed label for 25 each species in the mix. Site Identification Logs can be supplied for collections 26 where the AOSCA yellow label is not available. 27

28 8-02.3(9)B.OPT2.GR8 29

(September 3, 2019) 30 Grass seed shall be a commercially prepared mix, made up of low growing 31 species which will grow without irrigation at the project location, and accepted 32 by the Engineer. The application rate shall be two pounds per 1000 square feet. 33

34 8-02.3(9)B.OPT3.FR8 35

(September 3, 2019) 36 Seed of the following mix, rate, and analysis shall be applied at the rates shown 37 below on all areas requiring *** $$1$$ *** seeding within the project: 38 39

Seed by Common Name, 40 (Botanical Name), and Pure Live Seed 41 “Source Identification” Pounds (PLS) Per Acre 42 43 *** $$2$$ $$ 44 45 $$ $$ 46 47 $$ $$ 48 49 Total $$ *** 50 51


Seed shall meet or exceed Washington State Department of Agriculture Certified 1 Seed Standards and be from within the *** $$3$$ *** Ecoregion(s) as defined by 2 the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 3 4 The seed certification class shall be Certified (blue tag) in accordance with WAC 5 16-302 and meet the following requirements: 6 7


12 8-02.3(11).GR8 13

Mulch 14 15 8-02.3(11).INST1.GR8 16


(April 2, 2012) 20 Bark mulch or wood chip mulch shall be placed to a uniform non-compacted depth 21 of *** $$1$$ *** over all planting areas. 22 23 Bark or wood chip mulch shall not be placed in areas of standing or flowing water. 24

25 8-02.3(11)A.GR8 26

Mulch for Seeding Areas 27 28 8-02.3(11)A.INST1.GR8 29

Section 8-02.3(11)A is supplemented with the following: 30 31 8-02.3(11)A.OPT1.FR8 32

(September 3, 2019) 33 *** $$1$$ *** shall be applied at a rate of *** $$2$$ *** pounds per acre with no 34 more than *** $$3$$ *** pounds per acre applied in a single lift. 35

36 8-02.3(13).GR8 37

Plant Establishment 38 39 8-02.3(13).INST1.GR8 40


(January 5, 2015) 44 Subsequent year plant establishment periods shall begin immediately at the 45 completion of the preceding year’s plant establishment period. Each subsequent 46 year plant establishment period shall be 1 full calendar year in duration. 47 48 During the plant establishment period(s) after first year plant establishment, the 49 Contractor shall perform all Work necessary for the continued healthy and vigorous 50 growth of all plant material as directed by the Engineer. 51


1 8-02.4.GR8 2


(January 5, 2015) 9 Topsoil, mulch and soil amendments will be measured by the square yard along the grade 10 and slope of the area covered after application. 11 12 Compost will be measured by the square yard along the grade and slope of the area 13 covered after application. 14

15 8-02.4.OPT2.GR8 16

(April 1, 2019) 17 Biotic Soil Amendment will be measured by the acre along the grade and slope of the 18 area covered immediately after application. 19

20 8-02.5.GR8 21

Payment 22 23 8-02.5.INST1.GR8 24 Section 8-02.5 is supplemented with the following: 25 26 8-02.5.OPT1.GR8 27

(January 5, 2015) 28 “Plant Establishment ___ Year”, will be paid in accordance with Section 1-09.6. 29

30 8-02.5.OPT2.GR8 31

(August 4, 2014September 7, 2021) 32 “Removal of Buried Man-Made Previously Fabricated Debris” will be paid for by force 33 account as specified in Section 1-09.6. The payment for removal of buried man-made 34 debris shall be full compensation for all costs for the specified Work to include removing, 35 loading, hauling, and all associated disposal costs. 36 37 For the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting Agency 38 has entered an amount in the proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total Bid. 39

40 8-02.5.OPT3.GR8 41

(January 5, 2015) 42 “Fine Compost ”, per square yard. 43 44 “Medium Compost”, per square yard. 45 46 “Coarse Compost”, per square yard. 47 48 The unit Contract price per square yard for “Fine Compost”, or “Medium Compost” or 49 “Coarse Compost” shall be full pay for furnishing and spreading the compost onto the 50 existing soil. 51


1 “Soil Amendment”, per square yard. 2 3 The unit Contract price per square yard for “Soil Amendment” shall be full pay for 4 furnishing and incorporating the soil amendment into the existing soil. 5 6 “Bark or Wood Chip Mulch”, per square yard. 7 8 The unit Contract price per square yard for “Bark or Wood Chip Mulch” shall be full pay 9 for furnishing and spreading the mulch onto the existing soil. 10 11 “Topsoil Type ____”, per square yard. 12 13 The unit Contract price per square yard for “Topsoil Type ____” shall be full pay for all 14 costs for the specified Work. 15

16 8-02.5.OPT4.FR8 17

(April 1, 2019) 18 “Biotic Soil Amendment”, per acre. 19 20 The unit Contract price per acre for “Biotic Soil Amendment” shall be full pay to perform 21 the Work as specified. When seed is mixed into, and applied with the biotic soil 22 amendment, payment for seed will be made under the Bid item *** $$1$$ ***. 23

24 8-02.5.INST2.GR8 25 The Bid item “Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching”, per acre in Section 8-02.5 is revised to read: 26 27 8-02.5.OPT5.GR8 28

(February 25, 2021) 29 “Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching”, per acre or per square yard. 30

31

Pag

e In

tent

iona

lly L

eft B

lank


8-23.GR8 1

Temporary Pavement Markings 2 3 8-23.3.GR8 4


Pavement Marking Application 8 9 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5).GR8 10

Temporary Pavement Marking Tape 11 12 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(1)).GR8 13

Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Short Duration (Removable) 14 Section 9-34.5(1), including title, is revised to read: 15

16 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(1)).OPT1.GR8 17

(February 25, 2021) 18 Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Short Duration 19 Temporary pavement marking tape for short duration (usage is for up to 20 two months) shall conform to ASTM D4592 Type II except that black tape, 21 black mask tape and the black portion of the contrast tape, shall be non-22 reflective. 23

24 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(2)).GR8 25

Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Long Duration (Non-Removable) 26 Section 9-34.5(2), including title, is revised to read: 27

28 8-23.3(4)(9-34.5(2)).OPT1.GR8 29

(February 25, 2021) 30 Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Long Duration 31 Temporary pavement marking tape for long duration (usage is for greater 32 than two months and less than one year) shall conform to ASTM D4592 33 Type I. Temporary pavement marking tape for long duration, except for 34 black tape, shall have a minimum initial coefficient of retroreflective 35 luminance of 200 mcd*m-2*lx-1 when measured in accordance with ASTM 36 E2832. Black tape, black mask tape and the black portion of the contrast 37 tape, shall be non-reflective. 38

39